Documentos de Académico
Documentos de Profesional
Documentos de Cultura
PETROPERU, S.A.;
PROJECT:
CONTRAC T.R PROJECT Nº:
MODERNIZACION REFINERIA de TALARA
02070
PURCHARSE ORDER No. EQUIPMENTS / TAGS No.
020701213-P241 0.48kV LV POWER CENTERS
(NE 1000)
DOCUMENT CODE: DOCUMENT No.
MAN-0001
V-020701213-P241-0004-B
DATE: 10/03/2016
VENDOR IDENTIFICATION
DOCUMENT TITLE
INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2
GE Energy Management
Industrial Solutions
SEN Plus
Sistemas de armarios
de baja tensión
El corazón de su negocio
Manual de usuario
Apéndice 15
g imagination at work
917182_15 3
La política de GE Energy es de mejor continua. Se
reserva el derecho para modificar el diseño o
detalles estructurales de los productos en
cualquier momento y sin aviso.
Julio, 2014
GE Energy Management
Industrial Solutions
4
Contenido
1. Notas de seguridad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2. Instalación de una columna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.1 Almacenamiento de columnas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.2 Transporte de una columna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.3 Elevación de un interruptor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.4 Espacio para la instalación de una columna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.5 Montaje de una columna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.6 Unión del zocalo a la columna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.7 Unión de dos columnas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.8 Conexión del embarrado principal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
2.9 Pares de apriete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.9.1 Pares de apriete para conexiones mecánicas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.9.2 Pares de apriete para conexiones eléctricas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3. Centros de fuerza. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.1 Introducción . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.2 Segmentos funcionales de la columna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.3 Tabla de secciones de cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.4 Conexión de cables en la columna con dos interruptores . . . . . . . . . . 29
4. Pruebas finales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
5. Mantenimiento. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5.1 Uso de herramientas de mano . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
6. Final de la vida útil de una columna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
7. Contactos de servicio post venta. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
5
6
1. Notas de seguridad
Etiquetas ADVERTENCIA
ADVERTENCIA
Los avisos de advertencia son utilizados para enfatizar voltajes y corrientes
peligrosas o bien otros elementos presentes en dicho equipo o asociados a
su uso que pudieran causar daño personal.
Los avisos de advertencia también se utilizan en los casos en que la falta
de atención, de equipamiento o de conocimientos, pudieran causar daño
personal o al equipo.
PRECAUCIÓN
PRECAUCIÓN
NOTA
g
7 3
Notas generales Describir no forma parte del alcance de este documento.
Este manual contiene procedimientos para la recepción, manipulación,
almacenamiento, operación y mantenimiento de SEN Plus - Armarios de BT.
SEN Plus está diseñado para simplificar la construcción de armarios de baja
tensión. Las aplicaciones más comunes para estos equipos son:
• Sanidad – Hospitales, equipamiento médico.
• Transporte – Ferrocarriles, aeropuertos, túneles.
• Comercial- Bancos, oficinas y edificios comerciales, hoteles,
Telecomunicaciones
• Aguas – Plantas desoladoras, estaciones depuradoras.
• Energías renovables – Viento, Solar, Gas, Plantas incineradoras
• Petroleo y Gas – En plantas dentro y fuera del mar.
Los armarios de baja tensión SEN Plus descritos en este documento, están
ensayados según las normas IEC 60439-1 y IEC 61439-2, para el uso de la
amplia gama de aparatos eléctricos de GE.
g
4 8
Además del Manual de Operación y Mantenimiento, se debe cumplir e
instruir a todos los operarios con la legislación aplicable y normativas
obligatorias con respecto a la prevención de accidentes y protección del
medio ambiente.
Suplemento del Manual de uso y mantenimiento con las instrucciones
adicionales, incluidas las obligaciones de supervisión y presentación de
informes para reflejar procedimientos específicos, por ejemplo, con
respecto a la organización del trabajo, procedimientos de trabajo.
Utilice equipo de protección personal cuando sea necesario o si es requerido
por las normas.
Observe todas las instrucciones de seguridad y advertencias a los equipos
eléctricos!
Asegurarse de que todos los avisos de seguridad y peligro en los equipos
eléctricos permanezcan legibles.
En caso de fallos relevantes para la seguridad de los equipos eléctricos o
cambios en el comportamiento del equipo eléctrico durante la operación,
detenga inmediatamente el equipo eléctrico e informe la anomalía al
personal autorizado!
Nunca haga modificaciones o transformaciones que puedan afectar a la
seguridad sin la aprobación de fabricante original!
No haga ninguna modificación a los programas (software) en los sistemas de
control programables sin la aprobación de fabricante original!
Observar los plazos estipulados o los períodos dados en el Manual de uso y
mantenimiento para controles de inspecciones.
Asegúrese de que las herramientas y los equipos apropiados están
disponibles para realizar trabajos de mantenimiento.
Proporcionar información sobre la ubicación de extintores de incendio.
Familiarícese con las alarmas de incendio y extintores.
Utilice solamente fusibles con el amperaje especificado. Apague la máquina
inmediatamente en caso de problemas en el sistema eléctrico.
Los trabajos en equipos eléctricos deben ser llevados a cabo por electricistas
o por operarios formados bajo la dirección y supervisión de un electricista
acorde a las normas de la ingeniería eléctrica.
Si determinados componentes de máquinas o de la planta, están siendo
inspeccionados, revisados o reparados, estos deben ser desconectados de la
fuente de alimentación. En primer lugar, comprobando que las partes
aisladas están libres de tensión, seguidamente conectándolas a tierra y
cortocircuitándolas y finalmente aislándolas de las partes activas.
El equipo eléctrico de la planta debe ser inspeccionado y revisado a
regularmente.
Defectos como conexiones flojas o cables quemados deben ser corregidos
inmediatamente!
Si fuera necesario trabajar en partes electrificadas, debe haber una segunda
persona que pueda activar el interruptor de parada de emergencia o un
interruptor principal en caso de emergencia. Asegurar el área de trabajo
utilizando una cadena de seguridad de color rojo y blanco y una señal de
peligro. Sólo utilice herramientas aisladas.
Cuando se trabaja en los módulos de alto voltaje, primeramente se debe
aislar la tensión, a continuación conectar el cable a tierra y finalmente
cortocircuitar los componentes.
g
9 5
2. Instalación de una columna
2.1. Almacenamiento de columnas
Introducción Esta sección describe los factores que deben tenerse en cuenta para el
almacenamiento de una columna
g
6 10
2.2. Transporte de una columna
Introducción Esta sección describe la forma correcta para el transporte de una columna.
¿Cómo debe Una sección vertical debe desplazarse en posición erguida. La sección puede
desplazarse estar suspendida o apoyada.
una sección?
Transporte de secciones de
alimentación con embarrados 1,5 -
SMB-14 y superiores
Transporte de otras secciones 2 2000
Medidas para Deben tomarse las siguientes medidas para transportar un centro de control.
transportar un • Los módulos de los centros de control de motores permanecen dentro
centro de control
de la columna durante el transporte.
ADVERTENCIA
• Los módulos enchufables deben bloquearse (véase la sección “Bloquear
el módulo en el compartimiento”).
Medidas para el Deben tomarse las siguientes medidas para el transporte de columnas con
transporte EntelliGuard™ G.
• El interruptor en ejecución fija modelo EntelliGuard™ G, para todos los
tamaños, permanece dentro de la columna durante el transporte.
ADVERTENCIA • El interruptor en ejecución extraíble modelo EntelliGuard™ G tamaño
1, permanece dentro de la columna durante el transporte.
• El interruptor en ejecución extraíble modelo EntelliGuard™ G tamaño 2
y 3 se enviará por separado.
• El interuptor modelo EntelliGuard™ G para todos los tamaños debe estar
en posición “OFF”.
g
11 7
Preparación En la tabla siguiente se indican las preparaciones para el transporte.
para el
transporte
Paso 1 Si el transporte se
...
realiza...
g
8 12
Transporte de * Las columnas serán atornilladas con un sistema metálico de transporte
una columna en la parte inferior.
Las siguientes ilustraciones muestran las formas sugeridas para el
transporte de una columna. La carga será uniformemente repartida:
• Con grúa
Columna con interruptor modelo EntelliGuard™ G tamaño 3, utilizar
cuatro tornillos en la parte superior M12 54x53 C15 KIT# 293344
g
13 9
2.3. Elevación de un interruptor
Introducción Esta sección describe la manera correcta de levantar un interruptor.
g
10 14
Medidas para la Deben seguirse las siguientes medidas para el transporte de un interruptor
elevación de un modelo EntelliGuard™ G.
interruptor • Para el interruptor tipo EntelliGuard™ G Tamaño 1, 2 y 3 se pueden
atar eslingas a las horquillas de una carretilla elevadora.
• Para más detalles del interruptor modelo EntelliGuard™ G consultar IOM
manual DEH41358
• A continuación se indica el centro de gravedad de EntelliGuard™ G.
Localización
Peso aprox. del cdg
Descripción
Aprox.
X Y Z
- - [kg] [mm] [mm] [mm]
Tamaño-3-3P 155 351 218 262
Tamaño -3-4P 200 466 213 261
Tamaño -2-3P 72 202 217 222
Tamaño -2-4P 90 257 216 228
g
15 11
2.4. Espacio para la instalación de una columna
600/800/
400-1200 2200 500 + Y - - - X Z
1000/1200
g
12 16
2.5. Montaje de una columna
Principio La columna se monta sobre una estructura base bien alineada o en una
estructura de suelo falso.
g
17 13
Montaje de En la ilustración siguiente se muestra el esquema de montaje con los
la columna componentes necesarios para una columna.
1. Bancada
2. Fijación de la columna
3. Bastidor de la columna
4. Tornillo de fijación para M10
5. Placas de ajuste
6. Parte superior de material compuesto
7. Parte superior de hormigón
8. Tornillo de ensamblaje de columna M12x50
g
14 18
2.6. Unión del zócalo a la columna
Procedimiento Se puede agregar un marco básico a la columna para dar más espacio para
el cableado final.
g
19 15
Paso 2a Coloque un casquillo entre el zócalo y la estructura del cubículo.
g
16 20
2.7. Unión de dos columnas
Paso 3 Coloque los dos paneles en posición contigua, Atornille el segundo perno dentro
del perno hexagonal.
g
21 17
2.8. Conexión del sistema de embarrado principal
Introducción En esta sección se describe cómo conectar los embarrados de dos columnas.
g
18 22
Procedimiento A continuación se describe cómo conectar el sistema de embarrado principal.
Paso 1 Afloje los pernos de fijación del sistema de embarrado sin eclisas.
Paso 2 Junte ambas columnas. La eclisa se desplaza entre las dos capas de embarrado.
PRECAUCIÓN
g
23 19
2.9. Pares de apriete
2.9.1. Pares de apriete para conexiones mecánicas
Introducción En esta sección se detallan todos los pares de apriete para las conexiones de
pernos y tornillos en la columna.
¿Dónde aplica? Los pares se aplicarán en todas las uniones atornilladas en SEN Plus.
Clases de Los valores indicados corresponden a las clases 5.8 a 8.8 para tornillos y
los tornillos tuercas sin engrasar.
Pares de apriete
para tornillos de En la tabla siguiente se indican los pares de apriete para tornillos de cabeza
cabeza hexagonal hexagonal.
M·10 26 18,5 41 31
M 12 41 32 70 54
M 16 100 77 170 123
g
20 24
Pares de La tabla siguiente da un estudio de los pares de apriete para tornillos
apriete para autorroscantes.
tornillos Tornillos autorroscantes
autorroscantes
Tamaño de Par Pares mínimos
tornillo nominal para el
(+10%) mantenimiento
[Nm] [Nm]
M5 7 2,3
M6 15 3,8
M8 20 9,2
Pares de apriete La tabla siguiente da un estudio de los pares de apriete para tornillos
para tornillos de autorroscantes.
plastite
Tornillos de Plastite
Tamaño de Par
tornillo nomial
(+10%)
- [Nm]
M3 0,1
M5 0,5
M6 0,8
g
25 21
2.9.2. Pares de apriete para conexiones eléctricas
¿Dónde se aplican? Los pares de apriete deben aplicarse a todas las juntas eléctricas atornilladas
de SEN Plus.
Clases de Los valores indicados corresponden a las clases de propiedad 5.8 a 8.8 para
propiedad tornillos y tuercas sin engrasar.
Par de apriete En la tabla siguiente se indican los valores para terminales eléctricos.
para terminales
Terminals general
Clase 5.8 Clase 8.8
Tamaño Par Par apriete nominal Par apriete
nominal min. para torques min. para
(+10%) mantenim. (+10%) mantenim.
- [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm]
4 < M3 0,5 0,43 - -
M3 1 0,7 - -
M 3,5 1,1 0,9 - -
M4 1,5 1,3 - -
M5 3 2,5 - -
M6 6 4 8 6
M8 14 10 20 14
M 10 26 20 40 (40)* 26 (30)*
M 12 40 36 70 (70)* 45 (50)*
M 16 60 50 140 110
g
22 26
3. Centros de fuerza
3.1. Introducción
Introducción Este capítulo analiza brevemente el principio general de los centros de fuerza.
Zona de
Embarrado La zona de embarrado se encuentra en la parte trasera de la columna y
contiene el sistema de embarrado horizontal y vertical principal. Láminas de
separación internas dividen la zona de embarrado de la zona de equipos y
protegen al operador contra un contacto accidental con las partes bajo
tensión peligrosas. Pueden suministrarse láminas de separación adicionales
para separar la zona de equipos de la zona de cables.
Zona de cables La zona de cables está diseñada para realizar un cableado rápido y fácil.
g
27 23
3.2. Segmentos funcionales de la columna
g
24 28
• La acometida, con un interruptor de bastidor tipo EntelliGuard™ G
tamaño 3.
g
29 25
• La salida se alimentación con interruptores EntelliGuard™ G Tamaño 1
y2
Parte Función
1 Zona de embarrado
2a Zona de equipos
2b Zona de equipos
3 Zona de cables
g
26 30
3.3. Tabla de secciones de cables
g
31 27
EntelliGuard™G En la tabla siguiente se detallan las secciones transversales conectables
para un interruptor de bastidor abierto tipo EntelliGuard™ G.
g
28 32
3.4. Conexión de cables en la columna con dos interruptores
Introducción Esta sección describe la conexión de cables en columnas con dos interruptores.
Principio La conexión del cable en columna con dos interruptores. Los carriles de
neutro y tierra están montados en la misma posición como en la columna
estándar con un interruptor.
g
33 29
4. Pruebas finales
Introducción Esta sección da una descripción de las pruebas que deben realizarse antes
de poner el conjunto en funcionamiento.
g
30 34
5. Mantenimiento
Introducción Esta sección contiene una lista de verificación para la inspección.
Intervalo de Debe realizarse una inspección visual, así como un control de las funciones
inspección mecánicas (por ejemplo, los interbloqueos), cada 4 años como mínimo.
Se recomienda un intervalo <= 1 año.
g
35 31
# Inspección Acción correctiva
comprobación de la correcta
11 protección de los componentes cambiar los fusibles si es necesario
eléctricos y los cables
g
32 36
5.1 Uso de herramientas de mano
Introducción Generalmente el uso de herramientas de mano se limitará a aquellas
herramientas que son comunes y fácilmente disponibles en el mercado. La
lista siguiente describe la solución mínima.
• Llaves planas de tamaños 7,8,10,13,16,18 y 24 :-Usado para
retiro/apriete de miembros estructurales y conexión a embarrado
• Tuerca Inglesa y métrica con cabeza hexagonal y Phillips.
• Alicates: Utilizado para la eliminación de contactos primarios durante
la inspección y mantenimiento
• Destornillador - 8 mm: utilizado para la extracción del panel frontal, etc.
• Llave Allen hexagonal - 5 mm A / F: usado para el retiro de los
disipadores de arco durante la inspección y mantenimiento.
• Galgas métricas: Utilizado para la comprobación y ajuste.
• Destornillador plano: Se utiliza para el retiro de componentes eléctricos
y mecánicos.
g
37 33
6. Final de la vida útil de una columna
g
34 38
Reciclaje del Reciclaje del material utilizado para una columna de 4000A, 4 polos, con
material interruptor tipo EntelliGuard™ G Tamaño 2.
utilizado para
una columna Material Peso Reciclaje
- [kg] -
Aleaciones de metal y metales
Acero 359 Si (100%)
Cobre y aleaciones básicas de cobre 200 Si (95%)
Aluminio y aleaciones básicas de aluminio 3 Si (95%)
Plástico 2 No reciclable
s
Compuestos 10 No reciclable
Otros materiales 1 No reciclable
Interruptor Peso
- [kg]
EntelliGuard™ G tam. 2,
275
4000A, 4 polos
g
39 35
7. Contactos de servicio postventa
g
36 40
GE Energy Management
Industrial Solutions
www.gepowercontrols.com
g imagination at work
41 917182_15_Rev.01
GE Energy
Industrial Solutions
DEH-41 358
EntelliGuard™ G
Power Circuit Breaker
Disjuntor Aberto
Interruptor Automático de Bastidor
Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual
Manual de Instalação, Operação e Manutenção
Manual de instalación, funcionamiento y mantenimiento
English
GE imagination at work Português
Español
42
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
Read this manual and please retain for Leia este manual e por favor guarde-o Lea este manual y consérvelo para su
future use. para uso futuro. futura consulta.
43
INTRO EntelliGuard G
1.0 GENERAL INFORMATION 1.0 INFORMAÇÃO GERAL 1.0 INFORMACIÓN GENERAL 1.0
Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual Manual de Instalação, Operação e Manutenção Manual de instalación, funcionamiento y
mantenimiento
Interruptor automático de bastidor
EntelliGuard G Power Circuit Breaker EntelliGuard G Disjuntor Aberto EntelliGuard G
HAZARD CATEGORIES CATEGORIAS DE PERIGO CATEGORÍAS DE RIESGOS
The following important highlighted information A informação importante seguinte destacada La siguiente información importante resaltada
appears throughout this document to warn of aparece ao longo deste documento para alertar aparece en todo este documento para advertir
potential hazards or to call attention to sobre riscos potenciais ou para chamar a de riesgos potenciales o para llamar la atención
information that clarifies a procedure. atenção para as informações que especificão del usuario acerca de determinada información
Carefully read all instructions and become um determinado procedimento. que sirve para aclarar un procedimiento.
HINTS
familiar with the devices before trying to install, Leia atentamente todas as instruções e para se Lea cuidadosamente todas las instrucciones y
operate, service or maintain this equipment. familiarizar com os dispositivos antes de tentar familiarícese con los dispositivos antes de
instalar, operar, efectuar um serviço ou instalar, manejar, reparar o efectuar el
manutenção deste equipamento. mantenimiento del equipo.
CAUTION: Failure to comply with these ATENÇÃO: O não cumprimento destas PRECAUCIÓN: El incumplimiento de estas
instructions may result in product damage. instruções pode resultar em danos ao produto. instrucciones puede producir daños en el
producto.
NOTICE: An aid meant to assist the user in AVISO: Uma ajuda destinada a auxiliar o AVISO: Ayuda dirigida a facilitar la realización
performing the set task. Please retain for future utilizador na execução da tarefa definida. Por de la tarea descrita por parte del usuario.
use. favor, guarde para uso futuro. Consérvelo para futura referencia.
GE Energy assumes no obligation of notice to GE Energy não assume qualquer obrigação de GE Energy no asume ninguna obligación de
holders of this document with respect to notificação aos titulares deste documento no aviso con los poseedores de este documento en
changes subsequently made. que diz respeito às alterações posteriormente relación con los cambios efectuados a posteriori.
introduzidas.
GE Energy makes no representation or warranty, GE Energy não faz nenhuma representação ou GE Energy no realiza ninguna concesión ni
expressed, implied, or statutory, with respect to, garantia expressa, implícita, ou estatutária, com garantía, expresa, implícita o regulatoria, con
and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, relação a, e não assume nenhuma respecto a la precisión, completitud, suficiencia
completeness, sufficiency, or usefulness of the responsabilidade pela precisão, complitude, o utilidad de la información del documento, ni
information contained herein. suficiência, ou utilidade das informações aqui asume responsabilidad alguna al respecto.
contidas.
No warrantees of merchantability or fitness for No se aplica ninguna garantía de
purpose shall apply. Nenhuma garantia de comerciabilidade ou comerciabilidad o idoneidad para un fin.
adequação a um fim é aplicável.
Contact your local sales office if further Póngase en contacto con la oficina comercial de
information is required concerning any aspect of Contacte seu representante local de vendas, se su zona si requiere más información acerca de
EntelliGuard G circuit breaker operation or são necessárias informações complementares cualquier aspecto del funcionamiento o el
maintenance. sobre qualquer aspecto do funcionamento do mantenimiento del interruptor automático
disjuntor EntelliGuard G ou para manutenção. EntelliGuard G.
1.0-01
44
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
Product Serial & Catalogue Number Número de Série do Produto e Número de Número de serie y referencia de los
Measurement Units Catálogo productos
Unidades de Medida Unidades de medición
1.1.1 Short Product Description 1.1.1 Descrição resumida do produto 1.1.1 Breve descripción del producto
1.1.2 Features and Characteristics 1.1.2 Características 1.1.2 Funciones y características
1.1.3 Storage 1.1.3 Armazenamento 1.1.3 Almacenamiento
1.1.4 Rating label description 1.1.4 Descrição do rotulo de calibre 1.1.4 Descripción de los datos de la etiqueta
CONTENT
1.1.5 Tools Needed for Installation 1.1.5 Ferramentas necessárias para instalação delantera
1.1.5 Herramientas necesarias para la
instalación
-------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------
1.2 - PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS 1.2 - ESPECIFICAÇÕES DO PRODUTO 1.2 - ESPECIFICACIONES DEL PRODUCTO
- Tables - Tabelas - Tablas
-------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------
1.3 - INSTALLATION 1.3 - INSTALAÇÃO 1.3 - INSTALACIÓN
1.3.1 Lifting and Mounting 1.3.1 Levantamento e montagem 1.3.1 Elevación y montaje
Using Lifting Beams Carro de elevação e Adaptador Uso de adaptadores de elevación
1.3.2 Fixed-Pattern Circuit Breaker 1.3.2 Disjuntor de Instalação Fixa 1.3.2 Interruptor automático con ejecución fija
Installation Instalação Instalación
1.3.3 Drawout Pattern Circuit Breaker 1.3.3 Disjuntor de Instalação Extraível 1.3.3 Interruptor automático con ejecución
Installation Instalação seccionable
Removal from Cassette Retirar do Berço Instalación, Extracción de la cuna
Mounting in Cassette Montagem no Berço Montaje en la cuna
1.3.4 Standard Bus connection 1.3.4 Ligações de Tomadas Standard 1.3.4 Conexionado Tomas estándar
of Fixed AND/OR Drawout pattern. de execução Fixa E/OU Extraível. para ejecución Fija Y/O Seccionable
1.3.5 Secondary Disconnect Terminal Blocks 1.3.5 Régua de Bornes Secundários 1.3.5 Regleteros de bornas
Location Localização Ubicación
Use Uso Uso
Table -- General schematics Tabela – Esquemas gerais Tabla -- Esquemas generales
Table -- Definition of connected devices Tabela – Definição dos dispositivos Tabla -- Definición de los dispositivos
to Block A and Block B conectados ao Bloco A e Bloco B conectados al Regletero A y al Regletero B
1.4.1 Charging of Main Springs 1.4.1 Carregamento da Molas Principais 1.4.1 Carga de los muelles principales
Manually Manualmente Manual
Electrically Electricamente Eléctrica
1.4.2 Sequence of breaker operation 1.4.2 Sequência de operação do disjuntor 1.4.2 Secuencia de funcionamiento del
interruptor
1.4.3 Circuit breaker closing operation 1.4.3 Operação de fecho do disjuntor 1.4.3 Operación de cierre del interruptor
1.4.4 Circuit breaker opening operation 1.4.4 Operação de abertura do disjuntor automático
1.4.4 Operación de apertura del interruptor
1.4.5 Circuit breaker Withdrawal 1.4.5 Retirada do disjuntor extraível automático
1.4.5 Extracción del interruptor automático
1.4.6 Circuit breaker Insertion/Cassette 1.4.6 Inserção do disjuntor no berço 1.4.6 Inserción/cuna del interruptor
automático
1.4.7 Sequence of operation cassette 1.4.7 Sequência de operações no berço 1.4.7 Secuencia de operación en la cuna
-------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------
1.0-02
45
INTRO EntelliGuard G
3.1 Breaker front Fascia 3.1 Painel frontal do disjuntor 3.1 Panel frontal del interruptor automático
- Breaker Security Padlocking - Bloqueio por cadeado - Enclavamiento del interruptor por Candado
- Breaker Security Keylocking - Bloqueio por fechadura - Enclavamiento del interruptor por
- Pushbutton Padlocking - Bloqueio de botões cerradura
- Enclavamiento de pulsadores
3.2 Drawout Breaker Cassette 3.2 Berço do Disjuntor Extraível 3.2 Cuna
- Shutter Security Padlocking - Segurança do obturador por cadeado - Enclavamiento por candado de las
- Racking handle access Padlocking - Bloqueio de acesso à manivela de extracção pantallas de aislamiento
CONTENT
- Support Slides Padlocking - Bloqueio das calhas de suporte - Enclavamiento por candado del acceso a la
- Cassette Security Keylocking - Fechadura de segurança do berço manivela para maniobra
- Standard Drawout Breaker Interlock - Encravamento standard disjuntor extraível - Enclavamientos de rieles/guías
- Mis insertion device (Interlock) - Prevenção de má inserção (Encravamento) - Enclavamiento de puerta
- Door interlock - Encravamento de porta - Enclavamientos por cerradura
3.2.1 Shutter force open feature 3.2.1 Funcionalidade de abertura forçado do - Traba de calibre
3.2.2 Isolation Shutter Locking obturador 3.2.1 Función de apertura forzada de las
3.2.2 Bloqueio do obturador de isolamento pantallas
3.3 Interlocking of Multiple Breakers 3.3 Encravamento entre disjuntores 3.2.2 Enclavamiento pantallas aislantes
- 1 of 2 breaker interlock - Encravamento 1 de 2 disjuntores 3.3 Enclavamientos mecánicos entre
- 1 of 3 breaker interlock - Encravamento 1 de 3 disjuntores interruptores
- 2 of 3 breaker interlock - Encravamento 2 de 3 disjuntores - Enclavamiento 1 de 2
- 2 of 3 breaker interlock with priority - Encravamento 2 de 3 disjuntores com - Enclavamiento 1 de 3
prioridade - Enclavamiento 2 de 3
- Enclavamiento 2 de 3 con prioridad
3.4 Network Interlock 3.4 Encravamento de rede 3.4 Enclavamiento de red
3.5 Tables Locking options 3.5 Tabelas de opções de bloqueio 3.5 Opciones enclavamiento. Tablas
-------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------
4.0 - ACCESSORIES DESCRIPTION 4.0 – DESCRIÇÃO DOS ACESSÓRIOS 4.0 - DESCRIPCIÓN DE LOS ACCESORIOS
General Information Informação Geral Información general
4.1 Releases / Coils 4.1 Disparos / Bobinas 4.1 Bobinas de disparo / Bobinas
4.2 Electrical Charging Motor 4.2 Motor de carregamento eléctrico 4.2 Mando eléctrico
4.3 Contacts 4.3 Contactos 4.3 Contactos
4.4 Installation parts 4.4 Peças de instalação 4.4 Instalación
4.5 Other Accessories 4.5 Acessórios 4.5 Accesorios
4.6 Spare parts 4.6 Peças de substituição 4.6 Recambios
6.1 Catalogue number description 6.1 Descrição da referência 6.1 Referencias de catálogo
6.2 Dimension 6.2 Dimensões 6.2 Dimensiones
6.3 Service 6.3 Serviço 6.3 Servicio
1.0-03
46
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
1.1.1 Short Product Description 1.1.1 Descrição Genérica do Produto 1.1.1 Breve descripción del producto
1.1.2 Features and Characteristics 1.1.2 Especificações e Características 1.1.2 Funciones y características
1.1.3 Storage 1.1.3 Armazenamento 1.1.3 Almacenamiento
1.1.4 Rating label description 1.1.4 Descrição do rótulo de calibre 1.1.4 Descripción de los datos de la etiqueta
1.1.5 Tools Needed for Installation 1.1.5 Ferramentas necessárias para a delantera
instalação 1.1.5 Herramientas necesarias para la instalación
Fig. 1.0: EntelliGuard G Front View Fig. 1.0: Vista Frontal EntelliGuard G Fig. 1.0: Vista frontal de EntelliGuard G
A) Accessory Indicator A) Indicador de Acessório A) Indicadores de accesorios instalados
B) Charging Handle B) Punho de Carga B) Mando de carga manual
C) Electrical ON (Close) C) Fecho Eléctrico (ON) C) Cierre eléctrico
D) Manual ON (Close) D) Fecho Manual (ON) D) Pulsador de cierre manual
E) Closing Spring Discharge Button E) Botão de descarga da mola de fecho E) Botón de descarga de los muelles de cierre
F) ON/OFF Pushbutton Status F) Estado dos Botões ON/OFF F) Estado de los pulsadores de cierre/apertura
G) ON/OFF Status Indicator G) Indicador de Estado ON/OFF G) Indicador de estado de abierto/cerrado
H) Spring Charge Status H) Estado de Carga da Mola H) Indicador de estado de carga de muelles
I) Breaker Rating I) Calibre do Aparelho I) Valores nominales del interruptor
OPERATION
Q A
note notas | notas
B
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M
G
L Global Catalogue Number
F Referência Global de Catálogo
Refrencia global de catálogo Serial Number
Número de série
K H Número de serie
J I
1.1-00
47
BREAKER EntelliGuard G
INTRO
Quality Assurance Garantia de Qualidade Control de calidad
All EntelliGuard G circuit breakers have been Todos os disjuntores EntelliGuard G foram Todos los interruptores automáticos EntelliGuard
designed and manufactured to the highest concebidos e fabricados segundo os mais altos G están diseñados y fabricados siguiendo los
technical standards. padrões técnicos. estándares técnicos más elevados.
GE uses strict procedures ensuring that the A GE utiliza procedimentos rigorosos garantindo GE utiliza procedimientos estrictos que aseguran
mentioned technical standards are met whilst que as normas técnicas referidas sejam el cumplimiento de los estándares técnicos
maintaining a first class product quality. satisfeitas, mantendo uma qualidade de produto mencionados, manteniendo una calidad de
de primeira classe. primer nivel en sus productos.
Options Check Sheet
Each circuit breaker comes with an options Folha de Verificação de Opções Hoja de verificación de opciones
check sheet that lists all optional features and Cada disjuntor vem com uma folha de Cada interruptor automático incluye una hoja de
accessories included in the circuit breaker, verificação de opções que lista todos os verificación de opciones donde se enumeran
cassette and trip unit (if ordered) dispositivos opcionais e acessórios incluídos no todas las funciones y accesorios opcionales que
disjuntor, berço e unidade de disparo (se incorpora el interruptor, la cuna y la unidad de
Catalogue number description encomendada) protección (si se han encargado).
see Appendix Descrição da referência Descripción de la referencia de catálogo
ver APENDICE consulte el Apéndice
Product Serial & Catalogue Number Número de serie y referencia de los productos
When communicating with GE on any aspect of Número de série do produto e Referencia Cuando se ponga en contacto con GE en
this device please mention the serial number & Ao comunicar com a GE sobre qualquer aspecto relación con cualquier aspecto de este
the global catalogue number. deste aparelho, favor mencionar o número de dispositivo, indique el número de serie y la
The serial number is unique for each device, série e referência. referencia global.
whilst the catalogue number provides all O número de série é único para cada aparelho, Cada dispositivo tiene un número de serie único,
technical and configuration data. enquanto a referencia fornece todos os dados mientras que la referencia revela todos los datos
técnicos e de configuração. técnicos y de configuración.
These codes can be found on the front labels of Estes códigos podem ser encontrados nos Estos códigos se pueden encontrar en las
the device as indicated on page 1.1-00 . rótulos da frente do dispositivo, como indicado etiquetas frontales del dispositivo, tal y como se
na página 1.1-00. indica en la página 1.1-00.
1.1.1 Short Product description 1.1.1 Descrição Genérica do Produto 1.1.1 Breve descripción del producto
The EntelliGuard G Power Circuit breaker is an Air O EntelliGuard G é um Disjuntor Aberto El Interruptor automático de bastidor
Circuit Breaker designed to meet the Global projectado para atender aos requisitos Globais EntelliGuard G es un interruptor automático de
ANSI, UL and IEC standards. This manual being ANSI, UL e IEC. Este manual será bastidor diseñado para cumplir las normas ANSI,
specifically dedicated to the design meeting the especificamente dedicado ao modelo que UL e IEC globales. Este manual está pensado
IEC/EN 60947 standard, for other standards responde à IEC / EN 60947 padrão, para outras específicamente para el cumplimiento de los
please contact us. normas, entre em contacto connosco. requisitos de diseño de la norma IEC/EN 60947;
consúltenos para conocer la conformidad con
The device is designed for use in networks with O aparelho é projectado para uso em redes com otras normas.
voltages up to 1000V AC or 750V DC and to be tensões até 1000V AC ou 750V DC e para ser El dispositivo está diseñado para utilizarse en
fully selective with other EntelliGuard and GE totalmente selectivo com outros Disjuntores redes con tensiones de hasta 1.000 V de CA o
Record Plus Circuit Breakers. EntelliGuard e Record Plus da GE. 750 V de CC y para ser totalmente selectivo con
otros interruptores automáticos EntelliGuard y
It is available as 3 or 4 pole device in three Está disponível em 3 ou 4 pólos em três GE Record Plus.
envelopes and can be used for current ratings tamanhos e pode ser usado para os calibres de Se encuentra disponible como dispositivo de 3 o
from 80 up to 6400 Amps. corrente actuais de 80 até 6400 amperes. 4 polos en tres tamaños y se puede utilizar con
valores nominales de intensidad de 80 hasta
Sendo um disjuntor, o EntelliGuard G pode ser 6.400 amperios.
As a breaker the EntelliGuard G can be equipped equipado com um dos quatro tipos de Unidades El interruptor EntelliGuard G puede equiparse
with one of four Electronic Trip Unit types each de Disparo, cada uma delas com o mesmo tipo con uno de los cuatro tipos de disparadores
having the same universal setting interface and de interface universal e uma tela LCD. electrónicos; todos ellos comparten la misma
an LCD screen. interfaz de configuración universal y una
O não automático (Interruptor de Corte em pantalla LCD.
A Non Automatic (Switch Disconnector) version Carga) versão sem unidade de disparo também También existe una versión no automática
(without trip unit) is also possible. Both Breaker está disponível. Ambos os aparelhos disjuntor e (interruptor en carga, sin unidad de protección).
and Switch Disconnector types are available in a tipo interruptor estão disponíveis para Los tipos de interruptor automático e interruptor
Fixed or Drawout pattern. aplicações padrão fixa ou extraíveis. en carga están disponibles en ejecución fija o
seccionable.
Os aparelhos EntelliGuard G oferecem uma
EntelliGuard G devices offer a combination of combinação de alta capacidade de corte e Los dispositivos EntelliGuard G ofrecen una
high interruption and short time current suporte para correntes de curto-circuito de combinación de alto poder de corte y resistencia
withstand ratings and can be used in intervalos curtos de modo a poderem ser a la intensidad de corta duración y se pueden
applications as Mains, Coupler/Tie or feeder usados como protecção de entrada, protecção utilizar en aplicaciones como las de Interruptor
breaker or switch disconnector. de saída, acoplamento de barramentos e General, Acoplamiento, Interruptor para
interruptores de corte em carga. alimentación o Interruptor en carga.
1.1-01
48
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
1.1.2 Features and Characteristics 1.1.2 Especificações e Características 1.1.2 Funciones y características
Standard and Optional Features Especificações Standard e opcionais Funciones de serie y opcionales
INTRO
Rated Short Time Withstand Current:: Corrente nominal de curta duração: Intensidad asignada de corta duración:
Up to 100kA for 1 sec Até 100kA a 1 seg Hasta 100 kA durante 1 segundo
Short Circuit / Interruption Rating: Curto-circuito / Poder de corte: Valor nominal Pode de corte:
(Breaking Capacity) (Capacidade de interrupção) Hasta 150 kA a 440 V y 100 kA a 690 V
Up to 150kA at 440V & 100kA at 690V Até 150kA a 440V e 100kA a 690V
INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION
Intensidad nominal:
Rated Current: Corrente nominal Los dispositivos tienen un valor nominal de
The devices have a 100% normal current rating Estes aparelhos consideram 100% do calibre intensidad normal del 100% a una temperatura
up to an ambient temperature of 50°C in free air. nominal até uma temperatura ambiente de 50°C ambiental de 50°C al aire libre.
ao ar livre. Conexión de la alimentación
Connection of Power supply Ligação da Fonte de Alimentação Los dispositivos EntelliGuard G pueden recibir
EntelliGuard G devices can be fed from top or A entrada de corrente nos aparelhos alimentación desde las tomas superiores o
bottom terminals. EntelliGuard G pode ser feita pelos terminais inferiores.
superiores ou inferiores. Mecanismo de acumulación de energía:
Stored Energy Mechanism: El interruptor automático EntelliGuard G™
An EntelliGuard G circuit breaker uses a stored Mecanismos de acumulação de energia: emplea un mecanismo de acumulación de
energy mechanism that can be charged Um disjuntor EntelliGuard G usa um mecanismo energía que se puede cargar de forma manual o
manually or electrically. For manual charging de acumulação de energia que pode ser eléctrica. Para la carga manual, se utiliza la
the operating handle is used ,a spring charging carregado electricamente ou manualmente. manivela; para la carga eléctrica, es posible
motor supplied with an indication contact can Para a carga manual é usada uma manivela añadir un motor de carga de muelles con un
be added for electrical charging. Device closing com punho, pode ser fornecido um motor de contacto de señalización. El tiempo de cierre del
time is less than five half cycles. carregamento da mola. O tempo de fecho do dispositivo es inferior a cinco medios ciclos.
Closing and opening can be initiated remotely or
OPERATION
aparelho é menor que cinco meios ciclos. El cierre y la apertura se pueden iniciar de forma
via the front cover push buttons. An O-C-O cycle O fecho e abertura do aparelho podem ser remota o por medio de los pulsadores frontales.
is possible without recharging. The breaker iniciados remotamente ou via as botoneiras na Es posible realizar un ciclo de apertura-cierre-
operating mechanism is trip-free and has an face frontal. Um ciclo A-F-A é possível sem apertura sin recargar. El mecanismo es de
integrated anti-pumping system. recarga. O mecanismo de operação do disjuntor disparo independiente y cuenta con un sistema
é independente dos disparos e integra um anti-bombeo integrado.
sistema de prevenção de coice.
Factory fitted -OR- Accesorios y unidades de protección
Field installable Accessories & Trip Units. Montagem em fábrica -OU- Acessórios instalados en fábrica o montables por el
Accessories common to all breaker envelopes
TRIP UNIT
1.1-02
49
BREAKER EntelliGuard G
1.1
Electrical Closing Button: Botoneira de fecho eléctrico: Mando eléctrico:
Located on the front cover; electrically closes Localizada na cobertura frontal; fecha Unidad de motor/caja de muelles; fácilmente
breaker. electricamente o disjuntor. accesible.
INTRO
Botón de cierre eléctrico:
Mounting Brackets Suportes Situado en la tapa frontal; cierra el interruptor de
Kits are available to facilitate wall mounting of Kits estão disponíveis para facilitar a montagem forma eléctrica.
an Entelliguard Envelope 1 or 2 Fixed pattern na parede de um aparelho padrão EntelliGuard Soportes de montaje
device. These are recommended for use when a Fixo Tamanho 1 ou 2. Estes são recomendados Existen kits que facilitan el montaje en fondo de
Power Circuit breaker is equipped with Front para uso quando um disjuntor é equipado com armario de un dispositivo EntelliGuard de
access Connection terminals. terminais de ligação de acesso frontal. tamaño 1 o 2 con ejecución fija. Se recomienda
su uso cuando un Interruptor automático de
Connection modes Modos de ligação bastidor está equipado con tomas delanteras.
Connection sets are available to adapt the Conjuntos de ligação estão disponíveis para Modos de conexión
standard connection mode (Rear Horizontal) of adaptar o modo de ligação padrão (Traseiro Existen juegos de conexión para adaptar el
the fixed pattern breaker to a front or Vertical Horizontal) do disjuntor fixo para um modo de modo de conexión estándar (horizontal
rear connection mode. ligação vertical frontal ou traseiro. posterior) del interruptor de ejecución fija a un
The cassettes for the devices in drawout mode Os berços para os dispositivos em modo modo de conexión frontal o vertical posterior.
are supplies with universal connectors for rear extraível são equipados com coutos universais Las cunas de los dispositivos en ejecución
horizontal or vertical use or front connection para uso horizontal ou vertical traseiro ou seccionable se suministran con tomas
pads. Sets with these connectors are available prolongamentos de ligação frontal. Conjuntos universales para uso horizontal o vertical
as spare parts. com esses coutos estão disponíveis como peças posterior o tomas de conexión frontal. Los
de reposição. juegos que incluyen estas tomas están
Auxiliary Contacts disponibles como piezas de recambio.
4 available designs: Contactos auxiliares Contactos auxiliares
-- Power rated 3NO & 3NC (default) 4 desenhos disponíveis: Existen 4 diseños disponibles:
-- Power rated, 8NO & 8NC -- Normais 3NA e 3NF (defeito) -- Contactos 3 NA + 3 NC (estándar)
-- Power rated, 3NO & 3NC + signal rated 2NO & -- Normais, 8NA e 8NF -- Contactos 8 NA + 8 NC
2NC -- Normais, 3NA e 3NF + baixo sinal 2NO e 2NC -- Contactos 3 NA + 3 NC + Contactos de bajo
-- Power rated, 4NO & 4NC + signal rated 4NO & -- Normais, 4NA e 4NF + baixo sinal 4NO e 4NC nivel 2 NA + 2 NC
4NC -- Contactos 4 NA + 4 NC + Contacto de bajo
Encravamentos nivel 4 NA + 4 NC
Interlocks Encravamento Standard Enclavamientos
Standard Interlocking Feature Disjuntor Extraível Carcterísticas del enclavamiento estándar
Drawout Breaker O berço e a parte móvel são equipados com um Interruptor seccionable
The cassettes and device mobile part are encravamento que previne o disjuntor de fechar Las cunas y las piezas móviles del dispositivo
equipped with a interlock that prevents the a não ser que este esteja em posição de TESTE están provistas de un enclavamiento que evita
breaker from closing unless it is in the TEST or ou INSERIDO. que el interruptor automático se cierre a menos
CONNECTED position. Quando os contactos principais estão fechados que se encuentre en la posición de PRUEBA o
When the main breaker contacts are closed a um segundo encravamento previne a inserção INSERTADO.
second interlock prevents insertion of the dos aparelhos na abertura do berço. Cuando los contactos principales del interruptor
devices racking handle into the aperture on the automático están cerrados, un segundo
cassette. Indicadores do estado do berço: enclavamiento impide la inserción en la
Indicadores standard incluem: abertura de la cuna de la manivela para
Breaker Status Indicators: -- O Indicador do estado do disjuntor mostra a maniobra del dispositivo.
Standard Indicators include: posição dos contactos principais (Aberto-OPEN, Indicadores de estado del interruptor
-- The breaker status indicator shows the Fechado-CLOSED). automático:
condition of the main contacts (OPEN, CLOSED). -- O estado das molas de fecho é indicado Los indicadores estándar son los siguientes:
-- The status of the closing springs is indicated como(CARREGADO ou DESCARREGADO -- El indicador de estado del interruptor
as CHARGED or DISCHARGED. (CHARGED ou DISCHARGED). automático muestra la situación de los
– Ready to Close Indicator provides visible -- Indicador Preparado para Fecho providencia contactos principales (ABIERTO, CERRADO).
indication/readiness for close operation. indicação/preparação visível para a operação -- El estado de los muelles de cierre se indica
-- The draw-out position indicator displays de fecho. como CARGADO o DESCARGADO.
whether the breaker is in the CONNECT, TEST or -- O indicador de posição extraído mostra se o -- El indicador Preparado para cierre ofrece
DISCONNECT position. disjuntor está na posição INSERIDO, TESTE ou una indicación visible de preparación para la
-- The breaker also includes a switch that SECCIONADO (CONNECT, TEST ou DISCONNECT). operación de cierre.
provides main contact status indication. -- O disjuntor também tem um interruptor que -- El indicador de posición seccionable muestra
indica a posição dos contactos principais. si el interruptor automático se encuentra en la
Mis insertion Feature posición INSERTADO, PRUEBA o SECCIONADO.
An optional mis insertion feature prevents Prevenção de má inserção -- El interruptor automático también incluye
mismatching breakers and cassettes / Um dispositivo opcional de má inserção previne contactos auxiliares que indica el estado del
substructures. confundir disjuntores e berços / subestruturas. contacto principal.
Isto previne Función de traba de calibre
This prevents a) Inserir um disjuntor de calibre inferior ou Una función opcional de traba de calibre impide
a) inserting a breaker with a lower rating superior no berço/subestrutura e el desajuste de interruptores y cunas.
into a higher rated cassette/substructure b) Inserir um disjuntor de calibre superior De esta forma se evita
and num berço/subestrutura de calibre inferior. a) que se inserte un interruptor automático
b) inserting a higher rated breaker into a con un valor nominal inferior en una cuna
lower rated cassette/substructure. Extracção através da porta: con un valor nominal superior, y
O mecanismo de encaixe do disjuntor é b) que se inserte un interruptor automático
Through-door Racking: acessível através da porta frontal e permite com con un valor nominal superior en una cuna
The breaker racking mechanism is accessible segurança seccionar/extrair o disjuntor sem con un valor nominal inferior.
through the front door and permits safely abrir a porta frontal e expor o pessoal às partes Manivela para maniobra a través de la puerta:
disconnecting/withdrawing the circuit breaker activas durante o processo. El mecanismo de maniobra del interruptor
without opening the door and exposing automático es accesible a través de la puerta
personnel to live parts during the process.
1.1-03
50
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
breaker in fixed and draw-out pattern have a bloqueio. O disjuntor seja do tipo fixo ou personal técnico a piezas en movimiento
padlocking facility for one padlock of 5-8 mm extraível tem um dispositivo de bloqueio para durante el proceso.
allowing the breaker to be locked in its OFF um cadeado de 5-8 mm, permitindo que o Dispositivos de enclavamiento por candado:
position. disjuntor seja bloqueado na sua posição OFF. Los Interruptores automático de bastidors
The cassette supplied with the breakers in draw- O berço fornecido com os disjuntores de tipo EntelliGuard G se proporcionan con varios
out mode has three facilities for up to 3 padlocks extraível têm três pontos de bloqueio para uso dispositivos de enclavamiento para candado. El
INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION
of 5-8 mm. com até 3 cadeados de 5-8 mm. interruptor en ejecución fija y seccionable
Two of these can be found on the cassette Dois destes podem ser encontrados no espaço cuenta con un dispositivo de enclavamiento
euchenon and can be used for locking the de inserção do berço e podem ser usados para para candado de 5 a 8 mm que permite
shutters in closed position and/or closing and bloquear as persianas na posição fechada e / ou enclavar el interruptor en posición OFF (abierto).
locking the racking handle aperture. no fecho e bloqueio da alça de abertura da La cuna que se proporciona con los
The third option is located on the breaker draw- prateleira. interruptores automáticos en ejecución
out support slides and can be used to lock O terceiro ponto está localizado nas calhas de seccionable tiene tres funciones para un número
breaker & chassis combination in disconnected suporte do disjuntor extraível e pode sr usado máximo de 3 candados de 5-8 mm.
position. para bloquear a combinação do disjuntor com o Dos de ellas se encuentran en la tapa de la cuna
chassis na posição aberta. y sirven para enclavar las pantallas de
aislamiento en posición abierto y/o para cerrar y
Instalação de cadeado frontal às botoneiras: enclavar la apertura de la manivela para
Facia Pushbutton Padlocking Facilities: Para prevenir o acesso não autorizado a ambos maniobra.
To prevent un-authorized access to both the ON os botões de abertura e fecho na face frontal do La tercera opción se encuentra en las guías de
and OFF push buttons on the breakers front disjuntor, uma cobertura sobre as botoneiras na la ejecución seccionable del interruptor y se
facia, a padlock able push button cover can be face frontal pode ser fixa por cadeado. pueden utilizar para enclavar la combinación
fixed to the breaker front facia. Pode ser usado 1 cadeado de 5-8 mm. interruptor/cuna en posición de seccionado.
1 padlock of 5-8 mm can be used. Funciones de enclavamiento por candado de
OPERATION
one to lock the device in OFF position. O berço só aceita mecanismos para uso com enclavamientos por cerradura Ronis, Profalux o
The cassette only accepts mechanisms allowing fechaduras Ronis e/ou Profalux, que podem ser Castell. Tanto el interruptor automático como la
the use of Ronis and/or Profalux locks that can usados para a posição do disjuntor e/ou cuna pueden dotarse de estos dispositivos. El
be used for breaker position and/or shutter bloqueio do obturador. interruptor automático admite dispositivos que
locking. permiten utilizar hasta cuatro enclavamientos
Obturadores: Ronis o Profalux, o un enclavamiento Castell que
Todos os berços são fornecidos com permite enclavar el interruptor en la posición
Shutters: obturadores de segurança bloqueáveis. OFF (abierto).
All cassettes are supplied with lockable safety La cuna solamente admite dispositivos que
shutters. Contactos de indicação da posição no berço: permiten el uso de enclavamientos Ronis y/o
Este dispositivo opcional do berço / subestrutura Profalux que se pueden utilizar para enclavar la
Cassette Position Indication Contacts: permite indicação local ou remota do estado do posición del interruptor y/o las pantallas.
This optional cassette/substructure device disjuntor INSERIDO, TESTE, SECCIONADO Pantallas:
permits local or remote indication of the circuit (conjuntos disponíveis de 3 ou 6 contactos Todas las cunas se proporcionan con pantallas
breaker status(CONNECTED, TEST, comutados unipolares). de aislamiento enclavables.
DISCONNECTED. (Set of 3 or 6 single-pole Contactos de posición en la cuna:
changeover contacts are available). Carro de elevação e adaptador: Este dispositivo de cuna opcional permite la
Disponível opcionalmente para o indicación local o remota del estado del
manuseamento dos disjuntores. O tipo standard interruptor automático (INSERTADO, PRUEBA,
Lifting Truck and Adapter: está preparado para suportar os disjuntores de SECCIONADO). (Disponible en juegos de 3 o 6
Optionally available to facilitate breakers Tamanhos 1 e 2 um dispositivo adaptador está contactos conmuntados de un solo polo).
handling. The standard type is suitable for disponível permitindo o uso do mesmo carro
handling Envelope 1 & 2 breakers, an adapter para aparelhos de Tamanho 3. Carretilla elevadora y adaptador:
being available allowing one to use the same Disponible opcionalmente para facilitar el
device for envelope 3 devices. Coberturas IP54 : manejo de los interruptores automáticos. El tipo
Cada disjuntor EntelliGuard é fornecido com estándar es apto para la manipulación de
uma porta que providencia ao aparelho interruptores de tamaño 1 y 2, hay disponible un
IP54 Covers: instalado um grau de protecção IP40. adaptador que permite utilizar el mismo
Each EntelliGuard breaker is supplied with a Opcionalmente uma cobertura extra está dispositivo de tamaño 3.
Door Frame that provides the installed device disponível para obter um grau de protecção
with an IP40 rating. Optionally an extra cover is IP54. Tapas de puerta IP54:
available providing an IP54 rating. Cada interruptor automático EntelliGuard se
proporciona con un marco embellecedor que
proporciona al dispositivo instalado un valor de
protección IP40. De forma opcional, existe una
tapa de puerta adicional que ofrece un valor de
protección IP54.
1.1-04
51
BREAKER EntelliGuard G
1.1
Operations Counter: Contador de operações: Contador de maniobras:
Provides local record of the cumulative number Providencia o registo local do número Proporciona un registro local del número
of complete breaker closing operations. comulativo de operações de fecho completas do acumulado de las maniobras de cierre
INTRO
disjuntor. completas del interruptor automático.
Cable Interlocking Devices:
A set of devices that are available for fixed Dispositivos de encravamento por cabo: Dispositivos de enclavamiento por cable:
and/or drawout devices. They allow the Um conjunto de dispositivos que estão Existe un juego de dispositivos disponibles para
interlocking of two or three Entelliguard G disponíveis para aparelhos fixos e/ou extraíveis. ejecución fija y/o seccionable. Estos permiten el
breakers in fixed or drawout pattern. Each Eles permitem o encravamento de dois ou três enclavamiento de dos o tres interruptores
device has two parts, a factory mounted disjuntores EntelliGuard G em execução fixa ou automáticos EntelliGuard G en ejecución fija o
interlocking mechanisms and two or more extraível. Cada dispositivo tem duas partes, seccionable. Cada dispositivo tiene dos partes,
separately available cables. mecanismos de encravamento montados em un mecanismo de enclavamiento montado en
fábrica e dois ou mais cabos disponíveis em fábrica y dos o más cables disponibles por
separado. separado.
Spring Charged and Ready to Close Contacts: Contactos de Mola Carregada e de Preparado Contactos de muelles cargados y de
A breaker with electrical charging mechanism para Fecho Preparado para cierre:
can be equipped with one or two indication Um disjuntor equipado com o mecanismo de Es posible montar uno o dos contactos de
contacts. carga eléctrico pode ser equipado com um ou señalización en un interruptor con mando
dois contactos de indicação. eléctrico.
The first the Spring Charged Contact simply does
as indicated and is supplied with the standard O primeiro contacto de mola carregada La función del primer contacto de muelles
Motor Operating Mechanism. simplesmente dá a indicação e é fornecido com cargados es básicamente la que se indica y se
o mecanismo standard motorizado. proporciona con el mecanismo de mando
The second, the ready to close indication, eléctrico estándar.
optionally replaces the Spring Charged Contact. O segundo, indicador de preparado para fecho,
substitui opcionalmente o contacto de mola El segundo, el de señalización Preparado para
It only moves position when the following carregada. cierre, sustituye de forma opcional al contacto
conditions are met: de muelles cargados.
- The circuit breaker is open Este só actua quando as seguintes condições
- The closing springs are charged são satisfeitas: Sólo cambia de posición cuando se cumplen las
- The circuit breaker is not locked/interlocked in - O disjuntor está aberto condiciones siguientes:
open position - As molas de fecho estão carregadas - El interruptor está abierto
- There is no standing closing order - O disjuntor não está bloqueado/encravado na - Los muelles de cierre están cargados
- There is no standing opening order posição aberto - El interruptor no está bloqueado/enclavado en
Both contacts have a 1NO configuration. - Não há ordem mantida de fecho posición abierto
- Não há ordem mantida de abertura
Ambos os contactos são de configuração 1NA. - No hay ninguna orden de cierre pendiente
- No hay ninguna orden de apertura pendiente
Ambos contactos están disponibles en una confi
guración de 1 NA.
1.1-05
52
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
1.1.4 Front label data overview: 1.1.4 Dados do rótulo frontal: 1.1.4 Descripción general de los
1. Product Denomination 1. Denominação do produto datos de la etiqueta delantera:
INTRO
2. Bar code (with Serial number) 2. Código de barras (com número de série) 1. Denominación del producto
3. Colour Code indicating Interruption Tier 3. Código de cores de capacidade de 2. Código de barras (con número de serie)
4. Voltage Ratings interrupção 3. Código de colores que indica el tipo de poder
5. Current Ratings 4. Tensões normalizadas de corte
6. Certifications & Standards 5. Calibres de corrente 4. Tensión nominal
7. Short Circuit Interruption data 6. Certificações e Normas 5. Intensidad nominal
8. Manufacturing Date 7. Dados de Poder de Corte 6. Certificaciones y estándares
INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION
3 2
4
5
7 6
8
1.1.5 HERRAMIENTAS necesarias para
1.1.5 TOOLS needed for installation 1.1.5 FERRAMENTAS necessárias para la instalación
OPERATION
Table 1.1 provides a list of the hand tools a instalação En la Tabla 1.1 se proporciona una lista de las
required to install, operate and maintain the A tabela 1.1 indica a lista de ferramentas herramientas de mano necesarias para instalar,
EntelliGuard® G Circuit Breaker. manuais para instalar, operar e efectuar manejar y realizar el mantenimiento del
manutenção ao Disjuntor EntelliGuard® G. interruptor automático EntelliGuard®.
TRIP UNIT
Table 1.1: Required Hand Tools Tabela 1.1: Ferramentas manuais necessárias Tabla 1.1: Herramientas de mano necesarias
Cluster pliers (GUNI): Alicate para pinças de seccionamento (GUNI): Tenaza para Pinzas de seccionamiento (GUNI):
To remove cluster contacts for inspection. Para remover as pinças de seccionamento ao Sirven para retirar los contactos de
efectuar a inspecção. seccionamiento para efectuar una inspección.
Screwdriver (8 mm flat): Chave de parafusos (8 mm fendas): Destornillador (plano de 8 mm):
To operate racking aperture shutter drive. Serve para operar a abertura das tampas Sirve para accionar la apertura de las pantallas
obturadoras de aislamiento.
Allen key (5 mm): Chave Allen (5 mm): Llave Allen (5 mm):
To remove arc chutes for inspection and Para remover as câmaras de extinção para Sirve para retirar las cámaras de corte para
maintenance. To remove or adjust fixed and inspecção e manutenção. Serve para remover efectuar inspecciones y mantenimiento. Sirve
moving arcing contacts. ou ajustar os contactos de extinção fixos ou para retirar o ajustar los contactos parachispas
móveis fijos y móviles.
Allen key (4 mm): Chave Allen (4 mm): Llave Allen (4 mm):
To remove motor operator mounting screws. Para os parafusos do motor de carga eléctrico. Sirve para quitar los tornillos de montaje del
mando eléctrico.
Metric feeler gauges: Afinadores métricos: Calibres métricos:
To check arcing contact gaps. Servem para comprovar e afinar o espaçamento Sirven para comprobar las separaciones entre
entre os contactos de extinção. los contactos parachispas.
Pozidrive screwdriver (#2): Chave Pozidriv (#2): Destornillador Pozidrive (nº 2):
To remove mechanical and electronic Para remover parafusos de montagem de Sirve para quitar los tornillos de montaje de los
component mounting screws. To connect wiring equipamentos mecânicos e electrónicos. Para componentes mecánicos y electrónicos. Sirve
to secondary contact terminals. ligar condutores aos terminais secundários. para conectar el cableado a las bornas
secundarias.
Pozidrive screwdriver (#3): Chave Pozidriv (#3): Destornillador Pozidrive (nº 3):
To remove front cover mounting screws. Para remover os parafusos da cobertura frontal Sirve para quitar los tornillos de montaje de la
tapa frontal.
1.1-06
53
BREAKER EntelliGuard G
BLOCK A
RÉGUA DE BORNES A
STANDARD CONNECTION SCHEME FOR TERMINAL BLOCK A
ESQUEMA DE LIGAÇÕES STANDARD PARA OS TERMINAIS SECUNDÁRIOS RÉGUA DE BORNES A
ESQUEMA DE CONEXIÓN ESTÁNDAR PARA EL REGLETERO DE BORNAS A
REGLETERO A 1.1
LP1 LP4
INTRO
A1 A3 A5 A7 A9 A12 A14 A16 A18 A20 A22 A24 A33 A34
31 21 11 33 23 13
57 96 98
SPR
M1
BAT
C1 D1 C3 D1
M
32 12 34 24 14 95
ML 22
D2 C4 D2
T
C2
M2 58
ST1 UVR1 CC UVR2
LP2 LP3
Indication: Indicação:
LP1: Spring charge status LP1: Estado de carga da mola
LP2: Breaker open LP2: Disjuntor aberto
LP3: Breaker closed LP3: Disjuntor fechado
LP4: Fault LP4: Defeito
LP5: Breaker ready to close LP5: Disjuntor preparado para fecho ..more details see chapter 1.3.5
LP6: CC powered LP6: CC com alimentação presente ..para mais detalhes ver capítulo 1.3.5
LP7: UVR not powered LP7: UVR sem alimentação presente ..más información en la sección 1.3.5
LP8: ST powered LP8: ST com alimentação presente
LP9: ST2 powered / UVR2 not powered LP9: ST2 alimentada / UVR2 não alimentada
LP10: Network Interlock lockout LP10: Bloqueio por encravamento de rede
LP11: Breaker in DISCONNECTED position LP11: Disjuntor na posição DESLIGADO
LP12: Breaker in TEST position LP12: Disjuntor na posição de TESTE
LP13: Breaker in CONNECTED position LP13: Disjuntor na posição FECHADO BLOCK B
CC: Closing coil
ST: Shunt release
CC: Bobina de fecho
ST: Bobina de disparo à emissão de tensão
RÉGUA DE BORNES B
UVR: Undervoltage release
SPR: Spring charge status
UVR: Bobina de disparo por mínima tensão
SPR: Estado de carga da mola
REGLETERO B
RTC: Ready to close status RTC: Estado de preparado para fecho STANDARD CONNECTION SCHEME FOR TERMINAL BLOCK B
M: Motor operator M: Motor de carga eléctrico ESQUEMA DE LIGAÇÕES STANDARD PARA OS TERMINAIS SECUNDÁRIOS
BAT: Bell alarm trip BAT: Contacto se sinalização de disparo RÉGUA DE BORNES B
CCC: Command closing coil CCC: Bobina de fecho especial ESQUEMA DE CONEXIÓN ESTÁNDAR PARA EL REGLETERO DE BORNAS B
NI: Network Interlock NI: Encravamento de rede
1.1-07
54
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
Table 1.2: Environmental Conditions Tabela 1.2: Condições ambientais Tabla 1.2: Condiciones ambientales
Table 1.6: IEC 60947 AC/DC Version Performance Tabela 1.6: IEC 60947, Performance e Tabla 1.6: IEC 60947, Características de
Characteristics características para versão CA/CC prestaciones paraCA/CC
Table 1.7: IEC 60947 AC/DC Version Rated Tabela 1.7: IEC 60947, Especificações Tabla 1.7: IEC 60947, Especificaciones de
Endurance Specifications normalizadas de Endurance para versão CA(CC endurancia para A/CC
Table 1.9: Non-Automatic CB/Switch, IEC Version Tabela 1.9: Interruptor de corte em carga, Tabla 1.9: Interruptor en carga (no automático),
Versão IEC versión IEC
Table 1.10: Non-Automatic CB/Switch Endurance Tabela 1.10: Interruptor de corte em carga Tabla 1.10: Especificaciones de endurancia de
Specifications Especificações de Endurance Interruptor no automático
Table 1.11: Connection options for breaker in Tabela 1.11: Opções de ligação para aparelho de Tabla 1.11: Opciones de conexión para
fixed pattern execução fixa interruptor con ejecución fija
Table 1.12: Connection options for breaker in Tabela 1.12: Opções de ligação para aparelho de Tabla 1.12: Opciones de conexión para
draw out pattern execução extraível interruptor con ejecución seccionable
OPERATION
Table 1.15: Agency Certification Tabela 1.15: Certificações Tabla 1.15: Certificaciónes
n o t e n o t a s | n o t a s
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIP UNIT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2-00
55
BREAKER EntelliGuard G
SPECIFICATION
Table 1.2: Environmental Conditions / Tabela 1.2: Condições ambientais / Tabla 1.2: Condiciones ambientales
Characteristic Parameter
Característica Parâmetros
Característica Valor
Temperature: Ambient Operating -5 ºC to 70 ºC
Extended Ambient Operating -20 ºC to -5 ºC
Storage -40 ºC to 70 ºC
Humidity 20% RH to 95% RH
1.2-01
56
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
Air Circuit Breaker Denomination Denominação do disjuntor aberto Denominación del interruptor automático de bastidor
Category of use Categoria de emprego ...................................................................... Categoría de empleo
Dual cluster drawout construction Execução extraível com duplo seccionamento Construcción seccionable con seccionamiento doble
Envelope type Tamanho tipo Tipo de tamaño
HIOSC release set at: HIOSC disparo ajustado a : HIOSC ajustada a:
Isolator Interruptor Interruptor en carga
Making Current Release set at: Disparo no fecho sobre curto-circuito ajustado a: Prevención de cierre sobre cortocircuito ajustada a:
nr. of poles in series N.º de pólos em série ......................................................................... Nº de Polos en serie
Number of Número de Número de
Service breaking capacity Ics [kA] Poder de Corte em Serviço Ics [kA] Poder de corte en servicio Icu [kA]
Short Circuit Making current Icm Intensidade de fecho em curto-circuito Icm .......................... Intensidad de cierre en cortocircuito Icm
Short Circuit Withstand Icw (kA) Intensidade de curta duração Icw (kA) Intensidad de corta duración Icw (kA)
Single cluster drawout contruction Execução extraível com seccionamento simples Construcción seccionable con seccionamiento sencillo
Suitable for use as a isolator Apto para uso como Seccionador de corte em carga Apto para uso como interruptor en carga
Ultimate breaking capacity Icu [kA] Poder de corte ultimo Icu [kA] Poder de corte último Icu [kA]
1.2-02
57
BREAKER EntelliGuard G
1.2
Tabela 1.7: Endurance de acordo com IEC 60947-2
Tabla 1.7: Endurancia según la norma IEC 60947-2
SPECIFICATION
English Português Español
GG32,40 or GJ32,40 GG32,40 ou GJ32,40 GG32,40 o GJ32,40
Air Circuit Breaker Denomination Denominação dos disjuntor aberto Denominación del interruptor automático de bastidor
CO operations Manobras CO Maniobras CO
Electrical Endurance Endurance eléctrica Endurancia eléctrica
Envelope type Tamanho tipo .............................................................................. Tipo de tamaño
For Endurance in DC applications Para Endurance em aplicações CC por favor veja a Para conocer la endurancia en aplicaciones de CC,
...please refer to the IEC 60947 IEC 60947 consulte la norma IEC 60947
4) GG is the standard type (Single cluster drawout 4) GG é o tipo standard (execução extraível de 4) GG es el tipo estándar (Construcción seccionable con
construction) seccionamento simples) ......................................................... seccionamiento sencillo)
4) GH is the limited de-rating version (Dual cluster 4) GH é a versão de correcção de intensidade 4) GH es la versión de corrección de intensidad limitada
drawout construction) limitada (execução extraível com duplo (Construcción seccionable con seccionamiento doble)
seccionamento)
1.2-03
58
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
1) The GW type is a sub variant of the GJ type and 1) O tipo GW é uma sub variante do tipo GJ e o GZ 1) El tipo GW es una subvariante del tipo GJ, y el tipo GZ
the GZ a sub variant of the GK type, both equipped uma sub variante do tipo GK, ambos equipados es una subvariantes del tipo GK; ambos están
with a MCR release. com um disparo MCR. ............................................................ equipados con una bobina MCR.
HIOSC release set at: kA rms HIOSC ajustada a : kA rms HIOSC ajustada a: kA rms
Isolator Denomination Denominação do seccionador Denominación del interruptor en carga
Making Current Release set at (1) kA rms Prevenção de fecho sobre curto-circuito ajustada a Prevención de cierre sobre cortocircuito ajustada a (1)
(1) kA rms ...................................................................................... kA rms
Short Circuit Making current Icm 220-500V AC kA Intensidade de fecho em curto-circuito Icm 220- Intensidad de cierre en cortocircuito Icm 220-500 V CA
Peak 500V AC kA Pico Cresta
Short Circuit Withstand Icw (kA) Intensidade de curta duração Icw (kA) Intensidad de corta duración Icw (kA)
Suitable for use as a isolator Apto para uso como seccionador Apto para uso como interruptor en carga
1.2-04
59
BREAKER EntelliGuard G
1.2
Tabela 1.10: Endurance de acordo com IEC 60947
Tabla 1.10: Endurancia Int. En carga según la norma IEC 60947
SPECIFICATION
English Português Español
CO operations at Manobras CO a Maniobras CO a
Electrical Endurance Endurance eléctrica Endurancia eléctrica
Envelope type Tamanho tipo Tipo de tamaño
For Endurance in DC applications please refer to the Para Endurance em aplicações CC por favor veja a Para conocer la endurancia en aplicaciones de CC,
IEC 60947 IEC 60947 ...................................................................................... consulte la norma IEC 60947
4) GJ is the standard type (Single cluster drawout 4) GJ é o tipo standard (execução extraível de 4) GJ es el tipo estándar (Construcción seccionable
construction) seccionamento simples) ........................................................ con seccionamiento sencillo)
4) GK is the limited de-rating version (Dual cluster 4) GK é a versão de correcção de intensidade 4) GK es la versión de corrección de intensidad
drawout construction) limitada (execução extraível com duplo limitada (Construcción seccionable con
seccionamento) seccionamiento doble)
1.2-05
60
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
The Envelope 2 type cassette is supplied with .. O berço de Tamanho 2 é fornecido com .............................. La cuna de tipo Tamaño 2 se entrega con..
Universal Connection Rear Access Connections Tomadas de acesso traseiro Universal Tomas traseras con conexión universal
Universal Rear Access Busbar Connection Ligação Universal de barras com acesso traseiro Conexión de embarrados con acceso posterior universal
When used horizontally it has a Quando usado na horizontal, apresenta um valor Cuando se utiliza en posición horizontal, presenta un valor
maximum rating of.. nominal máximo de.. .................................................................... nominal máximo de..
When used vertically it has .. Quando se usa na vertical têm.. Cuando se utiliza en posición vertical, ..
1.2-06
61
BREAKER EntelliGuard G
Table 1.15: Agency Certification Tabela 1.15: Certificações Tabla 1.15: Certificaciones
1.2
(All industry standards referenced in this table are (Todas as normas do sector que figuram nesta (Todas las normas del sector que figuran en esta
the latest version at the time the product is tabela correspondem à versão mais recente no tabla corresponden a la versión más reciente en el
sold.) momento em que se comercializa o produto) momento en que se comercializa el producto).
SPECIFICATION
Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear General Normas gerais para aparelhagem de baixa tensão Normas generales para aparamenta de baja tensión
Rules
GB14048 China Standards and CCC Mark GB14048 Normas e marcações para a China e CCC GB14048 Normas para China y marcado CCC
ABS (American Bureau of Shipping) ABS (American Bureau de Shipping) ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
Germanischer Lloyds Germanischer Lloyds Germanischer Lloyds
n o t e n o t a s | n o t a s
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
1.2-07
62
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
1.3.1 Lifting and Mounting 1.3.1 Elevação e montagem 1.3.1 Elevación y montaje
INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION
1.3.2 Fixed-Pattern Circuit Breaker 1.3.2 Disjuntor de Execução Fixa 1.3.2 Interruptor automático con ejecución fija
- Installation - Instalação - Instalación
1.3.3 Drawout Pattern Circuit Breaker 1.3.3 Disjuntor de Execução Extraível 1.3.3 Interruptor automático con ejecución
- Installation - Instalação seccionable
- Removal from Cassette - Remoção a partir do berço - Instalación
- Mounting in Cassette - Inserção no berço - Extracción de la cuna
- Montaje en la cuna
1.3.4 Standard Bus Connection 1.3.4 Ligações de Tomadas Standard 1.3.4 Conexionado Tomas estándar
of Fixed and/or Drawout Pattern de execução Fixa E/OU Extraível - para ejecución Fija Y/O Seccionable
1.3.5 Secondary Disconnect Terminal Blocks 1.3.5 Réguas de terminais secundários 1.3.5 Regleteros de bornas
- Location - Localização - Ubicación
- Use - Uso - Uso
- Table -- General schematics - Tabela – Esquemas gerais - Tabla -- Esquemas generales
- Table -- Definition of connected devices - Tabela – Definição dos dispositivos ligados - Tabla -- Definición de los dispositivos
OPERATION
n o t e n o t a s | n o t a s
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIP UNIT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3-00
63
BREAKER EntelliGuard G
CAUTION: Ensure circuit breaker and its CUIDADO: Certifique-se de disjuntor e seus PRECAUCIÓN: Asegúrese de que el
accessories are always used within their acessórios são sempre utilizados nas suas interruptor automático y sus accesorios se
designated ratings. funcionalidades designadas. utilicen siempre dentro de los valores nominales
Do not allow the circuit breaker to hit a hard Não deixe o disjuntor bater numa superfície especificados. Evite que el interruptor
surface while handling. dura durante o manuseio. automático se golpee contra una superficie
Do not drag or slide the circuit breaker across a Não arraste ou deslize o disjuntor através de rígida mientras lo manipula.
hard or rough surface. uma superfície dura ou áspera.. No arrastre ni deslice el interruptor automático
sobre una superficie dura o irregular.
Install the device in a dry, dust-free, non- Instalar o aparelho em local seco, livre de poeira
corrosive environment. The environmental ambiente e não-corrosivo. As condições Instale el dispositivo en un lugar seco, sin polvo,
conditions must be in compliance with the IEC ambientais devem estar em conformidade com donde no se encuentre sometido a la corrosión.
60947 requirements and/or the conditions a IEC 60947 requisitos e / ou condições Las condiciones ambientales deben cumplir los
stated in this manual. estabelecidas neste manual. requisitos de la norma IEC 60947 y/o las
INSTALLATION
When the device is placed in environments Quando o aparelho é colocado em ambientes condiciones que se especifican en este manual.
with conditions that deviate from those com condições que se afastam das referidas no Cuando el dispositivo se coloca en entornos
mentioned in this manual please contact the presente manual, por favor contacte a GE donde las condiciones difieren de las que se
nearest GE Energy sales office. Energy departamento de vendas. mencionan en este manual, póngase en
contacto con la oficina comercial más próxima
de GE Energy.
Unpacking Circuit Breaker Retirando o Disjuntor da caixa Desembalaje del interruptor automático
Before unpacking it is strongly recommended Antes de retirar da caixa é recomendado que a Antes de desembalar el interruptor automático,
that the shipping container is inspected and that caixa seja inspeccionada e que qualquer dano se recomienda expresamente examinar el
any undue damage incurred during transport sofrido durante o transporte e manuseamento contenedor del envío y anotar cualquier daño
and handling is recorded. If any damage is seja registado. Se for observado algum dano por injustificado que se pudiera haber producido
observed please contact the carrier mentioning favor contacte a transportadora mencionado o durante el transporte y la manipulación. Si se
order number, shipping data and all other numero da encomenda, data de envio, e observan desperfectos, póngase en contacto
relevant data before proceeding. qualquer outro dado relevante antes de con el transportista, indicando el número de
proceder com o retiro da embalagem. pedido, los datos del envío y cualquier otra
-- Unbind the banding straps and carefully -- Descole as abas e retire cuidadosamente a información pertinente antes de utilizar el
remove the box/pallet top cover. tampa superior da paleta/caixa. producto.
-- Remove any additional packing materials and -- Remova qualquer material de embalagem -- Suelte las correas de sujeción y retire
relevant documentation. adicional e documentação pertinente. cuidadosamente la tapa superior de la caja o el
– Locate and remove the installation and -- Localize e remova o manual de instalação e palet.
operating manual. Retain for later use & operação. Guarde para uso posterior de -- Retire los materiales de embalaje adicionales
reference . Verify if these are in the language referência. Verifique se eles estão no idioma y la documentación correspondiente.
required. If not please contact the nearest GE desejado. Caso não, entre em contacto com o -- Localice y retire el manual de instalación y
Energy sales office. escritório de vendas GE Energy. utilización. Consérvelo para su posterior uso y
-- Check packaging box for accessories as -- Procure na caixa de embalagem pelos consulta. Verifique si está redactado en el
connection pads and other hardware that , in acessórios como coutos de ligação e outro idioma apropiado. En caso contrario, póngase
some cases, are delivered unmounted. hardware que, em alguns casos, são entregues en contacto con la oficina comercial más
-- The Device is normally delivered bolted to the para montar. próxima de GE Energy.
box/pallet bottom. Loosen and remove these -- O aparelho é normalmente entregue -- Compruebe los accesorios incluidos en la caja
bolts to removed breaker from the box/pallet. aparafusado à caixa / paleta inferior. Solte e de embalaje, como las tomas y otros elementos
remova os parafusos para retirar o disjuntor da que, en algunos casos, se entregan sin montar.
caixa / paleta. -- El dispositivo se suele entregar atornillado a la
parte inferior de la caja o el palet. Afloje y retire
estos tornillos para sacar el interruptor
automático de la caja o el palet.
Mounting location
Local de montagem
Ubicación de montaje
1.3-01
64
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
Each EntelliGuard breaker is equipped with a set Cada disjuntor EntelliGuard está equipado com Cada interruptor EntelliGuard está equipado con
of hoisting eyes. To lift the breaker using um conjunto de argolas retracteis para un conjunto de argollas retráctiles para
standard hoisting equipment, specifically elevação. Para levantar o disjuntor utilizando elevación. Para levantar el interruptor utilizando
designed adapters can be linked to the hoisting equipamentos de elevação standard, existem equipos de elevación estándar, existen
eyes. Two kinds of adapters or beams, one for adaptadores especificamente desenhados para adaptadores específicamente diseñados para
use with Envelope 1&2 breakers (GLB1) and a adaptação às argolas. Há dois tipos de adaptarse a las argollas. Hay dos tipos de
second for the larger envelope 3 breaker (GLB3) adaptadores ou vigas, um para o uso com adaptadores o vigas, uno para su uso con
INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION
Extraível
Drawout type circuit breakers are normally 1.3.3 Instalación del interruptor
delivered already mounted in cassettes. Os disjuntores do tipo extraível são automático con ejecución
normalmente entregues já inseridos no berço. seccionable.
1. Remove the circuit breaker from its cassette Los interruptores automáticos de tipo
using withdrawal procedures described in 1. Remova o disjuntor do seu berço usando os seccionable suelen entregarse ya montados en
Section 1.4. procedimentos de extracção descritos na las cunas.
Secção 1.4. 1. Retire el interruptor automático de su cuna
TRIP UNIT
2. Position the cassette as required in the mediante los procedimientos de desmontaje que
switchboard. The cassette may be lifted by hand; 2. Posicione o berço como requerido no quadro se describen en la sección 1.4.
however, if a handling truck or other lifting gear eléctrico. O berço pode ser elevado à mão; 2. Sitúe la cuna en la posición apropiada en el
is used, use all four lifting holes provided at front contudo, se o caro de elevação ou outro armario. La cuna se puede levantar con las
and rear of the cassette. acessório de elevação for utilizado, use todos os manos; sin embargo, si se utiliza un carretón de
quatro furos de elevação existentes na frente e manipulación u otro medio de izado, use los
3. Position cassette in place and connect traseira do berço. cuatro taladros de elevación existentes en la
incoming and outgoing cables/busbars. Ensure 3. Posicione o berço no lugar e ligue os parte delantera y posterior de la cuna.
there is minimal deflection/stress to the back of cabos/barras de chegado e saída. Assegure o 3. Sitúe la cuna en su lugar y conecte los cables
the cassette when connecting busbars. mínimo de deflexão / esforço na parte traseira y barras de entrada y de salida. Asegúrese de
do berço quando ligar as barras. que exista una deflexión/tensión mínima en la
4. Mount the cassette using four M8 bolts and parte posterior de la cuna al conectar las barras.
torque to 25 N m at the front and rear mounting 4. Monte o berço usando quarto parafusos M8 e 4. Monte la cuna con cuatro tornillos M8 y
points. aperto de 25 Nm nos pontos de montagem apriételos a 25 N m en los puntos de montaje
frontais e traseiros. delanteros y posteriores.
5. Check the mounting to: 5. Compruebe el montaje para:
-- Ensure the cassette base is flat and the frame 5. Verifique a montagem para: -- Asegurarse de que la base de la cuna esté
is square. -- Assegurar que a base do berço é plana e que plana y que el bastidor esté recto.
-- Ensure the safety shutters move freely after o aspecto é quadrado. -- Asegurarse de que las pantallas de
the mounting bolts have been fully tightened. -- Assegure que os obturadores de segurança aislamiento se muevan libremente después de
abrem livremente depois de os parafusos de apretar por completo los tornillos de montaje.
6. Replace the Device in the cassette as montagem serem completamente apertados. 6. Introduzca el interruptor en la cuna como se
described in section 1.4. 6. Insira o aparelho no berço, como descrito no describe en la sección 1.4.
ponto 1.4. 7. Si es necesario, se proporciona un punto de
7. If needed, a clearly marked grounding point is toma de tierra claramente identificado a ambos
provided on both sides of the cassette. 7. Se necessário, está disponível em ambos os lados de la cuna.
lados do berço um ponto de ligação à terra.
65
BREAKER EntelliGuard G
1.3
DANGER | PERIGO | PELIGRO Por favor assegure-se que o disjuntor é Asegúrese de que el interruptor se encuentra en
Please ensure that the breaker is placed in tripped colocado na posição disparado, que o indicador posición de disparo, que el indicador de
position, that the operation indicator shows OFF de posição indica OFF e que os mecanismos de funcionamiento muestre OFF (abierto) y que el
and that the mechanisms springs are fully mola estão completamente descarregados. mecanismo de muelles esté completamente
discharged. Enquanto elevado, não toque nos contactos de descargado.
Whilst lifting, do not touch the circuit breakers isolamento do disjuntor. No toque los contactos del interruptor
isolating contacts. automático mientras lo eleva.
Circuit Breaker Removal from the Cassette Remoção do Disjuntor do Berço Extracción del interruptor automático de la
Lift the circuit breaker clear of the draw out Levante claramente o disjuntor dos suportes cuna
support slides using the hand grips on either extensíveis de extracção, usando as pegas Extraiga el interruptor automático a lo largo de
side (Fig. 1.3) or the lifting eyes (Fig. 1.4). manuais de cada lado (Fig. 1.3) ou os olhais de las guias con las asas dispuestas a cada lado
elevação (Fig. 1.4). (Fig. 1.3) o las argollas de elevación (Fig. 1.4).
Circuit breaker Mounting in the Cassette. Montagem do Disjuntor no Berço. Montaje del interruptor automático en la cuna
INSTALLATION
1. Ensure the cassette position indicator shows 1. Assegure que o indicador de posição no 1. Asegúrese de que el indicador de posición
DISCONNECTED and racking handle is berço mostra SECCIONADO e que a manivela de muestre SECCIONADO y que la manivela para
disengaged. extracção está desengatada. maniobra esté desacoplada.
2. Estenda totalmente os suportes de extracção 2. Abra por completo las guias de la cuna hasta
2. Fully extend the cassette draw out support do berço, até que eles não saírem mais. que lleguen a un tope positivo.
slides until they reach a positive stop. 3. Baixe o aparelho sobre os suportes de 3. Baje el dispositivo sobre las guias mediante
extracção, fazendo uso dos métodos de los métodos de elevación que se describen en
3. Lower the device on to the drawout support elevação descritos aqui. Verificar este documento. Verifique cuidadosamente que
slides making use of the lifting methods cuidadosamente que os rolamentos montados los rodillos instalados en la parte móvil de este
described here. Carefully verify that the rollers na parte móvel do aparelho estão dispositivo estén correctamente acoplados a las
fitted to the mobile part of this device are completamente inseridos nos suportes de guias. (Fig. 1.6) (consulte también el capítulo
correctly engaged on the slides. (fig. 1.6) (see extracção. (fig. 1.6) (ver também o capitulo 1.4.6) 1.4.6)
also chapter 1.4.6) 4. Empurre o disjuntor para dentro do berço até 4. Empuje el interruptor automático en el
que este seja forçado a parar. O disjuntor está interior de la cuna hasta que llegue a un tope
4. Push the circuit breaker into the cassette until agora na posição SECCIONADO. positivo. El interruptor automático se encuentra
it reaches a positive stop. The circuit breaker is ahora en la posición SECCIONADO.
now in the DISCONNECTED position. 5. Com uma chave de parafusos gire a manivela
dos obturadores no sentido horário (Fig. 1.7), 5. Con un destornillador, gire el accionador de la
5. With a screwdriver, turn the racking handle insira a manivela de extração e rode-a no tapa de la manivela de maniobra (Fig. 1.7),
shutter drive clockwise (Fig. 1.7), insert the sentido horário para acoplar o disjuntor ao introduzca la manivela de maniobra y gire hacia
racking handle and rotate clockwise to rack the berço. Conforme o disjuntor se aproxima da la derecha para insertar el interruptor
circuit breaker into the cassette. As the breaker posição TESTE verifique o alinhamento das automático en la cuna. A medida que el
approaches the TEST position check the partes fixas e móveis de seccionamento dos interruptor se aproxima a la posición PRUEBA,
alignment of the fixed and moving parts of the circuitos auxiliares. verifique la alineación de las piezas fijas y
secondary circuit isolating contacts. móviles de los contactos del circuito secundario.
6. Continue a rodar a manivela no sentido
6. Keep on rotating the racking handle horário. O indicador de posição no berço 6. Continúe girando la manivela de maniobra
clockwise. The racking drive indicator will move passará da posição SECCIONADO para a TESTE e hacia la derecha. El indicador de accionamiento
from the DISCONNECTED to TEST and finally to finalmente para a posição INSERIDO. Quando as pasará de SECCIONADO a PRUEBA y finalmente,
the CONNECTED position. As the cluster of the partes móveis de seccionamento se começam a a la posición INSERTADO. Cuando el grupo de
mobile parts start engaging with the contacts on encontrar com as fixas no berço, a força piezas móviles comience a acoplarse con los
the cassette the force required to turn the requerida para rodar a manivela no sentido de contactos de la cuna, la fuerza necesaria para
racking handle increases sharply. inserção aumenta rapidamente. girar la manivela de maniobra aumentará
considerablemente.
Fig. 1.5: Fig. 1.6: Slides
Racking Drive in the DISCONNECTED Position ..on which the breaker rollers must engage
Fig. 1.5:
Mecanismo de extracção na posição SECCIONADO Fig. 1.6: Calhas de extracção
Fig. 1.5: ..onde os rolamento do disjuntor devem encaixar
Accionador en la posición SECCIONADO
Fig. 1.7: Racking Screw Location Fig. 1.6: Guias
A) Racking Screw Shutter Drive ...sobre las que debe acoplarse el interruptor
Fig. 1.7: Localização do parafuso de extracção
A) Parafuso dos obturadores
Fig. 1.7: Ubicación del accionador de maniobra
A) Accionador de la tapa de la manivela de
maniobra
A
A
1.3-03
66
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
CAUTION: If a Motor Spring Charge or CUIDADO: Se o motor de carregamento da PRECAUCIÓN: Si se instala mando eléctrico
Undervoltage Release is installed, these may mola ou uma bobina de mínima tensão estão para carga de muelles o bobina de mínima
INTRO
operate when approaching the TEST position. instalados, podem operar imediatamente tensión, pueden funcionar al aproximarse a la
quando o disjuntor se aproxima da posição posición PRUEBA.
7. Remove and store the racking handle. TESTE.
8. The circuit breaker is now ready for normal 7. Retire y guarde la manivela de maniobra.
operation. 7. Remova e guarde a manivela de extracção. 8. El interruptor automático se encuentra
8. O disjuntor está agora preparado para operar preparado para funcionar con normalidad.
normalmente.
INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION
- Racking drive in DISCONNECTED position - Racking Handle Extended - Pulling device from cassette for removal.
- Mecanismo de extracção na posição SECCIONADO - Manivela de extracção estendida - Puxando o aparelho para remoção deste do berço.
- Indicador en la posición SECCIONADO - Manivela de maniobra extendida - Dispositivo de empuje para extracción de la cuna.
- Racking Handle - Racking Handle, engaged and in operation. - Racking Handle Shutter drive location
- Manivela de extracção - Manivela de extracção, encaixada e em operação. - Localização do parafuso dos obturadores
- Manivela para maniobra - Manivela de maniobra acoplada y en funcionamiento - Ubicación del accionador de la tapa de la manivela de
maniobra
1.3-04
67
BREAKER EntelliGuard G
Lock Washer
Anilha de Segurança
Arandela de seguridad Hex Bolt (8.8)
Parafuso Sextavado (8.8)
Tornillo Hex. (8.8)
Customer bus
Barramento Exterior
Embarrado exterior
INSTALLATION
Breaker terminal
Tomadas Disjuntor
Toma interruptor
Customer bus
Barramento Exterior
Embarrado exterior
Breaker type 'Automatic' Switch Type Envelope In (A) Recommended Copper Bus Bar sizes
Disjuntor Interruptor de corte em carga Tamanho In (A) Tamanhos recomendados de barra de cobre
Interruptor automático Interruptor en carga Tamaño In (A) Tamaños recomendados de barra de cobre
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- [or = ou = ó] -----------------------------
Recommended Connection Cross
GG04, S N & H GJ04S & GW04N 1 or/ó 2 400 1 x 40 x 10 or 1 x 80 x 5 or 2 x 40 x 5 sections
GG04 E & M GJ04H 1 or/ó 2 400 1 x 40 x 10 or 1 x 80 x 5 or 2 x 40 x 5 The adjacent table indicates the
GG07, S N & H GJ07S & GW07N 1 or/ó 2 630 1 x 50 x 10 or 1 x 100 x 5 or 2 x 50 x 5 recommended bus bar dimensions
GG07 E & M GJ07H 1 or/ó 2 630 1 x 50 x 10 or 1 x 100 x 5 or 2 x 50 x 5 to be used in connecting the
GG08, S N & H GJ08S & GW08N 1 or/ó 2 800 1 x 50 x 10 or 1 x 100 x 5 or 2 x 50 x 5 EntelliGuard G™ Power Circuit
GG08 E & M GJ08H 1 or/ó 2 800 1 x 50 x 10 or 1 x 100 x 5 or 2 x 50 x 5 Breaker.
GG10, S N & H GJ10S & GW10N 1 or/ó 2 1000 1 x 60 x 10 or 2 x 60 x 5
GG10 E & M GJ10H 1 or/ó 2 1000 1 x 60 x 10 or 2 x 60 x 5
GG13, S N & H GJ13S & GW13N 1 or/ó 2 1250 2 x 40 x 10 or 2 x 80 x 5 Secções de ligação
GG13 E & M GJ13H 1 or/ó 2 1250 2 x 40 x 10 or 2 x 80 x 5 recomendadas
GG16, S N & H GJ16S & GW16N 1 1600 2 x 50 x 10 or 2 x 100 x 5 A tabela adjacente indica as
GG16 E & M GJ16H 2 1600 2 x 50 x 10 or 2 x 100 x 5 dimensões recomendadas de
barra para serem usadas na
GG20, S N & H GJ20S & GW20N 1 2000 3 x 50 x 10 or 3 x 100 x 5
ligação do
GG20 E & M GJ20H 2 2000 3 x 50 x 10 or 3 x 100 x 5
Disjuntor EntelliGuard G™.
GG25N, H & M GJ25N & GW25H 2 2500 4 x 50 x 10 or 4 x 100 x 5
GG32N, H & M GJ32N & GW32H 2 or/ó 3 3200 4 x 100 x 10
GH32N, H & M GK32N & GZ32H 2 or/ó 3 3200 4 x 100 x 10 Secciones recomendadas
GG32G & L GJ32G 2 or/ó 3 3200 4 x 100 x 10 La tabla adjunta indica las
GG40N, H & M GJ40N & GW40H 2 4000 4 x 100 x 10 + 1 x 100 x 5 secciomes recomendadas de
GH40N, H & M GK40N & GZ40H 2 4000 4 x 100 x 10 + 1 x 100 x 5 las barras a utilizar para la
GG40G & L GJ40G 3 4000 4 x 100 x 10 conexión del Interruptor de
GG50M & L CJ50L 3 5000 5 x 120 x 10 or 6 x 100 x 10 bastidor EntelliGuard G™
GG64M & L CJ64L 3 6400 7 x 120 x 10 or 8 x 100 x 10
1.3-05
68
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
50
29 2x M10x60 -8.8
| Rear horizontal | Breaker S | 400-1600A 4x M10
25
INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION
5
| Tomada traseira horizontal | Disjuntor S | 400-1600A
R 6. 4x M10
| Toma trasera horizontal | Interruptor S | 400-1600A
17
38-42 Nm
2x M10 -8.8
2x M12x60 -8.8
| Rear horizontal | Breaker N, H | 400-1600A 4x M12
| Toma traseira horizontal | Disjuntor N, H | 400-1600A 4x M12
| Toma trasera horizontal | Interruptor N, H | 400-1600A
50-60 Nm
2x M12 -8.8
OPERATION
3x M10x60 -8.8
| Rear horizontal | Breaker N, H | -2000A 6x M10
| Toma traseira horizontal | Disjuntor N, H | -2000A 6x M10
| Toma trasera horizontal | Interruptor N, H | -2000A
TRIP UNIT
38-42 Nm
3x M10 -8.8
2x M10x60 -8.8
| Rear vertical 4x M10
| Tomada Traseira vertical 4x M10
| Toma trasera vertical
38-42 Nm
2x M10 -8.8
2x M10x60 -8.8
| Front Access 4x M10
| Tomada frontal 4x M10
| Toma delantera
38-42 Nm
2x M12 -8.8
1.3-06
69
BREAKER EntelliGuard G
1.3
Fixed Breaker | Execução Fixa | Ejecución Fija
Frame size 2 | Tamanho 2 | Tamaño 2
4x M12x60/80 -8.8
| Rear horizontal 8x M12
| Tomada traseira horizontal 8x M12
| Toma trasera horizontal
50-60 Nm
4x M12 -8.8
4x M12x60/90 -8.8
INSTALLATION
| Rear vertical 8x M12
| Tomada Traseira vertical 8x M12
| Toma trasera vertical
50-60 Nm
4x M12 -8.8
4x M12x60/80 -8.8
| Front Access 8x M12
| Tomada frontal 8x M12
| Toma delantera
50-60 Nm
4x M12 -8.8
3x M12x60/80 -8.8
| Rear horizontal 6x M12
| Tomada traseira horizontal 6x M12
| Toma trasera horizontal
50-60 Nm
3x M12 -8.8
4x M12x60/80 -8.8
| Rear vertical 8x M12
| Tomada Traseira vertical 8x M12
| Toma trasera vertical
50-60 Nm
4x M12 -8.8
1.3-07
70
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
| Breaker S = Rear horizontal / vertical | Execução S = Tomada traseira horizontal / vertical | Ejecución S = Toma trasera horizontal / vertical
15 2x M10x60 -8.8
2x 4x M10
4x M10
25 30
38-42 Nm
17.5
2x M10 -8.8
R 6.5
58
2x M10x60 -8.8
| Front Access 4x M10
| Tomada frontal 4x M10
| Toma delantera
38-42 Nm
OPERATION
2x M10 -8.8
4x M12x60/90 -8.8
| Rear horizontal / vertical 8x M12
| Tomada traseira horizontal / vertical 4 otwory 8x M12
| Toma trasera horizontal / vertical
50-60 Nm
4x M12 -8.8
4x M12x60/80 -8.8
| Front Access 8x M12
| Tomada frontal 8x M12
| Toma delantera
50-60 Nm
4x M12 -8.8
4x M12x60/80 -8.8
| Rear Horizontal / Vertical 8x M12
| Tomada traseira horizontal / vertical 8x M12
| Toma trasera horizontal / vertical
50-60 Nm
4x M12 -8.8
1.3-08
71
BREAKER EntelliGuard G
1.3
1.3.5 SECONDARY DISCONNECT 1.3.5 TERMINAIS SECUNDÁRIOS DE 1.3.5 REGLETEROS DE BORNAS
TERMINAL BLOCKS SECCIONAMENTO
Breakers in Fixed Pattern, cassettes and Os disjuntores do tipo fixo, berços e disjuntores Los interruptores con ejecución fija, cunas e
breakers in draw out mode are always supplied extraíveis são sempre fornecidos com terminais interruptores con ejecución seccionable se
with an auxiliary connection block with 39 auxiliares numa régua de terminais com 39 proporcionan siempre con un regletero de
connection points (terminals) . These are easily pontos. Estes são facilmente acessíveis e estão conexión auxiliar para 39 puntos de conexión
accessible and located at the top and front of localizados no topo frontal do aparelho. (bornas). Son fácilmente accesibles y están
the device. situados en la parte superior y frontal del
When the number of factory installed Quando o número de acessórios instalados de dispositivo.
accessories require more than 39 connection fábrica requer mais de 39 pontos de ligação, Cuando los accesorios instalados en fábrica
points needed a 2nd terminal block is uma segunda régua de terminais é requieren más de 39 puntos de conexión, se
automatically added. In cases where the automaticamente adicionada. Nos casos em añade automáticamente un segundo regletero
accessories are mounted in the field an extra que os acessórios serão montados em campo, de bornas. En aquellos casos donde los
terminal block could be needed. uma régua extra de terminais poderá ser accesorios los hubiera instalado el usuario,
necessária. podría ser necesario utilizar un regletero de
bornas adicional.
INSTALLATION
Ordering details: Detalhes de encomenda: Detalles de pedido:
-- The terminals can be used up to a rating of 6A -- Os terminais podem ser usados até uma -- Los terminales se pueden utilizar hasta unos
at 440V AC or 6A at 250V DC. They can be used intensidade de 6A a 440V CA ou 6A a 250V CC. valores nominales de 6 A a 440 V de CA o 6 A a
with unprepared stripped conductors and are Estes podem ser usados com condutores sem 250 V de CC. Se pueden utilizar con conductores
suited for use with conductors equipped with terminal e permitem o uso de terminais de desnudos sin preparar y son aptos para
spade or ring type terminals. ponteira ou de olhal. utilizarse con conductores provistos de terminal
de punta u horquilla.
Schematics and use of terminals see next page. Esquemas e uso dos terminais, ver a próxima Consulte la página siguiente para conocer el
página. esquema y el uso de las bornas.
Assignment of terminals to accessories Atribuição dos terminais aos acessórios Asignación de bornas a los accesorios
-- Block A see table 1.16 -- Bloco A ver tabela 1.16 -- Regletero A, consulte la tabla 1.16
-- Block B see table 1.17 -- Bloco B ver tabela 1.17 -- Regletero B, consulte la tabla 1.17
-- Definition of accessories, their labelling and -- Definição de acessórios, a sua etiqueta e uso -- Definición de accesorios, sus rótulos y
use, with terminal block connection data see com ligação ao bloco de terminais, ver tabela utilización, con datos de conexión del regletero
table 1.18. 1.18. de bornas; consulte la tabla 1.18.
Table 1.19: Terminal Wiring Tabela 1.19: Cablagem de terminais Tabla 1.19: Cableado de bornas
Number of Terminals 78 Número de terminais 78 Número de bornas 78
1.3-09
72
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
-- Block A see table 1.16 -- Bloco A ver tabela 1.16 -- Regletero A, consulte la tabla 1.16
-- Block B see table 1.17 -- Bloco B ver tabela 1.17 -- Regletero B, consulte la tabla 1.17
-- Definition of accessories, their labelling and -- Definição de acessórios, a sua etiqueta e -- Definición de accesorios, sus rótulos y
use, with terminal block connection data see uso com ligação ao bloco de terminais, ver utilización, con datos de conexión del regletero
table 1.18. tabela 1.18. de bornas; consulte la tabla 1.18.
INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION
A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26
31 32 21 22 11 12 33 34 23 24 13 14
OPERATION
A27 A28 A29 A30 A31 A32 A33 A34 A35 A36 A37 A38 A39
N
TU TU 96
N
97 98 07 08 98 95 - +
TRIP UNIT
B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26
CC 2
37 38 47 48 63 64 53 54 43 44
83 84 73 74
B27 B28 B29 B30 B31 B32 B33 B34 B35 B36 B37 B38 B39
1.3-10
73
BREAKER EntelliGuard G
Table 1.18: Wiring Schematic / Tabela 1.18: Esquema de ligações / Tabla 1.18: Esquemas de cableado
1.3
Terminal Block A / Terminais Bloco A / Regletero de bornas A Terminal Block B / Terminais Bloco B / Regletero de bornas B
A1 A2 B1 B2 B3
- Power input to motor I3 I2 - relay input to trip unit
M1 M2 - Alimentação ao motor Icom - entrada a relé para a unidade de disparo
- alimentación al motor TU - entrada de relé a la unidad de protección
INSTALLATION
- power input to first Undervoltage release - auxiliary NC contact
D1 UVR D2 - alimentação à primeira bobina de mínima tensão - contacto auxiliar NF
1 61 62 51 52 41 42
- alimentación a la primera bobina de mínima tensión - contacto auxiliar NC
A9 A10 A11 - c3: closing coil neutral wire c4+5: closing coil phase wire. B14 - not in use
- c3: bobina de fecho condutor neutro c4+5: bobina de - sem uso atribuído
C3 C4 fecho condutor de fase. - no se utiliza
CC C5
- c3: cable neutro de bobina de cierre c4+5: cable de fase
de bobina de cierre.
A12 A13 - power input to second Shunt release or Undervoltage release. B15
- alimentação à segunda bobina de disparo por emissão de
D1 UVR D2 tensão ou bobina de mínima tensão
C1 2 ST C2 - alimentación a la segunda bobina de disparo a emisión de
tensión o bobina de mínima tensión
A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 B16
- auxiliary NC contact
- contacto auxiliar NF
31 32 21 22 11 12 - contacto auxiliar NC
A36 A37 B31 B32 B33 B34 B35 - trip unit communication
- neutral Rogowski coil - comunicação da unidade de
N - bobina Rogowski de neutro disparo
5V Iso TxEN1 Rx Tx - comunicación de la unidad de
- + - bobina Rogowski para neutro
protección
A38 A39 B36 B37 B38 B39
- system phase voltage signals
N - earth leg CT - sinais de tensão de fase do sistema
- Transformador de intensidade para defeitos à terra Ucom U1 U2 U3 - señales de tensión de fase del sistema
- Transformador de intensidad para defectos a tierra
74
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
LP1 LP4
The scheme indicated here is used for standard
A1 A3 A5 A7 A9 A12 A14 A16 A18 A20 A22 A24 A33 A34 applications. In cases where less commonly used
accessories are needed other, optional schemes are
used (see adjacent images).
31 21 11 33 23 13 The Electronic Trip Unit is also connected to the
INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION
Indication: Connection scheme RTC (BLOCK A) - Connection scheme Command Closing Coil BLOCK A
OPERATION
LP1: Spring charge status Esquema de ligação RTC (BLOCO A) - Esquema de ligações da Bobina de Fecho
LP2: Breaker open Comandada BLOCO A
LP3: Breaker closed
Esquema de conexión de RTC preparado para cierre (REGLETERO A)
- Esquema de conexión de la bobina de cierre
LP4: Fault
LP5: Breaker ready to close
especial, REGLETERO A
LP6: CC powered
LP5
LP7: UVR not powered
LP8: ST powered A3 A10 A11
LP9: ST2 powered / UVR2 not powered
LP10: Network Interlock lockout Alternate Connection Scheme: Alternate Connection Scheme:
LP11: Breaker in DISCONNECTED position Valid when a Ready to Close Contact Valid when a Command Closing
LP12: Breaker in TEST position is installed. coils is installed. (Replaces
TRIP UNIT
LP13: Breaker in CONNECTED position (Replaces Spring Charged Contact) standard closing coil)
57
CC: Closing coil
--- *) ---
RTC Esquema de ligações alternativo: Esquema de ligações alternativo:
ST: Shunt release
UVR: Undervoltage release
Válido quando o contacto de C3 Válido quando uma bobina de
preparado para fecho está C5 fecho comandada está instalada.
SPR: Spring charge status instalado. (Substitui a bobina de fecho
RTC: Ready to close status (Substitui o contacto de mola standard)
M: Motor operator 58 C4
carregada) ---
BAT: Bell alarm trip --- Esquema de conexiones
CCC: Command closing coil CCC
Esquema de conexiones alternativo: alternativo:
NI: Network Interlock Es válido cuando hay un contacto Es válido cuando hay bobinas de
Preparado para cierre instalado. cierre especial instaladas.
Indicação: (Sustituye al contacto de muelles (Sustituye a la bobina de cierre
LP1: Estado de carga da mola A4 cargados) A9 estándar)
LP2: Disjuntor aberto
LP3: Disjuntor fechado
LP4: Defeito
LP5: Disjuntor preparado para fecho
LP6: Alimentação CC *) Additional "ON", Pushbutton mounted in breaker front fascia.
LP7: UVR não alimentada
LP8: ST alimentada
Botão "ON" adicional montado no frontal do disjuntor
LP9: ST2 alimentada / UVR2 não alimentada Pulsador "ON" adicional montado en el frontal del interruptor
LP10: Encravamento de rede bloqueado
LP11: Disjuntor na posição SECCIONADO
LP12: Disjuntor na posição TESTE
- Optional SECOND SHUNT BLOCK A
LP13: Disjuntor na posição INSERIDO
- SEGUNDA BOBINA DE DISPARO Opcional BLOCO A CONNECTION SCHEME Network Interlock BLOCK A
CC: Bobina de fecho - SEGUNDA BOBINA DE DISPARO A EMISIÓN DE TENSIÓN ENCRAVAMENTO DE REDE Esquema de ligação BLOCO A
ST: Bobina de disparo à emissão de tensão OPCIONAL, REGLETERO A ESQUEMA DE CONEXIÓN de enclavamiento de red, REGLETERO A
UVR: Bobina de mínima tensão
SPR: Estado de carga da mola Alternate Connection Scheme:
RTC: Estado de preparado para fecho Alternate Connection Scheme: Valid when a Network Interlock is
M: Motor de carga da mola Valid when a 2nd Shunt Release is installed.
BAT: Alarme de disparo A12 installed. A5 A7 (Replaces 1st Shunt- and 1st
CCC: Bobina de fecho comandada (Replaces 2nd Undervoltage Undervoltage Release)
NI: Encravamento de rede release) ---
--- Disparo de NI... Reset de NI Esquema de ligações alternativo:
Esquema de ligações alternativo: Válido quando o Encravamento de
Indicación: Válido quando uma segunda Rede está instalado.
LP1: Estado de carga de muelle CC: Bobina de cierre bobina de disparo está instalada. (Substitui a 1ª Bob Disparo e a 1ª
LP2: Interruptor abierto ST: Bobina de disparo a emisión de (Substitui a segunda bobina de Bob. Mínima)
mínima tensão) E1
LP3: Interruptor cerrado tensión E3 ---
C1 --- Esquema de conexiones
LP4: Fallo UVR: Bobina de mínima tensión
LP5: Interruptor preparado para cierre SPR: Estado de carga de muelle Esquema de conexiones alternativo:
LP6: CC con alimentación RTC: Estado Preparado para cierre C2 alternativo: E2 E4 Es válido cuando hay un
LP7: UVR sin alimentación M: Mando eléctrico Es válido cuando hay una NI Trip NI Reset enclavamiento de red (NI) instalado.
LP8: ST con alimentación BAT: Señalización de disparo ST2 segunda bobina de disparo a (Sustituye a la primera bobina de
LP9: ST2 con alimentación/UVR2 sin CCC: Mando de bobina de cierre emisión de tensión instalada. disparo a emisión de tensión y la
alimentación NI: Enclavamiento de red (Sustituye a la segunda bobina de primera bobina de mínima tensión)
LP10: Bloqueo de enclavamiento de red mínima tensión)
LP11: Interruptor en posición SECCIONADO
LP12: Interruptor en posición PRUEBA A13 A6 A8
LP13: Interruptor en posición INSERTADO
1.3-12
75
BREAKER EntelliGuard G
INSTALLATION
B5 B7 B9 B11 B13 B18 B20 B22 B24 B26 Válido cuando los contactos
B5 B7 B18 de señalización de disparo por
bobina se utilizan en los
dispositivos señalizados.
(Sustituye a 3 contactos
auxiliares)
... Connection Scheme Second Shunt Switch BLOCK B ... Connection Scheme UVR2 Switch BLOCK B ... NI Network Interlock BLOCK B
... Esquema de ligação do contactos da Segunda Bobina ... Esquema de ligação do contacto UVR2, BLOCO B ... Encravamento de Rede NI BLOCO B
de Disparo à Emissão de Tensão BLOCO B ... Esquema de conexión del contacto UVR 2, REGLETERO B ... Enclavamiento de red (NI), REGLETERO B
... Esquema de conexión del segundo contacto de señalización
de disparo por bobina a emisión de tensión, REGLETERO B
LP9 LP9 LP10
B19 B19 B4 B5
1.3-13
76
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
1.4.1 Charging of Main Springs 1.4.1 Carga das molas principais 1.4.1 Carga de los muelles principales
Manually Manualmente Manual
Electrically Electricamente Eléctrica
1.4.3 Circuit breaker closing operation 1.4.3 Operação de fecho do disjuntor 1.4.3 Operación de cierre del interruptor
automático
1.4.4 Circuit breaker opening operation 1.4.4 Operação de abertura do Disjuntor 1.4.4 Operación de apertura del interruptor
automático
1.4.5 Circuit breaker Withdrawal 1.4.5 Extracção do Disjuntor 1.4.5 Extracción del interruptor automático
1.4.6 Circuit breaker Insertion 1.4.6 Inserção do Disjuntor 1.4.6 Inserción del interruptor automático
1.4.7 Sequence of operation cassette 1.4.7 Sequência de operação no berço 1.4.7 Secuencia de operación en la cuna
n o t e n o t a s | n o t a s
OPERATION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIP UNIT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4-00
77
BREAKER EntelliGuard G
CAUTION: Ensure circuit breaker and its ATENÇÃO: Certifique-se de disjuntor e seus PRECAUCIÓN: Asegúrese de que el
accessories are always used within their acessórios são sempre utilizados conforme as interruptor automático y sus accesorios se
designated ratings. suas funções e calibres atribuídos. utilicen siempre dentro de los valores nominales
Use the specially designed circuit breaker Use especialmente desenhado carro de especificados.
handling truck (optional accessory) when transporte do disjuntor (acessório opcional) Utilice el carretón de manipulación
removing the circuit breaker from its cassette. quando remover o disjuntor do seu berço. especialmente diseñado para el interruptor
automático (accesorio opcional) cuando retire el
interruptor de la cuna.
1.4.1 Charging of main springs 1.4.1 Carga das molas principais 1.4.1 Carga de los muelles principales
NOTICE: 1 charging cycle provides sufficient AVISO: 1 ciclo de carga fornece energia AVISO: Un ciclo de carga proporciona
energy for an O-C-O (Open-Close-Open) suficiente para uma operação A-F-A (Abrir – suficiente energía para una operación de
operation. Fechar - Abrir). apertura-cierre-apertura.
The mechanism only operates correctly when O mecanismo só opera correctamente quando o El mecanismo sólo funciona correctamente
the device is mounted on a horizontal plane and aparelho está montado num plano horizontal cuando el dispositivo se encuentra montado en
fixed at the bottom OR when the device is plana e fixo pelo fundo OU quando o aparelho é un plano horizontal y sujeto al fondo, o bien
OPERATION
mounted in a vertical plane and fixed at the montado num plano vertical e fixo pelo fundo ou cuando el dispositivo está montado en un plano
bottom or rear. (using mounting brackets) traseira. (utilizando suportes de montagem) vertical y sujeto al fondo o a la parte posterior.
(con soportes de montaje)
Device Charging (manual) Carregando o mecanismo (manual) Carga del dispositivo (manual)
-- Extend handle (Fig.1.0B page 1.4) -- Estenda a manivela (Fig.1.0B pág. 1.4) -- Extienda la manivela (Fig. 1.0B, página 1.4)
-- Rotate or depress handle in a downwards -- Rodar ou puxar a manivela para baixo. -- Gire o presione la manivela hacia abajo.
direction. -- Permitir que a manivela regresse à sua -- Deje que la manivela regrese a su posición
-- Allow the handle to return to it's original posição original. Um clique claramente audível original. Un chasquido perfectamente audible
position. A clearly audible click indicates that the indica que a operação está concluída. indica que la operación ha finalizado.
operation is completed. -- Repita o processo acima mencionado 10 -- Repita el proceso descrito 10 veces para
-- Repeat the above mentioned process 10 vezes, assim está completo o carregamento das cargar los muelles por completo. El indicador de
times, thus fully charging the springs. The status molas. O indicador de estado estará agora estado aparecerá ahora de color ROJO: El
indicator will now be RED: The mechanism VERMELHO: O desenho do mecanismo inclui diseño del mecanismo incluye medidas que
design includes measures that prevent over medidas que previnem e limitam danos ao evitan una extensión excesiva y lesiones del
extension and operator injury. utilizador. operador.
Device Charging (electrical) Carregando o mecanismo (eléctrico) Carga del dispositivo (eléctrica)
The optionally available spring charging O mecanismo opcional disponível de carga das El mecanismo de carga de los muelles
mechanism (motor) will automatically charge molas (motor), carregará as molas logo após disponible de forma opcional (motor) carga los
the springs directly after a closing operation. uma operação de fecho. muelles automáticamente y de forma directa
This takes approximately 2 seconds. Isto leva aproximadamente 2 segundos. después de una operación de cierre.
Esta operación dura unos 2 segundos.
78
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
1.4.3 CIRCUIT BREAKER 1.4.3 OPERAÇÃO DE FECHO DO 1.4.3 OPERACIÓN DE CIERRE DEL
CLOSING OPERATION DISJUNTOR INTERRUPTOR AUTOMÁTICO
1. The circuit breaker can be closed, if: 1. O Disjuntor pode ser fechado, se: 1. El interruptor automático se puede cerrar
si:
- The OFF button is not depressed. - O botão OFF não está pressionado. - El botón OFF no está pulsado.
- The Trip Unit is installed. - A Unidade de disparo está instalada. - La unidad de protección se encuentra
- No pending ON command is present - Não há comando ON pendente presente instalada.
- The network interlock if installed is reset. - O Encravamento de Rede se instalado está - No hay ninguna orden de activación presente
restabelecido. - El enclavamiento de red, si está instalado, está
- If installed, the Undervoltage release (s) are - Se instalada, a bobina de Mínima tem a en Reset.
energized. necessária tensão aplicada. - Si está instalada, la bobina (o bobinas) de
- No local keylocks or in- or external breaker - Não há bloqueios ou encravamentos internos mínima tensión recibe alimentación.
interlocks are set to PREVENT the user from ou externos entre disjuntores em posição de - No hay cerraduras ni enclavamientos de
switching ON. PREVENÇÃO que evitem a ligação. interruptores externos ajustados para IMPEDIR
- The cassette racking handle is not inserted. - A manivela de extracção não está inserida. que el usuario lo active.
- The Trip Unit reset button is not protruding - O botão de restabelecimento da Unidade de - No se ha insertado la manivela para maniobra
OPERATION
from the front cover. Disparo não está saliente da cobertura frontal. de la cuna.
- The circuit breaker is not positioned anywhere - O disjuntor não está posicionado em qualquer - El botón de reset de la unidad de protección no
between CONNECTED, TEST and DISCONNECTED. sitio entre as posições INSERIDO, TESTE e sobresale de la tapa frontal.
SECCIONADO - El interruptor automático no está situado en
-- -- ninguna posición entre INSERTADO, PRUEBA y
If any of the above conditions are NOT met the Se qualquer uma das condições acima NÃO se SECCIONADO.
device is prevented from closing. verifica, o disjuntor está impedido de fechar. -- Si alguna de las condiciones anteriores no se
-- -- cumple, el dispositivo no se puede cerrar.
--
TRIP UNIT
NOTICE: If a motorized Spring Charging Unit is AVISO: Se o mecanismo de carga motorizado AVISO: Si hay una unidad de carga de muelles
installed, the springs will be automatically está instalado, as molas serão motorizada instalada, los muelles se cargarán
charged as soon as the closing operation is automaticamente carregadas assim que automáticamente en cuanto se inicialice la
initialized. começa a operação de fecho.. operación de cierre.
1.4-02
79
BREAKER EntelliGuard G
1.4
1.4.4 Circuit Breaker 1.4.4 Operação de Abertura do 1.4.4 Operación de apertura del
Opening Operation Disjuntor interruptor automático
NOTICE: If the device is a breaker it will always AVISO: Se o aparelho é um disjuntor, este AVISO: Si el dispositivo es un interruptor
AUTOMATICALLY Trip on closing or being disparará sempre AUTOMATICAMENTE ao ser automático, éste se disparará siempre DE
exposed to faults that exceed the values set or exposto a defeitos que excedem os valores FORMA AUTOMÁTICA cuando esté expuesto a
installed on the installed protective devices. estabelecidos os programados na Unidade de valores que sobrepasen los valores establecidos
(GT type Electronic Trip Unit). Protecção instalada. o instalados en los dispositivos de protección
(Unidade de Protecção Electrónica tipo GT). montados. (Disparador electrónico de tipo GT).
There are multiple means to open the breaker. Á várias formas de abrir I disjuntor. Existen varias formas de abrir el interruptor.
OPERATION
The Network Interlock Device locks the breaker in Se instalado, o encravamento de rede vai abrir o Si está instalado, un enclavamiento de red abrirá
OFF position electrically and mechanically. When disjuntor assim que um comando de el interruptor cuando se haya enviado una
this device receives a pulse all local breaker OFF/DISPARO seja dado. Ele vai abrir o disjuntor orden de OFF/disparo. Abrirá el interruptor y
functionality is disabled except the tripping of the e rete-lo na posição aberto até que receba o mantendrá el dispositivo en posición abierta
device on any over current fault. comando de reposição. (Também válido quando hasta que reciba una orden de reset. (También
On the receipt of a 2nd pulse normal operation is à falta de tensão de comando). es válido cuando se pierde la tensión de mando).
re-instated. The presence of mains power does not
effect the locking and/or re-instatement of this Adicionalmente encravamentos internos e Además, existen numerosas aplicaciones de
device. Each device has a local RESET button that externos estão disponíveis que se estiverem enclavamiento del interruptor internas y
only can be accessed after breaker cover removal. presentes podem abrir o disjuntor. externas que, si están presentes y activas,
permiten abrir el dispositivo.
It has the volume of two releases (Shunt /
Undervoltage coil).
1.4.5 Circuit Breaker Withdrawal 1.4.5 Extracção do Disjuntor 1.4.5 Extracción del interruptor
automático
Preparation Preparação Preparación
- Earth Leg Current transformer - Transformador de Intensidade de Defeitos à - Transformación de intensidad para defectos
When using this device is used in a source Terra a tierra
ground return Earth fault scheme (As used for Quando usado o transformador de intensidade Cuando utilice un transformador de intensidad
standby earthfault), the earth leg current de defeitos à terra (fornecido com a função de para defectos a tierra (suministrado con función
transformer will be open circuited when the defeito à terra em espera), este ficará em de falta a tierra en espera), éste quedará en
circuit breaker is withdrawn from its cassette. circuito aberto quando se extrai o disjuntor do circuito abierto cuando el interruptor
Under certain circumstances, the current may seu berço. Em certas circunstancias a corrente automático se retire de su cuna. En
still flow in the ground giving rise to a high pode continuar a circular pela terra originando determinadas circunstancias, la intensidad
induced voltage at the current transformer tensões induzidas elevadas nos pólos puede seguir circulando en la conexión a masa,
secondary terminals. secundários do transformador. produciendo una elevada tensión inducida en
las bornas secundarias del transformador de
Under such conditions, ensure a Carriage Switch Nestas condições, assegure-se de instalar um intensidad.
is installed in the cassette (see Section 4.4) to contacto de posição no berço (consulte a En estas condiciones, asegúrese de instalar un
allow short circuiting of the current transformer Secção 4.4) para fazer o curto-circuito dos contacto de posición en la cuna (consulte la
secondary terminals when the circuit breaker is terminais secundários do transformador quando sección 4.4) para garantizar el cortocircuitado
withdrawn. o disjuntor está extraído. de las bornas secundarias del transformador de
intensidad al retirar el interruptor automático.
1.4-03
80
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
— Remove any padlocks from the racking panel. -- Remova quaisquer bloqueios do painel de muelles automáticamente.
--- Ensure the cabinet/panel door is closed. extracção do berço. -- Retire los candados que hubiera en el panel
-- Assegure-se que o painel/armário tem a porta de maniobra.
INTRO
and extend the grip arm (Fig. 1.10). estenda o braço desta. (Fig. 1.10). manivela y extienda el brazo de agarre (Fig. 1.10)
3. Turn the EntelliGuard device OFF. A safety 3. Abra o aparelho EntelliGuard para a posição 3. Abra el dispositivo EntelliGuard. Un dispositivo
device ensures that the racking aperture shutter OFF. Um dispositivo de segurança garante que a de seguridad asegura que la tapa de
cannot be opened whilst the device is NOT in it's abertura para a manivela não se pode abrir até introducción de la manivela no se pueda abrir
OFF position. que o aparelho NÃO tenha sido colocado na mientras el dispositivo no esté en la posición
4. Open the racking aperture shutter fully using posição OFF (Aberto). OFF (Abierto).
a flat screwdriver (see Fig. 1.11). 4. Abra por completo a abertura de colocação 4. Abra por completo la tapa de introducción de
5. Insert the racking handle and rotate it in a da manivela usando uma chave de fendas plana la manivela con un destornillador plano
counter clockwise direction. This will cause the (ver Fig. 1.11). (consulte la Fig. 1.11).
position indicator and device to move from the 5. Insira a manivela de extrcção e rode-a no 5. Introduzca la manivela para maniobra y gírela
CONNECTED to the TEST and DISCONNECTED sentido contrário aos ponteiros do relógio. Desta en la dirección contraria a las agujas del reloj.
position. forma o indicador de posição e o aparelho irão De este forma, el indicador de posición y el
passar da posição INSERIDO à de TESTE e então dispositivo se desplazarán de la posición
à SECCIONADO. INSERTADO a la posición PRUEBA y
SECCIONADO.
NOTICE: When the racking handle is inserted AVISO: Quando a manivela de extracção está AVISO: Cuando se introduzca la manivela para
in the racking shaft, the circuit breaker cannot inserida para operação, o disjuntor não pode ser maniobra en el eje, el interruptor automático no
OPERATION
be operated in any position between operado em nenhuma posição entre INSERIDO e se podrá accionar en ninguna posición entre
CONNECTED and DISCONNECTED. SECCIONADO. INSERTADO y SECCIONADO.
Removing the handle automatically resets the Removendo a manivela automaticamente é Al retirar la manivela, se restablece
racking handle shutter. reposto o obturador da janela de operação. automáticamente la tapa de introducción de la
manivela.
6. From the DISCONNECTED position, continue 6. Desde a posição SECCIONADO, continue a 6. Desde la posición SECCIONADO, siga girando
turning the racking handle anti-clockwise until rodar a manivela de extração no sentido la manivela para maniobra en el sentido
reaching a positive stop. contrário aos ponteiros do relógio até que atinja contrario a las agujas del reloj hasta que llegue
o final (STOP positivo). a un tope positivo.
TRIP UNIT
NOTICE: Ensure that the closing springs are AVISO: Assegure-se que as molas de fecho AVISO: Asegúrese de que los muelles de cierre
fully discharged (spring charge indicator should estão completamente descarregadas (o estén totalmente descargados (el indicador de
show 'Discharged') before attempting to indicador de carga das molas deve mostrar carga de los muelles debería mostrar
withdraw from the DISCONNECTED position. 'Discharged') antes de extrair da posição 'Descargado') antes de intentar revertir desde la
SECCIONADO. posición SECCIONADO.
7. The circuit breaker is now in the maintenance 7. O disjuntor está agora na posição de 7. El interruptor automático se encuentra ahora
position (Fig. 1.12). manutenção (Fig. 1.12). en la posición de mantenimiento (Fig. 1.12).
In this position the cabinet/panel door can be Nesta posição a porta do armário / painel pode En esta posición, se puede abrir la puerta del
opened and means for lifting can be attached ser aberta e podem ser usados meios para armario/panel y es posible acoplar un sistema
to the lifting hooks which can be pulled out levantar usando os ganchos de elevação que de elevación a los ganchos de izado
from the left and right top of the breaker podem ser puxados para fora à esquerda e dispuestos en la parte superior izquierda y
..see Table 1.21 direita no topo do disjuntor. derecha del interruptor automático.
..ver Tabela 1.21 Consulte la Tabla 1.21.
1.4.6 Circuit breaker insertion 1.4.6 Inserção do Disjuntor 1.4.6 Inserción del interruptor
automático
Preparation: Preparação: Preparación:
-- Remove padlocks from the draw out support -- Remova os bloqueios das calhas guia do -- Retire los candados de las guias de la cuna.
slides. berço. -- Retire los demás candados de la cuna.
-- Remove all other padlocks from the cassette. -- Remova os outros bloqueios do berço. -- Desactive las cerraduras de la cuna que
-- Deactivate any cassette keylocks. -- Desactive quaisquer bloqueios do berço. hubiese.
1. Coloque cuidadosamente el interruptor
1. Carefully place the breaker on the fully 1. Cuidadosamente posicione o disjuntor nas automático en las guias totalmente extendidas,
extended draw out support slides, taking care calhas guia completamente estendidas, asegurándose de que los rodillos se acoplen
that the rollers are correctly engaged. (Fig.1.12) tomando atenção para que os rolamentos correctamente. (Fig. 1.12)
2. Remove any still attached lifting means from fiquem correctamente acoplados. (Fig.1.12) 2. Retire los sistemas de elevación que hubiera
the device. 2. Remova quaisquer meios de elevação que acoplados al dispositivo.
3. Push the breaker into the cassette by esteja acoplado ao aparelho. 3. Empuje el interruptor automático en la cuna
applying pressure to the front fascia (left and 3. Empurre o disjuntor para dentro do berço ejerciendo presión sobre el frontal (área superior
right top area) until the motion comes to an end. aplicando pressão na face frontal (áreas izquierda y derecha) hasta que ya no se mueva.
4. Close the cabinet/panel door. superiores esquerda e direita) até que a 4. Cierre la puerta del armario/panel.
5. Prepare the cassette and racking handle as movimentação chegue ao fim. 5. Prepare la cuna y la manivela de maniobra
mentioned above (point 1 through 4) and insert 4. Feche a porta do armário / painel. como se describió anteriormente (puntos 1 a 4) e
the handle into it's aperture. 5. Prepare o berço e a manivela de extracção introduzca la manivela en su apertura.
6. Rotating the racking handle clockwise moves como mencionado acima (ponto 1 até 4) e insira 6. Al girar la manivela de maniobra hacia la
the breaker in. It can be moved from the a manivela na sua abertura. derecha, el interruptor automático se desplaza
disconnect position to the test position and 6. Rodando a manivela de extracção no sentido hacia dentro. Puede moverse desde la posición
further to the connected position, as indicated dos ponteiros do relógio move o disjuntor para de seccionado hasta la posición de prueba y la
1.4-04
81
BREAKER EntelliGuard G
1.4
by the position indicator (Fig. 1.11B). dentro. Este pode ser movido da posição posición de insertado, según muestra el
seccionado para a posição de teste e mais para indicador de posición (Fig. 1.11B).
7. Remove the racking handle and replace it into a posição de conectado, como indicado pelo 7. Retire la manivela de maniobra y vuelva a
its storage location (Fig. 1.9). indicador de posição (Fig. 1.11B). colocarla en su lugar de almacenamiento (Fig.
Now the breaker is ready to operate. 7. Remova a manivela de extração e coloquea 1.9).
no seu local apropriado (Fig. 1.9). El interruptor automático ya está listo para
Agora o disjuntor está preparado para operar. utilizarse.
1.4.7 Sequence of operation: Cassette 1.4.7 Sequência de operação: Berço 1.4.7 Secuencia de operación en la cuna
OPERATION
disjuntor e operações do circuito de controlo podem ser testadas e verificadas
SECCIONADO desacoplado desacoplado disjuntor pode ser operado só mecanicamente fechado
disjuntor não pode ser removido do seu compartimento
EXTRAÍDO desacoplado desacoplado disjuntor pode ser operado só mecanicamente aberto
disjuntor pode ser removido do seu compartimento
A
B
1.4-05
82
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
2.1 Product description 2.1 Descrição do Produto 2.1 Descripción del producto
2.2 Operation 2.2 Operação 2.2 Funcionamiento
2.3 LCD Screen Mode 2.3 Modo de Ecrã LCD 2.3 Menús pantalla LCD
2.4 Curves 2.4 Curvas 2.4 Curvas
2.5 Communication Register 2.5 Registo de comunicação 2.5 Registro de comunicaciones
2.6 Installation 2.6 Instalação 2.6 Instalación
OPERATION
2-00
83
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
2.0 Trip unit 2.0 Unidade de Disparo 2.0 Unidad de protección 2.0
GENERAL
GENERAL INFORMATION INFORMAÇÃO GERAL INFORMACIÓN GENERAL
The EntelliGuard Trip Unit is an electronic device A Unidade de Disparo EntelliGuard é um La unidad de protección EntelliGuard es un
that interfaces with a circuit breaker. It monitors dispositivo electrónico que faz interface com um dispositivo electrónico que se conecta a un
the breaker phase currents, neutral current disjuntor. Ela monitoriza as correntes nas fases interruptor automático. Su función consiste en
and/or voltage and trips the breaker in the event dos disjuntor, corrente de neutro e / ou tensão. controlar las intensidades de fase del interruptor,
of an over-current or voltage related condition. Ela dispara o disjuntor na presença de um la intensidad y/o tensión del neutro y disparar el
evento de sobreintensidade ou tensão conforme interruptor en el caso de que se produzca una
as condições programadas. sobreintensidad o una condición de tensión
It also can provide protective relay functions, relacionada.
advanced metering, diagnostic features, and Também pode realizar funções de relés de
communications. The Trip Unit can be removed protecção, medições avançadas, serviços de También puede realizar funciones de relé de
or replaced in the field by de-energizing and diagnóstico e comunicações. A unidade de protección, mediciones avanzadas, servicios de
removing the cover of the circuit breaker. protecção pode ser retirada e substituída em diagnóstico y comunicaciones. La unidad de
campo, removendo a alimentação e a cobertura protección se puede desmontar y reubicar
The Trip Unit also connects with the circuit frontal do disjuntor. retirando el suministro eléctrico y quitando la
breaker flux shifter to provide the tapa del interruptor automático.
electromechanical tripping function. A unidade de protecção também se conecta a
um percutor para realizar a função de disparo La unidad de protección también se conecta a
A user interface is provided on the front panel to electromecânico. un percutor para realizar la función de disparo
allow adjustment of the Trip Unit’s parameters. electromecánico.
É provida de um interface de utilizador no painel
frontal de modo a ser programada e permitir o El panel frontal presenta una interfaz de usuario
ajuste de parâmetros. para permitir el ajuste de los parámetros de la
unidad de protección.
I²t 'Slope' setting on ST or GF device I²t 'Rampa' ajuste de dispositivo ST ou GF I²t Ajuste de 'rampa' en dispositivo ST o GF
2-01
84
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
2.1 Product description 2.1 Descrição do produto 2.1 Descripción del producto
GENERAL
2.1.2 LCD ACCESS 2.1.2 ACESSO ao LCD 2.1.2 ACCESO A LA PANTALLA LCD
The trip unit has five function keys as shown in A Unidade de Disparo conta com cinco teclas de La unidad de protección cuenta con cinco teclas
Figure 2.2. Any key, when pressed, powers up função como mostra a Figura 2.2. Qualquer de función, como se muestra en la Figura 2.2. Al
the LCD. tecla, quando pressionada, acende o LCD. pulsar cualquier tecla, se enciende la pantalla
LCD.
All SETUP, STATUS, METER and EVENTS Toda a informação de AJUSTES, ESTADO, Toda la información de AJUSTES, ESTADO,
information is accessed through these five keys. MEDIDA E AVISOS é acessível através destas MEDIDA y AVISOS es accesible a través de estas
cinco teclas. cinco teclas.
OPERATION
Connections that are required for other ao disjuntor ou berço. requieren conexiones directas al equipo. Todo el
equipment are the optional zone-selective cableado está diseñado para conectarse al
interlock, relay input and output and the neutral As ligações necessárias para outros interruptor automático o a la cuna.
sensor, which uses specifically dedicated equipamentos são a selectividade condicionada
connection points on the breaker secondary opcional, os relés de entrada e saída e o sensor Las conexiones necesarias para otros equipos
connection terminals. de neutro, que utiliza pontos de ligação son la selectividad condicionada opcional, los
específicos nos bornes de ligação secundários relés de entrada-salida y el sensor de neutro,
Zone-selective interlocking coordinates breakers do disjuntor. que utiliza puntos de conexión específicos en las
REGISTER
so that the downstream breaker is allowed the bornas de conexión secundarias del interruptor
first opportunity to clear a fault or overload Pode-se programar uma entrada de sinal (n.º1) automático.
event. The EntelliGuard G zone-selective para permitir a entrada de instantâneo reduzido
interlocking device reacts to ground faults, (INS-RED) ou para disparar o disjuntor. Uma Se puede programar una entrada de señal (nº 1)
short-time and instantaneous pickups. segunda entrada (n.º2) pode-se ajustar em para permitir el uso de la entrada de
CONNECTION INSTALLATION
Fig 2.2 Key pad Fig 2.2 Key pad Fig 2.2 Teclado
Up ACIMA Arriba
Down Abaixo Abajo
2-02
85
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
2.1
A signal Input (nr.1) can be programmed to allow 'DESLIGADO' ou programar para unicamente instantáneo reducido (INST-RED) o para
for the use of reduced instantaneous (RELT) or disparar o disjuntor. disparar el interruptor automático. Una segunda
to trip the breaker. A second input (nr. 2) can be entrada (nº 2) se puede ajustar en 'OFF' o
set to ‘OFF’ or programmed to trip the breaker programar para disparar únicamente el
only. interruptor automático.
GT-H-type EntelliGuard G Trip Units have two As Unidades de Disparo tipo GT-H do Algunas unidades de protección EntelliGuard G
output relays that can be assigned to the EntelliGuard G tem dois relés de saída que presentan dos relés de salida que se pueden
following functions: podem ser associadas às seguintes funções: asignar a las siguientes funciones:
PRODUCT
--· GF Alarm --· Alarme GF --· Alarma GF
--· Over-current trip (GF, INST, LT, ST) --· Disparo por Sobreintensidade (GF, INST, LT, ST) --· Disparo por sobreintensidad (GF, INST, LT, ST)
--· Reduced Instantaneous (RELT) Active --· Instantaneo reduzido activo (RELT) --· Entrada de instantáneo reducido
--· Protective Relays --· Relés de protecção (INST-RED) Activa
--· Current Alarm 1 --· Alarme de intensidade 1 --· Relés de protección
--· Current Alarm 2 --· Alarme de intensidade 2 --· Alarma de intensidad 1
--· Health status --· Indicador de estado --· Alarma de intensidad 2
--· Indicador de estado
As unidades de protecção devem ter habilitada
The trip units must have the specific option a opção especifica (como exemplo, o relé de Las unidades de protección deben tener
enabled (as an example protective relay must be protecção deve estar presente e habilitado para habilitada la opción específica (a modo de
present and enabled in order to allow the permitir que a opção accione o relé). ejemplo, el relé de protección ha de estar
function to actuate the relay). presente y habilitado para permitir que la
Adicionalmente às entradas e saídas as función accione el relé).
In addition to the in- and outputs indicated unidades de protecção tipo N e H EntelliGuard G Además de las entradas y salidas indicadas
above the EntelliGuard G type H Trip Units also podem receber acondicionadores de anteriormente las unidades de protección tipo N
can receive inputs from external voltage alimentação auxiliar externos. y H de EntelliGuard G pueden recibir entrada de
conditioners. All Trip Units can be optionally acondicionadores de alimentación auxiliar
supplied by a +24 VDC control power supply. Todas as unidades de protecção podem receber externos. Todas las unidades de protección
alimentação de forma opcional de uma fonte de pueden recibir alimentación de forma opcional
Note: external +24 VDC control power is alimentação de comando de 24V CC. de una fuente de alimentación de mando de +24
required for communication, ZSI and some other V de CC.
advanced functions. The extended Nota: para comunicação é necessária uma
measurement functionality requires the use of fonte de alimentação externa de 24V CC.) Nota: para Comunicación, se requiere una
external voltage conditioners. fuente de alimentación externa de +24 V de CC.
Todas as unidades de disparo contam com uma Todos los tipos de unidades de protección
All trip unit types have a connection to an ligação a um contacto auxiliar dentro do cuentan con una conexión a un contacto
auxiliary switch within the breaker that senses disjuntor que detecta a posição deste. auxiliar dentro del interruptor automático que
the breaker’s position. detecta la posición de éste último.
2-03
86
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
2.1.5 OVER CURRENT PROTECTION functions 2.1.5 Funções de SUPORTE CONTRA 2.1.5 Funciones de PROTECCIÓN CONTRA
SOBREINTENSIDADES SOBREINTENSIDAD
GENERAL
The EntelliGuard G Trip Units can provide the As Unidades de Disparo EntelliGuard G podem Las unidades de protección EntelliGuard G
following over current protections: fornecer as seguintes protecções contra pueden proporcionar las siguientes protecciones
– Long Time (Protection against Overload sobreintensidade: contra sobreintensidad:
currents) LT -- Tempo longo (Protecção contra sobrecargas) -- Tiempo largo
– Short Time (Time delayed Protection against LT (Protección contra sobrecarga), LT
Short circuit currents) ST -- Tempo curto (Protecção temporizada contra – Tiempo corto (Protección contra
-- Instantaneous curtos-circuitos) ST cortocircuito), ST
(Protection against Short circuit currents) I -- Instantaneous – Instantánea (Protección opcional contra
PRODUCT
-- Reduce Let Through Energy Instantaneous (Protecção opcional contra curtos-circuitos) I cortocircuito), I
(Protection against Short circuit currents) RELT -- Instantânea reduzida – Instantánea reducida temporalmente
-- Ground Fault Internal Summation (Protecção energética opcional contra curtos- (Protección opcional frente a intensidades de
(Optional Protection against Ground Fault circuitos) RELT cortocircuito), INST-RED
currents) GFsum
-- Ground Fault CT External Summation -- Defeitos à terra soma interna – Defectos a tierra residual (Protección
(Optional Protection against Ground Fault (Protecção opcional contra defeitos à terra) opcional contra intensidades de defecto a
currents) GFct GFsum tierra), GFsum
OPERATION
– Hi level Instantaneous Override (Protection -- Defeitos à terra soma externa – Defectos a tierra retorno en origen
against High Short circuit currents) HSIOC (Protecção opcional de defeitos à terra com (Protección opcional contra intensidades de
– Making Current Release (Protection retorno na origem) GFCT defecto a tierra), GFCT
against closure on a fault) MCR -- Alta intensidade de curto-circuito (Pritecção – Limitación Intensidad cortocircuito
contra intensidades elevadas de curto-circuito) (Protección contra intensidades de
A full overview of the installed overcurrent HSIOC cortocircuito elevadas), HSIOC
protection devices and other optional features -- Prevenção de fecho sobre curto-circuito – Prevención de cierre sobre cortocircuito
per Trip Unit version is indicated in table 2.2. (Protecção de fecho sobre um defeito) MCR (Protección contra cierre en defecto), MCR
SCREEN MODE
2.05 of this manual for a full functionality S, GT-N e GT-H. tipo GT-E, GT-S, GT-N y GT-H.
overview all all Trip Unit models. To establish Aqui descreve-se a funcionalidade do modelo Aquí se describe la funcionalidad del modelo
which functionality is included in a specific trip mais sofisticado GT-H. Consulte a página 2.05 más sofisticado GT-H. Consulte la página 2.05 de
unit please refer to the trip unit catalogue code deste manual para ver as funcionalidades este manual para ver las funcionalidades
on the top of the trip unit front face and the completas de todos os disparadores. Para completas de todos los disparadores. Para
catalogue code overview on page. determinar que funcionalidade está incluída em determinar que funcionalidad está incluida en
cada tipo de disparador, consulte no catálogo a cada tipo de disparador, consulte en el catálogo
referencia marcada na parte superior do la referencia marcada en la parte superior del
REGISTER
2.1.7 Manual or Automatic reset function 2.1.7 Função de reposição Manual ou 2.1.7 Función de reset manual o automático
The breaker reset mode can be chosen by a Automática El modo de reset del interruptor automático se
selector switch on the Trip Unit front as O modo de reposição do disjuntor pode-se puede escoger por medio de un selector situado
indicated in figure 2.3. There are 2 possible escolher por meio de um selector situado na en el frontal de la unidad de protección, como se
positions or configurations . Unidade de Disparo , como indicado na figura indica en la Figura 2.3. Existen dos posiciones o
CONNECTION INSTALLATION
2-04
87
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
ENGLISH
Table 2.2 EntelliGuard GT Electronic Trip Unit Functionality GT-E GT-S GT-N GT-H Remarks
2.1
LCD Screen allowing access to 4 distinct Menu’s X X X X --
Interface
Long Time or Overload Setting
PRODUCT
22 F type (fuse) time bands available - - - X --
Neutral Protection 0-50%-63%-100% X X X X --
Cooling function and Thermal memory X X X X --
Short-circuit Cur-
O O O O --
resulting in a 110 to 900 Milliseconds Clearing time
Clearance times to IEC 40979-1 and IEC 60364 O O O O --
3 I²t Protection time bands available O O O O --
Residual Principle O O O O --
Source Ground Return Principle - - - O N
UEF, REF and SEF applications possible - - - O N
Combinations of UEF, REF and SEF applications possible - - - O N
Current (L1, L2, L3, N) X X X X --
Measurement package
Undervoltage - - - X N
Overvoltage - - - X N
Current Unbalance - - - X N
Power Reversal - - - X N
Trip Target (trip reason indication) X X X X --
Trip Info (Magnitude / Phase) - - - X --
Diagnostics
Waveform capture - - - X N
Trip Counter X X X X --
Event Logger (trip events) X X X X --
Relay based on current level (load shedding) - - - X --
Good & Bad Health Indicator - - - X --
Watchdog X X X X --
Zone Selective Interlock on ST, GF and I - O O O --
Shunt trip status input (2 inputs) - - - O --
UVR trip status input (2 inputs) - - - O --
General relay outputs (2) and electronic inputs (2) - - X X --
Other
Communication 2 way - O O X N
Modbus - O O O N
Profibus - - - O N
24V DC Auxiliary Power supply O O O O --
Text kit with Power support function O O O O --
Key X - Present ; O = Optional , - = Not Possible
Remarks If an N is indicated a 24V auxiliary power supply is required, a C indicates the need of a Power Conditioner
(1) Without a 24V auxiliary power supply, the lowest setting is 0.2.
2-05
88
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
Tabela 2.2: Descrição geral das funcionalidades das Unidades de protecção GT GT-E GT-S GT-N GT-H Observações
Visor LCD que permite o acesso a 4 menus diferentes
de ajuste
X X X X --
Interface
Multilíngue X X X X --
Opção de RESET manual ou automático X X X X --
Seis ajustes principais de intensidade com adaptador de INTERVALO COMPLETO
X X X X --
1; 0,975; 0,9625; 0,95; 0,45 e 0,4 4 x In
protecção contra
X X X X --
1; 0,95; 0,9; 0,85; 0,8; 0,75; 0,7; 0,65; 0,6; 0,55; 0,5 x ajuste primário Ie
Intervalo de ajustes de 0,2 a 1 com 66 pontos de ajuste X X X X --
22 bandas de temporização de protecção térmica (tipo C) disponíveis,
X X X X --
de classe 0,5 a 40 (bandas a 7,2 x Ir)
PRODUCT
curta duração
protecção de
X X X X --
circuitos de
Possibilidade de DESACTIVAÇÃO - - - X --
17 ajustes de temporização (STDB) desde 30 a 940 milésimas de segundo, o que
X X X X --
produz um tempo de corte de 90 a 1000 milésimas de segundo
OPERATION
Possibilidade de DESACTIVAÇÃO - X X X --
Configuração Selectivo - X X X --
Protecção instantânea fixa ou HSIOC X X X X --
stantânea
Possibilidade de DESACTIVAÇÃO - O O O --
Configuração Selectivo - O O O --
protecção instantânea fixa ou HSIOC X X X X --
INTERVALO de ajustes Ii desde 1,5 a 15 x Ie (ajuste primário) - - X X --
Reduzido
Possibilidade de DESACTIVAÇÃO - - - O --
defeito à terra
O O O O --
produz um tempo de corte de 110 a 900 milésimas de segundo
Tempos de corte segundo as normas IEC 40979-1 e IEC 60364 O O O O --
3 bandas de temporização de protecção I2t disponíveis O O O O --
Tipo residual O O O O --
Tipo de retorno à terra na origem - - - O N
Possibilidade de aplicações OF, REF e SEF - - - O N
Combinações de aplicações OF, REF e SEF possíveis - - - O N
Intensidade (L1, L2, L3, N) X X X X --
REGISTER
Tensão mínima - - - X N
Sobretensão - - - X N
Desequilíbrio de intensidade - - - X N
Potência inversa - - - X N
Indicação de tipo de disparo (motivo)
Aquisição de dados
X X X X --
e diagnósticos
Profibus - - - O N
Fonte de alimentação auxiliar de 24V CC O O O O -
Comprovador e Configurador de unidade de protecção com bateria O O O O -
Legenda X - De serie O = Opcional - = Não disponível
Observações N indica que se requer uma fonte de alimentação auxiliar de 24V; C indica que se requer um acondicionador de alimentação auxiliar
(1) Sem fonte de alimentação auxiliar de 24V, o ajuste mínimo é 0,2
2-06
89
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
Español
Tabla 2.2 Descripción general de las funcionalidades de las Unidades de protección GT GT-E GT-S GT-N GT-H Observ.
2.1
Pantalla LCD que permite el acceso a 4 menús diferentes
de ajuste
X X X X --
Interfaz
X X X X --
1, 0,95, 0,9, 0,85, 0,8, 0,75, 0,7, 0,65, 0,6, 0,55, 0,5 x ajuste primario Ie
Rango de ajustes de 0,2 a 1 con 66 puntos de ajuste X X X X --
22 bandas de temporización de protección térmica (tipo C) disponibles,
X X X X --
de clase 0,5 a 40 (bandas a 7,2 x Ir)
PRODUCT
22 bandas de temporización de tipo F (fusible) disponibles - - - X --
Protección de neutro 0-50%-63%-100% X X X X --
Función de memoria térmica y enfriamiento X X X X --
contra cortocircuitos instantánea intensidad contra
cortocircuitos de
Posibilidad de DESACTIVACIÓN - X X X --
Ejecución Selectivo - X X X --
Protección instantánea fija o HSIOC X X X X --
RANGO de ajustes lhi desde 2 a 30 x Ie (ajuste primario) - O O O --
extendido
Posibilidad de DESACTIVACIÓN - O O O --
Ejecución Selectivo - O O O --
Protección instantánea fija o HSIOC X X X X --
Reducido
Posibilidad de DESACTIVACIÓN - - - O --
defecto a tierra
Tensión mínima - - - X N
Sobretensión - - - X N
Desequilibrio de intensidad - - - X N
Potencia inversa - - - X N
Indicación de tipo de disparo (motivo) X X X X --
Información de disparo (magnitud / fase) - - - X --
diagnósticos
Adquisición
de datos y
Comunicación bidireccional - O O X N
Modbus - O O O N
Profibus - - - O N
Fuente de alimentación auxiliar de 24 V CC O O O O -
Comprobador y Confi gurador de unidad de protección con batería O O O O -
X – De serie; O = Opcional, - = No disponible
N indica que se requiere un suministro de alimentación auxiliar de 24 V; C indica que se requiere un acondicionador de alimentación auxiliar
(1) Sin suministro de alimentación auxiliar de 24 V, el ajuste mínimo es 0,2
2-07
90
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
is mechanically restrained so that the depicted de disparo é mecanicamente retraída, sendo de protección es retenido mecánicamente de
button does not “pop out” from the front of the que o botão não sobressai na unidade de forma que el botón que se representa no
trip unit. The optional Bell Alarm contact in the disparo. O conctato opcional de alarme não emerge hacia fuera desde la parte frontal de la
circuit breaker does not change state. muda de estado. unidad de protección. El contacto de
The breaker can be re-closed (Either manually or Pode-se voltar a fechar o disjuntor (Quer señalización de disparo opcional en el
using a closing coil) without resetting the button manualmente ou por bobina) sem repor o botão interruptor automático no cambia de estado.
since it is held in the reset position. uma vez que este é mantido na posição El interruptor automático se puede volver a
primária. cerrar (ya sea de forma manual o con una
PRODUCT
2.1.8 Full Range Rating Plug bobina de cierre) sin restablecer el botón, ya que
se encuentra en la posición de reset.
Fig. 2.4 Rating plug
2.1.8 Adaptador de calibre completo 2.1.8 Adaptador de rango completo
Fig. 2.4 Calibrador
Fig. 2.4 Adaptador Cada Unidade de Disparo Electrónica Cada disparador electrónico EntelliGuard G debe
EntelliGuard deve estar provida de um estar provisto de un adaptador (disponible por
calibrador de modo a funcionar correctamente. separado) para que pueda funcionar
Each EntelliGuard Electronic Trip Unit must be correctamente. El adaptador de rango completo
equipped with a separately available Rating Plug O adaptador de calibre completo encaixa num
OPERATION
Extractor, Catalogue No. FAR reference code catálogo FAR, código de referencia 432861.
432861 . (Suitable equivalents are commercially comercialmente como extractores de circuitos
integrados (DIP). (Otros productos equivalentes adecuados se
available as 'integrated circuit (DIP) extractors'. comercializan como "extractores de circuitos
Grasp the rating plug tabs with the extractor integrados (DIP)").
and pull the plug out. Aperte lateralmente o calibrador com o
extractor e puxe para o remover. Sujete las pestañas del adaptador con el
Be sure to grab the tabs and not the front cover extractor y tire de ellas hacia fuera.
of the rating plug, or the plug may be damaged. Assegure-se de apartar as partes laterais e nao
a cobertura do calibrador, caso contrário este Asegúrese de sujetar las pestañas y no la tapa
pode ficar danificado. delantera del adaptador; de lo contrario, éste
podría sufrir desperfectos.
CURVES
2-08
91
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
2.1
The EntelliGuard G Trip Units require external As Unidades de Disparo EntelliGuard G requerem Las unidades de protección EntelliGuard G
+24 VDC control power for communication. uma tensão externa de +24 VDC para requieren una alimentación de +24 V CC para
alimentação de comando da comunicação. comunicación.
PRODUCT
unit via the keypads. The battery allows the user e ler ou programar a unidade de disparo pelo la pantalla LCD y leer o programar la unidad de
to display data, change set points and provide teclado. A bateria permite o utilizador ver os protección por medio de las teclas. La batería
thermal memory. dados, mudar parâmetros e providenciar permite al usuario visualizar los datos, cambiar
memória térmica. los ajustes y proporcionar memoria térmica.
The battery does not allow normal trip unit A bateria não permite a operação normal da La batería no permite un funcionamiento normal
operation; i.e. over current protection, alarms, unidade de disparo; ex. protecção contra de la unidad de protección, es decir, la
relays, etc., are not functional when the trip unit sobrecargas, alarmes, relés, etc., não estão protección contra sobreintensidad, alarmas,
is powered from the battery. The trip unit will funcionais quando a unidade de disparo está relés, etc. no están disponibles cuando la unidad
automatically shut off after 20 sec when battery alimentada pela bateria. A unidade de disparo de protección recibe alimentación desde la
powered, this to maximize battery life. vai desligar-se 20s após a alimentação por batería. La unidad de protección se apagará
bateria, isto para maximizar a vida da bateria. automáticamente al cabo de 20 segundos
cuando funcione con batería, a fin de maximizar
la vida útil de la misma.
-- A suitable replacement is TADIRAN part -- A substituição adequada é TADIRAN peça -- Un recambio adecuado es TADIRAN,
number TLL-5902/S or SANYO part number número TLL-5902/S ou SANYO peça número referencia TLL-5902/S o SANYO, referencia
CR14250SE which are commonly available from CR14250SE que estão normalmente disponíveis CR14250SE; ambos pueden encontrarse en la
most electrical stores or industrial distributors. na maioria das casas de material eléctrico mayoría de los establecimientos de electricidad
industrial ou distribuidores. o distribuidores industriales.
2-09
92
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
-- RIGHT: Next function or next page -- DIREITA: Próxima função ou próxima página disminuir el valor
-- LEFT: Previous function or previous page -- ESQUERDA: Função anterior ou página – DERECHA: Función siguiente o página
– ENTER: Save or set in to memory anterior siguiente
– IZQUIERDA: Función anterior o página
-- ENTER: Salvar ou gravar na memória anterior
-- INTRO: Guardar ajustes en la memoria
Fig 2.2 Key pad Fig 2.2 Teclado Fig 2.2 Teclado
OPERATION
Up Acima Arriba
Down Abaixo Abajo
Right (Next) Direita (Próximo) Derecha (Siguiente)
Left (Previous) Esquerda (Prévio) Izquierda (Anterior)
SETUP Mode programming must be performed O modo de programação pode ser usado com o La programación del menú AJUSTES se debe
with the rating plug installed. This procedure calibrador instalado. Este procedimento aplica- llevar a cabo con el adaptador instalado. Este
applies to all trip unit types. se a todos os tipos de unidades de disparo. procedimiento se aplica a todos los tipos de
The SETUP procedures should only be repeated if Os procedimentos de programação só devem unidades de protección.
the trip unit or the protection characteristics are ser repetidos se a unidade de disparo ou Los procedimientos de AJUSTES sólo deberían
changed, requiring different set points and time- características de protecção mudaram, sendo repetirse si la unidad de protección o las
delays. requeridos diferentes ajustes de valores e características de protección cambian y
All trip units provide long time over current tempos de atraso. requieren ajustes y temporizaciones diferentes.
protection, long time delay, and some form of Todas as unidades de protecção providenciam Todas las unidades de protección ofrece una
short circuit current protection when installed in protecção de tempo longo contra sobrecargas, protección contra sobrecargas temporizable y
CURVES
circuit breakers. All other functions are optional. tempo longo de atraso e alguma forma de cierta protección contra intensidades de
If a specific set of trip unit functions, such as protecção contra curtos-circuitos quando cortocircuito cuando se instalan en los
relaying or short time over-current protection is instaladas nos disjuntores. Todas as outras interruptores automáticos. El resto de las
not installed that function will not appear on the funções são opcionais. funciones son opcionales.
trip unit display. Ignore setup mode instructions Se um conjunto de funções específicos das Si un conjunto de funciones de la unidad de
for such functions. unidades de disparo, como relés ou protecção protección, como los relés o protecciones
de sobrecargas de tempo curto não estão específicas contra cortocircuitos, no están
The trip unit must be powered by one of the instaladas, essa função não irá aparecer nos instaladas, la función correspondiente no
REGISTER
indicated four methods during SETUP. (see par. menus do ecrã da unidade de disparo. Ignore as aparecerá en la pantalla de la unidad de
2.1.9) instruções de programação para essas funções. protección. Ignore las instrucciones de ajuste
-- Press UP or DOWN until the SETUP mode is sobre dichas funciones.
selected. A unidade de disparo deve ser alimentada por
-- Press RIGHT or LEFT to access the functions in um dos quarto métodos indicados durante a La unidad de protección debe alimentarse
the SETUP mode. PROGRAMAÇÃO. (Ver pág. 2.1.9) mediante uno de los cuatro métodos indicados
-- Press ENTER to save desired values. -- Pressione ACIMA ou ABAIXO até que o modo en el apartado 2.1.9
CONNECTION INSTALLATION
-- Press RIGHT to advance to the next function. PROGRAMAÇÃO seja seleccionado. -- Pulse ARRIBA o ABAJO hasta que se
-- Pressione DIREITA ou ESQUERDA para aceder seleccione el menú AJUSTES.
às funções do modo PROGRAMAÇÃO. -- Pulse DERECHA o IZQUIERDA para acceder a
-- Pressione ENTER para salvar os valores. las funciones del menú AJUSTES.
-- Pressione DIREITA para avançar para a -- Pulse INTRO para guardar los valores
próxima função. deseados.
-- Pulse DERECHA para pasar a la siguiente
función.
2.2.2.1 Entering Set points into Memory 2.2.2.1 Guardar os ajustes na memória 2.2.2.1 Guardar los ajustes en la memoria
1. Press UP or DOWN to select SETUP. 1. Pressione ACIMA ou ABAIXO para seleccionar 1. Pulse ARRIBA o ABAJO para seleccionar
2. Press LEFT or RIGHT to select the desired PROGRAMAÇÃO. AJUSTES.
protection to change. 2. Pressione ESQUERDA ou DIREITA para 2. Pulse IZQUIERDA o DERECHA para seleccionar
3. Press UP or DOWN to change values. The seleccionar a protecção desejada a mudar. la protección que desea cambiar.
values will start flashing. 3. Pressione ACIMA ou ABAIXO para alterar os 3. Pulse ARRIBA o ABAJO para cambiar los
4. Press ENTER to store the value into the valores. Os valores começam a piscar. valores. Los valores comenzarán a parpadear.
memory. The displayed value stops flashing and 4. Pressione ENTER para guardar o valor na 4. Pulse INTRO para guardar el valor en el
the save icon appears on the top of the LCD. This memória. O valor mostrado pára de piscar e o memoria. El valor representado deja de
indicates that the value has been stored in ícone de guardado aparece no topo do LCD. Isto parpadear y el icono de guardar aparece en la
OTHER
memory and is active. indica que o valor foi correctamente guardado parte superior de la pantalla LCD. Esto indica
5. Confirm settings on the trip unit after making na memória e está activo. que el valor se ha guardado en la memoria y
changes by exiting and re-entering SETUP mode 5. Confirme os ajustes na unidade de disparo que se encuentra activo.
and rechecking each changed setting. após fazer alterações, saindo e voltando a 5. Confirme los ajustes en la unidad de
2-10
93
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
2.2
2.2.3.1 Long Time Pickup entrar no modo PROGRAMAÇÃO e verificando protección después de efectuar los cambios;
(Overload Protection setting) Ir cada valor alterado. para ello, salga y vuelva a entrar en el modo
Installed in all Trip Units types the first SETUP AJUSTES y verificando una vez más cada uno de
mode display is always the Long Time Pickup los ajustes modificados.
setpoint. This set point establishes the breaker's
ampere rating Ir. 2.2.3.1 Ajuste de tempo longo (Protecção 2.2.3.1 Ajuste de tiempo largo
contra sobrecargas) Ir (Protección contra sobrecargas), LT (Ir)
The 1st screen allows the user to define up to 6 Instalado em todos os tipos de unidades de Instalado en todos los tipos de unidades de
different user currents Ie that can be set as a disparo o primeiro modo de PROGRAMAÇÃO protección, la primera vista del modo AJUSTES
fraction of 1, 0.98, 0.97, 0.96,0.45 or 0.4 x the mostrado é sempre o Ajuste de Tempo Longo. es siempre el ajuste de protección contra
breaker current rating In. These are indicated as Este valor estabelece o calibre de serviço em Sobrecargas. Este ajuste establece el amperaje
a current value on the screen amperes Ir. del interruptor automático Ir.
A primeira tela permite ao utilizador definir até 6 La primera pantalla permite al usuario definir
The definite current setting Ir is set on the 2nd LT diferentes intensidades de utilização Ie que hasta 6 intensidades de usuario diferentes Ie
setting screen as a fraction of the user current podem ser ajustadas como fracções de 1, 0.98, que se pueden ajustar como fracciones de 1,
value Ie. (xLT = LT multiplier x Ie). 0.97, 0.96, 0.45 ou 0.4 x do calibre do disjuntor 0,98, 0,97, 0,96, 0,45 o 0,4 x la intensidad
There are 11 Long Time Pickup settings ranging In. Estas são indicadas como valores de nominal del interruptor automático In. Éstas se
from are 0.50 to 1.00 times x CT in steps of 0.05. intensidade no ecrã. indican como valor actual de la pantalla.
OPERATION
The pickup value is set at a value of O ajuste de intensidade definitivo é realizado na El ajuste de intensidad definitivo Ir se realiza en
approximately 1.12 x the setting with a segunda tela LT como uma fracção da la segunda pantalla de LT como fracción del
tolerance of -10% to +10%. An additional intensidade usada anteriormente Ie. (xLT = LT valor de intensidad del usuario Ie. (xLT =
accuracy degradation of ±5% occurs when multiplicador x Ie). multiplicador LT x Ie).
waveforms with significant harmonic distortion Existem 11 configurações de ajuste de Existen 11 configuraciones de ajuste de
are present. (For an overview of all available protecção que vão de 0.50 a 1.00 vezes x CT em protección que van de 0,50 a 1,00 veces x Ie en
settings see table 2.4 on page 2-12) passos de 0.05. incrementos de 0,05.
O valor de detecção é definido El valor de ajuste se establece en un valor de
2.2.3.1.1 Long Time Delay aproximadamente a 1.12 x o valor de ajuste aproximadamente 1,12 x el ajuste con una
(On overload Protection) LTD com uma tolerância de -10% a +10%. Uma tolerancia de -10% a +10%. Cuando hay formas
The EntelliGuard GT-H trip unit types offer 22 degradação adicional da precisão de ±5% de onda con una distorsión armónica
long time delay bands that have a shape similar ocorre quando formas de onda com distorção significativa, se produce una degradación
to that of the thermal element of a thermal harmónica significativa estão presentes. (para adicional de la precisión de ±5%. (Para obtener
magnetic circuit breaker. uma descrição geral de todos os parâmetros una descripción general de todos los ajustes
The minimum and maximum delay times and disponíveis consulte a tabela 2.4 na pág. 2-12) disponibles, consulte la tabla 2.4 en la página 2-
their IEC 947 classification are indicated in table 12).
2.3. A second set of 22 delay bands is available 2.2.3.1.1 Temporização prolongada
that offers a shape similar to that of standard (Na protecção de sobrecargas) LTD 2.2.3.1.1 Temporización prolongada
fuses. The minimum and maximum delay times As unidades de protecção EntelliGuard tipo GT-E, (Protección contra sobrecargas), LTD
and their IEC 947 classification is indicated in GT-S e GT-N oferecem 22 bandas de Las unidades de protección de los tipos
table 2.3. All 4 bands are depicted as Time temporização prolongada que têm uma forma EntelliGuard GT-H ofrecen 22 bandas de
Current Diagram in chapter 2.4 of this similar às de um relé térmico de um disjuntor temporización prolongada con una forma
Application manual. magnetotérmico. similar a la del elemento térmico de un
As temporizações mínima e máxima e suas interruptor automático termomagnético.
2.2.3.2 Short Time Pickup classificações estão conformes com a IEC 947 Las temporizaciones mínima y máxima y sus
(Delayed Short Circuit Protection) ST são indicadas na tabela 2.3. As bandas são clasificaciones IEC 947 se indican en la tabla 2.3.
Installed in all Trip Units types the second SETUP ilustradas como curvas de disparo no capitulo Las bandas se ilustran como curva de disparo
mode display is always the Short Time Pickup set 2.4 deste manual de aplicação. en el apéndice 2.4 del manual.
point. The Short Time Pickup function
establishes the current at which a timed short 2.2.3.2 Ajuste de tempo curto 2.2.3.2 Ajuste de tiempo corto
time trip is activated (Ist) and is adjusted in (Protecção temporizada contra curtos- (Protección contra cortocircuitos
function of the Long Time Pickup setting Ir. The circuitos) ST temporizada), ST
choices of pickup settings are from 1.5 to 12.0 (1) Instalado em todos os tipos de unidades de Instalado en todos los tipos de unidades de
times the long time setting, xLT ( Ir) , in steps of disparo a Segunda tela do modo protección, la segunda vista del modo AJUSTES
0.5 xLT (Ir). see table 2.5. PROGRAMAÇÃO é sempre o ajuste de tempo es siempre el ajuste de tiempo corto. Este ajuste
curto. Este ajuste estabelece a intensidade a que establece la intensidad a la que se activa un
Table 2.3: Overload Tripping times at indicated overload levels per selected LTD band , in Seconds.
Tabela 2.3 : Tempos de disparo por Sobrecarga a valores indicados por banda seleccionada LTD, em Segundos.
Tabla 2.3: Tiempos de disparo por sobrecarga en los niveles de sobrecarga indicados por banda LTD seleccionada, en segundos.
x Ir Cmin C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5 C-6 C-7 C-8 C-9 C-10 C-11 C-12 C-13 C-14 C-15 C-16 C-17 C-18 C-19 C-20 C-21 Cmax
Maximum 7.8 23.4 46.7 62.3 93.4 125 156 187 218 249 280 311 374 436 498 560 623 685 747 810 872 934
1.5 Minimum 4.0 12.0 24.0 32.0 48.0 64.1 80.1 96.1 112 128 144 160 192 224 256 288 320 352 384 416 448 480
Máximo 1.3 3.86 7.73 10.3 15.5 20.6 25.8 30.9 36.1 41.2 46.4 51.5 61.8 72.1 82.4 92.7 103 113 124 134 144 155
3 Mínimo 0.80 2.41 4.82 6.43 9.64 12.9 16.1 19.3 22.5 25.7 28.9 32.1 38.6 45.0 51.4 57.8 64.3 70.7 77.1 83.6 90.0 96.4
Máximo 0.21 0.62 1.24 1.66 2.49 3.32 4.15 4.98 5.81 6.64 7.47 8.30 9.96 11.6 13.3 14.9 16.6 18.3 19.9 21.6 23.2 24.9
7.2 Mínimo 0.13 0.40 0.81 1.07 1.61 2.15 2.69 3.22 3.76 4.30 4.83 5.37 6.45 7.52 8.60 9.67 10.7 11.8 12.9 14.0 15.0 16.1
2-11
94
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
= primary current settings Ie | = ajuste de intensidade primário Ie | = ajustes de intensidad primarios Ie
= secondary current settings Ir | = ajuste de intensidade secundário Ir | = ajustes de intensidad secundarios Ir
Table 2.4: Indicating available Long time settings
Tabela 2.4: Indicação dos ajustes LT disponíveis
Tabla 2.4: se indican los ajustes de LT disponibles
Breaker In Multip. Primary Setting Ie and Secondary Setting Ir values in AMPS Breaker In Multip. Primary Setting Ie and Secondary Setting Ir values in AMPS
In do disjuntor Factor Ajuste primário Ie e ajuste secundário Ir, valores em A In do disjuntor Factor Ajuste primário Ie e ajuste secundário Ir, valores em A
GENERAL
In Interruptor multip. Valores de ajuste Ie primario e Ir secundario en Amp. In Interruptor multip. Valores de ajuste Ie primario e Ir secundario en Amp.
400 1 400 390 385 380 180 160 2000 1 2000 1960 1940 1920 900 800
0,95 380 371 366 361 171 152 0,95 1900 1862 1843 1824 855 760
0,9 360 351 347 342 162 144 0,9 1800 1764 1746 1728 810 720
0,85 340 332 327 323 153 136 0,85 1700 1666 1649 1632 765 680
0,8 320 312 308 304 144 128 0,8 1600 1568 1552 1536 720 640
0,75 300 293 289 285 135 120 0,75 1500 1470 1455 1440 675 600
0,7 280 273 270 266 126 112 0,7 1400 1372 1358 1344 630 560
PRODUCT
0,65 260 254 250 247 117 104 0,65 1300 1274 1261 1248 585 520
0,6 240 234 231 228 108 96 0,6 1200 1176 1164 1152 540 480
0,55 220 215 212 209 99 88 0,55 1100 1078 1067 1056 495 440
0,5 200 195 193 190 90 80 0,5 1000 980 970 960 450 400
630 1 630 615 610 605 280 250 2500 1 2500 2450 2425 2400 1125 1000
0,95 599 584 580 575 266 238 0,95 2375 2328 2304 2280 1069 950
0,9 567 554 549 545 252 225 0,9 2250 2205 2183 2160 1013 900
OPERATION
0,85 536 523 519 514 238 213 0,85 2125 2083 2061 2040 956 850
0,8 504 492 488 484 224 200 0,8 2000 1960 1940 1920 900 800
0,75 473 461 458 454 210 188 0,75 1875 1838 1819 1800 844 750
0,7 441 431 427 424 196 175 0,7 1750 1715 1698 1680 788 700
0,65 410 400 397 393 182 163 0,65 1625 1593 1576 1560 731 650
0,6 378 369 366 363 168 150 0,6 1500 1470 1455 1440 675 600
SCREEN MODE
0,55 347 338 336 333 154 138 0,55 1375 1348 1334 1320 619 550
0,5 315 308 305 303 140 125 0,5 1250 1225 1213 1200 563 500
800 1 800 784 776 768 350 315 3200 1 3200 3136 3104 3072 1440 1280
0,95 760 745 737 730 333 299 0,95 3040 2979 2949 2918 1368 1216
0,9 720 706 698 691 315 284 0,9 2880 2822 2794 2765 1296 1152
0,85 680 666 660 653 298 268 0,85 2720 2666 2638 2611 1224 1088
0,8 640 627 621 614 280 252 0,8 2560 2509 2483 2458 1152 1024
0,75 600 588 582 576 263 236 0,75 2400 2352 2328 2304 1080 960
0,7 560 549 543 538 245 221 0,7 2240 2195 2173 2150 1008 896
0,65 520 510 504 499 228 205 0,65 2080 2038 2018 1997 936 832
0,6 480 470 466 461 210 189 0,6 1920 1882 1862 1843 864 768
CURVES
0,55 440 431 427 422 193 173 0,55 1760 1725 1707 1690 792 704
0,5 400 392 388 384 175 158 0,5 1600 1568 1552 1536 720 640
1000 1 1000 980 970 960 450 400 4000 1 4000 3920 3880 3840 1800 1600
0,95 950 931 922 912 428 380 0,95 3800 3724 3686 3648 1710 1520
0,9 900 882 873 864 405 360 0,9 3600 3528 3492 3456 1620 1440
0,85 850 833 825 816 383 340 0,85 3400 3332 3298 3264 1530 1360
0,8 800 784 776 768 360 320 0,8 3200 3136 3104 3072 1440 1280
REGISTER
0,75 750 735 728 720 338 300 0,75 3000 2940 2910 2880 1350 1200
0,7 700 686 679 672 315 280 0,7 2800 2744 2716 2688 1260 1120
0,65 650 637 631 624 293 260 0,65 2600 2548 2522 2496 1170 1040
0,6 600 588 582 576 270 240 0,6 2400 2352 2328 2304 1080 960
0,55 550 539 534 528 248 220 0,55 2200 2156 2134 2112 990 880
0,5 500 490 485 480 225 200 0,5 2000 1960 1940 1920 900 800
CONNECTION INSTALLATION
1250 1 1250 1225 1210 1196 560 500 5000 1 5000 4900 4850 4800 2250 2000
0,95 1188 1164 1150 1136 532 475 0,95 4750 4655 4608 4560 2138 1900
0,9 1125 1103 1089 1076 504 450 0,9 4500 4410 4365 4320 2025 1800
0,85 1063 1041 1029 1017 476 425 0,85 4250 4165 4123 4080 1913 1700
0,8 1000 980 968 957 448 400 0,8 4000 3920 3880 3840 1800 1600
0,75 938 919 908 897 420 375 0,75 3750 3675 3638 3600 1688 1500
0,7 875 858 847 837 392 350 0,7 3500 3430 3395 3360 1575 1400
0,65 813 796 787 777 364 325 0,65 3250 3185 3153 3120 1463 1300
0,6 750 735 726 718 336 300 0,6 3000 2940 2910 2880 1350 1200
0,55 688 674 666 658 308 275 0,55 2750 2695 2668 2640 1238 1100
0,5 625 613 605 598 280 250 0,5 2500 2450 2425 2400 1125 1000
1600 1 1600 1568 1552 1536 720 630 6400 1 6400 6272 6208 6144 2880 2560
0,95 1520 1490 1474 1459 684 599 0,95 6080 5958 5898 5837 2736 2432
0,9 1440 1411 1397 1382 648 567 0,9 5760 5645 5587 5530 2592 2304
0,85 1360 1333 1319 1306 612 536 0,85 5440 5331 5277 5222 2448 2176
0,8 1280 1254 1242 1229 576 504 0,8 5120 5018 4966 4915 2304 2048
0,75 1200 1176 1164 1152 540 473 0,75 4800 4704 4656 4608 2160 1920
OTHER
0,7 1120 1098 1086 1075 504 441 0,7 4480 4390 4346 4301 2016 1792
0,65 1040 1019 1009 998 468 410 0,65 4160 4077 4035 3994 1872 1664
0,6 960 941 931 922 432 378 0,6 3840 3763 3725 3686 1728 1536
0,55 880 862 854 845 396 347 0,55 3520 3450 3414 3379 1584 1408
0,5 800 784 776 768 360 315 0,5 3200 3136 3104 3072 1440 1280
2-12
95
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
2.2
Table 2.5: Short Time tripping times at indicated levels per selected STDB band -I²t OFF. in ms (2)
Tabela 2.5 : Tempos de disparo de Tempo curto aos níveis indicados por banda seleccionada STDB -I²t OFF. em ms (2)
Tabla 2.5: Tiempos de disparo de corta duración ST a los niveles indicados por banda STDB seleccionada -I²t Desact. en milésimas de segundo (2)
x Ir Min 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Max
Tripping 90 100 110 120 170 190 240 270 300 340 400 450 600 700 800 900 1000
1.5 x Disparo
±10% Non Tripping
30 40 50 60 110 130 180 210 240 280 340 390 540 640 740 840 940
Sem Disparo
Tripping
90 100 110 120 170 190 240 270 300 340 400 450 600 700 800 900 1000
12 x Disparo
±10% Non Tripping 30 40 50 60 110 130 180 210 240 280 340 390 540 640 740 840 940
Sem Disparo
(1) On Envelope 3 type limited to 10 x Ir. (2)Timings in Red meet the requirements of the IEC 60479-1 and IEC 60364 standards at a frequency of 50 cycles.
(1) No Tamanho tipo 3 limitado a 10 x Ir. (2)Tempos a vermelho estão conforme os requerimentos das normas IEC 60479-1 e IEC 60364 à frequência de 50 ciclos.
OPERATION
(1) Limitado a 10 x Ir en el tamaño 3. (2) Los valores de tiempo en rojo cumplen los requisitos de las normas IEC 60479-1 e IEC 60364 a una frecuencia de 50 Hz
The ST pickup value (Ist) tolerance band is -10% se active um disparo de tempo curto disparo de tiempo corto temporizado (Ist) y se
to +10% of the set point. An additional accuracy temporizado (Ist) e é ajustado em função do ajusta en función del valor de ajuste de tiempo
degradation of ±5% shall be allowed for ajuste de tempo longo Ir. As escolhas de ajuste largo Ir. Las opciones de configuración de ajuste
waveforms with significant harmonic distortion. para este tempo vão de 1.5 a 12.0 (1) vezes o oscilan entre 1,5 y 12,0 (1) veces el ajuste de
ajuste de tempo longo, xLT ( Ir) , em passos de tiempo largo, xLT (Ir), en incrementos de 0,5 xLT
0.5 xLT (Ir). Ver tabela 2.5. (Ir). Consulte la tabla 2.5.
2.2.3.2.1 Short Time Delay STDB
(Delay on delayed Short Circuit Protection) A banda de tolerância de valores de ajuste ST La banda de tolerancia de valores de ajuste ST
The EntelliGuard GT-H trip unit types offer a (Ist) é de -10% a +10% do ponto de ajuste. Uma (Ist) es de -10% a +10% del punto de ajuste.
Short Time Delay function with both a slope degradação adicional da precisão de ±5% Cuando hay formas de onda con una distorsión
setting and a fixed delay band setting. The slope ocorre quando formas de onda com distorção armónica significativa, se produce una
and delay are independently selectable. The harmónica significativa estão presentes. degradación adicional de la precisión de ±5%.
slope setting consists of three I²t slopes (1, 2, 3)
and a fixed delay. The fixed delay bands have 17 2.2.3.2.1 Temporização curta STDB 2.2.3.2.1 Temporización corta STDB
constant time bands. (Atraso à protecção contra curto-circuito) (Retardo en la protección contra cortocircuitos
The minimum and maximum delay times are (Atraso à protecção contra curto-circuito) temporizada)
indicated in table 2.5. As unidades de disparo EntelliGuard tipo GT-H Los tipos de unidades de protección EntelliGuard
The bands of both the slope and fixed delay oferecem uma função de temporização curta GT-H ofrecen una función de temporización
types are depicted as Time Current Diagram in com um ajuste de rampa e um ajuste de banda corta con un ajuste de rampa y un ajuste de
chapter 2.4 of this Application manual. de temporização fixo. A rampa e o atraso são banda de temporización fijo. La rampa y la
seleccionáveis independentemente. O ajuste de temporización se pueden seleccionar de forma
2.2.3.3 Selective Instantaneous Protection (I) rampa consiste em três rampas I²t (1, 2, 3) e um independiente. El ajuste de rampa consiste en
Installed on the Trip Units types GT-S, GT-N and atraso fixo. Há 17 bandas de temporização de tres rampas I²t (1, 2, 3) y una temporización fija.
GT-H the third SETUP mode display is the atraso fixo. Hay disponibles 17 bandas de temporización
adjustable Selective Instantaneous over current As temporizações mínima e máxima indicam-se fijas.
protection. na tabela 2.5. Las temporizaciones mínima y máxima se
This device causes an undelayed breaker trip As bandas dos tipos de rampa e temporização indican en la tabla 2.5.
when the chosen current level (Ii) and proper são ilustradas como curvas de disparo no Las bandas de los tipos de rampa y
waveform is reached. The pickup value may be capitulo 2.4 deste manual. temporización fija se ilustran como curva de
set in steps of 0.5 x the set user current value Ie disparo en el apéndice 2.4 del manual.
from 2.0 x Ie to 15 x Ie and can be switched to 2.2.3.3 Protecção instantânea selectiva (I)
off. Instalada nos tipos de unidades de disparo GT-S, 2.2.3.3 Protección instantánea selectiva (I)
The trip unit models GT-S , GT-N and GT-H can GT-N e GT-H a vista do terceiro modo AJUSTES é Instalada en los tipos de unidades de protección
be optionally equipped with a extended a protecção ajustável contra curtos-circuitos GT-S, GT-N y GT-H la vista del tercer modo
instantaneous over current protection. instantânea selectiva. AJUSTES es la protección ajustable contra
This extends the maximum (Ii) setting from 15 to cortocircuitos instantánea selectiva.
30 x Ie. Nas unidades de disparo tipos GT-S , GT-N e GT-
The pickup value may be set in steps of 0.5 x the H pode-se dispor opcionalmente de uma En las unidades de protección tipos GT-S , GT-N
set user current value Ie from 2.0 xIe to 15 xIe protecção instantânea estendida. Estende o y GT-H se puede disponer opcionalmente de una
and in steps of 1x Ie from 15.0 x Ie to 30 x Ie and ajuste máximo de Ii de 15 a 30 x Ie. O valor de protección instántanea extendida. Extiende el
Table 2.6: HSIOC devices | Set values (rms) Tabela 2.6: Dispositivo HSIOC | Valores ajustados (rms) Tabla 2.6: Dispositivos HSIOC | Valor establecido (rms)
Overview of installed Resumo do instalado Descripción general de
HSIOC devices in Dispositivos HSIOC em los dispositivos HSIOC instalados
Automatic types: Tipos disjuntor: en tipos automáticos:
2-13
96
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
can be switched to off. ajuste pode estabelecer-se em incrementos de ajuste máximo de Ii de 15 a 30 x Ie.
GENERAL
The Instantaneous pickup accuracy is 10%. The 0,5 x do valor de intensidade estabelecido Ie, de El valor de ajuste puede establecerse en
GT-H trip units have a user-selectable 2,0 x Ie a 15 x Ie ou em incrementos de 1x de incrementos de 0,5 x el valor de intensidad
switchable instantaneous over current , an 15x Ie a 30x Ie e pode-se comutar a Off. establecido Ie, de 2,0 xIe a 15 xIe o en
additional value of OFF appears at the end of the A precisão do ajuste instantâneo é de 10%. A incrementos de 1 x de 15x Ie a 30x Ie y puede
listing of numerical values. Choose this setting to unidade de protecção GT-H conta com uma conmutarse a Off.
disable instantaneous protection. protecção contra sobreintensidade instantânea La precisión del ajuste instantánea es del 10%.
The bands are depicted as Time Current comutável e seleccionável pelo utilizador; um La unidad de protección GT-H cuenta con una
Diagram in chapter 2.4 of this Application valor adicional de OFF (Desactivado) aparece ao protección contra sobreintensidad instantánea
manual. final da lista de valores numéricos. Escolha este conmutable y seleccionable por el usuario; un
PRODUCT
ajuste para desabilitar a protecção instantânea. valor adicional de OFF (Desactivado) aparece al
ST and I setting Limitations As bandas ilustram-se como curva de disparo final de la lista de valores numéricos. Escoja este
In some cases the stated maximum settable no capítulo 2.4 do manual de aplicação. ajuste para deshabilitar la protección
Short time current and instantaneous current instantánea.
value can exceed the Short Time withstand Limitações dos ajustes ST e I Las bandas se ilustran como curva de disparo
current capabilities of the breaker in which they Em alguns casos o ajuste máximo de ST e I pode en el capítulo 2.4 del manual de aplicaciones.
are installed. superar a máxima intensidade de curta duração
The GT range of trip unit always detects the admissível do disjuntor no qual está instalado. Limitaciones de los ajustes ST e I
OPERATION
breaker in which it is installed and where needed As unidades de protecção GT detectam o En algunos casos el ajuste máximo de ST e I
limits the indicated settable values as per table disjuntor em que estão instaladas e os limites de puede superar la máxima intensidad de corta
2.6a and 2.6b. ajuste segundo as tabelas 2.6a e 2.6b--- duración admisible del interruptor en el que está
instalado.
La unidades de protección GT detectan el
interruptor en el que están Instaladas y los
límites de ajuste según las tablas 2.6a y 2.6b
SCREEN MODE
Table 2.6a Maximum settable ST or I settings Tabela 2.6a Máximos ajustes de ST e I 2.6a Máximos ajustes de ST e I
Breaker Primary Breaker Icw Calibre do Ajuste Icw, disjuntor Ajuste Icw
Rating setting 50kA 65kA 85kA 100kA Disjuntor primário 50kA 65kA 85kA 100kA Primario 50kA 65kA 85kA 100kA
In current Ie In Ie In Ie
Maximum ST setting (x Ir) Máximo ajuste ST (x Ir) Máximo ajuste ST (x Ir)
5000A 5000A 12 x 5000A 5000A 12 x 5000A 5000A 12 x
6400A 6400A 10x 6400A 6400A 10x 6400A 6400A 10x
Maximum standard or extended Ii settings (x Ie) Máximo ajuste Ii standard ou estendido (x Ie) Máximo jauste Ii estándar o extendido (x Ie)
2000A 2000A 24x 30x 30x 30x 2000A 2000A 24x 30x 30x 30x 2000A 2000A 24x 30x 30x 30x
2500A 2500A 25x 30x 30x 2500A 2500A 25x 30x 30x 2500A 2500A 25x 30x 30x
CURVES
3200A 3200A 20x 26x 30x 3200A 3200A 20x 26x 30x 3200A 3200A 20x 26x 30x
4000A 4000A 16x 21x 30x 4000A 4000A 16x 21x 30x 4000A 4000A 16x 21x 30x
5000A 5000A 17x 25x 5000A 5000A 17x 25x 5000A 5000A 17x 25x
6400A 6400A 6400A 6400A 6400A 6400A
Table 2.6b Breaker type and Breaker Icw. Tabela 2.6b Tipo de Disjuntor e seu Icw. 2.6b Tipo de interruptor y su Icw
Breaker Breaker Ajuste Ajuste Ajuste Ie Ajuste Ie
Breaker Icw rating Disjuntor Icw Tipo Icw
Rating Ie Rating Ie Ie Ie mínimo máximo
Type minimum maximum in kA Tipo mínimo máximo kA Interruptor en kA
REGISTER
mínimo será de 91% do valor de Icw do valor Icw del interruptor automático y, teniendo
disjuntor. en cuenta la tolerancia, el ajuste mínimo
reacciona al 91% del valor Icw del interruptor
automático.
2-14
97
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
2.2
Table 2.7: Installed MCR devices and their settings Tabela 2.7: Prevenção de fecho sobre defeito Tabla 2.7: Dispositivos MCR instalados y ajustes
MCR e seus ajustes
OPERATION
GG32G to GG40G 100,000 A GG32G ... GG40G 100,000 A GG32G ... GG40G 100,000 A
GG40M to GG64M 100,000 A GG40M ... GG64M 100,000 A GG40M ... GG64M 100,000 A
GG40L to GG64L 100,000 A GG40L ... GG64L 100,000 A GG40L ... GG64L 100,000 A
2.2.3.4 Making Current Release (MCR) 2.2.3.4 Prevenção de fecho sobre curto- Prevención de cierre sobre cortocircuito (MCR)
Every EntelliGuard TU circuit breaker uses a circuito (MCR) Toda a unidade de Todos los interruptores automáticos EntelliGuard
making current release that is specifically disparo do disjuntor EntelliGuard TU usa a TU utilizan una prevención de cierre sobre
designed to prevent damage to the circuit prevenção de fecho sobre curto-circuito que és cortocircuito específicamente diseñada para
breaker when it closed on a fault. In some cases especificamente desenhada para prevenir evitar que el interruptor se dañe al cerrar con un
non Automatic EntelliGuard G types are also estragos ao disjuntor quando é fechado sobre defecto. En algunos casos, los tipos NO
equipped with this kind of release. um defeito. Em alguns casos os Interruptores do automáticos (Interruptores en carga)
The making current release value varies per tipo EntelliGuard G também estão equipados EntelliGuard G también disponen de esta clase
circuit breaker envelope and is related to the com este tipo de protecção. de prevención.
circuit breaker’s close and latch rating as O valor da intensidade de fecho sobre defeito El valor de la prevención de cierre sobre
indicated in table 2.7 varia conforme o tamanho do disjuntor e é cortocircuito varía según el tamaño del
The MCR pickup is activated at the time the relacionado ao fecho do disjuntor e calibrador interruptor automático y está relacionado con el
circuit breaker closes and for six cycles conforme indicado na tabela 2.7 valor de poder de corte e intensidad nominal
thereafter. When the six cycles are over, the O valor de detecção MCR é activado no como se indica en la tabla 2.7.
threshold changes to the HSIOC pickup setting. momento de fecho do disjuntor e está activo El ajuste de MCR se activa en el momento en
durante os seis ciclos seguintes após o fecho. que se cierra el interruptor automático y
Quando passam os seis ciclos, o limite passa a durante los seis ciclos posteriores. Una vez
2.2.3.5 Reduced Energy Let-Through ser o valor ajustado de detecção da protecção concluidos los seis ciclos, el umbral cambia al
Instantaneous Protection (RELT) HSIOC. valor de ajuste HSIOC.
The trip unit types GT-N and GT-H are provided 2.2.3.5 Protecção instantânea “Baixo Nível de
with a Reduced Let Through Instantaneous Energia” (RELT) 2.2.3.5 Instantánea con I reducida
function (RELT) . INPUT 1 is assigned to this As Unidades de Disparos EntelliGuard G tipo GT- temporalmente (RELT)
device that can be activated with a 24V DC or AC N e GT-H providenciam uma Protecção El tipo GT-N & GT-H de la unidad de protección
signal. instantânea de “Baixo Nível de Energia” (RELT) EntelliGuard G proporciona una protección
que pode ser activada no teclado da Unidade de Instantánea con I reducida temporalmente
The RELT function provides a faster Disparo, via um sinal de 24 VDC/AC à ENTRADA 1 (RELT) que se puede activar por medio de las
instantaneous trip function that may be used in ou via comunicação série. (Modbus se instalada) teclas de la unidad de protección, por medio de
cases where a faster and more sensitive A função RELT providencia uma função rápida una señal de 24 V de CC/CA a la ENTRADA 1 o
protection against short circuits is required de disparo instantâneo que pode ser usada nos por medio de Comunicación . (Modbus, si está
temporarily. casos onde uma rápida e mais sensível instalado).
The device is set separately and has a pickup protecção contra curtos-circuitos é requerida La función RELT ofrece el disparo instantáneo
value that can be set in steps of 0.5 x the set temporariamente. O dispositivo é ajustado más rápido que se puede usar en aquellos casos
user current value Ie with a range of 1,5 xIe to separadamente e tem um valor de detecção donde se requiera provisionalmente una
15 xIe. (limited to a maximum 13 x Ie on the que pode ser ajustado em passos de 0.5 x do protección más rápida y sensible contra
6400A type). valor de corrente Ie com um intervalo de 1,5 x Ie cortocircuitos.
a 15 x Ie. (limitado a um máximo de 13 x Ie no El dispositivo se ajusta por separado y presenta
To allow the use of the RELT function please tipo de 6400A). Para permitir o uso da função un valor de ajuste que puede establecerse en
assure that it is set to ON in the set up menu. RELT uma entrada deve ser atribuída à função incrementos de 0,5 x el valor de intensidad
Relay output one is automatically assigned to RELT e a 'LIGADO' na unidade de disparo, menu establecido Ie, con un intervalo de 1,5 xIe a 15
this device allowing a REMOTE status indication de programação. Uma saída a relé indica que a xIe. (Limitado a un máximo de 13 x en el tipo
of the device (ON or OFF). função RELT está operacional e pode ser 6400A).
opcionalmente activada da mesma maneira. Para permitir el uso de la función RELT, es
2-15
98
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
2.2.3.6 Ground Fault Protection (GF) 2.2.3.6 Protecção de Defeitos à Terra (GF) necesario establecer una entrada para la
All GT-E, S, N and H type trip units can be Todas as unidades de protecção GT-E, S, N e H función RELT y seleccionar 'ON' (Activar) en el
GENERAL
optionally equipped with a Residual Ground podem ser equipadas opcionalmente com uma menú de ajustes de la unidad de protección. De
Fault Protection device . The GT-H trip unit types protecção contra defeitos à terra do tipo forma opcional, y de la misma manera, se puede
can optionally be equipped with a set of two Residual. A unidade GT-H pode ser equipada ajustar un relé de salida que indique que la
ground fault devices as follows: opcionalmente com dois tipos de protecção función RELT está operativa.
-- GFsum:That operates on the Residual Current contra defeitos à terra:
device principle. - GF Sum: Funciona sobre o principio de 2.2.3.6 Protección contra defectos a tierra (GF)
-- GFct:That operates on the Source Ground intensidade residual Todas las unidades de protección GT-E, S, N y H
Return principle. - GF ct: Funciona sobre o principio de retorno à pueden equiparse opcionalmente con una
PRODUCT
distance between the circuit breaker and the de 3 pólos, é necessário dispor de um quarto
external sensor is limited to 10 metres. (33 f) sensor externo adicional para a maioria das Protección contra defectos a tierra GF Sum
aplicações (4 condutores). A distancia entre o El dispositivo utiliza los sensores Rogowski
When the device detects a fault current the disjuntor e o sensor externo está limitada a 10 internos del interruptor automático para medir y
EntelliGuard trip unit trips the associated Circuit metros. (3.3f) Quando o dispositivo detecta um sumar residualmente todas las intensidades de
breaker thus disconnecting the circuit or , defeito à terra, a unidade de protecção do fase y neutro, . Cuando se escoge la opción de
optionally, produces an alarm signal. disjuntor Entelliguard produz o disparo para protección contra defectos a tierra en un
desligar o circuito ou opcionalmente dá um sinal interruptor de 3 polos, es necesario disponer de
SCREEN MODE
The GF pickup value tolerance band is 15% of de alarme. un cuarto sensor externo adicional para la
the set current (Ig). The ground fault pickup mayoría de las aplicaciones (4 conductores). La
settings are set as multiples of x CT (CT=In of the A banda de tolerância do valor de ajuste GF é de distancia entre el interruptor automático y el
circuit breaker) in steps of 0.01 x CT. 15% da intensidade estabelecida (Ig). Os valores sensor externo está limitada a 10 metros. (3.3f)
de ajuste contra defeitos à terra estabelecem-se Cuando el dispositivo detecta un defecto a
Without an auxiliary supply the setting range is como múltiplos de x CT (CT = In do disjuntor) em tierra, la unidad de protección del interruptor
limited to 0.2 to 1 xCT. When a +24V DC control incrementos de 0,01 x CT. Entelliguard produce el disparo para
voltage supply is connected the setting range is Sem uma fonte auxiliar, o intervalo de ajustes desconectar el circuito o opcionalmente
increased to 0.1 to 1 x Ict. (= In of the está limitado de 0,2 até 1 x CT. Quando se liga produce una señal de alarma
EntelliGuard Breaker) uma fonte auxiliar de +24 V CC, o intervalo de La banda de tolerancia del valor de ajuste GF es
CURVES
ajustes aumenta de 0,1 a 1 x CT. del 15% de la intensidad establecida (Ig). Los
valores de ajuste contra defectos a tierra se
GFct Ground Fault Protection Protecção contra defeitos à terra GF ct establecen como múltiplos de x CT (CT = In del
This device is an alternative earth fault Este dispositivo é uma alternativa de protecção interruptor automático) en incrementos de 0,01
protection scheme in which the Neutral Current contra defeitos à terra no qual a intensidade do x CT.
is measured by a 4th, or neutral sensor placed Neutro se mede com um sensor situado na Sin una fuente auxiliar, el intervalo de ajustes
at the earthing point of the system. ligação de neutro à terra do sistema. Esta opção está limitado de 0,2 hasta 1 x CT. Cuando se
requer o uso de uma fonte de alimentação conecta una fuente auxiliar de +24 V CC, el
REGISTER
This option requires the use of an auxiliary auxiliar de 24V CC e a unidade de disparo deve- intervalo de ajustes aumenta hasta 0,1 a 1 x CT
supply of 24VDC and the Electronic Trip Unit se ajustar à opção de entrada de transformador
must have the option CT input 'active'. de intensidade CT. É necessário colocar um Protección contra defectos a tierra GF ct
An Earth leg CT needs to be placed in the near transformador de intensidade para defeitos à Este dispositivo es una alternativa de protección
vicinity of the breaker and an interposing CT terra CT próximo ao disjuntor, assim como um contra defectos a tierra en el que la intensidad
needs to be mounted in the breaker. When the acondicionador para dito transformador del Neutro se mide con un sensor situado en el
sensor detects a fault current the EntelliGuard montado no disjuntor. Quando o sensor detecta enlace de neutro a tierra del sistema.
CONNECTION INSTALLATION
trip trips the associated Circuit breaker thus um defeito, o disparador do Entelliguard dispara Esta opción requiere el uso de una fuente de
disconnecting the circuit or, optionally, produces o disjuntor associado, desligando assim o alimentación auxiliar de 24V CC y la unidad de
an alarm signal. circuito, ou então dá um sinal de alarme. protección se debe ajustar a la opción de
A distancia entre o disjuntor e o sensor externo entrada de transformador de intensidad CT. Es
The distance between the circuit breaker and CT está limitada a 10 metros. (3.3f). A banda de necesario colocar un transformador de
the external CT is limited to 10 meters (33 f).: tolerância do valor de ajuste GF é de 15% da intensidad para defectos a tierra CT próximo al
The GF pickup value tolerance band is 15% of intensidade estabelecida (Ig). Os valores de interruptor, así como un acondicionador para
the set current (Ig). The ground fault pickup ajuste contra defeitos à terra estabelecem-se dicho transformador montado en el interruptor.
settings are set as multiples of x Ct (CT=In of the como múltiplos de x CT (CT = In do disjuntor) em Cuando el sensor detecta un defecto, el
circuit breaker) in steps of 0.01 x CT. incrementos de 0,01 x CT. disparador de Entelliguard dispara el interruptor
automático asociado, desconectando así el
The setting range from 0.1 to 1 x CT with a Para o intervalo de ajustes de 0,1 a 1 x CT é circuito, o bien produce una señal de alarma.
+24V DC control voltage connected. necessária uma fonte auxiliar de +24 V CC. -- La distancia entre el interruptor automático y
el sensor externo CT está limitada a 10 metros.
(3.3f). La banda de tolerancia del valor de ajuste
2.2.3.6.1 Ground-Fault Delay (GFDB) 2.2.3.6.1 Protecção temporizada de defeitos GF es del 15% de la intensidad establecida (Ig).
à terra (GFDB) Los valores de ajuste contra defectos a tierra se
This function sets the time delay before the Esta função introduz um atraso antes que o establecen como múltiplos de x CT (CT = In del
breaker trips when a ground-fault pickup current disjuntor diSubst. perante um defeito à terra interruptor automático) en incrementos de 0,01
OTHER
2-16
99
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
2.2
Table 2.8: Ground Fault tripping times at indicated levels per selected GFDB band -I²t, OFF, in Milliseconds (²)
Tabela 2.8 : Temporizações de disparos por defeito à terra aos níveis indicados por banda seleccionada de GFDB -I²t, OFF, em Milisegundos (²)
Tabla 2.8: Tiempos de disparo contra defecto a tierra a los niveles indicados por banda GFDB seleccionada -I²t Desact.. en milésimas de segundo (2)
x Ir 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Tripping
110 120 140 170 190 240 270 340 400 450 600 700 800 900
0.2 x Disparo
Tripping 110 120 140 170 190 240 270 340 400 450 600 700 800 900
0.6 x Disparo
OPERATION
(1) When an auxiliary supply is connected (24V DC) a extra setting range of 0,1 to 0,2 becomes available.
(2)Timings in Red meet the requirements of the IEC 60479-1 and IEC 60364 standards at a frequency of 50 cycles.
(1) Quando uma fonte de alimentação auxiliar está conectada (24V CC) um intervalo extra de 0,1 a 0,2 fica disponível.
(2) Tempos a vermelho estão conforme os requerimentos das normas IEC 60479-1 e IEC 60364 à frequência de 50 ciclos.
(1) Cuando se conecta una fuente auxiliar (24 V CC), se dispone de un rango de ajustes adicional de 0,1 a 0,2.
(2) Los valores de tiempo en rojo cumplen los requisitos de las normas IEC 60479-1 e IEC 60364 a una frecuencia de 50 Hz.
2-17
100
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
As the intention here is to use a standby device ct devem estar em "ON". tierra de la instalación. GF Sum está también
as a backup option care should be taken to activada y usada en su configuración estándar
GENERAL
assure that the 'standby' devices is set to Em todos os casos em que se utiliza a opção GF (UEF).
operate selectively. In the GT-H Electronic Trip ct, necessita-se de um acondicionador Los dispositivos de protección detectan defectos
Unit both the GF sum and GFct options must be (fornecido) para o dito transformador montado a tierra aguas abajo y aguas arriba. Como la
'ON'. no disjuntor. intención es usar un dispositivo En Espera como
opción Backup. hay que tener cuidado para
In all cases where the GFct option is used an O dispositivo GT-H pode estar interligado com o asegurar que el dispositivo "En Espera" está
interposing CT mounted with the breaker and dispositivo "Em Espera" e trabalha com o ajustado para operar de manera selectiva. En la
supplied with the earthleg CT is needed. disjuntor Entelliguard associado. GT-H pode-se unidad de protección GT-H, ambas opciones GF
PRODUCT
configurar para receber uma entrada de disparo Sum y GF ct deben estar en "ON".
The GT-H device can be interlinked to the desde o dispositivo “Em Espera” e/ou
'standby' device and work with the associated proporcionar um sinal para disparar o En todos los casos en los que se utiliza la opción
EntelliGuard Breaker. The GT-H can be dispositivo "Em Espera" situado a montante. GF ct, se necesita un acondicionador
configured to receive a trip input from the (suministrado) para dicho transformador
standby device and/or provide a signal to trip montado en el interruptor.
the 'standby' device located upstream.
El dispositivo GT-H puede estar interconectado
OPERATION
2.2.4 ZONE SELECT INTERLOCK (ZSI) 2.2.4 SELECTIVIDADE CONDICIONADA (ZSI) con el dispositivo "En Espera" y trabaja con el
The GT-S, GT-N & GT-H type Trip Units can As unidades de protecção GT-S, GT-N e GT-H interruptor Entelliguard asociado. GT-H se puede
optionally be equipped with a system that allows podem-se equipar opcionalmente com um configurar para recibir una entrada de disparo
full selectivity independent of the chosen sistema que permita selectividade total desde el dispositivo En Espera y/o proporcionar
breaker settings. (ZSI) independentemente dos ajustes do disjuntor una señal para disparar el dispositivo "En
(ZSI). Espera" situado aguas arriba.
Zone-selective interlocking coordinates A selectividade condicionada coordena os
breakers so that the downstream breaker is disjuntores de forma que o disjuntor a jusante 2.2.4 SELECTIVIDAD CONDICIONADA
SCREEN MODE
allowed the first opportunity to clear a fault or recebe a primeira oportunidade para eliminar Las unidades de protección GT-S, GT-N y GT-H
overload event. ZSI interlocks & coordinates um defeito ou uma situação de sobrecarga. ZSI se pueden equipar opcionalmentecon un
reactions to a fault on the short-time (ST), encrava e coordena as reacções a um defeito sistema que permita selectividad total
instantaneous (I), and ground faults (GF) nos dispositivos de tempo curto (ST), independientemente de los ajustes del
devices. instantâneos (I) e de defeitos à terra (GF). interruptor automático (ZSI).
La selectividad condicionada coordina los
The Zone Select Interlock (ZSI) function A função de Selectividade condicionada (ZSI) interruptores de forma que el interruptor de
Defectos a tierra
Earth Fault (REF)
Montante (REF)
Standby Earth Fault (SEF)
Restricted
Defeitos à Terra
a Jusante (UEF)
Unrestricted
CONNECTION INSTALLATION
Network Nr. of Poles GFsum GFct REF UEF & REF UEF & SEF UEF &
Distribuição N.º de Pólos or or REF &
Distribución Polos UEF SEF SEF
(1) An interposing CT is supplied and factory mounted in the breaker when a Trip Unit with Ground fault is ordered.
(1) Quando pedida protecção contra defeitos à terra, é fornecido e montado em fábrica um acondicionador para transformador de intensidade CT
(1) Cuando se solicita protección contra defectos a tierra, se suministra y se monta en fábrica un acondicionador para transformador de intensidad CT
..... 4th = 4º = 4° ... Int.CT(1) = Adapt. CT(1) = Adapt. CT(1)
2-18
101
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
2.2
Breaker 1 Breaker 2 Breaker 3
Disjuntor 1 Disjuntor 2 Disjuntor 3
Interruptor 1 Interruptor 2 Interruptor 3
Downstream Downstream Power Supply
Jusante Jusante Fonta de Alimentação
Aguas abajo Aguas abajo Fuente de alimentación
24 VDC
-
+ ...
24 V CC
OPERATION
Jusante Jusante
Aguas abajo Aguas abajo
Breaker 4 Breaker 5
Disjuntor 4 Disjuntor 5
Interruptor 4 Interruptor 5
operates with a group of series-connected trabalha com um grupo de disjuntores ligados aguas abajo recibe la primera oportunidad para
breakers and can only be used when a +24VDC em série e só se pode usar quando há uma despejar un defecto o una situación de
auxiliary power supply is available. fonte de alimentação auxiliar de +24 V CC. sobrecarga. ZSI enclava y coordina las
reacciones a un defecto en los dispositivos de
Em casos que mais de 4 disjuntores de saída tiempo corto (ST), instantáneos (I) y de defectos
In cases when more than 4 outgoing breakers precisam de ser coordenados com um ou mais a tierra (GF).
need to be coordinated with one or more mains disjuntores principais ou de entrada, o uso de La función de Selectividad condicionada (ZSI)
or incoming breakers the use of a um dispositivo de intercomunicação ou trabaja con un grupo de interruptores
interconnection device or multiplier is strongly multiplicador é altamente recomendado. O automáticos conectados en serie y sólo se
recommended. The GE TIM device (Catalogue dispositivo GE TIM (N.º de catalogo --TIM1--) puede usar cuando hay una fuente de
number --TIM1--) can be used for these kind of pode ser usado para este tipo de aplicações. alimentación auxiliar de +24 V CC.
applications. This device also requires a +24VDC Este dispositivo também requer uma fonte de
control voltage power supply. alimentação de comando de +24VCC. En los casos donde se precise coordinar más de
4 interruptores de salida con uno o más
Quando uma entrada ZSI é recebida um interruptores de entrada, se recomienda
When a ZSI input is received an upstream disjuntor a montante não vai usar as expresamente utilizar un dispositivo de
breaker will not use the standard ST ZSI and/or configurações standard de bandas de atraso ST interconexión o un multiplicador. El dispositivo
GF ZSI delay band and slope setting. ZSI e/ou GF ZSI e configuração de rampa. TIM de GE (referencia --TIM1--) se puede utilizar
It will automatically use a 2nd set of settings Este vai automaticamente usar as segundas para este tipo de aplicaciones. Este dispositivo
that the user can individually set for use when configurações que o utilizador pode programar también requiere una fuente de alimentación
ZSI is ON. When the ZSI input is cancelled the individualmente para usar quando ZSI está ON. auxiliar de +24 V CC.
breaker will revert to it's standard setting. Quando a entrada ZSI é cancelada o disjuntor
volta para as suas configurações standard. Cuando se recibe una entrada de ZSI, un
Ambas as bandas ST ZSI e a GF ZSI são interruptor de aguas arriba no utilizará los
Both the ST ZSI as the GF ZSI Delay Bands are configuradas independentemente usando as ajustes estándar de banda de retardo y rampa
set independently using the same bands and mesmas opções e intervalos de banda como no de ST ZSI y/o GF ZSI.
options as the standard device. aparelho standard. De forma automática, usará un segundo
Quando uma entrada ZSI é recebida um conjunto de ajustes que el usuario puede
When a ZSI input received an upstream breaker disjuntor a montante vai temporariamente establecer individualmente para utilizarlos
will temporarily delay it's tripping on the atrasar o seu disparo na protecção instantânea cuando ZSI está activado. Cuando se cancela la
Instantaneous (I) device until the fault is cleared (I) até que o defeito é eliminado pela protecção a entrada de ZSI, el interruptor automático
by the downstream device. jusante. recupera sus ajustes normales.
Las bandas de retardo de ST ZSI y GF ZSI se
2.2.5.1 Inputs 2.2.5.1 Entradas ajustan de forma independiente con las mismas
The GT-H trip unit has two assignable Inputs that A unidade de protecção GT-N têm duas bandas y opciones que el dispositivo estándar.
allow for two main functionalities: entradas assignáveis que oferecem duas Cuando se recibe una entrada de ZSI, un
-- Reduced Energy Let-Through (RELT) funções principais: interruptor de aguas arriba retrasa
-- Trip the breaker -- I reduzida temporariamente (RELT) temporalmente su disparo en el dispositivo
Table 2.9 Tabela 2.9 Tabla 2.9
Input Input 1 Summary Description Entrada Entrada 1 Descrição sumária Entrada Entrada 1 Descripción
Assignment Atribuição Asignación
1 RELT Causes unit to use the RELT 1 RELT Obriga a UD a utilizar as 1 RELT
setpoint as long as input is configurações RELT enquanto Se utiliza el ajuste RELT siempre
está activa. que la entrada esté activa.
active. Nota: RELT debe ajustarse a
Note: RELT must be set Nota: RELT deve estar
programada para REMOTA REMOTO
to REMOTE
2 OFF No action taken. 2 OFF Não é tomada acção. 2 Off No hay acción
TRIP Causes the breaker to trip. Disparo Causa o disparo do disjuntor. Disparo Motivos de disparo del Int.
2-19
102
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
The inputs are connected via specifically -- Disparo do disjuntor instantáneo (I) hasta que el dispositivo de aguas
assigned points located on the standard Na Tabela 2.9 mostra-se a atribuição das abajo despeje el defecto.
GENERAL
function ) whilst output 2 can be assigned to the - Alarme defeitos à terra ou Disparo por 2.2.5.2 Salidas
following functions : Defeito à Terra La unidades de protección GT-N y GT-H tienen
--· Ground Fault Trip or Ground Fault Alarm - Relés de protecção dos grupos de salidas asignables. La Salida 1
–- Protective relaying - Alarme de intensidade / Restrição de carga está asignada a la función RELT (Intensidad
-- Current Alarms/Load Shedding - Indicador de estado reducida temporalmente), la Salida 2 se puede
–- Health status asignar a las siguientes funciones:
A Tabela 2.10 proporciona uma visão global - Disparo o Alarma defectos a tierra
Table 2.10 provides an overview of the das funções e sua atribuição em grupos como - Relés de protección
OPERATION
functions and their assignment in groups as se indica no mostrador LCD. A ligação das - Alarma de intensidad / Restricción de carga
indicated on the LCD display. saídas realiza-se por meio de pontos de ligação - Indicador de estado
The outputs are connected via specifically assigned especificamente designados que estão situados
points located on the standard terminal block fitted na régua de bornes standard instalada na parte Tabla 2.10 proporciona una visión global de las
on the top of the EntelliGuard circuit breaker as superior do disjuntor EntelliGuard tal como se funciones y su asignación en grupos como se indica
indicated in the connection schemes of this manual. indica nos esquemas de ligação deste manual. en la pantalla LCD de la unidad GT-H.
La conexión de las salidas se realiza por medio de
Note: The contacts are rated at max. Nota: Os contactos têm um valor nominal de puntos de conexión específicamente asignados que
SCREEN MODE
GF alarm Only works when a trip unit has Alarme GF Só funciona quando a unidade de disparo Sólo funciona cuando la unidad de protección
the Ground fault alarm option Alarma GF
1 Defeitotem instalada a opção de Alarme de tiene instalada la opción de alarma de
CURVES
2.2.5.2.1 Contact Reset (Group 1, 4, 5 & 6) 2.2.5.2.1 Reset de Contactos (Grupo 1, 4, 5 e 6) 2.2.5.2.1 Reset de contacto (Grupo 1, 4, 5 y 6)
If the reason of the contact closure is removed Se a razão de fecho do contacto for removida o Si desaparece la causa del cierre de contacto,
the contact will re-open. This typically occurring contacto volta a abrir. Isto ocorre tipicamente éste volverá a abrir. Esto normalmente ocurre
when a health status warning is produced or quando é produzido um aviso de estado ou cuando se produce una advertencia del
when a current alarm drops below it's threshold. quando um alarme de corrente cai abaixo do indicador de estado o cuando una intensidad
If the breaker trips whilst the relay contacts are seu intervalo de actuação. Se o disjuntor cae por debajo del umbral de alarma.
activated the contacts will be reset and revert disparar enquanto os contactos estão activados, Si el interruptor dispara cuando los contactos de
to their original open position. estes serão repostos na sua posição original. los relés se activan, los contactos se
restablecerán y volverán a su posición original
de abierto .
2.2.5.2.2 Contact Reset (Group 2, 3, & 8) 2.2.5.2.2 Contact Reset (Group 2, 3, & 8)
If a 24 V DC power supply is present and the Se a fonte de alimentação 24 V CC está presente 2.2.5.2.2 Reset de contacto (Grupo 2, 3 y 8)
event associated with the relay closure causes e o evento associado com o fecho do relé causa Si está presente una fuente de alimentación 24
the breaker to trip the contacts will not change o disparo do disjuntor, os contactos não mudam V CC y el
position. A breaker re-set & re-closure will reset de posição. O reset e fecho do disjuntor vai evento asociado al cierre del relé produce el
the contacts to their original open position. reposicionar os contactos na sua posição disparo del interruptor, el contacto no va a
OTHER
2-20
103
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
2.2
2.2.5.3 Protective Relays 2.2.5.3 Relés de protecção 2.2.5.3 Relés de protección
The GT-H trip unit can optionally be supplied O disparador electrónico GT-H pode-se equipar El disparador electrónico GT-H se puede equipar
with a group of protective relays. Each of these opcionalmente com funções de relés de opcionalmente con funciones de Relés de
can be set to either cause the associated protecção. Cada um pode-se ajustar para protección. Cada una se puede ajustar para
EntelliGuard breaker to trip or to produce an produzir o disparo do disjuntor Entelliguard producir el disparo del interruptor Entelliguard
alarm. associado ou para gerar um alarme. asociado o para generar una alarma.
If the relaying function is set to Enable on the Se a função relés de protecção está activada e Si la función Relés de protección está activada y
GT's LCD screen is set to ON, a trip will be ajustada a ON, produzirá um disparo do ajustada a ON, producirá un disparo del
generated, if set to NO an alarm will be disjuntor, se está ajustada a NO produzirá um interruptor, si está ajustada a NO se producirá
generated. alarme. una alarma
The protective relay options included the A opção relés de protecção inclui os seguintes La opción Relés de protección incluye los
following devices: dispositivos: siguientes dispositivos:
2.2.5.4 Voltage Unbalance Relay 2.2.5.4 Desequilíbrio de tensão 2.2.5.4 Desequlibrio de tensión
This function compares the highest or lowest Compara a diferença de tensão máxima ou Compara la diferencia la tensión máxima o
phase voltage with the average of all three mínima encontrada com a média das três fases mínima de las tres fases con el promedio e inicio
phases and initiates a trip if the difference e inicia o disparo se a diferencia excede o ponto el disparo si la diferencia excede el punto de
exceeds the set point, the setting options are de ajuste. As opções de ajuste indicam-se na ajuste. Las opciones de ajuste se indican en la
OPERATION
indicated in table 2.11. tabela 2.11 tabla 2.11
Table 2.11 Tabla 2.11 Tabla 2.11
Item Option Função Opção Función Opción
Voltage Adjustable from 10% to 50% Desequilíbrio de Ajustável desde 10% Desequlibrio de Ajustable desde 10%
unbalance pickup in increments of 1%. tensão a 50% em passos de 1% tensión a 50% en pasos de 1%
Voltage Adjustable from 1 sec to15 Temporização De 1 a 15 segundos em passos Temporización De 1 a 15 segundos en pasos
unbalance delay sec in increments of 1 sec. de 1 seg. de 1 seg.
setting Setting this value to zero (0) Deseq. sobretensão Ajustando este valor a 0, Deseq. sobretensión Ajustando este valor a 0,
disables this function. desactiva esta função desactiva esta función
2.2.5.5 Current Unbalance Relay 2.2.5.5 Desequilíbrio de intensidade 2.2.5.5 Desequlibrio de intensidad
This function compares the current in the Compara a diferencia da intensidade máxima Compara la diferencia la intensidad máxima o
highest or lowest phase with the average of all ou mínima das três fases com o valor médio e mínima de las tres fases con el promedio e inicio
three phases and initiates a trip if the difference inicia o disparo se a diferença excede o ponto de el disparo si la diferencia excede el punto de
exceeds the set point, the setting options are ajuste. As opções de ajuste indicam-se na tabela ajuste. Las opciones de ajuste se indican en la
indicated in table 2.12. 2.12. tabla 2.12.
2.2.5.6 Under Voltage Relay 2.2.5.6 Tensão mínima 2.2.5.6 Tensión mínima
This function measures the voltage in all phases Mede a tensão das três fases e inicia o disparo Mide la tensión de las tres fases e inicia el
and initiates a trip if any phase voltage drops se a tensão de qualquer das fases baixa do disparo si la tensión de cuaquiera de las fases
below the set point, the setting options are ponto de ajuste. As opções de ajuste indicam-se baja por debajo del punto de ajuste. Las
indicated in table 2.13. na tabela 2.13 opciones de ajuste se indican en la tabla 2.13
2.2.5.7 Under Voltage Relay Zero-Volt Trip 2.2.5.7 Tensão mínima com activação de 2.2.5.7 Tensión mínima con activación de
Enable disparo 0V disparo 0V
This function determines if the relay trips when Determina se o relé dispara quando a tensão Determina si el relé dispara cuando la tensión de
all three-phase voltages drop to zero volts. das três fases cai a 0 volts. la tres fases cae a 0 voltios.
2-21
104
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
Item Option
overvoltage Adjustable from 110-150% Sobretensão Ajustável de 110-150% em Sobretensión Ajustable desde 110% a 115%
pickup in increments of 1%. incrementos de 1%. en pasos de 1%
overvoltage Adjustable from 1 sec to15 Ajustável de 1 s a 15 s em De 1 a 15 segundos en pasos
delay setting: sec in increments of 1 sec. Temporização Temporización
incrementos de 1 s. Colocando de 1 seg. Ajustando este valor
sobretensão: Sobretensión
Setting this value to zero (0) este valor a zero (0) desactiva a 0, desactiva esta función
disables this function. esta função.
sufficient magnitude of reverse power is se se supera o ponto de ajuste. As opções de disparo si se supera el punto de ajuste. Las
PRODUCT
detected. The setting options are indicated in ajuste indicam-se na tabela 2.15 opciones de ajuste se indican en la tabla 2.15
table 2.15.
The GT-S, GT-N & GT-H type trip units can be As unidades de disparo GT-S, GT-N e GT-H Las unidades de protección GT-S, GT-N y GT-H
optionally provided with protection devices as podem ser equipadas opcionalmente com pueden equiparse opcionalmente con
the Power Reversal relay and functions as dispositivos de protecção como relé de potência dispositivos de protección cómo relé de Potencia
measurement and communication. To allow inversa e funções de medida e comunicação. inversa y funciones de medida y comunicación.
these devices to function correctly the following Para que estes dispositivos funcionem Para que estos dispositivos funcionen
additional functions need to be set. correctamente, devem-se ajustar as seguintes correctamente, se deben ajustar las siguientes
funções adicionais funciones adicionales
2.2.6.1 Power Direction Setup 2.2.6.1 Ajuste direcção de Potência 2.2.6.1 Ajuste dirección de Potencia
This function selects the normal power flow Esta função selecciona a direcção de fluxo de Esta función selecciona la dirección de flujo de
CURVES
direction for the breaker, either from line to load potência normal para o disjuntor, seja este potencia normal para el interruptor, ya sea
or from load to line. This direction setup also desde a linha à carga ou desde a carga à linha. desde la línea a la carga o desde la carga a la
affects the sign of the normal power metering Este ajuste de direcção afecta o sinal de medida línea. Este ajuste de dirección afecta al signo de
displays. de potência no mostrador. la medida de potencia en pantalla
2.2.6.2 Potential Transformer Primary Voltage 2.2.6.2 Tensão primária do transformador de 2.2.6.2 Tensión primaria del transformador de
Here the user needs to enter the primary voltage tensão tensión
rating of the used potential transformers. The O utilizador deve introduzir o valor de tensão El usuario debe introducir el valor de tensión
REGISTER
range of values is 120 V to 600 V, with an primária dos transformadores de tensão. O primaria de los transformadores de tensión. El
increment of 1 V. intervalo é de 120V a 600V, em passos de 1V rango es de 120V a 600V, en pasos de 1V
AVISO: O ajuste incorrecto produzirá valores de AVISO: El ajuste incorrecto producirá valores
NOTICE: Incorrect set point will result in medida incorrectos. de medida incorrectos
incorrect metering values.
2.2.6.3 Ligação do transformador de tensão 2.2.6.3 Conexionado del transformador de
Eleja a ligação apropriada do transformador de tensión
CONNECTION INSTALLATION
2.2.6.3 Potential Transformer Connection tensão, seja fase-fase (F-F) ou seja fase-neutro Elija la conexión apropiada del transformador de
Select the appropriate potential transformer (F-N) tensión, bien fase-fase (F-F) o bien fase-neutro
connection, either line-to-line (Ph-Ph) or line-to- AVISO: O ajuste incorrecto produzirá valores de (F-N)
neutral (Ph-N). medida incorrectos.
AVISO: El ajuste incorrecto producirá valores
2.2.6.4 Intervalos de demanda de potência de medida incorrectos
2.2.6.4 Power Demand Intervals Pode-se ajustar o intervalo de demanda de
potência desde 5 min a 60min em passos de 2.2.6.4 Intervalos de demanda de potencia
This function sets the power demand interval, Se puede ajustar el intervalo de demanda de
which can be in the range of 5 min to 60 min, in 5min. Com este ajuste especifica-se o intervalo
de tempo para uma média de demanda de potencia desde 5 min a 60min en pasos de
steps of 5 min. This setpoint specifies the time 5min. Con este ajuste se especifica el intervalo
interval for power demand averaging. potência.
de tiempo para un promedio de demanda de
2.2.6.5 Endereço de Comunicação potencia
2.2.6.5 Communication Address
The address options are from 1 to 254, in steps As opções de endereço são de 1 a 254, em
passos de 1 para protocolos de comunicação 2.2.6.5 Dirección de Comunicación
of 1 for Modbus and Profibus communication Las opciones de dirección son de 1 a 254, en
protocols. Modbus e profibus.
pasos de 1 para protocolos de comunicación
Modbus y profibus.
OTHER
2-22
105
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
2.2
2.2.7 Load Shedding / Current Alarm 2.2.7 Restrição de carga / Alarma de 2.2.7 Restricción de carga / Alarma
intensidade de intensidad
The GT-H type trip unit has two Load Shedding A unidade de disparo GT-H têm dois canais de La unidad de protección GT-H tiene dos canales
or Current Alarm channels: Current Alarm 1 and Restrição de carga ou Alarme de intensidade: de Restricción de carga o Alarma de intensidad:
Current Alarm 2. The Current Alarm’s ON/OFF Alarme 1 e Alarme 2. Podem-se Activar ou Alarma 1 y Alarma 2. Se pueden Activar o
pickup settings are 0.5 to 1.0 x In in steps of 0.05. Desactivar e permitem ajustes de 0,5 a 1x In em Desactivar y permiten ajustes de 0,5 a 1x In en
passos de 0,05. pasos de 0,05.
If the highest measured phase current exceeds Quando a intensidade de fase máxima medida
Current Alarm 1 or Current Alarm 2 ON setpoint, supera o valor ajustado de Alarme 1 ou Alarme 2 Cuando la intensidad de fase máxima medida
and remains above this setpoint for more than durante mais de 60 segundos, a saída (se está supera el valor ajustado de Alarma 1 o Alarma 2
60 sec, the output, If assigned to either of these assignada a um destas alarmes) fecha. durante más de 60 segundos, la salida (si está
alarms, will close. Quando a intensidade de fase máxima medida asignada a una de estas alarmas) cierra.
If the current falls below the setpoint of Current desce abaixo do valor ajustado de Alarme 1 ou
Alarm 1 or Current Alarm 2 for more than 60 sec, Alarme 2 durante mais de 60 segundos, a saída Cuando la intensidad de fase máxima medida
the output, if assigned to Current Alarm, will (se está assignada a um destas alarmes) abre. desciende por debajo del valor ajustado de
open. One relay output is available for this Há disponível um relé de saída para esta Alarma 1 o Alarma 2 durante más de 60
functionality. funcionalidade segundos, la salida (si está asignada a una de
A unidade de disparo não permite ajustar o valor estas alarmas) abre. Hay disponible un relé de
OPERATION
The trip unit does not allow the current alarm Desactivado por cima do valor Activado. salida para esta funcionalidad
OFF setpoint to be set above the ON threshold.
La unidad de protección no permite ajustar el
valor Desactivado por encima del umbral
Activado.
2-23
106
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
stored in thermal memory resulting in a curtos-circuitos podem produzir um certo breves pueden producir un cierto incremento de
reduction in the total circuit breaker tripping aumento de temperatura. Durante o temperatura. Durante las maniobras normales,
time. funcionamento normal esses eventos são estas situaciones se controlan y se guardan en
seguidos e guardados na memória térmica la memoria térmica, lo que da como resultado
If the Circuit Breaker has tripped on a resultando na redução do tempo total de una reducción del tiempo de disparo total del
overcurrent event the thermal effects of the disparo do disjuntor. interruptor automático.
current previously running in the circuit will be Si el interruptor automático se ha disparado en
taken into account. (remembered). This can Se um disjuntor disparou perante uma corrente una situación de sobreintensidad, se tendrán en
PRODUCT
result in a prevention of breaker re-closure onto elevado de sobrecarga os efeitos térmicos dos cuenta los efectos térmicos de la intensidad
a circuit running in 'Hot conditions' or cause the acontecimentos prévios são levados em conta. anteriormente presente en el circuito. (Es decir,
mentioned reduction in the total tripping time (Relembrados). Isto pode resultar na prevenção los efectos se recordarán). El resultado puede
after re-closure. do fecho do disjuntor quando um circuito está ser que se impida que el interruptor vuelva a
com a temperatura muito elevada ou cause a cerrarse en un circuito con "condiciones de
redução do tempo de disparo após o voltar a calentamiento" o provocar la reducción
The trip unit tracks these occurrences across a fechar seguinte ao disparo. mencionada en el tiempo de disparo total
time frame of 12 minutes. después del nuevo cierre.
OPERATION
A unidade de disparo EntelliGuard permite que o parte frontal del interruptor automático).
The EntelliGuard trip unit allows the neutral pole polo de neutro seja opcionalmente protegido La unidad de protección EntelliGuard permite
to be optioned with or without a full set of com ou sem com os dispositivos completos de incorporar al polo de neutro un conjunto
protection devices. When neutral protection is protecção. Quando a protecção de neutro é completo de dispositivos de protección. Cuando
chosen the LT (overload) protection device in the escolhida o dispositivo de protecção LT se escoge la protección de neutro, el dispositivo
neutral pole can be set at on of three different (sobrecarga) no pólo de neutro pode ser de protección LT (sobrecarga) del polo de neutro
values. Choosing neutral protection and the afectada de três diferentes valores. Escolhendo se puede ajustar a tres valores diferentes. Le
value thereof depends on the network and a protecção de neutro e posteriormente o valor elección de la protección de neutro y su valor
installation configuration. depende do tipo de rede instalada e sua depende de las configuraciónes de la red y de
configuração. instalación.
CURVES
The following options are available: As seguintes opções estão disponíveis: Están disponibles las siguientes opciones:
-- Neutral unprotected (0%) -- Neutro desprotegido (0%) -- Neutro sin protección (0%)
– Neutral protected and the LT protection set at -- Neutro protegido e a protecção LT -- Neuro protegido y protección LT establecida
one of three values: seleccionada com um dos três valores: en uno de los tres valores.
-- 50% Half Neutral protection -- Neutro protegido a 50% do valor de fase -- Protección de neutro a la mitad, 50%
– 63% Neutral Protection -- Neutro protegido a 63% do valor de fase -- Protección de neutro al 63%
REGISTER
-- 100% Full Neutral protection) -- Neutro protegido a 100% do valor de fase -- Protección de neutro completa, 100%
Setting the LT device in the Neutral pole O ajuste do dispositivo LT no pólo de neutro El ajuste del dispositivo LT en el polo de neutro
influences other installed protection devices (if afecta outros dispositivos de protecção afecta a otros dispositivos de protección
present) as indicated in table 2.16: instalados (se estão presentes), como se indica instalados (si están presentes), como se indica
na tabela 2.16: en la tabla 2.16:
CONNECTION INSTALLATION
2-24
107
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
2.3 SETUP Screen Mode / Tryb (menu) SETUP
ENGLISH A B
KEY Enter GF SUM GF ZSI
Up
Down
(Save)
Right (Next)
Left (Previous)
PICKUP
0,2 xCT
BAND
1
PICKUP
0,2 x CT
BAND
1
0,2 0,21 0,6
SCREEN MODE
PICKUP PICKUP
1,5 1,5 xLT
BAND
PICKUP: 10 11 50
BAND
...save chosen value 10%
1 1
SLOPE SLOPE 0 1 3 ...save chosen value
DELAY (sec): 1
OFF OFF
...save chosen value
A B C
2-25
108
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
C D E
CURRENT ALARM1 MODBUS
UNBAL ON BAUDRATE
GENERAL
PICKUP PICKUP
10% 10 11 50 0,5 0,5 0,55 1
19200 19200 300
S 0
1 ...save chosen value
...save chosen value
RELAY 2 PASSWORD
CURVES
WAVEFORM
CAPTURE
Back to SETUP
PT CONN
REGISTER
RELT PT VOLTAGE
CONNECTION INSTALLATION
INPUT 2 POWER
DIRECTION
OFF OFF TRIP
FREQUENCY
2-26
109
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
Os modos de ecrã não estão em Português
2.3 Modo de PROGRAMAÇÃO no ecrã
A B
PORTUGUÊS Modo de configuração
Enter, Save GF SUM
TECLA GF ZSI
2.3
(salvar)
Right, Next PICKUP PICKUP 0,2 0,21 0,6
acima (DIREITA (próximo)) 0,2 xCT 0,2 x CT
Left, Previous BAND BAND
abaixo (ESQUERDA (anterior)) 1 1 ...salvar valor escolhido
SLOPE 0 1 3 SLOPE
OFF OFF
SETUP Mode
...salvar valor escolhido
SETUP SET LONG TIME
CURRENT
METER 1000V PICKUP GF GF ZSI
x In CT PICKUP
STATUS Ie BAND PICKUP: 0,2 0,21 0,6 0,2 x CT
C MIN 0,2 xCT BAND 1 2 14
EVENTS 1.000A BAND: 1 1
SLOPE: OFF ...salvar valor escolhido SLOPE
OFF ...salvar valor escolhido
SCREEN MODE
PICKUP PICKUP
1,5 1,5 xLT
BAND
PICKUP: 10 11 50
BAND
...salvar valor escolhido 10%
1 1
SLOPE SLOPE 0 1 3 ...salvar valor escolhido
DELAY (sec): 1
OFF OFF
...salvar valor escolhido
A B C
2-27
110
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
Os modos de ecrã não estão em Português
TRIP UNIT
C D E
CURRENT ALARM1 MODBUS
UNBAL ON BAUDRATE
GENERAL
PICKUP PICKUP
10% 10 11 50 0,5 0,5 0,55 1
19200 19200 300
S 0
1 ...salvar valor escolhido
...salvar valor escolhido
RELAY 2 PASSWORD
CURVES
WAVEFORM
CAPTURE
Voltar a SETUP
PT CONN
REGISTER
RELT PT VOLTAGE
CONNECTION INSTALLATION
INPUT 2 POWER
DIRECTION
OFF OFF TRIP
FREQUENCY
2-28
111
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
2.3 Menú de pantalla AJUSTES
ESPAÑOL A B
LEYENDA Intro GF SUM GF ZSI
Arriba
Abajo
(Guardar)
Izquierda (Anterior)
Derecha (Siguiente)
AJUSTES
0,2 xCT
BANDA
1
AJUSTES
0,2 x CT
BANDA
1
0,2 0,21 0,6
LT GF GF ZSI
CT AJUSTES
AJUSTES 0,5 0,55 1 0,2 x CT
x In AJUSTES: 0,2 xCT BANDA
BANDA BANDA: 1 OFF 1 14
...guardar valor elegido 1
C MIN RAMPA: OFF 0 1 3
RAMPA
1.000A
OFF
...guardar valor elegido
...guardar valor elegido
LT GF Disparo
CT Rele Act
AJUSTES
x In AJUSTES: 0,2 xCT ON OFF
OFF
BANDA Cmin C2 Cmax BANDA: 1
C MIN RAMPA: OFF 0 1 3
1.000A ...guardar valor elegido
...guardar valor elegido
...guardar valor elegido
ST ST ZSI Deseq.
1,5 2,0 12 Tension
SCREEN MODE
AJUSTES AJUSTES
1,5 1,5 xLT
BANDA
AJUSTES: 10 11 50
BANDA
...guardar valor elegido 10%
1 1
RAMPA RAMPA 0 1 3 ...guardar valor elegido
DELAY (sec): 1
OFF OFF
...guardar valor elegido
ST GF ZSI Deseq.
AJUSTES AJUSTES 0,2 0,21 0,6 Tension
1,5 0,2 x CT
BANDA 1 2 17 BANDA AJUSTES:
1 1 ...guardar valor elegido 10%
RAMPA RAMPA DELAY (sec) OFF 2 15
OFF ...guardar valor elegido OFF :1
ST GF SUM TRIP ON
AJUSTES ZERO V
1,5 AJUSTES
BANDA 0,2 xCT 0 0 1
1 BANDA
RAMPA 0 1 3 1 For full SETUP see GFsum menu
OFF ...guardar valor elegido
A B C
2-29
112
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
C D E
Deseq. ALARM1 BAUDIOS
Intens ON MODBUS
GENERAL
AJUSTES AJUSTES
10% 10 11 50 0,5 0,5 0,55 1
19200 19200 300
S 0
1 ...guardar valor elegido
...guardar valor elegido
INTERVALO IDIOMA
POT
RELE 2 CLAVE
CURVES
CAPTURA
ONDA
Volver a AJUSTES
CONEX
TRAFO
REGISTER
RELT PT TENSION
CONNECTION INSTALLATION
ENTRADA 2 DIR
POT
OFF OFF DISP
FREC
2-30
113
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
Os modos de ecrã não estão em Português
2.3
2.3 OTHER MODES 2.3 Outros MODOS 2.3 OTROS Menús
2.3.1 METERING MODE 2.3.1 MODO DE MEDIDA 2.3.1 MENÚ MEDIDA
METERING Mode is available on all trip unit types O modo de MEDIDA está disponível em todos os El menú MEDIDA está disponible en todos los
and can be used to access and to indicate the tipos de unidades de disparo (GT-E, GT-S & GT-N) tipos de unidades de protección (GT-E, GT-S y
electrical parameters of the circuit in which the e pode ser usado para aceder e para indicar os GT-N) y se puede utilizar para acceder e indicar
circuit breaker is installed.. parâmetros eléctricos do circuito onde o los parámetros eléctricos del circuito donde se
disjuntor está instalado. encuentra instalado el interruptor automático.
SCREEN MODE
(Estrela ou Triângulo). características de la fuente de alimentación (en
For a power supply with a Wye construction the estrella (Y) o Triángulo).
chosen conditioners must use V=L-N and for a Para uma fonte de alimentação do tipo estrela, En el caso de una Red con la configuración en
Delta construction type V=L-L. os transformadores escolhidos devem usar V=L- estrella (Y), los acondicionadores de
N e para o tipo Triângulo V=L-L. alimentación escogidas deben utilizar V=L-N;
Potential Transformers are available as para la configuración en Trángulo, el tipo debe
EntelliGuard G accessories and are mounted Os transformadores de tensão estão disponíveis ser V=L-L.
and connected externally. como acessórios EntelliGuard G e são montados Los acondicionadores de alimentación están
e ligados externamente. disponibles como accesorios de EntelliGuard G y
se instalan y conectan en el exterior.
Note: Energy reset is supported from setup Nota: A reposição do contador de energia é Nota: El reset de Energías se puede realizar vía
software and over communications. suportada pelo programa de configuração e Menú local o vía Comunicación.
através de comunicações.
Apparent power | Potência Aparente | Potencia aparente L1, L2, L3 kVA 000.000 4%
Real Power | Potência Activa | Potencia activa L1, L2, L3 kW 000.000 4%
Reactive Power | Potência Reactiva | Potencia reactiva L1, L2, L3 kVAr 000.000 4%
Average Power demand | Demanda de potência média | Demanda de potencia media L1, L2, L3 kVA 000.000 4%
L1, L2, L3 kW 000.000 4%
L1, L2, L3 kVAr 000.000 4%
Energy | Energia | Energía L1, L2, L3 kWh 000.000 4%
Peak Power Demand | Demanda de potência máxima | Demanda de potencia máxima L1, L2, L3 kW 000.000 4%
2-31
114
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
Os modos de ecrã não estão em Português
TRIP UNIT
SETUP AJUSTES
METER MEDIDA
STATUS ESTADO
PRODUCT
EVENTS AVISOS
N 0 A 1 kVA N 0 A 1 kVA
SCREEN MODE
L1 - L2 TOTAL L1 - L2 TOTAL
2 V 2 V
L2 - L3 0 kWH L2 - L3 0 kWH
1 V 1 V
L1 - L3 L1 - L3
0 V 0 V
PHA L1
0 kW 0 kW
PHB 60 HZ L2 60 HZ
0 kW 0 kW
PHC L3
0 kW 0 kW
0 kW PHA % 0 kW L1 %
PHB % L2 %
PHC % L3 %
Volver
Back to
a
METER MEDIDA
2-32
115
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
Os modos de ecrã não estão em Português
SCREEN MODE
(salvar) (Guardar)
(Save)
Up Right (Next) acima DIREITA (próximo) Arriba Izquierda (Anterior)
Down Left (Previous) abaixo ESQUERDA (anterior) Abajo Derecha (Siguiente)
SETUP AJUSTES
METER MEDIDA
STATUS ESTADO
EVENTS AVISOS
BUILD Tipo
DATE: FECHA
E 01 BAUDRATE: E 01 BAUDIOS:
PARITY: PARIDAD:
BREAKER Estado
STATUS INT.
Back to Volver
CLOSE/OPEN CERRADO/ a
ABIERTO
STATUS ESTADO
2-33
116
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
The trip unit keeps a log of the last 10 events: A unidade de disparo guarda um registo dos La unidad de protección mantiene un registro de los
últimos 10 eventos: 10 últimos eventos:
-- Over current trips
-- Protective relay trips -- Disparos por sobrecarga -- Disparos de sobreintensidad
-- Shunt trip (Optional, if the coil contact is used) -- Disparo por relés de protecção -- Disparos de relés de protección
-- Bobina de disparo (Opcional, se o contacto da -- Disparo de bobinas de disparo a emisión de
-- Under voltage Release trip (Optional, if the coil
bobina for usado) tensión (opcional, si se usa el contacto de bobina)
contact is used)
PRODUCT
-- disparo por mínima tensão (Opcional, se o -- Disparo de bobinas de mínima tensión (opcional,
-- BIM Trip Unit Mismatch - Breaker Interface si se usa el contacto de bobina)
contacto da bobina for usado)
Module -- BIM Unidade de Disparo de Engano – Modulo de -- Desajuste de la unidad de protección BIM -
Interface do Disjuntor Módulo de interfaz del interruptor
The following information is stored with each
event: A seguinte informação é guardada com cada La siguiente información se guarda con cada
-- RMS currents evento: evento:
-- Phase -- Correntes RMS -- Intensidades RMS
-- Type of trip -- Fase -- Fase
OPERATION
SETUP AJUSTES
METER MEDIDA
STATUS ESTADO
REGISTER
EVENTS AVISOS
EVENT 0 AVISO 0
CONNECTION INSTALLATION
EVENT 9 AVISO 9
OTHER
Back to Volver
a
EVENTS AVISOS
2-34
117
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
SCREEN MODE
2. AJUSTES | GF-INST -------------------------------------------
2. AJUSTES | GF-ST
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. AJUSTES |
2. AJUSTES |
GF-ST-IN
GRUPO 0
4. ESTADO |
4. ESTADO |
BAUDIOS
INTERRUPT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. AJUSTES |
2. AJUSTES |
GRUPO 1
GRUPO 2
4. ESTADO |
4. ESTADO |
ESTADO INT.
TIPO
2. AJUSTES | GRUPO 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. AJUSTES |
2. AJUSTES |
GRUPO 4
GRUPO 5
4. ESTADO | cerrado
4. ESTADO | AJUSTE COM.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. AJUSTES | GRUPO 6 4. ESTADO | DLV
4. ESTADO | ESTADO ERROR
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. AJUSTES | H 4. ESTADO | par
4. ESTADO | PAR
2. AJUSTES | ENTRADA1 4. ESTADO | I
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. AJUSTES |
2. AJUSTES |
ENTRADA2
INST
4. ESTADO | LT
4. ESTADO | NO
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. AJUSTES | INST 4. ESTADO | ABIERTO
4. ESTADO | PARIDAD
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. AJUSTES | kW 4. ESTADO | ESTADO AJUSTE
4. ESTADO | PU | Ajuste
2. AJUSTES | IDIOMA 4. ESTADO | RESET
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. AJUSTES | LT
2. AJUSTES | LT
4. ESTADO | reset
4. ESTADO | AJUSTES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. AJUSTES | M
4. ESTADO | PROGRAMA
4. ESTADO | ESTADO DISPARO
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. AJUSTES |
2. AJUSTES |
MANUAL
DIR MODBUS
4. ESTADO | DISPARADO
4. ESTADO | VERSIÓN
2. AJUSTES | BAUDIOS MODBUS ------------------------------------------
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. AJUSTES | POLO NEUTRO
5. AVISOS | L1
5. AVISOS | L2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. AJUSTES | no 5. AVISOS | L3
5. AVISOS | FALTA COM.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. AJUSTES |
2. AJUSTES |
OFF
OFF
5. AVISOS | CONT
5. AVISOS | DISP CU
2. AJUSTES | SOBREINT 5. AVISOS | FECHA
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. AJUSTES |
2. AJUSTES |
Sobretensión
sobretensión
5. AVISOS | AVISO 0
5. AVISOS | AVISO 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. AJUSTES | CLAVE
5. AVISOS | AVISO 2
5. AVISOS | AVISO 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. AJUSTES |
2. AJUSTES |
F-N
F - F | Fase-Fase
5. AVISOS | AVISO 4
5. AVISOS | AVISO 5
2. AJUSTES | AJUSTE 5. AVISOS | AVISO 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. AJUSTES |
2. AJUSTES |
DIR POT
POT INV
5. AVISOS | AVISO 7
5. AVISOS | AVISO 8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. AJUSTES |
2. AJUSTES |
DIR PROFIBUS
RELE PRO
5. AVISOS | AVISO 9
5. AVISOS | DISP GF TI
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. AJUSTES |
2. AJUSTES |
CONEX TRAFOR
TENSION TRAFOR
5. AVISOS | DISP GF
5. AVISOS | DISP INST
2. AJUSTES | INTERVALO POT 5. AVISOS | DISP LT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. AJUSTES | rango
5. AVISOS | IMPAR
5. AVISOS | DISP OV
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. AJUSTES |
2. AJUSTES |
INST RED
RELE 1
5. AVISOS | FASE
5. AVISOS | DISP PR
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. AJUSTES | RELE 2 5. AVISOS | DISP ST 1
5. AVISOS | DISP ST 2
2. AJUSTES | S 5. AVISOS | DISP ST
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. AJUSTES |
2. AJUSTES |
AJ FECHA
AJ HORA
5. AVISOS | HORA
5. AVISOS | DISP UV
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. AJUSTES |
2. AJUSTES |
ST
rampa
5. AVISOS | DISP UVR 2
5. AVISOS | DISP UVR
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. AJUSTES |
2. AJUSTES |
Español
ST
5. AVISOS | DISP VU
5. AVISOS | VIGILANTE
2. AJUSTES | ST-INST
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-35
118
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
The EntelliGuard G™ Electronic trip unit has A Unidade de Disparo Electrónica EntelliGuard El disparador electrónico EntelliGuard G™
many sophisticated setting features and an G™ tem muitas opções de configuração incorpora numerosas funciones de ajuste
extremely broad setting range. On request we sofisticadas e uma gama de ajustes sofisticadas y un amplísimo rango de ajustes. A
can provide complete Time Current Curves extremamente grande. A pedido nós podemos petición del usuario, podemos ofrecer curvas de
covering all installed protection devices. providenciar Curvas completas de Tempo disparo completas que abarcan todos los
PRODUCT
Completo
Linhas Vermelha e Azul Escura = Tempo Anterior ao I2t ON & M d
Disparo
ST - Dispositivo de protección
Ajustado a 6 x Ir de 2160 A
Ist = 12960 A
Banda STDB 10
GF - Dispositivo de protección
Ajustado a 0,6 x Ie de 2.500A Green & Light Blue Linel = Full Clearing time
(Ig = 1500 A) Red Line & Dark Blue Line = Non Tripping time
OTHER
2-36
119
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
100 100
1 1
0,1 0,1
1,00 10,00 100,00 1,00 10,00 100,00
CURVES
x Breaker Rating In 7,2 x x Breaker Rating In 7,2 x
100 100
1 1
0,1 0,1
1,00 10,00 100,00 1,00 10,00 100,00
x Breaker Rating In 7,2 x x Breaker Rating In 7,2 x
2-37
120
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
10000 10000
LT set at Breaker Rating In - Time Current Curve LT set at Breaker Rating In - Time Current Curve
2h 2h
Setting Range Setting Range
Ie = 0,975, 0,9625, 0,95, 0,45 or 0,4 x In
LT- Protection Device Ie = 0,975, 0,9625, 0,95, 0,45 or 0,4 x In LT- Protection Device
Ir = 0,5 to 1 x Ie in steps of 0,25 - Band C-05 Ir = 0,5 to 1 x Ie in steps of 0,25 - Band C-01
Total Setting Range 0,2 - 1 x In Total Setting Range 0,2 - 1 x In
- Band C-10 - Band C-18
- Band C-15
- Band C-21
1000 1000
PRODUCT
100 100
OPERATION
1 1
0,1 0,1
1,00 10,00 100,00 1,00 10,00 100,00
CURVES
100 100
10 10
Tripping Time In Seconds (s)
1 1
0,1 0,1
1,00 10,00 100,00 1,00 10,00 100,00
x Breaker Rating In x Breaker Rating In
2-38
121
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
100 100
10 10
Tripping Time In Seconds (s)
1 1
0,1 0,1
1,00 10,00 100,00 1,00 10,00 100,00
CURVES
x Breaker Rating In x Breaker Rating In
6 4
5 3
0,1 1 2
0,1
4
3
2
1 Green line = Full Clearing time Green line = Full Clearing time
Red Line = Non Tripping time Red Line = Non Tripping time
Tripping Time In Seconds (s)
0,01
Tripping Time In Seconds (s)
0,01
0,001 0,001
1,00 10,00 100,00 1,00 10,00 100,00
x Breaker Rating In x Breaker Rating In
2-39
122
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
1 17 1 16
15 - Band STDB 13 16
0,8 15 - Band STDB 14
0,8 14
13 - Band STDB 15 14 - Band STDB 16
0,6 13 0,6
- Band STDB 17 12
11 12
0,4 11 0,4 10
9
10 8
9 7
8
0,2 7 6
5 0,2
6
5 3 4
OPERATION
0,1 1 0,1 2
4
3
2
1 Green line = Full Clearing time Green line = Full Clearing time
Red Line = Non Tripping time Red Line = Non Tripping time
SCREEN MODE
Tripping Time In Seconds (s)
0,01 0,01
0,001 0,001
1,00 10,00 100,00 1,00 10,00 100,00
CURVES
0,4 11 0,4 10
9
10 8
9 7
8
0,2 7 0,2 6
5
6
4
5 3
2
0,1 1 0,1
4
3
1 2
Green line = Full Clearing time Green line = Full Clearing time
Red Line = Non Tripping time Red Line = Non Tripping time
Tripping Time In Seconds (s)
0,01 0,01
0,001 0,001
1,00 10,00 100,00 1,00 10,00 100,00
x Breaker Rating In x Breaker Rating In
2-40
123
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
Green line = Full Clearing time Green line = Full Clearing time
Red Line = Non Tripping time Red Line = Non Tripping time
0,01 0,01
0,001 0,001
1,00 10,00 100,00 1,00 10,00 100,00
CURVES
x Breaker Rating In x Breaker Rating In
1 1
- Time Current Curve - Time Current Curve
LT set Breaker Rating In I - Protection Device LT set Breaker Rating In Ext.I - protection device
HI Setting Range
2 to 15 x Ie in steps of 0,5
RELT - Protection Device HI Setting Range RELT - Protection Device
2 to 30 x Ie in steps of 0,5
i f
Green line = Full Clearing time Green line = Full Clearing time
Red Line = Non Tripping time Red Line = Non Tripping time
0,01 0,01
Tripping Time in Seconds (S)
0,001 0,001
1,00 10,00 100,00 1,00 10,00 100,00
2-41
124
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
1 1
- Time Current Curve - Time Current Curve
HSIOC - Protection Device HSIOC - Protection Device
I Setting On I - Present & ON I - NOT PRESENT OR OFF
set at 15kA ST Set at 12,5kA
STDB 1
PRODUCT
100kA
85kA
65kA
0,1 0,1 50kA
OPERATION
0,01 0,01
SCREEN MODE
Tripping Time in Seconds (S)
50kA
65kA
85kA
100kA
0,001 0,001
1000 10000 100000 1000000 1000 10000 100000 1000000
CURVES
Amps Amps
- Band GFDB 04
- Band GFDB 05 - Band GFDB 06
- Band GFDB 07 - Band GFDB 08
LT set at Breaker Rating In - Band GFDB 09 LT set at Breaker Rating In - Band GFDB 10
Setting Range Setting Range
0,2 to 1 x In in steps of 0,01 - Band GFDB 11 0,2 to 1 x In in steps of 0,01
- Band GFDB 12
- Band GFDB 13 - Band GFDB 14
1 1 14
14
CONNECTION INSTALLATION
13
0,8 13 0,8 12
12
11
0,6 11 0,6
10
9 10
0,4 0,4
9 8
7
8 6
7 5
6
0,2 5 0,2 4
3
4
2
3 1
0,1 0,1
Green line = Full Clearing time
Red Line = Non Tripping time
2
Tripping Time In Seconds (s)
Tripping Time In Seconds (s)
0,01 0,01
0,10 1,00 10,00 0,10 1,00 10,00
x Breaker Rating In x Breaker Rating In
2-42
125
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
1 1 14
13 14
0,8 13 0,8 12
11 12
0,6 11 0,6
10
9 10
0,4 9 0,4
8
7
8 6
7 5
6
0,2 4
5 0,2
3
4 2
3 1
0,1 0,1
Green line = Full Clearing time
Green line = Full Clearing time Red Line = Non Tripping time
Red Line = Non Tripping time 2
Tripping Time In Seconds (s)
0,01 0,01
0,10 1,00 10,00 0,10 1,00 10,00
CURVES
x Breaker Rating In x Breaker Rating In
1 1 14
13 14
0,8 13 0,8 12
11 12
0,6 11 0,6
10
9 10
0,4 9
0,4
8
7
8 6
7 5
6
0,2 4
5 0,2
3
4 2
3 1
0,1 0,1
Green line = Full Clearing time
Green line = Full Clearing time Red Line = Non Tripping time
Red Line = Non Tripping time 2
Tripping Time In Seconds (s)
0,01 0,01
0,10 1,00 10,00 0,10 1,00 10,00
x Breaker Rating In x Breaker Rating In
2-43
126
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
10 LT set at Breaker Rating In - Time Current Curve 10 LT set at Breaker Rating In - Time Current Curve
Setting Range Setting Range
0,2 to 1 x In in steps of 0,01
GF- Protection Device 0,2 to 1 x In in steps of 0,01 GF- Protection Device
i f
I2t “max.”-ON- I2t “max.”-ON-
- Band GFDB 01 - Band GFDB 02
- Band GFDB 03 - Band GFDB 04
- Band GFDB 05 - Band GFDB 06
- Band GFDB 07 - Band GFDB 08
- Band GFDB 09 - Band GFDB 10
PRODUCT
1 1 14
13 14
0,8 13 0,8 12
11 12
0,6 11 0,6
10
9 10
OPERATION
0,4 9
0,4
8
7
8 6
7 5
6
4
0,2 5 0,2
3
4 2
3 1
0,1 0,1
Green line = Full Clearing time
SCREEN MODE
Green line = Full Clearing time Red Line = Non Tripping time
Red Line = Non Tripping time 2
Tripping Time In Seconds (s)
1
CURVES
0,01 0,01
0,10 1,00 10,00 0,10 1,00 10,00
x Breaker Rating In x Breaker Rating In
I²t 'Slope' setting on ST or GF device I²t 'Rampa' ajuste de dispositivo ST ou GF I²t Ajuste de 'rampa' en dispositivo ST o GF
Ii Instantaneous Short circuit Current Ii Ajuste de corrente de curto-circuito Ii Ajuste de intensidad de cortocircuito
setting instantânea instantánea
In Current rating of Breaker In Intensidade nominal do disjuntor In Intensidad nominal del interruptor
Ir LT or overload Current setting Ir LT ou Ajuste de intensidade de Ir LT Ajuste intensidad sobrecarga
Ist ST or Timed Short circuit Current setting sobrecarga
Ist ST ou ajuste de corrente de curto- Ist ST Ajuste intensidad de cortocircuito
LT Long Time or Overload protection circuito temporizada temporizada
LTDB LT or overload time delay band LT Protecção contra sobrecargas LT Protección contra sobrecargas
MCR Making Current Release LTDB Temporização contra sobrecargas LTDB LT o temporización contra sobrecargas
RELT Reduced Instantaneous MCR Protecção contra fecho em curto- MCR Prevención de cierre sobre cortocircuito
ST Short Time or Timed Short circuit circuito
Current setting RELT Instantâneo reduzido RELT Instantáneo reducido
STDB ST or short circuit time delay band ST Ajuste de intensidade de curto-circuito ST Ajuste de intensidad de cortocircuito
STDB Temporização contra curtos-circuitos
x CT Multiple of installed sensor rating (In x CT Múltiplos do valor do sensor (nos tipos STDB ST o temporización contra
IEC EntelliGuard types =In) IEC EntelliGuard = In) cortocircuitos
x CT Múltiplo de valor nominal del sensor
x Ie Multiple of Primary Breaker setting Ie x Ie Múltiplos dos ajuste primário Ie instalado (en los tipos IEC de EntelliGuard G =In)
x Ie Múltiplo de ajuste de interruptor
OTHER
2-44
127
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
35 ZSI Enable 0-Disable, 1-GT-ST (Z), 2-GR-ST-Inst (T) Read 224 Short Time Kst 0- OFF 1- I²t Low 2- I²t Med. Read/Write
37 MCR Level Low 16 bits --- Read 3- I²t High
38 MCR Level High 16 bits --- Read
39 HSISC Level Low 16 bits --- Read 225 Instantaneous Trip Pickup 0 Off (For switchable Inst only) Read/Write
1- Invalid 11- 6.5 21- 11.5
40 HSICS Level High 16 bits --- Read 2- 0 12- 7 22- 12
3- 2.5 13- 7.5 23- 12.5
81 Instantaneous 0-Disable, 1-15X Switchable. Read 4- 3 14- 8 24- 13
98 Breaker Serial Number - Low 16 bit - Read 5- 3.5 15- 8.5 25- 13.5
99 Breaker Serial Number - High 16 bits - Read 6- 4 16- 9 26- 14
7- 4.5 17- 9.5 27- 14.5
107 Reduce Instantaneous 0- Disable, 1-Enable Read 8- 5 18- 10 28- 15
9- 5.5 19- 10.5
202 EntelliGuard Ie setting 0- Undefined 23 - 1125, 46 - 3072, Read&Write 10- 6 20- 11
1- 250, 24 - 1196, 47 - 3104,
2 - 280, 25 - 1210, 48 - 3136, 226 Reduced Instantaneous Trip Pickup 0- OFF (for switchable only) Read/Write
3 - 315, 26 - 1225, 49 - 3200, 1- 1.5 11- 6.5 21- 11.5
4 - 350, 27 - 1250, 50- 3840, 2- 2 12- 7 22- 12
REGISTER
5 - 400, 28 - 1280, 51- 3880, 3- 2.5 13- 7.5 23- 12.5
6 - 450, 29 - 1440, 52 - 3920, 4- 3 14- 8 24- 13
7 - 500, 30- 1536,53 - 4000, 5- 3.5 15- 8.5 25- 13.5
8 - 560, 31- 1552,54 - 4800, 6- 4 17- 9.5 27- 14.5
9 - 605, 32 - 1568, 55 - 4850, 8- 5 18- 10 28- 15
10- 610, 33 - 1600, 56 - 4900, 9- 5.5 19- 10.5
11- 615, 34 - 1800, 57 - 5000, 10- 6 20- 11
12 - 630, 35 - 1920, 58 - 6144,
13 - 720, 36 - 1940, 59 - 6208, 233 GF Sum Trip Pickup 1- 0.10 82- 0.91
14 - 768, 37 - 1960, 60- 6272, 2- 0.11 83- 0.92
15 - 776, 38 - 2000, 61- 6400, 3- 0.12 In steps 84- 0.93
16 - 784, 39 - 2250, 62 - 160, 4- 0.13 of 0.01 85- 0.94
17 - 800, 40- 2400,63 - 180, 5- 0.14 Until 86- 0.95
18 - 900, 41- 2425,64 - 380, 6- 0.15 87- 0.96
19 - 960, 42 - 2450, 65 - 385, 7- 0.16 88- 0.97
20- 970, 43 - 2500, 66 - 390, 8- 0.17 89- 0.98
21- 980, 44 - 2560, 9- 0.18 90- 0.99
22 -1000, 45 - 2880, 10- 0.19 91- 1.00
206 Neutral Pole Rating 0-50%, 1-63%, 2-100% Read/Write 234 GF Sum Delay Band 0- Off 6- Band6 12- Band12 Read/Write
1- Band1 7- Band7 13- Band13
207 ZSI Combination 0 Read/Write 2- Band2 8- Band8 14- Band14
1-GF 4-Instantaneous 3- Band3 9- Band9
2-GF&ST 5-GF and Inst 4- Band4 10- Band10
3-ST 7-GF, ST and Inst 5- Band5 11- Band11
208 PT Primary Voltage 120- 600 Read/Write 235 GF Sum K Value 0- OFF 1- I²t Low Read/Write
209 PT Connection 0- Ph-N 1- Ph-Ph Read/Write 2- I²t Medium 3- I²t High' Read/Write
210 Password Protection 0 to 20 16- Lock 19- Unlock Read/Write 271 Relay1 (Output1) Function 1- Group 1 4- Group 4 7- Group 7 Read/Write
211 Modbus Slave Address 8 bit value Read/Write 2- Group 2 5- Group 5
3- Group 3 6- Group 6
213 Comm. Setting 0- 300-8N2 7- 300-8O1 14- 300-8E1 Read/Write 272 Relay2 (Output2) Function 1- Group 1 4- Group 4 7- Group 7 Read/Write
1- 600-8N2 8- 600-8O1 15- 600-8E1 2- Group 2 5- Group 5
2- 1200-8N2 9- 1200-8O1 16- 1200-8E1 3- Group 3 6- Group 6
2-45
128
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
ENGLISH ENGLISH
275 Input 1 Function 0- None 1- Trip Breaker Read/Write 56 Power Apparent Ph. L1Lo 16 bits 32 bit Read
2- Reduc. Instant. 57 Power Apparent Ph. L1Hi 16 bits - Read
GENERAL
276 Input 2 Function 0- None 1- Trip Breaker Read/Write 58 Power Apparent Ph. L2Lo 16 bits 32 bit Read
59 Power Apparent Ph. L2Hi 16 bits - Read
286 Language 0- English 2- Spanish 4- Chinese Read/Write
1- French 3- German 60 Power Apparent Ph. L3 - Lo 16 bits 32 bit Read
61 Power Apparent Ph. L3 - Hi 16 bits - Read
287 Time Sync Year 8 bit Read/Write 62 Power Apparent Phase Total - Lo 16 bits 32 bit Read
288 Time Sync Month 8 bit Read/Write 63 Power Apparent Phase Total - Hi 16 bits - Read
289 Time Sync Date 8 bit Read/Write 64 Power Demand Total - Hi 16 bits 32 bit Read
290 Time Sync Day 8 bit Read/Write 65 Power Demand Total - Hi 16 bits - Read
PRODUCT
291 Time Sync Hour 8 bit Read/Write 66 Frequency Measured 16 bit Read
292 Time Sync Minute 8 bit Read/Write 67 Event 1 8 bit Read
293 Time Sync Second 8 bit Read/Write 68 Year 8 bit Read
294 Health status output type 0- NC 1- NO Read/Write 69 Month 8 bit Read
302 ZSI Short Time Delay Band 0- Off 6- Band6 12- Band12 Read/Write 70 Date 8 bit Read
1- Band1 7- Band7 13- Band13 71 Hour 8 bit Read
2- Band2 8- Band8 14- Band14 72 Minute 8 bit Read
3- Band3 9- Band9 15- Band 15 73 Second 8 bit Read
OPERATION
23 Current Ph. L2(LO 16 bits) 32 bit Read 101 Hour 8 bit Read
24 Current Ph. L2(HI 16 bits) - Read 102 Minute 8 bit Read
25 Current Ph. L3(LO 16 bits) 32 bit Read 103 Second 8 bit Read
26 Current Ph. L3(HI 16 bits) - Read 104 Phase 8 bit Read
27 Current Phase N(LO 16 bits) 32 bit Read 105 Event Specific 1 16 bit Read
28 Current Phase N(HI 16 bits) - Read 106 Event Specific 2 16 bit Read
29 Rating Plug Value - Read 107 Event 5 8 bit Read
108 Year 8 bit Read
CONNECTION INSTALLATION
31 Energy Total (0-15 bits) 16 bit Read 109 Month 8 bit Read
32 Energy Total (16-3 1 bits) 16 bit Read
33 Energy Total (32-47 bits) 16 bit Read 110 Date 8 bit Read
34 Energy Total (48-63 bits) 16 bit Read 111 Hour 8 bit Read
35 Energy Rollover Count 16 bit Read 112 Minute 8 bit Read
36 Power Factor Ph. L1 16 bit Read 113 Second 8 bit Read
37 Power Factor Ph. L2 16 bit Read 114 Phase 8 bit Read
38 Power Factor Ph. L3 16 bit Read 115 Event Specific 1 16 bit Read
39 Power Factor Total 16 bit Read 116 Event Specific 2 16 bit Read
117 Event 6 8 bit Read
40 Real Power Ph. L1Lo 16 bits 32 bit Read 118 Year 8 bit Read
41 Real Power Ph. L1Hi 16 bits - Read 119 Month 8 bit Read
42 Real Power Ph. L2Lo 16 bits 32 bit Read
43 Real Power Ph. L2Hi 16 bits - Read 120 Date 8 bit Read
44 Real Power Ph. L3Lo 16 bits 32 bit Read 121 Hour 8 bit Read
45 Real Power Ph. L3Hi 16 bits - Read 122 Minute 8 bit Read
46 Real Power Phase TotalLo 16 bits 32 bit Read 123 Second 8 bit Read
47 Real Power Phase TotalHi 16 bits - Read 124 Phase 8 bit Read
48 Reactive Power Ph. L1Lo 16 bits 32 bit Read 125 Event Specific 1 16 bit Read
49 Reactive PowerPh. L1Hi 16 bits - Read 126 Event Specific 2 16 bit Read
127 Event 7 8 bit Read
OTHER
50 Reactive PowerPh. L2Lo 16 bits 32 bit Read 128 Year 8 bit Read
51 Reactive PowerPh. L2Hi 16 bits - Read 129 Month 8 bit Read
52 Reactive PowerPh. L3Lo 16 bits 32 bit Read
53 Reactive PowerPh. L3Hi 16 bits - Read 130 Date 8 bit Read
54 Reactive PowerPhase TotalLo 16 bits 32 bit Read 131 Hour 8 bit Read
55 Reactive PowerPhase TotalHi 16 bits - Read 132 Minute 8 bit Read
2-46
129
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
180 Shunt 2 Trip Count 8 bit Read 107 Reduzido Instantâneo 0- Inactiva, 1-Activa Ler
196 Software Rev 8 bit Read
202 EntelliGuard Ajuste Ie 0- Não definido 23 - 1125, 46 - 3072, Ler e Escrever
227 Breaker Position 1-CLOSE, 0-OPEN Read 1- 250, 24 - 1196, 47 - 3104,
228 Error Code Log See Comment Read 2 - 280, 25 - 1210, 48 - 3136,
229 Error Code Log See Comment Read 3 - 315, 26 - 1225, 49 - 3200,
4 - 350, 27 - 1250, 50- 3840,
REGISTER
230 Error Code Log See Comment Read 5 - 400, 28 - 1280, 51- 3880,
231 Error Code Log See Comment Read 6 - 450, 29 - 1440, 52 - 3920,
232 Error Code Log See Comment Read 7 - 500, 30- 1536,53 - 4000,
233 Error Code Log See Comment Read 8 - 560, 31- 1552,54 - 4800,
234 Error Code Log See Comment Read 9 - 605, 32 - 1568, 55 - 4850,
235 Error Code Log See Comment Read 10- 610, 33 - 1600, 56 - 4900,
236 Error Code Log See Comment Read 11- 615, 34 - 1800, 57 - 5000,
237 Error Code Log See Comment Read 12 - 630, 35 - 1920, 58 - 6144,
238 Error Counter 1 to 10 Read 13 - 720, 36 - 1940, 59 - 6208,
239 Long Time pickup State 0-Not in Pickup, 1-Near Pickup, 2-In Pickup Read 14 - 768, 37 - 1960, 60- 6272,
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 15 - 776, 38 - 2000, 61- 6400,
16 - 784, 39 - 2250, 62 - 160,
Communication Parameters Function 5 17 - 800, 40- 2400,63 - 180,
Reg. Parameter Values 18 - 900, 41- 2425,64 - 380,
19 - 960, 42 - 2450, 65 - 385,
103 Save Real Time Clock Registers - 20- 970, 43 - 2500, 66 - 390,
104 Read Real Time Clock Registers - 21- 980, 44 - 2560,
105 Save EPROM Data - 22 -1000, 45 - 2880,
107 Upload to BIM -
108 Trip Breaker 0- Reset, 1- Trip 206 Protecção Pólo Neutro 0-50%, 1-63%, 2-100% Ler/Escrever
109 Reduced Instantaneous 0- Off, 1- ON
207 ZSI Combinação 0 Ler/Escrever
112 Relay 1 State 0- Off, 1- ON 1-GF 4-Instantaneous
113 Relay 2 State 0- Off, 1- ON 2-GF&ST 5-GF and Inst
116 Clear All Events - 3-ST 7-GF, ST and Inst
117 Clear EPROM -
118 Clear Energy Total - 208 PT Tensão primária 120- 600 Ler/Escrever
209 PT Ligação 0- Ph-N 1- Ph-Ph Ler/Escrever
2-47
130
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
PORTUGUÊS PORTUGUÊS
3- 2400-8N2 10- 2400-8O117- 2400-8E1 275 Função Entrada 1 0- Nenhuma 1- Dispara Disjuntor Ler/Escrever
4- 4800-8N2 11- 4800-8O118- 4800-8E1 2- Instant. Reduz.
GENERAL
5- 9600-8N2 12- 9600-8O119- 9600-8E1 276 Função Entrada 2 0- Nenhuma 1- Dispara Disjuntor Ler/Escrever
6- 19200-8N2 13- 19200-8O1 20- 19200-8E1
286 Linguagem 0- English 2- Spanish 4- Chinese Ler/Escrever
215 Det. Disparo Tempo Longo 1- 0.5 5- 0.7 9- 090 Ler/Escrever 1- French 3- German
2- 0.55 6-0.75 10- 0.95
3- 0.6 7-0.8 11- 1.0 287 Sinc. Tempo Ano 8 bit Ler/Escrever
4- 0.65 8-0.85 288 Sinc. Tempo Mês 8 bit Ler/Escrever
289 Sinc. Tempo Data 8 bit Ler/Escrever
216 Tempo Longo Trip Delay 0- Off 1- Band1 2- Band2...Max 22 Ler/Escrever 290 Sinc. Tempo Dia 8 bit Ler/Escrever
PRODUCT
222 Det. Disparo Tempo Curto 1- 1.5 9- 5.5 16- 9.0 Ler/Escrever 302 ZSI Tempo Curto Banda atraso 0- Off 6- Band6 12- Banda 12 Ler/Escrever
2- 2.0 10- 6.0 17- 9.5 1- Banda 1 7- Banda 7 13- Banda 13
3- 2.5 11- 6.5 18- 10.0 2- Banda 2 8- Banda 8 14- Banda 14
4- 3.0 12- 7.0 19- 10.5 3- Banda 3 9- Banda 9 15- Banda 15
OPERATION
226 Det. Disparo Instantâneo Reduzido 0- OFF (Só para seleccionáveis) Ler/Escrever 20 Tensão Ph. L3 16 bit Ler
1- 1.5 11- 6.5 21- 11.5 21 Corrente L1(LO 16 bits) 32 bit Ler
2- 2 12- 7 22- 12 22 Corrente L1(HI 16 bits) - Ler
REGISTER
3- 2.5 13- 7.5 23- 12.5 23 Corrente L2(LO 16 bits) 32 bit Ler
4- 3 14- 8 24- 13 24 Corrente L2(HI 16 bits) - Ler
5- 3.5 15- 8.5 25- 13.5 25 Corrente. L3(LO 16 bits) 32 bit Ler
6- 4 17- 9.5 27- 14.5 26 Corrente L3(HI 16 bits) - Ler
8- 5 18- 10 28- 15 27 Corrente N(LO 16 bits) 32 bit Ler
9- 5.5 19- 10.5 28 Corrente N(HI 16 bits) - Ler
10- 6 20- 11 29 Valor Calibrador - Ler
CONNECTION INSTALLATION
233 Det. Disparo GF Sum 1- 0.10 82- 0.91 31 Energia Total (0-15 bits) 16 bit Ler
2- 0.11 83- 0.92 32 Energia Total (16-3 1 bits) 16 bit Ler
3- 0.12 Em passos 84- 0.93 33 Energia Total (32-47 bits) 16 bit Ler
4- 0.13 de 0.01 85- 0.94 34 Energia Total (48-63 bits) 16 bit Ler
5- 0.14 Até 86- 0.95 35 Energia Rollover Contagem 16 bit Ler
6- 0.15 87- 0.96 36 Factor Potência L1 16 bit Ler
7- 0.16 88- 0.97 37 Factor Potência L2 16 bit Ler
8- 0.17 89- 0.98 38 Factor Potência L3 16 bit Ler
9- 0.18 90- 0.99 39 Factor Potência Total 16 bit Ler
10- 0.19 91- 1.00
40 Potência Activa L1Lo 16 bits 32 bit Ler
234 GF Sum Banda de Atraso 0- Off 6- Banda 6 12- Banda 12 Ler/Escrever 41 Potência Activa L1Hi 16 bits - Ler
1- Banda 1 7- Banda 7 13- Banda 13 42 Potência Activa L2Lo 16 bits 32 bit Ler
2- Banda 2 8- Banda 8 14- Banda 14 43 Potência Activa L2Hi 16 bits - Ler
3- Banda 3 9- Banda 9 44 Potência Activa L3Lo 16 bits 32 bit Ler
4- Banda 4 10- Banda 10 45 Potência Activa L3Hi 16 bits - Ler
5- Banda 5 11- Banda 11 46 Potência Activa TotalLo 16 bits 32 bit Ler
47 Potência Activa TotalHi 16 bits - Ler
235 Valor GF Sum K 0- OFF 1- I²t Low Ler/Escrever 48 Potência Reactiva L1Lo 16 bits 32 bit Ler
2- I²t Medium 3- I²t High” Ler/Escrever 49 Potência Reactiva L1Hi 16 bits - Ler
OTHER
271 Função Relé 1 (Saída 1) 1- Grupo 1 4- Grupo 4 7- Grupo 7 Ler/Escrever 50 Potência Reactive L2Lo 16 bits 32 bit Ler
2- Grupo 2 5- Grupo 5 51 Potência Reactive L2Hi 16 bits - Ler
3- Grupo 3 6- Grupo 6 52 Potência Reactive L3Lo 16 bits 32 bit Ler
272 Função Relé 2 (Saída 2) 1- Grupo 1 4- Grupo 4 7- Grupo 7 Ler/Escrever 53 Potência Reactive L3Hi 16 bits - Ler
2- Grupo 2 5- Grupo 5 54 Potência Reactive TotalLo 16 bits 32 bit Ler
3- Group 3 6- Group 6 55 Potência Reactive TotalHi 16 bits - Ler
2-48
131
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
REGISTER
101 Hora 8 bit Ler 230 Código Erro Reg. Ver comentário Ler
102 Minuto 8 bit Ler 231 Código Erro Reg. Ver comentário Ler
103 Segundo 8 bit Ler 232 Código Erro Reg. Ver comentário Ler
104 Fase 8 bit Ler 233 Código Erro Reg. Ver comentário Ler
105 Evento especifico 1 16 bit Ler 234 Código Erro Reg. Ver comentário Ler
106 Evento especifico 2 16 bit Ler 235 Código Erro Reg. Ver comentário Ler
107 Evento 5 8 bit Ler 236 Código Erro Reg. Ver comentário Ler
108 Ano 8 bit Ler 237 Código Erro Reg. Ver comentário Ler
109 Mêsh 8 bit Ler 238 Erro Contador 1 a 10 Ler
239 Tempo Longo estado detecção 0-Sem detecção, 1-Detectado, 2-Em reacçãoLer
110 Data 8 bit Ler ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
111 Hour 8 bit Ler
112 Minuto 8 bit Ler Parâmetros de comunicação Função 5
113 Segundo 8 bit Ler Reg. Parâmetros Valores
114 Fase 8 bit Ler 102 Salvar Dados Públicos de Defeito -
115 Evento especifico 1 16 bit Ler 103 Salvar Activar registos de tempo -
116 Evento especifico 2 16 bit Ler 104 Ler Activar registos de tempo -
117 Evento 6 8 bit Ler 105 Salvar Dados EPROM -
118 Ano 8 bit Ler 107 Carregar para BIM -
119 Mês 8 bit Ler 108 Disparar Disjuntor 0- Repor, 1- Disparar
109 Instantâneo Reduzido 0- Off, 1- ON
120 Data 8 bit Ler
121 Hora 8 bit Ler 112 Estado Relé 1 0- Off, 1- ON
122 Minuto 8 bit Ler 113 Estado Relé 2« 0- Off, 1- ON
123 Segundo 8 bit Ler 116 Apagar todos os eventos -
124 Fase 8 bit Ler 117 Apagar EPROM -
125 Evento especifico 1 16 bit Ler 118 Apagar energia total -
126 Evento especifico 2 16 bit Ler
127 Evento 7 8 bit Ler
128 Ano 8 bit Ler
129 Mês 8 bit Ler
2-49
132
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
ESPAÑOL ESPAÑOL
Parámetros de comunicaciones - Función 2 3- 2400-8N2 10- 2400-8O1 17- 2400-8E1
Reg. Variable Valor Lectura/Escritura 4- 4800-8N2 11- 4800-8O1 18- 4800-8E1
GENERAL
5 Estado relé 1 0- Desactivado, 1- Activado Lectura 5- 9600-8N2 12- 9600-8O1 19- 9600-8E1
6 Estado relé 2 0- Desactivado, 1- Activado Lectura 6- 19200-8N213- 19200-8O1, 20- 19200-8E1
9 Estado entrada 1 0- Desactivado, 1- Activado Lectura
215 Ajuste de disparo LT 1- 0,5 5- 0,7 9- 0,90 Lectura/Escritura
10 Estado entrada 2 0- Desactivado, 1- Activado Lectura 2- 0,55 6-0,75 10- 0,95
27 Posición del interruptor 0- Desactivado, 1- Activado Lectura 3- 0,6 7-0,8 11- 1,0
34 Indicación de la cuna 0- Desactivado, 1- Activado Lectura 4- 0,65 8-0,85
35 Seccionable 0- Desactivado, 1- Activado Lectura
44 Cierre remoto 0- Desactivado, 1- Activado Lectura 216 Temporización LT 0- Desactivado
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1- Banda1 2- Banda2...Máx. 22 Lectura/Escritura
PRODUCT
35 Selectividad ZSI 0- Desactivado, 1-GT-ST (Z), 2-GR-ST-Inst (T) Lectura 224 Rampa Kst 0- Desactivado, 1- I²t bajo,
37 MCR nivel bajo 16 bits --- Lectura 2- I²t medio 3- I²t alto Lectura/Escritura
38 MCR nivel alto 16 bits --- Lectura 225 Ajuste de disparo instantáneo 0- Desactivado
39 HSISC nivel bajo 16 bits --- Lectura (sólo para instantáneo conmutable) Lectura/Escritura
1- No válido 11- 6,5 21- 11,5
40 HSICS nivel alto 16 bits --- Lectura 2- 0 12- 7 22- 12
81 Instantáneo 0- Desactivado, 1-15X conmutable. Lectura 3- 2,5 13- 7,5 23- 12,5
98 Número de serie del interruptor - Bajo 16 bits Lectura 4- 3 14- 8 24- 13
99 Número de serie del interruptor - Alto 16 bits Lectura 5- 3,5 15- 8,5 25- 13,5
CURVES
6- 4 16- 9 26- 14
107 Instantáneo 0- Desactivado, 1- Activado Lectura 7- 4,5 17- 9,5 27- 14,5
8- 5 18- 10 28- 15
202 Ajuste Ie EntelliGuard 0- Sin definir, 23 - 1125, 46 - 3072, Lectura y Escritura 9- 5,5 19- 10,5
1- 250, 24 - 1196, 47 - 3104, 10- 6 20- 11
2 - 280, 25 - 1210, 48 - 3136,
3 - 315, 26 - 1225, 49 - 3200, 226 Ajuste de disparo instantáneo reducido 0- Desactivado
4 - 350, 27 - 1250, 50- 3840, (sólo para conmutable) Lectura/Escritura
5 - 400, 28 - 1280, 51- 3880, 1- 1,5 11- 6,5 21- 11,5
REGISTER
15 - 776, 38 - 2000, 61- 6400, 233 Ajuste de disparo GF Sum 1- 0,10 82- 0,91
16 - 784, 39 - 2250, 62 - 160, 2- 0,11 83- 0,92
17 - 800, 40- 2400, 63 - 180, 3- 0,12 En incrementos 84- 0,93
18 - 900, 41- 2425, 64 - 380, 4- 0,13 de 0,01 85- 0,94
19 - 960, 42 - 2450, 65 - 385, 5- 0,14 Hasta 86- 0,95
20- 970, 43 - 2500, 66 - 390, 6- 0,15 87- 0,96
21- 980, 44 - 2560, 7- 0,16 88- 0,97
22 -1000, 45 - 2880, 8- 0,17 89- 0,98
9- 0,18 90- 0,99
206 Ajuste del polo de neutro 0-50%, 1-63%, 2-100% Lectura/Escritura 10- 0,19 91- 1,00
2-50
133
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
REGISTER
23 Intensidad de fase L2 (Bajo 16 bits) 32 bits Lectura 101 Hora 8 bits Lectura
24 Intensidad de fase L2 (Alto 16 bits) - Lectura 102 Minuto 8 bits Lectura
25 Intensidad de fase L3 (Bajo 16 bits) 32 bits Lectura 103 Segundo 8 bits Lectura
26 Intensidad de fase L3 (Alto 16 bits) - Lectura 104 Fase 8 bits Lectura
27 Intensidad de neutro N (Bajo 16 bits) 32 bits Lectura 105 Aviso específico 1 16 bits Lectura
28 Intensidad de neutro N (Alto 16 bits) - Lectura 106 Aviso específico 2 16 bits Lectura
29 Valor del adaptador - Lectura 107 Aviso 5 8 bits Lectura
108 Año 8 bits Lectura
31 Total energía (0-15 bits) 16 bits Lectura 109 Mes 8 bits Lectura
32 Total energía (16-31 bits) 16 bits Lectura
33 Total energía (32-47 bits) 16 bits Lectura 110 Fecha 8 bits Lectura
34 Total energía (48-63 bits) 16 bits Lectura 111 Hora 8 bits Lectura
35 Volcado contador de energía 16 bits Lectura 112 Minuto 8 bits Lectura
36 Factor de potencia fase L1 16 bits Lectura 113 Segundo 8 bits Lectura
37 Factor de potencia fase L2 16 bits Lectura 114 Fase 8 bits Lectura
38 Factor de potencia fase L3 16 bits Lectura 115 Aviso específico 1 16 bits Lectura
39 Factor de potencia total 16 bits Lectura 116 Aviso específico 2 16 bits Lectura
117 Aviso 6 8 bits Lectura
40 Potencia activa fase L1 Bajo 16 bits 32 bits Lectura 118 Año 8 bits Lectura
41 Potencia activa fase L1 Alto 16 bits - Lectura 119 Mes 8 bits Lectura
42 Potencia activa fase L2 Bajo 16 bits 32 bits Lectura
43 Potencia activa fase L2 Alto 16 bits - Lectura 120 Fecha 8 bits Lectura
44 Potencia activa fase L3 Bajo 16 bits 32 bits Lectura 121 Hora 8 bits Lectura
45 Potencia activa fase L3 Alto 16 bits - Lectura 122 Minuto 8 bits Lectura
46 Potencia activa fase Total Bajo, 16 bits 32 bits Lectura 123 Segundo 8 bits Lectura
47 Potencia activa fase Total Alto, 16 bits - Lectura 124 Fase 8 bits Lectura
48 Potencia reactiva fase L1 Bajo, 16 bits 32 bits Lectura 125 Aviso específico 1 16 bits Lectura
49 Potencia reactiva fase L1 Alto 16 bits - Lectura 126 Aviso específico 2 16 bits Lectura
127 Aviso 7 8 bits Lectura
50 Potencia reactiva fase L2 Bajo 16 bits 32 bits Lectura 128 Año 8 bits Lectura
51 Potencia reactiva fase L2 Alto 16 bits - Lectura 129 Mes 8 bits Lectura
52 Potencia reactiva fase L3 Bajo 16 bits 32 bits Lectura
53 Potencia reactiva fase L3 Alto 16 bits - Lectura 130 Fecha 8 bits Lectura
54 Potencia reactiva fase Total Bajo 16 bits 32 bits Lectura 131 Hora 8 bits Lectura
55 Potencia reactiva fase Total Alto 16 bits - Lectura 132 Minuto 8 bits Lectura
2-51
134
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
ESPAÑOL
133 Segundo 8 bits Lectura note notas | notas
134 Fase 8 bits Lectura
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GENERAL
2-52
135
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
Up Acima Arriba
Down Abaixo Abajo
Right (Next) Direita (Próximo) Derecha (Siguiente)
Left (Previous) Esquerda (Anterior) Izquierda (Anterior)
B
A
INSTALLATION
[PMU]
C
2-53
136
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
+24-
VDC N
V c.c.
Connection scheme | Esquema de Ligação | Esquema de conexiones
GT-E
Electronic Trip Unit - -
Unidade de disparo Electrónica - -
- -
OPERATION
Disparador electrónico - - - -
SCREEN MODE
VDC N
V c.c.
Connection scheme | Esquema de Ligação | Esquema de conexiones
GT-S
Electronic Trip Unit - Communication
Unidade de disparo Electrónica - -
Disparador electrónico TX RX
- - - -
REGISTER
B35 B34
CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A27 A28 A29 A30 A31 A32 A36 A37 B1 B2 B3 B27 B28 B29 B30
Relay O/P1 Relay O/P2 24V+ 24V- N-RC N-RC - Relay I/P - -
- + ZSI ZSI ZSI ZSI
- OUT+ OUT- IN+ IN-
+24-
VDC N
V c.c.
Connection scheme | Esquema de Ligação | Esquema de conexiones
GT-N
Electronic Trip Unit Signal Input from Communication
Unidade de disparo Electrónica Voltage Conditioner - -
TX RX
Disparador electrónico V-C V-B V-A GND
OTHER
L3 L2 L1 N
Relay | Relé | Relé
Communication | Comunicação
B39 B38 B37 B36 B35 B34
2-54 Voltage Conditioner | Acondicionador de Tensão | Acondicionador de alimentación aux.
Signal Input from Voltage Conditioner | Entrada de sinal de Acondicionador de Tensão | Entrada de señal desde acondicionador de alimentación aux.
137
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
2.7
A27 A28 A29 A30 A31 A32 A36 A37 A38 A39 B1 B2 B3 B27 B28 B29 B30
Relay O/P1 Relay O/P2 24V+ 24V- N-RC N-RC ELCT Relay I/P
ZSI ZSI ZSI ZSI
- + I1 I2 Icom OUT+ OUT- IN+ IN-
N
TU TU
+24-
97 98 07 08 TU
VDC N
+ - + -
ZSI ZSI
GT-H
Electronic Trip Unit Signal Input from Communication
Unidade de disparo Electrónica Voltage Conditioner ISO
TX RX TX EN I 5V ISO
Disparador electrónico V-C V-B V-A GND GND
L3 L2 L1 N 5V
Abbreviations Connection scheme: Abreviações Esquema de Ligação: Abreviaturas del esquema de conexiones:
--------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------------------------
24V+/24V-: AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY TO TRIP UNIT 24V+/24V-: Fonte de alimentação auxiliar para a unidade 24V+/24V-: FUENTE DE ALIMENTACIÓN AUXILIAR A LA
de disparo UNIDAD DE PROTECCIÓN
N-RC: NEUTRAL ROGOWSKI COIL N-RC: Bobina de Neutro ROGOWSKI N-RC: BOBINA ROGOWSKI PARA NEUTRO
ZSI OUT: ZONE SELECTIVE INTERLOCK OUT ZSI OUT: Selectividade Condicionada Saída ZSI OUT: SALIDA DE SELECTIVIDAD CONDICIONADA
ZSI IN: ZONE SELECTIVE INTERLOCK IN ZSI IN: Selectividade Condicionada Entrada ZSI IN: ENTRADA DE SELECTIVIDAD CONDICIONADA
RXD: MODBUS / Profibus COMMUNICATION RXD: Comunicação MODBUS RXD: COMUNICACIÓN MODBUS
TXD: MODBUS / Profibus COMMUNICATION TXD: Comunicação MODBUS TXD: COMUNICACIÓN MODBUS
RELAY O/P: RELAY OUT PUT RELé O/P: RELé saída SALIDA RELÉ: CONTACTO DE SALIDA
RELAY I/P: RELAY IN PUT RELé I/P: RELé entrada ENTRADA DE RELÉ: ENTRADA DE RELÉ
V-A/V-B/V-C: SIGNAL INPUT FROM V-A/V-B/V-C: Entrada de sinal de V-A/V-B/V-C: ENTRADA DE SEÑAL DESDE
VOLTAGE CONDITIONER (L1-L2-L3) Acondicionador de Tensão (L1-L2-L3) ACONDICIONADOR DE
ALIMENTACIÓN AUX. (L1-L2-L3)
GND: GROUND FOR VOLTAGE GND: Massa para Tensão TIERRA: TIERRA PARA TENSIÓN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-55
138
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
2.8 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table reviews common problems, their possible cause(s) and solution(s). If problems persist please contact our After Sales Service Department.
Table:
Troubleshooting Guide Breaker Possible Cause Solution
GENERAL
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Breaker won’t close.
-- Breaker is between CONNECTED, TEST and DISCONNECTED positions.
-- Trip Unit has not been reset.
-- Undervoltage Release is installed but not energized.
-- Interlocks installed.
-- Racking handle inserted.
-- SOLUTION --> -- Rack circuit breaker to CONNECTED, TEST or DISCONNECTED remove racking handle and close circuit breaker.
-- Push orange button on Trip Unit and close circuit breaker.
-- Energize Undervoltage Release and close circuit breaker.
-- Remove interlocks.
PRODUCT
2-56
139
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
-- Solución -> --- Ajuste la unidad de protección a fase-fase (F-F) o a fase-neutro (F-N) de según el sistema.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
La pantalla está en blanco o el símbolo de Batería baja aparece cuando se pulsa la tecla BATERÍA.
--- La batería está descargada. -- Solución -> --- Sustituya la batería.
La intensidad de la línea se encuentra por debajo del 20% del valor nominal del sensor del interruptor automático. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--- La batería se ha guardado durante demasiado tiempo sin que la unidad de protección haya recibido alimentación.
-- Solución -> --- Suministre alimentación externa a la unidad de protección o alimente el interruptor automático durante varios días para poner a punto la batería.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2-57
140
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
2.9 Catalogue code build 2.9 Referencias de catálogo 2.9 Referencias de catálogo
GENERAL
Each GT type trip unit has a catalogue code on Cada unidade de protecção tem uma referencia Cada unidad de protección tiene una referencia
its front facia. This enable the user to establish de catálogo no frontal da mesma. Isto permite de catálogo en el frontal de la misma. Esto
the devcice standard and optional protections ao utilizador identificar o dispositivo, as permite al usuario identificar el dispositivo, las
and the included functionality. protecções adicionais e as funcionalidades protecciones adicionales y las fucionalidades
incluídas. incluidas.
PRODUCT
OPERATION
SCREEN MODE
CURVES
REGISTER
CONNECTION INSTALLATION
n o t e n o t a s | n o t a s
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CODE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-58
141
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
G T G 00 K3 X 1 S F 12
2.9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 15
1
1) A product belonging to the GE ACB breaker line N8 EntelliGuard IEC. Type with LT protection, 44 LTBD bands,
ST protection, STDB bands with 3 I²t bands,
2 HI instantaneous protection , GFsum and/or GFct Alarm Function.
2) Product Type All protection devices & Alarms with OFF position.
L Standard Mpact Electronic trip unit to IEC standards
H Advanced Mpact Electronic trip unit to IEC standards 24-48V AC N9 EntelliGuard IEC. Type with LT protection, 44 LTBD bands,
Q Advanced Mpact Electronic trip unit to IEC standards 120-240V AC ST protection, STDB bands with 3 I²t bands and
T EntelliGuard Electronic Trip Unit to IEC Standards I instantaneous protection
3 All protection devices with OFF position.
3) Dimension of the associated breaker
G Univeral fits into all EntelliGuard products M3 Mpact. Type with LT protection, 22 LTBD bands, ST protection,
1 Fits into Mpact frame 1 STDB bands with 3 I²t bands and
2 Fits into Mpact frame 1 I instantaneous protection with OFF position.
M4 Mpact. Type with LT protection, 22LTBD bands, ST protection,
4 STDB bands with 3 I²t bands, I instantaneous protection, GFsum
4) + 5) Breaker Current Rating (Sensor rating) and/or GFct protection. All protection devices with OFF position.
00 Suitable for all current ratings (EntelliGuard IEC) M5 Mpact. Type with LT protection, 22 LTBD bands, ST protection,
04 400A STDB bands with 3 I²t bands, I instantaneous protection with
07 630A OFF position and GFsum protection.
08 800A
10 1000A MA Mpact. Type without protection. (Dummy)
13 1250A
16 1600A 8
20 2000A 8) Zone selective Interlocking Features
25 2500A Z Zone Selective Interlock operational on ST and GF functions,
32 3200A user selectable.
40 4000A T Zone Selective Interlock operational on ST, I or HI and GF functions,
user selectable.
6 X Non Functional.
6) & 7) Protection & Breaker type
K1 EntelliGuard IEC. Type with LT protection, 9
22 LTBD bands, ST protection & STDB bands with 3 I²t bands. 9) Advanced Features & Communication
K2 EntelliGuard IEC. Type with LT protection, 1 RELT Function present
22 LTBD bands, ST protection, 2 Modbus Communication & RELT function present
STDB bands with 3 I²t bands & GFsum protection. 3 Profibus Communication & RELT function present
K3 EntelliGuard IEC. Type with LT protection, 4 Full Measurement package & RELT function present
22 LTBD bands, ST protection, STDB bands with 3 I²t bands, 5 Full Measurement package, Protective relaying,
I instantaneous protection with OFF position and GFsum protection. Input/ Outputs & RELT function present
K4 EntelliGuard IEC. Type with LT protection, 6 Full Measurement package, Input/ Outputs, waveform capture,
22 LTBD bands, ST protection, STDB bands with 3 I²t bands, Modbus communication & RELT function present
HI instantaneous protection with OFF position and GFsum protection 7 Full Measurement package, , Input/ Outputs, waveform capture,
K9 EntelliGuard IEC. Type with LT protection, Profibus communication & RELT function present
22 LTBD bands, ST protection, STDB bands with 3 I²t bands 8 Full Measurement package, Protective relaying, Input/ Outputs,
and I instantaneous protection with OFF position. waveform capture, Modbus communication & RELT function present
9 Full Measurement package, Protective relaying, Input/ Outputs,
KA EntelliGuard IEC. Type without protection. (Dummy) waveform capture, Profibus communication & RELT function present
N1 EntelliGuard IEC. Type with LT protection, 44 LTBD bands, X None of these functions present
ST protection & STDB bands with 3 I²t bands.
N2 EntelliGuard IEC. Type with LT protection, 44 LTBD bands,
ST protection, STDB bands with 3 I²t bands & GFsum protection. 10
10) Trip Unit Reset options
N3 EntelliGuard IEC. Type with LT protection, 44 LTBD bands, M After trip LOCAL reset is required
ST protection, STDB bands with 3 I²t bands, A After Trip Breaker is reset automatically
I instantaneous protection with OFF position and GFsum protection. S Selector switch Manual/ automatic reset
N4 EntelliGuard IEC. Type with LT protection, 44 LTBD bands,
ST protection, STDB bands with 3 I²t bands, X Not selected
HI instantaneous protection with OFF position and GFsum protection.
N5 EntelliGuard IEC. Type with LT protection, 44 LTBD bands,
ST protection, STDB bands with 3 I²t bands, 11
I instantaneous protection , GFsum and/or GFct protection.
11) Trip Unit Mode of Supply
All protection devices with OFF position. F Fitted to Breaker in Factory
N6 EntelliGuard IEC. Type with LT protection, 44 LTBD bands, R Field mountable device
ST protection, STDB bands with 3 I²t bands,
I instantaneous protection , GFsum and/or GFct Alarm Function. 12 12) ...15) Reserved for future use
All protection devices & Alarms with OFF position.
CODE
2-59
142
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
Referencias de catálogo
G T G 00 K3 X 1 S F 12
GENERAL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 15
1
1) Um produto pertencente à linha de disjuntores abertos da GE N8 EntelliGuard IEC. Tipo com protecção LT, 44 bandas LTBD,
PRODUCT
protecção instantânea I com posição OFF e protecção GFsum. 5 Pacote de medidas completo, Relés de protecção,
K4 EntelliGuard IEC. Tipo com protecção LT, Entradas/Saídas e função RELT
22 bandas LTBD, protecção ST, STDB com 3 bandas I²t, 6 Pacote de medidas completo, Entradas/Saídas, captura de forma de onda,
protecção instantânea HI com posição OFF e protecção GFsum comunicação Modbus e função RELT
K9 EntelliGuard IEC. Tipo com protecção LT, 7 Pacote de medidas completo, Entradas/Saídas, captura de forma de onda,
22 bandas LTBD, protecção ST, STDB com 3 bandas I²t comunicação Profibus e função RELT
e protecção instantânea I com posição OFF. 8 Pacote de medidas completo, Relés de protecção, Entradas/Saídas,
captura de forma de onda, comunicação Modbus e função RELT
CONNECTION INSTALLATION
KA EntelliGuard IEC. Tipo sem protecção. (Interruptor) 9 Pacote de medidas completo, Relés de protecção, Entradas/Saídas,
captura de forma de onda, comunicação Profibus e função RELT
N1 EntelliGuard IEC. Tipo com protecção LT, 44 bandas LTBD,
protecção ST e STDB com 3 bandas I²t. X Nenhuma destas funções presentes
N2 EntelliGuard IEC. Tipo com protecção LT, 44 bandas LTBD,
protecção ST, STDB com 3 bandas I²t e protecção GFsum.
N3 EntelliGuard IEC. Tipo com protecção LT, 44 bandas LTBD,
protecção ST, STDB com 3 bandas I²t, 10 10) Opções de reposição da Unidade de Disparo
protecção instantânea I com posição OFF e protecção GFsum. M Após um disparo é requerida uma reposição LOCAL
N4 EntelliGuard IEC. Tipo com protecção LT, 44 bandas LTBD, A Após um disparo a reposição é feita automaticamente
protecção ST, STDB com 3 bandas I²t, S Selector de reposição Manual/Automatico
protecção instantânea HI com posição OFF e protecção GFsum.
N5 EntelliGuard IEC. Tipo com protecção LT, 44 bandas LTBD, X Não seleccionado
protecção ST, STDB com 3 bandas I²t,
protecção instantânea I, protecção GFsum e/ou GFct.
Todos os dispositivos de protecção com posição OFF. 11
N6 EntelliGuard IEC. Tipo com protecção LT, 44 bandas LTBD, 11) Modo de alimentação da unidade de disparo
protecção ST, STDB com 3 bandas I²t, F Montada no disjuntor em fábrica
protecção instantânea I, função de alarme GFsum e/ou GFct. R Dispositivo a montar em campo
Todos os dispositivos de protecção e Alarmes com posição OFF.
CODE
2-60
143
TRIP UNIT EntelliGuard G
G T G 00 K3 X 1 S F 12
2.9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 15
1
1) Producto perteneciente a la línea de interruptores de bastidor GE N8 EntelliGuard IEC. Tipo con protección LT, 44 bandas LTBD,
protección ST, bandas STDB con 3 bandas I²t,
2 2) Tipo de producto protección intantáneo Hi, Alarma GFsum y/o GFct
L Unidad de protección eléctronica estándar M-PACT norma IEC Todos los dispositivos de protección y Alarmas con psosición OFF
H Unidad de protección eléctronica avanzada M-PACT norma IEC 24-48V CA
Q Unidad de protección eléctronica avanzada M-PACT norma IEC 120-240V CA N9 EntelliGuard IEC. Tipo con protección LT, 44 bandas LTBD,
T Unidad de protección eléctronica Entelliguard norma IEC protección ST, bandas STDB con 3 bandas I²t
y protección intantáneo I
3 Todos los dispositivos de protección con psosición OFF
3) Dimensión del interruptor asociado
G Válido para todos los prodcutos Entelliguard M3 Mpact. Tipo con protección LT, 22 bandas LTBD, protección ST,
1 Válido para Mpact tamaño 1 bandas STDB con 3 bandas I²t,
2 Válido para Mpact tamaño 1 protección intantáneo I con posición OFF
M4 Mpact. Tipo con protección LT, 22 bandas LTBD, protección ST,
4 bandas STDB con 3 bandas I²t, protección intantáneo I, protec. GFsum y/o
4) + 5) Intensidad nominal del interuptor (valor nominal del sensor) GFct. Todos los dispositivos de protección con posición OFF
00 Apto para todas las intensidades nominales (Entelliguard IEC) M5 Mpact. Tipo con protección LT, 22 bandas LTBD, protección ST,
04 400A bandas STDB con 3 bandas I²t, protección intantáneo I con
07 630A posición OFF y protección GFsum
08 800A
10 1000A MA Mpact. Tipo sin protección (Interruptor en carga)
13 1250A
16 1600A 8
20 2000A 8) Características Selectividad condicionada
25 2500A Z Selectividad condicionada operacional en funciones ST y GF, seleccionable
32 3200A por el usuario
40 4000A T Selectividad condicionada operacional en funciones ST, I o Hi y GF,
seleccionable por el usuario
6 X No funcional
6) & 7) Protección y tipo de Interruptor
K1 EntelliGuard IEC. Tipo con protección LT,
22 bandas LTBD, protección ST y bandas STDB con 3 bandas I²t. 9 9) Características avanzadas y Comunicación
K2 EntelliGuard IEC. Tipo con protección LT, 1 Función RELT (Int. reducida temporalmente
22 bandas LTBD, protección ST, 2 Función Comunicación Modbus y RELT
bandas STDB con 3 bandas I²t y protección GFsum. 3 Función Comunicación Profibus y RELT
K3 EntelliGuard IEC. Tipo con protección LT, 4 Unidad de Medición completa y función RELT
22 bandas LTBD, protección ST, bandas STDB con 3 bandas I²t, 5 Unidad de Medición completa, Relés de protección, Entradas/Salidas y
protección intantáneo I con posición OFF y protección GFsum función RELT
K4 EntelliGuard IEC. Tipo con protección LT, 6 Unidad de Medición completa, Entradas/Salidas, Captura de forma de onda,
22 bandas LTBD, protección ST, bandas STDB con 3 bandas I²t, Comunicación Modbus y función RELT
protección intantáneo Hi con posición OFF y protección GFsum 7 Unidad de Medición completa, Entradas/Salidas, Captura de forma de onda,
K9 EntelliGuard IEC. Tipo con protección LT, Comunicación Profibus y función RELT
22 bandas LTBD, protección ST, bandas STDB con 3 bandas I²t 8 Unidad de Medición completa, Relés de protección, Entradas/Salidas,
y protección intantáneo I con posición OFF Captura de forma de onda, Comunicación Modbus y función RELT
9 Unidad de Medición completa, Relés de protección, Entradas/Salidas,
KA Entelliguard IEC. Tipo sin protección (Interruptor en carga) Captura de forma de onda, Comunicación Profibus y función RELT
N1 EntelliGuard IEC. Tipo con protección LT, 44 bandas LTBD, X Ninguna de estas funciones
protección ST y bandas STDB con 3 bandas I²t
N2 EntelliGuard IEC. Tipo con protección LT, 44 bandas LTBD,
protección ST, bandas STDB con 3 bandas I²t y protección GFsum. 10 10) Opciones de Reset de la Unidad de protección
N3 EntelliGuard IEC. Tipo con protección LT, 44 bandas LTBD, M Se requiere reset LOCAL después del disparo
protección ST, bandas STDB con 3 bandas I²t, A Reset automático después del disparo
protección intantáneo I con posición OFF y protección GFsum S Selector Reset Manual/Automático
N4 EntelliGuard IEC. Tipo con protección LT, 44 bandas LTBD,
protección ST, bandas STDB con 3 bandas I²t, X No seleccionado
protección intantáneo Hi con posición OFF y protección GFsum
N5 EntelliGuard IEC. Tipo con protección LT, 44 bandas LTBD,
protección ST, bandas STDB con 3 bandas I²t, 11
protección intantáneo I, protección GFsum y/o GFct 11) Forma de suministro de la unidad de protección
Todos los dispositivos de protección con posición OFF F Montada en fábrica con el interruptor
N6 EntelliGuard IEC. Tipo con protección LT, 44 bandas LTBD, R Para montar por el usuario
protección ST, bandas STDB con 3 bandas I²t,
protección intantáneo I, Alarma GFsum y/o GFct 12
Todos los dispositivos de protección y Alarmas con posición OFF 12) ...15) Reservado para uso futuro
CODE
2-61
144
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
3.1 Breaker front Fascia 3.1 Face Frontal do Disjuntor 3.1 Frontal del interruptor automático
- Breaker Security Padlocking - Cadeado de Segurança do Disjuntor - Enclavamiento del interruptor por candado
- Breaker Security Keylocking - Fechadura de Segurança do Disjuntor - Enclavamiento del interruptor por cerradura
- Pushbutton Padlocking - Cadeado das Botoneiras - Enclavamiento de pulsadores
3.2 Drawout Breaker Cassette 3.2 Berço do Disjuntor Extraível 3.2 Cuna de interruptor automático seccionable
- Shutter Security Padlocking - Cadeado de Segurança dos Obturadores - Enclavamiento por candado de la pantalla de
FRONT FASCIA
3.5 Tables Locking options 3.5 Tabelas de opções de bloqueios 3.4 Enclavamiento de red
3.5 Tablas de opciones de enclavamiento
n o t e n o t a s | n o t a s
NETWORK
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TABLES
3.0-00
145
LOCKS EntelliGuard G
3.0
GENERAL
3.0 LOCKS AND INTERLOCKS 3.0 BLOQUEIOS E 3.0 ENCLAVAMIENTOS
ENCRAVAMENTOS
A variety of locks and interlock accessories are Uma grande variedade de bloqueios e Existen diversos enclavamientos y accesorios
available. encravamento está disponível. disponibles.
FRONT FASCIA
DANGER | PERIGO | PELIGRO
Ensure the circuit breaker has been tripped, Garanta que o disjuntor foi disparado, Asegúrese de que el interruptor automático se
indicating OFF, and the main springs are fully indicando OFF, e que as molas principais estão haya disparado, que indique OFF (Desactivado)
discharged before installing locks and completamente descarregadas antes de y que los muelles primarios estén
interlocks. instalar bloqueios e encravamentos. completamente descargados antes de instalar
los enclavamientos.
CAUTION: Ensure circuit breaker and its CUIDADO: Garanta que o disjuntor e todos os PRECAUCIÓN: Asegúrese de que el
accessories are always used within their seus acessórios são usados sempre nas suas interruptor automático y sus accesorios se
designated ratings. funções e calibres atribuídos. utilicen siempre dentro de los valores nominales
especificados.
3.1 Breaker front Facia 3.1 Face Frontal do Disjuntor 3.1 Frontal del interruptor
automático
Circuit Breaker Security Padlocking Cadeado de Segurança do Disjuntor Enclavamiento del interruptor por candado
A standard feature allowing the user to place É uma função standard permitindo bloquear o Se trata de una función estándar que permite al
padlocks that will lock the breaker with it's disjuntor usando cadeados enquanto o disjuntor usuario colocar enclavamientos por candado
contacts open. Any attempt to close the breaker, está aberto. Qualquer tentativa de fechar o que bloquearán el interruptor con sus contactos
either electrically or manually, is prevented disjuntor quer manualmente quer abiertos. Cualquier intento de cerrar el
whilst the padlocks are in place. The breaker electricamente, está prevenida enquanto os interruptor, ya sea de forma eléctrica o manual,
padlocking device accepts up to three padlocks cadeados estiverem no lugar. O dispositivo de es imposible mientras haya enclavamientos por
with a hasp dimension of 5 to 8 mm bloqueio por cadeados dos disjuntor aceita três candado colocados. El dispositivo de
cadeados com o gancho de 3 a 8 mm de enclavamiento por candado del interruptor
To engage the device and place padlocks: diâmetro. automático admite hasta tres candados con
unas dimensiones de 5 a 8 mm.
1. Push the breaker OFF button until the Para encaixar o dispositivo e encaixar os
padlocking lever moves and slightly protrudes cadeados : Para activar el dispositivo y colocar los
from the breaker front facia. (Fig 3.1). 1. Pressione o botão OFF do disjuntor até que a enclavamientos por candado:
2. Pull out and fully extend the lever. alavanca dos cadeados se mova e se saia no 1. Pulse el botón OFF (Apertura) del interruptor
3. Insert the padlock(s) into the lever holes. disjuntor e se project um pouco da face frontal automático hasta que la palanca del
do disjuntor. (Fig 3.1). enclavamiento por candado se mueva y
To disengage the locking feature, simply remove 2. Puxe retire e estenda completamente a sobresalga ligeramente del frontal del
the padlocks and push the lever back into a alavanca. interruptor. (Fig 3.1).
position that is flush with the breaker front facia. 3. Insira os cadeado nos furas da alavanca.. 2. Tire de la palanca y extiéndala por completo.
3. Introduzca los candados en los taladros de la
Now the breaker can be operated normally. Para desengatar o bloqueio, simplesmente palanca.
remova os cadeados e encaixe a alavanca de
volta à posição anterior alinhada com a fece Para desactivar la función de enclavamiento,
frontal do disjuntor. retire los candados y devuelva la palanca a una
Agora o disjuntor pode operar normalmente. posición alineada con el frontal del interruptor.
Después, el interruptor puede funcionar con
normalidad.
Fig. 3.1
3.1-01
146
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
Circuit Breaker Security Keylocking Fechadura de Segurança do Disjuntor Enclavamiento del interruptor por cerradura
An optional feature allowing the user to place up Uma função opcional permite ao utilizador Se trata de una función opcional que permite al
GENERAL
to 4 locks that each can lock the breaker with it's colocar até 4 fechaduras em que cada uma usuario colocar hasta 4 cerraduras, cada una de
contacts open. Any attempt to close the breaker, bloqueia o disjuntor com os seus contactos los cuales puede bloquear el interruptor con sus
either electrically or manually, is prevented abertos. Qualquer tentativa de fechar o disjuntor contactos abiertos. Cualquier intento de cerrar
whilst the lock(s) are in place. The breaker quer manualmente quer electricamente, está el interruptor, ya sea de forma eléctrica o
keylocking device come as two factory mounted prevenida enquanto as fechaduras estiverem manual, es imposible mientras haya llaves
accessories. One for up to 4 Ronis or Profalux fechadas. O dispositivo de fechaduras do colocadas. El dispositivo de enclavamiento del
keylocks and a second suited for one Castell disjuntor vem como dois acessórios montados interruptor automático por cerradura se
FRONT FASCIA
lock. The locks can be bought separately and em fábrica. Um para até 4 fechaduras Rinis ou suministra como dos accesorios montados en
mounted in the field. For instructions on how to Profalux e um Segundo para uma fechadura fábrica. Uno para un máximo de 4 cerraduras
install the keylocks, see section 4 of this manual. Castell. Estes bloqueios podem ser comprados Ronis o Profalux y otro para una cerradura
separadamente e montados em obra. Castell. Las cerraduras se pueden adquirir por
separado e instalarlas el propio usuario. Para
Para engatar o dispositivo e bloquear o obtener instrucciones sobre el modo de
To engage the device and lock the breaker: Disjuntor: instalación de las cerraduras, consulte la
sección 4 de este manual.
1. Push the breaker OFF button until the 1. Pressione o botão OFF do disjuntor até que a
padlocking lever moves and slightly protrudes alavanca de bloqueio se eleve e sobressaia na Para activar el dispositivo y enclavar el
CASSETTE
from the breaker front facia (Fig.3.1). face frontal do disjuntor. (Fig.3.1). interruptor automático:
2. Rotate the key anticlockwise and remove the 2. Rode a chave no sentido contrário aos 1. Pulse el botón OFF (Apertura) del interruptor
key. ponteiros do relógio e remova a chave. automático hasta que la palanca del
enclavamiento por candado se mueva y
To disengage the locking feature, simply re- Para desengatar o bloqueio, simplesmente insira sobresalga ligeramente del frontal del
insert the key and rotate it clockwise. Then make a chave e rode-a no sentido dos ponteiros do interruptor (Fig. 3.1).
sure that padlocking lever is flush with the relógio.. Em seguida, certifique-se que a 2. Gire la llave hacia la izquierda y retírela.
breaker front facia. alavanca de bloqueio fique nivelada com a face Para desactivar la función de enclavamiento,
frontal do disjuntor. sólo tiene que volver a introducir la llave y girarla
CABLES
Now the breaker can be operated normally. hacia la derecha. Después, asegúrese de que la
Agora o disjuntor pode operar normalmente. palanca de enclavamiento por candado esté
alineada con el frontal del interruptor
ON & OFF Pushbutton Padlocking Bloqueio da Botoneira ON e OFF automático.
An optional feature allowing the user to place Uma função opcional permite ao utilizador Después, el interruptor puede funcionar con
padlocks that deny un-authorized access to the colocar cadeados e assim bloquear o acesso normalidad.
ON & OFF pushbuttons located on the breaker não autorizado aos botões ON e OFF localizados
NETWORK
Para instruções de como montar este dispositivo Es posible seleccionar uno o los dos pulsadores
veja a secção 4 deste manual. para realizar el enclavamiento por candado
moviendo las ventanas transparentes
3.2 Drawout Breaker Cassette 3.2 Berço dos Disjuntor Extraível individuales hacia arriba o hacia abajo para
acceder a uno o a los dos taladros de las
palancas de bloqueo.
Cassette Shutter Security Padlocking Obturadores do Berço, Cadeado de Segurança
Para obtener instrucciones sobre el modo de
A standard feature allowing the user to place Uma função standard permite ao utilizador
instalación de este dispositivo, consulte la
padlocks that will lock the shutter in closed colocar cadeados que vão bloquear o obturador
sección 4 de este manual.
position, thus preventing access to the cassettes na posição fechado, assim impedindo o acesso
main contacts. aos contactos principais do berço.
The shutter padlocking device accepts up to O Dispositivo de bloqueio dos obturadores 3.2 Cuna de interruptor automático
three padlocks with a hasp dimension of 5 to 8 aceita até 3 cadeados com um gancho de 3 a seccionable
mm. The device can only be used when the 8mm de diâmetro. Este dispositivo só pode ser Enclavamiento por candado de las pantalla de
aislamiento de la cuna
Se trata de una función estándar que permite al
usuario colocar enclavamientos por candado
que bloquearán las pantallas de aislamiento en
posición cerradas, impidiendo así el acceso a los
Ronis contactos principales de las cunas.
El dispositivo de enclavamiento por candado de
la pantalla de aislamiento admite hasta tres
candados con unas dimensiones de 5 a 8 mm. El
dispositivo sólo se puede utilizar cuando la parte
Profalux
móvil del interruptor automático se encuentra
en la posición SECCIONADO y/o completamente
extraido de la cuna.
3.1-02
147
LOCKS EntelliGuard G
3.2
breaker's mobile portion is in DISCONNECTED usado quando o disjuntor está na posição 1. Asegúrese de que la parte móvil del
position and/or fully removed from the cassette. SECCIONADO e/ou completamente removido do interruptor automático se encuentra en la
berço. posición SECCIONADO y/o completamente
To engage the device and place padlocks: Para engatar o dispositivo e colocar os extraido de la cuna (consulte el indicador de
1. Ensure that the breaker's mobile portion is in cadeados : posición en la Fig. 3.3).
DISCONNECTED position and/or is fully removed 1. Garanta que a parte móvel do disjuntor está 2. Retire y guarde la manivela para maniobra.
from the cassette (see position indicator Fig. 3.3). na posição SECCIONADO e/ou completamente (En su lugar de almacenamiento).
2. Remove and store the Racking Handle. (In it's removido do berço (ver indicador de posição Fig. 3. Extienda la palanca de bloqueo para permitir
storage location) 3.3). el acceso a los taladros del enclavamiento por
3. Extend the locking lever to allow access to the 2. Remova e guarde a manivela de extracção. candado.
padlocking holes. (No seu lugar de guarda próprio) Para desacoplar la función de enclavamiento,
3. Estenda a alavanca de bloqueio para permitir retire los candados y devuelva la palanca a una
o acesso aos furos de bloqueio. posición alineada con el frontal de la cuna.
To disengage the locking feature, simply remove Ahora, las pantallas de aislamiento funcionarán
the padlocks and push the lever back into a Para desengatar o bloqueio simplesmente con normalidad.
position that is flush with the cassette front remova os cadeados e empurre de volta a
facia. alavanca para trás de modo que fique alinhada Enclavamiento por candado para la
Now the shutters work normally again. com a face frontal do berço. prevención del acceso a la manivela de
Agora os obturadores podem funcionar maniobra
CASSETTE
normalmente. Se trata de una función estándar que permite al
usuario guardar la manivela de maniobra y
Racking Handle Access Prevention Padlocking Bloqueio Preventivo de Acesso à Manivela de enclavar con candado la ubicación de
A standard feature allowing the user to store the Extracção almacenamiento para evitar que la manivelas se
racking handle and to padlock the storage Uma função standard permite ao utilizador utilicen sin autorización.
location, thus preventing the handles un- guardar a manivela de extracção e bloquea-la El dispositivo de enclavamiento por candado
authorized use. neste local, assim prevenindo o seu uso não admite hasta tres candados con unas
The padlocking device accepts up to three autorizado. dimensiones de 5 a 8 mm (Fig. 3.4 C). El
padlocks with a hasp dimension of 5 to 8 mm O Dispositivo de bloqueio da manivela aceita até dispositivo sólo se puede utilizar cuando la parte
(Fig. 3.4 C). The device can only be used when 3 cadeados com um gancho de 3 a 8mm de móvil del interruptor automático se encuentra
the breaker's mobile portion is in TEST or diâmetro (Fig. 3.4 C). Este dispositivo só pode ser en la posición PRUEBA o SECCIONADO y/o
DISCONNECTED position and/or fully removed usado quando o disjuntor está na posição TEST, completamente extraido de la cuna.
from the cassette. SECCIONADO e/ou completamente removido do
berço. Para activar el dispositivo y colocar los
To engage the device and place padlocks: Para engatar o dispositivo e colocar os enclavamientos por candado:
1. Ensure that the breaker's mobile portion is in cadeados: 1. Asegúrese de que la parte móvil del
TEST or DISCONNECTED position and/or is fully 1. Garanta que a parte móvel do disjuntor está interruptor automático se encuentra en la
removed from the cassette. (see position na posição TESTE ou SECCIONADO e/ou posición PRUEBA o SECCIONADO y/o
indicator Fig. 3.2 A) completamente removido do berço (ver completamente extraido de la cuna. (Consulte el
2. Remove and store the Racking Handle. (In it's indicador de posição Fig. 3.2 A) indicador de posición de la Fig. 3.2 A)
storage location) 2. Remova e guarde a manivela de extracção. 2. Retire y guarde la manivela para maniobra.
3. Extend the locking lever (Fig. 3.4 C) to allow (No seu lugar de guarda próprio) (En su lugar de almacenamiento).
access to the padlocking holes. 3. Estenda a alavanca de bloqueio para permitir 3. Extienda la palanca de bloqueo (Fig. 3.4 C)
To disengage the locking feature, simply remove o acesso aos furos de bloqueio (Fig. 3.4 C). para permitir el acceso a los taladros del
the padlocks and push the lever back into a Para desengatar o bloqueio simplesmente enclavamiento por candado.
position that is flush with the cassette front remova os cadeados e empurre de volta a Para desacoplar la función de enclavamiento,
facia. alavanca para trás de modo que fique alinhada retire los candados y devuelva la palanca a una
Now the Racking handle can be removed from com a face frontal do berço. posición alineada con el frontal de la cuna.
it's storage location. Agora a manivela de extracção pode ser Ahora, se puede retirar la manivela de maniobra
removida do local onde é guardada. de su lugar de almacenamiento.
Drawout Support Slides Padlocking
A standard feature allowing the user to place Encravamento das calhas móveis de suporte Enclavamientos de rieles/guías
padlocks that will prevent the insertion of a Uma função standard permite ao utilizador Se trata de una función estándar que permite al
breaker's mobile portion into the cassette. The colocar cadeados que impedem a colocação da usuario colocar enclavamientos por candado
Fig. 3.2
Fig. 3.3
A B C Fig. 3.4 C
B C C
3.2-01
148
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
padlocking device is present on both slides and parte móvel do disjuntor dentro do berço. Este que impedirán la inserción de la parte móvil del
GENERAL
each can accept up to three padlocks with a dispositivo de bloqueio está presente nas duas interruptor en la cuna. El dispositivo de
hasp dimension of 5 to 8 mm (see Fig. 3.5). It can calhas e cada uma pode levar até três cadeados enclavamiento por candado está presente en
only be used when the breaker's mobile portion com um gancho de diâmetro 3 a 8 mm (ver Fig. ambas correderas, y cada una de ellas puede
is in DISCONNECTED position and fully removed 3.5). Este dispositivo só pode ser usado quando o admitir hasta tres candados con unas dimensiones
from the cassette. disjuntor está na posição SECCIONADO e de 5 a 8 mm (Fig. 3.5). Sólo se puede utilizar cuando
completamente removido do berço. la parte móvil del interruptor automático se
To engage the device and place padlocks: encuentra en la posición SECCIONADO y
Para engatar o dispositivo e colocar os completamente extraido de la cuna.
FRONT FASCIA
Para desengatar o bloqueio simplesmente tiene que retirar los candados y volver a extender
The cabinet door can be closed with the remova os cadeados e estenda as calhas de las guías para poder utilizarlas de nuevo.
padlocking feature engaged. modo a poderem ser usadas novamente.
Do not attempt to forcefully extend the slides A porta do armário pode ser fechada com o La puerta del armario se puede cerrar con la
whilst padlocked. bloqueio engatado. función de enclavamiento por candado activada.
Não tente estender as calhas forçando-as No intente extender las guías a la fuerza mientras
enquanto o bloqueio estiver engatado. permanecen enclavadas.
Fig. 3.5A
CABLES
Fig. 3.5
Fig. 3.6
NETWORK
Cassette Security Keylocking Fechadura de Segurança do Berço Enclavamiento de la cuna por cerradura
An optional feature allowing the user to place up Uma função opcional permite ao utilizador Se trata de una función opcional que permite al
to 2 locks that each can lock the breaker in TEST colocar dois bloqueios que podem cada um usuario colocar hasta 2 cerraduras, cada una de los
or DISCONNECTED position (see Fig. 3.6). It is not deles bloquear o disjuntor na posição de TESTE cuales puede bloquear el interruptor en la posición
possible to close the breaker, either electrically ou SECCIONADO. (Ver Fig. 3.6). Não é possível PRUEBA o SECCIONADO (véase la Fig. 3.6). No es
or manually whilst the lock's are engaged. fechar o disjuntor, quer electricamente ou posible cerrar el interruptor, ya sea de forma
Access to the racking handle storage location is manualmente enquanto o bloqueio está eléctrica o manual, mientras los enclavamientos
TABLES
also prevented. engatado. O acesso à manivela de extracção estén activados. También se impide el acceso a la
The cassette keylocking device is a factory também está prevenido. ubicación de almacenamiento de la manivela de
mounted accessory. The device allows the uses O dispositivo de fecho do berço é um acessório maniobra.
of two Ronis or two Profalux keylocks (cannot be montado em fábrica. Ele permite o uso de duas El dispositivo de enclavamiento de la cuna por
mixed). fechaduras Ronis ou duas Profalux (não podem cerradura es un accesorio montado en fábrica. El
The locks can be bought separately and ser misturadas). dispositivo permite el uso de dos cerraduras Ronis o
mounted in the field. For instructions on how to Os bloqueios podem ser comprados dos Profalux (no se pueden combinar).
install the keylocks, see section 4 of this manual. separadamente e montados em obra. Para Las cerraduras se pueden adquirir por separado e
instruções de como montar este dispositivo veja instalarlas el propio usuario. Para obtener
To engage the device and lock the cassette: a secção 4 deste manual. instrucciones sobre el modo de instalación de las
cerraduras, consulte la sección 4 de este manual.
1. Ensure that the breaker's mobile portion is in Para engatar o dispositivo e bloquear o berço :
TEST or DISCONNECTED position and is fully Para activar el dispositivo y enclavar la cuna:
removed from the cassette. 1. Garanta que a parte móvel do disjuntor está
2. Remove and store the Racking Handle. (In it's na posição TESTE ou SECCIONADO e 1. Asegúrese de que la parte móvil del interruptor
storage location) completamente removido do berço. automático se encuentra en la posición PRUEBA o
3. Rotate one or both keys anticlockwise and 2. Remova e guarde a manivela de extracção. SECCIONADO y completamente extraido de la cuna.
remove the key's). (No seu lugar de guarda próprio) 2. Retire y guarde la manivela para maniobra. (En su
3. Rode as chaves no sentido contrário aos lugar de almacenamiento).
To disengage the locking feature, simply re- ponteiros do relógio e remova-as. 3. Gire una o ambas llaves hacia la izquierda y
insert the key and rotate it clockwise. Both keys retírelas.
MUST be present to disengage the locking Para desengatar a função de bloqueio,
feature. simplesmente insira as chaves e rode-as no Para desactivar la función de enclavamiento, sólo
sentido dos ponteiros do relógio. Ambas as tiene que volver a introducir la llave y girarla hacia
For instructions on how to install this device see chaves DEVEM estar presentes para o la derecha. Ambas llaves DEBEN estar presentes
section 4 of this manual. desengate da função de bloqueio. para desactivar la función de bloqueo.
Para obtener instrucciones sobre el modo de
Para instruções de como montar este dispositivo instalación de este dispositivo, consulte la sección 4
veja a secção 4 deste manual. de este manual.
3.2-02
149
LOCKS EntelliGuard G
3.2
Standard Drawout Breaker Interlock Encravamento Standard Disjuntor Extraível Enclavamiento de interruptor automático
Os berços e parte móvel estão equipados com seccionable estándar
The cassettes and device mobile part are um encravamento que previne o disjuntor de Las cunas y las piezas móviles del dispositivo
equipped with a interlock that prevents the fechar a menos que este esteja em posição de están provistas de un enclavamiento que evita
breaker from closing unless it is in the TEST or TESTE ou SECCIONADO. O dispositivo também que el interruptor automático se cierre a menos
CONNECTED position. The device also opens the abre os contactos principais dos disjuntor antes que se encuentre en la posición de PRUEBA o
main breaker contacts before the mobile part que a parte móvel se afaste e/ou se aproxime INSERTADO. El dispositivo también abre los
leaves and/or approaches the CONNECTED da posição SECCIONADO. contactos del interruptor principal antes de que
position. la pieza móvil salga y/o se aproxime a la
When the main breaker contacts are closed a Quando os contactos principais do disjuntor posición INSERTADO.
second interlock prevents insertion of the estão fechados um segundo encravamento Cuando los contactos del interruptor automático
devices racking handle in to the aperture on the previne a inserção da manivela de extracção na principal están cerrados, un segundo
cassette. sua abertura no berço. enclavamiento impide la inserción de la
manivela de maniobra del dispositivo en la
Dispositivo de Má Inserção (Encravamento) abertura de la cuna.
É um dispositivo opcional que encaixa no berço
Mis Insertion device (Interlock) e na parte móvel do disjuntor. Este previne a Traba de calibre (enclavamiento)
An optional device that fits into the cassette and inserção de um disjuntor de calibre diferente no Se trata de un dispositivo opcional que se ajusta
on to the mobile portion of a drawout breaker. It berço. a la cuna y a la parte móvil del interruptor
CASSETTE
prevents the insertion of a wrongly rated Para instruções de como montar este dispositivo automático seccionable. Evita que se inserte un
breaker into a given cassette structure. veja a secção 4 deste manual. interruptor automático con un valor nominal
For instructions on how to install this device see incorrecto en una determinada estructura de
section 4 of this manual. Dispositivo Encravamento Porta cuna.
É um dispositivo opcional que previne a abertura Para obtener instrucciones sobre el modo de
da porta do armário onde está instalado o instalación de este dispositivo, consulte la
disjuntor extraível, quando este está na posição sección 4 de este manual.
SECCIONADO.
Door Interlock device Está disponível em duas diferentes execuções, Dispositivo de enclavamiento de puerta
An optional device that prevents the door of the para portas de abertura à esquerda e à direita. Se trata de un dispositivo opcional que evita que
equipment in which the drawout breaker is Uma vez instalado este dispositivo fica sempre la puerta del equipo donde se encuentra
installed to be opened when the device is in activo e reagem posição dos disjuntor no berço. instalado el interruptor seccionable se abra
CONNECTED position. cuando el dispositivo se encuentra en la
It is available in two executions for left and right Para instruções de como montar este dispositivo posición INSERTADO.
hinged cabinet/panel doors. Once installed the veja a secção 4 deste manual. Está disponible en dos ejecuciones, para puertas
device is always active and reacts to the position de armario/panel con bisagras hacia la
of the breaker in the cassette structure. izquierda y hacia la derecha. Una vez instalado
el dispositivo, se mantiene siempre activo y
For instructions on how to install this device see reacciona a la posición del interruptor en la
section 4 of this manual. estructura de cuna.
3.2-03
150
EntelliGuard G ACCESSORIES
3.2
Instruction sheet Folha de Instruções Hoja de instrucciones
3.2 Appendix
3.2 Apêndice
3.2 Apéndice
3.2.1 Shutter force open feature 3.2.1 Abertura forçada dos 3.2.1 Función de apertura forzada de
obturadores las pantallas
In order to inspect the main plug in contacts De modo a se poder inspeccionar os contactos A fin de examinar los contactos de
within the EntelliGuard draw out cassettes a principais dentro dos berços dos disjuntores acoplamiento principales en las cunas
shutter force open feature is present in each extraíveis, uma função de abertura forçada está seccionables de EntelliGuard, cada una de las
cassette. presente em cada berço. cunas dispone de una función de apertura
forzada de la pantalla de aislamiento.
2. Locate the shutter operating levers as 2. Localize o mecanismos de operação do berço 2. Sitúe las palancas de accionamiento de la
indicated in Fig. A & Fig. B. como mostrado na Fig. A e Fig. B. pantalla de aislamiento como se indica en la Fig.
A y la Fig. B.
3. To open the shutters and allow access to the 3. Para abrir os obturadores e permitir o acesso
main contacts, rotate the levers as indicated in aos contactos principais, rode o mecanismo 3. Para abrir las pantallas y permitir el acceso a
Fig. C. Release the levers to re close the shutters. como mostrado na Fig. C. Solte o mecanismo los contactos principales, gire las palancas
para os obturadores voltarem a fechar. como se indica en la Fig. C. Para volver a cerrar
las pantallas, suelte las palancas.
3.2-04
151
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
Locks the Operation of Safety shutters, if Bloqueia a abertura dos obturadores de Bloquea el funcionamiento de las pantallas de
installed any, when pad lock applied on the segurança, se algum instalado, quando um aislamiento, si hay alguna instalada, cuando el
security locking bar C only, when the Cassette is cadeado aplicado somente à barra de bloqueio enclavamiento por candado está aplicado
in DISCONNECTED position. Fig. C, quando o berço está na posição solamente en palanca de bloqueo (Fig. A C), con
SECCIONADO. Também bloqueia a acção da la cuna en posición SECCIONADO.
Also Locks the entry of Racking handle in to the manivela de extracção impedindo a inserção También bloquea la entrada de la manivela de
Crank Insertion hole of the Cassette. Lock can be para manobra no berço. O bloqueio pode ser maniobra en el agujero de inserción de la cuna.
applied when Circuit breaker in the aplicado quando o Disjuntor está na posição El enclavamiento se puede aplicar cuando el
DISCONNECTED position. Maximum One padlock SECCIONADO. Um cadeado no máximo interruptor automático se encuentra en la
(required hasp diameter is 5 to 8 mm) May be (diâmetro requerido entre 3 ~ 8 mm) Pode ser posición SECCIONADO. Se puede aplicar como
applied for security. Also this locking Device is aplicado para segurança. Este bloqueio também máximo un candado (diámetro obligatorio entre
compatible with scissor lock. é compatível com um aloquete tipo tesoura. 5 y 8 mm) por. Además, este dispositivo de
enclavamiento es compatible con el
1. Garanta que o indicador de posição mostra enclavamiento de tijera.
SHUTTER
SECCIONADO.
1. Ensure position indicator shows 2. Remova a manivela de extracção de esta está 1. Asegúrese de que el indicador de posición
DISCONNECTED Position. inserida no seu sitio de manobra. muestre la posición SECCIONADO.
2. Remove racking handle from the Crank 3. Puxe a barra de bloqueio até que o ponto de 2. Retire la manivela para maniobra del agujero
insertion hole if present already. bloqueio seja exposto, segure enquanto insere a de inserción, si se encuentra introducida.
3. Pull the locking bar until the locking eye is haste do cadeado.. Mostrado na Fig. B. O 3. Tire de la palanca de enclavamiento hasta
exposed and hold while inserting padlock hasp. dispositivo está bloqueado após a colocação do que la argolla de bloqueo quede expuesta y
Shown in Fig. B. Device is locked out after cadeado. Mostrado na Fig. C. sujétela mientras introduce el candado. Véase la
padlock application. Shown in Fig. C. 4. Depois com uma chave de parafuso tente Fig. B. El dispositivo queda bloqueado después
girar o obturador do ponto de manobra da de aplicar el enclavamiento por candado. Véase
manivela de extracção no sentido dos ponteiros la Fig. C.
4. Then with a screw driver attempt to turn the do relógio. Mostrado na. A. 4. Después, con un destornillador, intente girar
Racking handle shutter drive B clockwise. Shown 5. A condição será; Impedimento de girar o hacia la derecha el accionador B de liberación
in Fig. A. obturador do ponto de manobra da manivela de de la tapa de la manivela de maniobra. Véase la
extracção B e inserir a manivela de extracção na Fig. A.
5. Condition should be-Not able to Rotate abertura de manobra, existente na face frontal 5. El resultado debería ser la imposibilidad ni de
racking handle shutter drive B & insert Racking do disjuntor. girar el accionador B de liberación de la tapa de
handle in to the crank insertion hole on front 6. Tente mover a placa do obturador frontal la manivela de maniobra ni introducir la
panel. para cima e para baixo (Aplicável para manivela de maniobra en el hueco de inserción
terminações horizontais Fig. D) ou movimento de situado en el panel frontal.
6. Attempt to move the Front shutter plate Up & esquerda para a direita (Aplicável para 6. Trate de mover la placa frontal de la pantalla
down (Applicable for Horizontal terminations Fig. terminações verticais Fig. E) que estão hacia arriba y abajo (aplicable para tomas
D) or move left to Right (Applicable for vertical instaladas no Berço em frente dos terminais. A horizontales, Fig. D) o de izquierda a derecha
terminations Fig. E) which are installed on the condição será impossibilidade de mover as (aplicable para tomas verticales, Fig. E) las
Cassette in front of terminals. Condition should placas dos obturadores. cuales se encuentran instaladas en la cuna, en
not be able to move the shutter plate. frente de las tomas. El resultado debería ser la
imposibilidad de mover la placa de la pantalla.
Fig. A: Cassette shutter Padlocking Location Fig. A: Ubicación de enclavamiento por candado de la
C- Shutter locking bar, B- Racking handle shutter drive pantalla de la cuna
Fig. B: Insertion of padlock on Security locking bar C- Palanca de bloqueo de la pantalla
A
Fig. C: Device locked out B- Accionador de la tapa de la manivela de
Fig. D: Shutter installed for Horizontal terminations maniobra
Fig. E: Shutter installed for Vertical terminations Fig. B: Inserción del candado en la palanca de bloqueo
Fig. C: Dispositivo bloqueado
Fig. D: Pantalla instalada para tomas horizontales
Fig. A : Localização do bloqueio do berço Fig. E: Pantalla instalada para tomas verticales
C- Barra de bloqueio do obturador,
B- Ponto de manobra da manivela de extracção
Fig. B Inserção de cadeado na barra de bloqueio de segurança
Fig. C : Dispositivo de bloqueio externo
C B
Fig. D : Obturador instalado para terminações Horizontais
Fig. E : Obturador instalado para terminações Verticais
B C D E
3.2-05
152
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
3.3 Interlocking of Multiple Breakers 3.3 Encravando Múltiplos Disjuntores 3.3 Enclavamientos mecánicos entre
GENERAL
interruptores
Mechanical interlocks are optional devices Encravamentos mecânicos são dispositivos Los enclavamientos mecánicos son dispositivos
available for beakers in a fixed or Drawout opcionais disponíveis para disjuntores de opcionales disponibles para los interruptores en
pattern. These enable the interlocking of 2 or 3 execução Fixa ou Extraível. Estes permitem o ejecución fija o seccionable. Permiten enclavar 2
breakers mounted side by side or stacked. encravamento de 2 ou 3 disjuntores montados o 3 interruptores contiguos o en vertical.
These devices have two parts: The first kit lado a lado ou sobrepostos. Estos dispositivos constan de dos partes: la
customized for use with the breaker in fixed Estes dispositivos têm duas partes: a primeira, primera, un componente montado en fábrica
FRONT FASCIA
pattern or the cassette when a drawout pattern um componente montado de fábrica é instalado en el chasis en ejecución fija o en la
is required (field mountable). Two or more encaixado no chassis na versão fixa ou no berço cuna cuando se emplea en ejecución
specially designed , field mountable cables being quando é de execução extraível. O segundo são seccionable. La segunda son dos o más cables
the second. dois ou mais cabos desenhados especialmente especialmente diseñados y montables por el
Any combination (fixed or drawout), current para montagem em obra. usuario.
rating, number of poles or envelope size can be Qualquer combinação (fixa ou extraível), Calibre, Es posible enclavar cualquier combinación (fijo o
interlocked. Systems are available in one número de pólos ou tamanho podem ser seccionable), intensidad nominal, número de
configuration for 2 breakers and in three encravados. Estão disponíveis sistemas para polos o tamaño. Los sistemas están disponibles
variants for 3 breakers. uma combinação de 2 disjuntores e três en una variante para 2 interruptores y en tres
For instructions on how to install and use theses variantes para a combinação de 3 disjuntores. variantes para 3 interruptores.
CASSETTE
device see the separate instruction manuals Para instruções de como instalar e usar estes Para obtener instrucciones sobre el modo de
DEH 41451 for the fixed pattern and DEH dispositivos veja o manual de instruções instalar y utilizar estos dispositivos, consulte el
414155 for devices in the drawout pattern. separado DEH 41451 para aparelho de manual de instrucciones aparte.
instalação fixa e DEH 414155 para aparelhos de ...DEH 41451 - DEH 41455
execução extraível.
1 of 2 breaker interlock (Type A) Enclavamiento 1 de 2 (Tipo A)
With the 1 of 2 interlock in use, if one breaker is Encravamento 1 de 2 disjuntores (Tipo A) Con el enclavamiento 1 de 2 en uso, si un
ON the second breaker cannot be turned ON. Com o encravamento 1 de 2 em uso, se um interruptor está Cerrado, el segundo no puede
There is no priority, if any of the 2 breakers is ON disjuntor está LIGADO o outro está bloqueado estar también Cerrado. No existe prioridad; si
CABLES
the other cannot be turned ON. The second na posição DESLIGADO. Não há prioridade, se uno de los 2 interruptores está Cerrado, el otro
breaker can be charged and ready to close, to qualquer um dos 2 disjuntores está LIGADO o no puede estarlo. El segundo interruptor puede
enable a fast transition from one to the other outro está bloqueado em DESLIGADO. O estar cargado y preparado para cerrarse a fin
breaker. Segundo disjuntor pode estar carregado e de agilizar la transición de un interruptor a otro.
preparado para fechar, para permitir uma
rápida transição de um disjuntor ao outro.
1 of 3 breaker interlock (Type B) Enclavamiento 1 de 3 (Tipo B)
With the 1 of 3 interlock in operation, if one Encravamento 1 de 3 disjuntores (Tipo B) Con el enclavamiento 1 de 3 en funcionamiento,
NETWORK
breaker is ON the other 2 breakers cannot be Com o encravamento 1 de 3 em operação, se si un interruptor está Cerrado, los otros dos no
turned ON. There is no priority, if any of the 3 um disjuntor está LIGADO os outros 2 disjuntores pueden estar Cerrados. No existe prioridad; si
breakers is ON the others are prevented. The estão bloqueados em DESLIGADO. Não há uno de los 3 interruptores está Cerrado, los otros
breakers that are not ON can be charged and prioridade, se qualquer um dos disjuntores está no pueden estarlo. Los interruptores que no
ready to close, to enable a fast transition from LIGADO os outros estão bloqueados. Os estén cerrados pueden estar cargados y
one to the other breaker. disjuntores que não estão ligados podem estar preparados para cerrarse a fin de agilizar la
carregados e preparados para fecho, de modo a transición de un interruptor a otro.
permitir uma rápida transição de um disjuntor
2 of 3 breaker interlock (Type C) ao outro.. Enclavamiento 2 de 3 (Tipo C)
TABLES
With the 2 of 3 interlock in operation, one Encravamento 2 de 3 disjuntores (Tipo C) Con el enclavamiento de 2 de 3 en
breaker is always OFF. However, 1 or 2 of the Com o encravamento 2 de 3 em operação, um funcionamiento, un interruptor está siempre
other breakers can be ON. destes disjuntores estará sempre DESLIGADO. Abierto. Sin embargo, 1 o 2 de los otros
There is no priority, if any 2 of the 3 breakers are Contudo, 1 ou 2 dos outros disjuntores podem interruptores puede estar Cerrados.
ON the remaining is prevented from being estar LIGADOS. No existe prioridad; si 2 de los 3 interruptores
turned ON. The breaker which is not ON can be Não há prioridade, se qualquer 2 dos 3 están Cerrados, el restante no puede estarlo. El
charged and ready to close, to enable a fast disjuntores está LIGADO o restante está interruptor que no esté Cerrado puede estar
transition. bloqueado na posição DESLIGADO. O disjuntor cargado y preparado para cerrarse a fin de
que está DESLIGADO pode estar carregado e agilizar la transición.
preparado para fechar, para permitir uma
rápida transição de um disjuntor ao outro.
3.3-00
153
LOCKS EntelliGuard G
3.3
2 of 3 breaker interlock with priority (Type D) Encravamento 2 de 3 disjuntores com Enclavamiento 2 de 3 con prioridad (Tipo D)
prioridade (Tipo D)
With the 2 of 3 interlock in operation, one of the Com o encravamento 2 de 3 em operação, um Con el enclavamiento 2 de 3 en funcionamiento,
three breakers has priority over both the others, dos três disjuntores tem prioridade sobre os uno de los tres interruptores tiene prioridad
hence when the priority breaker is ON the other outros dois, uma vez que o disjuntor com sobre los otros dos, por lo que cuando el
2 MUST be OFF. Also entailing that when the prioridade esteja LIGADO os outros dois DEVEM interruptor con prioridad está Cerrado, los otros
priority breaker is OFF the other 2 breaker can estar DESLIGADOS. O contrário também é válido, dos DEBEN estar Abiertos. Esto implica también
be turned ON. This is typically used for a main- quando o disjuntor com prioridade está que cuando el interruptor con prioridad está
tie-main arrangement. DESLIGADO os outros dois podem estar Abierto, los otros dos pueden estar Cerrados.
LIGADOS. Isto é tipicamente usado nas Ésta suele ser la configuración típica de dos
configurações REDE – GERADOR – REDE. fuentes (trafo) y un reemplazo (grupo).
B1 B2
G 0 0
1 of 2 Breaker
Only 1 from 2 breaker can be closed.
I 0
0 I 1 de 2 Disjuntores
Só 1 de 2 disjuntores pode ser fechado.
B1 B2 1 de 2 Interruptores
Sólo 1 de los 2 interruptores se puede cerrar.
Type A
Tipo A
CABLES
1 of 3 Breaker
3 power supplies (generator or transformers feeding the same busbar,
B1 B2 B3 but parallel operation is prevented.
G 0 0 0 Only 1 from 3 breaker can be closed.
I 0 0 1 de 3 Disjuntores
0 I 0 3 fontes (gerador ou transformadores alimentam o mesmo barramento,
0 0 I mas o funcionamento em paralelo está impedido.
Só 1 de 3 disjuntores pode ser fechado.
B1 B2 B3 1 de 3 Interruptores
3 fuentes de alimentación (generador o transformadores que alimentan
Type B los mismos embarrados),
pero el funcionamiento en paralelo no es posible.
Tipo B Sólo 1 de los 3 interruptores se puede cerrar.
2 of 3 Breaker
2 bus sections can be powered by a single transformer (B3 closed),
..or by both transformers (B3 open)
B1 B2 B3 Any 1 from 3 breakers can be closed.
Any 2 from 3 breakers can be closed.
0 0 0
I 0 0 2 de 3 Disjuntores
0 I 0 2 secções de barramento podem ser alimentadas por um único
0 0 I transformador (B3 fechado),
..ou por ambos os transformadores (B3 aberto)
I 0 I
B1 B3 B2 0 I I
Qualquer 1 de 3 disjuntores pode ser fechado.
Qualquer 2 de 3 disjuntores podem ser fechados.
I I 0
2 de 3 Interruptores
2 embarrados pueden estar alimentadas por un único transformador (B3
Type C cerrado), ..o por ambos transformadores (B3 abierto)
1 de los 3 interruptores se puede cerrar.
Tipo C 2 de los 3 interruptores se pueden cerrar.
Priority
Prioridade
Type D 2 de 3 Interruptores con prioridad
2 fuentes de alimentación normales no dispuestas en paralelo.
1 fuente de suministro puede asistir al circuito de prioridad.
Prioridad
Tipo D El interruptor B1 y/o B2 sólo se pueden cerrar si B3 está abierto.
El interruptor B3 sólo se puede cerrar si B1 y B2 están abiertos.
3.3-01
154
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
The Network interlock provides means for O encravamento de rede providencia meios de El enclavamiento de red permite bloquear los
interlocking breakers without the need for encravar disjuntores sem a necessidade de interruptores sin necesidad de interconectarlos
mechanically linking the breakers. ligação mecânica entre disjuntores. mecánicamente.
This accessory has 2 coils, 1 that is used to trip Este acessório tem 2 bobinas, 1 que é usada Este accesorio incorpora 2 bobinas, 1 que se
the breaker and keep it in trip free position para disparar o disjuntor e mante-lo nessa utiliza para disparar el interruptor y mantenerlo
FRONT FASCIA
mechanically, also when the power to the trip posição mecanicamente, mesmo que o sinal de mecánicamente en posición de disparo, incluso
coil is removed. disparo seja removido. en el caso de que se suprima la alimentación a
la bobina de disparo.
The second coil is used to reset the trip coil of A segunda bobina é usada para repor a bobina La segunda bobina se utiliza para restablecer la
the network interlock. With this it is possible to de disparo do encravamento de rede. Com isto é bobina de disparo del enclavamiento de red.
interlock breakers either by PLC or by direct possível encravar disjuntores quer por PLC ou Gracias a esto, es posible enclavar los
control wiring using the auxiliary contacts of the por cablagem directa dos contactos auxiliares interruptores por medio de un autómata o
involved breakers. dos disjuntores envolvidos. mediante cableado de control directo utilizando
los contactos auxiliares de los interruptores
CASSETTE
implicados.
Compared to existing shunt releases or under Comparado com os encravamentos por En comparación con los enclavamientos con
voltage interlocks this system restores the last bobinas existentes de disparo à emissão de bobinas de disparo a emisión de tensión o de
interlock condition also during a power outage. tensão ou mínima de tensão este sistema repõe mínima tensión, este sistema restablece la
It is also possible to signal the current state of a ultima condição de encravamento mesmo última situación de enclavamiento también
the interlock with the inbuilt signal switch. durante uma falte de alimentação. É também durante un fallo de suministro eléctrico.
possível obter o estado actual do encravamento Asimismo, es posible indicar el estado actual del
com o contacto de sinal embutido neste. enclavamiento con el contacto de señalización
integrado.
CABLES
With this unit all above interlocks and also any Com esta unidade todos os encravamentos Con este dispositivo, se pueden conseguir todos
other interlock combination can be achieved acima podem também ser conseguidos sem o los enclavamientos anteriores y cualquier otra
with minimal effort. It is also possible to interlock mínimo esforço. É também possível encravar o combinación de enclavamientos con un mínimo
the circuit breaker with any other circuit breaker disjuntor com outro aparelho ou elemento de esfuerzo. También es posible enclavar el
or switching element of different construction. construção diferente. interruptor automático con cualquier otro
interruptor automático o elemento de
conmutación de construcción diferente.
NETWORK
3.5 Tables Locking options 3.5 Tabelas de opções de bloqueio 3.5 Tablas de opciones de enclavamiento
Enclavamiento por candado de seguridad del interruptor automático en posición SECCIONADO o en el frontal del interruptor
- Máximo de tres enclavamientos por candado Enclavamiento por candado con diámetro de aldaba de 5 - 8 mm
Enclavamiento por cerradura de seguridad del interruptor automático en posición SECCIONADO o en frontal del interruptor
- Hasta cuatro enclavamientos Candados Ronis, Profalux o Castell
Enclavamiento por candado con pulsador 'ON' y/o 'OFF' en el frontal del interruptor
- Un enclavamiento por candado Enclavamiento por candado con diámetro de aldaba de 5 - 8 mm
3.4-00
155
LOCKS EntelliGuard G
3.5
Table 3.2: Drawout Pattern Circuit Breaker; Locking options
Function Type and possible quantity of locking devices Locking device details
Drawout Circuit Breaker cassette security padlocking.. shutter Padlock 5-8 mm hasp diameter
- A Maximum of three padlocks
Drawout Circuit Breaker cassette security padlocking.. racking handle access Padlock 5-8 mm hasp diameter
- A Maximum of three padlocks
Drawout Circuit Breaker cassette security padlocking.. breaker insertion prevention Padlock 5-8 mm hasp diameter
- A Maximum of six padlocks
Drawout Circuit Breaker cassette security keylocking.. Test or Disconnected Ronis or Profalux keylock
- Up to two locks
Drawout Circuit Breaker ; standard interlock ---
Drawout Circuit Breaker ; mis insertion device ---
Drawout Circuit Breaker ; Door interlock ---
Disjuntor Extraível segurança do berço por cadeado.. obturador Cadeado 3-8 mm de diâmetro
- Um Máximo de três cadeados
Disjuntor Extraível segurança do berço por cadeado.. acesso manivela extracção Cadeado 3-8 mm de diâmetro
- Um Máximo de três cadeados
Disjuntor Extraível segurança do berço por cadeado.. prevenção de inserção disjuntor Cadeado 3-8 mm de diâmetro
- Um Máximo de seis cadeados
Disjuntor Extraível segurança do berço por fechadura.. Teste ou Seccionado Fechadura Ronis ou Profalux
- Up to two locks
Disjuntor Extraível ; Encravamento standard ---
Disjuntor Extraível ; dispositivo má inserção ---
Disjuntor Extraível ; Encravamento porta ---
Enclavamiento por candado de la cuna del interruptor automático seccionable - Pantalla Enclavamiento por candado con diámetro de 5 - 8 mm
- Máximo de tres candados
Enclavamiento por candado de la cuna del interruptor automático seccionable - Acceso a la manivela de maniobra Enclav... de 5 - 8 mm
- Máximo de tres candados
Enclavamiento por candado de la cuna del interruptor automático seccionable - Prevención de inserción del interruptor Enclav... de 5 - 8 mm
- Máximo de seis candados
Enclavamiento por cerradura de la cuna del interruptor automático seccionable - Prueba o Seccionado Cerradura Ronis o Profalux
- Hasta dos cerraduras
Interruptor automático seccionable; enclavamiento estándar ---
Interruptor automático seccionable; traba de calibre ---
Interruptor automático seccionable; enclavamiento de puerta ---
Table 3.3: Fixed & Drawout Pattern Circuit Tabela 3.3: Disjuntor de Execução Fixa e Tabla 3.3: Interruptor automático con TABLES
Breaker; interlocking options Extraível; opções encravamento ejecución fija y seccionable; opciones de
enclavamiento
Interlocking of multiple fixed or drawout pattern Encravamento de múltiplos disjuntores de Enclavamiento de varios interruptores
breakers Execução Fixa ou Extraível automáticos de ejecución fija o seccionable
-- Type A for 1 out of 2 breakers -- Tipo A para 1 de 2 disjuntores -- Tipo A para 1 de 2 interruptores
-- Type B for 1 out of 3 breakers -- Tipo B para 1 de 3 disjuntores -- Tipo B para 1 de 3 interruptores
-- Type C for 2 out of 3 breakers -- Tipo C para 2 de 3 disjuntores -- Tipo C para 2 de 3 interruptores
(mains-tie-mains) (rede – gerador - rede) (fuente-acoplamiento-fuente)
-- Type D for 2 out of 3 breakers -- Tipo D para 2 de 3 disjuntores – Tipo D para 2 de 3 interruptores con prioridad
3.5-01
156
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
4.1 Releases / Coils 4.1 Disparos / Bobinas 4.1 Bobinas de disparo / Bobinas
- General, Installation - Instalação Geral - Aspectos generales, Instalación
- Table 4.0: Coil Combinations & Max. Content - Tabela 4.0: Combinações de Bobinas e Capacidade Máx. - Tabla 4.0: Combinaciones y número máximo de
4.1.1 Shunt Release 4.1.1 Bobina à Emissão de Tensão bobinas
4.1.2 Undervoltage Release 4.1.2 Bobina de Mínima Tensão 4.1.1 Bobina de disparo a emisión de tensión
4.1.3 Time Delay Module 4.1.3 Módulo de Atraso 4.1.2 Bobina de mínima tensión
4.1.4 Closing Coil 4.1.4 Bobina de Fecho 4.1.3 Módulo de temporización
COILS
4.1.5 Command closing coil 4.1.5 Bobina de Fecho Comandada 4.1.4 Bobina de cierre
4.1.6 Network Interlock device (NI) 4.1.6 Encravamento de Rede (NI) 4.1.5 Mando de bobina de cierre
4.1.6 Dispositivo de enclavamiento de red (NI)
4.2 Electrical Charging Motor 4.2 Motor de Carga da Molas 4.2 Mando eléctrico
- General, - Geral, Instalação com contacto de molas - Aspectos generales, Instalación con contacto de
Installation with Spring Charged Contact (SPR) carregadas muelles cargados
4.2.1 Ready to close Contact (RTC) 4.2.1 Contacto de preparado para fecho (RTC) 4.2.1 Contacto Preparado para cierre (RTC)
MOTOR
4.4.1 Operations Counter 4.4.1 Contador Operações 4.4.2 Enclavamiento del interruptor por cerradura
4.4.2 Breaker locking with Key locks 4.4.2 Bloqueio do Disjuntor com Fechaduras 4.4.3 Dispositivo de enclavamiento por candado de
4.4.3 Pushbutton Padlocking device 4.4.3 Dispositivo Encravamento Botões los pulsadores
4.4.4 Cassette locking with Key locks 4.4.4 Bloqueio do Berço com Fechaduras 4.4.4 Enclavamiento de la cuna por cerradura
4.4.5 Door Interlock 4.4.5 Encravamento Porta 4.4.5 Enclavamiento de puerta
4.4.6 Mis insertion device 4.4.6 Dispositivo de Má Inserção 4.4.6 Traba de calibre
4.4.7 Earthing device 4.4.7 Dispositivo de Ligação à Terra 4.4.7 Kit de conexionado a tierra
4.4.8 Contact Wear indicator 4.4.8 Indicador Desgaste Contactos 4.4.8 Indicador de desgaste del contacto
4.4.9 Phase Barriers 4.4.9 Separadores de Fases 4.4.9 Separadores de fase
4.4.10 IP54 Front fascia cover 4.4.10 Cobertura Frontal IP54 4.4.10 Tapa de puerta IP54
OTHER
4.4.11 Voltage Conditioner 4.4.11 Acondicionador de alimentação auxiliar 4.4.11 Acondicionador de alimentación auxiliar
4.4.12 Neutral sensor (Rogowski coil) 4.4.12 Bobinas Rogowski para neutro 4.4.12 Bobinas Rogowski para Neutro
4.4.13 Acondicionador para transformador de 4.4.13 Acondicionador para transformador de
4.4.13 Interposing Current transformer intensidade intensidad
4.4.14 Earth Leg Current Transformer 4.4.14 Transformador para defeitos à terra 4.4.14 Transformador para defectos a tierra
4.4.15 Wall Mounting Brackets 4.4.15 Suportes de montagem mural 4.4.15 Soportes de montaje en fondo armario
4.5 Other Accessories (catalogue number only) 4.5 Acessórios (catalogue number only) 4.5 Accesorios (sólo referencia)
4.5.1 Trip Unit Battery/Setup Tester 4.5.1 Bateria/Teste programa Unidade de Disparo 4.5.1 Batería de ajustes de la unidad de protección
4.5.2 Auxiliary power supply 24V DC 4.5.2 Fonte de alimentação auxiliar 24V DC 4.5.2 Fuente de alimentación auxiliar de 24 V de CC
4.5.3 Cable interlocking systems 4.5.3 Cabos de encravamento mecânico 4.5.3 Enclavamientos mecánicos por cable
4.5.4 Non standard bus Connection options 4.5.4 Opções de ligação não standard 4.5.4 Opciones de conexionado no estándar
4.6 Spare parts (catalogue number only) 4.6 Peças de substituição (Só n.º de catálogo) 4.6 Recambios (sólo referencia)
4.6.1 Breaker Arc Chutes 4.6.1 Câmaras de extinção do Disjuntor 4.6.1 Cámaras de corte
4.6.2 Breaker Arcing Contacts 4.6.2 Contactos de extinção de arco 4.6.2 Contactos parachispas
4.6.3 Breaker Cluster contacts 4.6.3 Contactos de Seccionamento e Alicates de 4.6.3 Pinzas de seccionamiento
Breaker Cluster Pliers Contactos Tenazas para pinzas
4.6.4 Spare Breaker Front Fascia 4.6.4 Tampa frontal do Disjuntor 4.6.4 Tapa frontal Int. automático
4.6.5 Spare Trip Unit cover 4.6.5 Tampa frontal da Unidade de Disparo 4.6.5 Tapa frontal unidad de protección
4.6.6 Spare Cassette shutters with interlock 4.6.6 Obturadores de Berço com encravamento 4.6.6 Pantallas de aislamiento con enclavamiento
4.6.7 Spare Cassette Racking Handle 4.6.7 Manivela de extracção Berço 4.6.7 Manivela para maniobra en la cuna
Ensure only qualified personnel install, operate, Garanta que só pessoal qualificado instala, Asegúrese de que las operaciones de
service and maintain all electrical equipment. opera, serve e mantém todo o equipamento instalación, manejo, servicio y mantenimiento de
Avoid risk of injury from moving parts while eléctrico. todos los equipos eléctricos las realicen técnicos
handling the breaker. Evite o risco de ferimentos causados pelas cualificados.
If advisable, use a cable/busbar lockable partes moveis enquanto manuseia o Evite el riesgo de lesiones producidas por las
grounding device (optional accessory) to provide equipamento. piezas en movimiento mientras manipula el
additional safety during system maintenance. Se recomendado, use um cabo/barra interruptor automático.
bloqueáveis de ligação à terra (acessório Por prudencia, utilice un dispositivo de puesta a
opcional) para providenciar segurança adicional tierra por cable / pletina enclavable (accesorio
durante a manutenção do sistema. opcional) para aumentar la seguridad durante el
mantenimiento del sistema.
4.0-00
157
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
GENERAL
- Bobina à Emissão de Tensão (ST) - Dispositivo de Ligação à Terra
- Bobina de disparo a emisión de tensión - Kit de conexionado a tierra
4.3.3 Bell Alarm Contact (BA) 4.5.2 Auxiliary power supply 24V DC
- Contacto Alarme (BA) - Fonte de alimentação auxiliar de 24 V CC
- Contacto de señalización de disparo - Fuente de alimentación auxiliar de 24 V de CC
4.3.5 Secondary Terminal Blocks A&B 4.5.4 Non standard bus Connection options
- Blocos de Terminais A e B - Opções de ligação não standard
- Regleteros de bornas A y B - Opciones de conexionado no estándar
158
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
be equipped with a wide range of accessories, equipada com uma gama variada de acessórios, extensa gama de accesorios, la mayoría de los
most of which are available as factory mounted a maior parte dos quais disponível com cuales están disponibles montados en fábrica y
and as field mountable device. montagem em fábrica e como dispositivos a como dispositivos montables por el usuario.
Each field mountable accessory has been montar em obra. Cada accesorio de los montables por el usuario
designed with ease of installation in mind and Cada acessório a montar em obra foi se ha diseñado para facilitar la instalación y
are 'click fit' or require the use of a minimum desenhado com a sua fácil instalação em mente están preparados para ser montados mediante
quantity of fasteners. e é de encaixe rápido ou requer um mínimo de sencillos ajustes o con una cantidad mínima de
ferramentas para a sua instalação. sujecciones.
MOTOR
CAUTION: Ensure circuit breaker and its CUIDADO: Garanta que o disjuntor e seus PRECAUCIÓN: Asegúrese de que el
accessories are always used within their acessórios são sempre utilizados dentro dos interruptor automático y sus accesorios se
designated ratings. seus calibres e funções para que estão utilicen siempre dentro de los valores nominales
desenhados. especificados.
Use the specially designed circuit breaker Utilice el carretón de manipulación
OTHER
handling truck (optional accessory) when Use o carro de elevação especialmente especialmente diseñado para el interruptor
removing the circuit breaker from its cassette. desenhado (acessório opcional) quando remover automático (accesorio opcional) cuando retire el
o disjuntor do seu berço. interruptor de la cuna.
Fig.4.2 A: Breaker with Fascia Fig.4.2 A: Disjuntor com Frontal Fig. 4.2 A: Interruptor con la tapa frontal
..B: Removing the screws ..B: Removendo os parafusos ..B: Extracción de los tornillos
..C: Rotating the charging handle down ..C: Rodando a manivela de carga para baixo ..C: Giro de la manivela de carga hacia abajo
..D: Rotating the charging handle down ..D: Rodando a manivela de carga para baixo ..D: Giro de la manivela de carga hacia abajo
..E: Breaker with Fascia ..E: Disjuntor com Frontal ..E: Interruptor con la tapa frontal
A&E
C
D
4.0-02
159
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
4.0
4.1 RELEASES / COILS 4.1 DISPAROS / BOBINAS 4.1 BOBINAS DE DISPARO / BOBINAS
GENERAL
-- In order to mount one or more release or Coils -- De modo a manobra um ou mais disparos ou -- Para montar una o más bobinas, es necesario
the breaker front cover must be removed and Bobinas a cobertura frontal do disjuntor deve desmontar la tapa frontal y colocarla de nuevo
replaced later. ser removida de colocada posteriormente. posteriormente.
Removal of Fascia / Front cover from circuit Remoção de Frontal / Cobertura Frontal do Desmontaje de la tapa frontal del interruptor
breaker disjuntor automático
1. Remove pad locks, installed if any. Switch OFF 1. Remova os cadeados, se instalados. DESLIGUE 1. Retire los enclavamientos por candado que
the breaker. o disjuntor. hubiera. De orden de Apertura al interruptor
2. Unscrew the 6 screws using a Pozidrive screw 2. Desaperte os 6 parafusos usando uma chave automático.
driver as shown in Fig.4.2 A&B. Pozidriv como mostrado na Fig.4.2 A e B. 2. Desatornille los 6 tornillos con un
destornillador Pozidrive, como se muestra en la
3. Rotate the charging handle down and slide 3. Rode para baixo a manivela de carga e puxe o Fig. 4.2 A y B.
the front cover over the handle to remove out as frontal deslizando pela manivela para o remover 3. Gire la manivela de carga hacia abajo y
shown in Fig.4.2C como mostrado na Fig.4.2C deslice la tapa frontal sobre la manivela para
retirarla, como se muestra en la Fig. 4.2 C.
Installation of Fascia / Front cover to the Instalação de Frontal / Cobertura Frontal no Montaje de la tapa frontal del interruptor
circuit breaker disjuntor automático
1. Rotate the charging handle down and slide 1. Rode para baixo a manivela de carga e puxe o 1. Gire la manivela de carga hacia abajo y
the front cover over the handle to assemble the frontal deslizando pela manivela para inserir a deslice la tapa frontal sobre la manivela para
front cover to housing as shown in Fig.4.2D Cobertura Frontal como mostrado na Fig.4.2D montar la tapa frontal en la carcasa, como se
muestra en la Fig. 4.2 D.
2. Ensure the fascia is aligned properly with the 2. Garanta que o Frontal está alinhado com a 2. Asegúrese de que la tapa quede debidamente
trip unit and the pad lock features of the breaker. unidade de disparo e o a função de bloqueio do alineada con la unidad de protección y con los
disjuntor. enclavamientos por candado del interruptor
automático.
3. Fasten the 6 mounting screws of fascia with 3. Aperte os 6 parafusos do frontal ao chassis 3. Apriete los 6 tornillos de montaje de la tapa
the housing using a pozidrive screw driver as usando a chave Pozidriv como mostrado na con un destornillador Pozidrive, como se
shown in Fig.4.2E. Apply torque of 3 Nm max.. Fig.4.2E. Aplicar um Par de 3 Nm máx. muestra en la Fig. 4.2 E. Aplique un par máximo
de 3 Nm.
4.1-01
160
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
Table 4.0: Coil Combinations Tabela 4.0: Combinações de Bobinas Tabla 4.0: Combinaciones de bobinas
NI: Network Interlock NI: Encravamento Rede NI: Enclavamiento de red
GENERAL
ST...: Shunt Release ST...: Bobina à Emissão de Tensão ST...: Bobina de disparo a emisión de tensión
UVR: Undervoltage release UVR: Bobina de Mínima Tensão UVR: Bobina de mínima tensión
CC: Closing coil CC: Bobina de Fecho CC: Bobina de cierre
CCC: Command closing coil CCC: Bobina de Fecho Comandada CCC: Bobina de cierre especial
Combinação
Ubicación del dispositivo
Combinaciones de bobinas
A B C D
1 UVR1
NI CC / CCC
2 ST1
3 UVR2
ST1 UVR1 CC / CCC
4
MOTOR
ST2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OTHER
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1-02
161
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
COILS
48V AC-DC GSTR048 GSTR048R
60V DC GSTR060D GSTR060DR
110-130V AC-DC GSTR120 GSTR120R
220-240V AC-DC GSTR240 GSTR240R
277V AC; 250V DC GSTR277 GSTR277R VDC = V c.c. = VCC
380- 415V AC GSTR400A GSTR400AR VAC = V c.a. = VCA
440V AC GSTR440A GSTR440AR
An auxiliary contact ensures that the release is Um contacto auxiliar garante que o disparo foi automático, lo que asegura la rapidez de la
disconnected when the Circuit breaker is open. feito e que o disjuntor está aberto. operación de apertura.
Un contacto auxiliar asegura que la bobina de
Shunt Releases are available as a factory A Bobina à Emissão de Tensão está disponível disparo se desconecta cuando se abre el
mounted devices or as a easy to fit field montada de fábrica ou como unidade de fácil interruptor automático (autocorte).
installable units in a wide range of voltages. montagem em obra com uma grande variedade Las bobinas de disparo están disponibles como
de tensões aplicáveis. dispositivos montados en fábrica o como
unidades fácilmente montables por el usuario
en una gran variedad de tensiones.
NOTE: NOTA: NOTA:
This accessory is a Voltage ON/No Close device Este acessório é um dispositivo de tensão Este accesorio es un dispositivo de cierre
and can be used to interlock breakers. The mantida que dispara e não permite o fecho do impedido y puede utilizarse para enclavar
Circuit Breaker cannot be closed /electrically (or disjuntor enquanto estiver alimentado, quer interruptores automáticos. El interruptor
Manually) as long as the release is energized. manualmente quer electricamente, pode servir automático no se puede cerrar por medios
para encravamento de disjuntores. eléctricos (ni manuales) mientras la bobina de
disparo reciba alimentación.
Installation of Shunt Release Instalação de Bobina à Emissão de Tensão Instalación de la bobina de disparo a emisión
de tensión
1. Remove the fascia as explained. 1. Remova o frontal como explicado. 1. Retire la tapa como se indicó anteriormente.
2. Este acessório é montado na parte superior 2. Este accesorio se instala en la placa superior
2. This accessory is mounted on the mechanism do mecanismo de disparo, a 1ª ou 4ª localização del mecanismo, en la primera o cuarta
top plate at 1st or 4th location as shown in Fig. F. como mostrado na Fig. F. ubicación, como se muestra en la Fig. F.
3. Tilt the coil forward and engage the front 3. A bobina avança e engata no gancho frontal 3. Incline la bobina hacia atrás y acople los
hooks into the mechanism top support plate as da platina de suporte no topo do mecanismo ganchos frontales a la placa superior de
shown in the Fig. B. Tilt the device backwards como mostrado na Fig. B. Empurre o acessório sujeción del mecanismo como se muestra en la
until the rear hooks engage in the slots on the para traz até que o gancho traseiro engate na Fig. B. Incline el dispositivo hacia adelante hasta
mechanism top support plate as shown in the abertura da platina de suporte do como que los ganchos posteriores se acoplen en las
Fig. C. mostrado na Fig. C. ranuras de la placa superior de sujeción del
4. After installing the shunt release on the mecanismo, como se muestra en la Fig. C.
mechanism top plate, connect the input wire 4. Após instalar a Bobina à Emissão de Tensão 4. Después de instalar la bobina de disparo a
assembly plug to the A5/A6 or A12/A13 na platina de suporte no topo do mecanismo, emisión en la placa superior del mecanismo,
locations marked on the secondary disconnect ligue os fios aos terminais secundários A5/A6 ou introduzca el conector en las bornas A5/A6 o
as shown in Fig. D. A12/A13 como mostrado na Fig. D. A12/A13 marcadas en el regletero secundario,
como se muestra en la Fig. D.
5. Ensure that the plug in connection is firm and 5. Garanta a firmeza da ligação e que está 5. Asegúrese de que la conexión del conector
that the plug is inserted into the correct ligada aos terminais correctos. esté fija y que el conector esté insertado en las
terminals. bornas correctas.
6. Assemble the fascia as explained. 6. Ponha o frontal como explicado. 6. Monte la tapa como se indicó anteriormente.
4.1-03
162
EntelliGuard G ACCESSORIES
4.1
Shunt release operating Characteristics Bobina à Emissão de Tensão Características de Características de funcionamiento de la
-- Duty cycle: 2 per min Operação bobina de disparo a emisión de tensión
-- Inrush Power: 350VA -- Tempo de ciclo: 2 por min -- Ciclo de trabajo: 2 por minuto
-- Steady state: 50VA -- Chamada: 350VA -- Consumo eléctrico en llamada: 350 VA
-- Funcionamento: 50VA -- Consumo eléctrico en permanencia: 50 VA
------ ----- ------
Shunt release ratings Bobina à Emissão de Tensão Tensões Valores nominales de la bobina de disparo a
emisión de tensión
Control Voltages Operational voltage range Tensões Controlo Intervalo de tensão Tensiones Rango de tensión de trabajo
(85%-110%) operacional (85-110%)
COILS
24 VDC 21-26 VDC 48 VDC / VAC 41-53 VDC / VAC 60-72 VDC 51-79 VDC
110-130 VDC / VAC 94-143 VDC / VAC 220-240 VDC / VAC 187-264 VDC / VAC 250VDC/250-277VAC 213-275 VAC
380-415 VAC 323-456 VAC 440 VAC 374-484 VAC
A1 A3 A5 A7 A9 A12 A14 A16 A18 A20 A22 A24 A33 A34 A12
31 21 11 33 23 13
57 96 98
SPR
M1
BAT
C1 D1 C3 D1 C1
M
32 12 34 24 14 95
ML 22
C2 D2 C4 D2 C2
T
M2 58
ST1 UVR1 UVR2
CC ST2
A2 A4 A6 A8 A10 A13 A15 A17 A19 A21 A23 A25 A35 A13
LP2 LP3
Fig. A: Mechanism top plate Fig. A: Platina de topo do mecanismo Fig. A: Placa superior del mecanismo
Fig. B: Shunt release inserting Fig. B: Bobina à Emissão de Tensão, inserindo Fig. B: Inserción de bobina de disparo a emisión de tensión
Fig. C: Shunt release assembly Fig. C: Bobina à Emissão de Tensão, montagem Fig. C: Montaje de bobina de disparo a emisión de tensión
Fig. D: Wiring Fig. D: Ligando Fig. D: Cableado
Fig. E: Coil with plug Fig. E: Bobina com ficha Fig. E: Bobina con conector
2 4
A
1 3
B
C
F D
4.1-04
163
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
Undervoltage Release (UVR) Bobina de Mínima Tensão (UVR) Bobina de mínima tensión (UVR)
An UVR device activates the circuit breaker Um dispositivo UVR activava o disjuntor Un dispositivo UVR activa el mecanismo de
tripping mechanism when the line voltage drops disparando o mecanismo quando a tensão de disparo del interruptor automático cuando la
below a specified threshold. The EntelliGuard linha baixa mais que um certo valor. Os tensión de la línea desciende por debajo de un
devices are equipped with a short delay to aparelhos EntelliGuard são equipados com um umbral especificado. Los dispositivos
COILS
48V AC-DC GUVT048 GUVT048R
60V DC GUVT060D GUVT060DR
110-130V AC-DC GUVT120 GUVT120R
220-240V AC-DC GUVT240 GUVT240R
277V AC; 250V DC GUVT277 GUVT277R VDC = V c.c. = VCC
380- 415V AC GUVT400A GUVT400AR VAC = V c.a. = VCA
440V AC GUVT440A GUVT440AR
prevent nuisance tripping on brown outs. atraso para prevenir cortes bruscos por ruído ou EntelliGuard están equipados con un sistema de
por micro cortes. retardo breve para evitar disparos intempestivos
Under Voltage Releases are available as a en las salidas implicadas.
factory mounted devices or as a easy to fit field A UVR está disponível montada de fábrica ou Las bobinas de mínima tensión están
installable units in a wide range of voltages. como unidade de fácil montagem em obra com disponibles como dispositivos montados en
uma grande variedade de tensões aplicáveis. fábrica o como unidades fácilmente montables
por el usuario en una gran variedad de
NOTE: This accessory is a No-Volt/No Close tensiones.
device and can be used to interlock breakers. NOTA: Este acessório é um dispositivo de tensão NOTA: Este accesorio es un dispositivo que
The circuit breaker cannot be closed (manually mantida que dispara e não permite o fecho do impide el cierre si no está alimentado y puede
or electrically) unless the undervoltage release is disjuntor enquanto não estiver alimentada à utilizarse para enclavar interruptores
energized above the required threshold. tensão correcta, quer manualmente quer automáticos. El interruptor automático no se
electricamente, pode servir para encravamento puede cerrar (por medios eléctricos ni manuales)
de disjuntores. a menos que la bobina de mínima tensión reciba
Under Voltage Release: alimentación por encima del umbral requerido.
A device designed to open the breaker contacts Disparo por Mínima Tensão: Bobina de mínima tensión:
and to prevent the breaker from closing when É um dispositivo desenhado para abrir um Es un dispositivo diseñado para abrir los
the system voltage is not with in the specified disjuntor e para prevenir o disjuntor de fechar contactos del interruptor y para impedir que el
limits. quando a tensão dos sistema não se encontra interruptor se cierre cuando la tensión del
dentro dos limites especificados. sistema no se encuentra dentro de los límites
Installation of Under voltage release especificados.
1. Remove the fascia as explained.. Instalação da UVR Instalación de la bobina de mínima tensión
2. This accessory is mounted on the mechanism 1. Remova o frontal como explicado. 1. Retire la tapa como se indicó anteriormente.
top plate at 2rd or 4rd location as shown in Fig. D 2. Este acessório é montado na parte superior 2. Este accesorio se instala en la placa superior del
do mecanismo de disparo, a 2ª ou 4ª localização mecanismo, en la segunda o cuarta ubicación,
3. Tilt the coil forward and engage the front hooks como se muestra en la Fig. D.
como mostrado na Fig. D
into the mechanism top support plate as shown in 3. Incline la bobina hacia atrás y acople los
3. A bobina avança e engata no gancho frontal
the Fig. A. ganchos frontales a la placa superior de sujeción
4. Tilt the device backwards until the rear hooks
da platina de suporte no topo do mecanismo
del mecanismo como se muestra en la Fig. A.
engage in the slots on the mechanism top support como mostrado na Fig. A.
4. Incline el dispositivo hacia adelante hasta que
plate as shown in the Fig. B 4. A bobina avança e engata no gancho frontal los ganchos posteriores se acoplen en las ranuras
da platina de suporte no topo do mecanismo de la placa superior de sujeción del mecanismo
5. After installing the UV on the mechanism top como mostrado na Fig. B como se muestra en la Fig. B.
plate, connect the input wire assembly plug to the 5. Após instalar a UV na platina superior do 5. Después de instalar la bobina de mínima tensión
A7/A8 or A12/A13 locations marked on the mecanismo, ligue a ficha dos fios de entrada aos en la placa superior del mecanismo, introduzca el
secondary disconnect as shown in Fig. C. bornes A7/A8 ou A12/A13 marcados nos blocos conector en las bornas A7/A8 o A12/A13 marcadas
de terminais secundários como mostrado na Fig. en el regletero secundario, como se muestra en la
6. Ensure that the plug in connection is firm and C. Fig. C.
that the plug is inserted into the correct terminals. 6. Garanta a firmeza da ligação e que está 6. Asegúrese de que la conexión del conector esté
ligada aos terminais correctos. fija y que el conector esté insertado en las bornas
7. Assemble the fascia as explained. correctas.
7. Ponha o frontal como explicado 7. Monte la tapa como se indicó anteriormente.
4.1-05
164
EntelliGuard G ACCESSORIES
4.1
Undervoltage release operating Bobina de Mínima Tensão, Operação Funcionamiento de la bobina de mínima tensión
- Duty cycle: 2 per min - Tempo de ciclo: 2 per min - Ciclo de trabajo: 2 por minuto
- Inrush Power: 350VA(AC) 350W (DC) - Chamada: 350VA(AC) 350W (DC) - Consumo eléctrico en llamada:
- Steady state: 60VA (AC) 50W (DC) - Funcionamento: 60VA (AC) 50W (DC) 350 VA (CA) 350 W (CC)
-- Consumo eléctrico en permanencia:
60 VA (CA) 50 W (CC)
UV ratings Data Valores nominales de UV Datos
Controlo Tensões Intervalo Operacional de Tensão Dropout Volts Tensiones Rango de tensión de trabajo Tensión de desconexión
UV ratings Data
Control Voltages Operational voltage range Dropout Volts Control Voltages Operational voltage range Dropout Volts
(85-110%) (35-60%) (85-110%) (35-60%)
COILS
24 Vdc 21-26 Vdc 8-14 48 Vdc / Vac 41-53 Vdc / Vac 17-29
60-72 Vdc 51-79 Vdc 25-36 110-130 Vdc / Vac 94-143 Vdc / Vac 45-66
220-240 Vdc / Vac 187-264 Vdc / Vac 84-132 250 Vdc / 250-277 Vac 213-275 Vac 96-150
380-415 Vac 323-456 Vac 145-228 440 Vac 374-484 Vac 154-264
STANDARD CONNECTION SCHEME FOR TERMINAL BLOCK A ... Optional UVR2 BLOCK A
ESQUEMA STANDARD DE LIGAÇÃO PARA BLOCO TERMINAL A ... Opcional UVR2 BLOCO A
ESQUEMA DE CONEXIÓN ESTÁNDAR PARA EL REGLETERO DE BORNAS A ... REGLETERO A de UVR2 opcional
LP1 LP4
A1 A3 A5 A7 A9 A12 A14 A16 A18 A20 A22 A24 A33 A34 A12
31 21 11 33 23 13
57 96 98
SPR
M1
BAT
C1 D1 C3 D1 D1
M
32 12 34 24 14 95
ML 22
C2 D2 C4 D2 D2
T
M2 58
ST1 UVR1 CC UVR2 UVR2
A2 A4 A6 A8 A10 A13 A15 A17 A19 A21 A23 A25 A35 A13
LP2 LP3
4.1-06
165
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
COILS
110-130V DC GTDM120D 110-130V AC GTDM120A
220-240V DC GTDM240D 220-240V AC GTDM240A
250V DC GTDM250D 250-277V AC GTDM277A
380- 415V AC GTDM400A VDC = V c.c. = VCC
440V AC GTDM440A VAC = V c.a. = VCA
-- Must be applied in combination with a UVR -- Deve ser aplicado em combinação com a UVR -- Debe aplicarse en combinación con un
accessory installed in the circuit breaker. instalada no disjuntor. accesorio UVR instalado en el interruptor
automático.
-- The TDM is a separate accessory. -- O TDM é um acessório separado.
-- El TDM es un accesorio aparte.
-- TDM and UVR voltage ratings must be equal. -- As tensões TDM e UVR devem ser iguais.
-- Los tensiones nominales de TDM y UVR deben
-- O TDM fornece tensão regulada à UVR do ser iguales.
-- The TDM supplies regulated control voltage to disjuntor por um período entre 0 e 3 após uma
the breaker UVR for a period between zero and 3 falha de tensão. A Tensão aplicada durante o -- El TDM suministra una tensión de control
seconds in the event of an under voltage fault. período de atraso é suficiente para manter a regulada al UVR del interruptor automático
The voltage level supplied during the time delay UVR do disjuntor activada. durante un periodo comprendido entre cero y 3
period is sufficient to maintain the breaker UVR segundos en el caso de un defecto de mínima
in the energized state. -- No fim do tempo de atraso regulado o TDM tensión. El nivel de tensión suministrado durante
aplica 0% da tensão requerida à UVR. A UVR do el periodo de retardo es suficiente para
disjuntor responde à condição de falta de mantener el UVR del interruptor alimentado.
-- At the expiration of the time delay period the tensão e dispara o disjuntor.
TDM applies 0% of rated voltage to the breaker -- Al cumplirse el periodo de retardo, el TDM
UVR accessory. The Breaker UVR responds to the -- Uma roda localizada na frente do do aplica el 0% de la tensión nominal al accesorio
under voltage condition and trips the circuit dispositivo permite regular o tempo de atraso. UVR del interruptor automático. La bobina UVR
breaker. del interruptor automático responde al estado
-- A escala é marcada só como Mín. e Máx.. de mínima tensión y dispara el interruptor
-- A knob located on the device front allows the automático.
user to adjust the time delay. -- O ajustamento varia entre 0 (mín.) e três -- Un mando situado en el frontal del dispositivo
segundos (Máx.). permite al usuario ajustar el retardo.
-- The scale is marked as Min. and Max. only.
A Bobina de Mínima Tensão standard tem um -- La escala está marcada como Mín. y Máx.
-- The adjustment varies between 0 (min.) and tempo de atraso interno de 50 milisegundos solamente.
three (Max.) seconds. para caídas da tensão de linha até 50% do seu -- El ajuste varía entre 0 (mín.) y tres segundos
valor nominal. (máx.).
The standard Undervoltage Release accessory
has a built in delay of 50 milliseconds for drops O tempo total de NÃO REACÇÃO é o ajustado no La bobina de mínima tensión (UVR) estándar
in the line voltage of up to 50% of it's nominal módulo TDM mais o tempo de reacção standard tiene un retardo integrado de 50 milésimas de
value. da UVR. segundo para caídas en la tensión de la línea de
hasta el 50% de su valor nominal.
The total NON REACTION time is that set on the
TDM module plus that of the standard UVR El tiempo SIN REACCIÓN total es el que se
release. encuentra establecido en el módulo TDM más el
de la bobina de mínima tensión estándar UVR.
Undervoltage Time Delay Module (TDM) Módulo de Atraso (TDM) Mínima Tensão Módulo de temporización (TDM)
4.1-07
166
EntelliGuard G ACCESSORIES
4.1
Instruction sheet Folha de Instruções Hoja de instrucciones
4.1.4 Closing Coil (CC): 4.1.4 Bobina de Fecho (CC): 4.1.4 Bobina de cierre (CC):
A closing coil releases the energy stored within A Bobina de Fecho liberta a energia guardada La bobina de cierre libera la energía acumulada
the spring charged mechanism, when energized. nas molas de carga do mecanismo, quando en el mecanismo de carga de muelles cuando
It is used to switch the breaker on remotely and alimentada. É usada para ligar o disjuntor recibe alimentación eléctrica. Se utiliza para
ensures a rapid closing of the breaker mains remotamente e garante o fecho rápido do cerrar el interruptor automático de forma
contacts. disjuntor. remota y asegura un cierre rápido de los
Closing Coils are available as a factory mounted As Bobinas de Fecho estão disponíveis como contactos principales del interruptor
devices or as a easy to fit field installable units in dispositivo Montado em Fábrica ou como automático.
a wide range of voltages. componente fácil de instalar em obra com um Las bobinas de cierre están disponibles como
grande Intervalo de Tensões. dispositivos montados en fábrica o como
unidades fácilmente montables por el usuario
en una gran variedad de tensiones.
1. The breaker should be safely isolated and 1. O disjuntor deve ser isolado com segurança e 1. El interruptor automático debería estar
fully withdrawn to disconnected position. completamente extraído para a posição aislado de forma segura y completamente
SECCIONADO. retirado a la posición de seccionado.
2. Remove the fascia as explained... 2. Remova o frontal como explicado... 2. Retire la tapa como se indicó anteriormente.
3. This accessory is mounted on the mechanism 3. Este acessório é montado na platina superior 3. Este accesorio se instala en la placa superior
top plate at 3.rd location as shown in Fig. F. do mecanismo na 3.ª localização como del mecanismo, en la tercera ubicación, como se
mostrado na Fig. F. muestra en la Fig. F.
4. Tilt the coil forward and engage the front 4. A bobina avança e engata no gancho frontal 4. Incline la bobina hacia atrás y acople los
hooks into the mechanism top support plate as da platina de suporte no topo do mecanismo ganchos frontales a la placa superior de
shown in the Fig. B. como mostrado na Fig. B. sujeción del mecanismo como se muestra en la
Fig. B.
5. Tilt the device backwards until the rear hooks 5. O dispositivo vai para trás até que os 5. Incline el dispositivo hacia adelante hasta que
engage in the slots on the mechanism top ganchos traseiros engatam na abertura da los ganchos posteriores se acoplen en las
support plate as shown in the Fig. C. platina de topo do mecanismo como mostrado ranuras de la placa superior de sujeción del
na Fig. C. mecanismo como se muestra en la Fig. C.
6. After installing the closing coil on the 6. Após instalar a Bobina de Fecho na platina de 6. Después de instalar la bobina de cierre en la
mechanism top plate, connect the input wire topo do mecanismo, ligue a fiche deste aos placa superior del mecanismo, introduzca el
assembly plug to the A9-A10 locations marked terminais A9-A10 marcados nos terminais conector en las bornas A9-A10 marcadas en el
on the secondary disconnect as shown in Fig. D. secundários como mostrado na Fig. D. regletero secundario, como se muestra en la Fig.
D.
7. Ensure that the plug in connection is firm and 7. Garanta a firmeza da ligação e que está 7. Asegúrese de que la conexión del conector
that the plug is inserted into the correct ligada aos terminais correctos. esté fija y que el conector esté insertado en las
terminals. bornas correctas.
8. Ponha o frontal como explicado
8. Assemble the fascia as explained. 8. Monte la tapa como se indicó anteriormente.
4.1-08
167
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
4.1
Closing Coil operating Characteristics Bobina de Fecho, Características Características del funcionamiento de la
bobina de cierre
Duty cycle: 2 per min Tempo de ciclo: 2 per min Ciclo de trabajo: 2 por minuto
Inrush Power: 350VA Chamada: 350VA Consumo eléctrico en llamada: 350 VA
Steady state: 50VA Funcionamento: 50VA Consumo eléctrico en permanencia: 50 VA
COILS
24 VDC 21-26 VDC 48 VDC / VAC 41-53 VDC / VAC 60-72 VDC 51-79 VDC
110-130 VDC / VAC 94-143 VDC / VAC 220-240 VDC / VAC 187-264 VDC / VAC 250VDC/250-277VAC 213-275 VAC
380-415 VAC 323-456 VAC 440 VAC 374-484 VAC
STANDARD CONNECTION SCHEME FOR TERMINAL BLOCK A ... Optional Closing coil BLOCK A
ESQUEMA STANDARD DE LIGAÇÃO PARA BLOCO TERMINAL A ... Opcional Bobina de Fecho BLOCO A
ESQUEMA DE CONEXIÓN ESTÁNDAR PARA EL REGLETERO DE BORNAS A ... Bobina de cierre opcional, REGLETERO A
LP1 LP4
31 21 11 33 23 13
57 96 98
SPR
M1
BAT
C1 D1 C3 D1 C3
M
32 12 34 24 14 95
ML 22
C2 D2 C4 D2 C4
T
M2 58
ST1 UVR1 CC UVR2 CC
A2 A4 A6 A8 A10 A13 A15 A17 A19 A21 A23 A25 A35 A10
LP2 LP3
B
Fig. A: Placa superior de inserción
Fig. B: Acoplamiento
Fig. C: Cableado
Fig. D: Posiciones de las bobinas
4.1-09
168
EntelliGuard G ACCESSORIES
4.1
Instruction sheet Folha de Instruções Hoja de instrucciones
4.1.5 Command Closing Coil (CCC): 4.1.5 Bobina de Fecho Comandada 4.1.5 Bobina de cierre especial (CCC):
(CCC): La bobina de cierre especial libera la energía
A command closing coil releases the energy A Bobina de Fecho comandada liberta a acumulada en el mecanismo de carga de
stored within the spring charged mechanism, energia guardada nas molas de carga do muelles cuando recibe alimentación eléctrica. Se
when energized. It is used to switch the mecanismo, quando alimentada. É usada para utiliza para cerrar el interruptor automático de
breaker on remotely and ensures a rapid ligar o disjuntor remotamente e garante o fecho forma remota y asegura un cierre rápido de los
closing of the breaker mains contacts. rápido do disjuntor. contactos principales del interruptor
automático.
1. Voltage 2. Factory mounted Cat-No 3. Field kit or Spare
24V DC GCCC024D GCCC024DR
48V AC-DC GCCC048 GCCC048R 1. Tensão
COILS
4.1-10
169
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
4.1
Optional Installation of Extra Instalação Opcional de um Botão Extra esté fija y que el conector esté insertado en las
LOCAL- "ON" Pushbutton. LOCAL - ”ON”. bornas correctas.
8. Remove the existing dummy button by 8. Remova o botão fingido, removendo o Instalación opcional del pulsador
removing the screw as shown in Fig. F. parafuso como mostrado na Fig. F. ”ON” LOCAL adicional.
9. Insert the pushbutton and the spring from the 9. Insira o botão e a mola pela frente no Frontal. 8. Retire el botón falso presente quitando el
front of the fascia. Fit them to the cover with the Firme estas à cobertura com o parafuso tornillo como se muestra en la Fig. F.
supplied screw & washer as shown in Fig. G. fornecido e como mostrado na Fig. G. 9. Introduzca el pulsador y el muelle en la tapa
frontal. Fíjelos en la tapa con el tornillo y la
arandela que se proporcionan, como se muestra
Installation of Electrical close switch (EC): Instalação do contacto de fecho eléctrico (EC): en la Fig. G.
(..mandatory when an "Extra Local ON" (..obrigatório quando o botão ”Extra Local ON” é Instalación del contacto de cierre eléctrico
COILS
pushbutton is needed) necessário) (EC):
10. Place the EC-switch assembly over the 10. Coloque o contacto EC sobre a lateral do (obligatoria cuando se requiere un pulsador "ON"
mechanism side sheet and locate in the two mecanismo e localiza os dois furos como local adicional)
locating holes as shown in Fig H. mostrado na Fig H. 10. Sitúe el conjunto del contacto EC sobre la
11. Assemble the screw with washer as shown in 11. Monte o parafuso com arruela como cara del mecanismo y colóquelo en los dos
Fig J. Tighten the screw to torque 1,2Nm (0,9 ft- mostrado na Fig J. Aperte o parafuso com um taladros de fijación, como se muestra en la Fig.
lbs). par de 1,2Nm. H.
12. Plug the connector from the EC switch 12. Ligue o conector do contacto EC ao conector 11. Monte el tornillo con la arandela como se
assembly to the connector from the command da bobina de fecho comandada (CCC) ao lado muestra en la Fig. J. Apriete el tornillo a un par
close coil (CCC) beside the PMU base as shown in da base PMU como mostrado na Fig. K. de 1,2 Nm.
Fig. K. 13. Coloque o frontal com já explicado. 12. Enchufe el conector del conjunto del
contacto EC al conector de la bobina de cierre
Fig. A: CCC-Plug assembly Fig. A: Ficha do CCC Fig. A: Conjunto de conexiones CCC
Fig. B: CCC-Coil assembly Fig. B: Bobina do CCC Fig. B: Conjunto de la bobina de CCC
Fig. C: wiring position Fig. C: posição da cablagem Fig. C: Posición del cableado
Fig. D: Closing Coil assembly Fig. D: Bobina de Fecho Fig. D: Conexiones de la bobina de cierre
Fig. E: Secondary disconnect plug Fig. E: Ficha dos terminais secundários Fig. E: Enchufe del conector secundario
Fig. F: Remove dummy button screw Fig. F: Remoção do parafuso do botão fingido Fig. F: Retire el tornillo del botón falso
Fig. G: Extra Local ON-Pushbutton assembly Fig. G: Botão Extra Local ON Fig. G: Conjunto del pulsador ON local adicional
A B C
D F
E
G G
4.1-11
170
EntelliGuard G ACCESSORIES
4.1
13. Re-assemble the Front Facia as explained Bobina de Fecho Comandada (CCC): especial (CCC) situado junto a la base de la PMU,
elsewhere in this section. Ensure the fascia is .. Características de Operação: como se muestra en la Fig. K.
aligned properly with the trip unit and the pad Tempo de ciclo: 2 per min 13. Vuelva a montar la tapa frontal como se
lock features of the breaker. Chamada: 350VA explica en esta misma sección.
Funcionamento: 50VA
Command Closing Coil (CCC): Bobina de cierre especial (CCC):
.. operating Characteristics: Características do contacto de fecho eléctrico .. Características de funcionamiento:
Duty cycle: 2 per min (EC): Ciclo de trabajo: 2 por minuto
Inrush Power: 350VA Capacitado para uso com Bobinas de fecho Consumo eléctrico en llamada: 350 VA
Steady state: 50VA comandadas com tensões até 130VDC ou 240V Consumo eléctrico en permanencia: 50 VA
AC
COILS
Electrical close switch (EC) ratings: Valores nominales del contacto de cierre
Suited for use with Command Close coils with a eléctrico (EC):
rating up to 130VDC or 240V AC Apto para uso con bobinas de cierre especiales
con un valor nominal de hasta 130 V CC ó 240 V
CA
STANDARD CONNECTION SCHEME FOR TERMINAL BLOCK A ... Connection scheme Command Closing Coil BLOCK A
ESQUEMA STANDARD DE LIGAÇÃO PARA BLOCO TERMINAL A ... Esquema de ligação Bobina de Fecho Comandada BLOCO A
ESQUEMA DE CONEXIÓN ESTÁNDAR PARA EL REGLETERO DE BORNAS A ... Esquema de conexión de la bobina de cierre por mando, REGLETERO A
LP1 LP4
A1 A3 A5 A7 A9 A12 A14 A16 A18 A20 A22 A24 A33 A34 A10 A11
31 21 11 33 23 13
57 96 98
M1 SPR
BAT C4
C1 D1 C3 D1
M 95
C5
32 22 12 34 24 14
ML
C2 D2 C4 D2 T C3
M2 58
ST1 UVR1 CC UVR2
CCC
LP2 LP3
Installation EC-switch:
Instalação Contacto EC: EC-switch
Instalación del contacto EC: Contacto EC
H J K
4.1-12
171
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
COILS
that only can be accessed after breaker cover afecta o bloqueio e/ou reposição deste corriente eléctrica no afecta al enclavamiento
removal. dispositivo. y/o reset de este dispositivo. Cada dispositivo
As indicated here the device can be mounted in Cada dispositivo tem uma botão RESET local que cuenta con un botón RESET (Restablecer) local al
the field but at the moment that this document só pode ser acedido depois de removida a que sólo se puede acceder después de retirar la
was published it was only available as factory cobertura frontal do disjuntor. tapa del interruptor automático.
mounted component.
A
B
C
1 2 3 4
NI mounting location 1+2 Como indicado aqui o dispositivo pode ser Como se indica en este manual, el dispositivo
Localização de montagem NI 1+2 montado em obra mas no momento de puede montarlo el propio usuario, pero en el
Ubicación de montaje de NI 1+2 elaboração deste manual só está disponível momento de la publicación de este documento,
como componente montado em fábrica. sólo se encontraba disponible como
Please contact the nearest GE office for field Por favor contacte o seu representante GE mais componente instalado en fábrica.
mounted variants. It has the volume of two próximo para variantes a montar em obra deste Póngase en contacto con la oficina más próxima
releases (Shunt/Undervoltage). componente. Este ocupa o espaço de duas de GE par conocer las variantes montables por
bobinas (Disparo/Mínima). el usuario. Presenta el mismo volumen que dos
Installation of Network Interlock bobinas (de disparo a emisión de tensión y de
1. The breaker should be safely isolated and fully Instalação de Encravamento de Rede mínima tensión).
withdrawn to disconnected position. 1. O disjuntor deve ser isolado com segurança e
2. Remove the fascia as explained. completamente extraído para a posição Instalación de un enclavamiento de red
SECCIONADO. 1. El interruptor automático debería estar
3. This accessory uses two locations of the coils 2. Remova o frontal como explicado... aislado de forma segura y completamente
on the mechanism top plate at 1.+ 2. locations retirado a la posición de seccionado.
as shown in Fig. A+F 3. Este acessório ocupa o espaço de duas 2. Retire la tapa como se indicó anteriormente.
4. Tilt the NI forward and engage the front hooks Bobinas na platina de topo do mecanismo, 3. Este accesorio utiliza dos ubicaciones de
into the mechanism top support plate as shown localizações 1.+ 2. como mostrado na Fig. A+F bobinas en la placa superior del mecanismo, en
in the Fig. B. 4. Empurre o NI para a frente e engate os la posiciones 1 y 2, como se muestra en la Fig.
ganchos frontais à platina de suporte no topo A+F.
5. Tilt the device backwards until the rear hooks do mecanismo como mostrado na Fig. B. 4. Incline la NI hacia atrás y acople los ganchos
engage in the slots on the mechanism top frontales en la placa superior de sujeción del
support plate as shown in the Fig. C. 5. Empurre o NI para trás e engate os ganchos mecanismo como se muestra en la Fig. B.
6. Connect the input wire assembly plugs to the traseiros à platina de suporte no topo do 5. Incline el dispositivo hacia adelante hasta que
A5-A6 and A7-A8 locations marked on the mecanismo como mostrado na Fig. C. los ganchos posteriores se acoplen en las
secondary disconnect block A as shown in Fig. D. ranuras de la placa superior de sujeción del
Connect the NI status switch wire assembly 6. Ligue as fichas da cablagem associada aos mecanismo como se muestra en la Fig. C.
plugs to the B4-B5-B6 locations on the block B. pontos A5-A6 and A7-A8 marcados nos 6. Introduzca el conector en las bornas A5-A6 y
terminais secundários do Bloco A como A7-A8 marcadas en el regletero secundario A,
Fig.1 Fig.2 Removal of Front cover
1. Remove pad locks, installed if any.
A 2. Unscrew the 6 screws (6Nm, 4.42ft-lbs) using a Pozidrive screw driver as shown in
B Fig. A&B. 3. Rotate the charging handle down and slide the front cover
over the handle to remove out as shown in Fig. C.
4.1-13
172
EntelliGuard G ACCESSORIES
4.1
7. Ensure that the plug in connection is firm and mostrado na Fig. D. Ligue o contacto de estado como se muestra en la Fig. D. Introduzca el
that the plug is inserted into the correct do NI com a ficha da cablagem aos pontos B4- conector del cableado del contacto de estado
terminals. B5-B6 localizados no bloco B. de NI en las bornas B4-B5-B6 del regletero B.
8. Assemble the fascia as explained. 7. Asegúrese de que la conexión del conector
7. Garanta a firmeza da ligação e que está esté fija y que el conector esté insertado en las
ligada aos terminais correctos. bornas correctas.
8. Coloque o frontal com já explicado. 8. Monte la tapa como se indicó anteriormente.
-- Control Voltage: 110-130V AC-DC -- Tensão de Controlo: 110-130V AC-DC -- Tensión: 110-130 V CA-CC
220-240V AC-DC 220-240V AC-DC 220-240 V CA-CC
-- Duty cycle: 2 per min -- Tempo de ciclo: 2 por min -- Ciclo de trabajo: 2 por minuto
-- Inrush Power: 480VA -- Chamada: 480VA -- Consumo eléctrico en llamada: 480 VA
-- Steady state: 50VA -- Funcionamento: 50VA -- Consumo eléctrico en permanencia: 50 VA
STANDARD CONNECTION SCHEME FOR TERMINAL BLOCK A ... NI Network Interlock BLOCK B LP10
ESQUEMA STANDARD DE LIGAÇÃO PARA BLOCO TERMINAL A ... NI Encravamento de Rede BLOCO B
ESQUEMA DE CONEXIÓN ESTÁNDAR PARA EL REGLETERO DE BORNAS A ... Dispositivo de enclavamiento de red (NI) REGLETERO B
LP1 B4 B5
LP4
31 21 11 33 23 13
68
66
57 96 98
NI
SPR
M1
E1 BAT
E3 C3 D1
65
M
32 12 34 24 14 95
ML 22
E2 E4 C4 D2
T
LP2 LP3
1
3
Network Interlock
NI mounting location 1+2
Localização de montagem NI 1+2
Ubicación de montaje de NI 1+2
F
4.1-14
173
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
In order to charge the stored energy mechanism De modo a carregar o mecanismo Para cargar eléctricamente el mecanismo de
electrically a motor charging mechanism is electricamente está disponível um motor de acumulación de energía, existe un motor de
available. The design allows factory or field carga das molas. O seu desenho permite a carga de muelles. Su diseño permite realizar un
mounting and is available for the full range of montagem em fábrica ou em obra e está montaje en fábrica o montable por el usuario y
EntelliGuard breakers. It is easily fitted with just disponível para a gama completa de disjuntores está disponible en toda la gama de interruptores
three bolts. EntelliGuard. É facilmente colocado só com 3 automáticos EntelliGuard G. Se instala
When the circuit breaker is opened the parafusos. fácilmente por medio de tres tornillos.
mechanism automatically recharges the springs Quando o disjuntor é abeto o mecanismo Cuando el interruptor automático se abre, el
and prepares the breaker for an almost carrega automaticamente as molas e prepara o mecanismo recarga automáticamente los
instantaneous re-closure should the need arise. disjuntor para um fecho quase instantâneo, se muelles y prepara el interruptor para un cierre
High speed recharging ensures that the springs houver necessidade. A recarga a grande casi instantáneo si fuera necesario. La recarga a
are fully charged within four seconds. velocidade garante a recarga total das molas alta velocidad garantiza que los muelles estén
MOTOR
..catalogue number see page 4.2-03
..Referencia ver pág. 4.2-03
..Referencia, consulte la página 4.2-03
A “springs charged" contact remotely indicates em apenas quatro segundos. cargados por completo al cabo de cuatro
the status of the device. segundos.
Um contacto de molas carregadas indica Un contacto de “muelles cargados” indica de
Installation of Motor Operator remotamente o estado do dispositivo. forma remota el estado del dispositivo.
1. The breaker should be safely isolated and
fully withdrawn to disconnected position. Instalação do Motor Instalación del mando eléctrico
1. O disjuntor deve ser isolado com segurança e 1. El interruptor automático debería estar
2. Remove the fascia completamente extraído para a posição aislado de forma segura y completamente
SECCIONADO. retirado a la posición de seccionado.
3. Slide the sleeve (coupling bush) on the 2. Remova o frontal como explicado... 2. Retire la tapa
camshaft as shown in Fig. B. 3. Puxe a manivela de carga manual para baixo 3. Deslice el manguito del eje de acoplamiento,
como mostrado na Fig. B. como se muestra en la Fig. B.
4. Orient the device as shown in Fig. C, locating 4. Oriente o dispositivo como mostrado na Fig. 4. Oriente el dispositivo como se muestra en la
the gearbox bearing on to the cam drive shaft, C, Localizando o redutor de encontro ao olho do Fig. C, situando el cojinete de la caja de
pushing it until it is flush with the mechanism mecanismo das molas, empurre até que este engranajes en el eje de acoplamineto,
side. Gently pulling the charging handle down deslize para o lado do mecanismo. Puxando empujándolo hasta que quede alineado con la
will help if difficulties are experienced in lentamente a manivela de carga manual para pared del mecanismo. Si tira suavemente hacia
mounting the device correctly. (see Fig. D.) baixo ajuda nas dificuldades já experimentadas abajo de la manivela de carga, le resultará más
na montagem do dispositivo correctamente. (Ver fácil efectuar esta operación en el caso de que
5. Rotate the motor operator to align the 3 Fig. D.) experimente dificultades a la hora de montar
mounting holes in the side sheet. Mount the correctamente el dispositivo. (consulte la Fig. D.)
device using the tapped holes in the gearbox 5. Rode o motor para alinhar os 3 furos de 5. Gire el mando eléctrico para alinear los 3
assembly and the supplied three M5 bolts . montagem na sua lateral. Monte o dispositivo taladros de montaje en la placa lateral. Monte el
Torque to 7Nm. usando os referidos furos no redutor e os dispositivo utilizando los taladros en la caja de
parafusos M% fornecidos . Par de 7Nm. engranajes y los pernos M5 que se
6. Assemble the cam on the cam drive shaft 6. Monte o veio de transmissão enquanto proporcionan. Apriete a 7 Nm.
while pressing the two switch levers as indicated pressiona os dois contactos de indicação como 6. Monte la leva de la transmisión mientras
in Fig. E. indicado na Fig. E. presiona las dos palancas de los contactos,
7. Monte a porca de segurança M8 no fim do como se indica en la Fig. E.
7. Assemble the M8 nylock nut at the end of the veio de transmissão e aperte com um par de 7. Coloque la tuerca de seguridad M8 en el
camshaft and torque to 14.5 N m as shown in 14.5 N m como mostrado na Fig. F. extremo de la transmisión y apriete a 14,5 Nm
Fig. F. como se muestra en la Fig. F.
8. Carregue as molas manualmente com a
4.2-01
174
EntelliGuard G ACCESSORIES
4.2
8. Manually charge the springs with the charging manivela e garanta que o motor foi montado 8. Cargue manualmente los muelles con la
handle and ensure the motor is assembled correctamente. manivela de carga y asegúrese de que el motor
properly. 9. Ligue as fichas da cablagem do motor e dos esté correctamente ensamblado.
9. Connect the input wire assembly plugs for the contactos de indicação da Carga das Molas 9. Conecte los conectores del cableado de
motor and the spring charge status indicator como mostrado na Fig. F. entrada para el motor y el indicador de estado
switch as shown in Fig. F. 10. Monte o Frontal. de carga muelles, como se muestra en la Fig. F.
10. Assemble the fascia as explained. 10. Monte la tapa como se indicó anteriormente.
STANDARD CONNECTION SCHEME FOR TERMINAL BLOCK A ... Motor drive BLOCK A
ESQUEMA STANDARD DE LIGAÇÃO PARA BLOCO TERMINAL A ... Motor de carga BLOCO A
ESQUEMA DE CONEXIÓN ESTÁNDAR PARA EL REGLETERO DE BORNAS A ... Accionamiento del motor, REGLETERO A
31 21 11 33 23 13
96 98
MOTOR
57
M1 SPR
BAT M1 57
C1 D1 C3 D1
M 95 M SPR
32 22 12 34 24 14
ML ML
C2 D2 C4 D2 T
M2 58 M2 58
ST1 UVR1 CC UVR2
LP2 LP3
E F F
C
Fig. A: Motor Operator Kit Fig. E: Veio de transmissão
Fig. B: Assembly of sleeve Fig. F: Porca de segurança
Fig. C: Motor assembly mounting Fig. F: Conectores de ligação
F Fig. D: Assembly of screws
Fig. E: Assembly of cam Fig. A: Kit de mando eléctrico
Fig. F: Assembly of Nut Fig. B: Montaje del manguito
Fig. F: Assembly of connectors Fig. C: Montaje del conjunto del motor
Fig. D: Montaje de los tornillos
Fig. A: Kit de motor de carga Fig. E: Montaje de la transmisión
Fig. B: Montagem do rolamento Fig. F: Montaje de la tuerca
Fig. C: Montagem do motor Fig. F: Montaje de los conectores
Fig. D: Parafusos de fixação
4.2-02
175
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
4.2
Motor operator / Motor de carga / Mando eléctrico
Frame 1 Motor Ratings Factory mounted Tamanho 1 Características do Motor, Tamaño 1 - Valores nominales del motor
Montado em Fábrica con montaje en fábrica
Cat # DC Voltage AC Voltage Cat # Tensão DC Tensão AC Nº de catálogo Tensión de CC Tensión de CA
GM01024D 24-30V ... GM01024D 24-30V ... GM01024D 24-30 V ...
GM01048D 48V ... GM01048D 48V ... GM01048D 48 V ...
GM01060D 60V ... GM01060D 60V ... GM01060D 60 V ...
GM01110D 110-130V ... GM01110D 110-130V ... GM01110D 110-130 V ...
GM01250D 250V ... GM01250D 250V ... GM01250D 250 V ...
GM01048A ... 48V GM01048A ... 48V GM01048A ... 48 V
GM01120A ... 110-130V GM01120A ... 110-130V GM01120A ... 110-130 V
GM01240A ... 220-240V GM01240A ... 220-240V GM01240A ... 220-240 V
GM01400A ... 380-400V GM01400A ... 380-400V GM01400A ... 380-400 V
GM01440A ... 440V GM01440A ... 440V GM01440A ... 440 V
------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------
Frame 1 Motor Ratings Field kit (Spare) Tamanho 1 Características do Motor, Kit de Tamaño 1 - Valores nominales del motor
Obra (Subst.) para el kit montable por el usuario (recambio)
Cat # DC Voltage AC Voltage Cat # Tensão CC Tensão AC Nº de catálogo Tensión de CC Tensión de CA
---------------- ----------------
MOTOR
----------------
GM01024DR 24-30V ... GM01024DR 24-30V ... GM01024DR 24-30 V ...
GM01048DR 48V ... GM01048DR 48V ... GM01048DR 48 V ...
GM01060DR 60V ... GM01060DR 60V ... GM01060DR 60 V ...
GM01110DR 110-130V ... GM01110DR 110-130V ... GM01110DR 110-130 V ...
GM01250DR 250V ... GM01250DR 250V ... GM01250DR 250 V ...
GM01048AR ... 48V GM01048AR ... 48V GM01048AR ... 48 V
GM01120AR ... 110-130V GM01120AR ... 110-130V GM01120AR ... 110-130 V
GM01240AR ... 220-240V GM01240AR ... 220-240V GM01240AR ... 220-240 V
GM01400AR ... 380-400V GM01400AR ... 380-400V GM01400AR ... 380-400 V
GM01440AR ... 440V GM01440AR ... 440V GM01440AR ... 440 V
Frame 2 /3 Motor Ratings Factory mounted Tamanho 2 /3 Características do Motor, Tamaño 2 / 3 - Valores nominales del motor
Montado em Fábrica con montaje en fábrica
Cat # DC Voltage AC Voltage Cat # Tensão DC Tensão AC Nº de catálogo Tensión de CC Tensión de CA
--------------- --------------- ---------------
GM02024D 24-30V ... GM02024D 24-30V ... GM02024D 24-30 V ...
GM02048D 48V ... GM02048D 48V ... GM02048D 48 V ...
GM02060D 60V ... GM02060D 60V ... GM02060D 60 V ...
GM02110D 110-130V ... GM02110D 110-130V ... GM02110D 110-130 V ...
GM02250D 250V ... GM02250D 250V ... GM02250D 250 V ...
GM02048A ... 48V GM02048A ... 48V GM02048A ... 48 V
GM02120A ... 110-130V GM02120A ... 110-130V GM02120A ... 110-130 V
GM02240A ... 220-240V GM02240A ... 220-240V GM02240A ... 220-240 V
GM02400A ... 380-400V GM02400A ... 380-400V GM02400A ... 380-400 V
GM02440A ... 440V GM02440A ... 440V GM02440A ... 440 V
------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------
Frame 2/3 Motor Ratings Field kit (Spare) Tamanho 2/3 Características do Motor, Tamaño 2/3 - Valores nominales del motor
Kit de Obra (Subst.) para el kit montable por el usuario (recambio)
Cat # DC Voltage AC Voltage Cat # Tensão DC Tensão AC Nº de catálogo Tensión de CC Tensión de CA
-------------- -------------- --------------
GM02024DR 24-30V ... GM02024DR 24-30V ... GM02024DR 24-30 V ...
GM02048DR 48V ... GM02048DR 48V ... GM02048DR 48 V ...
GM02060DR 60V ... GM02060DR 60V ... GM02060DR 60 V ...
GM02110DR 110-130V ... GM02110DR 110-130V ... GM02110DR 110-130 V ...
GM02250DR 250V ... GM02250DR 250V ... GM02250DR 250 V ...
GM02048AR ... 48V GM02048AR ... 48V GM02048AR ... 48 V
GM02120AR ... 110-130V GM02120AR ... 110-130V GM02120AR ... 110-130 V
GM02240AR ... 220-240V GM02240AR ... 220-240V GM02240AR ... 220-240 V
GM02400AR ... 380-400V GM02400AR ... 380-400V GM02400AR ... 380-400 V
GM02440AR ... 440V GM02440AR ... 440V GM02440AR ... 440 V
Motor Operating Characteristics Características de Operação do Motor Características de funcionamiento del motor
Power consumption: Potência de consumo: Consumo eléctrico:
Frame 1: 300W / 350VA Tamanho 1: 300W / 350VA Tamaño 1: 300 W / 350 VA
Frame 2 & 3: 480W / 560VA Tamanho 2 e 3: 480W / 560VA Tamaño 2 y 3: 480 W / 560 VA
4.2-03
176
EntelliGuard G ACCESSORIES
4.2
Instruction sheet Folha de Instruções Hoja de instrucciones
4.2.1 Ready to Close Contact 4.2.1 Contacto de Preparado para 4.2.1 Contacto Preparado para cierre
(RTC): fecho (RTC): (RTC):
A breaker with electrical charging mechanism Um disjuntor com o mecanismo de carga De forma opcional, se puede instalar en un
can be optionally equipped with a ready to close eléctrico pode ser opcionalmente equipado com interruptor automático con mando eléctrico, un
indication contact that in a majority of cases o contacto de preparado para fecho que na contacto de indicación Preparado para cierre
replaces the standard Spring Charged Contact maioria dos casos substitui contacto o standard que en la mayoría de los casos sustituye al
(SAC) . The Ready to Close Contact only moves de indicação de molas carregadas (SAC) . O contacto de muelles cargados (SAC)
position when the following conditions are met: contacto de preparado para fecho só muda de convencional. El contacto Preparado para cierre
-> The circuit breaker is open estado quando as seguintes condições são sólo cambia de posición cuando se cumplen las
-> The closing springs are charged satisfeitas : condiciones siguientes:
-> The circuit breaker in not locked/interlocked in -> O disjuntor está aberto -> El interruptor está abierto
open position. -> As molas estão carregadas -> Los muelles de cierre están cargados
-> There is no standing closing order -> O disjuntor não está bloqueado/encravado na -> El interruptor no está bloqueado/enclavado
-> There is no standing opening order posição aberto. en posición abierta
The contact has a 1NO configuration and is -> Não há condição de fecho pendente -> No hay ninguna orden de cierre pendiente
available in two variants 'Signal Rated' and -> Não há condição de abertura pendente -> No hay ninguna orden de apertura pendiente
MOTOR
'Power Rated'. Both variants can be wired O contacto tem uma configuração de 1NA e El contacto presenta una configuración 1 NA y
through the breakers secondary disconnects. está disponível em duas variantes 'Sinal de está disponible en dos variantes, 'de bajo nivel' y
Here the device always replace the 'Spring Baixo Nível' e 'Contacto de Potência'. Ambas as 'contacto estándar'. Ambas variantes se pueden
Charged Contact'. variantes podem ser cabladas aos bornes dos conectar a través de los regleteros secundarios
If the 'Signal Rated' type is used and wired terminais secundários dos disjuntor. Onde este de los interruptor automáticos. En este caso, el
through the Trip Unit harness the 'Spring dispositivo substitui sempre o 'Contacto de dispositivo sustituye siempre al 'contacto de
Charged Contact' can be left in place. Molas Carregadas'. muelles cargados'.
Se o tipo 'Sinal de Baixo Nível' é usado e ligado Si se utiliza el tipo 'de bajo nivel' y se cablea a
The Ready to Close contact is NOT available as através da Unidade de Disparo o 'Contacto de través de la unidad de protección, el 'contacto
Field Mountable accessory. The instructions Molas Carregadas' pode ser deixado no seu de muelles cargados' se puede dejar en su lugar.
included here are meant as indications for lugar. El contacto Preparado para cierre NO está
service purposes: O contacto de preparado para fecho NÃO estão disponible como accesorio montable por el
disponível como acessório a montar em obra. As usuario. Las instrucciones que aquí se incluyen
Installation of Ready to close Contact instruções qui descritas são apenas para están pensadas a modo de indicaciones para
1. The breaker should be safely isolated and fully serviços de manutenção: fines de mantenimiento:
withdrawn to disconnected position. Instalación del contacto Preparado para cierre
Instalação do Contacto de Preparado para 1. El interruptor automático debería estar
2. Remove the fascia as explained Fecho aislado de forma segura y completamente
3. Remove the trip unit (section 2) 1. O disjuntor deve ser convenientemente retirado a la posición de seccionado.
4. Slide the RTC switch assembly over the isolado e completamente extraído para a 2. Retire la tapa como se indicó anteriormente.
mechanism side sheet and locate in the two posição SECCIONADO. 3. Retire la unidad de protección (sección 2).
locating holes as shown in Fig. A. 2. Remova o frontal como já explicado 4. Coloque el conjunto del contacto RTC sobre la
5. Assemble the screw with washer as shown in 3. Remova a unidade de disparo (secção 2) pared del mecanismo y colóquelo en los dos
Fig. B. Tighten the screw to torque 2 Nm 4. Deslize o contacto RTC sobre a lateral do taladros de fijación, como se muestra en la
mecanismo e localize os dois parafuso de Fig.A.
6. When the 'Signal Rated' type is used and wired fixação como mostrado na Fig. A. 5. Monte el tornillo con la arandela como se
through the Trip Unit plug the connector from 5. Monte o parafuso com a haste como muestra en la Fig. B. Apriete el tornillo a un par
the RTC assembly to the connector marked RTC mostrado na Fig. B. Aperte com uma força de de 2 Nm.
on the Trip Unit harness. See Fig. C par 2 Nm 6. Cuando se utiliza el tipo 'de bajo nivel' y se
6. Quando é usado o tipo 'Baixo Nível' conecte a cablea a través de la unidad de protección,
7. When the Signal or Power rated type is used ficha de ligação à Unidade de Disparo usando a enchufe el conector del conjunto RTC al
and wired through the secondary disconnects, cablagem do RTC marcada RTC à mesma conector con la instrucción RTC de la unidad de
disconnect the SAC switch as indicated in Fig. D marcação na Unidade de Disparo. Ver Fig. C protección. Consulte la Fig. C.
Fig.1 Fig.2 Removal of Front cover
1. Remove pad locks, installed if any.
A 2. Unscrew the 6 screws (6Nm, 4.42ft-lbs) using a Pozidrive screw driver as shown in
B Fig. A&B. 3. Rotate the charging handle down and slide the front cover
over the handle to remove out as shown in Fig. C.
4.2-04
177
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
4.2
and replace it with the connector of the RTC 7. Quando é usado o tipo 'Sinal de Pitência' e 7. Cuando se usa el tipo 'de bajo nivel' o
switch as indicated in Fig. E. ligado aos terminais secundários, desligue o 'contacto estándar' y se cablea a través de los
contacto SAC como indicado na Fig. D e regleteros secundarios, desconecte el contacto
8. Plug the connector from the RTC switch substitua-o pela ficha do contacto RTC como SAC como se indica en la Fig. D y sustitúyalo por
assembly with the plug marked as RTC as shown indicado na Fig. E. el conector del contacto RTC, como se indica en
in Fig. E. 8. Ligue o conector do contacto RTC com a ficha la Fig. E.
marcada RTC como mostrado na Fig. E. 8. Enchufe el conector del contacto RTC con el
9. Re-assemble the Trip Unit as indicated in 9. Volte a montar a Unidade de Disparo como conector con la inscripción RTC, según se
section 2. indicado na secção 2. muestra en la Fig. E.
9. Vuelva a montar la unidad de protección
como se indica en la sección 2.
Ready To close switch Cat no Contacto de Preparado para Fecho Referencia Contacto Preparado para cierre Nº cat.
RTC TO SD, Signal rated Contact RTC para SD, Contacto de baixo nível RTC a SD, contacto de bajo nivel
AC Ratings 125VAC 0.1A GRTC2 Características AC 125VAC 0.1A GRTC2 Valores nominales para CA 125 VCA 0,1 A GRTC2
DC Ratings 30VDC 0.1A Características DC 30VDC 0.1A Valores nominales para CC 30 VCC 0,1 A
RTC TO SD, Power Rated Contact RTC para SD, Contacto de Potência RTC a SD, contacto estándar
AC Ratings 120-250VAC 6A GRTC1 Características AC 120-250VAC 6A GRTC1 Valores nominales para CA 120-250VCA 6 A GRTC1
DC Ratings 125VDC 0.5A, 250VDC 0.25A Características DC 125VDC 0.5A, 250VDC 0.25A Valores nominales para CC 125VCC 0,5A, 250VCC 0,25A
RTC TO Trip Unit, Signal rated Contact RTC para Unidade de Disparo, Contacto de baixo nível RTC a unidad de protección, contacto de bajo nivel
MOTOR
AC Ratings 125VAC 0.1A GRTC3 Características AC 125VAC 0.1A GRTC3 Valores nominales para CA 125 VCA 0,1 A GRTC3
DC Ratings 30VDC 0.1A Características DC 30VDC 0.1A Valores nominales para CC 30 VCC 0,1 A
STANDARD CONNECTION SCHEME FOR TERMINAL BLOCK A ... Connection scheme RTC (BLOCK A)
ESQUEMA STANDARD DE LIGAÇÃO PARA BLOCO TERMINAL A ... Esquema de ligação RTC (BLOCO A)
ESQUEMA DE CONEXIÓN ESTÁNDAR PARA EL REGLETERO DE BORNAS A ... Esquema de conexión de RTC (REGLETERO A)
LP1 LP4 LP5
31 21 11 33 23 13
57 96 98 57
M1 SPR RTC
BAT
C1 D1 C3 D1
M 95
32 22 12 34 24 14
ML
C2 D2 C4 D2 T 58
M2 58
ST1 UVR1 CC UVR2
LP2 LP3
Fig. D:
Unplug spring charge contact
4.2-05
178
EntelliGuard G ACCESSORIES
4.3
note notas | notas note notas | notas note notas | notas
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTACTS
4.3-00
179
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
Installation of Auxiliary Contact: Instalação de Contactos Auxiliares: Instalación del contacto auxiliar
1. The breaker should be safely isolated and fully 1. O disjuntor deve ser convenientemente isolado e 1. El interruptor automático debería estar aislado de
withdrawn to disconnected position. completamente extraído para a posição forma segura y completamente retirado a la posición
2. Remove the fascia as explained. SECCIONADO. de seccionado.
3. If present, dis-assemble all installed Coils and/or 2. Remova o frontal como já explicado. 2. Retire la tapa como se indicó anteriormente.
Releases as indicated elsewhere in this section. 3. Se presentes, desmonte todas as bobinas 3. Si están presentes, desmonte todas las bobinas y/o
instaladas e/ou disparadores como indicado nesta
CONTACTS
4. Unplug the existing aux switch connector plugs secção. bobinas de disparo instaladas, como se indica en esta
from the secondary disconnect as shown in Fig. B. 4. Desligue a ficha dos contactos auxiliares misma sección.
5. Remove the Circlips or e-ring from the auxiliary existentes do bloco de terminais secundário como 4. Extraiga del regleto secundario todas las
switch link as indicated in fig. D. Refer to Fig. G for a mostrado na Fig. B. conexiones de los contactos auxiliares existentes,
detailed view. 5. Remova os Circlips ou e-ring de ligação aos como se muestra en la Fig. B.
6. Remove the existing M5 nut & M6 screw from the contactos auxiliares como mostrado na fig. D. 5. Retire los pasadores de sujección de los contactos
assembly as shown in Fig. D Verifique a Fig. G para uma vista detalhada. auxiliares como se indica en la Fig. D. Consulte la Fig.
7. Remove the existing aux switch assembly from 6. Remova as porcas M5 existentes e parafusos M6 G para obtener una vista detallada.
the housing as shown in Fig. E. da montagem como mostrado na Fig. D 6. Retire la tuerca M5 y el tornillo M6 del conjunto,
8. Insert the new aux switch assembly on the 7. Remova a montagem dos contactos auxiliares como se muestra en la Fig. D.
housing as shown in Fig. F. existentes da caixa como mostrado na Fig. E. 7. Retire el conjunto de contactos auxiliares existente
9. Re-assemble the device by using the M5 & M6 8. Insira a nova montagem dos contactos del alojamiento, como se muestra en la Fig. E.
screws from step 6. (see above) auxiliares na caixa como mostrado na Fig. F. 8. Introduzca el conjunto de contactos auxiliares
10. Replace the Circlips or e-ring of the auxiliary 9. Volte a montar o dispositivo usando os nuevo en el alojamiento, como se muestra en la Fig. F.
switch link as indicated in fig. G. parafusos e porcas M5 e M6 do passo 6. (ver acima) 9. Vuelva a montar el dispositivo con los tornillos M5 y
11. Plug the connectors from the aux switch into 10. Volte a colocar os Circlips ou e-ring à ligação M6 del paso 6 (véase el paso anterior).
the secondary disconnect terminals marked as A14, dos contactos auxiliares como mostrado na fig. G. 10. Coloque de nuevo los pasadores de sujección de
A15 etc in the respective terminals as shown in Fig. 11. Ligue a ficha dos contactos auxiliares à régua los contactos auxiliares como se indica en la Fig. G.
H. dos terminais secundários marcados A14, A15 etc. 11. Enchufe los conectores del contacto auxiliar en
12. If needed, re-assemble the Coils and/or nos respectivos terminais como mostrado na Fig. H. las bornas de los regleteros secundarios marcadas
Releases as indicated elsewhere in this section. 12. Se necessário, volte a colocar as Bobinas e/o como A14, A15, etc. en las bornas correspondientes,
13. Assemble the fascia as explained. disparadores como indicado nesta secção. como se muestra en la Fig. H.
13. Monte o frontal como explicado anteriormente. 12. Si es necesario, vuelva a montar las bobinas y/o
bobinas de disparo, como se indica en esta misma
sección.
13. Monte la tapa como se indicó anteriormente.
4.3-01
180
EntelliGuard G ACCESSORIES
4.3 Auxiliary Contact ratings Características Contactos Auxiliares Valores nominales de contactos auxiliares
Switch Contacto
STANDARD CONNECTION SCHEME FOR STANDARD 3 NO & 3 NC AUXILIARY CONTACTS CONNECTION SCHEME additional contacts
ESQUEMA STANDARD DE LIGAÇÃO PARA CONTACTOS AUXILIARES STANDARD 3 NA E 3 NF ESQUEMA DE LIGAÇÃO contactos adicionais
ESQUEMA DE CONEXIONES ESTÁNDAR PARA CONTACTO AUXILIARES 3 NA Y 3 NC ESTÁNDAR ESQUEMA DE CONEXIONES de contactos adicionales
LP1 LP4
A1 A3 A5 A7 A9 A12 A14 A16 A18 A20 A22 A24 A33 A34 B4 B6 B8 B10 B12 B17 B19 B21 B23 B25
31 21 11 33 23 13
57 96 98 81 71 61 51 41 83 73 63 53 43
M1
SPR BAT 82 72 62 52 42 84 74 64 54 44
C1 D1 C3 D1
M 95
32 22 12 34 24 14
ML
CONTACTS
C2 D2 C4 D2 T
M2 58
ST1 UVR1 CC UVR2
A2 A4 A6 A8 A10 A13 A15 A17 A19 A21 A23 A25 A35 B5 B7 B9 B11 B13 B18 B20 B22 B24 B26
LP2 LP3
A D G
B E H
4.3-02
181
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
CONTACTS
Release Indication Contacts
Contactos Indicação Disparo
Señalización de bobina de disparo Contactos
4.3-03
182
EntelliGuard G ACCESSORIES
4.3 11. If the contacts are of the POWER or SIGNAL 11. Se os contactos são de tipo POTÊNCIA ou disparo como se indica en la Fig. H.
rated type and need to be wired out through the SINAL precisam de ser cablados através dos 11. Si los contactos son de tipo ESTÁNDAR o DE
breaker secondary disconnects; connect as terminais secundários do disjuntor; ligue-os BAJO NIVEL y se necesita cablearlos a través de
indicated in Fig. H and J. (Block B) como indicado na Fig. H e J. (Bloco B) los regleteros secundarios del interruptor
automático, realice las conexiones como se
indica en la Fig. H y J. (Regletero B).
REMARK: As indicated in the schematics it may NOTA: Como indicado nos esquemas podem ser COMENTARIO: Tal y como se indica en el
be necessary to remove other accessories from necessários outros acessórios nos terminais esquema, puede resultar necesario retirar otros
the secondary disconnects to allow for this secundários para permitir esta opção. accesorios de los regleteros secundarios para
option. poder utilizar esta opción.
Release Indication Contact ratings Características Contacto Indicação Disparo Valores nominales del contacto de señalización de
disparo por bobina
Switch Cat no. Contacto Referencia Contacto Nº cat.
CSS, Power rated Contact GCSP1(R) CSS, Contacto Potência GCSP1(R) CSS, contacto estándar GCSP1(R)
Características AC 120VAC 6A
AC Ratings 120VAC 6A 250VAC 6A 250VAC 6A Valores nominales CA, 120VCA 6A, 250VCA 6A
DC Ratings 125VDC 0,5A 250VDC 0,25A Características DC 125VDC 0,5A Valores nominales CC, 125VCC 0,5A, 250VCC
250VDC 0,25A 0,25A
CCS, Signal rated Contact GCSP2(R) CCS, Contacto Sinal GCSP2(R) CSS, contacto de bajo nivel GCSP2(R)
AC Ratings 125VAC 0,1A Características AC 125VAC 0,1A Valores nominales CA 125 V CA 0,1 A
DC Ratings 30VDC 0.1A Características DC 30VDC 0.1A Valores nominales CC 30 V CC 0,1 A
..with / ..com/ ..con (R) = Spare part catalogue number / (R) = referencia de peça de substituição / referencia del recambio
A C G
CONTACTS
B D H
B E J
4.3-04
183
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
Installation of Bell Alarm contact Instalação do Contacto de Alarme Instalación del contacto de señalización de
disparo
1. The breaker should be safely isolated and 1. O disjuntor deve ser convenientemente 1. El interruptor automático debería estar
fully withdrawn to disconnected position. isolado e completamente extraído para a aislado de forma segura y completamente
2. Remove the fascia as explained... posição SECCIONADO. retirado a la posición de seccionado.
2. Remova o frontal como já explicado. 2. Retire la tapa como se indicó anteriormente.
3. Remove the Trip Unit as indicated in section 2 3. Remova a Unidade de Disparo como indicado 3. Retire la unidad de protección como se indica
par. na secção 2. en la sección 2 par.
4. While holding the switch lever, slide the bell 4. Enquanto segura a alavanca do contacto, 4. Mientras sujeta la palanca del contacto,
alarm contact assembly on the PMU base as deslize o contacto de alarme para a base PMU colcoque el contacto de señalización de disparo
CONTACTS
Catalogue Numbers Factory mounted Field kit or Spare
Referencias Fábrica Montado Kit Obra ou Subst.
Referencias de catálogo Montado en fábrica Kit montable por el usuario o recambio
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
GBAT1 GBAT1R
shown in Fig. B. como mostrado na Fig. B. sobre la base de la PMU, como se muestra en la
Fig. B.
5. Assemble the 4 screws as shown in Fig. C. 5. Ponha os 4 parafusos como mostrado na Fig. 5. Coloque los 4 tornillos como se muestra en la
C. Fig. C.
6. Using a wire tie, tie the wires on the PMU base 6. com um braçadeira segure os fios à parede 6. Con una brida, sujete los cables en la pared
wall as shown in Fig. D. da base PMU como mostrado na Fig. D. de la base de la PMU como se muestra en la Fig.
D.
7. Connect the input wire assembly plugs to the 7. Ligues as fichas dos fios aos terminais A33, 7. Introduzca el conector en las bornas A33, A34
terminals A33, A34 & A35 locations marked on A34 & A35 marcados nos terminais secundários y A35 marcadas en el regletero secundario A,
the secondary disconnect block A as shown in bloco A como mostrado na Fig. E. como se muestra en la Fig. E.
Fig. E.
8. Re-assemble the Trip Unit as indicated in 8. Volte a montar a Unidade de Disparo como 8. Vuelva a montar la unidad de protección
section 2 par. indicado na secção 2. como se indica en la sección 2 par.
9. Assemble the fascia as explained elsewhere 9. Monte o frontal como já explicado. 9. Monte la tapa como se explica en esta misma
in this section. sección.
4.3-05
184
EntelliGuard G ACCESSORIES
4.3
Bell alarm contact ratings: Características do Contacto de Alarme: Valores nominales del contacto de
señalización de disparo:
Contact Configuration - Common-NO-NC Configuração do Contacto – Comutado – NA – NF Configuración del contacto - Común-NA-NC
DC Ratings 125VDC 0.5A Características DC 125VDC 0.5A Valores nominales CC 125 V CC 0,5 A
250VDC 0.25A 250VDC 0.25A 250 V CC 0,25 A
STANDARD CONNECTION SCHEME FOR TERMINAL BLOCK A ... Connection scheme Bell Alarm Block A
ESQUEMA STANDARD DE LIGAÇÃO PARA BLOCO TERMINAL A ... Esquema de ligação Contacto de Alarme Bloco A
ESQUEMA DE CONEXIÓN ESTÁNDAR PARA EL REGLETERO DE BORNAS A ... Esquema de conexión de la señalización de disparo, regletero A
A1 A3 A5 A7 A9 A12 A14 A16 A18 A20 A22 A24 A33 A34 A33 A34
31 21 11 33 23 13
57 96 98 96 98
M1 SPR
CONTACTS
BAT BAT
C1 D1 C3 D1
M 95 95
32 22 12 34 24 14
ML
C2 D2 C4 D2 T T
M2 58
ST1 UVR1 CC UVR2
A2 A4 A6 A8 A10 A13 A15 A17 A19 A21 A23 A25 A35 A35
LP2 LP3
A C E
4.3-06
185
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
CONTACTS
disponíveis em dois pacotes de 1 ou 2 contactos contactos conmutados por posición.
comutados por posição. Conocidos por el nombre de "contactos de
Geralmente referidos como contactos de posición en la cuna", se suministran como
Short description: posição, estes estão disponíveis como dispositivos montados en fábrica o bien como
Two configurations are available: componente montado de fábrica ou como dispositivos montables por el usuario.
--- 1 Changeover for each position. dispositivo a montar em obra. Descripción breve:
--- 2 Changeovers for each position. Existen dos configuraciones:
– The units come with 2 meters of supple wire Descrição curta: --- 1 contacto conmutado para cada posición.
each coded by a ferule at it's ending. Duas configurações estão disponíveis: --- 2 contactos conmutados para cada posición.
– The device will indicate DISCONNECTED even --- 1 Comutado para cada posição. -- Las unidades incluyen 2 metros de cable,
when the circuit breaker is fully withdrawn or --- 2 Comutados para cada posição. cada uno de ellos codificado con un marcador
removed. -- As unidades vêm com 2 metros cada um en su extremo.
deles marcado com gravação na ponta. -- El dispositivo indicará SECCIONADO aun
-- O dispositivo vai indicar SECCIONADO mesmo cuando el interruptor automático esté
Installation of Cassette Position Indication quando o disjuntor está completamente completamente desmontado.
Contacts: extraído ou removido. Instalación de los contactos de posición de
1. The moving portion of the draw out breaker cuna:
assembly should be safely isolated and removed Instalação de Contactos de Indicação de 1. La parte móvil del interruptor seccionable
from the cassette. Posição no Berço: debería aislarse y retirarse con seguridad de la
2. Insert the Cassette Position Indication 1. A parte móvel do disjuntor extraível deve ser cuna como se indica en la sección 1 de este
Contacts wires from the opening from the inside convenientemente isolada para maior manual.
of the cassette and pull out as shown in Fig. B. segurança e removida da berço como indicado 2. Introduzca los cables de los contactos de
na secção 1 deste manual. posición de cuna en la abertura de la parte
A C E
4.3-07
186
EntelliGuard G ACCESSORIES
4.3
3. Slide & insert the switch assembly to engage 2. Insira os fios dos contactos de indicação de interior de la cuna y tire de ellos como se
the cassette side sheet in the slot and push posição no berço pela abertura interior do berço e muestra en la Fig. B.
towards front as shown in Fig. C. puxe-os para fora como mostrado na Fig. B. 3. Deslice e introduzca el conjunto de contactos
3. Deslize e insira a montagem dos contactos para acoplarlo en la ranura de la placa lateral de
4. Push the complete assembly to come out side para engatar à lateral do berço onde está o slot e la cuna y empújelo hacia adentro como se
of the cassette and the snap feature engages empurre lateralmente como mostrado na Fig. C. muestra en la Fig. C.
with the cassette side sheet as shown in Fig. D. 4. Empurre a montagem completa para que saia 4. Empuje el conjunto completo para moverlo
5. Ensure that the switch assembly is firmly do berço lateralmente e a função de fixar engate fuera de la cuna hasta que el sistema de
fitted and locked down by the four snap fits. com a lateral do berço como mostrado na Fig. D. acoplamiento encaje en la base de la cuna
5. Garanta que a estrutura dos contactos está como se muestra en la Fig. D.
6. Check functionality of carriage position firmemente fixa e bloqueada com os quatro 5. Asegúrese de que el contacto esté
switch by racking in the breaker and racking out pontos de fixação. firmemente insertado y bloqueado por las
the breaker and confirming changeover of 6. Ligue externamente os contactos como cuatro patillas de acoplamiento.
switch as specified in table 1. necessário. 6. Realice el cableado de los contactos.
7. Coloque de novo a parte móvel do disjuntor 7. Vuelva a colocar la parte móvil del interruptor
7. Wire out the contacts as required. extraível no berço como indicado na secção 1 seccionable como se indica en la sección 1 de
deste manual. este manual.
User designated circuits; indicators Circuitos atribuídos ao utilizador; indicadores Circuitos designados al usuario; indicadores
LP11: Breaker in disconnected position LP11: Disjuntor na posição seccionado LP11: Interruptor en posición de seccionado
LP12: Breaker in test position LP12: Disjuntor na posição de teste LP12: Interruptor en posición de prueba
LP13: Breaker in connected position LP13: Disjuntor posição conectado LP13: Interruptor en posición de insertado
51 61
CONNECTED
62 CONECTADO
52 INSERTADO
54 64
31 41
TEST
32 42
TESTE
34 44 PRUEBA
One Switch Configuration / Configuração de um contacto /
Configuración de un contacto 11
21
DISCONNECTED TEST CONNECTED DISCONNECTED
1 2 3 7 8 9 13 14 15 22 SECCIONADO
12
SECCIONADO
14 24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
D12 D22 D32 D42 D52 D62
4.3-08
187
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
4.3
CONTACTS
4.3.5 Secondary Terminal Blocks (A&B)
4.3.5 Bloco de terminais secundários A e B
4.3.5 Regleteros secundarios de bornas A y B
Only qualified personnel are allowed to install, Unicamente o pessoal qualificado tem autorização Únicamente el personal cualificado tiene autorización
commission, maintain or modify this device in para realizar a instalação, colocação em serviço, para realizar la instalación, puesta en servicio,
accordance with relevant safety requirements. manutenção ou modificação deste dispositivo de mantenimiento o modificación de este dispositivo de
acordo com os requisitos de segurança pertinentes. acuerdo con los requisitos de seguridad pertinentes.
Non Compliance with these requirements could result O incumprimento destes requisitos poderia dar lugar a El incumplimiento de estos requisitos podría dar lugar
in damage to property and/or severe injury to danos materiais e/ou lesões graves para o pessoal a daños materiales y/o lesiones graves para el
personnel. qualificado. personal cualificado.
Antes de instalar qualquer acessório, abra o disjuntor
Before installing any accessories, turn the breaker OFF, (OFF), desligue-o de todas as fontes e descarregue as Antes de instalalar cualquier accesorio, abra el
disconnect it from all voltage sources, and discharge molas. interruptor (OFF), desconectelo de todas las fuentes y
the closing springs. descargue los muelles.
4.3-09
188
EntelliGuard G ACCESSORIES
4.34.3.5 Secondary Terminal blocks A&B 4.3.5 Réguas secundárias de bornes 4.3.5 Regleteros secundarios
AeB de bornas A y B
All accessories are wired out to an easy to Todos os acessórios estão ligados por cabo a Todos los accesorios están conectados por
access 39 or 78 pole terminal strip mounted on uma régua de bornes de 39 ou 78 conexões de cable a un regletero de bornas de 39 o 78
the breaker top. These terminals are amply sized fácil acesso montada na parte superior do conexiones de fácil acceso montado en la parte
to allow the use of up to 2.5mm2 cabling and can disjuntor. Estes bornes estão superior del interruptor automático. Estas
be used with standard connection materials or sobredimensionados para permitir o uso de bornas están sobredimensionadas para permitir
AMP type plug connectors. cabos até 2,5 mm e podem-se empregar com el uso de cables de hasta 2,5 mm2 y se pueden
materiais de ligação standard ou ligadores emplear con materiales de conexión estándar o
rápidos do tipo AMP. conectores enchufables de tipo AMP.
..for Fixed Breaker 1x78 pole set .. para Disjuntor Fixo 1x78 pólos ..para interruptor fijo Juego de 1x78 conexiones
Envelope 1, 2&3 GSDFTR2 Tamanho 1, 2 e 3 GSDFTR2 Tamaño 1, 2 y 3 GSDFTR2
------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------
..for Drawout Breaker 1x39 pole set ..para Disjuntor Extraível 1x39 pólos ..para interruptor seccionable
(2 can be mounted) (podem ser montados 2) Juego de 1x39 conexiones
(se pueden montar dos)
Envelope 1, 2&3 GSDWTR Tamanho 1, 2 e 3 GSDWTR Tamaño 1, 2 y 3 GSDWTR
------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------------
Breakers in Fixed Pattern, cassettes and Os disjuntores com execução Fixa, berços e
breakers in draw out mode are always supplied disjuntores com execução Seccionável são Los interruptores con ejecución Fija, cunas e
with an auxiliary connection block with 39 fornecidos com uma régua de bornes com 39 interruptores con ejecución Seccionable se
connection points (terminals) . These are easily pontos. São facilmente acessíveis e estão suministran con un regletero de bornas con 39
CONTACTS
accessible and located at the top and front of colocados na parte superior do disjuntor. conexiones. Son fácilmente accesibles y están
the device. Quando por quantidade de acessórios ubicados en la parte superiro del interruptor.
When the number of factory installed instalados se necessitem mais de 39 pontos, Cuando por cantidad de accesorios instalados
accessories require more than 39 connection adiciona-se uma 2ª régua. Quando os se necesiten más de 39 conexiones, se añade un
points needed a 2nd terminal block is acessórios sejam montados pelo utilizador, será 2º regletero. Cuando los accesorios sean
automatically added. In cases where the necessário uma régua de bornes extra. montados por el usuario, se necesitará un
accessories are mounted in the field an extra regletero de bornas extra.
terminal block could be needed.
-- The terminals can be used up to a rating of 6A Os bornes podem-se utilizar até 6A 440V CA ou Las bornas se pueden utilizar hasta 6A 440V CA
at 440V AC or 6A at 250V DC. They can be used 6A 250V CC. Podem-se usar condutores nus ou ó 6A 250V CC. Se pueden usar conductores
with unprepared stripped conductors and are com terminais de ponteira ou forquilha. desnudos o con terminales de punta u horquilla.
suited for use with conductors equipped with
spade or ring type terminals. Ver páginas seguintes para esquemas de Ver páginas siguientes para esquemas de
ligação. Atribuição de bornes para acessórios conexionado. Asinación de bornas para
Schematics and use of terminals see next pages. - Régua A, ver tabela 1.16 accesorios
Assignment of terminals to accessories - Régua B, ver tabela 1.17 - Regletero A, ver tabla 1.16
-- Block A see table 1.16 - Regletero B, ver tabla 1.17
-- Block B see table 1.17
4.3-10
189
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
4.3.5.1 Fixed Secondary Disconnect 4.3.5.1 Régua de bornes Fixa 4.3.5.1 Regletero de bornas Fijo
4.3
(..Breaker mounted) (Montada no disjuntor) (Montado en el Interruptor)
Use the following procedure to install Fixed Utilize o seguinte procedimento para instalar a Utilice el siguiente procedimiento para instalar el
Secondary Disconnect accessory into the circuit régua de bornes Fixa regletero de bornas Fijo
breaker.
1. Turn the breaker off and discharge the closing 1. Abra o disjuntor (OFF) e descarregue as molas 1. Abra el interruptor (OFF) y descargue los muelles
springs by depressing the OFF and ON buttons in principais pressionando os botões OFF e ON principales pulsando los pulsadores OFF y ON
the sequence OFF-ON-OFF. Verify that the breaker segundo a sequência seguinte OFF-ON-OFF. según la secuencia siguiente OFF-ON-OFF. Verifique
OFF-ON indicator shows OFF on a green Verifique que o indicador OFF-ON está em OFF que el indicador OFF-ON está en OFF (fondo verde) y
background and that the charge indicator shows (fundo verde) e que o indicador de carga de molas que el indicador de carga de muelles está en
DISCHARGE on a white background. If installing in a está em DESCARREGADO (fundo branco). Se instalar DESCARGADO (fondo blanco). Si se instala en un
draw-out type breaker remove breaker from num disjuntor extraível, retire o disjuntor do berço interruptor seccionable, retire el interruptor de la
adaptor (cassette) before continuing. antes de continuar. cuna antes de continuar.
2. Loosen the 6 screws on front cover (fascia) using 2. Retire os 6 parafusos da tampa frontal com uma 2. Retire los 6 tornillos de la tapa frontal con un
a Pozidrive screw driver as shown in Fig 1.B chave Pozidriv segundo indica a figura 1.8. Gire a destornillador Pozidrive según indica la figura 1.8.
Rotate the charging handle down and slide the manivela de carga de molas para baixo e deslize a Gire la manivela de carga de muelles hacia abajo y
front cover over the handle to remove the front tampa frontal sobre a manivela para retirar, como deslice la tapa frontal sobre la manivela para
cover as shown in Fig. 1. se mostra na Fig. 1 retirarla, como se muestra en la Fig. 1
3. Remove all the coils (refer to DEH-41411.) 3 Retire todas as bobinas (segundo DEH-41411) 3 Retire todas las bobinas (según DEH-41411)
4. Remove all the equipment wiring and accessories 4. Desligue todos os acessórios da régua de bornes 4. Desconecte todos los accesorios del regletero de
wiring from the secondary disconnect. bornas
5. Remove the 3 nuts as shown in Fig 2. 5. Retire as 3 porcas, como se mostra na Fig. 2. 5. Quite las 3 tuercas, como se muestra en la Fig. 2.
6. Replace the one block assembly with the 2-block 6. Substitua a régua de bornes de 1 bloco pela 6. Reemplace el regletero de bornas de 1 bloque
CONTACTS
assembly as shown in Fig. 3. régua de bornes de 2 blocos, como se mostra na por el regletreo de bornas de 2 bloques, como se
Fig. 3 muestra en la Fig. 3
7. Assemble back the 3 nuts as shown in Fig. 4. 7. Volte a por as 3 porcas como se mostra na Fig. 4 7. Vuelva a poner las 3 tuercas como se muestra en
la Fig. 4
8. Complete the SD Wiring. 8. Volte a ligar os acessórios 8. Vuleva a conectar los accesorios
9. Assemble back all the coil accessories (refer to 9. Volte a colocar as bobinas (segundo DEH-41411) 9. Vuleva a colocar las bobinas (según DEH-41411)
DEH-41411).
10. Para voltar a colocar a tampa, gire a manivela 10. Para volver a colocar la tapa, gire la manivela de
10. To reinstall the cover, rotate the charging handle de carga de molas para baixo e deslize a tampa carga de muelles hacia abajo y deslice la tapa
down and slide the front cover over the handle to frontal sobre a manivela, como se mostra na Fig. 1 frontal sobre la manivela, como se muestra en la
assemble the front cover to housing as shown in Fig. 1
Fig. 1.
11. Ensure the fascia is aligned properly with the 11. Assegure-se de que a tampa fica alinhada com 11. Asegúrese de que la tapa queda alineada con la
trip unit and the pad lock features of the breaker. a unidade de disparo e com os encravamentos por unidad de protección y con los enclavamientos por
cadeado do disjuntor. candado del interruptor.
12. Fasten the 6 mounting screws of fascia with the 12. Aperte os 6 parafusos da tampa frontal com 12. Apriete los 6 tornillos de la tapa frontal con un
housing using a Pozidrive screwdriver. Apply torque uma chave Pozidriv. Aplique um par máximo de destornillador Pozidrive. Aplique un par máximo de
of 6 Nm (4.42 ft-lbs). 6Nm (4.42 ft-lbs) 6Nm (4.42 ft-lbs)
4.3-11
190
EntelliGuard G ACCESSORIES
4.3 4.3.5.2 Drawout Secondary Disconnect 4.3.5.2 Régua Extraível de bornes 4.3.5.2 Regletero de bornas Seccionable
Use the following procedure to install the Utilize o seguinte procedimento para instalar a Utilice el siguiente procedimiento para instalar el
Drawout Secondary Disconnect accessory into régua Extraível de bornes no disjuntor. regletero de bornas Seccionable en el
the Circuit Breaker. interruptor.
Instalação da régua Extraível de bornes no Instalación del regletero de bornas
Installation of Breaker side Secondary disjuntor: Seccionable en el interruptor:
disconnect:
1. Turn the breaker off and discharge the closing 1. Abra o interruptor (OFF) e descarregue as 1. Abra el interruptor (OFF) y descargue los
springs by depressing the OFF and ON buttons in molas principais pressionado os botões OFF e muelles principales pulsando los pulsadores OFF
the sequence OFF-ON-OFF. Verify that the ON segundo a sequência seguinte OFF-ON-OFF. y ON según la secuencia siguiente OFF-ON-OFF.
breaker OFF-ON indicator shows OFF on a green Verifique que o indicador OFF-ON está em OFF Verifique que el indicador OFF-ON está en OFF
background and that the charge indicator (fundo verde) e que o indicador de carga de (fondo verde) y que el indicador de carga de
shows DISCHARGE on a white background. molas está em DESCARREGADO (fundo branco). muelles está en DESCARGADO (fondo blanco). Si
If installing in a draw-out type breaker remove Se instalar num disjuntor extraível, retire o se instala en un interruptor seccionable, retire el
breaker from adaptor (cassette) before disjuntor do berço antes de continuar. interruptor de la cuna antes de continuar.
continuing.
2. The breaker should be safely isolated and fully 2. O disjuntor deve estar isolado de forma 2. El interruptor debe estar aislado de forma
removed from the cassette. segura e totalmente extraído do berço. segura y totalmente extraído de la cuna.
3. Place the secondary disconnect block on the 3. Coloque a régua de bornes no suporte de 3. Coloque el regletero de bornas en el soporte
mounting bracket and assemble the two montagem e coloque os dois parafusos como se de montaje y coloque los dos tornillos como se
mounting screws as shown in Fig. 5 & 6. mostra nas Fig. 5 e 6. muestra en las Fig. 5 y 6.
4. Push the secondary disconnect block toward 4. Empurre a régua de bornes para a parte 4. Empuje el regletero de bornas hacia la parte
the back of the mounting plate of the breaker posterior do suporte de montagem do disjuntor posterior del soporte de montaje del interruptor
and ensure it is inline with the first block as e assegure-se que está alinhada com a primeira y asegúrese que está alineado con el primer
shown in Fig. 7. régua, como se mostra na Fig. 7. regletero, como se muestra en la Fig. 7.
CONTACTS
4.3-12
191
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
4.3.5.3 Drawout Cassette Side Secondary 4.3.5.2 Régua de bornes adicional no 4.3.5.2 Regletero de bornas adicional en
4.3
Disconnect Berço la Cuna
Use the following procedure to install the Utilize o seguinte procedimento para instalar a Utilice el siguiente procedimiento para instalar el
Drawout Secondary Disconnect accessory. régua de bornes adicional no Berço. regletero de bornas adicional en la Cuna.
Installation of Cassette side Secondary Instalação da régua de bornes adicional no Instalación del regletero de bornas adicional
disconnect: Berço: en la Cuna:
1. Remove the screw shown in the Fig. 8. 1. Retire os parafusos como se mostra na Fig.8 1. Retire los tornillos como se muestra en la Fig.8
2. Assemble the plate as shown in the Fig. 9. 2. Monte a placa como se mostra na Fig. 9 2. Monte la placa como se muestra en la Fig. 9
3. Assemble the new SD block as shown in Fig. 3. Monte a nova régua adicional como se mostra 3. Monte el nuevo regletero adicional como se
10 & 11. nas Fig. 10 e 11 muestra en las Fig. 10 y 11
4. Complete the wiring of the new accessories 4. Realize a cablagem dos novos acessórios na 4. Realice el conexionado de los nuevos
to the secondary disconnect block (refer wiring régua de bornes (veja esquema de ligações na accesorios en el regletero de bornas (vea
diagram on the next page). Assemble back the pág. seguinte). Volte a introduzir o disjuntor no esquema de conexionado en la pág. siguiente).
breaker in the cassette. berço. Vuelva a introducir el interruptor en la cuna.
1. Any "ZONE SELECTIVE INTERLOCKING" 1. Se elege qualquer opção ZSI (Selectividade 1. Se elige cualquier opción ZSI (Selectividad
options are selected in breaker/trip unit condicionada) da unidade de disparo, Dígito de condicionada) de la unidad de protección, Dígito
Catalogue Digit 18 catálogo 18 de catálogo 18
2. Any "ADVANCED FEATURES" are selected in 2. Se elege qualquer "OPÇÕES AVANÇADAS" da 2. Se elige cualquier "OPCIONES AVANZADAS" de
breaker/trip unit Catalogue Digit 19. unidade de disparo, Dígito de catálogo 19 la unidad de protección, Dígito de catálogo 19
CONTACTS
3. A COIL SIGNALLING CONTACT OPTION is 3. Se elege um contacto de sinalização de 3. Se elige un contacto de señalización de
selected, Digit 12 bobina, Dígito de catálogo 12 bobina, Dígito de catálogo 12
4. A READY TO CLOSE signal via the trip unit is 4. Se elege sinal de Preparado para fecho via 4. Se elige señal de Preparado para cierre vía
selected, Digit 13 unidade de disparo, Dígito de catálogo 13 unidad de protección, Dígito de catálogo 13
5. Any of the following OPTIONAL Aux. Contact 5. Se elege qualquer das seguintes opções de 5. Se elige cualquiera de las siguientes opciones
Switches are selected in Digit 12 contactos auxiliares, Dígito de catálogo 12 de Contactos auxiliares, Dígito de catálogo 12
- 8NO/NC POWER RATED - Contactos standard 8NA/8NC - Contactos estándar 8NA/8NC
- 3NO/NC POWER RATED + 2NO/NC HIFI - Contactos standard 3NA/3NC + Contactos - Contactos estándar 3NA/3NC +
- 4NO/NC POWER RATED + 4NO/NC HIFI baixo nível 2NA/2NC Contactos bajo nivel 2NA/2NC
- Contactos standard 4NA/4NC + Contactos - Contactos estándar 4NA/4NC +
baixo nível 4NA/4NC Contactos bajo nivel 4NA/4NC
Table 1.19: Terminal Wiring Tables 1.19 Cablagem dos terminais / Cableado de bornas
Number of Terminals / Numero de Terminais / Número de bornas 78
4.3-13
192
EntelliGuard G ACCESSORIES
1. Remove the Breaker fascia/Front Cover as 1. Remova o Frontal/Cobertura do Disjuntor 1. Retire la tapa frontal del interruptor
explained elsewhere in this section. como já anteriormente explicado. automático como se explica en esta misma
sección.
2. Position the mechanical operations counter 2. Posicione o contador de operações mecânico 2. Situe el contador de maniobras mecánicas
(Fig.) over the two holes provided inside the (Fig.) sobre os dois furos existentes dentro do (Fig.) sobre los dos taladros dispuestos dentro del
mechanism bracket, ensuring the indicator face braço do mecanismo, garantindo que a sua face soporte del mecanismo, asegurándose de que la
is aligned to show through the window in the de leitura está alinhada com a abertura para cara del indicador esté alineada para que se vea
cover. visualização. a través de la ventana de la tapa.
3. Ensure that the operating arm (B) of counter is 3. Garanta que a armadura operacional do (B) 3. Asegúrese de que el brazo de trabajo (B) del
linked with the spring charging link (A) of the contador é solidária com o mecanismo de carga contador esté unido al enlace de carga de
breaker mechanism and that is correctly (A) do disjuntor e que está correctamente muelle (A) del mecanismo del interruptor
positioned so that it operates freely. posicionada operando livremente. automático y que esté correctamente situado
para que pueda funcionar libremente.
4. Mount in position using the screws provided 4. Monte nessa posição usando os parafuso 4. Móntelo en su posición con los tornillos que se
and apply torque 2,5-3Nm. incluídos e aplique um par de aperto de 2,5-3 proporcionan y apriete a 2,5 - 3 Nm.
Nm.
4.4-00
193
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
4.4
LOCKS
4.4.2 Fechaduras do Disjuntor
4.4.2 Enclavamientos por cerradura del interruptor
Only qualified personnel are allowed to install, Unicamente o pessoal qualificado tem autorização Únicamente el personal cualificado tiene autorización
commission, maintain or modify this device in para realizar a instalação, colocação em serviço, para realizar la instalación, puesta en servicio,
accordance with relevant safety requirements. manutenção ou modificação deste dispositivo de mantenimiento o modificación de este dispositivo de
acordo com os requisitos de segurança pertinentes. acuerdo con los requisitos de seguridad pertinentes.
Non Compliance with these requirements could result O incumprimento destes requisitos poderia dar lugar a El incumplimiento de estos requisitos podría dar lugar
in damage to property and/or severe injury to danos materiais e/ou lesões graves para o pessoal a daños materiales y/o lesiones graves para el
personnel. qualificado. personal cualificado.
Before installing any accessories, turn the breaker OFF, Antes de instalar qualquer acessório, abra o disjuntor Antes de instalalar cualquier accesorio, abra el
disconnect it from all voltage sources, and discharge (OFF), desligue-o de todas as fontes e descarregue as interruptor (OFF), desconectelo de todas las fuentes y
the closing springs. molas. descargue los muelles.
4.4-01
194
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
of two devices, that when fitted as indicated allow equipados com um ou dois dispositivos, que con uno de dos dispositivos posibles, que cuando se
the use of one to four key locks that lock the device quando instaladores correctamente permitem o montan, como se indica, permiten desde uno hasta
in it's open position. uso de uma a quatro fechaduras que bloqueiam o cuatro enclavamientos por cerradura que bloquean el
aparelho na posição aberto. interruptor en posición abierto.
-- The first device allows the mounting of up to four -- O primeiro dispositivo permite a montagem de
Ronis or Profalux type key locks of the following -- El primer dispositivo permite montar hasta cuatro
até 4 fechaduras Ronis ou Profalux dos seguintes
types: cerraduras de tipo Ronis o Profalux de los tipos
tipos: siguientes:
Ronis 1104B: Chave standard de ¼ de polegada, Ronis 1104B: llave estándar de 1/4" con rotación
Ronis 1104B: Standard key 1/4 inch clockwise de rotação à direita para aprisionar a chave. hacia la derecha para bloquear la llave.
rotation to trap the key. Profalux B204DY: Com chave tipo S1 1/4 de Profalux B204DY: llave tipo S1 1/4" con rotación hacia
COILS
Profalux B204DY: With key type S1 1/4 inch polegada, de rotação à direita para aprisionar a la derecha para bloquear la llave.
clockwise rotation to trap the key. chave. -- La segunda opción permite el montaje de una
-- O segundo permite a montagem de uma cerradura Castell FS1 con llave FK4, rotación de 45°
-- The second allows the mounting of a Castell fechadura tipo Castell FS1 com chave tipo FK4, 45° hacia la derecha para bloquear la llave, cuerpo de llave
type FS1 lock with key type FK4 key, 45° clockwise de rotação à direita para aprisionar a chave, cuadrado de 7/8”x3/8”.
rotation to trap the key, 7/8"x3/8" square spindle. 7/8”x3/8” de formato quadrado.
A pedido um dispositivo similar está disponível para Un dispositivo similar está disponible bajo pedido que
On request a similar device is available allowing the uso de uma fechadura do tipo Kirk. permite el uso de un enclavamiento de tipo Kirk.
use of one Kirk type lock. Ambos os dispositivos estão disponíveis em duas
MOTOR
A kit is supplied allowing the field mounting of the do mecanismo de bloqueio e permitindo o uso de del usuario del enclavamiento por cerradura y que
locking mechanism and allowing the use of a lock fechaduras adquiridas separadamente do tipo permite asimismo el uso de un enclavamiento de tipo
of the correct type purchased elsewhere. correcto compradas em qualquer lado. correcto adquirido por separado
Catalogue Numbers A: Factory mounted B: Field kit or Spare
Referencia A: Montado em Fábrica B: Kit Obra ou Subst.
Referencias de catálogo A: Montado en fábrica B: Kit montable por el usuario o recambio
---------------------------------A------------B-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------A------------B---------
Kit for 1-4 RONIS locks GBRON GBRONR Kit para Fechaduras 1-4 RONIS..... Kit para 1-4 enclavamientos RONIS GBRON GBRONR
Kit for 1-4 PROFALUX locks GBPRO GBPROR Kit para Fechaduras 1-4 PROFALUX..... Kit para 1-4 enclavamientos PROFALUX GBPRO GBPROR
Kit for Kirk Key Interlock Kit GBKRKR Kit para Kirk..... Kit para llave Kirk GBKRKR
LOCKS
Kit for 1 CASTELL GBCAS GBCASR Kit para Fechaduras 1 CASTELL..... Kit para 1 CASTELL GBCAS GBCASR
Maximum 4 keys of Ronis/Profalux or Kirk type Podem-se utilizar como máximo 4 chaves Ronis, Se pueden utilizar como máximo 4 llaves Ronis,
can be used. Profalux ou Kirk. Profalux o Kirk.
All EntelliGuard Devices can be equipped with Todos os disjuntores Entelliguard podem ser Todos los interruptores Entelliguard pueden
one of the three locks, that when fitted as equipados com um dos três encravamentos, equiparse con uno de los tres enclavamientos,
indicated allow the use of one to four key locks que quando se montam como se indica, que cuando se montan como se indica,
that lock the device in its open position. permitem desde uma até quatro fechaduras que permiten desde una hasta cuatro cerraduras
bloqueiam o disjuntor na posição aberto. que bloquean el interruptor en posición abierto.
4.4-02
195
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
4.4
Breaker key lock installation: Instalação do encravamento por Instalación del enclavamiento por
fechadura do disjuntor: cerradura del interruptor:
1. Turn the breaker off and discharge the closing 1. Abra o disjuntor (OFF) e descarregue as molas 1. Abra el interruptor (OFF) y descargue los muelles
springs by depressing the OFF and ON buttons in principais pressionando os botões OFF e ON principales pulsando los pulsadores OFF y ON
the sequence OFF-ON-OFF. segundo a sequência seguinte OFF-ON-OFF. según la secuencia siguiente OFF-ON-OFF.
Verify that the breaker OFF-ON indicator shows OFF Verifique que o indicador OFF-ON está em OFF Verifique que el indicador OFF-ON está en OFF
on a green background and that the charge indicator (fundo verde) e que o indicador de carga de molas (fondo verde) y que el indicador de carga de muelles
shows DISCHARGE on a white background. está em DESCARREGADO (fundo branco). Se instalar está en DESCARGADO (fondo blanco).
num aparelho extraível, retire o disjuntor do berço Si se instala en un interruptor seccionable, retire el
If installing in a draw-out type breaker remove antes de continuar. interruptor de la cuna antes de continuar.
breaker from adaptor (cassette) before continuing.
2. Retire os 6 parafusos da tampa frontal com uma 2. Retire los 6 tornillos de la tapa frontal con un
2. Loosen the 6 screws on front cover (fascia) using a chave Pozidriv como se indica na figura 1. Gire a destornillador Pozidrive según indica la figura 1.
Pozidrive screw driver as shown in Fig.1. manivela de carga de molas para baixo e deslize a Gire la manivela de carga de muelles hacia abajo y
Rotate the charging handle down and slide the front tampa frontal sobre a manivela para a retirar, como deslice la tapa frontal sobre la manivela para
cover over the handle to remove the front cover as se mostra na Fig. 2 retirarla, como se muestra en la Fig. 2
shown in Fig. 2.
3. Se o dispositivo de encravamento por fechadura 3. Si el dispositivo de enclavamiento por cerradura
3. If the locking mechanism device has been supplied foi fornecido montado em fábrica, retire o suporte e se ha suministrado montado en fábrica, retire el
factory fitted , remove the bracket and cover from the a tampa do aparelho EntelliGuard. Se foi entregue soporte y la tapa del dispositivo EntelliGuard. Si se
EntelliGuard device. If supplied as a field mountable como kit a montar pelo utilizador, continue para o ha entregado como kit montable por el usuario,
kit please proceed to step 4. passo 4. continúe en el paso 4.
4. Take the Lock cover and carefully break out the 4. Segure a tampa do mecanismo e rompa com 4. Sujete la tapa del mecanismo y rompa con
openings needed to place the required number of cuidado as aberturas necessárias para colocar o cuidado las aberturas necesarias para colocar el
locks. número de encravamentos necessário. número de enclavamientos necesario.
5. Fix each lock to the lock bracket using the
fixation nuts as indicated in Fig. A. 5. Fixe cada encravamento ao dispositivo de 5. Fije cada enclavamiento al dispositivo de
encravamento por fechadura com as porcas de enclavamiento por cerradura con las tuercas de
6. Using the nut supplied with each lock fix the aperto, como se indica na Fig. A. sujeción, como se indica en la Fig. A.
activating CAM . Ensure that the CAM is positioned 6. Com a porca que se entrega com cada 6. Con la tuerca que se proporciona con cada
as indicated in Fig. B. fechadura, fixe a PATILHA de activação. Assegure- cerradura, fije la LEVA de activación. Asegúrese de
se de que a PATILHA está situada na posição que se que la LEVA esté situada en la posición que se
7. Using the supplied screws, fit the cover onto the indica na Fig. B. indica en la Fig. B.
mechanism. 7. Com os parafusos que se entregam, coloque a 7. Con los tornillos que se proporcionan, coloque la
tampa sobre o mecanismo. tapa sobre el mecanismo.
8. If the locking mechanism device has been 8. Se o dispositivo do mecanismo de encravamento 8. Si el dispositivo del mecanismo de
LOCKS
supplied factory fitted . Remount the mechanism foi fornecido montado em fábrica: Volte a montar o enclavamiento se ha suministrado montado en
with its cover into the breaker, making sure that the mecanismo com a sua tampa no disjuntor, fábrica: Vuelva a montar el mecanismo con su tapa
operating lever moves freely and interacts correctly assegurando-se de que a patilha de accionamento en el interruptor automático, asegurándose de que
with the breaker mechanism. (Fig. D) se mova livremente e que interaja correctamente la palanca de accionamiento se desplace
com o mecanismo do disjuntor. (Fig. D) libremente y que interactúe correctamente con el
mecanismo del interruptor. (Fig. D)
A B C
Profalux Lock
Fechadura Profalux
Cerradura Profalux
B
B
4.4-03
196
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
9. If supplied as a field mountable kit carefully 9. Se é fornecido como kit a montar pelo utilizador, 9. Si se proporciona como kit montable por el
removed the dummy lock cover from the breaker . retire cuidadosamente a tampa falsa do usuario, retire cuidadosamente la tapa falsa del
GENERAL
Mount the Lock mechanism with its cover into the encravamento do disjuntor. Monte o mecanismo enclavamiento del interruptor. Monte el mecanismo
breaker, making sure that the operating lever com a sua tampa no disjuntor, assegurando-se de con su tapa en el interruptor automático,
moves freely and interacts correctly with the que a patilha de accionamento se move livremente asegurándose de que la palanca de accionamiento
breaker mechanism. (See Fig. D+E) e que interaja correctamente com o mecanismo do se desplace libremente y que interactúe
disjuntor. (Consulte as Fig. D e E.) correctamente con el mecanismo del interruptor.
(Consulte las Fig. D y E.)
10. Replace the breakers fascia/front cover as 10. Coloque a tampa frontal do disjuntor como se
indicated elsewhere in this section. explica nesta mesma secção 10. Coloque la tapa frontal del interruptor
automático como se explica en esta misma sección
11. Ensure the fascia is aligned properly with the 11. Assegure-se de que a tampa fica devidamente
COILS
trip unit and the pad lock features of the breaker. alinhada com a unidade de disparo e com os 11. Asegúrese de que la tapa quede debidamente
encravamentos por cadeado do disjuntor alineada con la unidad de protección y con los
12. Fasten the 6 mounting screws of fascia with the enclavamientos por candado del interruptor
housing using a Pozidrive screwdriver. Apply torque 12. Aperte os 6 parafusos de montagem da tampa automático
of 6 Nm (4.42ft-lbs) (Fig. F). com uma chave Pozidriv. Aplique um par máximo
de 6 Nm (4.42 ft-lbs) (Fig. F). 12. Apriete los 6 tornillos de montaje de la tapa con
un destornillador Pozidrive. Aplique un par máximo
de 6 Nm (4.42 ft-lbs) (Fig. F).
MOTOR
Para utilizar o encravamento por fechadura, utilize Para utilizar el enclavamiento por cerradura, utilice
Use the following procedure to operate the padlock: o seguinte procedimento: el siguiente procedimiento:
1. Depress the OFF pushbutton on the breaker front 1. Pressione o botão OFF (Abertura) no painel 1. Presione el pulsador OFF (Apertura) en el panel
Fascia and extend/pull the breaker padlock lever to frontal do disjuntor e puxe a alavanca do frontal del interruptor automático y tire de la
its' outer position. encravamento por cadeado do disjuntor para fora. palanca del enclavamiento por candado del
interruptor hacia fuera.
2. With the padlock level extended , rotate one or 2. Com a alavanca do cadeado extendida, gire uma
more of the keys anticlockwise. The key can then be ou mais das chaves para a esquerda. Então, a 2. Con la palanca del candado extendida, gire una
removed thus locking the breaker in it's open chave pode ser retirada, o que deixa o disjuntorr o más de las llaves hacia la izquierda. Entonces, la
LOCKS
position. bloqueado na posição aberto. llave puede retirarse, lo que deja el interruptor
bloqueado en posición abierto.
3. With padlock lever extended, insert the key and 3. Com a alavanca do cadeado extendida,
rotate in clockwise to unlock. introduza a chave e gire-a para a direita, então o 3. Con la palanca del candado extendida,
disjuntor ficará desbloqueado. introduzca la llave y gire la llave hacia la derecha,
entonces el interruptor quedará desbloqueado.
E
D F
E
Tighten to 6Nm (4.42ft-lbs)
Apertar a 6Nm (4.42ft-lbs)
Apretar a 6Nm (4.42ft-lbs)
4.4-04
197
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
Breaker key lock installation: Instalação do encravamento por Instalación del enclavamiento por
fechadura do disjuntor: cerradura del interruptor:
1. Turn the breaker off and discharge the closing 1. Abra u disjuntor (OFF) e descarregue as molas 1. Abra el interruptor (OFF) y descargue los muelles
springs by depressing the OFF and ON buttons in principais pressionando os botões OFF e ON principales pulsando los pulsadores OFF y ON
the sequence OFF-ON-OFF. segundo a sequência seguinte OFF-ON-OFF. según la secuencia siguiente OFF-ON-OFF.
Verify that the breaker OFF-ON indicator shows OFF Verifique que o indicador OFF-ON está em OFF Verifique que el indicador OFF-ON está en OFF
on a green background and that the charge indicator (fundo verde) e que o indicador de carga de molas (fondo verde) y que el indicador de carga de muelles
shows DISCHARGE on a white background. está em DESCARREGADO (fundo branco). Se instalar está en DESCARGADO (fondo blanco).
num disjuntor extraível, retire o disjuntor do berço
If installing in a draw-out type breaker remove antes de continuar. Si se instala en un interruptor seccionable, retire el
breaker from adaptor (cassette) before continuing. interruptor de la cuna antes de continuar.
2. Retire os 6 parafusos da tampa frontal com uma
2. Loosen the 6 screws on front cover (fascia) using chave Pozidriv segundo indica a figura 1. 2. Retire los 6 tornillos de la tapa frontal con un
a Pozidrive screw driver as shown in Fig.1. destornillador Pozidrive según indica la figura 1.
LOCKS
---------------------------A-----------B--------------------------------------A------------B-------------------------------------A------------B------------
Kit for 1 CASTELL GBCAS GBCASR Kit para CASTELL GBCAS GBCASR Kit para 1 CASTELL GBCAS GBCASR
CASTELL Lock GCAS Fechadura CASTELL GCAS Llave CASTELL GCAS
3. Rotate the charging handle down and slide the 3.Gire a manivela de carga de molas para baixo e 3.Gire la manivela de carga de muelles hacia abajo
front cover over the handle to remove the front cover deslize a tampa frontal sobre a manivela para a y deslice la tapa frontal sobre la manivela para
as shown in Fig. 2. retirar, como se mostra na Fig. 2 retirarla, como se muestra en la Fig. 2
4. Fix the cam with the Castell lock with the screw 4. Fixe a patilha do encravamento com os 4. Fije la leva del enclavamiento con los tornillos y
and nuts provided along with the kit as shown in parafusos e porcas de aperto fornecidos, como se tuercas de
Fig. 3. indica na Fig. 3. sujeción suministrados, como se indica en la Fig. 3.
5. Fix the Lock assy on the mounting Bracket as 5. Fixe o suporte da fechadura como se indica na 5. Fije el soporte de la cerradura como se indica en
shown in Fig. 4. Fig. 4. la Fig. 4.
6. Fix the mounting bracket assembly in breaker 6. Fixe todo o conjunto já montado ao disjuntor 6. Fije todo el conjunto ya montado al interruptor
using the nuts provided as shown in Fig. 5a & 5b. com as porcas de aperto fornecidos, como se con las tuercas de sujeción suministrados, como se
indica nas Fig. 5a e 5b. indica en las Fig. 5a y 5b.
7. Replace the breakers fascia/front cover as 7. Coloque a tampa frontal do disjuntor como se 7. Coloque la tapa frontal del interruptor
indicated elsewhere in this section. explica nesta mesma secção. automático como se explica en esta misma sección
4.4-05
198
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
8. Ensure the fascia is aligned properly with the trip 8. Assegure-se de que a tampa fica devidamente 8. Asegúrese de que la tapa quede debidamente
unit and the pad lock features of the breaker. alinhada com a unidade de protecção e com os alineada con la unidad de protección y con los
GENERAL
Breaker key lock Operation: Funcionamento do encravamento por Funcionamiento del enclavamiento por
fechadura do interruptor: cerradura del interruptor:
MOTOR
Use the following procedure to operate the padlock: Para utilizar o encravamento por fechadura, utilize Para utilizar el enclavamiento por cerradura, utilice
o seguinte procedimento: el siguiente procedimiento:
1. Depress the OFF pushbutton on the breaker front 1. Pressione o botão OFF (Abertura) no painel frontal 1. Presione el pulsador OFF (Apertura) en el panel
Fascia and extend/pull the breaker padlock lever to do disjuntor e tire a patilha do encravamento por frontal del interruptor automático y tire de la
its' outer position. cadeado do disjuntor para fora. palanca del enclavamiento por candado del
interruptor hacia fuera.
2. With the padlock level extended , rotate one or 2. Com a patilha do cadeado estendida, gire uma 2. Con la palanca del candado extendida, gire una o
more of the keys anticlockwise. The key can then be ou mais das chaves para a esquerda. Então, a más de las llaves hacia la izquierda. Entonces, la
CONTACTS
removed thus locking the breaker in it's open chave pode ser retirada, o que deixa o disjuntor llave puede retirarse, lo que deja el interruptor
position. bloqueado na posição aberto. bloqueado en posición abierto.
3. With padlock lever extended, insert the key and 3. Com a patilha do cadeado estendida, introduza a 3. Con la palanca del candado extendida,
rotate in clockwise to unlock. chave e gire-a para a direita, então o disjuntor introduzca la llave y gire la llave hacia la derecha,
ficará desbloqueado. entonces el interruptor quedará desbloqueado.
Fig.4 Fig.6
LOCKS
Fig.3
Screw
Washer
Washer
Nut
Nut
Washer Washer Screw
Fig.7
Fig.5a
Fig.5b
Fixing nuts
Fixing nut
4.4-06
199
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
A C E
LOCKS
B D Screw F
Parfuso
Tornillo
4.4-07
200
EntelliGuard G ACCESSORIES
Two locks can be placed . Podem ser colocadas duas fechaduras. Se pueden colocar dos enclavamientos.
- RONIS 1104B Standard key 1/4 inch clockwise - RONIS 1104B chave standard 1/4 polegada - RONIS 1104B, llave estándar de 1/4" con
rotation to trap the key. rotação à direita para bloquear a chave. rotación hacia la derecha para bloquear la llave.
-OR- -OU- - O bien -
- PROFALUX B204DY With key type S1 1/4 inch - PROFALUX B204DY Com chave tipo S1 1/4 - PROFALUX B204DY, llave tipo S1 1/4" con
clockwise rotation to trap the key. polegada à direita para bloquear a chave. rotación hacia la derecha para bloquear la llave.
The device is available in two versions. O dispositivo está disponível em duas versões. El dispositivo está disponible en dos versiones.
1. Factory mounted mechanism: 1. Mecanismo montado em fábrica: 1. Mecanismo montado en fábrica:
The breaker/device is supplied off works with all O disjuntor / dispositivo é fornecido não El interruptor automático se sumnistra
cam's and screws allowing the user to mount a funcional com todas as câmaras e parafusos preparado con todas las levas y tornillos, lo que
separately acquired GE type lock kit. permitindo ao utilizador montar uma fechadura permite al usuario montar un kit de
do tipo GE encomendada separadamente. enclavamiento de tipo GE adquirido por
2. Field mountable device: 2. Dispositivo a montar em obra: separado.
A kit is supplied allowing the field mounting of É fornecido um kit para montagem em obra do 2. Dispositivo montable por el usuario:
the locking mechanism and allowing the use of mecanismo de bloqueio permitindo o uso de Se suministra un kit que permite el montaje por
a lock of the correct type purchased elsewhere. fechaduras do tipo correcto compradas em parte del usuario del enclavamiento por
qualquer lado. cerradura y que permite asimismo el uso de un
Catalogue Numbers A: Factory mounted B: Field kit or Spare
Referencia A: Montado em Fábrica B: Kit Obra ou Subst.
Referencias de catálogo A: Montado en fábrica B: Kit montable por el usuario o recambio
LOCKS
---------------------------------------A---------B-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------A---------B----------------------------------
Kit for 1 RONIS lock (max. 2) GCRON GCRONR Kit para 1 fechadura RONIS lock (max. 2)... Kit para 1 Ronis (máx. 2) GCRON GCRONR
Kit for 1 PROFALUX lock (max. 2) GCPRO GCPROR Kit para 1 fechadura PROFALUX (max. 2)... Kit para 1 Profalux (máx. 2) GCPRO GCPROR
--- --- ---
RONIS Lock GRON Fechadura RONIS... Llave RONIS GRON
PROFALUX Lock GPRO Fechadura PROFALUX... Llave PROFALUX GPRO
Installation of key locks on Cassette. Instalação das fechaduras de bloqueio no enclavamiento de tipo correcto adquirido por
1. Remove the knock-out feature on the Berço. separado.
Cassette front panel (Fig. A) & clean the flash 1. Remova as tampas do painel frontal do berço Instalación de enclavamientos por cerradura
with any sharp pointed Tool. Ensure no flash or (Fig. A) e limpe a irregularidade com uma en la cuna.
projections left out & cavity is free for insertion ferramenta abrasiva. Garanta que não há 1. Retire el obturador del panel frontal de la
of lock. imprecisões e que a cavidade está livre para a cuna (Fig. A) y limpie la rebaba con una
2. Remove M22 nuts from the Ronis /Profalux inserção da fechadura. herramienta puntiaguda afilada. Asegúrese de
lock. 2. Remova as porcas M22 das fechaduras Ronis que no haya rebabas ni proyecciones y que la
3. Insert the Lock body in to the front panel /Profalux. cavidad esté despejada para insertar el
cavity. Assemble M22 nut on to lock body from 3. Insira a fechadura na cavidade frontal do dispositivo de enclavamiento.
inside of cassette & Turn until it reaches berço. Monte a porca M22 no corpo da 2. Quite las tuercas M22 del enclavamiento
Cassette base plate face. Don't tighten, keep fechadura pela parte de dentro do berço e Ronis/Profalux.
loose. ajuste até que esta fique à face da placa do 3. Introduzca el cuerpo del dispositivo de
berço. Não aperte, deixe um pouco de folga. enclavamiento en la cavidad del panel frontal.
4. Assemble the key lock cam on to the Lock 4. Monte a patilha da fechadura no seu corpo. Monte la tuerca M22 en el cuerpo del dispositivo
body. Orient on the slot. Tighten nut supplied Oriente para a abertura. Aperte então a porca de enclavamiento desde dentro de la cuna y
Fig. A: Press the off button on the breaker Fig. A: Pressione o botão 'OFF' no disjuntor Fig. A: Pulse el botón 'OFF' del interruptor automático
Fig. B: Key lock key rotate anti clock wise Fig. B: Rode a chave do bloqueio no sentido anti-horário Fig. B: Gire la llave de la cerradura hacia la izquierda
Fig. C: Device locked out Fig. C: Dispositivo bloqueado Fig. C: Dispositivo bloqueado
A B C
4.4-08
201
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
4.4
along with lock body. Ensure that Camming da fechadura. Garanta que a patilha está em gírela hasta que llegue a la superficie plana de la
Surface of the cam is in contact with pivot of key contacto com o ponto de actuação no apoio do base de la cuna. No la apriete del todo,
Lock actuator bracket fitted on Cassette. mecanismo de bloqueio inserido no berço. manténgala suelta.
4. Coloque la leva del enclavamiento por
5. Fully tighten the M22 nut. 5. Fully tighten the M22 nut. cerradura en el cuerpo del dispositivo de
enclavamiento. Oriente la hendidura. Apriete la
tuerca sobre el cuerpo del dispositivo de
enclavamiento. Asegúrese de que la superficie
de la leva esté en contacto con el pivote del
accionador del enclavamiento por cerradura
montado en la cuna.
5. Apriete definitivamente la tuerca M22.
Verification that security locking is in place. Verificação o Bloqueio de segurança está no Verificación de que el enclavamiento de
lugar. seguridad está operativo.
5. It should not be possible to open the racking 5. Não deverá ser possível abrir o obturador do 5. No se debería poder abrir la tapa de apertura
handle aperture shutter. Verify this by attempting ponto de manobra para a manivela de de la manivela de maniobra. Compruebe este
to open the shutter drive by placing a extracção. Verifique isto usando uma chave de punto intentando abrir el accionador de la
screwdriver and rotating it clockwise as depicted fendas para tentar abrir o obturador do ponto pantalla colocando un destornillador y girándolo
in Fig. C. de manobra da manivela de extracção, hacia la derecha como se representa en la Fig.
rodando-o no sentido dos ponteiros do relógio C.
LOCKS
6. It should not be possible to switch the breaker Fig. C. 6. No se debería poder Cerrar el interruptor
'ON'. Verify this by attempting to turn the breaker 6. Não deverá ser possível passar o disjuntor à (posición 'ON'). Compruebe este punto
'ON' by depressing the 'ON' switch button on the posição 'ON' ligado. Verifique isto tentando ligar intentando cerrar el interruptor (posición 'ON')
breakers front fascia. o disjuntor pressionando o botão 'ON' na face pulsando el botón 'ON' en el frontal del
frontal do disjuntor. interruptor automático.
n o t e n o t a s | n o t a s
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4-09
202
EntelliGuard G ACCESSORIES
the cassette on the right for Left hinged door or ser colocado dentro do berço na sua parte mecanismo de enclavamiento de puerta, a la
Left for Right hinged door. Specify whether door direita para porta de abertura à esquerda ou no derecha para puertas con bisagras situadas a la
is Left Hand or Right hand hinged when berço à esquerda para portas de abertura à izquierda o a la izquierda para puertas con
ordering. direita. bisagras a la derecha.
Ø 6,4 mm
4 holes | 4 furos | 4 taladros right hinged left hinged
dobradiça à direita dobradiça à esquerda
bisagra a la derecha bisagra a la izquierda
4.4-10
203
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
4.4
A: interlock lever A. alavanca de encravamento A. palanca de enclavamiento
B: helical spring B. mola helicoidal B. resorte helicoidal
C: circlips C. freios de segurança C. anillos de seguridad
A D: door bracket D. suporte de porta D. soporte de puerta
E: mounting screws washers E. parafusos com anilhas E. tornillos con arandelas
D E
C B
5. Based on the door interlock type, drill the hole 5. Segundo o tipo de encravamento de porta, 5. Según el tipo de enclavamiento de puerta,
pattern on the door as shown in Fig.7. fure as passagens na porta, como se indica na taladre los agujeros en la puerta, como se indica
Dimensions shown are in mm. Fig. 7 en Fig. 7
As dimensiones indicadas estão em mm. Las dimensiones indicadas están en mm.
6. Assemble the door bracket to the door using
the screws and washers as shown in Fig.4. 6. Monte o suporte da porta utilizando os 6. Monte el soporte de la puerta utilizando los
parafusos e anilhas, como se indica na Fig. 4. tornillos y arandelas, como se indica en Fig. 4.
7. When the door is closed, the bracket on the
door will be hooked to the door interlock on the 7. Quando se feche a porta, o suporte na porta 7. Cuando se cierre la puerta, el soporte en la
cassette as shown in Fig.5 & 6. ficará engatado com o encravamento de porta puerta quedará enganchado con el
do berço, como se indica na Fig. 5 e 6. enclavamiento de puerta de la cuna, como se
indica en Fig. 5 y 6.
DOOR
2
3
A
6 4
4.4-11
204
EntelliGuard G ACCESSORIES
A Pin and gate device that prevents the insertion A Pin and gate dispositivo that prevents the Se trata de un dispositivo compuesto por un
of a circuit breaker into a cassette if the nominal insertion de a disjuntor into a cassette if the bloque con patillas que evita la inserción de un
rating of the breaker is incompatible with that of nominal rating de the disjuntor is incompatible interruptor automático en una cuna si el valor
the cassette and its ancillary equipment. with that de the cassette and its ancillary nominal de éste último es incompatible con el de
equipment. la cuna y sus equipos auxiliares.
Recommended configurations are provided with Recommended configurations are provided with Se ofrecen configuraciones recomendadas para
the Mis Insertion Feature for the entire the Mis Insertion Feature for the entire usar la función de traba de calibre en toda la
EntelliGuard range. EntelliGuard Intervalo. gama EntelliGuard.
A B
4.4-12
205
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
To allow either the outgoing cables or busbars to be Para permitir a ligação de cabos ou barras de Sirve para hacer que los cables de salida o los
safely held at earth potential and locked during modo seguro ao potencial de terra e o seu embarrados estén conectados a tierra de forma
system maintenance. After removal of the Draw Out bloqueio enquanto se faz a manutenção ao segura durante el mantenimiento del sistema.
clusters the same device can be mounted on the sistema. Após a remoção das pinças de Después de extraer las pinzas de seccionamiento,
moving portion of the drawout device. The use of se puede montar el mismo dispositivo en la parte
seccionamento este mesmo dispositivo pode ser
the separately available Cluster Pliers is necessary. móvil del interruptor seccionable. Se requiere el uso
montado na parte móvel do aparelho Extraível.
de tenazas de seccionamiento disponibles por
O uso do alicate separado de remoção das separado.
Kit Content pinças de seccionamento é necessário. Contenido del kit
A Grounding Bar with spring pressure grounding Conteúdo do Kit Una barra de puesta a tierra con muelle de presión
contact and M10 size fixation hardware. Uma barra de terra com molas de pressão e y tornillería de fijación M10.
apertos M10 de fixação.
Installation Instalación
Upper Cluster Contact Grounding Instalação Puesta a tierra de las pinzas de seccionamiento
Posta à terra das pinças de seccionamento superiores
1. Remove the upper cluster contacts (A) at the rear superiores 1. Retire las pinzas de seccionamiento superiores
of the circuit breaker, using the provided cluster 1. Remova as pinças de seccionamento (A) de la parte posterior del interruptor automático,
pliers (Fig. B). superiores (A) na parte traseira do disjuntor, con las tenazas de seccionamiento que se
usando o necessário alicate de extracção (Fig. suministran (Fig. B).
2. Position the grounding bar on the exposed top B). 2. Coloque la barra de puesta a tierra en la
terminals top surface, ensuring the spring-loaded 2. Posicione a barra de terra nos terminais superficie de las tomas superiores, asegurándose
grounding contact is facing left when viewed from superiores expostos, garantindo que o contacto de que el muelle de presión esté orientado hacia la
the rear. de terra com mola é voltado para a esquerda izquierda (visto desde detrás).
3. Install bolts and washers using the threads in the 3. Coloque pernos y arandelas utilizando las roscas
quando visto da retaguarda.
grounding bar, one bolt per pole. Torque to 30 Nm. de la barra de puesta a tierra, un perno por cada
3. Instale os parafusos e anilhas usando os
polo. Apriete a 30 Nm.
furos na barra de terra, um por polo. Aperto a 30
4. The spring loaded grounding contact will engage Nm. 4. La barra de puesta a tierra con muelle de presión
with the top fixed grounded contact block in 4. O contacto por molas de ligação à terra vai se acoplará con el bloque superior de contactos de
cassette when the breaker is racked to connected engatar com o bloco de contactos ligados à puesta a tierra fijos de la cuna cuando el interruptor
position. terra no topo do berço quando o disjuntor está automático esté en la posición de insertado.
inserido na posição ligado.
Lower Cluster Contact Set Grounding Posta à terra das pinças de seccionamento Puesta a tierra de las pinzas de seccionamiento
inferiores superiores
1. Remove the lower cluster contacts at the rear of 1. Retire las pinzas de seccionamiento inferiores de
EARTHING
1. Remova as pinças de seccionamento
the circuit breaker, using the provided cluster pliers. inferiores (A) na parte traseira do disjuntor, la parte posterior del interruptor automático, con
usando o necessário alicate de extracção. las tenazas de seccionamiento que se siuministran.
2. Position the grounding bar on the exposed 2. Posicione a barra de terra nos terminais 2. Coloque la barra de puesta a tierra en la
bottom terminals top surface, ensuring the spring- superiores expostos, garantindo que o contacto superficie de las tomas inferiores, asegurándose de
loaded grounding contact is facing left when que el muelle de presión esté orientado hacia la
de terra com mola é voltado para a esquerda
viewed from the rear. izquierda (visto desde detrás).
quando visto da retaguarda.
3. Coloque pernos y arandelas utilizando las roscas
3. Install bolts and washers using the threads in the 3. Instale os parafusos e anilhas usando os furos de la barra de puesta a tierra, un perno por cada
grounding bar, one bolt per pole. Torque to 30 Nm. na barra de terra, um por polo. Aperto a 30 Nm. polo. Apriete a 30 Nm.
4. O contacto por molas de ligação à terra vai
4. The spring loaded grounding contact will engage engatar com o bloco de contactos ligados à 4. La barra de puesta a tierra con muelle de presión
with the bottom fixed grounded contact block in terra no inferior do berço quando o disjuntor se acoplará con el bloque superior de contactos de
cassette when the breaker is racked to connected está inserido na posição ligado. puesta a tierra fijos de la cuna cuando el interruptor
position. automático esté en la posición de insertado.
4.4-13
206
EntelliGuard G ACCESSORIES
Contact Wear Indicator use: Uso do indicador de desgaste: Uso del indicador de desgaste del contacto:
1. Remove the arc chamber assembly by 1. Remova a câmara de extinção de arcos 1. Retire el conjunto de la cámara de corte
loosening the two M6 hardware, Fig. A. desapertando os dois apertos M6, Fig. A. aflojando los dos tornillos M6, Fig. A.
2. Drop the Wear indicator in the housing cavity 2. Deixe o contacto indicador de desgaste na 2. Coloque el indicador de desgaste en el
till it properly seats on the housing surface. As cavidade de modo que este assente alojamiento de la cavidad hasta que se asiente
shown in Fig. B. correctamente na superfície. Como mostrado na adecuadamente en la superficie del alojamiento.
Fig. B. Consulte la Fig. B.
3. Check each finger top end with respect to the 3. Verifique cada ponta superior do pólo com 3. Compruebe el extremo superior de cada dedo
green color area marked on the wear indicator atenção à área de cor verde marcada no del polo con respecto al área de color verde
as Shown in Fig. C. indicador de desgaste como indicado na Fig. C. marcada en el indicador de desgaste, como se
muestra en la Fig. C.
4. Repeat this procedure for each pole and for 4. Repita este procedimento para cada pólo e 4. Repita este procedimiento con cada polo y
each finger within the pole para cada ponta do pólo. con cada dedo del polo.
5. If the finger top end crosses the edge of the 5. Se a terminação de pontas superiores do pólo 5. Si el extremo superior del dedo cruza el borde
green area marked on the wear indicator, the cruzam a aresta da área de cor verde marcada del área verde marcada en el indicador de
arcing contacts have eroded and needs no indicador de desgaste, os contactos de arco desgaste, significa que los contactos
replacement. estão gastos e precisam de ser substituídos. parachispas deben sustituirse.
6. After use, remove the Wear Indicator and 6. Após o seu uso, remova o indicador de 6. Después de utilizarlo, retire el indicador de
replace the arc chutes by placing and tightening desgaste e reponha as câmaras de extinção de desgaste y sustituya las cámaras de corte
the mounting hardware with a torque of 8 to 10 arco, colocando e apertando os apertos com um sustituyendo y apretando los tornillos de
Nm. par de 8 to 10 Nm. montaje a 8 - 10 Nm.
Hint: If one or more of the arcing contacts need Nota: Se um ou mais contactos de arco Consejo: Si es necesario cambiar
replacement immediately contact one of our precisam de ser substituídos imediatamente, inmediatamente uno o más de los contactos
After Sales Service Departments as indicated in contacte o departamento de serviços pós venda parachispas, póngase en contacto con uno de
section 6 of this USER MANUAL. como indicado na secção 6 de MANUAL de nuestros departamentos de servicio postventa
UTILIZADOR. como se indica en la sección 6 de este MANUAL
DEL USUARIO.
A B
4.4-14
207
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
The barriers are supplied in kits of 9, three for the Os separadores são fornecidos em kits de 9, três Los separadores se suministran en kits de 9, tres
envelope 1 & 2 fixed version, three for the para os tamanhos 1 2 2 execução fixa, três para para los tamaños 1 y 2 ejecucion fija, tres para el
envelope 3 fixed version and 3 useable for all o tamanho 3 execução fixa e três para todos os tamaño 3 ejecución fija y tres para todos los
drawout cassette types. Per three pole device tamanhos de execução extraível. tamaños con ejecución seccionable.
two barriers are needed and per 4 pole device
three.
Use the following procedure to install the Phase Siga o seguinte procedimento para instalar os siga el siguiente procedimiento para instalar los
Barrier accessory onto the circuit breaker. separadores de fase no disjuntor: Separadores de fase en el interruptor:
1. Identify correct Phase Barrier type: 1. Identifique o separador de fase correcto: 1. Identifique el separador de fase correcto:
Fig.1 For Envelope 1 & 2 fixed. Fig. 1 Para Tamanhos 1 e 2 execução fixa Fig. 1 Para Tamaños 1 y 2 ejecución fija
Fig.2 For Envelope 3 fixed. Fig. 2 Para Tamanho 3 execução fixa Fig. 2 Para Tamaño 3 ejecución fija
Fig.3 For all Drawout Cassettes. Fig. 3 Para todos os Tamanhos, execução Fig. 3 Para todos los Tamaños, ejecución
extraível. seccionable.
Phase Barrier
Catalogue Numbers | Referencias | Referencias de catálogo
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Phase Barrier GJP Set of 9 Phase Separators
Separadores de fase GJP Kit de 9 Separadores de fase
Separadores de fase GJP Kit de 9 Separadores de fase
2. Assemble two pcs. of the phase barriers for 3 2. Monte dois separadores de fase para 2. Monte dos separadores de fase para
pole devices and 3 for 4 pole devices as shown dispositivos de 3P e três separadores para dispositivos de 3P y tres separadores para
in Fig.4 & 5. dispositivos de 4P, como se indica nas Fig. 4 e 5. dispositivos de 4P, omo se indica en las Fig. 4 y 5
2.1 For fixed types (Fig.4): Use one M5 screw, 2.1 Para execução fixa (fig. 4) use um parafuso 2.1 Para ejecución fija (fig. 4) use un tornillo M5,
flat and spring washer. Tighten to torque of 4 - 6 M5, e anilha plana de mola. Aplique um par de arandela plana y grover. Aplique un par de 4-6
Nm at top end. 4-6 Nm no extremo superior Nm en el extremo superior
2.2 For drawout types (Fig.5): Use two M6 2.2 Para execução extraível (fig. 5) use dois 2.2 Para ejecución seccionable (fig. 5) use dos
screw, flat and spring washer. Tighten to torque parafusos M6, e anilha plana de mola. Aplique tornillos M6, arandela plana y grover. Aplique un
of 4 - 6 Nm at top & bottom end. um par de 4-6 Nm nos extremos superior e par de 4-6 Nm en los extremos superior e
inferior. inferior.
1 2 3
4 5
4.4-15
208
EntelliGuard G ACCESSORIES
1
Catalogue Numbers | Referencias | Referencias de catálogo
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IP54 G54DR
IP54 COVER
3. Open the panel door. Remove the door flange 3. Abra a porta do armário. Desmonte o aro de 3. Abra la puerta del armario. Desmonte el
from the door by removing the screws from remate retirando os parafusos do interior da marco embellecedor quitando los tornillos desde
inside of the door. porta. el interior de la puerta.
4. Monte a tampa de porta IP54 na porta com
4. Assemble the IP54 cover assembly on the os parafusos e anilhas, como se indica na foto. 4. Monte la tapa de puerta IP54 en la puerta con
door with screws and washers as shown in los tornillos y arandelas, como se indica en la
picture. 5. Para disjuntores de execução extraível, são foto.
necessários 12 parafusos para montar a tampa
5. 12 screws are required to assemble the IP54 de porta IP54. 5. Para interruptores con ejecución seccionable,
cover for a drawout type of breaker. se necesitan 12 tornillos para montar la tapa de
6. Para disjuntores de execução fixa, são puerta IP54
6. 10 screws are required to assemble the IP54 necessários 10 parafusos para montar a tampa
cover for a fixed type of breaker. de porta IP54. 6. Para interruptores con ejecución fija, se
necesitan 10 tornillos para montar la tapa de
puerta IP54.
4.4-16
209
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
4.4
7. Fixed type of IP54 cover needs an additional 7. Para montar a tampa IP54 com disjuntores 7. Para montar la tapa IP54 con interruptores
bracket assembly as shown in the Fig.4. fixos, é necessário um suporte de montagem fijos, se necesita un soporte de montaje
adicional, como se indica na Fig. 4. adicional, como se indica en Fig. 4
8. For opening the cover, rotate the latch in anti- 8. Para abrir a tampa, gire o fecho à esquerda. 8. Para abrir la tapa, gire el pestillo a izquierdas.
clock wise direction
9. Para bloquear a porta, gire o fecho à direita. 9. Para bloquear la puerta, gire el pestillo a
9. For locking the door, rotate the latch in clock- derechas.
wise direction.
35,5 283
30
IP54 COVER
30
2
22,5
Ø 5,3 mm
4 holes | 4 furos | 4 taladros
4.4-17
210
EntelliGuard G ACCESSORIES
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Connection diagram | Esquema de ligações | Esquema de conexionado Connection diagram | Esquema de ligações | Esquema de conexionado
For 3 Phase 3-wire system | Para sistemas de 3 fases a 3 fios | Para sistemas de 3 Fases 3 hilos For 3 Phase 4-wire system | Para sistemas de 3 fases a 4 fios | Para sistemas de 3 Fases 4 hilos
V+ V- V+ V- V+ V- 1 2 1 2 1 2
EntelliGuard EntelliGuard EntelliGuard EntelliGuard EntelliGuard EntelliGuard
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
L N L N L N 3 4 3 4 3 4
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 N
Inputs 3 phase 50/60 Hz Phase sequence L1, L2, L3
Entrada 3 Fases 50/60 Hz, Sequência de fases L1, L2, L3
Entrada 3 Fases 50/60 Hz, Secuencia de fases L1, L2, L3
4.4-18
211
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
4.4
Configuring the Electronic trip unit (ETU) for Configuração da unidade de disparo para o Configuración de la unidad de protección para el
Voltage Conditioner: acondicionador de alimentação: acondicionador de alimentación:
Configure the trip unit (ETU) with following PT Configure a unidade de protecção com os Configure la unidad de protección con los
ranges for Voltage conditioner catalogues listed.. seguintes valores de TENSÃO DE TRANSFORMADOR siguientes rangos TENSION TRAFOR para los
para o acondicionador de alimentação escolhido acondicionadores de alimentación existentes e
GMPU1 PT voltage to be set to 230V existente em catálogo catálogo
set PT connection as Phase to Neutral GMPU1 Ajustar TENSÃO DE TRANSFORMADOR A 230V GMPU1 Ajustar TENSION TRAFOR A 230V
GMPU2 PT voltage to be set to 400V Ajustar CONEXÃO TRANSFORMADOR a Fase - Neutro Ajustar CONEX TRAFOR a Fase-Neutro
set PT connection as Phase to Neutral GMPU2 Ajustar TENSÃO DE TRANSFORMADOR A 400V GMPU2 Ajustar TENSION TRAFOR A 400V
GMPU3 PT voltage to be set to 250/290/415V Ajustar CONEXÃO TRANSFORMADOR a Fase - Neutro Ajustar CONEX TRAFOR a Fase-Neutro
..as per the jumper wire settings of J5 GMPU3 Ajustar TENSÃO DE TRANSFORMADOR A GMPU3 Ajustar TENSION TRAFOR A 250/290/415V
connector described below. 250/290/415V ..dependiendo de la configuración del
set PT connection as Phase to Neutral ..dependendo da configuração do conector J5 descrita más abajo.
and conector J5 descrita mais abaixo. Ajustar CONEX TRAFOR a Fase-Neutro
GMPU4 PT voltage to be set to 690V Ajustar CONEXÃO TRANSFORMADOR a Fase - Neutro
set PT connection as Phase to Phase GMPU4 Ajustar TENSÃO DE TRANSFORMADOR A 690V .GMPU4 Ajustar TENSION TRAFOR A 690V
Ajustar CONEXÃO TRANSFORMADOR a Fase - Fase
Ajustar CONEX TRAFOR a Fase-Fase
CONDITIONER
290V 290V 290V
415V
415V 415V
415V
415V 415V
Fuse replacement 1. Use uma chave de parafusos para abrir a tampa traseira Cambio del fusible
Substituição de fusível 2. Retira a tampa traseira de acesso ao circuito electrónico
3. Agora o fusível está acessível. 1. Utilize un destornillador para abrir la tapa trasera
Substitua o fusível se necessário... 2. Saque la tapa trasera que contiene el circuito electrónico
3. Ahora es accesible el fusible.
1. Use screw driver to open the botton plate Cámbielo si fuera necesario..
2. Take out the bottom plate which carries the PCB
3. Now the fuse is accessible.
Replace the fuse if needed...
2
1
3
4.4-19
212
EntelliGuard G ACCESSORIES
Dimension
Dimensões
Dimensión
90
45
62
53 26,5
(mm) 48
58
When an EntelliGuard device in a 3 pole Quando se utiliza um dispositivo EntelliGuard Cuando se utiliza un dispositivo EntelliGuard en una
configuration is used in a 4 wire network a numa configuração de 3 Pólos numa rede de configuración de 3 Polos en una red de cuatro hilos,
fourth sensor needs to be placed in the Neutral. quatro fios, é necessário instalar um quarto se necesita instalar un cuarto sensor en neutro.
sensor no neutro.
It also must be connected to the Trip Unit input Também se deve ligar à entrada da unidade de También se debe conectar a la entrada de la unidad
ROGOWSKI
as indicated elsewhere in the User Manual. disparo, como se indica neste manual do de protección, como se indica en este Manual del
utilizador. usuario.
Fig.D Fig.E
-- Diagram illustrating neutral Rogowski coil fixing position and directions for -- Diagram illustrating neutral Rogowski coil fixing position and directions for
applications where busbars connected to top terminals and cables connected to applications where busbars connected to top terminals and cables connected to
bottom terminal of ACB. bottom terminal of ACB.
-- Diagrama ilustrativo da posição e direcção da bobina Rogowski para neutro com -- Diagrama ilustrativo da posição e direcção da bobina Rogowski para neutro com
barras ligadas às tomadas superiores e cabos ligados às tomadas inferiores do barras ligadas às tomadas superiores e cabos ligados às tomadas inferiores do
disjuntor. disjuntor.
-- Diagrama ilustrativo de la posición y dirección de la bobina Rogowski para neutro -- Diagrama ilustrativo de la posición y dirección de la bobina Rogowski para neutro
con barras conectadas a las tomas superiores y cables conectados a las tomas con barras conectadas a las tomas superiores y cables conectados a las tomas
inferiores del interruptor. inferiores del interruptor.
Neutral position
Neutro REF
Posición del
Posição de
neutro REF
Restricted
Posición del neutro UEF
Posição de Neutro UEF
Neutral position
Neutral position
Unrestricted
Unrestricted
Posición del
Neutro UEF
neutro UEF
Posição de
Arrow mark on Rogowski points in this direction Arrow mark on Rogowski points in this direction
Seta marcada nos pontos da Rogowski nesta direcção Seta marcada nos pontos da Rogowski nesta direcção
Marca de flecha en Rogowski en esta dirección Marca de flecha en Rogowski en esta dirección
Termination at Secondary disconnect terminals +ve to A37 and -ve to A36 Termination at Secondary disconnect terminals +ve to A37 and -ve to A36
Ligação à régua de bornes secundária, +ve a A37 e -ve a A36 Ligação à régua de bornes secundária, +ve a A37 e -ve a A36
Conexionado al regletero de bornas secundario, +ve a A37 y -ve a A36 Conexionado al regletero de bornas secundario, +ve a A37 y -ve a A36
4.4-20
213
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
The external neutral Rogowski mounting kit O kit Rogowski inclui três suportes de fixação, El kit Rogowski incluye tres soportes de sujeción ,
comes with three mounting brackets, two fixing duas uniões de cabos e um cabo de ligação dos uniones de cables y un cable de conexión
screws, two cable ties, one 2m long twisted pair enrolado de 2 metros de comprimento. enrollado de 2 metros de longitud.
extension lead and one neutral Rogowski coil.
The mounting bracket has been designed so to O suporte de fixação foi desenhado para se usar El soporte de sujección se ha diseñado para
fit a multiple number of standard neutral bar com várias configurações de platinas de neutro usar con varias configuraciones de pletinas de
arrangement as illustrated on figures A, B and C. standard, como se indica nas figuras A, B e C. neutro estándar, como se indica en las figuras A,
B y C.
As standard frame 1 breakers are provided with Para disjuntores Tamanho 1 é fornecida a
frame 1 external neutral Rogowski coils. Likewise bobina Rogowski Tamanho 1. Para disjuntores Para interruptores Tamaño 1 se suministra la
fame 2 breakers are provided with frame 2 Tamanho 2 é fornecida a bobina Rogowski bobina Rogowski Tamaño 1. Para interruptores
external Rogowski coils and frame 3 breakers Tamanho 2 e para disjuntores Tamanho 3 é Tamaño 2 se suministra la bobina Rogowski
with the frame 3 Rogowski coils. fornecida a bobina Rogowski Tamanho 3. Tamaño 2 y para interruptores Tamaño 3 se
suministra la bobina Rogowski Tamaño 3.
The neutral Rogowski coil should be fitted in the A bobina de neutro Rogowski deve ser colocada
ROGOWSKI
correct location with respect to the neutral earth na localização correcta com respeito à ligação La bobina Rogowski para neutro debe
connection (restricted or unrestricted neutral). de neutro à terra (neutro restrito REF ou não posicionarse con la flecha mirando hacia las
restrito UEF). barras principales, como se indica en las Fig. A,
For further details consult application notes and B y C y se muestra esquemáticamente en las Fig.
drawings proved. Para mais detalhes consulte as notas de D y E.
aplicação e desenhos fornecidos.
The neutral Rogowski coil should be positioned
with the arrow facing the main bus bars as A bobina Rogowski para neutro deve posicionar-
illustrated on figure A, B & C and shown se com a seta virada para as barras principais,
diagrammatically on figures D and E. como se indica nas Fig. A, B e C e é mostrada
esquematicamente nas Fig. D e E.
58
Fix coil to clamp with cable ties (position coil centrally on clamp)
Fixar a bobina à braçadeira com os cabos passantes (posição da bobina centrada na braçadeira)
Fijar la bobina a la abrazadera con bridas (posición de la bobina centrada en la abrazadera)
110
4.4-21
214
EntelliGuard G ACCESSORIES
4.4
The 2 m extension lead should next be plugged O cabo de 2m deve-se ligar à bobina Rogowski El cable de 2m se debe conectar a la bobina
into the neutral Rogowski coil flying lead and para neutro e ao disjuntor. Rogowski para neutro y al interruptor.
routed back to the breaker.
Os conectores marcados +ve e -ve devem ser Los conectores marcados +ve y -ve deben ser
ligados ao conector secundário em linha com as conectados al conector secundario en línea con
The end connectors marked +ve and -ve should ligações que se mostram nas Fig. D e E. las conexiones que se muestran en las Fig. D y E.
be terminated at the secondary disconnect in-
line with connections shown on figure D and E. O uso de um cabo mais largo que o fornecido El uso de un cabe más largo que el suministrado
pode dar lugar a interferências puede dar lugar a interferencias
Using a longer extension lead than that provided electromagnéticas que afectem as prestações electromagneticas que afecten a las
may result in EMI affecting the performance of da unidade de protecção. prestaciones de la unidad de protección.
the trip unit.
São permitidos cabos até 10m de comprimento.
Extensions to a length of 10 meter are normally Están permitidos cables de hasta 10m de
allowable. longitud.
58
Fix coil to clamp with cable ties (position coil centrally on clamp)
Fixar a bobina à braçadeira com os cabos passantes (posição da bobina centrada na braçadeira)
Fijar la bobina a la abrazadera con bridas (posición de la bobina centrada en la abrazadera)
ROGOWSKI
110
40mm x 4 - 25mm
50mm x 4 - 25mm
60mm x 4 - 25mm
70mm x 4 - 25mm
80mm x 4 - 25mm
110
Fix coil to clamp with cable ties (position coil centrally on clamp)
Fixar a bobina à braçadeira com os cabos passantes (posição da bobina centrada na braçadeira)
Fijar la bobina a la abrazadera con bridas (posición de la bobina centrada en la abrazadera)
4.4-22
215
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
TRANSFORMER
1
Types | Tipos | Tipos
4.4.14 Earth Leg Current 4.4.14 Transformador de intensidade 4.4.14 Transformador de intensidad
Transformer para defeitos à terra para defectos a tierra
When a Source Ground Return Earth fault Quando se utiliza protecção contra defeitos à Cuando se utiliza protección contra defectos a
scheme is used an Earth leg Current transformer terra, método de retorno à terra na origem, é tierra, método de retorno a tierra en origen, es
must be installed externally and connected to necessário um transformador de intensidade necesario un transformador de intensidad
the trip unit input. (see page 2.45) externo ligado à unidade de disparo (ver pág. externo conectado a la unidad de protección
2.45) (ver pág. 2.45)
The devices can be installed connected at
distances up to 50 meters from the breaker and Podem-se ligar a distancias de até 50m do Se pueden conectar a distancias de hasta 50m
can be connected by using standard 1 or 1.5 sq. disjuntor e pode-se realizar a ligação com cabos del interruptor y se puede realizar la conexión
mm. wires. standard de 1 ou 1,5mm². con cables estándar de 1 ó 1,5mm².
In the Earth Leg Current Transformer packaging Na embalagem do transformador de En el embalaje del transformador de intesidad
appropriate mounting and connection intensidade para defeitos à terra são incluídas para defectos a tierra se incluyen las
instructions are included (DEH...). as instruções de montagem e cablagem (DEH...). instrucciones de montaje y conexionado (DEH...).
4.4-23
216
EntelliGuard G ACCESSORIES
INOU HT .
400A 94 144 24
630A 85 135 30
2000A 87 151 31
3200A 84 154 34
4000A 81 154 57
5000A 85 198 58
6400A 85 210 65
Ø IN (min)
Ø OU (min)
HT (max)
4.4.15 Wall mounting Kit 4.4.15 Suportes de montagem mural 4.4.15 Soportes de montaje en fondo
armario
Wall mounting kit is offered for Fixed version of O kit para montagem mural está disponível para El kit para montaje en fondo armario está
Envelope 1 & 2 Breakers. disjuntores Tamanhos 1 e 2 com execução Fixa. disponible para interruptores Tamaños 1 y 2 con
Kit consists of LH and RH mounting plates to be ejecución Fija.
fixed in to the Breaker. O kit é composto de 2 placas (esquerda e direita) El kit se compone de 2 placas (izquierda y
Use the following procedure to install the Wall para fixar no disjuntor. derecha) para fijar en el interruptor.
mounting brackets.
Utilize o seguinte procedimento para instalar os Utilice el siguiente procedimiento para instalar
1. Turn the breaker off and discharge the closing suportes de montagem mural. los Soportes de montaje en fondo armario.
springs by depressing the OFF and ON buttons in 1. Abra o disjuntor (OFF) e descarregue as molas 1. Abra el interruptor (OFF) y descargue los
the sequence OFF-ON-OFF. principais pressionando os botões OFF e ON muelles principales pulsando los pulsadores OFF
Verify that the breaker OFF-ON indicator shows com a sequência seguinte OFF-ON-OFF. y ON según la secuencia siguiente OFF-ON-OFF.
OFF on a green background and that the charge
indicator shows DISCHARGE on a white Verifique que o indicador OFF-ON está em OFF Verifique que el indicador OFF-ON está en OFF
(fundo verde) e que o indicador de carga de (fondo verde) y que el indicador de carga de
Catalogue Numbers | Referencias | Referencias de catálogo
MOUNTING
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
molas está em DESCARREGADO (fundo branco). muelles está en DESCARGADO (fondo blanco).
background. 2. Retire os 6 parafusos da tampa frontal com 2. Retire los 6 tornillos de la tapa frontal con un
uma chave Pozidriv como indica a figura 1.8. destornillador Pozidrive según indica la figura
2. Loosen the 6 screws on front cover (fascia) Gire a manivela de carga de molas para baixo e 1.8. Gire la manivela de carga de muelles hacia
using a Pozidrive screw driver as shown in Fig 2. deslize a tampa frontal sobre a manivela para a abajo y deslice la tapa frontal sobre la manivela
Rotate the charging handle down and slide the retirar, como se mostra na Fig. 2. para retirarla, como se muestra en la Fig. 2.
front cover over the handle to remove the front
cover as shown in Fig. 2. 3. Retire a placa de montagem montada no 3. Retire la placa de montaje ensamblada en el
disjuntor retirando os parafusos, como se indica interruptor quitando los tornillos, como se indica
3. Remove the mounting plate which is assembled na Fig. 3. en la Fig. 3.
to the breaker by removing the fixing screws as
shown in Fig. 3. 4. Monte os suportes de montagem em fundo 4. Monte los Soportes de montaje en fondo
armário (esquerdo e direito) utilizando os armario (izquierdo y derecho) utilizando los
4. Assemble the LH and RH mounting plate using parafusos retirados previamente, como se indica tornillos retirados previamente, como se indica
the screws removed from the Breaker as shown in na Fig. 4. en la Fig. 4.
Fig. 4.
Fig.1 Fig.2 Removal of Front cover
1. Remove pad locks, installed if any.
A 2. Unscrew the 6 screws (6Nm, 4.42ft-lbs) using a Pozidrive screw driver as shown in
B Fig. A&B. 3. Rotate the charging handle down and slide the front cover
over the handle to remove out as shown in Fig. C.
4.4-24
217
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
4.4
5. To reinstall the cover, rotate the charging handle 5. Para voltar a colocar a tampa, gire a manivela 5. Para volver a colocar la tapa, gire la manivela
down and slide the front cover over the handle to de carga de molas para baixo e deslize a tampa de carga de muelles hacia abajo y deslice la
assemble the front cover to housing as shown frontal sobre a manivela, como se mostra tapa frontal sobre la manivela, como se muestra
in Fig.2. na Fig. 2 en la Fig. 2
6. Ensure the fascia is aligned properly with the 6. Assegure-se de que a tampa fica alinhada 6. Asegúrese de que la tapa queda alineada con
trip unit and the pad lock features of the breaker. com a unidade de disparo e com os la unidad de protección y con los
encravamentos por cadeado do disjuntor. enclavamientos por candado del interruptor.
7. Fasten the 6 mounting screws of fascia with the 7. Aperte os 6 parafusos da tampa frontal com 7. Apriete los 6 tornillos de la tapa frontal con un
housing using a Pozidrive screwdriver as shown in uma chave Pozidriv como se indica na Fig. 2. destornillador Pozidrive como se indica en la Fig.
Fig. 2. Apply torque of 6 Nm (4.42 ft-lbs). Aplique um par máximo de 6Nm (4.42 ft-lbs) 2. Aplique un par máximo de 6Nm (4.42 ft-lbs)
Envelope 1 Envelope 2
A E Dimensions (mm)
Centre Line of Centre Line of
operating panel 3 pole 4 pole
operating panel
B F -----------------------------------
A 320 420
B 159,5 259,5
C 158,5 258,5
Centre Line Centre Line D 344 444
of operating of operating E 410 540
panel panel F 189,5 319,5
G 190 320
H 437 567
4 holes 4 holes
17 102
Ø 12.2 Ø 12.2
MOUNTING
131.5 131.5 131.5 131.5 Center Line of operating panel | Centro do painel frontal de comando
159.5 C | Centro del panel frontal de mando
221 G
172.5 holes | furos | taladros
234 Envelope | Tamanho | Tamaño
D
H
Fig.3 Fig.4
4.4-25
218
EntelliGuard G ACCESSORIES
4.5 Accessories,
..not include in this user manual.
Acessórios,
..não incluídos neste manual.
Accesorios
... no incluidos en este manual
-------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------
4.5.1 Electronic Trip Unit Tester 4.5.1 Comprovador de unidade de 4.5.1 Comprobador y Configurador de
disparo unidad
--- test device / Setup tester: GTUTK20 --- comprovador / configurador: GTUTK20 --- de protección: GTUTK20
EntelliGuard TU Test Kit is a lightweight, portable O Comprovador e configurador de unidade de El Comprobador y configurador de unidad de
test instrument designed for field-testing of disparo é uma unidade ligeira e portátil protección es una unidad ligera y portátil
EntelliGuard TU Trip Units. desenhada para comprovar e configurar em diseñada para comprobar y configurar en
campo as unidades de disparo. campo las unidades de proteccióm.
The Test Kit includes the following features:
-- Operation from a 100-240VAC 50/60 Hz Inclui as seguintes características: Incluye las siguientes características:
Universal plug supply or two 9-volt alkaline -- Funcionamento a 100-240V CA 50/60 Hz -- Funcionamiento a 100-240V CA 50/60 Hz
batteries (batteries not supplied). com fonte de alimentação universal ou com dos con fuente de alimentación universal o con dos
-- Provides power to the trip unit for viewing baterias alcalinas de 9v (não fornecidas) baterías alcalinas de 9v (no suministradas)
and setting setpoints with no load on the -- Verificação da medida (simulação de fase) -- Verificación de la medida (simulación de fase)
breaker -- Teste de disparo -- Test de disparo
-- Verification of metering (phase simulation) -- Desactivação temporal da protecção contra -- Desactivación temporal de la protección
-- Trip test defeitos à terra durante o teste monofásico. contra defectos a tierra durante el test
-- Temporarily disable the Ground Fault feature monofásico.
during single phase breaker testing.
Please refer to Instruction sheet DEH-41 477 for Para mais detalhes, consulte a folha de Para más detalles, consulte la hoja de
more details. instruções DEH-41477 instrucciones DEH-41477
Tab.2
Test Kit HD15F Trip Unit HD15M
Comprovador HD15F Disparador HD15M
OTHER
4.5.2 Auxiliary power supply 24V DC 4.5.2 Fonte de alimentação 4.5.2 Fuente de alimentación
auxiliar 24V CC auxiliar 24V CC
A Din Rail mounted device with a case É um dispositivo para montagem em calha DIN Es un dispositivo para montaje en carril DIN con
dimension of 29 x 115 x 76 mm. com dimensões 29 x 115 x 76 mm. dimensiones 29 x 115 x 76 mm.
Input voltage can vary from 100.. 240 VAC 50 or A tensão de entrada pode ser variável desde La tensión de entrada puede se variable desde
60 cycles and 100.. 350 VDC. 100...240V CA 50/60Hz e 100...350V CC 100...240V CA 50/60Hz y 100...350V CC
The output is 0,6A 24 VDC. A tensão de saída é 24V CC 0,6A La tensión de salida es 24V CC 0,6A
Please refer to the HSA15 user manual for more Para mais detalhes, consulte o manual de Para más detalles, consulte el manual de
details. utilizador HSA15. ususario HSA15.
54321
External 24 VDC Power Supply
Fonte de alimentação aux. externa 24V CC
Fuente de alimentación aux. externa 24V CC
115
6 7
29 76
4.5-00
219
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
4.5
4.5.3 Cable Interlocking systems 4.5.3 Encravamentos mecânicos por 4.5.3 Enclavamientos mecánicos por
cabo cable
A rendering of the possible options are provided
in section 3.3 of this manual. Na secção 3.3 deste manual há uma En la sección 3.3 de este manual hay una
representação das opções possíveis representación de las opciones posibles
For further details please refer to: Consulte para mais detalhes: Consulte para más detalles:
Devices in a Fixed Pattern: DEH-41 451 Disjuntores com execução fixa: DEH-41451 Interruptores con ejecucion Fija: DEH-41451
Devices in a Drawout Pattern: DEH-41 455 Disjuntores com execução extraível: DEH-41455 Interruptores con ejecucion Seccionable: DEH-41455
B1 B2 B1 B2 B3 B1 B2 B3 B1 B2 B3
G 0 0 G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
I 0 I 0 0 I 0 0 I 0 0
0 I 0 I 0 0 I 0 0 I 0
0 0 I 0 0 I 0 0 I
I 0 I I I 0
B1 B2 B1 B2 B3 B1 B3 B2 0 I I B1 B3 B2
I I 0
Cables for device Interlock mechanism Cabos para encravamento mecânico Cables para enclavamiento mecánico
--- Cable lenght.. -- Comprimento -- Longitud
1 m: GCB1 1 m: GCB1 1 m: GCB1
1,6 m: GCB2 1,6 m: GCB2 1,6 m: GCB2
2 m: GCB3 2 m: GCB3 2 m: GCB3
2,5 m: GCB4 2,5 m: GCB4 2,5 m: GCB4
3 m: GCB5 3 m: GCB5 3 m: GCB5
3,5 m: GCB6 3,5 m: GCB6 3,5 m: GCB6
4 m: GCB7 4 m: GCB7 4 m: GCB7
4.5.4 Non Standard 4.5.4 Opções de cablagem não standard 4.5.4 Opciones de conexionado no
Bus Connection options estándar
An overview of all connection options is included Na secção 1.3.4 deste manual é incluída uma En la sección 1.3.4 de este manual se incluye
in section 1.3.4 of this manual. visão geral de todas as opções de ligação. una visión general de todas las opciones de
conexión.
All breakers in a fixed pattern are normally Normalmente todos os disjuntores com Normalmente todos los interruptores con
provided with horizontal rear connections. execução fixa são fornecidos com tomadas ejecución fija se suministran con tomas traseras
traseiras horizontais. horizontales.
OTHER
Exception: Envelope 2 types with 4000A and Excepção: Os disjuntores tamanho 2 de 4000A e Excepción: Los Interruptores tamaño 2 de 4000A
Envelope 3 types with a 6400A rating can only tamanho 3 de 6400A somente se podem utilizar y tamaño 3 de 6400A solamente se pueden
be used in the vertical connection mode. com ligação vertical. São proporcionados meios utilizar con conexión vertical. Se proporcionan
Relevant connection means are provided. de ligação apropriados. medios de conexión apropiados.
The Cassettes of all breakers in a drawout Os berços de todos os disjuntores com execução Las Cunas de todos los interruptores con
pattern are normally provided with rear extraível são fornecidos com tomadas traseiras ejecución seccionable se sumimistran con
connections that can be rotated and used for universais que se podem girar e utilizar para tomas traseras universales que pueden girarse y
Horizontal or Vertical Rear Connection. ligação Horizontal ou Vertical. utilizar para conexión Horizontal o Vertical.
Exception: Envelope 2 types with 4000A and Excepção: Os disjuntores tamanho 2 de 4000A e Excepción: Los Interruptores tamaño 2 de
Envelope 3 types with a 6400A ratings can only tamanho 3 de 6400A somente se podem utilizar 4000A y tamaño 3 de 6400A solamente se
be used in the vertical connection mode. com ligação vertical. pueden utilizar con conexión vertical.
For other possible connection modes, as front Para outras possibilidades de ligações para Para otras posibilidades de conexionado para
connection and vertical Rear Connections on a disjuntores com execução fixa, como tomadas interruptores con ejecución Fija, como tomas
breaker in a fixed pattern, please refer to dianteiras e tomadas traseiras verticais, delanteras y tomas traseras verticales, consulte
instruction manual DEH-41 432. consulte o manual DEH-41432. el manaul DEH-41432.
Lock Washer
Anilha de Segurança
Arandela de seguridad Hex Bolt (8.8)
Parafuso Sextavado (8.8)
Tornillo Hex. (8.8)
..1.3.4: Typical Connection Arrangement Customer bus
..1.3.4: Ligação Típica Tomadas Standard Barramento Exterior
Embarrado exterior
..1.3.4: Conexionado típico Tomas estándar
Breaker terminal
Tomadas Disjuntor
Toma interruptor
Customer bus
Barramento Exterior
Embarrado exterior
4.5-01
220
EntelliGuard G ACCESSORIES
4.6 Available spare parts 4.6 Partes de Substituição Disponíveis 4.6 Piezas de repuesto disponibles
Spare parts for Maintenance & other purposes Peças de reposição para manutenção Piezas de repuesto para Mantenimiento
The list indicated here includes the available A lista que se indica inclui as peças de La lista que se indica incluye las piezas de
EntelliGuard Spare Parts. Each part is supplied reposição para Entelliguard. Cada peça é respuesto para Entelliguard. Cada pieza se
with the relevant mounting instructions, that fornecida com as instruções pertinentes de suministra con las instrucciones pertinentes de
are available on request. montagem, que estão disponíveis para montaje, que están disponibles bajo petición.
encomenda.
4.6.1 Breaker Arc Chutes 4.6.1 Câmaras de Arco do Disjuntor 4.6.1 Cámaras de corte
--- Arc Chute for 1 pole --- Câmara para 1 pólo - Cámara de corte para 1 Polo
Envelope 1: G20HCHT Tamanho 1: G20HCHT Tamaño 1 G20HCHT
Envelope 2: G40MCHT Tamanho 2: G40MCHT Tamaño 2 G40MCHT
Envelope 3: G64LCHT Tamanho 3: G64LCHT Tamaño 3 G64LCHT
-------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------
4.6.2 Breaker Fixed Arcing Contacts 4.6.2 Contactos de Arco Fixos Disjuntor 4.6.2 Contactos parachispas
--- Envelope 1: --- Tamanho 1: - Tamaño 1:
Set for 1pole S & N types: G20NARC Conjuntos para 1 pólo tipos S e N: G20NARC Juego para 1 Polo tipos S y N G20NARC
Set for 1pole H type: G20HARC Conjuntos para 1 pólo tipo H: G20HARC Juego para 1 Polo tipo H G20HARC
--- Envelope 2: --- Tamanho 2: - Tamaño 2
Set for 1pole E & N types: G40NARC Conjuntos para 1 pólo tipos E e N: G40NARC Juego para 1 Polo tipos E y N G40NARC
Set for 1pole H & M types: G40MARC Conjuntos para 1 pólo tipos H e M: G40MARC Juego para 1 Polo tipos H y M G40MARC
--- Envelope 3: --- Tamanho 3: - Tamaño 3
Set for 1pole L type: G64LARC Conjuntos para 1 pólo tipo L: G64LARC Juego para 1 Polo tipo L G64LARC
-------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------
4.6.3 Cassette Cluster Contacts 4.6.3 Pinças de Contactos Principais Berço 4.6.3 Pinzas de seccionamiento
--- Sets per pole --- conjuntos por pólo - Juego para 1 Polo
Envelope 1: Tamanho 1: Tamaño 1:
Current Rating 400-1250A: G13HCLS Calibre 400-1250A: G13HCLS Intensidad 400-1250A G13HCLS
Current Rating 1600A: G16HCLS Calibre 1600A: G16HCLS Intensidad 1600A G16HCLS
Current Rating 2000A: G20HCLS Calibre 2000A: G20HCLS Intensidad 2000A G20HCLS
SPARE PARTS
4.6.5
4.6.4 Breaker front facia part 4.6.4 Parte Frontal do Disjuntor 4.6.4 Tapa frontal Int. automático
--- Front Facia: GFA4 --- Face Frontal: - Tapa frontal... GFA4
Set of 10 spare cams for use with.. GFA4 Juego de 10 levas para usar con...
Ronis 1004B locks: GRONCS Conjunto de 10 subst. de câmaras para uso Llaves Ronis 1004B GRONCS
com.. Fechaduras Ronis 1004B: GRONCS
-------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------
4.6.5 Trip Unit.. 4.6.5 Tapa frontal unidad de protección
--- tamper free sealing cover: GTUS 4.6.5 Unidade de Disparo.. --- Tapa frontal: GTUS
--- Tampa frontal selável: GTUS
-------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------
4.6-00
221
ACCESSORIES EntelliGuard G
4.6
4.6.6 Cassette Shutters with interlock 4.6.6 Pantallas de aislamiento con
4.6.6 Obturadores de berço com enclavamiento
-------- System with Interlock 3 pole encravamento - Sistema con enclavamiento para 3 Polos
Envelope 1: G20H2SSL -------- Sistema com Encravamento 3 pólos Tamaño 1 G20H2SSL
Envelope 2: G40M2SSL Tamanho 1: G20H2SSL Tamaño 2 G40M2SSL
Envelope 3: G64L2SSL Tamanho 2: G40M2SSL Tamaño 3 G64L2SSL
------- System with Interlock 4 pole Tamanho 3: G64L2SSL - Sistema con enclavamiento para 4 Polos
Envelope 1: G20H5SSL ------- Sistema com Encravamento 4 pólos Tamaño 1 G20H5SSL
Envelope 2: G40M5SSL Tamanho 1: G20H5SSL Tamaño 2 G40M5SSL
Envelope 3: G64L5SSL Tamanho 2: G40M5SSL Tamaño 3 G64L5SSL
4.6.7 Cassette Racking Handle 4.6.7 Manivela de extracção de Berço 4.6.7 Manivela para maniobra en la cuna
--- Spare Racking Handle: GRHN --- Subst. Manivela de extracção: GRHN - Manivela: GRHN
SPARE PARTS
n o t e n o t a s | n o t a s
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6-01
222
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
5.4 Contact wear Inspection 5.4 Inspecção Desgaste Contactos 5.4 Inspección de desgaste de los contactos
5.5 Isolating Contacts (Drawout Type) 5.5 Inspecção Contactos Isolamento (Tipo 5.5 Inspección de los contactos de
Inspection Extraível) seccionamiento (ejecución seccionable)
5.6 Power Terminals and Busbar Inspection 5.6 Inspecção Terminais e Barras de Potência 5.6 Inspección de las tomas y embarrados
n o t e n o t a s | n o t a s
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Only qualified personnel are allowed to install, Só pessoal qualificado está autorizado a instalar, Las operaciones de instalación, manejo y
operate and maintain all electrical equipment. operar, e manter todo o equipamento eléctrico.. mantenimiento de todos los equipos eléctricos
sólo pueden realizarlas técnicos cualificados.
5-00
223
TESTS EntelliGuard G
5.0
Maintenance
5.0 5.0 5.0
MAINTENANCE, TESTING AND MANUTENÇÃO, TESTE E MANTENIMIENTO, PRUEBAS Y
TROUBLESHOOTING RESOLUÇÃO DE PROBLEMAS RESOLUCIÓN DE PROBLEMAS
1. Inspect the arc splitter plates and sides of the 1. Inspeccione as placas de separação de arco e 1. Examine las placas separadoras y los laterales
mouldings for signs of wear or damage. Replace lados moldados por sinais de desgaste ou de las molduras para detectar signos de
as necessary. estrago. Substitua como necessário. desgaste o deterioro. Realice las sustituciones
necesarias.
5-01
224
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
2. With Circuit Breaker set in it's OFF position: 2. Com o disjuntor colocado na sua posição 2. Con el interruptor en posición Abierto (OFF)
Maintenance
OFF:
-- Check if their is any evidence of fixed arcing -- Verifique se há alguma evidencia de desgaste -- Compruebe si hay alguna evidencia de
contact wear or damage: ou dano nos contactos e arco fixos: desgaste o daño en el contacto parachispas fijo
-- If their is replace with new fixed arcing -- Se há substitua-os com novos contactos de - Si así fuera, reemplácelos por unos nuevos y
contacts and tighten the fixation screws to arco fixos e aperte os parafusos de fixação a apriete los tornillos de fijación a un par de 16Nm
16Nm. 16Nm.
-- Compruebe el par de apriete de los tornillos
-- Check the torque of the moving and fixed arc -- Verifique o aperto dos parafusos dos de los contactos parachispas móviles y fijos (Fig
runner screws (Fig 5.2) by applying a tightening contactos de arco móveis e fixos existentes (Fig 5.2), aplicando un par de apriete de 12Nm
torque of 12Nm. 5.2) apertando com um par de 12Nm. - Si se encuentra algún tornillo suelto, reapriete
Trouble
...-- If any screw is found to be loose re-tighten ...-- Se algum parafuso parecer desapertado, a un par de 16Nm
the screw with a 16Nm torque. reaperte o mesmo com um par de 16Nm.
3. Vuelva a montar la cámara de corte,
3. Re-assemble the arc chamber, tightening 3. Volte a montar as câmaras de extinção, apretando a un par de 12 Nm.
torque 12 Nm. aplicando um par de 12 Nm.
Inspección del mecanismo principal del
Circuit Breaker Main Mechanism Inspection Inspecção do Mecanismo Principal do interruptor automático
-- Check the circuit breaker ON and OFF action Disjuntor -- Compruebe el cierre y la apertura del
both manually and by remote means, if -- Verifique o disjuntor nas acções ON e OFF interruptor automático de forma manual y
appropriate. ambas manualmente e por acção remota, se también remota, si es necesario.
-- Check tripping action by means of the apropriado. -- Compruebe el accionamiento del disparo por
Undervoltage Release, if installed. -- Verifique a acção de disparo por meio da medio de la bobina de mínima tensión, si está
bobina de mínima tensão, se instalada. instalada.
-- Check all indicators for correct function. -- Verifique todos os indicadores se indicam -- Compruebe todos los indicadores para
correctamente. determinar si funcionan correctamente.
-- Check number of operations, if Operations -- Verifique o numero de operações, se o -- Compruebe el número de maniobras, si el
Counter is installed, to the circuit breaker's contador de operações está instalado, na contador de maniobras se encuentra instalado,
specification. especificação do disjuntor. según las especificaciones del interruptor
automático.
5.4 Contact wear Inspection 5.4 Inspecção Desgaste Contactos 5.4 Inspección de desgaste de los
contactos
-- If installed: Check contact wear indicators (see -- Se isntalado: Verifique os indicadores de -- Si está instalado: Compruebe los indicadores
section 4) desgaste de contactos (ver secção 4) de desgaste de los contactos (consulte la
sección 4).
5.5 Isolating Contacts (Drawout Type) 5.5 Inspecção Contactos de 5.5 Inspección de los contactos de
Inspection Isolamento (Tipo Extraível) seccionamiento (ejecución
seccionable)
1. Remove the circuit breaker from the cassette 1. Remova o disjuntor do seu berço e coloque-o 1. Retire el interruptor automático del
housing and place it on a suitable working sobre uma superfície de trabalho apropriada. alojamiento de la cuna y colóquelo sobre una
surface. 2. Inspeccione os contactos traseiros por sinais superficie de trabajo apropiada.
2. Inspect the rear cluster contacts for signs of de sobre aquecimento e desgaste.
overheating and wear. 2. Examine las pinzas de seccionamiento
3. Remova os contactos principais usando os posteriores para comprobar si hay signos de
3. Remove the cluster contacts using the special alicates especiais. sobrecalentamiento y desgaste.
cluster pliers.
4. Limpe os contactos de isolamento e terminais 3. Retire las pinzas de seccionamiento con las
4. Clean the isolating contacts and terminals com um pano macio e limpo para remover tenazas especiales.
with a soft, clean cloth to remove any old grease qualquer sujidade ou limalha.
or dirt. 4. Limpie las pinzas y las tomas con un paño
5. Aplique uma fina camada de graxa de suave y limpio para quitar la grasa o la suciedad
5. Apply a thin film of white paraffin grease parafina branca (classe 8802). acumulada.
(grade 8802).
5. Aplique una fina capa de grasa de parafina
blanca (grado 8802).
5-02
225
TESTS EntelliGuard G
5.6
Maintenance
CAUTION CUIDADO PRECAUCIÓN
PRODUCT DAMAGE DANOS NO PRODUTO DAÑOS EN EL PRODUCTO
Não lubrifique os Contactos Auxiliares, Contactos No lubrique los contactos auxiliare, los contactos
Do not lubricate Auxiliary Switch, Signaling de Sinalização, Bobinas, Motor e Terminais de señalización, las bobinas, el motor ni los
Switches, Coils, Motor and secondary disconnects. Secundários. conectores secundarios.
Failure to comply with these instructions may O incumprimento destas instrucções pode El incumplimiento de estas instrucciones puede
result in product damage. traduzir-se em danos ao produto. traducirse en daños en el producto.
5.6 Power Terminals and Busbar 5.6 Inspecção Terminais de Potência 5.6 Inspección de las tomas y
Inspection e Barras embarrados
1. Inspect insulating parts for cracks. 1. Inspeccione as partes de isolamento e 1. Examine las partes aislantes para determinar
2. Clean dust/dirt with dry cloth. procure por falhas. si están agrietadas.
3. Tighten screws/nuts to proper torque. 2. Limpe o pó/sujidade com um pano seco. 2. Limpie el polvo o la suciedad con un paño
4. Inspect terminal joints for signs of overheating 3. Aperte os parafusos/porcas com o par seco.
and oxidation. apropriado. 3. Apriete los tornillos y las tuercas al par
4. Inspeccione as juntas de terminais e procure apropiado.
por sinais de sobre aquecimento e oxidação. 4. Examine las uniones de las bornas para
detectar signos de sobrecalentamiento y
oxidación.
Ensure all metal-to-metal friction surfaces are Garanta que toda a fricção de superfícies metal Asegúrese de mantener lubricadas todas las
kept lubricated: a metal são mantidas lubrificadas: superficies donde exista fricción metálica:
1. Remove old lubrication and dirt. 1. Remova a sujidade antiga. 1. Elimine la grasa y la suciedad acumuladas.
2. Apply Molecote 4700. 2. Aplique Molecote 4700. 2. Aplique Molecote 4700.
3. Wipe off excess lubrication. 3. Limpe o excesso de lubrificação. 3. Quite la grasa sobrante.
n o t e n o t a s | n o t a s
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
5-03
226
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
5.9 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 5.1 reviews common problems, their possible cause(s) and solution(s). If problems persist please contact our After Sales Service Department.
Table 5.1:
Maintenance
-- Check operational diagram (chapter 1.4) and trip the relevant circuit breaker.
Breaker closes then opens instantaneously. -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Breaker Information Module connector is not inserted.
-- Trip Unit settings are incorrect.
-- Remote Rogowski coil is incorrectly installed.
-- SOLUTION --> -- Insert Breaker Information Module connector to Breaker Information Module.
-- Ensure the protection limits setting matches system loads. Ensure inputs are set to normally closed trip without a signal applied.
-- Re-position Coil.
Motor won’t charge. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Ensure Motor Actuator is installed.
-- SOLUTION --> -- Install Motor Actuator.
DC closing coil or Undervoltage Release won’t operate. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Ensure the correct polarity of the connection to the secondary isolating contacts.
-- SOLUTION --> -- Refer to wiring schematic (see Section 1.3).
Circuit breaker won’t rack into cassette. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Ensure breaker is pushed fully from the maintenance position to DISCONNECTED.
-- Racking drive not in DISCONNECTED position.
-- SOLUTION --> -- Push breaker into DISCONNECTED position.
-- Ensure racking drive is in DISCONNECTED position.
Ground fault does not operate below 40% setting. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Ensure Trip Unit is installed and energized.
-- SOLUTION --> -- Install Trip Unit and energize. See Section 3 for wiring schematic.
Cannot insert racking handle. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Shutter padlocks are installed.
-- Key locks are installed.
-- SOLUTION --> -- Remove padlocks and/or key locks.
Circuit breaker will not go into the DISCONNECTED position. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Mis insertion feature is incorrectly set.
-- Circuit breaker is incorrect for given cassette.
-- SOLUTION --> -- Reset Mis insertion feature.
-- Ensure circuit breaker and cassette go together.
Trip Unit healthy indicator not working. (Fig 2.1) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Ensure Trip Unit, if installed, is energized.
-- Insufficient primary current to power the unit.
-- SOLUTION --> -- Install Trip Unit, if not installed.
-- Trip Unit will power with 40% In single phase, and 20% In 3 phase current.
5-04
227
TESTS EntelliGuard G
TROUBLE
-- Verifique o diagrama Operacional (capítulo 1.4) e dispare o disjuntor.
O disjuntor fecha e depois aber instantaneamente. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Conector do Modulo de Informação do Disjuntor não inserido.
-- Ajustes incorrectos da Unidade de Disparo.
-- Bobina Rogowski Remota está incorrectamente instalada.
-- Solução --> -- Insira o Conector do Modulo de Informação do Disjuntor no Modulo de Informação do Disjuntor.
-- Verifique se os limites das protecções estão de acordo com a instalação. Verifique se as entradas estão programadas para um disparo normal
sem sinal aplicado.
-- Substitua a bobina.
Motor não carrega. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Garanta que o motor está instalado.
-- Solução --> -- Instale o motor.
CC Bobina de Fecho ou Bobina de Mínima Tensão não operam. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Garanta a Polaridade correcta na ligação aos terminais secundários de isolamento.
-- Solução --> -- Rever o esquema de ligações (ver a secção 1.3).
Disjuntor não entra no berço. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Garanta que o disjuntor é empurrado completamente da posição de manutenção para a posição DESLIGADO.
-- Mecanismo de extracção não está na posição DESLIGADO.
-- Solução --> -- Empurre o disjuntor para aposição DESLIGADO.
-- Garanta que o mecanismo de extracção está na posição DESLIGADO.
O defeito à terra não opera abaixo do valor ajustado de 40%. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Garanta que a Unidade de Disparo está instalada e tem energia.
-- Solução --> -- Instale a Unidade de Disparo e alimente-a. Veja a secção 3 para o esquema de ligação.
Não consegue inserir a manivela de extracção. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Estão instalados os cadeados do obturador.
-- Estão instaladas fechaduras.
-- Solução --> -- Remova os cadeados e/ou fechaduras.
Disjuntor não passa à posição DESLIGADO. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- O dispositivo de má inserção está incorrectamente posicionado.
-- O Disjuntor não é o correcto para o berço.
-- Solução --> -- Reponha o dispositivo de má inserção.
-- Garanta que o disjuntor e berço são os correctos.
Não funciona o indicador de Unidade de Disparo Activa. (Fig 2.1) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-- Garanta que a Unidade de Disparo, se instalada, está alimentada.
-- Corrente insuficiente para alimentar a Unidade.
-- Solução --> -- Instale a Unidade de Disparo, se não instalada.
-- Unidade de Disparo só opera a 40%In monofásico, e 20% In 3 trifásico.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5-05
228
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
5-06
229
APPENDIX EntelliGuard G
6.0
6.0 APPENDIX 6.0 APÊNDICE 6.0 APÉNDICE
CONTENT
Content Conteúdo Contenido
6.1 Catalogue number description 6.1 Descrição da referencia 6.1 Referencias de catálogo
n o t e n o t a s | n o t a s
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.0-01
230
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
1st digit 3rd & 4th digit 6th digit 7th digit
CONTENT
A product belonging Nominal current rating Fixed Pattern or Draw out Electrically or Hand
to the EntelliGuard G™ of the product Pattern moving portion and Operated
breaker line Number of Poles
400A 04 Electrical at:
3 Pole Fixed Pattern 4
630A 07 24V DC A
3 pole Draw-out 1
CATALOGUE
25 H
3200A 32 230-240V AC J
4000A 40 277V AC K
5000A 50 380-400V AC M
6400A 64 440V AC N
Manual X
SERVICE
G G 1 3 H 4 X X
** Is supplied with a Push Button for Local Breaker operation (fi ts on breaker front facia)
6.1-00
231
APPENDIX EntelliGuard G
Power Circuit Breaker
Global Catalogue number structure English
-- Codes built in the indicated manner can be used as an alternative ordering method
-- Breaker mounted accessories.
6.1
9th digit 11th digit 13th digit
Shunt Release 2nd Shunt or UVR Release Bell Alarm Switch & Code to be added
Operations Counter
Voltage Rating Code Voltage Rating Shunt UVR
code code Bell Alarm 1 NO A D E F
24V DC A
24V DC A 1 Mechanical Operations Counter B K L M
40-48VDC 48V AC B
CATALOGUE
40-48VDC 48V AC B 3 Bell Alarm 1NO & Mechanical
60V DC D C G H J
Operations counter
60V DC D 4 Ready to C.ose contact 1 NO
110-130V AC-DC E 1
110-130V AC-DC E 5 Power Rated on Secondary terminals
220-240V AC-DC G Ready to C.ose contact 1 NO Signal
220-240V AC-DC G 7 2
250V DC 277V AC H Rated on Secondary terminals
250V DC 277V AC H 8 Ready to C.ose contact 1 NO Signal
380-415V AC K 3
Rated connected through Trip Unit
380-415V AC K W
440V AC L None X X X X
440V AC L Y
Network Interlock 1
1 8 X 2 X
110-130V AC-DC 5
Coil Signaling Contact Power (1 NO on Secondary
220-240V AC-DC 7
250V DC 277V AC 8
380-415V AC W
Close Coil or command close coil
440V AC Y
No other contacts installed
None X
Disconnect) - 1st UVR
*** Each standard breaker or Isolator is normally supplied with 3 NO+3NC Aux.contacts (option 2)
6.1-01
232
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
Factory Installed Defi nes Installed GT type Electronic Trip Unit Defines
prevision to mount instruction
a Key lock on the Basic type Code Functionality Code manual language
breakers GT-E LT, LTDB. ST, STDB 01 English
E
For Ronis or R with Ammeter LT, LTDB. ST, STDB, GF, GFDB 02 German A
Profalux Polish
CATALOGUE
GT-N
with Measurement LT, LTDB. ST, STDB, I, GF, GFDB 10
Optional Communication
LT, LTDB. ST, STDB, I, GF, GFDB
+ ZSI on ST and GF 11
N + Modbus communication
LT, LTDB. ST, STDB, HI, GF, GFDB 04
LT, LTDB. ST, STDB, HI, GF, GFDB
+ ZSI on ST and GF 12
+ Modbus communication
SERVICE
G X H 23 B
233
APPENDIX EntelliGuard G
A product belonging Nominal current rating Number of Poles of the Connection Mode Position Indication
to the EntelliGuard G™ of the product Cassette switches in Cassette
breaker line 1600A 16 3 Pole 2 Set of 1 NO and 1NC
Rear Universal, T
stubs rotatable contacts per Position 2
2000A 20 4 pole 5 U
-Horizontal or
2500A 25 Vertical busbars Set of 2 NO and 2NC
CATALOGUE
contacts per Position 4
3200A 32 Front Flat access F
4000A 40 Rear Horizontal No Switches
H Mounted
6400A 64 busbars X
Rear Vertical
V
busbars
G G 13 H 2 U X X X
Suitable for: Interruption / short-circuit withstand Delivered mounted with Factory Installed
rating of the Breaker used with the breaker or separately** prevision to mount a
Cassette Key lock on the cassette
Mounted with breaker M
Standard Circuit Breaker or For 1 Ronis Key lock R
Icu = Ics Icw Code Delivered as separate
standard Non G R
Automatic type 50kA 50kA S component For 2 Ronis Key locks S
85kA 65kA H For 1 Profalux Key lock P
Circuit Breaker or For 2 Profalux Key locks Q
100kA 85kA M
standard Non Automatic type H
with reduced derating 150kA 100kA L No Lock Prevision mounted X
6.1-03
234
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
Disjuntor de Potência PORTUGUÊS
Catálogo Global estrutura do códigos
-- Códigos criados da maneira indicada podem ser usados como método de encomenda alternativo.
-- O disjuntor e os seus modos de operação. (Manual ou Eléctricos)
800A 08 1 48V CC B
Parte móvel
1000A 10 Fixo, 4 pólos 6 60V CC C
1250A 13 Extraível, 4 pólos 110-130V CC E
3
1600A Parte móvel 250V CC
16 F
2000A 20 48V CA G
2500A 110-130V CA
DIMENSION
25 H
3200A 32 230-240V CA J
4000A 40 277V CA K
5000A 50 380-415V CA M
6400A 64 440V CA N
Manual X
SERVICE
G G 1 3 H 4 X X
Tipo de produto Poder de corte / Intensidade Tensão nominal Bobina de fecho Bobina de fecho
de curta duração standard especial(1)
Disjuntor G
Icu = Ics Icw Código 24V CC A M
Disjuntor com correcção de
H 50kA 50kA S 40-48V CC 48V CA B P
intensidade reduzida
NÃO automático (Interruptor de corte em carga) 65kA 65kA N 60V CC D Q
J
sem prevenção de fecho sobre curto-circuito (MCR) 85kA 65kA H 110-130V CA-CC E R
NÃO automático (Interruptor de corte em carga) 85kA 85kA E
W 220-240V CA-CC G T
com prevenção de fecho sobre curto-circuito (MCR)
100kA 85kA M 250V CC 277V CA H U
NÃO automático (Interruptor de corte em carga)
Valor nominal a 100% sem prevenção de fecho K 100kA 100kA G 380-415V CA K W
sobre curto-circuito (MCR)
150kA 100kA L 440V CA L Y
NÃO automático (Interruptor de corte em carga)
Valor nominal a 100% com prevenção de fecho Z Manual X X
sobre curto-circuito (MCR)
Se o accionamento é eléctrico, juntar 1 bobina de
fecho indicando o código de tensão nominal.
Se é manual, utilizar um X como se indica.
(1) É fornecido com um botão para o funcionamento local (encaixado no frontal do interruptor/disjuntor)
6.1-04
235
APPENDIX EntelliGuard G
Bobina de disparo à emissão de Segunda bobina de disparo à emissão Contacto de sinalização de disp- Código a juntar
tensão de tensão ou bobina de mínima tensão aro e Contador de manobras
Tensão nominal Código Tensão nominal có- UVR Sinalização de disparo 1 NA A D E F
digo code
24V CC A Contador de manobras mecânicas B K L M
24V CC A 1
CATALOGUE
40-48V CC 48V CA B Sinalização de disparo 1 NA e
C G H J
40-48V CC 48V CA C 3 contador de manobras mecânicas
60V CC D Contacto preparado para fecho 1 NA
60V CC D 4 1
110-130V CA-CC E standard em bornes secundários
110-130V CA-CC E 5 Contacto preparado para fecho 1 NA
220-240V CA-CC G 2
baixo nível em bornes secundários
220-240V CA-CC G 7 Contacto preparado para fecho 1 NA
250V CC 277V CA H 3
250V CC 277V CA H 8 baixo nível via unidade de protecção
380-415V CA K
380-415V CA K W Nenhuma X X X X
440V CA L
1 8 X 2 X
220-240V CA-CC
Contacto de sinalização de bobina (1 NA em conector se-
7
Contacto de sinalização de bobina (1 NA em conector
250V CC 277V CA 8
de protecção - 1ª bobina de mínima tensão
380-415V CA W
secundário) - 1ª bobina de mínima tensão
440V CA Y
Não há outros contactos instalados
Nenhuma X
Juntar primeiro a bobina de
mínima tensão utilizando o
código indicado. Se escolhe ‘1’
como 9º dígito, pressupõe-se o
uso de um encravamento de rede
com uma tensão equivalente.
O uso de um X indica que não há
nenhuma bobina instalada. Juntar uma das combinações seleccionadas utilizando um dos códigos que se indicam.
(1) Cada disjuntor ou interruptor de corte em carga standard é fornecido com contactos auxiliares 3NA e 3NF (opção 2)
6.1-05
236
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
Disjuntor de Potência PORTUGUÊS
Catálogo Global estrutura do códigos
GT-N
encravamento por com Medição LT, LTDB. ST, STDB, I, GF, GFDB 10 Italiano
fechadura Comunicação opcional
LT, LTDB. ST, STDB, I, GF, GFDB
+ ZSI em ST e GF 11
N + Comunicação Modbus
LT, LTDB. ST, STDB, HI, GF, GFDB 04
LT, LTDB. ST, STDB, HI, GF, GFDB
+ ZSI em ST e GF 12
+ Comunicação Modbus
SERVICE
G X H 23 B
237
APPENDIX EntelliGuard G
Um produto pertencente Intensidade nominal Número de pólos Modo de ligação Contactos de posição
à linha de disjuntores do produto do berço no berço
EntelliGuard™ 1600A 16 3 pólos 2 Jogo de 1 NA e 1 NF
Tomada traseira uni-
versal, acopladores por posição 2
2000A 20 4 pólos 5 U
em T giratórios (hori-
2500A 25 zontais ou verticais) Jogo de 2 NA e 2 NF
CATALOGUE
por posição 4
3200A 32 Tomadas dianteiras F
4000A 40 Tomadas traseiras Sem contactos
H montados
6400A 64 horizontais
X
Tomadas traseiras
V
verticais
G G 13 H 2 U X X X
Apto para: Poder de corte / Intensidade de curta É entregue montado com o Provisão instalada
duração do disjuntor utilizado com disjuntor ou separado(2) de fábrica para montar
berço (Extraível) um encravamento
Montado com
Disjuntor standard ou M por fechadura no berço
Icu = Ics Icw Código disjuntor
interruptor standard G Para 1 encravamento por
50kA 50kA S É entregue como R
R fechadura Ronis
componente à parte
85kA 65kA H
Disjuntor standard ou Para 2 encravamentos
100kA 85kA M S
interruptor standard com por fechadura Ronis
H
correcção de intensidade 150kA 100kA L Para 1 encravamento por
reduzida P
fechadura Profalux
Para 2 encravamentos
Q
por fechadura Profalux
Sem provisão de
X
fechadura montada
6.1-07
238
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
Interruptor automático de bastidor ESPAÑOL
Estructura numérica del catálogo global
-- Los códigos conformados de la forma que se indica a continuación se pueden utilizar como método alternativo para efectuar pedidos
-- El interruptor automático y su modo de funcionamiento. (Manual o eléctrico)
800A 08 1 48V CC B
Parte móvil
1000A 10 Fijo, 4 polos 6 60V CC C
1250A 13 Seccionable, 4 polos 110-130V CC E
3
1600A Parte móvil 250V CC
16 F
2000A 20 48V CA G
2500A 25 110-130V CA H
DIMENSION
3200A 32 230-240V CA J
4000A 40 277V CA K
5000A 50 380-415V CA M
6400A 64 440V CA N
Manual X
SERVICE
G G 1 3 H 4 X X
(1) Se suministra con un pulsador para el funcionamiento local del interruptor (encajado en el frontal del interruptor)
6.1-08
239
APPENDIX EntelliGuard G
Bobina de disparo a emisión Segunda bobina de disparo a emisión Contacto de señalización de disparo Código a añadir
de tensión de tensión o bobina de mínima tensión y Contador de maniobras
Tensión nominal Código Valores nomina- De De Señalización de disparo 1 NA A D E F
les CA Rating disparo a mínima
24V CC A Contador de maniobras mecánicas B K L M
emisión tensión
CATALOGUE
40-48VDC 48V CA B de tensión código Señalización de disparo 1 NA y conta-
C G H J
código dor de maniobras mecánicas
60V CC D Contacto preparado para cierre 1 NA
24V CC A 1 1
110-130V CA-CC E estándar en bornas secundarias
40-48VDC 48V CA C 3 Contacto preparado para cierre 1 NA
220-240V CA-CC G 2
bajo nivel en bornas secundarias
60V CC D 4
250V CC 277V CA H Contacto preparado para cierre 1 NA
3
110-130V CA-CC E 5 bajo nivel vía unidad de protección
380-415V CA K
220-240V CA-CC G 7 Ninguna X X X X
440V CA L
1 8 X 2 X
60V CC
4 NA/4 NC (contacto estándar) + 4 NA/4 NC (bajo nivel) 8
4
Contacto de señalización de bobina (1 NA en conector
Contacto de señalización de bobina, bajo nivel vía uni-
110-130V CA-CC 5
Contacto de señalización de bobina (1 NA en conector secun-
220-240V CA-CC 7
secundario) - 1ª bobina de mínima tensión
250V CC 277V CA 8
380-415V CA W
No hay otros contactos instalados
440V CA Y
Ninguna X
Añadir primera bobina de
mínima tensión utilizando el
código indicado. Si se escoge ‘1’
como 9º dígito, se presupone el
uso de un enclavamiento de red
con una tensión equivalente.
El uso de una X indica que no hay Añadir una de las combinaciones seleccionadas utilizando uno de los códigos que se indican.
ninguna bobina instalada.
Cada interruptor automático o interruptor en carga estándar se suministra con contactos auxiliares 3NA y 3NC (opción 2)
6.1-09
240
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
Interruptor automático de bastidor ESPAÑOL
Estructura numérica del catálogo global
por cerradu-
con Medición Italiano
ra Kirk LT, LTDB. ST, STDB, I, GF, GFDB 10
Comunicación opcional
Para encla- C LT, LTDB. ST, STDB, I, GF, GFDB
vamiento por + ZSI en ST y GF 11
cerradura de N + Comunicación Modbus
tipo Castell LT, LTDB. ST, STDB, HI, GF, GFDB 04
Sin previsión X LT, LTDB. ST, STDB, HI, GF, GFDB
para encla- + ZSI en ST y GF 12
vamiento por + Comunicación Modbus
cerradura
SERVICE
G X H 23 B
241
APPENDIX EntelliGuard G
Un producto perteneciente Intensidad nominal Número de polos de la Modo de conexión Contactos de posición en
a la línea de interruptores del producto cuna la cuna
automáticos 1600A 16 3 polos 2 Juego de 1 NA y 1
Toma trasera
EntelliGuard™ NC por posición 2
2000A 20 4 polos 5 universal, acopladores
en T giratorios U
2500A 25 (horizontales o Juego de 2 NA y 2
CATALOGUE
NC por posición 4
3200A 32 verticales)
4000A 40 Tomas delanteras F Sin contactos
6400A 64 Tomas traseras montados
H X
horizontales
Tomas traseras
V
verticales
G G 13 H 2 U X X X
Apto para: Poder de corte / Intensidad de corta Se entrega montado con Previsión instalada
duración del interruptor utilizado con interruptor automático o en fábrica para montar un
cuna (Seccionable) por separado(2) enclavamiento por cerradura
Interruptor automático en la cuna
Icu = Ics Icw Código Montado con
estándar o no automático G M Para 1 enclavamiento por
50kA 50kA S interruptor automático R
estándar cerradura Ronis
85kA 65kA Se entrega como
H R
Interruptor automático componente aparte Para 2 enclavamientos
100kA 85kA M S
estándar o no automático por cerradura Ronis
H 150kA 100kA L
estándar con corrección de Para 1 enclavamiento por
intensidad reducida P
cerradura Profalux
Para 2 enclavamientos
Q
por cerradura Profalux
Sin previsión de cerradura
X
montada
6.1-11
242
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
TRIP UNIT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CATALOGUE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMENSION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SERVICE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2-00
243
APPENDIX EntelliGuard G
6.2
Front view 4pole Front view 3pole Side view
Centre Line
of operating Centre Line
panel of operating
423 panel
323 door
B
260 160
Centre Line
348
442
of operating
panel
Centre Line
of operating
213 panel
213
38
DIMENSION
50 91
131.5 131.5 175 14
131.5 131.5
162 261 211
172 162 161 100 to door
443 172 127
343 355
A
Ø4
Door hinge
367
392
219
100
door
183,5
30 74
Left mounting
C
12,5
hole location
Top view 3pole of breaker A 141,5
viewed from front B 283
61 100 100
A
Breaker type DIM “A” DIM “B” minimum DIM “C”
Envelope 1 3 pole 20,0 55,0 0,0
Envelope 1 4 pole 20,0 55,0 -49,5
door
100
Remarks
Standard Connection pads (1) A - 6 mounting holes 0f 9,5 mm
B - Please refer to catalogue
400 - 1600A 400 - 1600A 2000A section D for clearance distances
Type S Types N & H Types S, N & H
20
65 65
18,75 27,5 22 22
50 Ø 12
123
29 15,5 11
25 5
R6.
17
17
13
17
107
35
6.2-01
244
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
Envelope 1 Draw out Pattern / Tamanho 1 Execução Extraível / Tamaño 1 Ejecución seccionable
124
Centre Line
443
Centre Line
of operating
CATALOGUE
of operating
panel panel
235.5
173.5
194
194
53 32 Test
52 Disconnected
131.5 131.5 131.5 131.5 422 Connected
DIMENSION
C
308
12,5 66,5 150 of cassette
SERVICE
of fascia
247
Ø4
267
Door hinge
300
405
150
430
90
Ø 9.6
127,5
58 58
52,5
Left mounting
C
12,5
247
Remarks
90
A A - 6 mounting holes of
C
Ø 9,5mm
58 58
C - Please leave
71.5 100 100
unobstructed;
Required for ventilation
Universal Connection pads Universal Connection pads
D - 1 hole M6 Left & Right
Mounted Horizontally or Vertically Details
for earthing
2 holes
4 holes Ø 12 15
65
Ø 12 15
31 17
123
123
123
43
65
25 30
17.5
84.5
107
111
8
58 R6.5
11
61
11 43 58
61 61
S type N & H type S, N & H type S, N & H type S type - 12mm thick N & H type - 20mm thick
6.2-02
245
APPENDIX EntelliGuard G
6.2
Front view 4pole Front view 3pole Side view
540 410
door
Centre Line Centre Line B
of operating 319 of operating 190
panel panel
348
442
of operating of operating
panel panel
213
213
38
50 91
131.5 131.5 131.5 131.5 175 14
DIMENSION
222 321 222 191
211
234 234
100 to door
566 436
127
355
308
of breaker
12,5 66,5 150
of fascia
A Ø4
Door hinge
door
367
392
219
183,5
30 74
95
25 25 25 Ø 13
10 Remarks
20
17
35
6.2-03
246
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
Envelope 2 Draw out Pattern / Tamanho 2 Execução Extraível / Tamaño 2 Ejecución seccionable
131.5
Centre
Line of
124
Centre
443
operating
panel Line of
operating
CATALOGUE
235.5
panel
173.5
194
194
53 32 Test
52 Disconnected
131.5 131.5
422 Connected
131.5 350 Fully withdrawn
Top view 4pole
DIMENSION
488
Door Cut-out
Centre Line of
operating 293.5
panel
55
31
308
12,5 66,5 150 of cassette
247
267
of fascia
Ø4
SERVICE
Door hinge
90
A
300
405
150
430
58 58
91.5 130 130 130
127,5
52,5
Left mounting
C
12,5
C
247
267
58 58
91.5 130 130
Remarks
123
29 21 21
123
133
10
61
13 25 25 25
107
11
14
A - 6 mounting holes of
84.5
62
64 95 Ø 9,5mm
4 holes
Ø 13
C - Please leave
13
11
100
100
unobstructed;
78
13
11
4 holes Ø 11 4 holes Ø 13
Required for ventilation
D - 1 hole M6 Left & Right
25 25 25
100
100
20
78
78
for earthing
45
4 holes 15
11
10
Ø 11 11 78 90
59
6.2-04
247
APPENDIX EntelliGuard G
Envelope 2 100% rated Draw out Pattern / Tamanho 2 Calibre a 100% Execução Extraível / Tamaño 2 100% Ejecución seccionable con valor nominal al 100%
6.2
Front view 4pole Front view 3pole Side view
443 387 to door
573
Centre Line
237 Centre Line of 237 of operating D
operating panel panel
124
Centre Centre
443
Line of Line of
operating operating
panel panel
236
174
194
194
53 32 Test
52 Disconnected
422
131.5 131.5 131.5 131.5 350 Fully withdrawn
DIMENSION
Top view 4pole
488
Centre Line of
operating 293.5 C Door Cut-out
panel
31
55
308
12,5 66,5 150 of cassette
247
267
of fascia
Ø4
Door hinge
90
A 300
405
150
430
58 58
127,5
92 130 130 130
52,5
Left mounting
C
12,5
358 hole location of
A 141,5
Centre Line of cassette viewed
operating from front B 283
163.5
panel
55
31
C
247
267
58 58
92 130 130
Remarks
earthing
112
100
11
12
11
84
6.2-05
248
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
Envelope 1&2 Alternate Connection Modes / Tamanho 1 e 2 Modos de Ligação Alternativos / Tamaño 1 y 2 - Modos de conexión alternativos
CONTENT
130 Ø 13
100
100
CATALOGUE
20
25 25 25
100
157
157
157
15
12.5
71
70.5
70.5
Details max. 4000A
63
10
DIMENSION
Ø 13
91 95 10
25 25 25
50
34.5 31
10
100
13
12.5
15 Ø 13
130
SERVICE
10
10
10
453
65
65 65
30 30
30
25 .5
25 R6 25
565
453
R6.5 R6.
5
17
17
20
13
76
13
110
96
68
13
12.5
10 12.5
10 12.5 12.5
10 12.5
12.5
566
565
453
65 100 100
22 22 12.5 25 25 25 Ø 13 12.5 25 25 25
10.5
Ø 12
Ø 12
17
20
20
68.5
13
68
96
33
67.5
100.5
6.2-06
249
APPENDIX EntelliGuard G
6.2
Front view 4pole Front view 3pole
945 715
Centre Line of 465 Centre Line 350
operating panel of operating panel
213
213
131.5 131.5
DIMENSION
131.5 131.5 364 348
479 464 376
491
736
966
68.5 115 115 115 115 115 115 115 69 115 115 115 115 115
A A
100
100
door door
6.2-07
250
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
B 308
of breaker
12,5 66,5 150
of fascia
Ø4
CATALOGUE
Door hinge
348
442
367
392
219
183,5
38
30 74
50 91
DIMENSION
12,5
211 hole location
of breaker A 141,5
100 to door
viewed from front B 283
127
355
230
90
20
20
120
60.5
157
123
107
Ø 13
165
25 25 25
35
120
88
Ø 13
14 30 30 18
17
Remarks
6.2-08
251
APPENDIX EntelliGuard G
Envelope 3 Draw out Pattern / Tamanho 3 Execução Extraível / Tamaño 3 Ejecución seccionable
6.2
Front view 4pole Front view 3pole
743
973 Centre Line
of operating 364
Centre Line 479
of operating panel panel
Centre
Centre Line Line of
of operating operating
panel panel
194
194
DIMENSION
131.5 131.5 131.5 131.5
884
654
639.5
524.5
Centre Line 434.5
Centre Line
of operating 244.5 of operating 319.5
C
31
panel panel C
129.5
55
31
247
55
247
267
267
A A
120
120
58 58 58 58
141.5 230 230 230 141.5 230 230
6.2-09
252
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
Envelope 3 Draw out Pattern / Tamanho 3 Execução Extraível / Tamaño 3 Ejecución seccionable
Door hinge
124
443
300
405
150
430
235.5
173.5
127,5
52,5
9,5
DIMENSION
85 Left mounting
C
12,5
32 Test
hole location of
52 Disconnected A 141,5
cassette viewed
454 Connected from front B 283
350 Fully withdrawn
90
55
20
20
100
169.5
157
51
Ø 13
18
104
70.5
25 25 25
68 68
102.5
12.5 25 25 25
18
Ø 13
Remarks
6.2-10
253
APPENDIX EntelliGuard G
IP54 Flange [4.4.10], Time Delay Module UVR [4.1.3], 24 VDC Power Supply [4.5.2]
Corte IP54, Módulo de Atraso UVR, Fonte externa 24V
Marco IP54, Módulo de temporización para bobina de mínima tensión, Fuente de alimentación de 24 V
474
405
295,5
30
386
DIMENSION
22,5
Ø 5,3 mm
4 holes | 4 furos | 4 taladros
54321
External 24 VDC Power Supply
Fonte externa 24V
Fuente de alimentación de 24 V
115
90
2 holes 29 76
Ø 4.5
42
5.15
12 5.75 69.5
67
81
6.2-11
254
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
Rogowski’s Coils [4.4.12], Current Transformers [4.4.14], Door Interlock [4.4.5] and Mounting Brackets [4.4.15].
Rogowski's, Transformadores de Intensidade, Encravamento Porta e Suportes de Montagem
Bobinas Rogowski, Transformadores de intensidad, Enclavamiento de puerta y soportes de montaje en fondo de armario.
Arrow to face
ACB connection
CATALOGUE
Ø IN (min)
110
Ø OU (min)
Fix coil to clamp HT (max)
with cable ties (position
coil centrally on clamp)
IN OU HT .
400A 94 144 24
630A 85 135 30
DIMENSION
58
2000A 87 151 31
3200A 84 154 34
4000A 81 154 57
5000A 85 198 58
6400A 85 210 65
Ø 6,4 mm
4 holes | 4 furos | 4 taladros right hinged left hinged
dobradiça à direita dobradiça à esquerda
bisagra derecha bisagra izquierda
Ø 12.2 Ø 12.2
6.2-12
255
APPENDIX EntelliGuard G
Interlocking with Cable systems, 2 way
Encravamento com sistema de cabos, 2 vias
Sistemas de enclavamiento mecánico por cable, 2 interruptores
6.2
Fixed pattern 2-way cable interlock / Fixed pattern - Front/rear access
2000 max.
Envelope 1-3P=320
Envelope 1-4P=420
Envelope 2-3P=410
Envelope 2-4P=540 55
DIMENSION
140 min.
50 50 30 30
35
Min. bend radius 120 Min. bend radius 120
2000 max.
Envelope 1-3P=343
Envelope 1-4P=443
Envelope 2-3P=443
Envelope 2-4P=573 60
Envelope 3-3P=743
Envelope 3-4P=973
Min.
clearance clearance
below below
cassette cassette
34
34
140 min.
40 30 30
256
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
Interlocking with Cable systems, 3 way
Encravamento com sistema de cabos, 3 vias
Sistemas de enclavamiento mecánico por cable, 3 interruptores
1250 max.
Envelope 1-3P=320
Envelope 1-4P=420
55 Envelope 2-3P=410 55
55
CATALOGUE
Envelope 2-4P=540
Envelope 3-3P=715
Envelope 3-4P=945
1250 max.
Envelope 1-3P=343
Envelope 1-4P=443
Envelope 2-3P=443
Envelope 2-4P=573
Envelope 3-3P=743
Envelope 3-4P=973
140 min. clearence
30
6.2-14
257
APPENDIX EntelliGuard G
DIMENSION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2-15
258
EntelliGuard G INTRO BREAKER LOCKS ACCESSORIES TESTS APPENDIX
n o t e n o t a s | n o t a s
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTENT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CATALOGUE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMENSION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SERVICE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2-16
259
APPENDIX EntelliGuard G
GE Energy
Industrial Solutions
6.3
Service for Low Voltage Equipment Serviço para equipamento de baixa tensão Servicio para equipos de baja tensión
You have invested in low voltage equipment and Investiu num equipamento de baixa tensão e confia Ha adquirido un equipo de baja tensión y confía en
rely on your switchgear to protect your critical no nosso disjuntor para proteger os seus processos la aparamenta del mismo para proteger sus
business processes. GE Energy offers you quality críticos de negócio. GE Energy oferece-lhe serviços procesos empresariales críticos. GE Energy le ofrece
services to ensure and prolong the usability of this de qualidade e prolongo uso para este servicios de calidad para asegurar y prolongar la
equipment. Preventive maintenance is a important equipamento. A manutenção preventiva é uma utilización de este equipo. El mantenimiento
activity which helps you find equipment problems actividade importante que ajuda a encontrar preventivo es una actividad importante que le
before they cause failure, leaving you with fewer problemas antes que estes causem falhas, que ayuda a detectar los problemas en el equipo antes
repairs and less unscheduled downtime. possam deixar o sistema sem funcionar perante de que surjan fallos, lo que se traduce en menos
Whether you are a large corporation with multiple uma manutenção não prevista. reparaciones y paradas no programadas.
sites or a small business owner with a single Quer seja uma grande corporação com vários sites Tanto si trabaja en una gran empresa con
location, GE will enable you to have a constant OU proprietário de uma pequena empresa com um numerosos centros de producción como si es un
supply of services to keep your business up and único local, a GE irá permitir-lhe ter uma fonte pequeño empresario con una única oficina, GE
running. constante de serviços para manter seu negócio em pone a su disposición una gama constante de
funcionamento. servicios para que su negocio no pare.
You can rely on GE’s Field Service teams for all your Você pode contar com equipas de campo da GE Puede confiar toda su infraestructura eléctrica a los
electrical infrastructure, as we are at home in all para todas as suas infra-estruturas eléctricas, uma equipos de servicio técnico de GE, familiarizados
industries, specialized in solutions and services for vez que estamos em casa em todas as indústrias, con todo tipo de sectores, especializados en
your electrical infrastructure. especializadas em soluções e serviços para sua soluciones y servicios para su infraestructura
Extent the life of your Power Equipment. infra-estrutura eléctrica. eléctrica.
Estenda a vida de seu equipamento de Potência. Amplíe la vida de sus equipo de suministro eléctrico.
GE offers a comprehensive portfolio of power A GE oferece uma gama abrangente de serviços de GE ofrece una completa gama de servicios
quality services including: qualidade de energia, incluindo: eléctricos de calidad, que incluye:
On-Site & Emergency Services No local e Serviços de Emergência Servicios de asistencia In-situ y emergencias
• 24/7 Emergency assistance ! 24/7 Assistência de emergência ! Asistencia de emergencia continuada
• Installation ! Instalação las 24 horas del día, 7 días a la semana
• Commissioning, start-up ! Comissionamento, arranque ! Instalación
SERVICE
• Cleaning, lubrication ! Limpeza, lubrificação ! Puesta en servicio, arranque
• Repair, upgrade, retrofit solutions ! Reparação, aumento, mudanças ! Limpieza, lubricación
• Assessment, inspection, audits ! Avaliação, Inspecção, auditorias ! Soluciones de reparación, actualización,
• Thermo graphic imaging ! Imagem gráfica térmica adaptación
Parts and Repairs Peças e reparações ! Evaluación, inspección, auditoría
• Spare parts supply ! Substituições ! Imágenes termográficas
• Repair services ! Serviços de reparação Componentes y reparaciones
• Retrofit kits for legacy products ! Kits de aplicação a produtos antigos ! Suministro de recambios
• Product replacement / return ! A substituição do produto e / ou ! Servicios de reparación
• Equipment rentals regresso ! Kits de ada ptaciónpara
Contractual Services ! Aluguer de equipamentos productos antiguos
• Maintenance service contracts Serviços contratuais ! Sustitución / devolución de productos
• Preventive maintenance ! Os contratos de serviços de ! Alquiler de equipos
• Resident technical services manutenção Servicios contractuales
• Upgrade management ! A manutenção preventiva ! Contratos de servicio de mantenimiento
• Project & site management ! Serviços técnicos residentes ! Mantenimiento preventivo
• Consultancy and audits ! Melhoria de gestão ! Servicios técnicos internos
! Projecto e gestão de sites ! Gestión de actualizaciones
Global Services ! Consultoria e auditorias ! Gestión de proyectos y centros
We are at home in all industries, specialized in ! Consultoría y auditorías
solutions and services for your electrical Serviços Globais Servicios globales
infrastructure, including: Estamos em casa em todas as indústrias, Estamos familiarizados con todos los sectores,
especializadas em soluções e serviços para sua especializados en soluciones y servicios para su
Air Circuit Breaker infra-estrutura eléctrica, incluindo: infraestructura eléctrica, incluidos los siguientes:
• EntelliGuard G
! M-Pact I, M-Pact Plus Disjuntores Abertos Interruptor automático de bastidor
• ME07, MEG, MEY ! EntelliGuard G, M-Pact I, M-Pact Plus ! EntelliGuard G, M-Pact I, M-Pact Plus
• ME... 06 ! ME07, MEG, MEY ! ME07, MEG, MEY
• ME00/05, M series ! ME... 06 ! ME... 06
• Spectronic SP/SPE, L, S ! ME00/05, M series ! ME00/05, serie M
• GERAPID S/SE, Gerapid ! Spectronic SP/SPE, L, S ! Spectronic SP/SPE, L, S
! GERAPID S/SE, Gerapid ! GERAPID S/SE, Gerapid
Power Distribution and MCC Distribuição de Potência e MCC Distribución de potencia y CCM
• SEK / SEV32 Power Center + MCC ! SEK / SEV32 Centro de Potência + MCC ! SEK / SEV32 Power Centre + MCC
• SEN Plus, SE Digital Power ! SEN Plus, SE Digital Power ! SEN Plus, SE Digital Power
• SV18, SV 90 ! SV18, SV 90 ! SV18, SV 90
• Vynconstruct, OK Center ! Vynconstruct, OK Centre ! Vynconstruct, OK Centre
• System4 ! System4 ! System4
• CCM ! CCM ! CCM
For further information and contract details please Para mais informações e detalhes de contacto por Para más información y detalles sobre contratos,
contact your local sales representative or After favour contacte com o seu representante de póngase en contacto con su representante
Sales & Service team (next page). vendas local ou equipa de pós venda e serviço comercial local o con el equipo del servicio de post-
(próxima página). venta (página siguiente).
GE imagination at work
6.3
260
GE Energy
Industrial Solutions
France | França | Francia Middle East | Oriente Mèdio | Medio Oriente Spain | Espanha | España
GE Power Controls France General Electric International, Inc GE Power Controls Spain
1572, route de Guise 1101, City Tower 2, Sheikh Zayed Road C/ Miño, 122 - Naves E-F
F-02100 Harly (Saint-Quentin) P.O. Box 11549 Dubai E-08223 Terrassa (Barcelona)
T +33 3 23 50 70 66 United Arab Emirates T +34 93 736 5700
F +33 3 23 50 70 65 T +9714 313 1202 F +34 93 788 24 03
service.f@ge.com service.int@ge.com service.e@ge.com
Germany | Alemanha | Alemania Netherlands | Paises Baixos | Países Bajos UK | Reino Unido | Reino Unido
GE Industrial Solutions GE Power Controls GE Power Controls UK
Berliner Platz 2-6 Parallelweg 10 Foundry Lane
D-24534 Neumünster NL-7482 CA Haaksbergen Widnes
T +49 180 443 7 378 T +31 53 573 0 444 T +44 151 420 9 636
F +49 4321 201 490 F +31 53 573 0355 F +44 151 420 9 634
service.g@ge.com service.nl@ge.com service.uk@ge.com
More information on GE Energy: Mais informações sobre a GE Energy: Más información sobre GE Energy:
www.ge.com/energy www.ge.com/energy www.ge.com/energy
GE imagination at work
261
Pos : 2 /D okumentati on allgemein/Ei nband/Ei nband H andbuch - Fronts eite 2010 - mit Doc Variabl en (Standar d) @ 9\mod_1285229289866_0.doc x @ 64941 @ @ 1
Manual
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
ETHERNET Controller
750-880(/xxx-xxx)
PLC - ETHERNET Programmable Fieldbus Controller,
32-bit CPU, multitasking
Version 2.2.0
Pos : 3 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine M odul e)/Hinweise z ur Dokumentation/Impres sum für Standardhandbüc her - allg. Angaben, Ansc hriften, Tel efonnummer n und E-Mail-Adres sen @ 3\mod_1219151118203_21.doc x @ 21060 @ @ 1
262
© 2015 by WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG
All rights reserved.
Hansastraße 27
D-32423 Minden
E-Mail: info@wago.com
Web: http://www.wago.com
Technical Support
E-Mail: support@wago.com
Every conceivable measure has been taken to ensure the accuracy and
completeness of this documentation. However, as errors can never be fully
excluded, we always appreciate any information or suggestions for improving the
documentation.
E-Mail: documentation@wago.com
We wish to point out that the software and hardware terms as well as the
trademarks of companies used and/or mentioned in the present manual are
generally protected by trademark or patent.
=== Ende der Liste für T extmar ke Ei nband_vorne ===
263
Pos : 5 /D okumentati on allgemein/Verzeic hnisse/Inhalts verz eichnis - Ü berschrift oG und Verzei chnis @ 3\mod_1219151230875_21.doc x @ 21063 @ @ 1
Table of Contents
1 Notes about this Documentation ............................................................... 12
1.1 Validity of this Documentation ............................................................... 12
1.2 Copyright................................................................................................. 13
1.3 Symbols ................................................................................................... 14
1.4 Number Notation ..................................................................................... 16
1.5 Font Conventions .................................................................................... 16
2 Important Notes ......................................................................................... 17
2.1 Legal Bases ............................................................................................. 17
2.1.1 Subject to Changes ............................................................................. 17
2.1.2 Personnel Qualifications ..................................................................... 17
2.1.3 Use of the WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 in Compliance with Underlying
Provisions ........................................................................................... 17
2.1.4 Technical Condition of Specified Devices ......................................... 18
2.2 Safety Advice (Precautions) .................................................................... 19
2.3 Special Use Conditions for ETHERNET Devices .................................. 21
3 System Description..................................................................................... 22
3.1 Manufacturing Number ........................................................................... 23
3.2 Hardware Address (MAC ID) ................................................................. 23
3.3 Component Update.................................................................................. 24
3.4 Storage, Assembly and Transport ........................................................... 24
3.5 Assembly Guidelines/Standards.............................................................. 24
3.6 Power Supply .......................................................................................... 25
3.6.1 Isolation .............................................................................................. 25
3.6.2 System Supply .................................................................................... 26
3.6.2.1 Connection ..................................................................................... 26
3.6.2.2 Dimensioning ................................................................................. 27
3.6.3 Field Supply........................................................................................ 30
3.6.3.1 Connection ..................................................................................... 30
3.6.3.2 Fusing ............................................................................................ 32
3.6.4 Supplementary Power Supply Regulations ........................................ 35
3.6.5 Supply Example.................................................................................. 36
3.6.6 Power Supply Unit ............................................................................. 38
3.7 Grounding ............................................................................................... 39
3.7.1 Grounding the DIN Rail ..................................................................... 39
3.7.1.1 Framework Assembly .................................................................... 39
3.7.1.2 Insulated Assembly ........................................................................ 39
3.7.2 Grounding Function............................................................................ 40
3.8 Shielding ................................................................................................. 41
3.8.1 General ............................................................................................... 41
3.8.2 Bus Cables .......................................................................................... 41
3.8.3 Signal Lines ........................................................................................ 42
3.8.4 WAGO Shield Connecting System .................................................... 42
4 Device Description ..................................................................................... 43
4.1 View ........................................................................................................ 46
4.2 Connectors............................................................................................... 48
264
4.2.1 Device Supply .................................................................................... 48
4.2.2 Fieldbus Connection ........................................................................... 48
4.3 Display Elements .................................................................................... 50
4.4 Operating Elements ................................................................................. 52
4.4.1 Service Interface ................................................................................. 52
4.4.2 Mode Selector Switch......................................................................... 53
4.4.3 Address Selection Switch ................................................................... 55
4.4.4 Memory Card Slot .............................................................................. 55
4.4.4.1 Inserting a Memory Card ............................................................... 56
4.4.4.2 Removing the Memory Card ......................................................... 57
4.5 Technical Data ........................................................................................ 58
4.5.1 Device Data ........................................................................................ 58
4.5.2 System Data ........................................................................................ 58
4.5.3 Supply ................................................................................................. 59
4.5.4 Fieldbus MODBUS/TCP .................................................................... 59
4.5.5 Accessories ......................................................................................... 59
4.5.6 Connection Type ................................................................................ 59
4.5.7 Climatic Environmental Conditions ................................................... 60
4.5.8 Mechanical Strength ........................................................................... 61
4.6 Approvals ................................................................................................ 62
4.7 Standards and Guidelines ........................................................................ 65
5 Mounting..................................................................................................... 66
5.1 Installation Position ................................................................................. 66
5.2 Overall Configuration ............................................................................. 66
5.3 Mounting onto Carrier Rail ..................................................................... 68
5.3.1 Carrier Rail Properties ........................................................................ 68
5.3.2 WAGO DIN Rail ................................................................................ 69
5.4 Spacing .................................................................................................... 69
5.5 Mounting Sequence ................................................................................. 70
5.6 Inserting and Removing Devices ............................................................ 71
5.6.1 Inserting the Fieldbus Coupler/Controller .......................................... 72
5.6.2 Removing the Fieldbus Coupler/Controller ....................................... 72
5.6.3 Inserting the I/O Module .................................................................... 73
5.6.4 Removing the I/O Module .................................................................. 74
6 Connect Devices ......................................................................................... 75
6.1 Data Contacts/Internal Bus ..................................................................... 75
6.2 Power Contacts/Field Supply .................................................................. 76
6.3 Connecting a Conductor to the CAGE CLAMP® ................................... 77
7 Function Description ................................................................................. 78
7.1 Operating System .................................................................................... 78
7.1.1 Run-up ................................................................................................ 78
7.1.2 PFC Cycle ........................................................................................... 78
7.2 Process Data Architecture ....................................................................... 80
7.2.1 Basic Structure.................................................................................... 80
7.2.2 Example of an Input Process Image ................................................... 82
7.2.3 Example of an Output Data Process Image ........................................ 83
7.2.4 Process Data MODBUS/TCP and EtherNet/IP .................................. 84
7.3 Data Exchange ........................................................................................ 85
265
7.3.1 Memory Areas .................................................................................... 87
7.3.2 Addressing .......................................................................................... 90
7.3.2.1 Addressing of I/O Modules ........................................................... 91
7.3.2.2 IEC-61131-3 Address Areas .......................................................... 92
7.3.2.3 Absolute Addressing ...................................................................... 93
7.3.3 Data Exchange between MODBUS/TCP Master and I/O Modules ... 95
7.3.4 Data Exchange between EtherNet/IP Master and I/O Modules ......... 97
7.3.5 Data Exchange between PLC Function (CPU) and I/O Modules ...... 98
7.3.6 Data Exchange between Master and PLC Function (CPU)................ 99
7.3.6.1 Example of MODBUS/TCP Master and PLC Function (CPU) .... 99
7.3.7 Application Example ........................................................................ 101
7.4 Memory Card Function ......................................................................... 102
7.4.1 Project Copying and Automatic System Start .................................. 104
7.4.2 Back-up Function (Saving Device Settings on the Memory Card) .. 106
7.4.3 Restore Function (Loading of Device Settings from the Memory Card)107
7.4.4 Inserting a Memory Card During Operation .................................... 110
7.4.5 Removing the Memory Card During Operation ............................... 111
7.4.6 Saving WAGO-I/O-PRO project to Memory Card .......................... 112
7.4.7 FTP Network Access to the File System of the Memory Card ........ 115
7.4.8 Access to Web Pages in the File System of the Memory Card ........ 115
7.4.9 Directory Structure ........................................................................... 116
8 Commissioning ......................................................................................... 117
8.1 Connecting Client PC and Fieldbus Nodes ........................................... 118
8.2 Allocating the IP Address to the Fieldbus Node ................................... 118
8.2.1 Assigning IP Address via Address Selection Switch ....................... 119
8.2.2 Assigning IP Address via DHCP...................................................... 121
8.2.2.1 Enable DHCP............................................................................... 121
8.2.2.2 Assigning the IP address permanently by option “use IP from
EEPROM“ ................................................................................... 122
8.2.3 Assigning IP Address via WAGO-ETHERNET-Settings ................ 124
8.2.4 Assigning the IP Address with a PLC program................................ 126
8.2.5 Assigning the IP Address with a BootP Server ................................ 126
8.2.5.1 Note MAC ID .............................................................................. 127
8.2.5.2 Determining IP addresses ............................................................ 129
8.2.5.3 Assigning the IP address .............................................................. 130
8.2.5.4 Assigning the IP address permanently by option “use IP from
EEPROM“ ................................................................................... 130
8.2.5.5 Reasons for Failed IP Address Assignment................................. 132
8.3 Testing the Function of the Fieldbus Node ........................................... 133
8.4 Preparing the Flash File System ............................................................ 135
8.5 Synchronizing the Real-Time Clock ..................................................... 137
8.6 Restoring Factory Settings .................................................................... 140
9 Programming the PFC Using WAGO-I/O-PRO ................................... 141
9.1 Configuring the Fieldbus Controller using the I/O Configurator.......... 144
9.1.1 Configuration using the “EA-config.xml” File ................................ 147
9.2 ETHERNET Libraries for WAGO-I/O-PRO ........................................ 149
9.3 Functional Restrictions and Limits ....................................................... 151
9.4 General Information about IEC Tasks .................................................. 153
9.4.1 IEC Task Sequence........................................................................... 155
266
9.4.2 Overview of Most Important Task Priorities.................................... 155
9.5 System Events ....................................................................................... 157
9.5.1 Enabling/Disabling System Events .................................................. 157
9.6 Transfer the IEC program to the controller ........................................... 159
9.6.1 Transfer via Serial Service Port ........................................................ 160
9.6.2 Transfer via Fieldbus and ETHERNET ........................................... 163
10 Configuring via the Web-Based Management System (WBM) ........... 165
10.1 Information ............................................................................................ 167
10.2 Ethernet ................................................................................................. 169
10.3 TCP/IP ................................................................................................... 172
10.4 Port ........................................................................................................ 174
10.5 SNMP .................................................................................................... 176
10.5.1 SNMP V1/V2c.................................................................................. 177
10.5.2 SNMP V3 ......................................................................................... 179
10.6 Watchdog .............................................................................................. 181
10.7 Clock ..................................................................................................... 183
10.8 Security ................................................................................................. 185
10.9 MODBUS .............................................................................................. 188
10.10 EtherNet/IP ............................................................................................ 190
10.11 PLC Info ................................................................................................ 192
10.12 PLC ....................................................................................................... 193
10.13 Features ................................................................................................. 198
10.14 I/O Config ............................................................................................. 199
10.15 Disk Info................................................................................................ 202
10.16 SD Card ................................................................................................. 203
10.17 Backup & Restore ................................................................................. 205
10.18 WebVisu ................................................................................................ 208
11 Diagnostics ................................................................................................ 210
11.1 LED Signaling ....................................................................................... 210
11.1.1 Evaluating Fieldbus Status ............................................................... 211
11.1.2 Evaluating Node Status – I/O LED (Blink Code Table) .................. 212
11.1.2.1 USR LED ..................................................................................... 222
11.1.3 Evaluating Memory Card Status ...................................................... 222
11.1.4 Evaluating Power Supply Status ...................................................... 222
11.2 Fault Behavior ....................................................................................... 223
11.2.1 Loss of Fieldbus ............................................................................... 223
11.2.2 Internal Data Bus Failure.................................................................. 225
12 Fieldbus Communication ........................................................................ 226
12.1 Implemented Protocols.......................................................................... 226
12.1.1 Communication Protocols ................................................................ 226
12.1.1.1 IP (Internet Protocol) ................................................................... 226
12.1.1.2 TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) ......................................... 231
12.1.1.3 UDP (User Datagram Protocol) ................................................... 231
12.1.2 Configuration and Diagnostics Protocols ......................................... 231
12.1.2.1 BootP (Bootstrap Protocol).......................................................... 232
12.1.2.2 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) .......................... 234
12.1.2.3 HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol)........................................... 236
12.1.2.4 DNS (Domain Name Systems) .................................................... 237
267
12.1.2.5 SNTP-Client (Simple Network Time Protocol) .......................... 237
12.1.2.6 FTP-Server (File Transfer Protocol) ............................................ 237
12.1.2.7 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) ........................ 238
12.1.2.7.1 MIB II Description .................................................................. 239
12.1.2.7.2 Traps........................................................................................ 240
12.1.3 Application Protocols ....................................................................... 241
12.2 MODBUS Functions ............................................................................. 242
12.2.1 General ............................................................................................. 242
12.2.2 Use of the MODBUS Functions ....................................................... 245
12.2.3 Description of the MODBUS Functions .......................................... 246
12.2.3.1 Function Code FC1 (Read Coils) ................................................ 247
12.2.3.2 Function Code FC2 (Read Discrete Inputs)................................. 249
12.2.3.3 Function Code FC3 (Read Multiple Registers) ........................... 251
12.2.3.4 Function Code FC4 (Read Input Registers)................................. 252
12.2.3.5 Function Code FC5 (Write Coil) ................................................. 253
12.2.3.6 Function Code FC6 (Write Single Register) ............................... 254
12.2.3.7 Function Code FC11 (Get Comm Event Counter) ...................... 255
12.2.3.8 Function Code FC15 (Write Multiple Coils) ............................... 256
12.2.3.9 Function Code FC16 (Write Multiple Registers) ........................ 258
12.2.3.10 Function Code FC22 (Mask Write Register) ............................... 259
12.2.3.11 Function Code FC23 (Read/Write Multiple Registers) ............... 260
12.2.4 MODBUS Register Mapping ........................................................... 262
12.2.5 MODBUS Registers ......................................................................... 265
12.2.5.1 Accessing Register Values .......................................................... 266
12.2.5.2 Watchdog Registers ..................................................................... 266
12.2.5.3 Diagnostic Registers .................................................................... 272
12.2.5.4 Configuration Registers ............................................................... 273
12.2.5.5 Firmware Information Registers .................................................. 278
12.2.5.6 Constant Registers ....................................................................... 280
12.3 EtherNet/IP (Ethernet/Industrial Protocol) ........................................... 282
12.3.1 General ............................................................................................. 282
12.3.2 Protocol overview in the OSI model ................................................ 283
12.3.3 Characteristics of the EtherNet/IP Protocol Software ...................... 284
12.3.4 EDS File ........................................................................................... 284
12.3.5 Object Model .................................................................................... 285
12.3.5.1 General ......................................................................................... 285
12.3.5.2 Class Overview ............................................................................ 286
12.3.5.3 Explanation of the Table Headings in the Object Descriptions ... 288
12.3.5.4 Identity (01 hex) ............................................................................ 288
12.3.5.5 Message Router (02 hex) ............................................................... 290
12.3.5.6 Assembly Object (04 hex) ............................................................. 291
12.3.5.7 Connection (05 hex) ....................................................................... 295
12.3.5.8 Connection Manager (06 hex)........................................................ 295
12.3.5.9 Port Class (F4 hex) ........................................................................ 296
12.3.5.10 TCP/IP Interface (F5 hex) ............................................................. 298
12.3.5.11 Ethernet Link (F6 hex)................................................................... 299
12.3.5.12 Coupler/Controller Configuration (64 hex) ................................... 305
12.3.5.13 Discrete Input Point (65 hex) ......................................................... 308
12.3.5.14 Discrete Input Point Extended 1 (69 hex)...................................... 308
12.3.5.15 Discrete Input Point Extended 2 (6D hex)..................................... 309
268
12.3.5.16 Discrete Input Point Extended 3 (71 hex)...................................... 310
12.3.5.17 Discrete Output Point (66 hex) ...................................................... 310
12.3.5.18 Discrete Output Point Extended 1 (6A hex) .................................. 311
12.3.5.19 Discrete Output Point Extended 2 (6E hex) .................................. 312
12.3.5.20 Discrete Output Point Extended 3 (72 hex) ................................... 312
12.3.5.21 Analog Input Point (67 hex) .......................................................... 313
12.3.5.22 Analog Input Point Extended 1 (6B hex) ...................................... 314
12.3.5.23 Analog Input Point Extended 2 (6F hex) ....................................... 314
12.3.5.24 Analog Input Point Extended 3 (73 hex) ....................................... 315
12.3.5.25 Analog Output Point (68 hex) ....................................................... 316
12.3.5.26 Analog Output Point Extended 1 (6C hex) .................................... 317
12.3.5.27 Analog Output Point Extended 2 (70 hex) .................................... 317
12.3.5.28 Analog Output Point Extended 3 (74 hex) .................................... 318
12.3.5.29 Module Configuration (80 hex) ..................................................... 319
12.3.5.30 Module Configuration Extended (81 hex) ..................................... 320
12.3.5.31 Input Fieldbus Variable USINT (A0 hex) ..................................... 321
12.3.5.32 Input Fieldbus Variable USINT Extended 1 (A1 hex) .................. 322
12.3.5.33 Input Fieldbus Variable USINT Extended 2 (A2 hex) .................. 323
12.3.5.34 Output Fieldbus Variable USINT (A3 hex) .................................. 324
12.3.5.35 Output Fieldbus Variable USINT Extended 1 (A4 hex) ............... 325
12.3.5.36 Output Fieldbus Variable USINT Extended 2 (A5 hex) ............... 326
12.3.5.37 Input Fieldbus Variable UINT (A6 hex) ....................................... 327
12.3.5.38 Input Fieldbus Variable UINT Extended 1 (A7 hex) .................... 328
12.3.5.39 Output Fieldbus Variable UINT (A8 hex) ..................................... 329
12.3.5.40 Output Fieldbus Variable UINT Extended 1 (A9 hex).................. 330
12.3.5.41 Input Fieldbus Variable UDINT (AA hex) .................................... 331
12.3.5.42 Input Fieldbus Variable UDINT Offset (AB hex) ......................... 332
12.3.5.43 Output Fieldbus Variable UDINT (AC hex) ................................. 333
12.3.5.44 Output Fieldbus Variable UDINT Offset (AD hex) ...................... 334
13 I/O Modules .............................................................................................. 335
13.1 Overview ............................................................................................... 335
13.2 Process Data Architecture for MODBUS/TCP ..................................... 336
13.2.1 Digital Input Modules....................................................................... 337
13.2.1.1 1 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics ...................... 337
13.2.1.2 2 Channel Digital Input Modules ................................................ 337
13.2.1.3 2 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics ...................... 337
13.2.1.4 2 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics and Output
Process Data................................................................................. 338
13.2.1.5 4 Channel Digital Input Modules ................................................ 338
13.2.1.6 8 Channel Digital Input Modules ................................................ 338
13.2.1.7 8 Channel Digital Input Module PTC with Diagnostics and Output
Process Data................................................................................. 339
13.2.1.8 16 Channel Digital Input Modules .............................................. 339
13.2.2 Digital Output Modules .................................................................... 340
13.2.2.1 1 Channel Digital Output Module with Input Process Data ........ 340
13.2.2.2 2 Channel Digital Output Modules .............................................. 340
13.2.2.3 2 Channel Digital Input Modules with Diagnostics and Input
Process Data................................................................................. 341
13.2.2.4 4 Channel Digital Output Modules .............................................. 342
269
13.2.2.5 4 Channel Digital Output Modules with Diagnostics and Input
Process Data................................................................................. 342
13.2.2.6 8 Channel Digital Output Module ............................................... 342
13.2.2.7 8 Channel Digital Output Modules with Diagnostics and Input
Process Data................................................................................. 343
13.2.2.8 16 Channel Digital Output Modules ............................................ 343
13.2.2.9 8 Channel Digital Input/Output Modules .................................... 344
13.2.3 Analog Input Modules ...................................................................... 345
13.2.3.1 1 Channel Analog Input Modules ................................................ 345
13.2.3.2 2 Channel Analog Input Modules ................................................ 345
13.2.3.3 4 Channel Analog Input Modules ................................................ 346
13.2.3.4 3-Phase Power Measurement Module ......................................... 347
13.2.3.5 8 Channel Analog Input Modules ................................................ 348
13.2.4 Analog Output Modules ................................................................... 349
13.2.4.1 2 Channel Analog Output Modules ............................................. 349
13.2.4.2 4 Channel Analog Output Modules ............................................. 349
13.2.4.3 8 Channel Analog Output Modules ............................................. 350
13.2.5 Specialty Modules ............................................................................ 351
13.2.5.1 Counter Modules ......................................................................... 351
13.2.5.2 Pulse Width Modules ................................................................... 353
13.2.5.3 Serial Interface Modules with alternative Data Format ............... 353
13.2.5.4 Serial Interface Modules with Standard Data Format ................. 354
13.2.5.5 Data Exchange Module................................................................ 354
13.2.5.6 SSI Transmitter Interface Modules .............................................. 354
13.2.5.7 Incremental Encoder Interface Modules ...................................... 355
13.2.5.8 DC-Drive Controller .................................................................... 357
13.2.5.9 Stepper Controller ........................................................................ 358
13.2.5.10 RTC Module ................................................................................ 359
13.2.5.11 DALI/DSI Master Module ........................................................... 359
13.2.5.12 DALI Multi-Master Module ........................................................ 360
13.2.5.13 LON® FTT Module...................................................................... 362
13.2.5.14 EnOcean Radio Receiver ............................................................. 362
13.2.5.15 MP Bus Master Module ............................................................... 362
13.2.5.16 Bluetooth® RF-Transceiver .......................................................... 363
13.2.5.17 Vibration Velocity/Bearing Condition Monitoring VIB I/O ....... 364
13.2.5.18 KNX/EIB/TP1 Module ................................................................ 365
13.2.5.19 AS-interface Master Module ....................................................... 366
13.2.6 System Modules ............................................................................... 367
13.2.6.1 System Modules with Diagnostics ............................................... 367
13.2.6.2 Binary Space Module .................................................................. 367
13.3 Process Data Architecture for EtherNet/IP ........................................... 368
13.3.1 Digital Input Modules....................................................................... 369
13.3.1.1 1 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics ...................... 369
13.3.1.2 2 Channel Digital Input Modules ................................................ 369
13.3.1.3 2 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics ...................... 370
13.3.1.4 2 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics and Output
Process Data................................................................................. 370
13.3.1.5 4 Channel Digital Input Modules ................................................ 371
13.3.1.6 8 Channel Digital Input Modules ................................................ 371
13.3.1.7 16 Channel Digital Input Modules .............................................. 371
270
13.3.2 Digital Output Modules .................................................................... 372
13.3.2.1 1 Channel Digital Output Module with Input Process Data ........ 372
13.3.2.2 2 Channel Digital Output Modules .............................................. 373
13.3.2.3 2 Channel Digital Input Modules with Diagnostics and Input
Process Data................................................................................. 373
13.3.2.4 4 Channel Digital Output Modules .............................................. 374
13.3.2.5 4 Channel Digital Output Modules with Diagnostics and Input
Process Data................................................................................. 374
13.3.2.6 8 Channel Digital Output Module ............................................... 375
13.3.2.7 8 Channel Digital Output Modules with Diagnostics and Input
Process Data................................................................................. 375
13.3.2.8 16 Channel Digital Output Modules ............................................ 376
13.3.2.9 8 Channel Digital Input/Output Modules .................................... 376
13.3.3 Analog Input Modules ...................................................................... 377
13.3.3.1 1 Channel Analog Input Modules ................................................ 377
13.3.3.2 2 Channel Analog Input Modules ................................................ 378
13.3.3.3 4 Channel Analog Input Modules ................................................ 378
13.3.3.4 4 Channel Analog Input Modules for RTD’s .............................. 378
13.3.3.5 3-Phase Power Measurement Module ......................................... 378
13.3.3.6 8 Channel Analog Input Modules ................................................ 379
13.3.4 Analog Output Modules ................................................................... 379
13.3.4.1 2 Channel Analog Output Modules ............................................. 380
13.3.4.2 4 Channel Analog Output Modules ............................................. 380
13.3.4.3 8 Channel Analog Output Modules ............................................. 381
13.3.5 Specialty Modules ............................................................................ 381
13.3.5.1 Counter Modules ......................................................................... 381
13.3.5.2 Pulse Width Modules ................................................................... 383
13.3.5.3 Serial Interface Modules with alternative Data Format ............... 384
13.3.5.4 Serial Interface Modules with Standard Data Format ................. 384
13.3.5.5 Data Exchange Module................................................................ 385
13.3.5.6 SSI Transmitter Interface Modules .............................................. 385
13.3.5.7 Incremental Encoder Interface Modules ...................................... 386
13.3.5.8 DC-Drive Controller .................................................................... 388
13.3.5.9 Steppercontroller.......................................................................... 389
13.3.5.10 RTC Module ................................................................................ 390
13.3.5.11 DALI/DSI Master Module ........................................................... 391
13.3.5.12 EnOcean Radio Receiver ............................................................. 391
13.3.5.13 MP Bus Master Module ............................................................... 392
13.3.5.14 Bluetooth® RF-Transceiver .......................................................... 392
13.3.5.15 Vibration Velocity/Bearing Condition Monitoring VIB I/O ....... 393
13.3.5.16 AS-interface Master Module ....................................................... 394
13.3.6 System Modules ............................................................................... 395
13.3.6.1 System Modules with Diagnostics ............................................... 395
13.3.6.2 Binary Space Module .................................................................. 395
14 Application Examples .............................................................................. 396
14.1 Test of MODBUS protocol and fieldbus nodes .................................... 396
14.2 Visualization and Control using SCADA Software .............................. 396
15 Use in Hazardous Environments ............................................................ 399
15.1 Marking Configuration Examples ......................................................... 400
271
15.1.1 Marking for Europe According to ATEX and IEC-Ex .................... 400
15.1.2 Marking for America According to NEC 500 .................................. 405
15.2 Installation Regulations ......................................................................... 406
15.2.1 Special Conditions for Safe Use (ATEX Certificate TÜV 07 ATEX
554086 X) ......................................................................................... 407
15.2.2 Special Conditions for Safe Use (ATEX Certificate TÜV 12 ATEX
106032 X) ......................................................................................... 408
15.2.3 Special Conditions for Safe Use (IEC-Ex Certificate TUN 09.0001 X)409
15.2.4 Special Conditions for Safe Use (IEC-Ex Certificate IECEx TUN
12.0039 X) ........................................................................................ 410
15.2.5 Special Conditions for Safe Use According to ANSI/ISA 12.12.01 411
16 Appendix ................................................................................................... 412
16.1 MIB II Groups ....................................................................................... 412
16.1.1 System Group ................................................................................... 412
16.1.2 Interface Group ................................................................................. 413
16.1.3 IP Group ........................................................................................... 415
16.1.4 IpRoute Table Group ........................................................................ 416
16.1.5 ICMP Group ..................................................................................... 417
16.1.6 TCP Group........................................................................................ 418
16.1.7 UDP Group ....................................................................................... 419
16.1.8 SNMP Group .................................................................................... 420
16.2 WAGO MIB Groups ............................................................................. 421
16.2.1 Company Group ............................................................................... 421
16.2.2 Product Group .................................................................................. 421
16.2.3 Versions Group ................................................................................. 422
16.2.4 Real-Time Clock Group ................................................................... 423
16.2.5 Ethernet Group ................................................................................. 424
16.2.6 Actual Error Group ........................................................................... 424
16.2.7 PLC Project Group ........................................................................... 425
16.2.8 Http Group ........................................................................................ 426
16.2.9 Ftp Group.......................................................................................... 426
16.2.10 Sntp Group........................................................................................ 427
16.2.11 Snmp Group...................................................................................... 427
16.2.12 Snmp Trap String Group .................................................................. 429
16.2.13 Snmp User Trap String Group .......................................................... 430
16.2.14 Plc Connection Group ...................................................................... 430
16.2.15 Modbus Group .................................................................................. 431
16.2.16 Ethernet IP Group ............................................................................. 431
16.2.17 Process Image Group ........................................................................ 432
16.2.18 Plc Data Group ................................................................................. 433
List of Figures .................................................................................................... 434
List of Tables ...................................................................................................... 437
272
Pos : 7 /D okumentati on allgemein/Gliederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hsel--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
Pos : 8 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine M odul e)/Übersc hriften für all e Serien/Hi nweis e zur D okumentati on/Hinweise z u dies er D okumentation - Ü berschrift 1 @ 4\mod_1237987661750_21.doc x @ 29029 @ 1 @ 1
Tabelle 1: Variations
Oder number/
Designation
Variation
750-880 ETHERNET Controller
750-880/025-000 ETHERNET Controller/T
(Extended operating temperature range: -20 °C ... +60 °C)
750-880/025-001 ETHERNET Controller Telecontrol/T
(Extended operating temperature range: -20 °C ... +60 °C)
750-880/025-002 ETHERNET Controller Telecontrol ECO/T
(Extended operating temperature range: -20 °C ... +60 °C)
Pos : 13 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Hi nweis e zur D okumentati on/Hinweise/Hinweis: Gültig keit der Angaben für aufg elistete Varianten @ 9\mod_1281520778141_21.doc x @ 63085 @ @ 1
Pos : 15.1 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Module)/Hi nweis e zur D okumentati on/Urhebersc hutz ausführlich @ 4\mod_1235565145234_21.doc x @ 27691 @ 2 @ 1
273
1.2 Copyright
This Manual, including all figures and illustrations, is copyright-protected. Any
further use of this Manual by third parties that violate pertinent copyright
provisions is prohibited. Reproduction, translation, electronic and phototechnical
filing/archiving (e.g., photocopying) as well as any amendments require the
written consent of WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG, Minden, Germany.
Non-observance will involve the right to assert damage claims.
Pos : 15.2 /Dokumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/---Seitenwechs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
274
Pos : 15.3 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Module)/Ü bers chriften für alle Serien/Hinweis e z ur Dokumentation/Symbol e - Ü bersc hrift 2 @ 13\mod_1351068042408_21.doc x @ 105270 @ 2 @ 1
1.3 Symbols
Pos : 15.4.1 /All e Serien ( Allgemei ne Module)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Sicherheits- und sons tige Hinweis e/Gefahr/Gefahr: _War nung vor Personenschäden allgemei n_ - Erl äuter ung @ 13\mod_1343309450020_21.doc x @ 101029 @ @ 1
Personal Injury!
Indicates a high-risk, imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
Pos : 15.4.2 /All e Serien ( Allgemei ne Module)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Sicherheits- und sons tige Hinweis e/Gefahr/Gefahr: _War nung vor Personenschäden durc h elektrisc hen Strom_ - Erläuterung @ 13\mod_1343309694914_21.doc x @ 101030 @ @ 1
Personal Injury!
Indicates a moderate-risk, potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious injury.
Pos : 15.4.4 /All e Serien ( Allgemei ne Module)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Sicherheits- und sons tige Hinweis e/Vorsic ht/Vorsicht: _War nung vor Pers onensc häden allgemein_ - Erläuterung @ 13\mod_1343310028762_21.doc x @ 101038 @ @ 1
Personal Injury!
Indicates a low-risk, potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may
result in minor or moderate injury.
Pos : 15.4.5 /All e Serien ( Allgemei ne Module)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Sicherheits- und sons tige Hinweis e/Achtung/Achtung: _War nung vor Sac hsc häden allgemein_ - Erläuterung @ 13\mod_1343310134623_21.doc x @ 101041 @ @ 1
Damage to Property!
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in
damage to property.
Pos : 15.4.6 /All e Serien ( Allgemei ne Module)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Sicherheits- und sons tige Hinweis e/Achtung/Achtung: _War nung vor Sac hsc häden durc h elektr ostatis che Aufladung_ - Erläuterung @ 13\mod_1343310227702_21.doc x @ 101044 @ @ 1
Important Note!
Indicates a potential malfunction which, if not avoided, however, will not result in
damage to property.
Pos : 15.4.8 /All e Serien ( Allgemei ne Module)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Sicherheits- und sons tige Hinweis e/Infor mation/Infor mation: _Weiter e Infor mation allgemei n_ - Erl äuter ung @ 13\mod_1343310439814_21.doc x @ 101051 @ @ 1
275
Additional Information:
Refers to additional information which is not an integral part of this
documentation (e.g., the Internet).
Pos : 15.5 /Dokumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/---Seitenwechs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
276
Pos : 15.6 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Module)/Hi nweis e zur D okumentati on/Zahlens ysteme @ 3\mod_1221059454015_21.doc x @ 21711 @ 2 @ 1
Pos : 15.7 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Module)/Hi nweis e zur D okumentati on/Sc hriftkonventi onen @ 3\mod_1221059521437_21.doc x @ 21714 @ 2 @ 1
277
Pos : 17 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Wichtige Erläuterungen/Wichtige Erläuter ungen - Übersc hrift 1 @ 4\mod_1241428899156_21.doc x @ 32170 @ 1 @ 1
2 Important Notes
Pos : 18.1 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Dokumente) ( Allgemei ne Module)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Wic htige Erläuterungen - Einl eitung @ 3\mod_1221059818031_21.doc x @ 21717 @ @ 1
All changes to the coupler or controller should always be carried out by qualified
personnel with sufficient skills in PLC programming.
Pos : 18.5 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Bes timmungsgemäß e Verwendung Bes ti mmungsgemäße Verwendung 750-xxxx - Ü berschrift 3 und Inhal t @ 3\mod_1224064151234_21.doc x @ 24070 @ 3 @ 1
The devices have been developed for use in an environment that meets the IP20
protection class criteria. Protection against finger injury and solid impurities up to
12.5 mm diameter is assured; protection against water damage is not ensured.
Unless otherwise specified, operation of the devices in wet and dusty
environments is prohibited.
278
Appropriate housing (per 94/9/EG) is required when operating the WAGO-I/O-
SYSTEM 750 in hazardous environments. Please note that a prototype test
certificate must be obtained that confirms the correct installation of the system in
a housing or switch cabinet.
Pos : 18.6 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Dokumente) ( Allgemei ne Module)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/T ec hnis cher Z ustand der Geräte - Übersc hrift 3 und Inhalt @ 3\mod_1221060446109_21.doc x @ 21723 @ 3 @ 1
Please send your request for modified and new hardware or software
configurations directly to WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG.
Pos : 18.7 /Dokumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/---Seitenwechs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
279
Pos : 18.8 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Module)/Ü bers chriften für alle Serien/Wichtige Erläuter ungenSic her hei tshi nweis e - Übersc hrift 2 @ 6\mod_1260180299987_21.doc x @ 46724 @ 2 @ 1
For installing and operating purposes of the relevant device to your system the
following safety precautions shall be observed:
Pos : 18.10.1 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/Wichtige Erläuter ungen/Sic herheits hinweise/Gefahr /Gefahr: Nicht an Geräten unter Spannung ar beiten! @ 6\mod_1260180365327_21.doc x @ 46727 @ @ 1
Pos : 18.10.4 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/Wichtige Erläuter ungen/Sic herheits hinweise/Gefahr /Gefahr: Auf normg erec hten Ansc hluss ac hten! @ 6\mod_1260180753479_21.doc x @ 46739 @ @ 1
Pos : 18.11 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/Wichtige Erläuterungen/Sic herheits hinweise/Achtung/Ac htung: Nic ht i n T elekommuni kati ons netz en ei ns etz en! (Z usatz RJ- 45) @ 3\mod_1224065187468_21.doc x @ 24076 @ @ 1
280
Clean only with permitted materials!
Clean soiled contacts using oil-free compressed air or with ethyl alcohol and
leather cloths.
Pos : 18.12.4 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/Wichtige Erläuter ungen/Sic herheits hinweise/Ac htung/Ac htung: Kei n Kontakts pray verwenden! @ 6\mod_1260181290808_21.doc x @ 46755 @ @ 1
281
Pos : 20 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Spezi elle Einsatzbesti mmung en für ETH ERN ET-Ger äte @ 12\mod_1336642945500_21.doc x @ 94792 @ 2 @ 1
• Change the default passwords before first use! This will reduce the risk of
unauthorized access to your system.
• Regularly change the passwords used! This will reduce the risk of
unauthorized access to your system.
• Regularly perform threat analyses. You can check whether the measures
taken meet your security requirements.
282
Pos : 22.1 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Module)/Ü bers chriften für alle Serien/Systembesc hrei bungSystembesc hrei bung - Ü bersc hrift 1 @ 3\mod_1231491805015_21.doc x @ 25850 @ 1 @ 1
3 System Description
Pos : 22.2 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Systembesc hrei bung/Ger ät und Sys tem/Systembesc hrei bung - Aufbau Fel dbus knoten @ 3\mod_1231492904937_21.doc x @ 25867 @ @ 1
The extended ECO fieldbus couplers contain the fieldbus interface, electronics
and a power supply terminal. The fieldbus interface forms the physical interface
to the relevant fieldbus. The electronics process the data of the bus modules and
make it available for the fieldbus communication. The 24 V system supply and the
24 V field supply are fed in via the integrated power supply terminal.
I/O modules for diverse digital and analog I/O signals as well as special functions
can be connected to the fieldbus coupler/controller. The communication between
the fieldbus coupler/controller and the I/O modules is carried out via an internal
bus.
283
Pos : 22.6 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Systembesc hrei bung/Ger ät und Sys tem/Fertig ungs nummer @ 3\mod_1225444612218_21.doc x @ 24889 @ 2 @ 1
Manufacturing number
01 03 01 02 03 -B060606
Calendar Year Software Hardware Firmware Internal
week version version loader number
version
Figure 3: Example of a Manufacturing Number
The manufacturing number consists of the production week and year, the software
version (if available), the hardware version of the component, the firmware loader
(if available) and further internal information for WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH
& Co. KG.
Pos : 22.7 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Systembesc hrei bung/Ger ät und Sys tem/Har dwar e-Adress e (M AC-ID) @ 7\mod_1270708464299_21.doc x @ 54960 @ 2 @ 1
As part of the labeling on the right side of this component, the MAC ID is printed
in the block diagram of the fieldbus coupler/controller.
In addition, the MAC ID is located on the paper strip with two self-adhesive peel-
off strips on the left side of the fieldbus coupler/controller.
The MAC ID has a fixed length of 6 bytes (48 bits) which are presented
hexadecimal. The first three bytes identify the manufacturer (e.g. 00:30 DE for
WAGO). The second 3 bytes comprise the unique serial number of the hardware.
Pos : 22.8 /Dokumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/---Seitenwechs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
284
Pos : 22.9 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Systembesc hrei bung/Ger ät und Sys tem/Komponenten-Update-M atri x @ 3\mod_1231757422359_21.doc x @ 25928 @ 2 @ 1
This matrix makes columns available for altogether three updates to the entry of
the current update data, like production order number (NO; starting from calendar
week 13/2004), date stamp (DS), software version (SW), hardware version (HW)
and the firmware loader version (FWL, if available).
If the update of a component took place, the current version data are registered
into the columns of the matrix.
Additionally with the update of a fieldbus coupler or controller also the cover of
the configuration and programming interface of the fieldbus coupler or controller
is imprinted with the current production order number.
When assembling or repacking the components, the contacts must not be soiled or
damaged. The components must be stored and transported in appropriate
containers/packaging. Thereby, the ESD information is to be regarded.
Pos : 22.11 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Systembesc hrei bung/Gerät und System/Aufbaurichtli nien und N or men @ 3\mod_1231311929250_21.doc x @ 25820 @ 2 @ 1
285
Pos : 22.13.1 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/Sys tembesc hrei bung/Vers orgung/Spannungsvers orgung - Ü berschrift 2 @ 3\mod_1232950078953_21.doc x @ 26680 @ 2 @ 1
3.6.1 Isolation
Within the fieldbus node, there are three electrically isolated potentials:
286
Pos : 22.13.5 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/Sys tembesc hrei bung/Vers orgung/Systemversorgung - Ü bersc hrift 3 @ 3\mod_1232950096265_21.doc x @ 26748 @ 3 @ 1
3.6.2.1 Connection
Pos : 22.13.7 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/Sys tembesc hrei bung/Vers orgung/Systemversorgung - Ans chl uss - Sys temvers orgung ( Standar d + er wei terter ECO) @ 3\mod_1232950104031_21.doc x @ 26776 @ @ 1
Figure 5: System Supply via Fieldbus Coupler/Controller (left) and via Internal System Supply
Module (right)
Table 4: Legend for Figure “System Supply via Fieldbus Coupler/Controller (left) and via Internal
System Supply Module (right)”
Position Description
1 System supply DC 24 V (-25 % … +30 %)
2 System supply 0 V
Pos : 22.13.8 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/Sys tembesc hrei bung/Vers orgung/Systemversorgung - Ans chl uss - Di e eing espeiste 24 V-Gleic hs pannung versorgt... @ 3\mod_1232950097328_21.doc x @ 26756 @ @ 1
287
Figure 6: System Voltage for Standard Couplers/Controllers and Extended ECO Couplers
Pos : 22.13.10 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Systembes chr eibung/Versorgung/Systemvers orgung - Ansc hlus s - Hi nweis : Gl eichz. R üc ks etzen aller Vers orgungsmodul e @ 3\mod_1232950097906_21.doc x @ 26760 @ @ 1
Pos : 22.13.11 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Systembes chr eibung/Versorgung/Systemvers orgung - Ausl egung @ 3\mod_1232950104812_21.doc x @ 26780 @ 4 @ 1
3.6.2.2 Dimensioning
Recommendation
A stable power supply cannot always be assumed. Therefore, you should use
regulated power supplies to ensure the quality of the supply voltage.
Table 5: Alignment
Internal current Current consumption via system voltage (5 V for electronics
consumption*) of I/O modules and fieldbus coupler/controller).
Total current Available current for the I/O modules. Provided by the bus
for I/O modules*) power supply unit. See fieldbus coupler/controller and
internal system supply module
*)
See current catalog, manuals, Internet
288
Pos : 22.13.13 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Systembes chr eibung/Versorgung/Beis piel: @ 3\mod_1232630417843_21.doc x @ 26605 @ @ 1
Example:
Pos : 22.13.14 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Systembes chr eibung/Versorgung/Systemvers orgung - Ausl egung - Beispi el 1 (er weiterter ECO) @ 3\mod_1232950106250_21.doc x @ 26788 @ @ 1
The internal current consumption is indicated in the technical data for each bus
terminal. In order to determine the total requirement, add together the values of all
I/O modules in the node.
Please note the aggregate current for I/O modules. It may be necessary to
supply potential!
When the sum of the internal current consumption for the I/O modules exceeds
their aggregate current, you must use a supply module with bus power supply.
Install it before the position where the permissible aggregate current would be
exceeded.
Pos : 22.13.16 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Systembes chr eibung/Versorgung/Beis piel: @ 3\mod_1232630417843_21.doc x @ 26605 @ @ 1
Example:
Pos : 22.13.17 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Systembes chr eibung/Versorgung/Systemvers orgung - Ausl egung - Beispi el 2 (er weiterter ECO) @ 3\mod_1232950108359_21.doc x @ 26799 @ @ 1
A node with the example coupler, which is described above, consists of:
20 relay modules (750-517) and 10 digital input modules (750-405).
The example coupler can only provide 1620 mA (see previous example) for the
I/O modules. This value is given in the associated data sheet. Consequently, an
internal system supply module with bus power supply (750-613), e. g. in the
middle of the node, should be added.
Pos : 22.13.18 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Systembes chr eibung/Versorgung/Systemvers orgung - Ausl egung - Berec hnung Ei ngangsstrom @ 3\mod_1232950109984_21.doc x @ 26808 @ @ 1
Recommendation
Utilize the smartDESIGNER feature WAGO ProServe® software to configure
fieldbus node assembly. You can test the configuration via the integrated
plausibility check.
The maximum input current of the 24 V system supply is 500 mA. The exact
electrical consumption (I(V)) can be determined with the following formulas:
289
Fieldbus coupler or controller
I(5 V) total = Sum of all the internal current consumption of the connected
I/O modules + internal current consumption of the fieldbus
coupler/controller
Internal system supply module
I(5 V) total = Sum of all the internal current consumption of the connected
I/O modules at internal system supply module
5V I(5 V) total
Input current I(24 V) = ×
Pos : 22.13.19 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Systembes chr eibung/Versorgung/Systemvers orgung - Ausl egung - n= 0,87 (87% N etz teil wir kungsgrad bei 24 V) @ 3\mod_1232950112718_21.doc x @ 26824 @ @ 1
24 V η
η = 0.87
(87 % Efficiency of the power supply at nominal load 24 V)
Pos : 22.13.20 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Systembes chr eibung/Versorgung/Systemvers orgung - Ausl egung - Hi nweis: Bei Test der Str omaufnahme Ausg äng e akti vi eren @ 3\mod_1232950110750_21.doc x @ 26812 @ @ 1
290
Pos : 22.13.22 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Systembes chr eibung/Versorgung/F eldversorgung - Ü bersc hrift 3 @ 3\mod_1232950080953_21.doc x @ 26688 @ 3 @ 1
3.6.3.1 Connection
Sensors and actuators can be directly connected to the relevant channel of the I/O
module in 1, 2, 3 or 4 conductor connection technology. The I/O module supplies
power to the sensors and actuators. The input and output drivers of some I/O
modules require the field side supply voltage.
Pos : 22.13.24 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Systembes chr eibung/Versorgung/F eldversorgung - Ans chl uss - Ei nspeis ung fel dsei tig (Standard + er weiterter ECO) @ 3\mod_1232950087703_21.doc x @ 26712 @ @ 1
The fieldbus coupler/controller provides field side power (DC 24 V). In this case
it is a passive power supply without protection equipment.
Pos : 22.13.25 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Systembes chr eibung/Versorgung/F eldversorgung - Ans chl uss - Potentialgruppen mit Eins peisekl emme @ 3\mod_1232950090437_21.doc x @ 26720 @ @ 1
Power supply modules with or without fuse holder and diagnostic capability are
available for the power supply of other field potentials (DC 24 V, AC/DC 0 …
230 V, AC 120 V, AC 230 V). The power supply modules can also be used to set
up various potential groups. The connections are connected in pairs to a power
contact.
Pos : 22.13.26 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Systembes chr eibung/Versorgung/F eldversorgung - Ans chl uss - Bild: F el dvers orgung (Standard + er weiterter ECO) @ 3\mod_1232950085156_21.doc x @ 26704 @ @ 1
Figure 7: Field Supply for Standard Couplers/Controllers and Extended ECO Couplers
Pos : 22.13.27 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Systembes chr eibung/Versorgung/F eldversorgung - Leg ende z u Abbildung "F el dvers orgung für Standard-F eldbus k/F el dvers orgung - Legende zu Abbil dung "F eldversorgung für Standard-Fel dbus k/-contr oller u er w EC O-F" @ 16\mod_1375693993330_21.doc x @ 127730 @ @ 1
Table 6: Legend for Figure “Field Supply for Standard Couplers/Controllers and Extended ECO
Couplers”
Field supply
1 24 V (-15 % / +20 %)
2 0V
3 Optional ground potential
Power jumper contacts
4 Potential distribution to adjacent I/O modules
Pos : 22.13.28 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Systembes chr eibung/Versorgung/F eldversorgung - Ans chl uss - Weiterl eitung Vers orgungsspg., Strombel astung 10 A, neue Eins peisekl emme @ 8\mod_1279805441785_21.doc x @ 60845 @ @ 1
The field-side power supply is automatically derived from the power jumper
contacts when snapping an I/O module.
The current load of the power contacts must not exceed 10 A on a continual basis.
291
By inserting an additional power supply module, the field supply via the power
contacts is disrupted. From there a new power supply occurs which may also
contain a new voltage potential.
Pos : 22.13.29 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Systembes chr eibung/Versorgung/F eldversorgung - Ans chl uss - 2 Hi nweise: Potential neu ei ns peis en + Dis tanz kl emme @ 3\mod_1232950091343_21.doc x @ 26724 @ @ 1
Re-establish the ground connection when the connection to the power jumper
contacts is disrupted!
Some I/O modules have no or very few power contacts (depending on the I/O
function). Due to this, the passing through of the relevant potential is disrupted. If
you require a field supply via power jumper contacts for subsequent I/O modules,
then you have to use a power supply module.
Note the data sheets of the I/O modules.
292
Pos : 22.13.31 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Systembes chr eibung/Versorgung/F eldversorgung - Absic herung @ 3\mod_1232950081500_21.doc x @ 26692 @ 4 @ 1
3.6.3.2 Fusing
Internal fusing of the field supply is possible for various field voltages via an
appropriate power supply module.
In order to insert or change a fuse, or to switch off the voltage in succeeding I/O
modules, the fuse holder may be pulled out. In order to do this, use a screwdriver
for example, to reach into one of the slits (one on both sides) and pull out the
holder.
293
Figure 9: Removing the Fuse Carrier
After changing the fuse, the fuse carrier is pushed back into its original position.
294
Alternatively, fusing can be done externally. The fuse modules of the WAGO
series 281 and 282 are suitable for this purpose.
Figure 14: Fuse Modules with Pivotable Fuse Carrier, Series 281
Figure 15: Fuse Modules with Pivotable Fuse Carrier, Series 2002
Pos : 22.13.32 /D okumentation allgemein/Gliederungselemente/---Sei tenwechsel--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
295
Pos : 22.13.33 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Systembes chr eibung/Versorgung/Ergänz ende Eins peisungs vors chriften (Standar d) @ 3\mod_1232950080218_21.doc x @ 26684 @ 3 @ 1
Filter modules for 24 V supply are required for the certified operation of the
system.
Therefore, the following power supply concept must be absolutely complied with.
296
Pos : 22.13.35 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Systembes chr eibung/Versorgung/Vers orgungs beis piel - Übersc hrift + Hinweis @ 3\mod_1232949833531_21.doc x @ 26670 @ 3 @ 1
297
Table 9: Legend for Figure “Supply Example for Fieldbus Coupler/Controller”
Pos. Description
1 Power Supply on coupler via external Supply Module
2 Power Supply with optional ground
3 Internal System Supply Module
4 Separation module recommended
5 Supply Module passive
6 Supply Module with fuse carrier/diagnostics
298
Pos : 22.13.39 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Systembes chr eibung/Versorgung/Netzger äte @ 3\mod_1232950093484_21.doc x @ 26728 @ 3 @ 1
Recommendation
A stable power supply cannot always be assumed everywhere. Therefore, you
should use regulated power supplies to ensure the quality of the supply voltage
(see also table “WAGO power supply units”).
For brief voltage dips, a buffer (200 µF per 1 A load current) must be provided.
The power demand must be determined individually depending on the entry point
of the field supply. All loads through field devices and I/O modules must be taken
into account. The field supply also impacts the I/O modules because the input and
output drivers of some I/O modules require the voltage of the field supply.
299
Pos : 22.13.41 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Systembes chr eibung/Versorgung/Er dung @ 3\mod_1231246555687_21.doc x @ 25802 @ 23443 @ 1
3.7 Grounding
3.7.1 Grounding the DIN Rail
3.7.1.1 Framework Assembly
When setting up the framework, the carrier rail must be screwed together with the
electrically conducting cabinet or housing frame. The framework or the housing
must be grounded. The electrical connection is established via the screw. Thus,
the carrier rail is grounded.
Recommendation
The optimal setup is a metallic assembly plate with grounding connection which
is electrically conductive linked to the carrier rail.
The separate grounding of the carrier rail can be easily set up with the aid of the
WAGO ground wire terminals.
300
3.7.2 Grounding Function
The grounding function increases the resistance against electro-magnetic
interferences. Some components in the I/O system have a carrier rail contact that
dissipates electro-magnetic interferences to the carrier rail.
The bottom CAGE CLAMP® connectors of the supply modules enable optional
connection of a field-side functional ground. This potential is made available to
the I/O module arranged on the right through the spring-loaded contact of the
three power contacts. Some I/O modules are equipped with a knife-edge contact
that taps this potential. This forms a potential group with regard to functional
ground with the I/O module arranged on the left.
Pos : 22.13.42 /D okumentation allgemein/Gliederungselemente/---Sei tenwechsel--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
301
Pos : 22.13.43 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Systembes chr eibung/Versorgung/Schir mung @ 3\mod_1231251994828_21.doc x @ 25813 @ 23333 @ 1
3.8 Shielding
3.8.1 General
Use of shielded cables reduces electromagnetic interference and thus increases
signal quality. Measurement errors, data transmission errors and interference due
to excessive voltage can be prevented.
302
3.8.3 Signal Lines
I/O modules for analog signals and some interface I/O modules are equipped with
shield clamps.
303
Pos : 24 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Gerätebesc hreibung/Gerätebeschr eibung - Übersc hrift 1 @ 3\mod_1233756084656_21.doc x @ 27096 @ 1 @ 1
4 Device Description
Pos : 25.1 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Ei nlei tung/F eldbus koppl er/-c ontroller/Einl eitender Text/D er programmier bare F eldbusc ontroller xy ( kurz: PFC) kombi nier t di e... ( 841,842,871,873, 881) @ 6\mod_1255500548718_21.doc x @ 42643 @ @ 1
This controller can be used for applications in machine and plant construction as
well as in the process industry and building technology.
Pos : 25.3 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Ei nlei tung/Anwendung/F BK/PFC /Informati on: Ei ns atz 750- xxx T elec ontrol im Bereic h der Fer nwir ktechni k (IEC 60870 und IEC61850) 872 @ 20\mod_1410856588114_21.doc x @ 163521 @ @ 1
The two Ethernet interfaces and the integrated switch make possible the wiring of
the fieldbus in line topology. Thus additional infrastructure elements such as
switches or hubs can be void. Both interfaces support Autonegotiation and Auto-
MDI (X).
With the DIP switch the last byte of the IP address, as well as the assignment of
the IP address (DHCP, BootP, firm setting) can be given.
Pos : 25.5 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Ei nlei tung/F eldbus koppl er/-c ontroller/Einl eitender Text/In dem F eldbusc ontr oller werden s ämtlic he Ei ngangssig..(806,829,830,831,841,842,871,872,873,881,882) @ 6\mod_1255502020734_21.doc x @ 42662 @ @ 1
In the fieldbus controller, all input signals from the sensors are combined. After
connecting the ETHERNET TCP/IP fieldbus controller, the fieldbus controller
determines which I/O modules are on the node and creates a local process image
from these. Analog and specialty module data is sent via words and/or bytes;
digital data is grouped bit-by-bit.
Pos : 25.6 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Ei nlei tung/F eldbus koppl er/-c ontroller/Einl eitender Text/Hi nweis : Ger ätespezifis cher Hinweis für den EC O-Fer nwirkcontr oller @ 12\mod_1339155349976_21.doc x @ 96754 @ @ 1
Pos : 25.7 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Ei nlei tung/F eldbus koppl er/-c ontroller/Einl eitender Text/D as l okale Prozes sabbild wird in ei nen Ein- u. A.. ( 330,341/2/6,829,830,841,842,871,872,878,881,882) @ 6\mod_1255502296859_21.doc x @ 42666 @ @ 1
The local process image is divided into two data zones containing the data
received and the data to be sent.
Pos : 25.8 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Ei nlei tung/F eldbus koppl er/-c ontroller/Einl eitender Text/Di e D aten der analog en Bus kl emmen werden in der R eih.. (330,806,829,830,841,842,871,872,873,881,882) @ 6\mod_1255502752640_21.doc x @ 42676 @ @ 1
304
The data of the analog modules is mapped first into the process image. The
modules are mapped in the order of their physical position after the controller.
Pos : 25.9 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Ei nlei tung/F eldbus koppl er/-c ontroller/Einl eitender Text/Di e Bits der digitalen Bus kl emmen wer den z u Worten zus .. ( 829,830,841,842,871,872,873,881,882) @ 6\mod_1255503166453_21.doc x @ 42682 @ @ 1
The bits of the digital modules are combined into words and then mapped after the
analog ones in the process image. If the number of digital I/Os is greater than 16
bits, the Fieldbus Controller automatically begins a new word.
Pos : 25.10 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Gerätebeschr eibung/Ei nleitung/Fel dbus koppl er/-contr oller/Einl eitender T ext/Entspr echend der IEC 61131- 3-Pr ogr. erfolgt die Bear b... (806,829,830,841,842,871,872,873,881,882) @ 6\mod_1255503498781_21.doc x @ 42693 @ @ 1
According to IEC 61131-3 programming, data processing occurs in the PFC. The
process results can be output directly on sensors/actuators or transmitted via
fieldbus to the higher-order controller.
Pos : 25.11 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Gerätebeschr eibung/Ei nleitung/Fel dbus koppl er/-contr oller/Einl eitender T ext/Die Fel dbus ansc h. best. aus 2 Ports (RJ-45). Ei n i m PFC integ. Ethernet- Sw (330,831,881) @ 7\mod_1273679028172_21.doc x @ 56480 @ @ 1
• 10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX
• Autonegotiation
• Auto-MDI(X)
Pos : 25.12 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Gerätebeschr eibung/Ei nleitung/Fel dbus koppl er/-contr oller/Einl eitender T ext/Die Ers tell ung des Appli kationspr ogramms erfolgt mit WAGO-I/O- PRO gem ( 806, 831, 842, 880, 884, 885) @ 9\mod_1285840957130_21.doc x @ 65333 @ @ 1
The fieldbus controller has 1024 KB program memory, 1024 KB data memory
and 32 KB retentive memory available for the IEC 61131-3 programming.
Pos : 25.14 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Gerätebeschr eibung/Ei nleitung/Fel dbus koppl er/-contr oller/Einl eitender T ext/D er Anwender hat Zugriff auf alle Fel dbus- und Ei n-Ausgangsdaten. (Contr oller) @ 6\mod_1255505042953_21.doc x @ 42714 @ @ 1
Depending on configuration the user can access all fieldbus and I/O data.
Pos : 25.15 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Gerätebeschr eibung/Ei nleitung/Fel dbus koppl er/-contr oller/Einl eitender T ext/U m Proz ess daten vi a ETH ERNET zu versenden, unterstützt d. F bus contr... (C ontroller) @ 6\mod_1255505347593_21.doc x @ 42723 @ @ 1
In order to send process data via ETHERNET, the controller supports a series of
network protocols.
Pos : 25.16 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Gerätebeschr eibung/Ei nleitung/Fel dbus koppl er/-contr oller/Einl eitender T ext/F ür den Proz ess datenaus tausc h si nd das MOD BUS/TCP (UD P)-Protokoll und das... (841,871,872,873,881) @ 6\mod_1255505736234_21.doc x @ 42732 @ @ 1
For the management and diagnosis of the system, the HTTP, SNTP and SNMP
protocols are available.
For the automatic assignment of the IP address in the network, kann alternatively
DHCP or BootP can be used.
Pos : 25.18 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Gerätebeschr eibung/Ei nleitung/Fel dbus koppl er/-contr oller/Einl eitender T ext/D er Anwender kann Clients und Ser ver über ei ne int Soc ket- API ( 829,830,841,842,871,872,873,881,882) @ 6\mod_1255509705625_21.doc x @ 42760 @ @ 1
305
The user can program clients and servers via an internal socket-API for all
transport protocols (TCP, UDP, etc.) with functional modules. Library functions
are available for function expansion.
Pos : 25.19 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Gerätebeschr eibung/Ei nleitung/Fel dbus koppl er/-contr oller/Einl eitender T ext/Mit der IEC 61131- 3 Bi bliothek " Sys LibRTC .lib" wir d beis piels w. (829,830,841,871,872,873,881,882) @ 6\mod_1255509899812_21.doc x @ 42763 @ @ 1
With the IEC 61131-3 library "SysLibRTC.lib," for example, a buffered real-time
clock with date, time (1-second resolution), alarm functions and a timer is
incorporated. This clock is supplied with auxiliary power during a power failure.
Pos : 25.20 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Gerätebeschr eibung/Ei nleitung/Fel dbus koppl er/-contr oller/Einl eitender T ext/D er Fbusc ontroll er basi ert auf einer 32-Bi t-CPU u. i.mul titas k.(829,830,841,849,871,872,873,881,882) @ 6\mod_1255510611593_21.doc x @ 42766 @ @ 1
The controller has an internal server for the configuration and administration of
the system.
Pos : 25.22 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Gerätebeschr eibung/Ei nleitung/Fel dbus koppl er/-contr oller/Einl eitender T ext/D as i nterne D ateis ystem unters tützt z wei Laufwer ke, R emanents peic her 2 MB und SD-Karte ( 880) @ 9\mod_1285853060592_21.doc x @ 65336 @ @ 1
The internal file system supports two drives, a 2MB remanent memory, and a
pluggable memory card (SD card).
Pos : 25.23 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Gerätebeschr eibung/Ei nleitung/Fel dbus koppl er/-contr oller/Einl eitender T ext/Hinweis: Speicher kar te is t nicht i m Liefer umfang! Nur empfohlene Speic her karte verwenden! (831, 880) @ 10\mod_1306416449246_21.doc x @ 73230 @ @ 1
Pos : 25.24 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Gerätebeschr eibung/Ei nleitung/Fel dbus koppl er/-contr oller/Einl eitender T ext/Infor mati onen über die Konfiguration und den Status des F bkn. ( 829,830,841,849,871,872,873,881,882) @ 6\mod_1255513139250_21.doc x @ 42781 @ @ 1
306
Pos : 28 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Gerätebesc hreibung/Ansic ht - Ü berschrift 2 @ 4\mod_1240984217343_21.doc x @ 31958 @ 2 @ 1
4.1 View
Pos : 29.1 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Ansic ht/Fel dbus koppl er/-contr oller/Leg ende/Ansic ht - allg. Einl eitung für Koppler/C ontroll er @ 4\mod_1238494230133_21.doc x @ 29446 @ @ 1
307
Pos : 29.4 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Ansic ht/Fel dbus koppl er/-contr oller/Leg ende/Ansic ht - Legende zur Ansicht ETHERN ET ( 750-880,881,882) - T abell enkopf und Nr : 1 @ 7\mod_1266415064861_21.doc x @ 50950 @ @ 1
Table 12: Legend for Figure “View ETHERNET TCP/IP Fieldbus Controller”
Designati
Pos. Meaning Details see section:
on
LINK
ACT 1, 2, “Device Description” >
1 Status LEDs Fieldbus
MS, NS, “Display Elements”
I/O, USR
Pos : 29.5 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Ansic ht/Fel dbus koppl er/-contr oller/Leg ende/Ansic ht - Legende allg für Koppl er/Contr oller Nr: 2- 13 @ 4\mod_1238495560382_21.doc x @ 29458 @ @ 1
308
Pos : 31 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Gerätebesc hreibung/Ansc hlüsse - Übersc hrift 2 @ 4\mod_1240984262656_21.doc x @ 31961 @ 2 @ 1
4.2 Connectors
Pos : 32 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Schematisc he Sc haltbil der/Fel dbus koppl er/-contr oller/Ger äteei nspeis ung - Ü berschrift 3 und Einl eitung 750-0xxx @ 5\mod_1245074097866_21.doc x @ 35349 @ 3 @ 1
The device supply generates the necessary voltage to power the electronics of the
device and the internal electronics of the connected I/O modules.
The connection to the ETHERNET based fieldbuses is made via two RJ-45 plugs
(also called “Western plugs”), which are connected to the fieldbus controller via
an integrated switch.
The integrated switch works in store-and-forward operation and for each port,
supports the transmission speeds 10/100 Mbit as well as the transmission
modes full and half-duplex.
Pos : 34.3 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Ansc hl üsse/F eldbus koppler/-c ontroller/Di e Beschaltung der RJ-45-Buc hs en sind ents prec hend den Vorgaben für 100Bas eTX - Besc hrei bung, Kabel @ 5\mod_1245073028195_21.doc x @ 35336 @ @ 1
The RJ-45 socket is arranged physically lower, allowing the coupler to fit in an
80 mm high enclosure once connected.
Pos : 34.5 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Ansc hl üsse/F eldbus koppler/-c ontroller/Tabell e, Abbil dung, Busansc hl uss und Stec kerbeleg ung RJ- 45- Stec ker @ 5\mod_1245073518124_21.doc x @ 35342 @ @ 1
309
Figure 24: RJ-45 Connector
310
Pos : 36 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Gerätebesc hreibung/Anz eigeel emente - Übersc hrift 2 @ 4\mod_1240984390875_21.doc x @ 31964 @ 2 @ 1
The operating condition of the fieldbus controller or the node is displayed with the
help of illuminated indicators in the form of light-emitting diodes (LEDs).
The LED information is routed to the top of the case by light fibres. In some
cases, these are multi-colored (red, green or red/green (=orange)).
Pos : 37.2 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Anz eigeelemente/Fel dbus koppl er/-contr oller/Bilder/Anz eigeelemente 750- 0880 - Bild @ 13\mod_1343745053058_21.doc x @ 101297 @ @ 1
For the diagnostics of the different domains fieldbus, node and supply voltage, the
LEDs can be divided into three groups:
MS red/green
Pos : 37.6 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Anz eigeelemente/Fel dbus koppl er/-contr oller/Legende/Anz eigeelemente - F eldbus status ETHERN ET-basi ert, spezifisc her Tabellenteil 'NS' @ 4\mod_1240920458789_21.doc x @ 31743 @ @ 1
indicates the status of the node
NS
Pos : 37.7 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Anz eigeelemente/Fel dbus koppl er/-contr oller/Legende/Anz eigeelemente - Knotens tatus Tabellenüberschrift und 'I/O' @ 4\mod_1240921390924_21.doc x @ 31809 @ @ 1
red/green indicates the network status
+
USR red/green/ indicates the state, which is programmed in the user program
orange
Pos : 37.9 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Anz eigeelemente/Fel dbus koppl er/-contr oller/Legende/Anz eigeelemente - Speicher kar tenstatus ' SD' (750- 0880, - 884, - 885, -889) @ 9\mod_1291715745543_21.doc x @ 67173 @ @ 1
SD orange
Pos : 37.10 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Gerätebeschr eibung/Anzeig eel emente/F eldbus koppler /-controll er/Legende/Anz eigeel emente - Versorgungsspannungsstatus T abellenübersc hrift und ' A', 'B' @ 5\mod_1253265337073_21.doc x @ 41846 @ @ 1
indicates an access to the SD memory card
+
Pos : 37.11 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Gerätebeschr eibung/Anzeig eel emente/F eldbus koppler /-controll er/Legende/Informati on: Infor mationen z u der LED-Signalisier ung @ 4\mod_1239098329547_21.doc x @ 30154 @ @ 1
311
More information about the LED Signaling
Read the detailed description for the evaluation of the displayed LED state in the
section “Diagnostics” > … > “LED Signaling”.
Pos : 38 /D okumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/---Seitenwechs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
312
Pos : 39 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Gerätebesc hreibung/Bedienel emente - Ü berschrift 2 @ 4\mod_1239191655456_21.doc x @ 30439 @ 2 @ 1
Table 17: Legend for Figure “Service Interface (Closed and Opened Flap)”
Number Description
1 Open closed flap
2 View Service Interface
Pos : 40.3 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Bedienel emente/F el dbus koppl er/-contr oller/Achtung: Ger ät muss spannungsfrei sei n! (für Ans chl uss von 750-920, - 923, -921) @ 4\mod_1239105946740_21.doc x @ 30247 @ @ 1
The connection to the 4-pin header under the cover flap can be realized via the
communication cables with the item numbers750-920 and 750-923 or via the
WAGO radio adapter with the item number 750-921.
Pos : 41 /D okumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/---Seitenwechs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
313
Pos : 42.1 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Bedienel emente/F el dbus koppl er/-contr oller/Betriebsartensc halter - Ü berschrift 3, Ansic ht und Einlei tung (Contr oller) @ 4\mod_1239106871099_21.doc x @ 30280 @ 3 @ 1
Figure 27: Mode Selector Switch (Closed and Open Damper of the Service Port)
The mode selector switch determines the loading, starting and stopping of the
PLC-application by the fieldbus controller. This multifunction sliding switch
features 3 slide lock positions and a push-button function.
The sliding switch is designed for a number of operations in compliance with
EN61131T2.
Pos : 42.3 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Bedienel emente/F el dbus koppl er/-contr oller/Betriebsartensc halter - T abell en @ 4\mod_1240571618379_21.doc x @ 31290 @ @ 1
314
The mode selector switch position does not affect software start/stop!
The position of the operating mode switch does not prevent the starting and
stopping of the PFC application from WAGO-I/O-PRO.
One of the following functions is active, depending on which of the three static
positions — “top”, “center” or “bottom” — the switch is located at when
energized or during a hardware or software reset:
The fieldbus controller performs the following functions if the switch’s position is
changed during operation:
Table 20: Mode Selector Switch Positions, Dynamic Positions During Ongoing Operation
Position change for the Function
mode selector switch
From the top to the “STOP” – stop program processing,
center position PFC application is stopped
From the center to the “RUN” – activate program processing,
top position Boot project (if available) is started
From the center to the No reaction.
bottom position The bootstrap loader is started after PowerOn/Reset
From the bottom to the No reaction.
center position
Press down Hardware reset.
(e.g., using a All outputs are reset; variables are set to 0, FALSE, or to an initial
screwdriver) value.
Retain variables or markers are not changed.
A hardware reset can be executed on STOP or on RUN at any position
of the mode selector switch!
Fieldbus coupler restart.
315
Pos : 44.1 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Bedienel emente/F el dbus koppl er/-contr oller/Adr ess wahlsc halter - Übersc hrift 3 @ 4\mod_1239190509819_21.doc x @ 30420 @ 3 @ 1
The 8-pole DIP switch is used to set the IP address and to select the protocol for
setting the IP address.
Network Host
255
The DHCP protocol is used to configure the IP parameters.
(DHCP)
Pos : 45 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Bedienel emente/Fel dbus koppl er/-contr oller/Speic her kartens tec kpl atz - Übersc hrift 3 und Besc hreibung @ 9\mod_1286366340882_21.doc x @ 65430 @ 344 @ 1
316
Only use recommended memory cards!
Use only the SD memory card available from WAGO (order no. 758-879/000-
001) since it is suitable for industrial applications under difficult environmental
conditions and for use in the fieldbus controller.
The compatibility to other storage media available in trade cannot be ensured.
The memory card slot has a transparent protective flap that is folded upwards to
open it.
Figure 29: Opening the Memory Card Slot, Inserting an SD/SDHC Memory Card
2. Hold the memory card so that the contacts are visible on the right side and
the sloping edge is towards the bottom, as depicted in the figure above.
3. Insert the memory card into the slot of the fieldbus controller.
317
4. Push the memory card all the way in. When you let go, the memory card
will move back a little and then snap in.
5. Push the cover flap back in by folding it downwards until it snaps in.
3. As soon as you let go of the memory card, the memory card is pushed out a
bit and you can remove it.
4. Push the cover flap back in by folding it downwards until it snaps in.
Pos : 46 /D okumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/---Seitenwechs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
Pos : 47 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Gerätebesc hreibung/Technisc he Daten - Ü berschrift 2 @ 3\mod_1232967587687_21.doc x @ 26924 @ 2 @ 1
318
4.5 Technical Data
4.5.1 Device Data
Table 22: Technical data – Device data
Width 62 mm
Height (from upper-edge of DIN 35) 65 mm
Length 100 mm
Weight approx. 164 g
Degree of protection IP 20
4.5.2 System Data
Table 23: Technical data – System data
Number of controllers connected to Limited by ETHERNET specification
Master
Transmission medium Twisted Pair S/UTP, STP 100 Ω Cat 5
Bus coupler connection 2 x RJ-45
Max. length of fieldbus segment 100 m
Baud rate 10/100 Mbit/s
Transmission performance Class D acc. to EN 50173
Protocols EtherNet/IP, MODBUS/TCP (UDP),
HTTP, BootP, DHCP, DNS, SNTP, FTP,
SNMP
Programming WAGO-I/O-PRO
IEC-61131-3 AWL, KOP, FUP (CFC), ST, AS
SD memory card slot push/push mechanism,
cover cap lead-sealable
Memory card type SD and SDHC up to 32 Gbyte *)
Max. number of socket links 3 HTTP, 15 MODBUS/TCP, 10 FTP,
2 SNMP, 5**) for IEC-61131-3 program,
2 for WAGO-I/O-PRO,
128 for Ethernet/IP
Powerfail RTC Buffer at least 6 days***)
Number of I/O modules 64
with bus extension 250
750-880/025-002 4
Configuration via PC
Program memory 1024 kByte
Data memory 1024 kByte
Non-voltatile memory (retain) 32 kByte
*) Use only the SD memory card available from WAGO (order no. 758-879/000-001) since it is
suitable for industrial applications under difficult environmental conditions and for use in the
fieldbus controller.
The compatibility to other storage media available in trade cannot be ensured.
**) Using the Ethernet.lib, when the SysLibSocket.lib is used, there are 143.
***) This value is valid for brand-new devices with an ambient temperature of 25 °C. The
guaranteed buffer time for the real time clock is reduced with rising temperature and operating
time.
319
4.5.3 Supply
Table 24: Technical data – Supply
Voltage supply DC 24 V (-25 % ... +30 %)
Input current max. 500 mA at 24 V
Efficiency of the power supply 90 %
Internal current consumption 450 mA at 5 V
Total current for I/O modules 1700 mA at 5 V
Isolation 500 V system/supply
4.5.5 Accessories
Table 26: Technical data – Accessories
Miniature WSB Quick marking system
WAGO-I/O-PRO 759-333
SD Memory Card 758-879/000-001
Pos : 48.2.1 /All e Serien ( Allgemei ne Module)/Ü bers chriften für alle Serien/Gerätebeschr eibung/Ansc hlus stechni k - Ü berschrift 3 @ 17\mod_1380123271324_21.doc x @ 132788 @ 3 @ 1
320
4.5.7 Climatic Environmental Conditions
Table 30: Technical Data – Climatic Environmental Conditions
Operating temperature range 0 °C … 55 °C
Operating temperature range for −20 °C … +60 °C
components with extended
temperature range (750-xxx/025-xxx)
Storage temperature range −25 °C … +85 °C
Storage temperature range for −40 °C … +85 °C
components with extended
temperature range (750-xxx/025-xxx)
Relative humidity Max. 5 % … 95 % without condensation
Resistance to harmful substances Acc. to IEC 60068-2-42 and
IEC 60068-2-43
Maximum pollutant concentration at SO2 ≤ 25 ppm
relative humidity < 75 % H2S ≤ 10 ppm
Special conditions Ensure that additional measures for
components are taken, which are used in
an environment involving:
– dust, caustic vapors or gases
– ionizing radiation
Pos : 48.4 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/T echnisc he Daten/F el dbus koppl er/-contr oller/Achtung: Verring erte Pufferz eit bei z u hoher Lagertemperatur! (bei Echtzei tuhr) @ 8\mod_1278604366911_21.doc x @ 59412 @ @ 1
Pos : 48.5 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/T echnisc he Daten/Sons tige/M echanisc he Fes tigkeit ( ECO + er weiterter EC O) @ 3\mod_1232967665718_21.doc x @ 26976 @ 3 @ 1
321
4.5.8 Mechanical Strength
Table 31: Technical Data – Mechanical Strength
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
Comment to the vibration resistance:
a) Type of oscillation:
sweep with a rate of change of 1 octave per minute
10 Hz ≤ f < 57 Hz, const. Amplitude 0,075 mm
57 Hz ≤ f < 150 Hz, const. Acceleration 1 g
b) Period of oscillation:
10 sweep per axis in each of the 3 vertical axes
Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-27
Comment to the shock resistance:
a) Type of impulse: half sinusoidal
b) Intensity of impulse:
15 g peak value, 11 ms maintenance time
c) Route of impulse:
3 impulses in each pos. And neg. direction of the 3
vertical axes of the test object, this means 18 impulses
in all.
Free fall acc. IEC 60068-2-32
≤ 1 m (module in original packing)
322
Pos : 50 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Gerätebesc hreibung/Zul ass ungen - Übersc hrift 2 @ 3\mod_1224055364109_21.doc x @ 24030 @ 2 @ 1
4.6 Approvals
Pos : 51 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Z ulass ungen/Infor mation: Weitere Infor mationen zu Zul ass ungen 750- xxxx @ 3\mod_1227190967156_21.doc x @ 25221 @ @ 1
The following approvals have been granted to the basic version and all variations
of 750-880 fieldbus couplers/controllers:
Pos : 53.1 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Dokumente) ( Allgemei ne Module)/Z ulassungen/Standardz ulassungen/C E (Konformi täts kennz eichnung) @ 3\mod_1224494777421_21.doc x @ 24276 @ @ 1
Conformity Marking
Pos : 53.2 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Dokumente) ( Allgemei ne Module)/Z ulassungen/Standardz ulassungen/cU Lus (U L508) @ 3\mod_1224055013140_0.doc x @ 24020 @ @ 1
CULUS UL508
Pos : 53.3 /Dokumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/------Leerz eile------ @ 3\mod_1224662755687_0.doc x @ 24460 @ @ 1
Pos : 54 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Z ulass ungen/Allgemei n/Z ulass ungen F Bkoppler/-c ontroll 750- xxxx Allgemein, Standar dvers., all e Varia., ausser /025-002 - Ei @ 23\mod_1435311574599_21.doc x @ 184638 @ @ 1
The following approvals have been granted to the basic version of 750-880
fieldbus couplers/controllers and to all its variants, except for the 750-880/025-
002 variant:
Pos : 55 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Z ulassungen/Standardz ulassungen/KC - Kor ea Cer tificate - PFC @ 20\mod_1406536058950_21.doc x @ 160396 @ @ 1
The following Ex approvals have been granted to the basic version of 750-880
fieldbus coupler/controller and their variations 750-880/xxxx-xxxx:
Pos : 57.1 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Module)/Z ulassungen/Ex-Zul ass ungen/TÜV AT EX/TÜ V 07 AT EX 554086 X: I M 2 Ex d I M b II 3 G Ex nA IIC T 4 Gc II 3 D Ex tc IIIC T135°C Dc @ 14\mod_1361949753233_0.doc x @ 113015 @ @ 1
323
Permissible ambient temperature range:
• Standard: 0 °C ≤ Ta ≤ +60 °C
• Variants with extended temperature
range (750-xxx/025-xxx): -20 °C ≤ Ta ≤ +60 °C
Pos : 57.5 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Module)/Z ulassungen/Ex-Zul ass ungen/cU Lus /cU Lus (AN SI/ISA 12.12.01) Cl ass I, Di v2 ABCD T 4 @ 3\mod_1224054791812_0.doc x @ 24014 @ @ 1
Pos : 58 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Z ulass ungen/Schiff/Z ulas sungen F Bkoppler/-c ontroll er 750- xxxx Sc hiff, ohne Variantenangabe - Ei nleitung @ 5\mod_1245241344146_21.doc x @ 35501 @ @ 1
324
Pos : 60 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Z ulass ungen/Schiff/Z ulas sungen F BKoppl er/-contr oller 750- 880/xxx- xxx Sc hiff, Tabellarisc he Übersicht @ 20\mod_1409294503990_0.doc x @ 162368 @ @ 1
750-880 x x x x x x x x x x
/025-000 x x
/025-001 x x
/025-002 x x
Pos : 61.1 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Dokumente) ( Allgemei ne Module)/Z ulassungen/Sc hiffsz ul ass ungen/ABS ( Americ an Bureau of Shi ppi ng) @ 3\mod_1224055151062_0.doc x @ 24023 @ @ 1
BV (Bureau Veritas)
Pos : 61.4 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Dokumente) ( Allgemei ne Module)/Z ulassungen/Sc hiffsz ul ass ungen/DN V (D et N ors ke Veritas) Cl ass B @ 3\mod_1224492540562_0.doc x @ 24224 @ @ 1
Pos : 63 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Z ulass ungen/Schiff/Infor mation: Weitere Infor mati on zu den Schiffsz ulass ungen @ 6\mod_1263206668130_21.doc x @ 47820 @ @ 1
325
Pos : 65 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Gerätebesc hreibung/Nor men und Ric htlini en - Übersc hrift 2 @ 4\mod_1242804031875_21.doc x @ 33646 @ 2 @ 1
326
Pos : 72 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Monti eren/M ontier en - Übersc hrift 1 @ 3\mod_1225446744750_21.doc x @ 24900 @ 1 @ 1
5 Mounting
Pos : 73.1 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/M ontieren/D emontieren/Einbaul age @ 3\mod_1225446818312_21.doc x @ 24903 @ 2 @ 1
Pos : 73.2 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/M ontieren/D emontieren/Gesamtaus bau @ 3\mod_1231764099468_21.doc x @ 25940 @ 2 @ 1
Examples:
Exception:
The number of connected I/O modules also depends on the type of fieldbus
coupler/controller is used. For example, the maximum number of stackable I/O
modules on one PROFIBUS DP/V1 fieldbus coupler/controller is 63 with no
passive I/O modules and end module.
327
Increase the total length using a coupler module for internal data bus
extension!
You can increase the total length of a fieldbus node by using a 750-628 I/O
Module (coupler module for internal data bus extension). For such a
configuration, attach a 750-627 I/O Module (end module for internal data bus
extension) after the last I/O module of a module assembly. Use an RJ-45 patch
cable to connect the I/O module to the coupler module for internal data bus
extension of another module block.
This allows you to segment a fieldbus node into a maximum of 11 blocks with
maximum of 10 I/O modules for internal data bus extension.
The maximum cable length between two blocks is five meters.
More information is available in the manuals for the 750-627 and 750-628 I/O
Modules.
Pos : 73.3 /Dokumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/---Seitenwechs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
328
Pos : 73.4 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/M ontieren/D emontieren/M ontage auf Tr agschi ene @ 3\mod_1225447227234_21.doc x @ 24906 @ 233 @ 1
Carrier rails have different mechanical and electrical properties. For the optimal
system setup on a carrier rail, certain guidelines must be observed:
• The carrier rail must optimally support the EMC measures integrated into
the system and the shielding of the I/O module connections.
• The geometry of the carrier rail must not be altered in order to secure the
safe hold of the components. In particular, when shortening or mounting the
carrier rail, it must not be crushed or bent.
• The base of the I/O components extends into the profile of the carrier rail.
For carrier rails with a height of 7.5 mm, mounting points are to be riveted
under the node in the carrier rail (slotted head captive screws or blind
rivets).
• The medal springs on the bottom of the housing must have low-impedance
contact with the DIN rail (wide contact surface is possible).
329
5.3.2 WAGO DIN Rail
WAGO carrier rails meet the electrical and mechanical requirements shown in the
table below.
Pos : 73.5 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/M ontieren/D emontieren/Abstände @ 3\mod_1225448283750_21.doc x @ 24920 @ 2 @ 1
5.4 Spacing
The spacing between adjacent components, cable conduits, casing and frame sides
must be maintained for the complete fieldbus node.
The spacing creates room for heat transfer, installation or wiring. The spacing to
cable conduits also prevents conducted electromagnetic interferences from
influencing the operation.
Pos : 73.6 /Dokumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/---Seitenwechs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
330
Pos : 73.7 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/M ontieren/D emontieren/M ontagerei henfolge @ 3\mod_1231770210031_21.doc x @ 25992 @ 2 @ 1
The reliable positioning and connection is made using a tongue and groove
system. Due to the automatic locking, the individual devices are securely seated
on the rail after installation.
Starting with the fieldbus coupler/controller, the I/O modules are mounted
adjacent to each other according to the project design. Errors in the design of the
node in terms of the potential groups (connection via the power contacts) are
recognized, as the I/O modules with power contacts (blade contacts) cannot be
linked to I/O modules with fewer power contacts.
Pos : 73.8 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Sicherheits- und sonstig e Hinweis e/Vorsic ht/Vorsicht: Verl etz ungsgefahr durc h s charfkantige M ess er kontakte! @ 6\mod_1256193279401_21.doc x @ 43414 @ @ 1
331
Pos : 73.12 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Monti eren/D emonti eren/Ger äte ei nfügen und entfernen - Ü bersc hrift 2 @ 3\mod_1231768483250_21.doc x @ 25950 @ 2 @ 1
332
Pos : 73.15 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Monti eren/D emonti eren/F eldbus koppler/-c ontroll er ei nfügen @ 3\mod_1234168173031_21.doc x @ 27456 @ 3 @ 1
3. Use a screwdriver blade to turn the locking disc until the nose of the locking
disc engages behind the carrier rail (see the following figure). This prevents
the fieldbus coupler/controller from canting on the carrier rail.
Electrical connections for data or power contacts to adjacent I/O modules are
disconnected when removing the fieldbus coupler/controller.
Pos : 73.18 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
333
Pos : 73.19 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Monti eren/D emonti eren/Bus kl emme einfügen @ 3\mod_1231769726703_21.doc x @ 25989 @ 3 @ 1
334
Pos : 73.21 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Monti eren/D emonti eren/Bus kl emme entfer nen @ 4\mod_1239169375203_21.doc x @ 30334 @ 3 @ 1
335
Pos : 75 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Ansc hließ en/Ger äte ansc hließen - Ü bers chrift 1 @ 3\mod_1234172889468_21.doc x @ 27460 @ 1 @ 1
6 Connect Devices
Pos : 76.1 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ans chli eßen/D atenkontakte/Klemmenbus - Ü berschrift 2 @ 7\mod_1266320620183_21.doc x @ 50718 @ 2 @ 1
336
Pos : 76.6 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ans chli eßen/Leis tungs kontakte/Fel dversorgung - Ü bersc hrift 2 @ 7\mod_1266320656354_21.doc x @ 50722 @ 2 @ 1
Self-cleaning power jumper contacts used to supply the field side are located on
the right side of most of the fieldbus couplers/controllers and on some of the I/O
modules. These contacts come as touch-proof spring contacts. As fitting
counterparts the I/O modules have male contacts on the left side.
337
Pos : 76.11 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ansc hließ en/Leiter an CAGE CLAMP ansc hließ en (allgemein) - Ü berschrift 2 und T ext @ 3\mod_1225448660171_21.doc x @ 24928 @ 2 @ 1
If more than one conductor must be routed to one connection, these must be
connected in an up-circuit wiring assembly, for example using WAGO feed-
through terminals.
Exception:
If it is unavoidable to jointly connect 2 conductors, then you must use a ferrule to
join the wires together. The following ferrules can be used:
Length: 8 mm
Nominal cross section max.: 1 mm2 for 2 conductors with 0.5 mm2 each
WAGO product: 216-103 or products with comparable properties
1. For opening the CAGE CLAMP® insert the actuating tool into the opening
above the connection.
3. For closing the CAGE CLAMP® simply remove the tool. The conductor is
now clamped firmly in place.
338
Pos : 78 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/F unktions bes chr eibung/F unkti ons besc hrei bung - Ü bersc hrift 1 @ 4\mod_1239025975389_21.doc x @ 30003 @ 1 @ 1
7 Function Description
Pos : 79 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/F unktions bes chr eibung Betriebss ystem - Ü berschrift 2 @ 4\mod_1241426960453_21.doc x @ 32163 @ 2 @ 1
7.1.1 Run-up
Pos : 80.2 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/F unktions beschr eibung/Betriebss ystem/Hinweis: Betriebs artens chalter darf sich nic ht i n der unteren Stellung befi nden! @ 17\mod_1383727204961_21.doc x @ 136741 @ @ 1
The mode selector switch may not be located in the lower position!
The mode selector switch may not be set at the bottom position during run-
up!
Pos : 80.3 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/F unktions beschr eibung/Betriebss ystem/Betri ebs s ystem C ontroller - Anfangs text (Anlauf des Fel dbusc ontroll ers) @ 4\mod_1239104024406_21.doc x @ 30218 @ @ 1
The fieldbus controller begins running up after switching on the power supply or
after a reset. The internal PFC program is then transferred to the RAM.
During the initialization phase, the fieldbus controller detects the I/O modules and
the current configuration and sets the variables to 0 or FALSE, or to an initial
value specified by the PFC program. The flags retain their status. During this
phase the I/O LED will flash red.
When run-up is successful, the I/O LED then stays lit continuously in green.
Pos : 80.4 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Anz eigeelemente/Fel dbus koppl er/-contr oller/Legende/Infor mation: Infor mationen zu der LED- Signalisi erung @ 4\mod_1239098329547_21.doc x @ 30154 @ @ 1
The cycle time is the time from the beginning of the PFC program up to the next
beginning of the cycle. If a loop is programmed within the PFC program, the PFC
runtime and the PFC cycle time will be extended accordingly.
The inputs, outputs and timer values are not updated while the PFC program is
being processed. Updating is performed only as defined at the end of the PFC
339
program. As a result, it is not possible to wait on an event from the process or a
set period to expire while a loop is in progress.
Pos : 82 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/F unktions beschr eibung/Betriebss ystem/Betri ebs s ystem C ontroller - Diagramm ( 32- Bit, mit Files ystem und SD-Karte) @ 13\mod_1352730330104_21.doc x @ 105896 @ @ 1
340
Pos : 84 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/__ noc h nic ht ei ns ortierte Ü berschriften müss en noc h eins orti ert werden __/Proz ess datenaufbau - Ü bersc hrift 2 @ 5\mod_1245069543813_21.doc x @ 35310 @ 2 @ 1
Up to 250 I/O modules can be connected with the data bus extension
modules.
Using the WAGO module bus extension coupler module 750-628 and end module
750-627 makes it possible to connect up to 250 modules to the ETHERNET
Controller.
Pos : 85.3 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/F unktions beschr eibung/Prozes sabbild/Infor mation: Anzahl der Ei n- und Ausg angs bits bz w. -bytes [...] entnehmen Si e Bus kl emmenbesc hreibung @ 6\mod_1256034203734_21.doc x @ 43146 @ @ 1
Additional Information
For the number of input and output bits or bytes of the individual I/O modules,
refer to the corresponding description of the I/O modules.
Pos : 85.4 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/F unktions beschr eibung/Prozes sabbild/Aus der D atenbrei te und dem T yp der Bus kl emme ... (Contr oller) @ 6\mod_1256034320625_21.doc x @ 43149 @ @ 1
The fieldbus controller creates an internal local process image on the basis of the
data width, the type of I/O module and the position of the module in the node.
This process image is broken down into an input and an output data range.
The data of the digital I/O modules is bit-oriented; i.e., digital data is sent bit by
bit. Analog I/O modules represent the group of byte-oriented modules – data is
sent byte by byte.
Pos : 85.5 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/F unktions beschr eibung/Prozes sabbild/Z u diesen Bus kl emmen gehör en z. B. di e Z ähl er klemmen, Bus kl emmen für Wi nkel- und ... (750-841) @ 6\mod_1256034612343_21.doc x @ 43155 @ @ 1
This group includes: counter modules, angle and distance measurement modules
and communication modules.
Pos : 85.6 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/F unktions beschr eibung/Prozes sabbild/F ür das lokal e Pr oz ess abbild, Daten abhängig von der R eihenfolg e ihr er Positi on (Contr oller) @ 6\mod_1256034703953_21.doc x @ 43158 @ @ 1
For both, the local input and output process image, the I/O module data is stored
in the corresponding process image depending on the order in which the modules
are connected to the controller.
Pos : 85.7 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/F unktions beschr eibung/Prozes sabbild/Hi nweis : H ardware-Änder ung kann Änder ung des Pr oz ess abbildes bewirken! @ 6\mod_1256035225250_21.doc x @ 43161 @ @ 1
A memory range of 256 words (word 0...255) is initially available in the controller
for the process image of the physical input and output data.
341
For the image of the MODBUS/PFC variables, the memory range of words
256...511 is reserved; meaning the image for the MODBUS/PFC variables is
created behind the process image for the I/O module data.
If the quantity of module data is greater than 256 words, all the physical input and
output data above this value is added to the end of the current process image in a
memory range; i.e., attached behind the MODBUS/PFC variables (word
512…1275).
Pos : 85.9 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/F unktions beschr eibung/Prozes sabbild/Proz ess abbil d Wort 1276...1531, ab Wor t 1532 (750- 841) @ 6\mod_1256035500671_21.doc x @ 43167 @ @ 1
The EtherNet/IP PFC variables are then mapped behind the remaining physical
I/O module data.This memory range includes words 1276 ... 1531.
The subsequent range, starting from word 1532, is reserved for future protocol
expansion and other PFC variables.
Pos : 85.10 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung/Proz ess abbild/Bei allen WAGO-F eldbusc ontroller n ist der Z ugriff der SPS auf die Pr oz ess daten unabhängig von ... @ 6\mod_1256038962984_21.doc x @ 43173 @ @ 1
Access by the PLC to process data is made independently from the fieldbus
system in all WAGO fieldbus controllers; access is always conducted through an
application-related IEC-61131-3 program.
How the data is accessed from the fieldbus side depends on the fieldbus however.
Pos : 85.11 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung/Proz ess abbild/F ür den F eldbus contr oller kann ei n MOD BUS/TCP-M aster über... (750-841) @ 6\mod_1256039409593_21.doc x @ 43179 @ @ 1
For the fieldbus controller, a MODBUS/TCP master can access the data via
implemented MODBUS functions, whereby decimal or hexadecimal MODBUS
addresses are used.
Optionally, data can also be accessed via Ethernet/IP using an object model.
Pos : 85.12 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung/Proz ess abbild/Informati on: Eine detaillierte Besc hreibung z u di es en feldbusspezifis chen Datenz ugriffen ( 750-841) @ 6\mod_1256039483359_21.doc x @ 43182 @ @ 1
Additional Information:
For a detailed description of these fieldbus-specific data access methods, refer to
the section "MODBUS Functions" or the section "EtherNet/IP (Ethernet/Industrial
Protocol)".
Pos : 85.13 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung/Proz ess abbild/Informati on: D as fel dbuss pezifisc he Pr ozessabbild is t ... ( 750-833,841,842,843,871,880,881,882,889) @ 6\mod_1256131415906_21.doc x @ 43398 @ @ 1
Additional Information:
For the fieldbus-specific process image of any WAGO I/O module, please refer to
the section “I/O Modules” > … > “Structure of the process data”.
Pos : 85.14 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
342
Pos : 85.15 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung/Proz ess abbild/Beis piel für ein Ei ngangspr ozessabbild- Beis piel für ei n Ausg angs proz ess abbil d @ 6\mod_1256040947968_21.doc x @ 43188 @ 33 @ 1
343
7.2.3 Example of an Output Data Process Image
The following example for the output process image comprises 2 digital and 4
analog outputs. It comprises 4 words for the analog outputs and 1 word for the
digital outputs; i.e., 5 words in total.
In addition, the output data can also be read back with an offset of 200hex (0x0200)
added to the MODBUS address.
Data > 256 words can be read back by using the cumulative offset!
All output data greater than 256 words and, therefore located in the memory range
6000hex (0x6000) to 66F9 hex (0x66F9) can be read back with an offset of 1000 hex
(0x1000) added to the MODBUS address.
344
7.2.4 Process Data MODBUS/TCP and EtherNet/IP
Pos : 85.17 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung/Proz ess abbild/Der Aufbau der Pr ozessdaten ist bei einigen Bus klemmen feldbusspezifis ch. @ 6\mod_1256032164328_21.doc x @ 43113 @ @ 1
For some I/O modules (and their variations), the structure of the process data
depends on the fieldbus.
Pos : 85.18 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung/Proz ess abbild/Pr oz ess abbild wortweis e aufg ebaut ( mit word- alignment) ( 750- 841) (MOD BUS und Ethernet/IP) @ 6\mod_1256032355828_21.doc x @ 43119 @ @ 1
For the fieldbus controller with MODBUS and Ethernet/IP, the process image is
built up word-by-word (with word alignment). The internal mapping method for
data greater than one byte conforms to Intel formats.
Pos : 85.19 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung/Proz ess abbild/Informati on: Weiter e Infos zu dem fel dbuss pezifisc hen Proz ess datenaufbau für MOD BU S und EtherN et/IP @ 6\mod_1259150064576_21.doc x @ 44993 @ @ 1
Additional Information:
For the respective fieldbus-specific structure of the process values of any I/O
module within the 750 or 753 Series of the WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM, refer to
Section "Structure of Process Data for MODBUS/TCP" or "Structure of Process
Data for Ethernet/IP".
345
Pos : 87 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/__ noc h nic ht ei ns ortierte Ü berschriften müss en noc h eins orti ert werden __/D atenaustausch - Übersc hrift 2 @ 4\mod_1241431718548_21.doc x @ 32202 @ 2 @ 1
With the fieldbus controller, data is exchanged via the MODBUS/TCP protocol
and/or the MODBUS/UDP protocol or EtherNet/IP.
Pos : 88.2 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/F unktions beschr eibung/Datenaus tausc h/D atenaustaus ch - Ei nleitung Teil 2 ( 750-841,-842, - 843, -871, -880, - 881, -882, -885 ) @ 8\mod_1281078066247_21.doc x @ 62560 @ @ 1
The master requests communication. This request can be directed to certain nodes
by addressing. The nodes receive the request and, depending on the request type,
send a reply to the master.
Pos : 88.3 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/F unktions beschr eibung/Datenaus tausc h/D atenaustaus ch - Ei n F eldbusc ontr oller kann ei ne bes timmte Anz ahl gleic hz eitiger Ver bd. (C ontroller) @ 6\mod_1256044496578_21.doc x @ 43210 @ @ 1
• 3 connections for HTTP (to read HTML pages from the controller)
• 15 connections via MODBUS/TCP (to read or write input and output data of
the controller)
346
• the fieldbus master and the I/O modules,
• the PLC function of the PFC (CPU) and the I/O modules
• between the fieldbus master and the PLC function of the PFC (CPU).
Pos : 88.6 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/F unktions beschr eibung/Datenaus tausc h/D atenaustaus ch - Wird der Fel dbus M ODBU S g enutz t, grei ft der Mas ter über die (Contr oller) @ 6\mod_1256044816515_21.doc x @ 43225 @ @ 1
If MODBUS is used as the fieldbus, the MODBUS master accesses the date using
the MODBUS functions implemented in the controller; Ethernet/IP, in contrast,
uses an object model for data access.
Pos : 88.7 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/F unktions beschr eibung/Datenaus tausc h/D atenaustaus ch - Der Zugriff des F eldbusc ontrollers auf di e D aten erfolgt mit Hilfe eines IEC- 611... @ 6\mod_1256044879953_21.doc x @ 43228 @ @ 1
Data access is carried out with the aid of an IEC-61131-3 application program.
Data addressing varies greatly here.
Pos : 88.8 /Dokumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/---Seitenwechs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
347
Pos : 88.9 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/F unktions beschr eibung/Datenaus tausc h/Speic her ber eiche M ODBU S/Speic her ber eiche M ODBU S - Bild ( 750- 841, 871, 873, 880, 881, 882, 884, 885) - mit Eth/IP @ 6\mod_1256046946781_21.doc x @ 43245 @ 3 @ 1
The controller process image contains the physical data for the bus modules.
These have a value of 0 ... 255 and word 512 ... 1275.
The input module data can be read by the CPU and by the fieldbus side.
Likewise, data can be written to the output modules from the CPU and the
fieldbus side.
The MODBUS PFC variables are stored in each of the memory areas for word
256 ... 511 between these sides.
The MODBUS-PFC input variables are written to the input memory area
from the fieldbus side and read in by the CPU for processing.
The variables processed by the CPU using the IEC-61131-3 program are
places in the output memory area, where they can be read out by the master.
Pos : 88.11 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung/D atenaustausch/Speicherbereic he MOD BUS/Speicherbereic he MOD BU S - Im Ansc hluss an di e Bus kl emmendaten Wort 1276...1531 ( 750-841) @ 6\mod_1256133822562_21.doc x @ 43401 @ @ 1
The memory area for word 1276 ... 1531 for the Ethernet/IP PFC variables is
adjacent to the physical I/O module data.
Pos : 88.12 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung/D atenaustausch/Speicherbereic he MOD BUS/Speicherbereic he MOD BU S - F ür z ukünftige Protokoll-Er weiterungen und weitere PFC- Vari abl en ist ... @ 6\mod_1256133965750_21.doc x @ 43405 @ @ 1
348
The subsequent memory area, starting from word 1532, is reserved for future
protocol expansion and other PFC variables.
Pos : 88.13 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung/D atenaustausch/Speicherbereic he MOD BUS/Speicherbereic he MOD BU S - Spi egeln der Bus kl emmendaten @ 6\mod_1256047661921_21.doc x @ 43254 @ @ 1
Other memory areas are also provided in the controller, some of which cannot be
accessed by the fieldbus side, however:
349
Figure 42: Example declaration of remanent flags by “var retain”
Pos : 88.15 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
350
Pos : 88.16 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine M odul e)/Übersc hriften für all e Seri en/Funkti onsbesc hrei bungAdres sierung - Ü bers chrift 3 @ 8\mod_1279016771610_21.doc x @ 59781 @ 3 @ 1
7.3.2 Addressing
Pos : 88.17 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung/D atenaustausch/Adres sier ung/Adr essi erung - Ei nleitung (Controll er) @ 6\mod_1256047921109_21.doc x @ 43260 @ @ 1
Module inputs and outputs in a controller are addressed internally as soon as they
are started. The order in which the connected modules are addressed depends on
the type of module that is connected (input module, output module).
The process image is formed from these addresses.
The physical arrangement of the I/O modules in the fieldbus node is arbitrary.
Pos : 88.18 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
351
Pos : 88.19 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung/D atenaustausch/Adres sier ung/Adr essi erung - Adres sierung der Bus klemmen @ 7\mod_1265981710444_21.doc x @ 50597 @ 4 @ 1
Addressing first references complex modules (modules that occupy several bytes)
in accordance with their physical order downstream of the fieldbus
coupler/controller; i.e., they occupy addresses starting from word 0.
Following these is the data for the remaining modules, compiled in bytes
(modules that occupy less than one byte). In this process, byte by byte is filled
with this data in the physical order. As soon a complete byte is occupied by the bit
oriented modules, the process begins automatically with the next byte.
Pos : 88.20 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
352
Pos : 88.21 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung/D atenaustausch/Adres sier ung/IEC-61131-3- Adr essräume - Ü bers chrift 4 @ 6\mod_1256048478468_21.doc x @ 43268 @ 4 @ 1
Pos : 88.25 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
353
Pos : 88.26 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung/D atenaustausch/Adres sier ung/Adr essi erung - Abs olute Adressi erung @ 6\mod_1256049674828_21.doc x @ 43304 @ 4 @ 1
Pos : 88.27 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung/D atenaustausch/Adres sier ung/Adr essi erung - Beispi eladressier ung @ 6\mod_1256049728484_21.doc x @ 43307 @ @ 1
Addressing example:
Inputs
Bit %IX14.0 ... 15 %IX15.0 ... 15
Byte %IB28 %IB29 %IB30 %IB31
Word %IW14 %IW15
Double word %ID7
Outputs
Bit %QX5.0 ... 15 %QX6.0 ... 15
Byte %QB10 %QB11 %QB12 %QB13
Word %QW5 %QW6
Double word %QD2 (top section) %QD3 (bottom section)
354
Flags
Bit %MX11.0 ... 15 %MX12.0 ... 15
Byte %MB22 %MB23 %MB24 %MB25
Word %MW11 %MW12
Double word %MD5 (top section) %MD6 (bottom section)
Pos : 88.28 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
355
Pos : 88.29 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung/D atenaustausch/Datenaus tausc h - D atenaustausc h MOD BUS/TCP-M aster und Bus klemmen @ 6\mod_1256049861734_21.doc x @ 43310 @ 3 @ 1
• Input words
• Output words
• Input bits
• Output bits
Access by word to the digital I/O modules is carried out in accordance with the
following table:
Table 37: Allocation of Digital Inputs and Outputs to Process Data Words in Accordance with the
Intel Format
Digital inputs/
16. 15. 14. 13. 12. 11. 10. 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1.
outputs
Process data Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
word 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Byte
High byte D1 Low byte D0
Data > 256 words can be read back by using the cumulative offset!
All output data greater than 256 words and, therefore located in the memory range
0x6000 to 0x62FC, can be read back by adding an offset of 1000hex (0x1000) to
the MODBUS address.
Figure 43: Data Exchange Between MODBUS Master and I/O Modules
356
Register functions start at address 0x1000. These functions can be addressed in a
similar manner with the MODBUS function codes that are implemented
(read/write).
The specific register address is then specified instead of the address for a module
channel.
Additional Information
A detailed description of the MODBUS addressing may be found in Chapter
"MODBUS Register Mapping".
Pos : 88.30 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
357
Pos : 88.31 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung/D atenaustausch/Datenaus tausc h - D atenaustausc h EtherNet/IP-Mas ter und Bus kl emmen @ 6\mod_1256050145625_21.doc x @ 43322 @ 3 @ 1
The “assembly” object specifies the structure of the objects for the data
transmission. With the assembly object, data (e.g. I/O data) can be combined into
blocks (mapped) and sent via a single message connection. Thanks to this
mapping, less access to the network is necessary.
An input assembly reads in data from the application via the network or produces
data on the network.
An output assembly writes data to the application or consumes data from the
network.
After the input voltage is applied, the assembly object combines data from the
process image. As soon as a connection is established, the master can address the
data with “class”, “instance”, and “attribute” and access it or read and write using
I/O connections.
The mapping of the data depends on the assembly instance of the static assembly
selected.
Additional Information:
The assembly instances for the static assembly are described in the section
“Ethernet/IP”.
Pos : 88.32 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
358
Pos : 88.33 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung/D atenaustausch/Datenaus tausc h - D atenaustausc h SPS-Funkti onalität (C PU) und Bus kl emmen @ 6\mod_1256049896812_21.doc x @ 43313 @ 3 @ 1
The PFC uses absolute addresses to reference the input data. The data can then be
processed internally in the controller using the IEC-61131-3 program.
Flags are stored in a non-volatile memory area in this process. The results of
linking can then be written directly to the output data employing absolute
addressing.
Figure 44: Data Exchange Between PLC Function (CPU) of the PFC and the I/O Modules
Pos : 88.34 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
359
Pos : 88.35 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung/D atenaustausch/Datenaus tausc h - D atenaustausc h Master und SPS-Funkti onalität (C PU) @ 6\mod_1256049969000_21.doc x @ 43316 @ 3 @ 1
Variable data generated by the master are routed as input variables to the PFC,
where they are further processed.
Data created in the PFC are transmitted via fieldbus to the master as output
variables.
In the PFC, access to the MODBUS/TCP PFC variable data is possible starting
from word address 256 to 511 (double-word address 128-255, byte address 512-
1023), while access to the PFC variable data is possible starting from a word
address of 1276 to 1531 (double-word address 638-765, byte address 2552-3063).
Pos : 88.36 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung/D atenaustausch/Datenaus tausc h - Beispi el MOD BUS/TCP-M aster und SPS-Funkti onalität (CPU) @ 6\mod_1256050019140_21.doc x @ 43319 @ 4 @ 1
The PLC function of the PFC employs a different type of addressing for accessing
the same data. PLC addressing is identical with word-by-word addressing by the
MODBUS Master for the declaration of 16-bit variables. However, a different
notation is used for declaration of Boolean variables (1 bit) than that used by
MODBUS. Here, the bit address is composed of the elements word address and
bit number in the word, separated by a decimal point.
Example:
Bit access by MODBUS to bit number 4097 => Bit addressing in the PLC
<Word No.>.<Bit No.> = 256.1
The PLC function of the PFC can also access data by bytes and by doubleword
access.
360
Addresses are calculated based on the following equations for byte-based access:
Additional Information
There is a detailed description of the MODBUS and the corresponding IEC 61131
addressing in section “MODBUS Register Mapping”.
Pos : 88.37 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung/D atenaustausch/Datenaus tausc h - Anwendungsbeispi el, Adressi erungsbeis piel für einen F eldbus knoten @ 6\mod_1255937031906_21.doc x @ 43042 @ 3 @ 1
361
7.3.7 Application Example
362
Pos : 90.1 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/F unktions beschr eibung/Speic her kartenfunktion/Speic her kartenfunkti on - Teil 1 - Speic her kartenfunktion - Ü bers chrift 2 @ 16\mod_1372661388131_21.doc x @ 125170 @ 2 @ 1
If the memory card has been inserted, it is incorporated into the directory structure
of the internal file system of the fieldbus controller as drive S:. This way, the
memory card can be addressed like a changeable medium on a PC.
The function of the memory card in normal operation and possible errors that can
arise when using the memory card will be described in the following sections for
various steps during operation:
• Directory structure
363
Note the pre-formatting of SD card!
Note that SD cards < = 2 GB are often formatted with the file system type
“FAT16”, and the creation of a maximum of 512 entries in the root directory is
possible. For more than 512 entries, create them in a subdirectory, or format the
SD card with “FAT32”.
364
7.4.1 Project Copying and Automatic System Start
This function is useful for project updates or project copying between several
fieldbus controllers using an SD card.
First, start the fieldbus controller without the SD card being inserted.
In the Web-based management system, the function “Always restore settings from
SD card on reboot” is activated on the “Backup & Restore” Web page.
Power supply is interrupted, allowing you to insert the SD card from a different
fieldbus controller.
The fieldbus controller is started and the data from the directory S:/copy/xxx on
the memory card is copied into the appropriate directories of the internal file
system.
Identical data that is already present in the internal file system is not copied.
The copied data is then loaded automatically. Device settings and other data are
saved in the fieldbus controller and are executed.
365
Table 38: Possible Errors on System Start
Possible error Procedure Error message Solution
No /copy/ and System start of the No message. If memory card use is
/settings/ directories on fieldbus controller is desired, map the
the memory card running as if no directory structure of
memory card were the internal drive under
present. /copy/ on the memory
card on the PC.
Then restart the
fieldbus controller.
Manual interrupt If the /copy/ directory Blink code of the I/O Restart system.
has not yet been copied LED
in full, then the copy for 30 seconds (error
process is stopped on code 14, error
manual interrupt. The argument 2) or until the
data is incomplete. error is eliminated.
Internal file system is As much data is copied Blink code of the I/O Check internal file
full until the file system is LED system and /copy/
full. (error code 14, error directory on the
The copy function is argument 3) until the memory card and
cancelled. The data is error is eliminated. delete data if necessary
incomplete. (e.g. via FTP,
formatting internal
drive or cleaning the
memory card on the
PC).
General internal error The copy function is Blink code of the I/O If necessary, restart
cancelled. The data is LED function and device.
incomplete. (error code 14, error
argument 7).
The file size may not be larger than the size of the internal drive!
Note that the amount of data in the /copy/ directory may not exceed the total size
of the internal drive.
366
7.4.2 Back-up Function (Saving Device Settings on the Memory
Card)
The fieldbus nodes and the SPS program are in operation and the memory card is
plugged in.
On the “Backup & Restore” page in the Web-based management system start the
function “Backup ALL device settings to removable disk” to save the data on the
internal drive and the device settings to the memory card during operation.
In this process, the files from the internal drive are stored in the directory
S:/copy/xxx and in the corresponding subdirectories on the memory card.
The information that is not present as files on the fieldbus controller is stored in
XML format in the S:/settings/ directory.
The device settings and files of the internal drive are then saved on the memory
card.
367
Table 39: Possible Errors During the Backup Function
Possible error Procedure Error message Solution
Memory card is full The copy function is Blink code of the I/O Replace the memory
cancelled. Device LED card with a new one,
settings and files in the (error code 14, error then restart the backup
/copy/ directory and the argument 4) until the function.
subdirectories are not error is eliminated. Create storage space on
saved completely on the memory card with
the memory card. the PC.
Memory card is write- Copying is not Blink code of the I/O Remove the memory
protected. possible, the backup LED card, remove the write
function is cancelled (error code 14, error protection, insert the
and the memory card argument 6) until the card again, then restart
remains as it was. error is eliminated. the backup function.
Manual interrupt The copy function is Blink code of the I/O Insert memory card,
cancelled. Device LED then restart the backup
settings and files in the for 30 seconds (error function.
/copy/ directory and the code 14, error
subdirectories are not argument 2) or until the
saved completely on error is eliminated.
the memory card.
General internal error The copy function is Blink code of the I/O If necessary, restart
cancelled. Device LED function and device.
settings and files in the (error code 14, error
/copy/ directory and the argument 6).
subdirectories are not
saved completely on
the memory card.
Pos : 90.3 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/F unktions beschr eibung/Speic her kartenfunktion/Speic her kartenfunkti on - Teil 2 - Res tor e 1 @ 19\mod_1403082011131_21.doc x @ 156222 @ 3 @ 1
On the “Backup & Restore” page in the Web-based management system, start the
“Restore device settings to removable disk using the options below” function in
order to load the device settings from the memory card to the internal drive during
normal operation.
For the Restore function, other options can be set that are described in the chapter
“Configuring in the Web-based Management System (WBM)”.
Pos : 90.4 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/F unktions beschr eibung/Speic her kartenfunktion/Speic her kartenfunkti on - Teil 2 - Res tor e 2 (88x) @ 19\mod_1403082548712_21.doc x @ 156248 @ @ 1
368
Figure 48: WBM Page “Backup & Restore”
Pos : 90.5 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/F unktions beschr eibung/Speic her kartenfunktion/Speic her kartenfunkti on - Teil 2 - Res tor e 3 @ 19\mod_1403082391088_21.doc x @ 156225 @ @ 1
In this process of loading device settings from the Memory Card, the data are
copied from the directory S:/copy/ on the memory card to the appropriate
directories on the internal drive.
The boot project is loaded automatically and the settings automatically activated
after a restart. The “PLC ROOT Location” defined on the “PLC” Web page
determines whether the boot project of the internal drive or the SD card is loaded.
369
Table 40: Possible Errors During the Restore Function
Possible error Procedure Error message Solution
No /copy/ and Fieldbus controller is No message. If memory card use is
/settings/ directories on working as if no desired, map the
the memory card memory card were directory structure of
present. the internal drive under
/copy/ on the memory
card on the PC.
Then restart the
fieldbus controller.
Manual interrupt If the /copy/ directory Blink code of the I/O Restart system.
has not yet been copied LED for 30 seconds
in full, then the copy (error code 14, error
process is stopped on argument 2) or until the
manual interrupt. The error is eliminated.
data is incomplete.
Internal file system is As much data is copied Blink code of the I/O Check internal file
full until the file system is LED (error code 14, system and /copy/
full. error argument 3) until directory on the
The copy function is the error is eliminated. memory card and if
cancelled. The data is necessary, delete files
incomplete. (e.g. through FTP,
formatting internal
drive or cleaning the
memory card on the
PC).
General internal error The copy function is Blink code of the I/O If necessary, restart
cancelled. The data is LED (error code 14, function and device.
incomplete. error argument 7).
The file size may not be larger than the size of the internal drive!
Note that the amount of data in the /copy/ directory may not exceed the total size
of the internal drive.
Pos : 90.6 /Dokumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/---Seitenwechs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
370
Pos : 90.7 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/F unktions beschr eibung/Speic her kartenfunktion/Speic her kartenfunkti on - Teil 3 - Ei nlegen einer Speic her karte i m Betri eb @ 16\mod_1375703452520_21.doc x @ 127766 @ 3 @ 1
During normal operation, the memory card is incorporated into the file system of
the fieldbus controller as a drive.
No automatic copy procedures are triggered.
The memory card is then ready for operation and available as drive S:.
Pos : 90.8 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/F unktions beschr eibung/Speic her kartenfunktion/Speic her kartenfunkti on - Teil 4 - Her aus ziehen der Speic her karte i m Betrieb @ 16\mod_1375703890858_21.doc x @ 127786 @ 3 @ 1
Table 41: Possible Errors when Inserting the Memory Card During Ongoing Operation
Possible error Procedure Error message Solution
Access to the memory The incorporation Blink code of the I/O Replace the memory
card is not possible (mounting) of the LED card with a new one.
memory card as drive (error code 14, error
is cancelled. argument 1) until the
The fieldbus controller error is eliminated.
behaves as if no
memory card were
present.
Memory card cannot be The incorporation Blink code of the I/O Replace the memory
read (mounting) of the LED card with a new one.
memory card as drive (error code 14, error
is cancelled. argument 1) until the
error is eliminated. For
access through SPS,
the error is reported via
the CODESYS library.
Memory card is not The incorporation Blink code of the I/O Replace memory card
formatted (mounting) of the LED with a new one or
memory card as drive (error code 14, error format with PC.
is cancelled. argument 1) until the
error is eliminated. For
access through SPS,
the error is reported via
the CODESYS library.
Memory card is not in The incorporation Blink code of the I/O Replace memory card
FAT or FAT32 format. (mounting) of the LED with a new one or
memory card as drive (error code 14, error format with PC.
is cancelled. argument 1) until the
error is eliminated. For
access through SPS,
the error is reported via
the CODESYS library.
371
7.4.5 Removing the Memory Card During Operation
The fieldbus nodes and the SPS program are in operation and the memory card is
plugged in.
Pos : 90.10 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung/Speic her kartenfunkti on/Speicher kartenfunktion - T eil 6 - WAGO-I/O- PRO- Projekt auf der SD-Karte s peichern @ 16\mod_1375703864124_21.doc x @ 127778 @ 3 @ 1
Table 42: Possible Errors when Removing the Memory Card During Ongoing Operation
Possible error Procedure Error message Solution
Read procedure is Read access is Blink code of the I/O If memory card usage
running cancelled. LED is desired, insert the
The fieldbus controller for 30 seconds (error memory card, then
then works without code 14, error restart the access
memory card. argument 2) if the function.
backup or restore
function is active.
For access through
SPS, the error is
reported via the
CODESYS library.
Write procedure is Write access is Blink code of the I/O If memory card usage
running cancelled. LED is desired, insert the
The fieldbus controller for 30 seconds (error memory card, then
then works without code 14, error restart the access
memory card. argument 2) if the function.
backup or restore
function is active.
For access through
SPS, the error is
reported via the
CODESYS library.
372
7.4.6 Saving WAGO-I/O-PRO project to Memory Card
To save a WAGO-I/O-PRO project on the SD card and to have it executed from
that location, activate the option “External SD memory card” on the WBM page
“PLC” (see also the Section “Configuration in the Web-based Management-
System” > “PLC page”).
Figure 49: Setting the Storage Location in the Web-based Management System
Switching of the PLC root location occurs immediately when you click the button
[SUBMIT].
WAGO-I/O PRO will then access the SD card file system (S:/PLC) instead of the
internal drive.
In this case, data (e.g., retain data) are read/written to or from the memory card, or
copied from/to the memory card file system.
In normal operation, data is read into the file system of the memory card or read
from it for further processing by the IEC-61131 application via a firmware library.
The LED above the SD card flashes yellow/orange while this is in progress.
Redefine the boot project after changing the "PLC Root Location"!
If you have changed the "PLC Root Location", the fieldbus controller boot project
will not be started, as it is then not located at the current "PLC Root Location".
No old data will be copied to the new "PLC Root Location".
You must therefore generate a new boot project using the menu item "Create boot
project" in WAGO-I/O-PRO.
If you require data for this which were created at the old "PLC Root Location",
copy these manually into the new root directory.
Pos : 90.12 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung/Speic her kartenfunkti on/Speicher kartenfunktion - T eil 8 (Hinweis 88x) @ 16\mod_1375704714111_21.doc x @ 127813 @ @ 1
373
Provide sufficient storage space for PLC folders!
The following can occur when there is less free storage space on the SD card than
is normally required for the PLC folder and the files it contains:
- The files “webvisu.htm” and “error_ini.xml” are created without any content,
meaning that the WBM page “Web Visu” is blank.
- The files “webvisu.htm” and “error_ini.xml” are created but are incomplete.
In either case, this condition remains until the entire "PLC" folder is deleted and
sufficient storage space made available.
The function “PLC Root Location” remains set to “External SD memory card”.
Pos : 90.13 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung/Speic her kartenfunkti on/Speicher kartenfunktion - T eil 9 @ 16\mod_1375704557646_21.doc x @ 127801 @ @ 1
374
Table 43: Possible Errors During SPS Access to the File System of the Memory Card
Possible error Procedure Error message Solution
Memory card is full Read functions are Error is reported via Replace the memory
executed, in case of the CODESYS library. card with a new one,
write access, the then restart the access
function is cancelled. function.
The data is incomplete Make space on the
or not updated. memory card with the
PC.
Memory card is write- Read functions are Error is reported via Remove the memory
protected. executed, write access the CODESYS library. card, remove the write
is not possible. The protection, insert the
memory card remains card again, then restart
Pos : 90.14 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung/Speic her kartenfunkti on/Speicher kartenfunktion - T eil 9 (Z eile 88x) @ 16\mod_1375705141071_21.doc x @ 127817 @ @ 1
as it was. the access function.
No memory card is Access function is Error is reported via If memory card usage
plugged in. cancelled. the CODESYS library. is desired, insert the
memory card, then
restart the access
Pos : 90.15 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung/Speic her kartenfunkti on/Speicher kartenfunktion - T eil 9 Z us atz alle) @ 16\mod_1375705155946_21.doc x @ 127821 @ @ 1
function.
Manual interrupt Access function is Error is reported via Restart the access
cancelled. the CODESYS library. function.
Pos : 90.16 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
375
Pos : 90.17 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung/Speic her kartenfunkti on/Speicher kartenfunktion - T eil 10 - FT P-Netz wer kz ugriff auf das Dateis ystem der Speic her karte @ 16\mod_1375705370458_21.doc x @ 127829 @ 3 @ 1
The FTP client accesses the file system of the memory card (drive S:) via the
network.
In normal operation, the FTP client writes data to the file system of the memory
card or reads data from the file system of the memory card.
Table 44: Possible Errors During the FTP Network Access on the File System of the Memory Card
Possible error Procedure Error message Solution
No memory card is Access function is Depending on the FTP If memory card usage
plugged in. cancelled. client used, the error is is desired, insert a
reported. memory card, then if
necessary, close the
existing FTP
connection and
establish a new one,
then restart FTP access.
Manual interrupt Access function is Depending on the FTP If necessary, close
cancelled. client used, the error is existing FTP
reported. connection and
establish a new one,
then restart FTP access.
By entering in the address bar of the web browser, access to stored web pages on
the memory card is possible.
Additional to the syntax of the Web page address, the reference field switch “/sd/”
is to be inserted to specify the directory of the SD card.
The address for the Web page is entered in the following manner:
http://<IP_address>/sd/<any_folder_except_PLC>/<any_file>.ssi
376
Pos : 90.19 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
Pos : 90.20 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung/Speic her kartenfunkti on/Speicher kartenfunktion - T eil 11 - Aufbau der Vz-Str uktur (Verzeic hnis 88x) @ 16\mod_1375703416942_21.doc x @ 127758 @ 3 @ 1
The restore function copies all files and subdirectories from the /copy/ directory of
the memory card onto the internal drive.
In addition, the device settings from the /settings/ directory is loaded and
activated.
The backup function copies all files and subdirectories from the internal drive into
the /copy/ directory on the memory card.
In addition, the device settings are written in the /settings/ directory on the
memory card.
377
Pos : 92 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Inbetri ebnehmen - Konfigurier en - Parametri eren - Bedienen/In Betri eb nehmen - Ü bersc hrift 1 @ 4\mod_1240901452750_21.doc x @ 31570 @ 1 @ 1
8 Commissioning
Pos : 93.1 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betrieb nehmen/Fel dbus knoten i n Betrieb nehmen/In Betrieb nehmen Ei nlei tung - Anfang (Koppler/C ontroll er) @ 4\mod_1238483034921_21.doc x @ 29371 @ @ 1
Good example!
This description is just an example and only serves to describe the procedure for a
local start-up of a single fieldbus node with a non-networked computer under
Windows.
Two work steps are required for start-up. The description of these work steps can
be found in the corresponding following sections.
Following the commissioning descriptions after which the fieldbus node is ready
for communication, the following topics are described:
After the topics specified above, you can find instructions for programming the
fieldbus controller with WAGO-I/O-PRO and the description of the internal web
pages of the web-based Management System (WBM) for additional settings of the
fieldbus controller.
Pos : 93.7 /Dokumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/---Seitenwechs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
378
Pos : 93.8 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betrieb nehmen/Fel dbus knoten i n Betrieb nehmen/PC und Fel dbus knoten ansc hließ en (Übersc hrift 2) @ 4\mod_1238677467406_21.doc x @ 29815 @ 2 @ 1
After the power is switched on, the fieldbus controller is initialized. The fieldbus
controller determines the I/O module configuration and creates a process image.
During startup, the I/O LED (red) will flash. After a brief period, the I/O LED
lights up green, indicating that the fieldbus controller is operational.
Pos : 93.11 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten i n Betri eb nehmen/H ochl auf und LEDs - F ehler 6-4: noc h kei ne IP- Adr ess e z ugewi esen @ 4\mod_1243590721843_21.doc x @ 34504 @ @ 1
If an error has occurred during startup, a fault code is flashed by the I/O LED.
If the I/O LED flashes 6 times (indicating error code 6) and then 4 times
(indicating error argument 4), an IP address has not been assigned yet.
Pos : 93.12 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten i n Betri eb nehmen/IP-Adres se an den F el dbus knoten vergeben - Übersc hrift 2 @ 4\mod_1243596274106_21.doc x @ 34544 @ 2 @ 1
379
Pos : 93.19.1 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten in Betri eb nehmen/IP-Adres se mi t dem Adress wahlsc halter vergeben - Ü bers chrift 3 @ 5\mod_1243949279644_21.doc x @ 34680 @ 3 @ 1
Use the address selection switch to set the host ID, i.e., the last byte of the IP
address, which is entered in the Web-Based Management System on WBM page
“TCP/IP”, entry “DIP switch IP-Adress”, with values between 1 and 254 binary
coded.
Example:
IP address saved in the fieldbus controller: 192.168.1
Set DIP switch value: 50 (00110010bin)
Resulting IP address saved in the fieldbus controller: 192.168.1.50
Address selection switch values 0 and 255 are predefined, address selection
switch disabled!
If you use the address selection switch to set the value 0 or 255, the address
selection switch is disabled and the setting configured in the fieldbus controller is
used. With the value 0, the settings of the Web based Management System or
ETHERNET-Settings apply. If you set the value 255, the configuration via DHCP
is activated.
The base address used consists of the first three bytes of the IP address. This
always depends on the IP address currently saved in the fieldbus controller.
The address selection switch setting to 1 … 254 then overwrites accordingly the
value of the host ID.
If there is still no static IP address in the fieldbus controller, the default value
192.168.1. defined by the firmware as the base address is used when setting the
DIP switch to 1 … 254.
1. To configure the IP address via the address selection switch by setting the
host ID (last position of the IP address) to a value that does not equal 0/255,
380
first convert the host ID to the binary representation.
For example, host ID 50 results in a binary code of 00110010.
2. Set the bits in sequence using the 8 address switches. Start with address
switch 1 to set bit 0 (LSB) and end with address switch 8 for bit 7 (MSB).
Figure 52: Address Selection Switch, for Example the Value Setting “50” (21 + 24 + 25)
3. Restart the fieldbus coupler after adjusting the address selection switch to
apply the configuration changes.
Pos : 93.20 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
381
Pos : 93.21.1 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten in Betri eb nehmen/IP-Adres se mi t DHC P vergeben - Ü bersc hrift 3, Die Besc hr umfasst folg Arbeitssc hritte, Ü4 DHCP akti v @ 5\mod_1244201774491_21.doc x @ 35007 @ 3 @ 1
Total network failure when there are two DHCP servers in the network!
To prevent network failure, never connect a PC, on which a DHCP server is
installed, to a global network. In larger networks, there is usually a DHCP server
already that can cause collisions and subsequent network failure.
Assign the DHCP server a fixed IP address and note common subnet!
Note that the DHCP server must have a fixed IP address and that the fieldbus
node and DHCP server must be in the same subnet.
• Enable DHCP
• Assigning the IP address permanently by option “use IP from EEPROM“
Set the address selection switch to 255 for active software configuration!
Set the address selection switch to 255 to disable the DIP switch and to enable
DHCP.
Restart the fieldbus node after adjusting the address selection switch to apply the
configuration changes.
382
Pos : 93.21.4 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten in Betri eb nehmen/U ntergruppen/Alternati v kann DHCP auc h über WBM o. Ether net- Setti ngs akti viert wer den ( mit Adress wahlsc halter) @ 22\mod_1431506854802_21.doc x @ 182108 @ @ 1
Alternatively, DHCP will be enabled on the internal Web pages or via WAGO-
ETHERNET-Settings.
Pos : 93.21.5 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten in Betri eb nehmen/DHC P muss akti vi ert s ein, Automatisc he IP-Vergabe durch DHCP @ 5\mod_1244202995679_21.doc x @ 35014 @ @ 1
Pos : 93.21.9 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten in Betri eb nehmen/D as U msc halten auf die Opti on „us e IP from EEPR OM“ nehmen Sie i m Web-Based-Manag. (-352, -881, - 882) @ 9\mod_1292516140287_21.doc x @ 67573 @ @ 1
You can enable the option “use IP from EEPROM” in the Web-based
Management System.
Pos : 93.21.10 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/In Betrieb nehmen/Fel dbus knoten in Betrieb nehmen/WBM aufrufen - Anl eitung (C ontroller) @ 4\mod_1239105878859_21.doc x @ 30228 @ @ 1
1. Open the Web browser on your client (such as the Microsoft Internet
Explorer) to have the HTML pages displayed.
2. Enter the IP address for your fieldbus node in the address line of the
browser and press [Return].
This is provided for secure access and entails three different user groups:
admin, guest and user.
383
about your fieldbus controller (start page can be changed on HTML page
“Security”).
You can navigate to other information using the hyperlinks in the left
navigation bar.
Pos : 93.21.11 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/In Betrieb nehmen/Fel dbus knoten in Betrieb nehmen/Klic ken Si e i n der li nken N avigationsleis te auf den Li nk „ Por t“, um di e HTM L-Seite für die... @ 4\mod_1239109846656_21.doc x @ 30255 @ @ 1
4. In the left navigation bar click on Port to open the HTML page for selecting
a protocol.
Pos : 93.21.12 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/In Betrieb nehmen/Fel dbus knoten in Betrieb nehmen/Si e erhalten ei ne Liste aller Protokoll e, die der C ontroller unterstützt. (Contr oller) @ 4\mod_1239110517375_21.doc x @ 30265 @ @ 1
You are shown a list of all the protocols supported by the fieldbus controller.
Pos : 93.21.13 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/In Betrieb nehmen/Fel dbus knoten in Betrieb nehmen/Untergruppen/Wähl en Si e di e Option " us e IP fr om EEPROM" -DHC P deakti vi eren @ 22\mod_1430986790258_21.doc x @ 181858 @ @ 1
8. For a software reset, click in the left navigation bar on the link [Security] to
open the HTML page on which you can set passwords and trigger a
software reset.
10. Now you must use the changed IP address, if you want to access again on
this device via browser.
Pos : 93.22 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
384
Pos : 93.23.1 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten in Betri eb nehmen/IP-Adres se mi t ETHERN ET-Setti ngs vergeben - Ü bers chrift 3 @ 4\mod_1239022358609_21.doc x @ 29973 @ 3 @ 1
Eine nähere Ang abe von J ürgen er hal
WAGO communication cables or WAGO radio-link adapters can be used for data
communication.
Pos : 93.23.4 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten in Betri eb nehmen/Hinweis: Kommuni kati ons kabel 750-920 nic ht unter Spannung s tec ken! (Controll er) @ 6\mod_1264499356321_21.doc x @ 48718 @ @ 1
Pos : 93.23.6 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten in Betri eb nehmen/Ver binden Sie di e s eri. Schnittst. Ihres PCs unt. Ver wend. eines WAGO-Kommkabels 1. (Controll er) @ 8\mod_1275654604703_21.doc x @ 57386 @ @ 1
385
Pos : 93.23.9 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten in Betri eb nehmen/IP-Adres se mi t ETHERN ET-Setti ngs vergeben, Sc hritt 7 " Statisc he Konfigur ation" R egister "Netz wer k" @ 21\mod_1416841859547_21.doc x @ 168832 @ @ 1
6. Enter the required IP Address and, if applicable, the address of the subnet
mask and gateway.
Pos : 93.23.11 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/In Betrieb nehmen/Fel dbus knoten in Betrieb nehmen/IP- Adr ess e mit ETH ERNET- Setti ngs verg eben, Schritt 9 bis 10 IP übernehmen, WBM öffnen @ 5\mod_1244199645897_21.doc x @ 34997 @ @ 1
7. Click on the [Write] button to apply the settings in the fieldbus node.
386
Pos : 93.25.1 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten in Betri eb nehmen/IP-Adres se mi t einem BootP-Ser ver vergeben und über SPS (Controll er) @ 6\mod_1265022423859_21.doc x @ 49093 @ 33 @ 1
When assigning an address using a PLC program, this can be done using the
"Ethernet_Set_Network_Config" function block from the "Ethernet.lib" library
integrated in WAGO-I/O-PRO.
Assigning the IP address using a BootP server depends on the respective BootP
program. Handling is described in the respective manual for the program or in the
respective integrated help texts.
Pos : 93.25.2 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten in Betri eb nehmen/Hinweis: F ür akti ve Softwar e-Konfig urati on, Adr ess wahlsc halter auf 0 stellen! (BootP) @ 5\mod_1244020081653_21.doc x @ 34753 @ @ 1
387
BootP must be enabled on the Web pages!
Note that BootP must be enabled on the internal Web pages of the WBM, HTML
page “Port configuration”.
BootP is enabled by default when delivered.
Pos : 93.25.5 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten in Betri eb nehmen/Infor mation: IP-Adr ess vergabe mit BootP- Ser ver auch unter Li nux. Beliebig er BootP- Ser ver @ 9\mod_1281681162420_21.doc x @ 63552 @ @ 1
Additional Information
Assigning IP addresses using a BootP server can be carried out in any Windows
and Linux operating system. Any other BootP servers may also be used, besides
the WAGO-BootP server.
Pos : 93.25.6 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten in Betri eb nehmen/Infor mation: Sie er halten den „ WAGO- BootP-Ser ver 759- 315“ kos tenlos auf... @ 9\mod_1281681258507_21.doc x @ 63555 @ @ 1
• Note MAC ID
• Note IP address
• Assigning the IP address and enable BootP
•
Pos : 93.25.8 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten in Betri eb nehmen/MAC- ID ermittel n ( BootP) Übersc hrift 4 @ 6\mod_1264500781687_21.doc x @ 48740 @ 4 @ 1
Assigning the IP address permanently by option “use IP from EEPROM”
8.2.5.1 Note MAC ID
Pos : 93.25.9 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten in Betri eb nehmen/MAC- ID ermittel n - Sc hritte 1- 2 (C ontroller) @ 5\mod_1244023567062_21.doc x @ 34779 @ @ 1
1. Write down the controller’s MAC address (see label or peel-off strip).
If the fieldbus is already installed, turn off the operating voltage of the
fieldbus controller, then take the fieldbus controller out of the assembly of
your fieldbus node and note the MAC ID of your fieldbus controller.
The MAC ID is applied to the back of the fieldbus controller or on the paper strip
with two self-adhesive peel-off strips on the side of the fieldbus controller.
2. Plug the fieldbus controller into the assembly of the fieldbus node.
Pos : 93.25.10 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/In Betrieb nehmen/Fel dbus knoten in Betrieb nehmen/PC und Fel dbus knoten an F el dbus ans chl uss ansc hließ en (Aufz ähl ung F orts etz ung) @ 4\mod_1243520482117_21.doc x @ 34109 @ @ 1
4. Start the PC that assumes the function of the master and BootP server.
Pos : 93.25.12 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/In Betrieb nehmen/Fel dbus knoten in Betrieb nehmen/Sc halten Sie di e Spannungsvers orgung am C ontroll er (DC-24V-N etzteil) ei n. @ 4\mod_1239089269406_21.doc x @ 30071 @ @ 1
5. Switch on the power at the fieldbus controller (DC 24 V power supply unit).
Pos : 93.25.13 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/In Betrieb nehmen/Fel dbus knoten in Betrieb nehmen/Hoc hl auf und LEDs (Contr oller) @ 4\mod_1243521648173_21.doc x @ 34301 @ @ 1
388
After the power is switched on, the fieldbus controller is initialized. The fieldbus
controller determines the I/O module configuration and creates a process image.
During startup, the I/O LED (red) will flash. After a brief period, the I/O LED
lights up green, indicating that the fieldbus controller is operational.
Pos : 93.25.14 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/In Betrieb nehmen/Fel dbus knoten in Betrieb nehmen/Hoc hl auf und LEDs - F ehl er allgemein, Hi nweis : Sig nalisi erung/Blinkcode-Aus w. @ 4\mod_1243594306433_21.doc x @ 34538 @ @ 1
If an error occurs during start-up indicated by the I/O LED flashing red, evaluate
the error code and argument and resolve the error.
Pos : 93.25.15 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/In Betrieb nehmen/Fel dbus knoten in Betrieb nehmen/Hoc hl auf und LEDs - F ehl er: keine IP (C ontroll er) @ 6\mod_1264498406795_21.doc x @ 48704 @ @ 1
Error codes and error arguments are indicated by the frequency of a LED flash
sequence. For example: Error code 6, followed by error argument 4, is indicated
by the I/O LED after controller start-up with 6 red error code flashes, followed by
four red flashes of the error argument. This indicates that an IP address has not yet
been assigned.
Pos : 93.25.16 /D okumentation allgemein/Gliederungselemente/---Sei tenwechsel--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
389
Pos : 93.25.17 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/In Betrieb nehmen/Fel dbus knoten in Betrieb nehmen/IP- Adr ess e ermi tteln ( BootP) Ü bersc hrift 4 @ 6\mod_1264497894131_21.doc x @ 48701 @ 4 @ 1
For Windows 7:
4. The IP address, subnet mask and, where required, the PC's gateway address
appear in the Properties window. Note these values:
390
8.2.5.3 Assigning the IP address
1. Based on the handling, which depends on the BootP program set, assign the
required IP address for your fieldbus node.
3. To apply the new IP address, use e.g. a hardware reset to restart your
fieldbus node by interrupt the voltage supply for approx. 2 seconds.
Pos : 93.25.20 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/In Betrieb nehmen/Fel dbus knoten in Betrieb nehmen/IP- Adr ess e dauerhaft durc h Opti on „us e IP from EEPR OM“ - Übersc hrift 4 @ 5\mod_1244025692102_21.doc x @ 34786 @ 4 @ 1
When the BootP protocol is activated the fieldbus controller expects the BootP
server to be permanently available. If there is no BootP server available after a
PowerOn reset, the network will remain inactive.
Pos : 93.25.22 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/In Betrieb nehmen/Fel dbus knoten in Betrieb nehmen/Hinweis: Für die dauer hafte Adress vergabe muss di e i m EEPROM g esp. ver wend. - BootP/DHC P (Contr oller) @ 5\mod_1244626215944_21.doc x @ 35154 @ @ 1
Pos : 93.25.23 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/In Betrieb nehmen/Fel dbus knoten in Betrieb nehmen/Das U msc halten auf die Option „ use IP fr om EEPROM“ nehmen Si e i m Web- Bas ed-Manag. (-352, -881, -882) @ 9\mod_1292516140287_21.doc x @ 67573 @ @ 1
You can enable the option “use IP from EEPROM” in the Web-based
Management System.
391
Pos : 93.25.25 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/In Betrieb nehmen/Fel dbus knoten in Betrieb nehmen/WBM aufrufen - Anl eitung (C ontroller) @ 4\mod_1239105878859_21.doc x @ 30228 @ @ 1
1. Open the Web browser on your client (such as the Microsoft Internet
Explorer) to have the HTML pages displayed.
2. Enter the IP address for your fieldbus node in the address line of the
browser and press [Return].
This is provided for secure access and entails three different user groups:
admin, guest and user.
4. In the left navigation bar click on Port to open the HTML page for selecting
a protocol.
Pos : 93.25.27 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/In Betrieb nehmen/Fel dbus knoten in Betrieb nehmen/Si e erhalten ei ne Liste aller Protokoll e, die der C ontroller unterstützt. (Contr oller) @ 4\mod_1239110517375_21.doc x @ 30265 @ @ 1
You are shown a list of all the protocols supported by the fieldbus controller.
Pos : 93.25.28 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/In Betrieb nehmen/Fel dbus knoten in Betrieb nehmen/Untergruppen/Wähl en Si e di e Option " us e IP fr om EEPROM" - BootP deakti vieren @ 22\mod_1430745863672_21.doc x @ 181688 @ @ 1
Pos : 93.25.29 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/In Betrieb nehmen/Fel dbus knoten in Betrieb nehmen/Untergruppen/Softwar e-Res et durchführen und mit neuer IP Br ows er öffnen. @ 22\mod_1431076574867_21.doc x @ 181918 @ @ 1
8. For a software reset, click in the left navigation bar on the link [Security] to
open the HTML page on which you can set passwords and trigger a
software reset.
10. Now you must use the changed IP address, if you want to access again on
this device via browser.
Pos : 93.25.30 /D okumentation allgemein/Gliederungselemente/---Sei tenwechsel--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
392
Pos : 93.25.31 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/In Betrieb nehmen/Fel dbus knoten in Betrieb nehmen/Gründe für ei ne fehlg esc hlagene IP-Adress vergabe (bei BootP) (Contr oller) @ 4\mod_1239098186078_21.doc x @ 30141 @ 4 @ 1
• The PC on whom the BootP server is running is not located in the same
subnet as the fieldbus controller; i.e., the IP addresses do not match.
Example:
Sub net mask: 255.255.255.0 (default value for fieldbus
controllers)
PC IP: 192.168.2.100
Fieldbus controller IP: 192.168.1.200
Due to the sub net mask, the first 3 digits of the IP addresses must match.
393
Pos : 93.27.1 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten in Betri eb nehmen/F unktion des F eldbus knotens tes ten - Ü berschrift 2 @ 5\mod_1244635054676_21.doc x @ 35193 @ 2 @ 1
1. To ensure that the IP address is correct and to test communication with the
fieldbus node, first turn off the operating voltage of the fieldbus node.
After the power is switched on, the fieldbus controller is initialized. The fieldbus
controller determines the I/O module configuration and creates a process image.
During startup, the I/O LED (red) will flash. After a brief period, the I/O LED
lights up green, indicating that the fieldbus controller is operational.
Pos : 93.27.5 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten in Betri eb nehmen/H ochl auf und LEDs - F ehler allgemei n, Hi nweis: Signalisierung/Bli nkc ode-Aus w. @ 4\mod_1243594306433_21.doc x @ 34538 @ @ 1
If an error occurs during start-up indicated by the I/O LED flashing red, evaluate
the error code and argument and resolve the error.
Pos : 93.27.6 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten in Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten testen, Sc hritt 3-6 @ 5\mod_1244638753496_21.doc x @ 35212 @ @ 1
3. To test the coupler’s newly assigned I/P address, start a DOS window by
clicking on the Start menu item Programs/MS-DOS Prompt.
4. In the DOS window, enter the command: "ping " followed by the IP address
of your coupler in the following format:
5. When the [Enter] key has been pressed, your PC will receive a query from
the coupler, which will then be displayed in the DOS window.
If the error message: "Timeout" appears, please compare your entries again
to the allocated IP address and check all connections.
394
6. When the test has been performed successfully, you can close the DOS
prompt.
395
Pos : 93.29.1 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten in Betri eb nehmen/Fl ash-D ateis ystem vor ber eiten - Ü berschrift 2 @ 5\mod_1244641182202_21.doc x @ 35222 @ 2 @ 1
The flash file system must be prepared in order to use the Web interface of the
fieldbus controller to make all configurations.
After the power is switched on, the fieldbus controller is initialized. The fieldbus
controller determines the I/O module configuration and creates a process image.
During startup, the I/O LED (red) will flash. After a brief period, the I/O LED
lights up green, indicating that the fieldbus controller is operational.
Pos : 93.29.7 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten in Betri eb nehmen/H ochl auf und LEDs - F ehler allgemei n, Hi nweis: Signalisierung/Bli nkc ode-Aus w. @ 4\mod_1243594306433_21.doc x @ 34538 @ @ 1
If an error occurs during start-up indicated by the I/O LED flashing red, evaluate
the error code and argument and resolve the error.
Pos : 93.29.8 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten in Betri eb nehmen/Fl ash-D ateis ystem vor ber eiten, ETH ERNET-Setti ngs starten, Dateis ystem z urüc ksetzen Sc hritt 4-6 @ 5\mod_1244643184660_21.doc x @ 35238 @ @ 1
396
5. In the top menu bar, select Reset File System to format the file system and
to extract the Web pages of the flash file system.
Pos : 93.30 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
397
Pos : 93.31.1 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten in Betri eb nehmen/Echtzei tuhr s ync hronisier en - Übersc hrift 2 @ 5\mod_1244643344108_21.doc x @ 35241 @ 2 @ 1
The fieldbus controller's real-time clock enables a date and time indication for
files in the flash file system.
Pos : 93.31.3 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten in Betri eb nehmen/Echtzei tuhr s ync hronisier en, Listenpunkte, Z wisc henübersc hrift: ...mi t ETHERN ET Setti ngs s ynchr on. @ 5\mod_1244644164581_21.doc x @ 35258 @ @ 1
At start-up, synchronize the real-time clock with the PC's current time.
After the power is switched on, the fieldbus controller is initialized. The fieldbus
controller determines the I/O module configuration and creates a process image.
During startup, the I/O LED (red) will flash. After a brief period, the I/O LED
lights up green, indicating that the fieldbus controller is operational.
Pos : 93.31.6 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten in Betri eb nehmen/H ochl auf und LEDs - F ehler allgemei n, Hi nweis: Signalisierung/Bli nkc ode-Aus w. @ 4\mod_1243594306433_21.doc x @ 34538 @ @ 1
If an error occurs during start-up indicated by the I/O LED flashing red, evaluate
the error code and argument and resolve the error.
Pos : 93.31.7 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten in Betri eb nehmen/Echtzei tunhr s ynchr onisi eren - ETH ERNET- Settings starten, Scr eens hotbsp, Sychnc hr., Sc hritte 4-6 @ 5\mod_1244644387640_21.doc x @ 35261 @ @ 1
398
Figure 54: Example of Time Synchronization in ETHERNET Settings
6. Click on the [Apply] button.
Pos : 93.31.8 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten in Betri eb nehmen/Echtzei tuhr s ync hronisier en - WBM starten, WBM Cl oc k Scr eenbsp., Eins tell ung en, Schritte 1-5 @ 5\mod_1244644813093_21.doc x @ 35264 @ @ 1
1. Launch a Web browser (e.g., MS Internet Explorer or Mozilla) and enter the
IP address you have assigned your fieldbus node in the address bar.
4. If an inquiry screen appears, enter your user name and password (default:
user = “admin”, password = “wago” or user = “user”, password = “user”).
The HTML page "Clock configuration" loads.
5. Set the values in the fields “Time on device”, “Date” and “Timezone” to the
current values and enable the “Daylight Saving Time (DST)” option if
necessary.
399
Figure 55: Example of WBM Clock Configuration
Pos : 93.31.9 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten in Betri eb nehmen/IP-Adres se über das Web- based M anagement-System vergeben - Sc hritte 6- 7 SUBM IT, N eustart @ 5\mod_1244125431662_21.doc x @ 34964 @ @ 1
7. Restart the fieldbus node to apply the settings of the Web interface.
Pos : 93.32 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
400
Pos : 93.33.1 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine M odul e)/Übersc hriften für all e Serien/Inbetriebnehmen - Konfigurieren - Parametrier en - Bedi enen/Wer ksei nstellungen wi ederherstellen - Ü berschrift 2 @ 19\mod_1400835342342_21.doc x @ 154641 @ 2 @ 1
5. In the top menu bar, select [Factory Settings] and click [Yes] to confirm.
A restart of the fieldbus node is implemented automatically. The start takes place
with the default settings.
Pos : 94 /D okumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/---Seitenwechs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
401
Pos : 95.1 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betrieb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PR O programmi eren/PFC mit WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en - Übersc hrift 1, mit Bes chr eibung T eil 1 @ 4\mod_1240896463296_21.doc x @ 31480 @ 1 @ 1
Pos : 95.5 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betrieb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PR O programmi eren/Hinweis: Zur Nutzung des PLC-Br owsers mit Admi nistr ator benutz erdaten anmelden! @ 14\mod_1361182544053_21.doc x @ 112138 @ @ 1
402
Log in to use the PLC browser with administrator user data!
To use the PLC browser functionality in WAGO-I/O-PRO, log into the PLC
browser with the administrator user data (default user “admin”, password
“wago”). Enter “login admin wago” in the command line of the PLC browser.
Pos : 95.6 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betrieb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PR O programmi eren/PFC mit WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en - Bes chr eibung T eil 2 @ 9\mod_1282112143230_21.doc x @ 63803 @ @ 1
Explanations are also provided as to how the IEC 61131-3 program is transferred
and how suitable communication drivers are loaded.
403
Additional Information:
For a detailed description of using the software, refer to the manual for the
“WAGO-I/O-PRO”. This manual is located in the Internet under
http://www.wago.com.
A dialog window then appears on which you can set the target system for
programming.
Pos : 95.7 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betrieb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PR O programmi eren/Dial ogfens ter Zi els ys temeins tell ung en aus wähl en – Bil d Aus wahlliste (750- xxx) @ 13\mod_1352725111339_21.doc x @ 105893 @ @ 1
3. Select the respective entry in the select list for your fieldbus controller and
then click OK.
Pos : 95.9 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betrieb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PR O programmi eren/Projekt anl egen, Progr ammi erart wählen @ 4\mod_1240904374062_21.doc x @ 31566 @ @ 1
4. In the dialog window that appears select the program type (AWL, KOP,
FUP, AS, ST or CFC).
Pos : 95.10 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/Bus kl emmenkonfigurati on z usammenzustell en und in Konfigurations datei „ EA-c onfig.xml“ abbilden @ 4\mod_1240904494468_21.doc x @ 31589 @ @ 1
To ensure that you can access all I/O module data properly in your new project,
first compile the I/O module configuration based on the existing fieldbus node
hardware and map it in the configuration file “EA-config.xml”.
Pos : 95.11 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/Sc hrei bz ugriff in EA-config.xml festleg en 750- 841, -871, -872/020-000 @ 4\mod_1240906601609_21.doc x @ 31595 @ @ 1
This file defines whether write access is permitted to the modules from the IEC-
61131-3 program, from the MODBUS/TCP or from Ethernet/IP.
Pos : 95.12 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/Generier ung der EA-config.xml über die Konfiguration mit dem WAGO-I/O- Konfigur ator @ 4\mod_1240907172437_21.doc x @ 31613 @ @ 1
As described below, this file can be generated via configuration using the WAGO
I/O Configurator.
Pos : 95.13 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
404
Pos : 95.14 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/Fel dbusc ontroll er mit dem I/O-Konfigurator konfiguri eren @ 4\mod_1240907399109_21.doc x @ 31617 @ 2 @ 1
1. 1. In the left half of the screen for the WAGO-I/O-PRO interface, select
the tab Resources.
4. Right-click on the entry K-Bus and then select Edit in the context
menu.
5. In the “Configuration” window that then opens, click on Add to open the
module selection window.
6. Select the I/O module you wish to add from the module catalog and attach it
to the end of the internal data bus structure by clicking on [>>] and OK.
7. Position all of the required I/O modules in their correct order until this
arrangement matches the configuration of the physical node.
Arrange the tree structure in the hardware configuration in the same manner.
Include all I/O modules which supply or receive data.
If you access your fieldbus controller online, you can use the [Start WAGO-I/O-
CHECK and scan] button in the “Configuration” window to read in the
physically linked fieldbus controllers with the series-connected I/O modules and
display all of the components.
The internal data bus structure in the WAGO I/O Configurator must match
the physical node structure!
The number of I/O modules that send or receive data must correspond to the
existing hardware (except for supply modules, copying modules or end modules,
for example). For the number of input and output bits or bytes of the individual
I/O modules, please refer to their corresponding descriptions.
405
Additional information
To open the data sheet for an I/O module, click in the “Configuration” window on
the corresponding I/O module and then click the [Data sheet] button. The data
sheet is then shown in a separate window.
All current data sheets are available on our website http://www.wago.com under
Documentation.
8. Click OK to accept the node configuration and close the dialog window.
The addresses for the control system configuration are then recalculated and the
tree structure for the configuration is updated.
Pos : 95.15 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/Zugriffs berec htigung änder n 750-841, - 871, -872, -873 @ 4\mod_1240910417718_21.doc x @ 31640 @ @ 1
If required, you can also modify the authorization privileges for individual I/O
modules if they are to be accessed via fieldbus (MODBUS/TCP/IP or
Ethernet/IP). Initially, write access from the PLC is defined for each I/O module
that is added. Proceed as follows to change this setting:
Pos : 95.16 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/Zugriff auf di e Kl emmendaten besti mmen @ 4\mod_1240910665484_21.doc x @ 31647 @ @ 1
10. Define for each module from where access to the module data is to be
carried out.
You can choose from the following settings in the column “PI Assignment” for
this:
Pos : 95.17 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/Zugriffs berec htigung - PLC , PLC ( Standardeins tell ung) - Z ugriff vom PFC aus @ 4\mod_1240910818906_21.doc x @ 31650 @ @ 1
After completing these settings you can begin the IEC-61131-3 programming.
Pos : 95.21 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/Zuordnen-- Wenn Si e das Projekt übers etz en (Menü Pr ojekt > Ü bers etzen/Alles übers etz en) und i n den @ 21\mod_1415208625731_21.doc x @ 167255 @ @ 1
406
Additional Information
For a detailed description of using the software WAGO-I/O-PRO and the I/O
Configurator, refer to the online Help function for WAGO-I/O-PRO.
Pos : 95.24 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
407
Pos : 95.25 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/Fel dbusc ontroll er mit der Datei EA-config.xml konfigurier en @ 4\mod_1241698395500_21.doc x @ 32750 @ 3 @ 1
Configuration using the file “EA-config.xml” that is already stored in the fieldbus
controller is described in this section.
Pos : 95.26 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/Hinweis: Konfigurati onsei ntr äge i n WAGO-I/O- PRO übersc hrei ben „ EA-c onfig.xml“ bei D ownl oad! @ 4\mod_1242042856796_21.doc x @ 32900 @ @ 1
1. Open any FTP client. You can also use the Windows FTP client in the DOS
prompt window:
2. Then, enter admin as the user login and wago as the password.
The fourth line contains the necessary information for the first I/O module.
The entry MAP=PLC assigns write access privileges to the IEC-61131-3 program
for the first module.
Pos : 95.28 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/Mit der D atei EA-c onfig.xml konfigurieren - Zugriff ändern, PLC durch FB1 oder F B2 ers etzen @ 4\mod_1240919066718_21.doc x @ 31773 @ @ 1
4. If you want to enable access via MODBUS/TCP, replace "PLC" with "FB1"
and for access from Ethernet/IP, replace "PLC" with "FB2":
408
<Module ARTIKEL NUMBER=“ “ MAP=“FB1“ LOC=“ALL“>
</Module>
Pos : 95.29 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/Mit der D atei EA-c onfig.xml konfigurieren - Zeil en hi nzufüg en @ 4\mod_1240920351781_21.doc x @ 31800 @ @ 1
5. Then complete the fourth line for each individual module using this syntax
and set the corresponding assigned access privileges.
The number of line entries must correspond with the number of bus
terminals used!
It is imperative that the number of line entries concurs with the number of existing
hardware modules.
6. Save the file and reload it to the controller file system via FTP client.
Additional Information:
For a detailed description of how to use the software, refer to the WAGO-I/O-
PRO manual. The manual is available in the Internet under:
http://www.wago.com Documentation WAGO Software WAGO-I/O-
PRO 759-333
Pos : 95.30 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
409
Pos : 95.31 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/ETH ERNET-Bibli otheken für WAGO- I/O- PRO @ 4\mod_1240922020812_21.doc x @ 31825 @ 2 @ 1
Once the libraries have been integrated, function blocks, functions and data types
will be available that you can use the same as ones you have specifically defined.
Additional Information
All libraries are included on the installation CD for the software WAGO-I/O-PRO
or in the Internet under http://www.wago.com.
The libraries described below are specific to ETHERNET projects with WAGO-
I/O-PRO.
Pos : 95.32 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/ETH ERNET-Bibli otheken für WAGO- I/O- PRO - Tabelle @ 9\mod_1282203067362_21.doc x @ 63998 @ @ 1
410
Additional Information
For a detailed description of the function blocks and use of the software, refer to
the online Help function for WAGO-I/O-PRO or the WAGO-I/O-PRO manual in
the Internet under: http://www.wago.com.
Pos : 95.34 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
411
Pos : 95.35 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/Ei nsc hränkungen i m Funkti onsumfang @ 4\mod_1240813319046_21.doc x @ 31330 @ 2 @ 1
The fieldbus controller supports the process variants “HMI” and “WebVisu”.
Depending on the version, there are technological limitations.
Several options for complex visualization objects “Alarm” and “Trend” are only
provided by the “HMI” version. This applies, for example, to sending emails as a
response to an alarm or for navigating through and generating historical trend
data.
The overall size of the PLC program, visualization files, bitmaps, log files,
configuration files, etc. must fit into the file system.
The PLC browser delivers the amount of free disk space in response to the
command “fds” (FreeDiscSpace).
Pos : 95.38 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/Ei nsc hränkungen i m Funkti onsumfang - Pr oz essdatenbuffer 16 kB @ 4\mod_1240836025546_21.doc x @ 31407 @ @ 1
412
The PLC browser provides an overview of the real execution times for all
CoDeSys tasks with the command “tsk”.
If in a PLC program, operating system functions are used; e.g., for the handling of
“sockets” or the “file system”, these execution times are not taken into
consideration covered by the command “tsk”.
Pos : 95.41 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/Ei nsc hränkungen i m Funkti onsumfang - Zähl er CTU @ 4\mod_1240836717125_21.doc x @ 31422 @ @ 1
CTU counter:
The CTU counter operates in a value range of 0 to 32767.
Pos : 95.42 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/Ei nsc hränkungen i m Funkti onsumfang - Hinweis EEPROM Teil 1 @ 7\mod_1271319786826_21.doc x @ 55135 @ @ 1
• WAGO-I/O-PRO
• WagoLibDaylightSaving SetDaylightSavings
• EthernetLib SetNetworkConfig
Pos : 95.44 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/Ei nsc hränkungen i m Funkti onsumfang - Hinweis EEPROM Teil 3 ( alle Ethernet-Contr oller) @ 7\mod_1271316220952_21.doc x @ 55120 @ @ 1
SetVariables
• MODBUS
• Register 0x1035 Time Offset
• Register 0x100B Watchdog parameters
• Register 0x1028 Network configuration
• Register 0x1036 Daylight saving
• Register 0x1037 Modbus response delay
• Register 0x2035 PI parameter
• Register 0x2043 Default configuration
Pos : 95.45 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/Ei nsc hränkungen i m Funkti onsumfang - Hinweis EEPROM Teil 4 ( 341, 841, 352/020- 000, 871, 872, 873) @ 7\mod_1271316578247_21.doc x @ 55127 @ @ 1
• Ethernet/IP
• Class 0xF5
• Class 0xF6
• Class 0x64
Pos : 95.46 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/Ei nsc hränkungen i m Funkti onsumfang - Hinweis EEPROM Teil 5 ( alle Ethernet-Koppl er/-Contr oller) @ 7\mod_1271316819859_21.doc x @ 55131 @ @ 1
• Parameter assignments
• BootP new parameters
• DHCP new parameters
• WAGO MIB write access
Pos : 95.47 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
413
Pos : 95.48 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/Generell e Hi nweis e z u den IEC-T as ks @ 4\mod_1240925127250_21.doc x @ 31878 @ 2 @ 1
414
Reference for Watchdog Settings!
For each tasks created, a watchdog can be enabled that monitors the execution time
of a task.
If the task runtime exceeds the specified watchdog time (e.g., t#200 ms), then the
watchdog event has occurred.
The runtime system stops the IEC program and reports an error.
If the watchdog time set is greater than the call interval of the task, then the
watchdog is restarted for each task call interval.
Figure 61: Watchdog Runtime Is Greater Than the Task Call Interval
Pos : 95.51 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
415
Pos : 95.52 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/Generell e Hi nweis e z u den IEC-T as ks - keine z yklis chen T as ks mit Aufr ufinter vall > 30 min möglich @ 4\mod_1240926230296_21.doc x @ 31912 @ @ 1
Pos : 95.53 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/Ablaufs chema ei ner IEC-T as k @ 4\mod_1240983766218_21.doc x @ 31950 @ 3 @ 1
2. If no full internal bus cycle has run since the last time the outputs were
written:
Wait until the next internal bus cycle is completed.
3. Reading of inputs and reading back of the outputs from the process image.
Pos : 95.56 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/Die wic htigsten T as k-Pri oritäten i m Ü ber blic k - Klemmenbus-Tas k/F eldbus-Tas k (Intern) ( 750-8xx) @ 4\mod_1240986465328_21.doc x @ 31984 @ @ 1
416
PLC-Comm task (internal)
The PLC-Comm task is active when logged in and takes up communication with
the CODESYS gateway.
Pos : 95.59 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/Infor mati on: Besc hrei bung z u dem Pr ogrammiertool WAGO-I/O-PR O @ 4\mod_1240987323640_21.doc x @ 31999 @ @ 1
Additional Information
For a detailed description of using the software, refer to the manual for the
“WAGO-I/O-PRO”. This manual is located in the Internet under
http://www.wago.com.
Pos : 95.60 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
417
Pos : 95.61 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/Sys temereig nisse @ 4\mod_1241096393312_21.doc x @ 32133 @ 23 @ 1
The system events to be employed for this depend on the target system. These
events consist of the list of supported standard system events for the control
system and any other manufacturer-specific events which may have been added.
3. Disable the control boxes by removing the hatch marks through a mouse
click.
418
Additional Information:
Allocation of the system events to the specific modules to be called up is clarified
in the manual for the programming tool WAGO-I/O-PRO in the Internet under
http://www.wago.com.
Pos : 95.62 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
419
Pos : 95.63 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/IEC- Programm auf den Contr oller übertrag en @ 4\mod_1241097223359_21.doc x @ 32136 @ 2 @ 1
Suitable communication drivers are required for transfer; these can be loaded and
configured using WAGO-I/O-PRO.
Additional Information
The following description is used for fast access. For details on installing missing
communication drivers and using the software, refer to “WAGO-I/O-PRO”
available in the Internet under http://www.wago.com.
Pos : 95.66 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
420
Pos : 95.67 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/Appli kati on mittels s erieller Sc hnitts telle übertragen ( Einl eitung) @ 4\mod_1241516209250_21.doc x @ 32380 @ 3 @ 1
Watch the position of the mode selector switch when accessing the controller!
Prerequisite for the access to the fieldbus controller is that the operating mode
switch of the controller, which is located behind the cover of the fieldbus
controller next to the service interface, is in the center or top position.
Use the WAGO communication cable to set up a physical connection via serial
service port. This cable is included in the scope of supply for the IEC-61131-3
programming tool (order no. 759-333), or can be procured as an accessory item
under order no. 750-920.
Pos : 95.68 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/F eldbus knoten i n Betri eb nehmen/Hi nweis : Kommuni kati ons kabel 750-920 nic ht unter Spannung s tec ken! (Controll er) @ 6\mod_1264499356321_21.doc x @ 48718 @ @ 1
1. Check that the controller mode selector switch is set to the center or top
position.
If this is not the case, move the mode selector switch to the center or top
position.
A communication driver is required for serial data transfer. This driver and its
parameters must be entered in the WAGO-I/O-PRO in the dialog window
“Communication parameters”.
3. Start the WAGO-I/O-PRO software under Start > Programs > WAGO
Software > WAGO-I/O-PRO.
5. Click New to set up a link and then enter a name, such as RS-232
Connection.
421
Figure 63: Dialog Window “Communication Parameters”
6. In the selection window, mark the required driver in the right side of the
window, Serial (RS-232) 3S Serial RS-232 driver, to configure the serial
link between the PC and the controller.
The following properties for the serial port are shown in the center dialog
window:
• Port: COM1
• Baud rate: 19200
• Parity: Even
• Stop-bits: 1
• Motorola byte order: No
422
Log in with the administrator password to program the fieldbus controller!
If you have activated password protection for port 2455 on the “Security” page of
the WBM, you have to log into WAGO-I/O-PRO in the menu Online > Log In to
obtain programming access to the fieldbus controller (default password “wago”).
Pos : 95.72 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/Online, Einl oggen, Bootproj ekt erz eug en, Starten der Programmabar beitung @ 4\mod_1242106439171_21.doc x @ 32920 @ @ 1
9. Under Online, click the menu item Login to log in to the fieldbus controller
You compiled project will also be executed by this method, if you restart the
fieldbus controller or if there is a power failure.
12. Once the program has been loaded, start program processing in the menu
Online, menu item Start.
This command starts the processing of your program in the control system or in
the simulation.
“ONLINE” and “RUNNING” will then appear at the right of the status bar.
13. To terminate online operation, click the menu item Log off in the menu
Online.
Pos : 95.73 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
423
Pos : 95.74 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/Appli kati on via ETH ERNET übertrag en (881, 880) @ 8\mod_1278940614634_21.doc x @ 59647 @ 3 @ 1
3. Click New to set up a connection and then specify a name, e.g. TcpIp
connection.
4. Mark the required TCP/IP driver in the right side of the dialog window to
configure the link between the PC and the controller via ETHERNET.
Use the new driver version “Tcp/Ip” (3S Tcp/Ip driver).
The following standard entries are shown in the center dialog window:
You have now configured the TCP/IP link with the communication
parameters/drivers.
Pos : 95.75 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/In WAGO-I/O-PRO pr ogrammier en/Online, Einl oggen, Bootproj ekt erz eug en, Starten der Programmabar beitung @ 4\mod_1242106439171_21.doc x @ 32920 @ @ 1
7. Under Online, click the menu item Login to log in to the fieldbus controller
424
Depending on whether a program is already present in the fieldbus controller, a
window will appear asking whether a (new) program should be loaded.
You compiled project will also be executed by this method, if you restart the
fieldbus controller or if there is a power failure.
10. Once the program has been loaded, start program processing in the menu
Online, menu item Start.
This command starts the processing of your program in the control system or in
the simulation.
“ONLINE” and “RUNNING” will then appear at the right of the status bar.
11. To terminate online operation, click the menu item Log off in the menu
Online.
Pos : 96 /D okumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/---Seitenwechs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
425
Pos : 97.1 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web- bas ed M anagement-Sys tem WBM/Im Web- bas ed M anagement-Sys tem konfiguri eren (Ei nleitung und Ü bersc hrift 1) @ 4\mod_1242217768500_21.doc x @ 33098 @ 1 @ 1
The HTML pages saved internally provide you with information about the
configuration and status of the fieldbus node. In addition, you can also change the
configuration of the device here.
You can also save HTML pages created yourself via the implemented file system.
1. To open the WBM, launch a Web browser (e.g., Microsoft Internet Explorer
or Mozilla Firefox).
4. Select the link to the desired HTML page in the left navigation bar.
A query dialog appears.
5. Enter your user name and password in the query dialog (default: user =
“admin”, password = “wago” or user = “user”, password = “user”).
The corresponding HTML page is loaded.
8. Restart the system to apply the settings (HTML page “Security”, button
[Software Reset]).
426
You can access the following WBM pages via the links given in the navigation
bar:
Pos : 97.2.1 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web- bas ed Management-Sys tem WBM/Ü bersicht N avigati onslis te/Informati on @ 16\mod_1374063152753_0.doc x @ 126437 @ @ 1
•
Pos : 97.2.2 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web- bas ed Management-Sys tem WBM/Ü bersicht N avigati onslis te/Ethernet @ 16\mod_1374065764504_0.doc x @ 126441 @ @ 1
Information
•
Pos : 97.2.3 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web- bas ed Management-Sys tem WBM/Ü bersicht N avigati onslis te/TCP/TCP/IP @ 16\mod_1374065769316_0.doc x @ 126445 @ @ 1
Ethernet
•
Pos : 97.2.4 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web- bas ed Management-Sys tem WBM/Ü bersicht N avigati onslis te/Port @ 16\mod_1374065788519_0.doc x @ 126491 @ @ 1
TCP/IP
•
Pos : 97.2.5 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web- bas ed Management-Sys tem WBM/Ü bersicht N avigati onslis te/SNM P @ 16\mod_1374065791610_0.doc x @ 126495 @ @ 1
Port
•
Pos : 97.2.6 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web- bas ed Management-Sys tem WBM/Ü bersicht N avigati onslis te/SNM P V3 @ 16\mod_1374065772532_0.doc x @ 126459 @ @ 1
SNMP
•
Pos : 97.2.7 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web- bas ed Management-Sys tem WBM/Ü bersicht N avigati onslis te/Watchdog @ 16\mod_1374062564302_0.doc x @ 126434 @ @ 1
SNMP V3
•
Pos : 97.2.8 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web- bas ed Management-Sys tem WBM/Ü bersicht N avigati onslis te/Cloc k @ 16\mod_1374065774617_0.doc x @ 126463 @ @ 1
Watchdog
•
Pos : 97.2.9 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web- bas ed Management-Sys tem WBM/Ü bersicht N avigati onslis te/Sec urity @ 16\mod_1374065776395_0.doc x @ 126467 @ @ 1
Clock
•
Pos : 97.2.10 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Ü bersic ht Navig ationsliste/M odbus @ 16\mod_1374065782395_0.doc x @ 126479 @ @ 1
Security
•
Pos : 97.2.11 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Ü bersic ht Navig ationsliste/EtherN et/IP @ 21\mod_1421331757264_0.doc x @ 171568 @ @ 1
Modbus
•
Pos : 97.2.12 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Ü bersic ht Navig ationsliste/PLC Info @ 16\mod_1374066196262_0.doc x @ 126507 @ @ 1
EtherNet/IP
•
Pos : 97.2.13 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Ü bersic ht Navig ationsliste/PLC @ 16\mod_1374066187945_0.doc x @ 126503 @ @ 1
PLC Info
•
Pos : 97.2.14 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Ü bersic ht Navig ationsliste/F eatures @ 16\mod_1374065780481_0.doc x @ 126475 @ @ 1
PLC
•
Pos : 97.2.15 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Ü bersic ht Navig ationsliste/I/I/O c onfig @ 16\mod_1374066198093_0.doc x @ 126511 @ @ 1
Features
•
Pos : 97.2.16 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Ü bersic ht Navig ationsliste/Dis k Info @ 16\mod_1374065784711_0.doc x @ 126483 @ @ 1
I/O config
•
Pos : 97.2.17 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Ü bersic ht Navig ationsliste/SD C ard @ 17\mod_1383569292541_0.doc x @ 136523 @ @ 1
Disk Info
•
Pos : 97.2.18 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Ü bersic ht Navig ationsliste/Bac kup & R estore @ 19\mod_1402409008821_0.doc x @ 155601 @ @ 1
SD Card
•
Pos : 97.2.19 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Ü bersic ht Navig ationsliste/WebVis u @ 16\mod_1374066199728_0.doc x @ 126515 @ @ 1
Backup & Restore
•
Pos : 97.3 /Dokumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/---Seitenwechs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
WebVisu
427
Pos : 97.4 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web- bas ed M anagement-Sys tem WBM/Seite Informati on/Informati on - Ei nlei tung @ 4\mod_1242221504031_21.doc x @ 33104 @ 2 @ 1
10.1 Information
The WBM page “Information” contains an overview of all important information
about your fieldbus coupler/controller.
Pos : 97.5 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web- bas ed M anagement-Sys tem WBM/Seite Informati on/Informati on - Bil d ( 750-880) @ 6\mod_1264684054999_21.doc x @ 48885 @ @ 1
428
Table 48: WBM Page “Information”
Coupler details
Entry Default Value (example) Description
Order number 750-880 750-880 Order number
Mac address 0030DEXXXXXX 0030DE000006 Hardware MAC address
Firmware kk.ff.bb (rr) 01.01.09 (00) Firmware revision number
revision (kk = compatibility, ff =
functionality, bb = bugfix, rr =
revision)
Actual network settings
Entry Default Value (example) Description
IP address 0.0.0.0 192.168.1.80 IP address,
Type of IP address assignment
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.240 Subnet mask
Gateway 0.0.0.0 192.168.1.251 Gateway
Host name ___ ___ Host name (not assigned here)
Domain name
Pos : 97.7 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web- bas ed M anagement-Sys tem WBM/Seite Informati on/Informati on - T abelle (750- 829, 849, -880, - 881, -871) Zeil e (S)NT P-Ser ver @ 8\mod_1279001927768_21.doc x @ 59690 @ @ 1
___ ___ Domain name (not assigned here)
(S)NTP server
Pos : 97.8 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web- bas ed M anagement-Sys tem WBM/Seite Informati on/Informati on - T abelle (750- 831, 871, -880, - 881, -884, -889) Teil 2 @ 17\mod_1382012431906_21.doc x @ 134435 @ @ 1
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Address of (S)NTP server
DNS server 1 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Address of first DNS server
DNS server 2 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Address of second DNS server
Module status
Entry Standard value Value (Example) Description
Error code 0 10 Error code
Error argument 0 5 Error argument
Error description Coupler running, OK Missmatch in Error description
CODESYS IO-
configuration
Control-Mode Disabled Control-Mode is Status of Control mode
status OFF
Pos : 97.9 /Dokumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/---Seitenwechs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
429
Pos : 97.10 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite ETH ERNET /Ethernet - Ei nleitung @ 4\mod_1242375638906_21.doc x @ 33190 @ 2 @ 1
10.2 Ethernet
Use the “Ethernet” HTML page to set the data transfer rate and bandwidth limit
for each of the two switch ports for data transfer via Ethernet.
Pos : 97.11 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite ETH ERNET /Ethernet - Bild (750- 352, -831, -852, - 880, -881, -884, - 889) @ 12\mod_1342085448431_21.doc x @ 99773 @ @ 1
430
Table 49: WBM Page “Ethernet”
Phy Configuration
Entry Default Description
Enable Port 1/Port 2
Enable Port
Disable Port 1/Port 2
Enable Autonegotiation
Automatically set the best possible transmission
Enable autonegotiation speed with “Enable Autonegotiation”.
Enable Autonegotiation
10 MBit Half Duplex
10 MBit Full Duplex Select half or full duplex for the ETHERNET to configure
100 MBit Half Duplex a fixed transmission speed 10 or 100 MBit
100 MBit Full Duplex
Pos : 97.13 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite ETH ERNET /Ethernet - Tabelle 1.1.1 M AC Address Filter, Enabl e ( 352, 829, 831, 880, 881, 882, 884, 885) @ 13\mod_1349336257447_21.doc x @ 103943 @ @ 1
431
Broadcast Protection limits the number of broadcast
telegrams per unit of time. If protection is on, the
broadcast packets are limited at 100 Mbit to 8
BC protection packets per 10 ms and at 10 Mbit to 8 packets per
100 ms. If the limit is exceeded, packets are lost.
Pos : 97.18 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite ETH ERNET /Ethernet - Tabelle T eil 2 (Port Mirror, Sniffer Port, Mirror Port) ( 352, 829, 880, 881, 884) @ 8\mod_1280405722425_21.doc x @ 61572 @ @ 1
Broadcast Protection disabled.
Enable port mirroring
Port Mirroring is used for network diagnostics.
Port Mirror Packets are mirrored from one port (mirror port) to
another (sniffer port).
Disable port mirroring
Select the sniffer port the mirror port should be mirrored
Sniffer Port to.
Select the mirror port which should be mirrored to the
Mirror Port sniffer port.
Pos : 97.19 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite ETH ERNET /Ethernet - Tabelle T eil 3 (MTU mit Hi nweis) (352, 829, 831, 852, 880, 881, 882, 884, 885) @ 8\mod_1280405988823_21.doc x @ 61575 @ @ 1
432
Pos : 97.22 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite TCP/IP/TCP/IP - Ei nlei tung @ 4\mod_1242383515859_21.doc x @ 33219 @ 2 @ 1
10.3 TCP/IP
You can configure network addressing and network identification on the
“TCP/IP” HTML page.
Pos : 97.23 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite TCP/IP/TCP/IP - Bil d (750-880, 881, 852, 884) @ 6\mod_1264769754409_21.doc x @ 49017 @ @ 1
433
Table 50: WBM Page “TCP/IP”
EEPROM Configuration Data
Entry Default Value Description
(example)
IP address 0.0.0.0 192.168.1.200 Enter IP address
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 Enter subnet mask
Gateway 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Enter gateway
Host name 0030DEXXX 0030DE026005 Enter host name
XXX
Domain name Enter domain name
DNS Server1 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Enter IP address of the first DNS server
DNS Server2 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Enter optional IP address of the second
Pos : 97.25 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite TCP/IP/TCP/IP - T abelle, Z eile Switc h-IP- Adr ess e (750-352, -880, - 881) @ 7\mod_1275317154555_21.doc x @ 57249 @ @ 1
DNS server
Switch IP-Address 192.168.1 192.168.5 Network address for the configuration of
Pos : 97.26 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite TCP/IP/TCP/IP - T abelle Teil 2 F W08 (SNT P port 123 enabl ed) @ 21\mod_1422007726742_21.doc x @ 172438 @ @ 1
the IP address with DIP switch
(S)NTP Server 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Enter IP address of the (S)NTP server
SNTP port 123 Activate „Simple Network Time
enabled Protocol“
Deactivate „Simple Network Time
Protocol“
SNTP Update Time Enter the delay after which the (S)NTP
3600 0
(sec. max. 65535) server requests the network time again
Pos : 97.27 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
434
Pos : 97.28 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite Port/Port - Ei nleitung @ 4\mod_1242385203187_21.doc x @ 33225 @ 2 @ 1
10.4 Port
Use the “Port” HTML page to enable or disable services available via the IP
protocol.
Pos : 97.29 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite Port/Port - Bil d (750-880+T elecontr ol 880/000-001, - 002, 881, 884) @ 6\mod_1264683394287_21.doc x @ 48882 @ @ 1
435
activating “Hypertext Transfer Protocol
over SSL-encrypted connection”
HTTPS (Port 443) Enabled
deactivating “Hypertext Transfer Protocol
over SSL-encrypted connection”
Pos : 97.37 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite Port/Port - Hinweis : Al ter nati ve IP- Adr ess vorgabe! @ 7\mod_1275052662153_21.doc x @ 57196 @ @ 1
Pos : 97.38 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
436
Pos : 97.39.1 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite SNMP/SNM P - Ü berschrift 2 @ 6\mod_1260193069166_21.doc x @ 46790 @ 2 @ 1
10.5 SNMP
Pos : 97.39.2 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite SNMP/SNM P - Einl eitung @ 4\mod_1242627851796_21.doc x @ 33417 @ @ 1
On the HTML page “SNMP”, you can perform the settings for the Simple
Network Management Protocol.
SNMP is a standard for device management within a TCP/IP network. The Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is responsible for transporting the control
data that allows the exchange of management information, the status and statistic
data between individual network components and a management system.
Pos : 97.39.3 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite SNMP/SNM P - D as Protokoll wird in der Versi on 1, 2c und 3 unterstützt. @ 4\mod_1243331480234_21.doc x @ 33890 @ @ 1
The SNMP of the ETHERNET TCP/IP controller includes the general MIB
according to RFC1213 (MIB II).
Pos : 97.39.5 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite SNMP/SNM P - SNMP- Obj ekte, Zus ätzlic h is t eine s pezielle WAGO-MIB eingebunden. (750-841, -871, - 830) @ 6\mod_1260527822597_21.doc x @ 47030 @ @ 1
SNMP is processed via port 161. The port number for SNMP traps (agent
messages) is 162.
Additional Information:
Additional information for SNMP, the Management Information Base (MIB) and
traps (event messages via SNMP) may be obtained from section “Fieldbus
Communication” > … > “SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol).”
Pos : 97.39.7 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite SNMP/SNM P - Betrac hten Si e die Ei nstellungen bez üglich SNM Pv1/v2c und SNMPv3 unabhängig... (C ontroller) @ 6\mod_1259926787164_21.doc x @ 46640 @ @ 1
Note that the settings for SNMPV1/V2c and SNMPV3 are separate from each
other: The different SNMP versions can be activated or used in parallel or
individually on a fieldbus controller.
Pos : 97.39.8 /D okumentati on allgemein/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
437
Pos : 97.39.9 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite SNMP/SNM P V1/V2c - Ü berschrift 3 @ 6\mod_1259929289842_21.doc x @ 46646 @ 3 @ 1
438
Table 52: WBM Page “SNMP”
SNMP Configuration
Entry Value (Default) Description
Name of device 750-880 Device name (sysName)
ETHERNET Device description (sysDescription)
Description
Controller 750-880
Physical location LOCAL Location of device (sysLocation)
Contact support@wago.com
Pos : 97.39.13 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Web- based M anagement-Sys tem WBM /Seite SNMP/SNMP - T abelle SNM P V1/V2 (750-352, -829, - 831, -841, -880, - 881, - 830) @ 6\mod_1260530858609_21.doc x @ 47052 @ @ 1
E-mail contact address (sysContact)
SNMP v1/v2 Manager Configuration
Entry Value (Default) Description
SNMP Activating SNMP Version 1/2c
Protocol Enable
V1/V2c Deactivating SNMP-Version 1/2c
Local Community Used community name
public
Name
SNMP v1/v2 Trap Receiver Configuration
Entry Value (Default) Description
Trap Receiver 1 0.0.0.0 IP address of 1. used SNMP manager
Community Name 1 public 1. Community name of the network community used
Trap Version
V1 V1 V2 Activating Traps Version 1
V2 V1 V2 Activating Traps Version 2
Trap Receiver 2 0.0.0.0 IP address of 2. used SNMP manager
Community Name 2 public 2. Community name of the network community used
Trap Version
V1 V1 V2 Activating Traps Version 1
V2 V1 V2 Activating Traps Version 2
Pos : 97.39.14 /D okumentation allgemein/Gliederungselemente/---Sei tenwechsel--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
439
Pos : 97.39.15 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Web- based M anagement-Sys tem WBM /Seite SNMP/SNMP V3 - Ü berschrift 3 @ 6\mod_1259929073655_21.doc x @ 46643 @ 3 @ 1
10.5.2 SNMP V3
Pos : 97.39.16 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Web- based M anagement-Sys tem WBM /Seite SNMP/SNMP - In der Version 3 von SNM P is t der N ac hrichtenaustausc h an Benutz er gebunden. @ 4\mod_1243331908234_21.doc x @ 33899 @ @ 1
440
Pos : 97.39.19 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Web- based M anagement-Sys tem WBM /Seite SNMP/SNMP - T abelle SNM P V3 @ 4\mod_1242740282468_21.doc x @ 33534 @ @ 1
Two independent SNMPv3 users can be defined and activated via the html page
(user 1 and user 2).
Pos : 97.40 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
441
Pos : 97.41 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite Watc hdog/Watc hdog - Einl eitung @ 6\mod_1256542494406_21.doc x @ 43693 @ 2 @ 1
10.6 Watchdog
Click the link "Watchdog" to go to a Web site where you can specify the settings
for the connection and MODBUS watchdog.
Pos : 97.42 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite Watc hdog/Watc hdog - Bild ( 750- xxx) ( 352/831/41/9/52/71/3/80/1/2/4/5) @ 13\mod_1349182518669_21.doc x @ 103904 @ @ 1
442
Table 54: WBM Page “Watchdog”
Connection watchdog
Entry Default Description
Connection Timeout Value 600 Monitoring period for TCP links.
(100 ms) After the completion of this period without any
subsequent data traffic, the TCP connection is
closed.
Modbus Watchdog
Entry Default Description
State Modbus Watchdog Disabled Enabled – Watchdog is activated
Disabled – Watchdog is disabled
Watchdog Type Standard The set coding mask (watchdog trigger mask) is
evaluated to determine whether the watchdog time is
reset.
Alternative The watchdog time is reset by any Modbus/TCP
telegram.
Watchdog Timeout Value 100 Monitoring period for Modbus links. After the
(100 ms) completion of this period without receiving a
Modbus telegram, the physical outputs are set to "0".
Watchdog Trigger Mask 0xFFFF Coding mask for certain Modbus telegrams
(F 1 to F16) (Function Code FC1 ... FC16)
Watchdog Trigger Mask 0xFFFF Coding mask for certain Modbus telegrams
(F17 to F32) (Function Code FC17 ... FC32)
Pos : 97.44 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
443
Pos : 97.45 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite Cl oc k/Cloc k - Ei nlei tung @ 4\mod_1242627994671_21.doc x @ 33430 @ 2 @ 1
10.7 Clock
Specify the settings for the internal real-time clock on the “Clock” HTML page.
Here, enter the current time and date and also select standard or daylight saving
time.
Pos : 97.46 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite Cl oc k/Cloc k - Hinweis: Interne U hr nac h ang egebenen T agen ohne Spannungs vers orgung neu stellen! @ 4\mod_1242743045062_21.doc x @ 33562 @ @ 1
Reset the internal clock after a specified time without power supply!
The internal clock must be reset on initial startup or after the end of days,
specified in the technical Data without power supply (Powerfail RTC Buffer).
If the clock is not set, the clock begins with the date 01.01.2000 around 0:00 clock
with time measurement.
Pos : 97.47 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite Cl oc k/Cloc k - Hinweis: Zur U mstellung von Wi nter-/Sommerz eit F unktions bloc k einbinden! @ 4\mod_1242743083359_21.doc x @ 33579 @ @ 1
Pos : 97.50 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite Cl oc k/Cloc k - Hinweis: WAGO-RTC-Kl emme zur Zeits ync hr onisi erung nutz en! @ 4\mod_1242743149546_21.doc x @ 33585 @ @ 1
444
Use a WAGO RTC module for time synchronization!
You can also use a WAGO 750-640 RTC Module for your node to utilize the
actual encoded time (Real-time – RTC) in your higher-level control system. An
even greater degree of accuracy is achieved via RTC module than that obtained
using the real-time clock in the coupler or controller.
Pos : 97.51 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/------Leerz eile------ @ 3\mod_1224662755687_0.doc x @ 24460 @ @ 1
Pos : 97.52 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite Cl oc k/Cloc k - Bil d (750- xxx) D ST (831/41/71/80/1/2/4/5) @ 13\mod_1349182855305_21.doc x @ 103907 @ @ 1
Pos : 97.54 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
445
Pos : 97.55 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite Security/Sec urity - Einl eitung @ 4\mod_1242630881437_21.doc x @ 33436 @ 2 @ 1
10.8 Security
Use the “Security” HTML page with passwords to set up read and/or write access
for various user groups to protect against configuration changes.
446
Figure 73: WBM page “Security”
Pos : 97.57 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
447
Pos : 97.58.1 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite Security/Sec urity - T abell e 1.1 Webs er ver Security @ 4\mod_1242632218843_21.doc x @ 33439 @ @ 1
PLC Security
Entry Default Description
Enable password protection to access to the
PLC program.
Port 2455 authentication
enabled
Disable password protection to access to the
PLC program.
Pos : 97.58.4 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite Security/Sec urity - T abell e 1.4 (Fuß note wenn 1.2) @ 14\mod_1360675146650_21.doc x @ 111700 @ @ 1
Pos : 97.59 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite Security/Hinweis: Nac h Software-R es et Z ugriff erneuern! @ 6\mod_1260540394978_21.doc x @ 47059 @ @ 1
Pos : 97.60 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
448
Pos : 97.61 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite M ODBU S/M ODBU S - Einl eitung mit Üb.2 @ 4\mod_1242801249906_21.doc x @ 33631 @ 2 @ 1
10.9 MODBUS
Use the “MODBUS” HTML page to specify the settings for the MODBUS
protocol.
Pos : 97.62 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite M ODBU S/M ODBU S - Bild (750- 852, 880, 881, 882, 884, 885) @ 17\mod_1385734769622_21.doc x @ 139019 @ @ 1
449
Table 57: WBM Page “Modbus”
Modbus UDP Multicast Address Setup
Entry Default value Description
Enable Multicast for MODBUS UDP transmission.
In addition to its own IP address, the fieldbus controller
receives MODBUS commands for the following
registered MCAST addresses.
Enable Multicast
Multicast for MODBUS UDP transmission is not
enabled.
The fieldbus controller receives MODBUS commands
only for the own IP address.
Do not reply to The reply to Modbus UDP multicast messages is
deactivated.
Modbus UDP
multicast The reply to Modbus UDP multicast messages is
messages activated.
Multicast address 1... 5, for the multicast will be enabled.
MCAST Address
0.0.0.0 The valid address range is shown in the WBM.
1 ... 5:
Multiple assigned addresses are not valid.
Pos : 97.64 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite M ODBU S/M ODBU S C onfiguration R egisters - Tabelle ( 352, 829, 880, 881, 831, 852, 882, 884, 885, 889) @ 14\mod_1358171402526_21.doc x @ 108588 @ @ 1
Pos : 97.66 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite M ODBU S/Hi nweis : M ultic ast-F unktion nur mi t gültiger MC AST-Adress e akti v! @ 13\mod_1352814080651_21.doc x @ 106034 @ @ 1
Pos : 97.67 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
450
Pos : 97.68 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite EtherNet/IP/EtherNet/IP - Einl eitung @ 21\mod_1422365213819_21.doc x @ 172907 @ 2 @ 1
10.10 EtherNet/IP
Use the “EtherNet/IP” HTML page to configure the optional padding of the static
assembly instances and to get a list with the present data distribution for the
exchange of process data via the EtherNet/IP communication.
Pos : 97.69 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite EtherNet/IP/EtherNet/IP - Bild (750- 852, -880, -881, - 882, - 885) C ontroll er @ 21\mod_1422365213249_21.doc x @ 172813 @ @ 1
451
Table 58: WBM page “EtherNet/IP“
Static Assembly Instances
Entry Default value Description
Pad the end of The padding of the end of EtherNet/IP assembly
EtherNet/IP assembly instances 101…109 (as required) is activated, to
instances 101…109 (as make an even byte count.
required) to make an even No padding of the EtherNet/IP assembly instances.
byte count.
Instances
Instance/Description Description Data size
101 AO data & DO data Analog and digital output data 10 bytes
… … … …
109 AI data only only analog input data 8 bytes
110 PLC output variables PLC output variables 4 bytes
111 PLC input variables PLC input variables 4 bytes
I/O Map
Entry Example physical I/O modules Data type and size
Input bytes 0 - 3
Terminal 1 750-653/003-000
Output bytes 0 - 3
Terminal 2 750-4xx Input byte 8
…
Pos : 97.71 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
452
Pos : 97.72 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite PLC-Info/PLC-Info - Ei nlei tung @ 12\mod_1337093796626_21.doc x @ 95101 @ 2 @ 1
Pos : 97.75 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite PLC/PLC - Ei nleitung (allgemei n, wenn ohne Setti ngs und Info) @ 4\mod_1242641612453_21.doc x @ 33483 @ 2 @ 1
453
10.12 PLC
Click the “PLC” link to access a Web site where you can define the PFC
functionality settings for your controller.
Pos : 97.76 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite PLC/PLC - Bild (750- 880, -885, -889) @ 13\mod_1349183926306_21.doc x @ 103917 @ @ 1
454
Return to “WebVisu.htm” page via the IP address of the fieldbus controller!
The “Webvisu.htm” page does not have any hyperlinks to the other Web sites.
To deactivate this starting page function, or to go to other pages using hyperlinks,
enter the IP address for your controller and the address for the original starting
page in the URL line of your browser with the following syntax:
http://IP address of your controller/webserv/Index.ssi
455
Table: WBM Page “PLC”
PLC Features
Function Default Description
Activate, if the write authorizations must be assigned
to the outputs of all bus terminals based on an existing
file “ea-config.xml”.
Here, note whether a control system configuration has
already been created and, if so, whether this
configuration is correct or incorrect (see the following
table).
The current process values are displayed on the
website “IO config”, in addition to the displayed data
channels.
Disable, if the write authorizations must be assigned to
the outputs of all bus terminals of the PLC
Here, note whether a control system configuration has
already been created and, if so, whether this
configuration is correct or incorrect (see the following
table).
I/O configuration I/O configuration
(function activated) (function deactivated,
standard setting):
Compatible
Writing privileges to The outputs for all
handling for the outputs of modules are
ea-config.xml all modules are assigned to the PLC.
I/O assigned on the Any ea-config.xml file
configu- basis of an existing ea- that may already be
ration config.xml. present is ignored and
No control system overwritten.
configuration has The ea-config.xml file
been created in the must be
project completely error-free;
otherwise the
writing privileges for
all modules
will be assigned to the
standard
fieldbus.
Writing privileges to the module outputs is taken
Correct control
from the control system
system configuration
configuration. A corresponding ea-config.xml
has been created in
file is generated in the file
the project
system.
Incorrect control The standard fieldbus is granted writing
system configuration privileges to the outputs of all the
has been created in modules.
the project
Activate to also display the current process values on
Insert
the html page “IO config” for the displayed data
monitoring
entries into
channels.
Disable, if no process values must be displayed on the
ea-config.xml html page “IO config”.
Pos : 97.78 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite PLC/PLC - Tabelle PLC Root Loc ati on ( 880, 884, 885) mit SD- Karte @ 16\mod_1374594971185_21.doc x @ 126831 @ @ 1
456
PLC Root Location
Function Default Description
value
Activate this function if all of the files related to the boot
project and the WAGO-I/O-PRO application are to be saved
to the internal file system in the future (A:\PLC).
No files are copied from the SD card to the internal file
Internal File
System
system.
The configuration stored on the internal drive will be used.
This is deactivated when the option "External SD memory
card" is selected.
Activate this function if all of the files related to WebVisu, the
boot project and the WAGO-I/O-PRO application are to be
saved to the SD card in the future (S:\PLC). .
No files are copied from the internal file system to the SD
External SD
memory card
card.
The configuration stored on the SD card will be used.
This is deactivated when the option "Internal File System" is
selected.
Pos : 97.79 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite PLC/Hinweis: Genügend Speicher platz für PLC-Or dner ber eitstellen! @ 16\mod_1374597857908_21.doc x @ 126842 @ @ 1
- The files “webvisu.htm” and “error_ini.xml” are created without any content,
meaning that the WBM page “WebVisu” is blank.
- The files “webvisu.htm” and “error_ini.xml” are created but are incomplete.
In either case, this condition remains until the entire “PLC” folder is deleted and
sufficient storage space made available.
The function “PLC Root Location” remains set to “External SD memory card”.
Pos : 97.80 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite PLC/PLC - Text PLC Root Loc ation ( 831, 880, 884, 885) mit SD-Karte @ 13\mod_1349352087445_21.doc x @ 103970 @ @ 1
457
A distinction must be drawn between the following cases when changing the
options for storage from the internal file system to storage on the SD card:
458
Pos : 97.82 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite Features /Features - Ei nlei tung @ 4\mod_1242635282062_21.doc x @ 33442 @ 2 @ 1
10.13 Features
Use the “Features” HTML page to enable or disable additional functions.
Pos : 97.83 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite Features /Features - Bil d ( 750-880, 881, 882, 885, 852, 352) @ 8\mod_1276864252513_21.doc x @ 58171 @ @ 1
459
Pos : 97.86 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite I/O C onfig/I/O Config - Einl eitung @ 4\mod_1242637844015_21.doc x @ 33474 @ 2 @ 1
460
Figure 79: WBM page “I/O Config”
Pos : 97.88 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite I/O C onfig/I/O Config - Infor mation: Infos z um I/O-Konfigur ator in Kapitel "In Betrieb nehmen" @ 4\mod_1242641319031_21.doc x @ 33480 @ @ 1
Additional Information
For more detailed information about the WAGO-I/O-PRO I/O Configurator, refer
to the Section “Startup of Fieldbus Node”.
Pos : 97.89 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite I/O C onfig/I/O Config - Wenn auf Sei te " PLC" akti vi ert, dann auch Anz eige von Pr ozess wer ten pro Datenkanal @ 8\mod_1279006193094_21.doc x @ 59722 @ @ 1
When the function “I/O configuration Insert monitoring entries into ea-
config.xml” is also activated at the Web site “PLC”, the current process values
will also be shown for the data channels that are displayed.
Pos : 97.90 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite I/O C onfig/I/O Config - T abell e T eil 1 @ 4\mod_1243415137656_21.doc x @ 34032 @ @ 1
461
Table 62: WBM Page “I/O Config”
Configuration details
Entry Value (Example) Description
Number of modules on terminal 5 Number of I/O modules (hardware)
bus
Number of modules in I/O 5 Number of I/O modules in the hardware
configuration
Pos : 97.91 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite I/O C onfig/I/O Config - Sc haltfläc he [cr eate ea-c onfig.xml ] @ 12\mod_1340376360803_21.doc x @ 98250 @ @ 1
configuration of the I/O
[create ea-config.xml] - Writes the current bus terminal structure
and the field bus assignment in the „ea-
Pos : 97.92 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite I/O C onfig/I/O Config - T abell e T eil 2 + Hinweis @ 8\mod_1279005866681_21.doc x @ 59718 @ @ 1
config.xml” file.
I/O configuration file
Entry Value (Example) Description
Pos 1 Position of the I/O module in the hardware
Module 750-4xx Product number of the integrated I/O module
M001Ch1 M = module, 001 = position 1, Ch1 = channel 1
M001Ch2 M = module, 002 = position 2, Ch2 = channel 2
Type 2DI I/O module type, e.g. 2 DI (2 Channel Digital Input Module)
Mapping Fieldbus 3 Mapping via PLC, fieldbus 1 etc. (Entries depend on the
coupler/controller, see WAGO-I/O-PRO under control
parameters/module parameters)
Pos : 97.93 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
462
Pos : 97.94 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite Dis k Info/Dis k Info - Einl eitung (750-831, -880, - 885) mit SD-Karte @ 9\mod_1283956199852_21.doc x @ 64520 @ 2 @ 1
Pos : 97.97 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
463
Pos : 97.98 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite SD C ard/SD Car d - Einl eitung @ 17\mod_1383569838192_21.doc x @ 136532 @ 2 @ 1
10.16 SD Card
On the “SD Card” HTML page, you can find information about the memory card
used, as well as delete the content of the “PLC” folder or create the “PLC” folder
on the memory card via two buttons.
Pos : 97.99 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Web-bas ed Manag ement- System WBM/Seite SD C ard/SD Car d - Bild ( 750-831, 880, 884, 885, 889) @ 17\mod_1383569829157_21.doc x @ 136528 @ @ 1
464
Table 64: WBM Page “SD Card”
SD Card Info
Entry Default Value (example) Description
Card Serial
Number _________ 76169405 Serial number of the memory card
SAMSUNG_
Card Name _________ 8 GB Designation of the memory card
Free Card Space _________ 7.4 GB Available space on the memory card
Configuration Status message if the configuration file is on
file the memory card.
S:\settings\750-
88x.xml is
present.
Tools
Entry Button Status Description
(Example)
Delete PLC folder
[START] READY Delete the content in the “PLC” folder
contents
Create the “PLC” folder in the root
directory of the memory card if it does not
Create PLC folder [START] READY already exist with subsequent extraction of
in SD root the webvisu.htm and error_ini.xml default
directory files.
465
Pos : 97.102 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Web- based M anagement-System WBM /Seite Bac kup & R estore/Bac kup & Res tor e - Einl eitung (für all e F eldbusc ontroller ab F W7 mit SD-Karte) @ 19\mod_1402409208247_21.doc x @ 155605 @ 2 @ 1
466
Table 65: WBM Page “Backup & Restore”
Services
Entry Button Description
[START] Save all device settings to SD card.
Backup ALL device settings Status:
to removable disk (160 kB “DONE”: Device settings have been loaded.
needed). “ERROR (10)”: Memory card is full.
Restore device settings from [START] Taking into account the settings listed below, device
removable disk using the data is loaded from the SD card to the device.
option settings below.
Restore Option Setting
Entry Value Description
(Default)
Autorestore Device data is loaded from the SD card when
Global Enable restarting.
This option will be disabled No device data is loaded from the SD card
after the next reboot if the
when restarting.
following option is set to If the „Only load at next restart” setting is
next reboot only enabled, this option is automatically disabled.
- Restore settings from SD Data is only loaded from the SD card after the device
card on next reboot only
is restarted.
- Always restore settings Data is loaded from the SD card each time the device
from SD card on reboot is restarted.
IP address, dip switch IP The most important startup settings such as IP
address, network mask, addresses, etc. are loaded.
domain name, host name,
gateway, DNS servers, auto
reset on system error,
The specified IP settings are not loaded.
BOOTP request before
static IP, non-adaptive Kbus
speed
Ports, security, time server, Protocol and network settings are loaded from
multicast settings, blocked the SD card.
Modbus flag registers, The specified protocol and network settings are
MAC filter, Ethernet not loaded.
hardware settings
PLC settings, PLC folder PLC settings, boot project, ETC files, non-
und subfolders, boot project, volatile memory and pages of the Web-based
ETC folder, non-volatile Management System are loaded.
memory and web The specified settings are not loaded.
visualization
Pos : 97.105 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Web- based M anagement-System WBM /Seite Bac kup & R estore/Bac kup & Res tor e - T abelle Teil 2 (für all e F eldbuscontr oller ab F W7 mit SD-Karte) @ 19\mod_1402411734004_21.doc x @ 155637 @ @ 1
Pos : 97.106 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Web- based M anagement-System WBM /Seite Bac kup & R estore/Hinweis z ur Ver wendung einer SD- Kar te mi t leeren „ Bac kup“-Verzeic hnis! @ 19\mod_1402414391080_21.doc x @ 155645 @ @ 1
467
Note about using a memory card with an empty “Backup” directory!
Please note the following before inserting a memory card with an empty
"Backup" directory in the fieldbus controller:
If the PLC root location is set to “External SD memory card”, then disable the
“Autorestore Global Enable” function before inserting the memory card and
before switching on the fieldbus controller in WBM on the “Backup & Restore”
page.
Otherwise, the I/O LED will output the error god 14/7 (“Restore function
failed!”).
468
Pos : 97.108 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Web- based M anagement-System WBM /Seite WebVisu/WebVis u - Ei nleitung 1 ( 750-841) @ 6\mod_1260271845363_21.doc x @ 46854 @ 2 @ 1
10.18 WebVisu
The visualization of your programmed application is displayed on the html page
“WebVisu”, provided you have created it with the visualization editor in
WAGO-I/O-PRO and loaded it into the controller.
1. Double click to open the Target System Settings in the Resource register.
2. a.) To set the HTML page “WebVisu” as the start page, use the function
WebVisu – Set 'webvisu.htm' as default. When accessing the web-
based management system, the “WebVisu” page is opened instead of
the default WBM start page “Information”. However, the links to
switch to the other WBM pages is then no longer available.
Pos : 97.109 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Web- based M anagement-System WBM /Seite WebVisu/WebVis u - Hi nweis: WebVis u als Star tseite deakti vier en! @ 4\mod_1242646529875_21.doc x @ 33498 @ @ 1
Pos : 97.110 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Web- based M anagement-System WBM /Seite WebVisu/WebVis u - Ei nleitung 2 ( 750-841) @ 6\mod_1260282535531_21.doc x @ 46857 @ @ 1
c) To call up the HTML page “WebVisu” on the WBM site directly, use
the function WebVisu – Open 'webvisu.htm' in frame. Clicking on
the “WebVisu” link opens the HTML page with visualization of your
configured application in a frame in the WBM window directly. The
469
links to switch to the other WBM pages are still available with this
setting.
Pos : 97.111 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Web- based M anagement-System WBM /Seite WebVisu/WebVis u - Bild (750- 880) @ 7\mod_1265279201080_21.doc x @ 49703 @ @ 1
470
Pos : 99 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Diag nos e/Di agnos e - Ü bersc hrift 1 @ 4\mod_1240831069471_21.doc x @ 31372 @ 1 @ 1
11 Diagnostics
Pos : 100 /Alle Serien (Allgemei ne M odul e)/Ü bersc hriften für all e Seri en/Diagnos e/LED- Signalisi erung - Übersc hrift 2 @ 4\mod_1240831118032_21.doc x @ 31375 @ 2 @ 1
For on-site diagnostics, the fieldbus controller has several LEDs that indicate the
operational status of the fieldbus controller or the entire node (see following
figure).
Pos : 101.2 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Gerätebeschr eibung/Anzeig eel emente/F eldbus koppler /-controll er/Bil der/Anzeig eel emente 750- 0880 - Bil d @ 13\mod_1343745053058_21.doc x @ 101297 @ @ 1
The diagnostics displays and their significance are explained in detail in the
following section.
Pos : 101.8 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
471
Pos : 101.9.1 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/Diagnos e/F eldbus koppler/-c ontroll er/F eldbus status aus werten (Li nk ACT 1, 2, MS, NS) @ 7\mod_1266499196859_21.doc x @ 51042 @ 3 @ 1
The two-colored LEDs ‘MS’ (module status) and ‘NS’ (network status) are solely
used by the Ethernet/IP protocol. These two LEDs conform to the Ethernet/IP
specifications.
Pos : 101.9.3 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O- SYST EM)/Diagnos e/F eldbus koppler/-c ontroll er/F eldbus status aus werten ('LIN K ACT 1, 2', 'MS, 'NS') - Tabelle ' LIN K ACT 1, 2', 'MS' @ 9\mod_1282558855632_21.doc x @ 64159 @ @ 1
NS
At least one connection
(MODBUS/TCP or Ethernet/IP)
green -
is developed (also connection to
the Message rout applies)
grün No connection (MODBUS/TCP
-
flashing or Ethernet/IP).
The system indicates a double IP- 1. Use an IP address that is not used
red
address in the network yet.
At least one connection
1. Restart the device by turning the
red (MODBUS/TCP or Ethernet/IP)
power supply off and on again.
flashing announced a Timeout, where the
2. Develop a new connection.
controller functions as target.
red/green
Self test -
flashing
No IP address is assigned to the 1. Assign to the system an IP address
off
system. for example by BootP or DHCP.
472
Pos : 101.11.1 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Di agnose/Fel dbus koppl er/-c ontroller/Knotenstatus aus wer ten 1 - I/O- LED (alle Koppl er/Knotens tatus aus werten 1 - I/O-LED (all e Koppl er/C ontroller) @ 6\mod_1259229729546_21.doc x @ 45457 @ 3 @ 1
Device boot-up occurs after turning on the power supply. The I/O LED flashes
orange.
In the event of an error, the I/O LED continues to blink red. Blink codes indicate
detailed error messages. An error is indicated cyclically by up to 3 flashing
sequences.
After elimination of the error, restart the node by turning the power supply of the
device off and on again.
473
Figure 85: Node Status – I/O LED Signaling
• The I/O LED starts the error display with the first flashing sequence
(approx. 10 Hz).
• After the first break, the second flashing sequence starts (approx. 1 Hz):
The I/O LED blinks four times.
Error code 4 indicates “data error internal data bus”.
474
• After the second break, the third flashing sequence starts (approx. 1 Hz):
The I/O LED blinks twelve times.
Error argument 12 means that the internal data bus is interrupted behind the
twelfth I/O module.
The thirteenth I/O module is either defective or has been pulled out of the
assembly.
Pos : 101.12 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Di agnos e/F eldbus koppler/-c ontroller/Blinkcode-Tabell en - Fehl ercode 1 (750- 0830, - 841, -849) @ 6\mod_1259577088296_21.doc x @ 46118 @ @ 1
475
Table 69: Blink Code Table for the I/O LED Signaling, Error Code 1
Error code 1: "Hardware and configuration error"
Error Error Description Solution
Argument
Overflow of the
1. Turn off the power for the node.
internal buffer
2. Reduce the number of I/O modules.
1 memory for the
3. Turn the power supply on again.
attached I/O
4. If the error persists, replace the fieldbus controller.
modules.
1. Determine the faulty I/O module by first turning off the
power supply.
2. Plug the end module into the middle of the node.
3. Turn the power supply on again.
4. - LED continues to flash? -
Turn off the power supply and plug the end module into
the middle of the first half of the node (toward the
fieldbus controller).
I/O module(s) with - LED not flashing? -
2 Turn off the power and plug the end module into the
unknown data type
middle of the second half of the node (away from the
fieldbus controller).
5. Turn the power supply on again.
6. Repeat the procedure described in step 4 while halving
the step size until the faulty I/O module is detected.
7. Replace the faulty I/O module.
8. Inquire about a firmware update for the fieldbus
controller.
Invalid hardware- 1. Turn off the power supply for the node.
7 firmware 2. Replace the fieldbus controller.
combination. 3. Turn the power supply on again.
476
Table 69: Blink Code Table for the I/O LED Signaling, Error Code 1
Error code 1: "Hardware and configuration error"
Error Error Description Solution
Argument
Timeout during 1. Turn off the power supply for the node.
8 serial EEPROM 2. Replace the fieldbus controller.
access. 3. Turn the power supply on again.
Pos : 101.13 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Di agnos e/F eldbus koppler/-c ontroller/Blinkcode-Tabell en - Fehl ercode 2...5 ( 750-0806, -830, - 841, -849, 833) @ 9\mod_1281701367460_21.doc x @ 63670 @ @ 1
Table 70: Blink Code Table for the I/O LED Signaling, Error Code 2
Error code 2: “Exceeded Process Image”
Error Error Description Solution
Argument
1 Not used -
477
Table 71: Blink Code Table for the I/O LED Signaling, Error Code 3
Error code 3: “Protocol error, internal bus”
Error Error Description Solution
Argument
- Are passive power supply modules (750-613) located in the
node? -
1. Check that these modules are supplied correctly with
power.
2. Determine this by the state of the associated status LEDs.
478
Table 72: Blink Code Table for the I/O LED Signaling, Error Code 4
Error code 4: “Physical error, internal bus”
Error Error Description Solution
Argument
1. Turn off the power supply to the node.
2. Plug in an end module behind the fieldbus controller.
3. Turn the power supply on.
4. Observe the error argument signaled.
Table 73: Blink Code Table for the I/O LED Signaling, Error Code 5
Error code 5: “Initialization error, internal bus”
Error Error Description Solution
Argument
Error in register
1. Turn off the power supply to the node.
communication
n* 2. Replace the (n+1) I/O module containing process data.
during internal bus
3. Turn the power supply on.
initialization
* The number of light pulses (n) indicates the position of the I/O module.
I/O modules without data are not counted (e.g., supply modules without diagnostics)
Pos : 101.14 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Di agnos e/F eldbus koppler/-c ontroller/Blinkcode-Tabell en - Fehl ercode 6 (750- 0830, - 841, -0849) @ 6\mod_1259243409390_21.doc x @ 45593 @ @ 1
479
Table 74: Blink Code Table for the I/O LED Signaling, Error Code 6
Error code 6: "Fieldbus specific errors"
Error Error description Solution
Argument
1. Turn off the power supply of the node.
1 Invalid MACID 2. Exchange fieldbus controller.
3. Turn the power supply on again.
1. Restart the fieldbus controller by turning the power
Ethernet Hardware
2 supply off and on again.
initialization error
2. If the error still exists, exchange the fieldbus controller.
1. Restart the fieldbus coupler by turning the power
TCP/IP initialization
3 supply off and on again.
error
2. If the error still exists, exchange the bus coupler.
Network configuration 1. Check the settings of BootP server.
4
error (no IP Address)
1. Restart the fieldbus coupler by turning the power
Application protocol
5 supply off and on again.
initialization error
2. If the error still exists, exchange the bus coupler.
Process image is too 1. Turn off the power supply of the node.
6
large 2. Reduce number of I/O modules
1. Change configuration. Use another IP address, which is
Double IP address in not yet present in network.
7
network 2. Restart the fieldbus coupler by turning the power
supply off and on again.
1. Turn off the power supply of the node.
2. Reduce number of I/O modules
Error when building
8 3. Restart the fieldbus coupler by turning the power
the process image
supply off and on again.
4. If the error still exists, exchange the bus coupler.
Pos : 101.15 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Di agnos e/F eldbus koppler/-c ontroller/Blinkcode-Tabell en - Fehl ercode 6, s pezifisc hes Argument 9) (750-0881, -0880) @ 8\mod_1278680325313_21.doc x @ 59485 @ @ 1
Pos : 101.17 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Di agnos e/F eldbus koppler/-c ontroller/Blinkcode-Tabell en - Fehl ercode 7/n (nic ht unterstützte Bus klemme) @ 6\mod_1259247106578_21.doc x @ 45640 @ @ 1
Table 75: Blink Code Table for the I/O LED Signaling, Error Code 7
Error code 7: “Not supported I/O module”
Error Error Description Solution
Argument
1. Turn off the power supply to the node.
First unsupported
2. Replace the nth I/O module containing process data or
n I/O module
reduce the number of modules to the number of n-1.
in place of n.
3. Turn the power supply on.
Pos : 101.18 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Di agnos e/F eldbus koppler/-c ontroller/Blinkcode-Tabell en - Fehl ercode 8...9 (F ehl erc ode nicht genutzt) @ 12\mod_1339150647306_21.doc x @ 96641 @ @ 1
Table 76: Blink Code Table for the I/O LED Signaling, Error Code 8 … 9
Error code 8 … 9 –not used–
Error Error Description Solution
Argument
- not used -
Pos : 101.19 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Di agnos e/F eldbus koppler/-c ontroller/Blinkcode-Tabell en - Fehl ercode 10, Argument 1 ( mit SD-Karte) @ 15\mod_1364465944530_21.doc x @ 116264 @ @ 1
480
Table 77: Blink Code Table for the I/O LED Signaling, Error Code 10
Error code 10: "PLC program fault"
Error Error Description Solution
Argument
1. Plug the SD card into the fieldbus controller.
Error when
2. Restart the fieldbus controller by turning the power
1 implementing the
supply off and on again.
PFC run time system
3. If the error still exists, please contact the I/O Support.
Pos : 101.20 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Di agnos e/F eldbus koppler/-c ontroller/Blinkcode-Tabell en - Fehl ercode 10 ( 2-5), 11 ( 750-0830, -841, - 0849) @ 6\mod_1259247309750_21.doc x @ 45643 @ @ 1
Error when generating 1. Restart the fieldbus controller by turning the power
2 the PFC supply off and on again.
inline code 2. If the error still exists, please contact the I/O Support.
Table 78: Blink Code Table for the I/O LED Signaling, Error Code 11
Error code 11: "Gateway-/Mailbox I/O module fault"
Error Error Description Solution
Argument
1. Turn off the power supply of the node.
Maximum number of
1 2. Reduce number of Gateway modules.
Gateway modules exceeded
3. Turn the power supply on again.
1. Turn off the power supply of the node.
Maximum size of Mailbox 2. Reduce the Mailbox size.
2
exceeded 3. Turn the power supply on again.
Maximum size of process 1. Turn off the power supply of the node.
3 image exceeded due to the 2. Reduce the data width of the Gateway modules.
put Gateway modules 3. Turn the power supply on again.
* The number of blink pulses (n) indicates the position of the I/O module.
I/O modules without data are not counted (e.g. supply module without diagnosis)
Pos : 101.21 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Di agnos e/F eldbus koppler/-c ontroller/Blinkcode-Tabell en - Fehl ercode 14 SD-Kartenfehler ( 750- 0880) @ 9\mod_1289492637843_21.doc x @ 66390 @ @ 1
481
Table 79: Blink Code Table for the I/O LED Signaling, Error Code 14
Error code 14: “Error in external storage (memory card)”
Error Error Description Solution
Argument
Pos : 101.22 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Di agnos e/F eldbus koppler/-c ontroller/LED-Signalisier ung - U SR-LED @ 6\mod_1259249846609_21.doc x @ 45646 @ 4 @ 1
482
11.1.2.1 USR LED
The bottom indicator LED (“USR”) is provided for visual output of information.
Control of the LED from the application program is conducted using the functions
from the WAGO-I/O-PRO library “Visual.lib”.
Pos : 101.23 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Di agnos e/F eldbus koppler/-c ontroller/Speic her kartenstatus aus werten ('SD'-LED) @ 9\mod_1289496276454_21.doc x @ 66396 @ 3 @ 1
483
Pos : 101.26 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Di agnos e/F eldbus koppler/-c ontroller/Fehler verhalten, F eldbusausfall (750-830, -841, - 849, ...) @ 6\mod_1259570148859_21.doc x @ 46112 @ 23 @ 1
FBUS_ERROR_INFORMATION
FBUS_ERROR
ERROR
Figure 87: Function Block for Determining Loss of Fieldbus, Independently of Protocol
The node can be put into a safe status in the event of a fieldbus failure with the aid
of these function block outputs and an appropriately programmed control system
program.
484
Loss of fieldbus detection through MODBUS protocol:
For detailed information about the watchdog register, refer to Section “MODBUS
Functions”, in particular Section “Watchdog (Fieldbus failure)”.
485
Pos : 101.28 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Di agnos e/F eldbus koppler/-c ontroller/Kl emmenbusfehler ( alle C ontroll er) @ 6\mod_1259322394765_21.doc x @ 45998 @ 3 @ 1
486
Pos : 103 /Alle Serien (Allgemei ne M odul e)/Ü bersc hriften für all e Seri en/__ noch nic ht ei nsorti erte Ü bersc hriften müssen noch ei ns ortiert wer den __/F eldbus kommuni kati on - Ü bersc hrift 1 @ 4\mod_1241433862621_21.doc x @ 32212 @ 1 @ 1
12 Fieldbus Communication
Pos : 104.1 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/ETHERN ET/ETHERN ET-Ei nleitungstext @ 4\mod_1236763733502_21.doc x @ 28163 @ @ 1
The Internet protocol divides datagrams into segments and is responsible for their
transmission from one network subscriber to another. The stations involved may
be connected to the same network or to different physical networks which are
linked together by routers.
Routers are able to select various paths (network transmission paths) through
connected networks, and bypass congestion and individual network failures.
However, as individual paths may be selected which are shorter than other paths,
datagrams may overtake each other, causing the sequence of the data packets to be
incorrect.
Therefore, it is necessary to use a higher-level protocol, for example, TCP to
guarantee correct transmission.
IP Packet
In addition to the data units to be transported, the IP data packets contain a range
of address information and additional information in the packet header.
487
IP Addresses
To allow communication over the network each fieldbus node requires a 32 bit
Internet address (IP address).
As shown below there are various address classes with net identification (net ID)
and subscriber identification (subscriber ID) of varying lengths. The net ID
defines the network in which the subscriber is located. The subscriber ID
identifies a particular subscriber within this network.
Networks are divided into various network classes for addressing purposes:
488
Therefore, the address range of Class C networks in the first byte is always
between 192 and 223.
• Additional network classes (D, E): are only used for special tasks.
Key Data
Subnets
489
Table 86: Example: Class B Address with Field for Subnet IDs
1 8 16 24 32
1 0 ... Network ID Subnet ID Host ID
Subnet Mask
A subnet mask was introduced to encode the subnets in the Internet. This involves
a bit mask, which is used to mask out or select specific bits of the IP address. The
mask defines the subscriber ID bits used for subnet coding, which denote the ID
of the subscriber. The entire IP address range theoretically lies between 0.0.0.0
and 255.255.255.255. Each 0 and 255 from the IP address range are reserved for
the subnet mask.
The standard masks depending upon the respective network class are as follows:
Depending on the subnet division the subnet masks may, however, contain other
values beyond 0 and 255, such as 255.255.255.128 or 255.255.255.248.
Together with the IP address, this number determines which network your PC and
your node belongs to.
The recipient node, which is located on a subnet, initially calculates the correct
network number from its own IP address and subnet mask. Only then the node
checks the node number and, if it corresponds, delivers the entire packet frame.
490
Specification of the network mask necessary!
Specify the network mask defined by the administrator in the same way as the IP
address when installing the network protocol.
Gateway
The subnets of the Internet are normally connected via gateways. The function of
these gateways is to forward packets to other networks or subnets.
This means that in addition to the IP address and network mask for each network
card, it is necessary to specify the correct IP address of the standard gateway for a
PC or fieldbus node connected to the Internet. You should also be able to obtain
this IP address from your network administrator.
The IP function is limited to the local subnet if this address is not specified.
To communicate directly with each other, host and gateway must be on the same
subnet, that means the network ID must be the same.
RAW IP
However, the connection must beforehand have been configured with a fixed IP
address. The advantages of RAW IP are high data transfer rate and good stability.
IP Multicast
IP multicasting at the Internet level is realized with the help of the Internet Group
Message Protocol IGMP; neighboring routers use this protocol to inform each
other on membership to the group.
491
by the use of algorithms, IP multicast addresses are embedded in Ethernet
multicast addresses.
Pos : 106 /Alle Serien (Allgemei ne M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/ETHERN ET/TC P (Trans por t Pr otoc ol) @ 4\mod_1237211218837_21.doc x @ 28502 @ 4 @ 1
As the layer above the Internet protocol, TCP (Transmission Control Protocol)
guarantees the secure transport of data through the network.
TCP enables two subscribers to establish a connection for the duration of the data
transmission. Communication takes place in full-duplex mode (i.e., transmission
between two subscribers in both directions simultaneously).
TCP provides the transmitted message with a 16-bit checksum and each data
packet with a sequence number.
The receiver checks that the packet has been correctly received on the basis of the
checksum and then sets off the sequence number. The result is known as the
acknowledgement number and is returned with the next self-sent packet as an
acknowledgement.
This ensures that the lost TCP packets are detected and resent, if necessary, in the
correct sequence.
The packet header of a TCP data packet is comprised of at least 20 bytes and
contains, among others, the application port number of the transmitter and the
receiver, the sequence number and the acknowledgement number.
The resulting TCP packet is used in the data unit area of an IP packet to create a
TCP/IP packet.
TCP can, in addition to the IP address (network and subscriber address), respond
to a specific application (service) on the addressed subscriber. For this the
applications located on a subscriber, such as a web server, FTP server and others
are addressed via different port numbers. Well-known applications are assigned
fixed ports to which each application can refer when a connection is built up
(Examples: Telnet Port number: 23, http Port number: 80).
A complete list of “standardized services” is contained in the RFC 1700 (1994)
specifications.
Pos : 107 /Alle Serien (Allgemei ne M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/ETHERN ET/UD P (Us er Datagram Pr otocol) @ 4\mod_1237211297860_21.doc x @ 28505 @ 4 @ 1
The UDP protocol, like the TCP protocol, is responsible for the transport of data.
Unlike the TCP protocol, UDP is not connection-orientated; meaning that there
are no control mechanisms for the data exchange between transmitter and
receiver. The advantage of this protocol is the efficiency of the transmitted data
and the resulting higher processing speed.
Pos : 108 /Alle Serien (Allgemei ne M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/ETHERN ET/Konfigur ati ons- und Diagnos eprotokolle - Ü bersc hrift 3 @ 4\mod_1237211597686_21.doc x @ 28511 @ 3 @ 1
492
12.1.2.1 BootP (Bootstrap Protocol)
The “Bootstrap Protocol” (BootP) can be used to assign an IP address and other
parameters to the fieldbus coupler/controller in a TCP/IP network. Subnet masks
and gateways can also be transferred using this protocol. Protocol communication
is comprised of a client request from the fieldbus coupler or controller and a
server response from the PC.
A broadcast request is transmitted to Port 67 (BootP server) via the protocol that
contains the hardware address (MAC ID) for the fieldbus coupler or controller.
The BootP server then receives this message. The server contains a database in
which the MAC ID and IP addresses are assigned to one another. When a MAC
address is found a broadcast reply is transmitted via the network.
The BootP Client assists in the dynamic configuration of the network parameters:
The ETHERNET TCP/IP fieldbus controller has a BootP client that supports the
following options in addition to the default “IP address” option:
Pos : 110.1 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/ETHERN ET/BootP - T abell e BootP-Optionen ( 750- 352, - 842, -843, - 880, - 881) @ 9\mod_1283243277969_21.doc x @ 64370 @ @ 1
493
Table 91: BootP Options
Option Meaning
[OPT1] Subnet mask 32-bit address mask that displays which bits of the IP address
identify the network and which identify the network stations.
[OPT2] Time zone Time difference between the local time and the UTC (Universal
Time Coordinated).
[OPT3] Gateway IP address of the router that permits access to other networks.
[OPT6] DNS server IP address of the name servers that converts a name into an IP
address. Up to 2 DNS servers can be configured.
[OPT12] Host name The name of the host is the unique name of a computer in a
network. The host name can contain up to 32 characters.
[OPT15] Domain name The name of the domain is the unique name of a network. The
Pos : 110.2 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/ETHERN ET/BootP - T abell e BootP-Optionen [OPT 42] NT P-Ser ver ( 750-831, - 880, - 881) @ 10\mod_1298391107653_21.doc x @ 69991 @ @ 1
domain name can contain up to 32 characters.
[OPT42] NTP server IP address of the Network Time Server. When assigning an NTP
Pos : 111 /Alle Serien (Allgemei ne M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/ETHERN ET/BootP - Ü ber di e WBM- Sei te "Features" kann ferner ....(R estbesc hreibung) 750- 880, -881, -882 @ 9\mod_1283243412431_21.doc x @ 64373 @ @ 1
server, the SNTP client is automatically enabled in the coupler.
The “Features” WBM page can also be used to select the “BootP Request before
static IP” option. After the restart, 5 BootP queries are sent. If there is no response
to any of these queries, the fieldbus coupler/controller tries to configure itself with
the IP parameters saved in the EEPROM.
The IP address and the subnet mask are stored in the EEPROM when using the
Bootstrap protocol to configure the node.
When BootP is activated, the fieldbus coupler/controller expects the BootP server
to be permanently available.
If there is no BootP server available after a PowerOn reset, the network will
remain inactive.
When booting next the fieldbus coupler/controller uses the parameters saved in
the EEPROM.
If there is an error in the saved parameters, the I/O LED reports a blink code and
configuration via BootP is turned on automatically.
Pos : 112 /Alle Serien (Allgemei ne M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/ETHERN ET/DHC P (D ynamic Hos t C onfigurati on Pr otoc ol) (750- 880, -881, -882) @ 7\mod_1265297441531_21.doc x @ 49809 @ 4 @ 1
494
12.1.2.2 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
The fieldbus coupler/controller internal HTML page opened via the “Port” link
provides the option to configure the network using the data saved in the EEPROM
or via DHCP instead of via the BootP protocol.
A broadcast request is transmitted to Port 67 (DHCP server) via the protocol that
contains the hardware address (MAC ID) for the fieldbus coupler/controller.
The DHCP server then receives this message. The server contains a database in
which the MAC ID and IP addresses are assigned to one another. When a MAC
address is found a broadcast reply is transmitted via the network.
If there is no reply, the inquiry is sent again after 4 seconds, 8 seconds and 16
seconds.
If all inquiries receive no reply, a blink code is reported via the I/O LED.
The IP address and the subnet mask are stored in the EEPROM when using DHCP
to configure the node.
When booting next the fieldbus coupler/controller uses the parameters saved in
the EEPROM.
495
The difference between BOOTP and DHCP is that both use different assignment
methods and that configuration with DHCP is time limited. The DHCP client
always has to update the configuration after the time has elapsed. Normally, the
same parameters are continuously confirmed by the server.
The difference between BOOTP and DHCP is that both use different assignment
methods. BOOTP can be used to assign a fixed IP address for each client where
the addresses and their reservation are permanently saved in the BOOTP server
database.
• Manual assignment
In this mode, the IP addresses are permanently assigned on the DHCP server
to specific MAC addresses. The addresses are assigned to the MAC address
for an indefinite period.
Manual assignments are used primarily to ensure that the DHCP client can
be reached under a fixed IP address.
• Automatic assignment
For automatic assignment, a range of IP addresses is assigned on the DHCP
server.
If the address was assigned from this range once to a DHCP client, then it
belongs to the client for an indefinite period as the assigned IP address is
also bound to the MAC address.
• Dynamic assignment
This process is similar to automatic assignment, but the DHCP server has a
statement in its configuration file that specifies how long a certain IP
address may be “leased” to a client before the client must log into the server
again and request an “extension”.
If the client does not log in, the address is released and can be reassigned to
another (or the same) client. The time defined by the administrator is called
Lease Time.
Some DHCP servers also assign IP addresses based on the MAC address,
i.e., a client receives the same IP address as before after longer network
absence and elapse of the Lease Time (unless the IP address has been
assigned otherwise in the mean time).
496
DHCP is used to dynamically configure the network parameters.
The ETHERNET TCP/IP fieldbus controller has a DHCP client that supports the
following options in addition to the default “IP address” option:
Pos : 113 /Alle Serien (Allgemei ne M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/ETHERN ET/DHC P (D ynamic Hos t C onfigurati on Pr otoc ol - T abelle DHCP-Opti onen (750-880, -881) @ 9\mod_1284377953925_21.doc x @ 64590 @ @ 1
Pos : 114 /Alle Serien (Allgemei ne M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/ETHERN ET/HTT P (H yper text Trans fer Protoc ol) @ 4\mod_1237211903403_21.doc x @ 28517 @ 4 @ 1
HTTP is a protocol used by WWW (World Wide Web) servers for the forwarding
of hypermedia, texts, images, audiodata, etc.
Today, HTTP forms the basis of the Internet and is also based on requests and
responses in the same way as the BootP protocol.
497
12.1.2.4 DNS (Domain Name Systems)
The addresses of the DNS server are configured via DHCP, BootP or web-based
management. Up to 2 DNS servers can be specified. The host identification can be
achieved with two functions; an internal host table is not supported.
Pos : 116.1 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/ETHERN ET/SNTP-Client (Si mpl e N etwor k Ti me Protoc ol) - Ei nleitung @ 7\mod_1265368453398_21.doc x @ 49866 @ 4 @ 1
The SNTP client is used for synchronization of the time of day between a time
server (NTP and SNTP server Version 3 and 4 are supported) and the internal
system time in the (programmable) fieldbus coupler or controller. The protocol is
executed via a UDP port. Only unicast addressing is supported.
WBM page “TCP/IP” The update time indicates the interval in seconds, in which the
„SNTP Update Time (sec, synchronization with the time server is to take place.
max. 65535) ”
WBM page “Clock” The time zone relative to GMT (Greenwich Mean time). A range
“Timezone (+/- hour:minute)” of -12 to +14 hours is acceptable.
WBM page “Port” “SNTP” It indicates whether the SNTP Client is to be activated or
deactivated.
Pos : 117.1 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/ETHERN ET/FT P-Ser ver (Fil e Tr ans fer Protoc ol) - Einl eitung @ 7\mod_1265373934850_21.doc x @ 49914 @ 4 @ 1
The file transfer protocol (FTP) enables files to be exchanged between different
network stations regardless of operating system.
In the case of the ETHERNET coupler/controller, FTP is used to store and read
the HTML pages created by the user, the IEC61131 program and the IEC61131
source code in the (programmable) fieldbus coupler or controller.
Pos : 117.2 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/ETHERN ET/FT P (File Ser ver Pr otocol) - F ür das D ateis ystem s teht ei n Ges amts peic her von 2 MB zur Ver fügung @ 7\mod_1265374188806_21.doc x @ 49923 @ @ 1
498
Cycles for flash limited to 1 million!
Up to 1 million write cycles per sector are allowed when writing the flash for the
file system. The file system supports “Wear-Leveling”, so that the same sectors
are not always written to.
Pos : 117.4 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/ETHERN ET/Infor mation: Weitere i nfor mation z u den i mplementierten Protokollen @ 7\mod_1265374349668_21.doc x @ 49929 @ @ 1
Pos : 118.1 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/SNM P (MIB)/SNMP ( Simpl e N etwork Management Pr otokoll) - SNMP (Übersc hrift 4) @ 7\mod_1270702804402_21.doc x @ 54939 @ 4 @ 1
This represents a community message exchange in SNMP versions 1 and 2c. The
community name of the network community must thereby be specified.
The device data, that can be accessed or modified by an SNMP agent, is called
SNMP object. The sets of SNMP objects are stored in a logical database called
Management Information Base (MIB); this is why these objects are typically
known as “MIB objects”.
The SNMP of the ETHERNET controller includes both the general MIB acc. to
RFC1213 (MIB II) and a special WAGO MIB.
SNMP is processed via port 161. The port number for SNMP traps (agent
messages) is 161. Both ports must be enabled to use SNMP.
Pos : 118.3 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/SNM P (MIB)/SNMP ( Simpl e N etwork Management Pr otokoll) - Besc hreibung der MIB II (Ü bersc hrift 5) @ 7\mod_1270702853331_21.doc x @ 54943 @ 5 @ 1
499
12.1.2.7.1 MIB II Description
Pos : 118.4 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/SNM P (MIB)/SNMP ( Simpl e N etwork Management Pr otokoll) - Besc hreibung der MIB II mit Verweis auf Anhang @ 7\mod_1270702410659_21.doc x @ 54930 @ @ 1
Additional Information
Please find detailed information on these individual groups in section
“MIB II groups” of the manual appendix.
Pos : 118.5 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
500
Pos : 118.6 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/SNM P (MIB)/SNMP ( Simpl e N etwork Management Pr otokoll) - Standard-Traps (Überschrift 5) @ 7\mod_1270703854440_21.doc x @ 54954 @ 5 @ 1
12.1.2.7.2 Traps
Pos : 118.7 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/SNM P (MIB)/SNMP ( Simpl e N etwork Management Pr otokoll) - Standard-Traps (Einl eitung) @ 7\mod_1270721636553_21.doc x @ 54977 @ @ 1
Standard Traps
For specific events, the SNMP agent will independently send one of the following
messages without polling the manager.
Pos : 118.8 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/SNM P (MIB)/SNMP ( Simpl e N etwork Management Pr otokoll) - Hi nweis: Ereignis meldungen i m WBM freigeben! V1, 2c, 3 @ 7\mod_1270721741999_21.doc x @ 54980 @ @ 1
Pos : 118.9 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/SNM P (MIB)/SNMP ( Simpl e N etwork Management Pr otokoll) - Standard-Traps @ 6\mod_1264588370404_21.doc x @ 48822 @ @ 1
Pos : 119 /Dokumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
501
Pos : 120 /Alle Serien (Allgemei ne M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/ETHERN ET/Anwendungsprotokolle - Ü bersc hrift 3 und Ei nleitungstext @ 4\mod_1237212360010_21.doc x @ 28535 @ 3 @ 1
502
Pos : 122.1 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/MOD BUS-F unktionen - Allgemeines @ 3\mod_1234513607390_21.doc x @ 27530 @ 23 @ 1
The data transmission in the fieldside takes place via TCP and via UDP.
This protocol was designed for data exchange in the field level (i.e. for the ex-
change of I/O data in the process image).
All data packets are sent via a TCP connection with the port number 502.
Pos : 122.2 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/MOD BUS-F unktionen - Allgemeines - Datenpaket @ 3\mod_1234517576546_21.doc x @ 27536 @ @ 1
MODBUS/TCP segment
Additional Information
The structure of a datagram is specific for the individual function. Refer to the
descriptions of the MODBUS Function codes.
Pos : 122.3 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/MOD BUS-F unktionen - Allgemeines - 15 Ver bindungen ( x41) @ 4\mod_1235565560015_21.doc x @ 27682 @ @ 1
For the MODBUS protocol 15 connections are made available over TCP. Thus it
allows digital and analog output data to be directly read out at a fieldbus node and
special functions to be executed by way of simple MODBUS function codes from
15 stations simultaneously.
Pos : 122.4 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/MOD BUS-F unktionen - Allgemeines - MOD BUS-Pr otokoll @ 4\mod_1235565612609_21.doc x @ 27685 @ @ 1
For this purpose a set of MODBUS functions from the Open MODBUS/TCP
specification is realized.
503
More information
More information on the “Open MODBUS/TCP specification” you can find in the
Internet: www.modbus.org .
Therefore the MODBUS protocol based essentially on the following basic data
types:
For each basic data type one or more function codes are defined.
These functions allow digital or analog input and output data, and internal
variables to be set or directly read out of the fieldbus node.
Pos : 122.5 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/MOD BUS-F unktionen - Lis te Funktionsc odes (C ontroll er, x41) @ 3\mod_1234954357875_21.doc x @ 27540 @ @ 1
504
FC23 0x17 Read/Write Reading and writing of several R/W: Process image,
Multiple output registers PFC variables,
Registers NOVRAM
Pos : 122.6 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/MOD BUS-F unktionen - Ei ngabe Adres se und F unktionsc ode, Hinweis @ 3\mod_1234955801125_21.doc x @ 27543 @ @ 1
To execute a desired function, specify the respective function code and the
address of the selected input or output data.
Pos : 122.7 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
505
Pos : 122.8 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/Anwendung der M ODBU S-F unktionen - Ei nleitung @ 7\mod_1265623985585_21.doc x @ 49940 @ 33 @ 1
506
Use register functions to access analog signals and coil functions to access
binary signals!
It is recommended that analog data be accessed with register functions and
digital data with coil functions . If reading or writing access to binary signals is
performed via register functions , an address shift may occur as soon as further
analog modules are operated on the coupler/controller.
2. The WAGO fieldbus node receives the datagram and then responds to the
master with the proper data, which is based on the master’s request.
Pos : 122.10 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/Anwendung der M ODBU S-Funkti onen - FC 1 bis FC 6 @ 3\mod_1234957373125_21.doc x @ 27556 @ 444444 @ 1
Reading and writing of outputs via FC1 to FC4 is also possible by adding an
offset!
In the case of the read functions (FC1 ... FC4) the outputs can be additionally
written and read back by adding an offset of 200hex (0x0200) to the MODBUS
addresses in the range of [0hex ... FFhex] and an offset of 1000hex (0x01000) to the
MODBUS addresses in the range of [6000hex ... 62FChex].
507
12.2.3.1 Function Code FC1 (Read Coils)
This function reads the status of the input and output bits (coils) in a slave device.
Request
The request specifies the reference number (starting address) and the bit count to
read.
Example: Read output bits 0 to 7.
Response
The current values of the response bits are packed in the data field. A binary 1
corresponds to the ON status and a 0 to the OFF status. The lowest value bit of the
first data byte contains the first bit of the request. The others follow in ascending
order. If the number of inputs is not a multiple of 8, the remaining bits of the last
data byte are filled with zeroes (truncated).
The status of the inputs 7 to 0 is shown as byte value 0x12 or binary 0001 0010.
Input 7 is the bit having the highest significance of this byte and input 0 the lowest
value.
The assignment is thus made from 7 to 0 as follows:
508
Exception
509
12.2.3.2 Function Code FC2 (Read Discrete Inputs)
Request
The request specifies the reference number (starting address) and the bit count to
be read.
Example: Read input bits 0 to 7
Response
The current value of the requested bits are packed into the data field. A binary 1
corresponds to the ON status and a 0 the OFF status. The lowest value bit of the
first data byte contains the first bit of the inquiry. The others follow in an
ascending order. If the number of inputs is not a multiple of 8, the remaining bits
of the last data byte are filled with zeroes (truncated).
The status of the inputs 7 to 0 is shown as a byte value 0x12 or binary 0001 0010.
Input 7 is the bit having the highest significance of this byte and input 0 the lowest
value. The assignment is thus made from 7 to 0 as follows:
510
Exception
511
12.2.3.3 Function Code FC3 (Read Multiple Registers)
This function reads the contents of holding registers from a slave device in word
format.
Request
The request specifies the reference number (start register) and the word count
(register quantity) of the registers to be read. The reference number of the request
is zero based, therefore, the first register starts at address 0.
Example: Read registers 0 and 1.
Response
The reply register data is packed as 2 bytes per register. The first byte contains the
higher value bits, the second the lower values.
The contents of register 0 are displayed by the value 0x1234 and the
contents of register 1 is 0x2345.
Exception
512
12.2.3.4 Function Code FC4 (Read Input Registers)
This function reads contents of input registers from the slave device in word
format.
Request
The request specifies a reference number (start register) and the word count
(register quantity) of the registers to be read. The reference number of the request
is zero based, therefore, the first register starts at address 0.
Example: Read registers 0 and 1
Response
The register data of the response is packed as 2 bytes per register. The first byte
has the higher value bits, the second the lower values.
The contents of register 0 are shown by the value 0x1234 and the contents of
register 1 is 0x2345.
Exception
513
12.2.3.5 Function Code FC5 (Write Coil)
Request
The request specifies the reference number (output address) of output bit to be
written. The reference number of the request is zero based; therefore, the first coil
starts at address 0.
Example: Turn ON the second output bit (address 1)
Response
Exception
514
12.2.3.6 Function Code FC6 (Write Single Register)
This function writes the value of one single output register to a slave device in
word format.
Request
The request specifies the reference number (register address) of the first output
word to be written. The value to be written is specified in the “Register Value”
field. The reference number of the request is zero based; therefore, the first
register starts at address 0.
Example: Write a value of 0x1234 to the second output register
Response
Exception
515
Pos : 122.12 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/Anwendung der M ODBU S-Funkti onen - FC 11, FC 15, FC 16 @ 4\mod_1235567470328_21.doc x @ 27730 @ 444 @ 1
This function returns a status word and an event counter from the slave device’s
communication event counter. By reading the current count before and after a
series of messages, a master can determine whether the messages were handled
normally by the slave.
Following each successful new processing, the counter counts up. This counting
process is not performed in the case of exception replies, poll commands or
counter inquiries.
Request
Response
The reply contains a 2-byte status word and a 2-byte event counter. The status
word only contains zeroes.
Exception
516
12.2.3.8 Function Code FC15 (Write Multiple Coils)
Request
The request message specifies the reference number (first coil in the sequence),
the bit count (number of bits to be written), and the output data. The output coils
are zero-based; therefore, the first output point is 0.
In this example 16 bits are set, starting with the address 0. The request contains 2
bytes with the value 0xA5F0, or 1010 0101 1111 0000 in binary format.
The first data byte transmits the value of 0xA5 to the addresses 7 to 0, whereby 0
is the lowest value bit. The next byte transmits 0xF0 to the addresses 15 to 8,
whereby the lowest value bit is 8.
Response
517
Exception
518
12.2.3.9 Function Code FC16 (Write Multiple Registers)
Request
The Request specifies the reference number (starting register), the word count
(number of registers to write), and the register data . The data is sent as 2 bytes
per register. The registers are zero-based; therefore, the first output is at address 0.
Example: Set data in registers 0 and 1
Response
Exception
519
Pos : 122.14 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/Anwendung der M ODBU S-Funkti onen ( x41) - F C22 @ 4\mod_1235567699484_21.doc x @ 27737 @ 4 @ 1
Request
Response
Exception
520
Pos : 122.16 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/Anwendung der M ODBU S-Funkti onen - FC 23 @ 4\mod_1235567802937_21.doc x @ 27740 @ 4 @ 1
Request
Response
Exception
521
Note that if the register ranges overlap, the results are undefined!
If register areas for read and write overlap, the results are undefined.
522
Pos : 122.18 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/M ODBU S-Register-Mappi ng - Einlei tung (Contr oller) @ 3\mod_1235386256031_21.doc x @ 27560 @ 3 @ 1
Via the register services the states of the complex and digital I/O modules can be
determined or changed.
Pos : 122.19 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine M odule)/Fel dbus kommuni kati on/M ODBUS/M ODBU S-Register-Mappi ng - R egisterz ugriff Les en ( mit FC 3, FC4, FC 23)N OVR AM 24kB+ ( 880/1//2/4/5) @ 8\mod_1278680808508_21.doc x @ 59518 @ @ 1
Table 135: Register access reading (with FC3, FC4 and FC23)
MODBUS address IEC 61131 Memory range
[dec] [hex] address
0...255 Physical input area (1) 0x0000...0x00FF %IW0...%IW255
First 256 words of physical input data
256...511 0x0100...0x01FF %QW256...%QW511 PFC OUT area
Volatile PFC output variables
512...767 0x0200...0x02FF %QW0...%QW255 Physical output area (1)
First 256 words of physical output data
768...1023 0x0300...0x03FF %IW256...%IW511 PFC IN area
Volatile PFC input variables
1024...4095 0x0400...0x0FFF - MODBUS exception:
“Illegal data address”
4096...12287 0x1000...0x2FFF - Configuration register (see following
chapter “Configuration Functions“)
12288...24575 0x3000...0x5FFF %MW0...%MW12287 NOVRAM
24 kB retain memory *)
*) In Target settings RETAIN on 0, flags
on MAX (24 kB)
24576...25340 0x6000...0x62FC %IW512...%IW1275 Physical input area (2)
Additional 764 words physical input data
25341...28671 0x62FD...0x6FFF - MODBUS exception:
“Illegal data address”
28672...29435 0x7000...0x72FB %QW512...%QW1275 Physical output area (2)
Additional 764 words physical output data
29436...32767 0x72FC...0x7FFF - MODBUS exception:
“Illegal data address”
32768...36863 0x8000...0x8FFF - NOVRAM
"8 kB retain memory *)
*) In Target settings RETAIN on 0, flags
on MAX (32 kB)
36864...65535 0x9000...0xFFFF - MODBUS exception:
“Illegal data address”
Pos : 122.20 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine M odule)/Fel dbus kommuni kati on/M ODBUS/M ODBU S-Register-Mappi ng - R egisterz ugriff Schr eiben( mit FC6, FC 16, FC 22, FC 23)N OVR AM 24kB+ ( 880-5) @ 8\mod_1278681174720_21.doc x @ 59521 @ @ 1
523
Register Access Writing (with FC6, FC16, FC22 and FC23)
Table 136: Register access writing (with FC6, FC16, FC22 and FC23)
MODBUS address IEC 61131 Memory range
[dec] [hex] address
0...255 Physical output area (1) 0x0000...0x00FF %QW0...%QW255
First 256 words of physical output data
256...511 0x0100...0x01FF %IW256...%IW511 PFC IN area
Volatile PFC input variables
512...767 0x0200...0x02FF %QW0...%QW255 Physical output area (1)
First 256 words of physical output data
768...1023 0x0300...0x03FF %IW256...%IW511 PFC IN area
Volatile PFC input variables
1024...4095 0x0400...0x0FFF - MODBUS exception:
“Illegal data address”
4096...12287 0x1000...0x2FFF - Configuration register ( see following
chapter „Configuration Functions“)
Not with FC22!
12288...24575 0x3000...0x5FFF %MW0...%MW12287 NOVRAM
24 kB retain memory *)
*) In Target settings RETAIN on 0, flags
on MAX (24 kB)
24576...25340 0x6000...0x62FC %QW512...%QW1275 Physical output area (2)
Additional 764 words physical output data
25341...28671 0x62FD...0x6FFF - MODBUS exception:
“Illegal data address”
28672...29435 0x7000...0x72FB %QW512...%QW1275 Physical output area (2)
Additional 764 words physical output data
29436...32767 0x72FC...0x7FFF - MODBUS exception:
“Illegal data address”
32768...36863 0x8000...0x8FFF - NOVRAM
"8 kB retain memory *)
*) In Target settings RETAIN on 0, flags
on MAX (32 kB)
36864...65535 0x9000...0xFFFF - MODBUS exception:
“Illegal data address”
Pos : 122.21 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/M ODBU S-Register-Mappi ng - Abs atz Coil-Dienste, Bitzugriffe @ 3\mod_1235393917265_21.doc x @ 27584 @ @ 1
The digital MODBUS services (coil services) are bit accesses, with which only
the states of digital I/O modules can be determined or changed. Complex I/O
modules are not attainable with these services and so they are ignored. Because of
this the addressing of the digital channels begins again with 0, so that the
MODBUS address is always identical to the channel number, (i.e. the digital input
no. 47 has the MODBUS address "46").
Pos : 122.22 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/M ODBU S-Register-Mappi ng - Bitzugriff Les en (mi t FC 1 und FC 2) N OVR AM 2 statt 8 kB (881) @ 8\mod_1278681413601_21.doc x @ 59524 @ @ 1
524
Bit Access Reading (with FC1 and FC2)
Pos : 122.23 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/M ODBU S-Register-Mappi ng - Bitzugriff Sc hrei ben (mit FC5 und FC 15) N OVRAM 2 s tatt 8 kB ( 881) @ 8\mod_1278681571557_21.doc x @ 59527 @ @ 1
525
Pos : 122.25 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/M ODBU S-Register ( x41) - Teil 1.0 ( 0x1000 bis 0x102A) @ 3\mod_1235399979343_21.doc x @ 27603 @ 3 @ 1
526
Table 140: MODBUS registers (Continuation)
Register Access Length Description
address (Word)
0x2020 R 1 … 16 Short description controller
0x2021 R 1…8 Compile time of the firmware
0x2022 R 1…8 Compile date of the firmware
0x2023 R 1 … 32 Indication of the firmware loader
0x2030 R 1 … 65 Description of the connected I/O modules (module 0…64)
0x2031 R 1 … 64 Description of the connected I/O modules (module 65…128)
0x2032 R 1 … 64 Description of the connected I/O modules (module 129…192)
0x2033 R 1 … 63 Description of the connected I/O modules (module 193…255)
0x2040 W 1 Software reset (Write sequence 0x55AA or 0xAA55)
0x2041 W 1 Format flash disk
0x2042 W 1 Extract HTML sides from the firmware
0x2043 W 1 Factory settings
Pos : 122.31 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/Zugriff auf R egisterwerte - Watc hdog-Register bis Tabelle @ 3\mod_1235460353828_21.doc x @ 27616 @ 44 @ 1
You can use any MODBUS application to access (read from or write to) register
values. Both commercial (e.g., "Modscan") and free programs (from
http://www.modbus.org/tech.php) are available.
The following sections describe how to access both the registers and their values.
The watchdog monitors the data transfer between the fieldbus master and the
controller. Every time the controller receives a specific request (as define in the
watchdog setup registers) from the master, the watchdog timer in the controller
resets.
In the case of fault free communication, the watchdog timer does not reach its end
value. After each successful data transfer, the timer is reset.
If the watchdog times out, a fieldbus failure has occurred. In this case, the
fieldbus controller answers all following MODBUS TCP/IP requests with the
exception code 0x0004 (Slave Device Failure).
In the controller special registers are used to setup the watchdog by the master
(Register addresses 0x1000 to 0x1008).
By default, the watchdog is not enabled when you turn the controller on. To
activate it, the first step is to set/verify the desired time-out value of the Watchdog
Time register (0x1000). Second, the function code mask must be specified in the
mask register (0x1001), which defines the function code(s) that will reset the
timer for the first time. Finally, the Watchdog-Trigger register (0x1003) or the
register 0x1007 must be changed to a non-zero value to start the timer
subsequently.
527
timer of watchdog can manually be reset, if it is not timed out, by writing a value
of 0x1 to the register 0x1003 or to the Restart Watchdog register 0x1007.
After the watchdog is started, it can be stopped by the user via the Watchdog Stop
register (0x1005) or the Simply Stop Watchdog register (0x1008).
The watchdog registers can be addressed in the same way as described with the
MODBUS read and write function codes. Specify the respective register address
in place of the reference number.
Pos : 122.32 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/Zugriff auf R egisterwerte - Watc hdog-Register Tabellen 0x1000 (ALLE AU SSER 342, 842) @ 8\mod_1278923916162_21.doc x @ 59540 @ @ 1
Pos : 122.33 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/Zugriff auf R egisterwerte - Watc hdog-Register (ab 0x1001 bis 0x100A) @ 8\mod_1278926087850_21.doc x @ 59546 @ @ 1
FC 1 Bit 0
FC 2 Bit 1
FC 3 Bit 2
FC 4 Bit 3
FC 5 Bit 4
...
FC 16 Bit 15
Changes to the register value can only be made if the watchdog is deactivated.
The bit pattern stored in the register defines the function codes that trigger the
watchdog. Some function codes are not supported. For those the watchdog will
not be triggered even if another MODBUS device transmits one of them.
528
Table 143: Register Address 0x1002
Register address 0x1002 (4098dec)
Value Watchdog function coding mask, function code 17...32, WD_FCM_17_32
Access Read/write
Default 0xFFFF
Description Same function as above, however, with the function codes 17 to 32.
FC 17 Bit 0
FC 18 Bit 1
...
FC 32 Bit 15
These codes are currently not supported, for this reason the default value should
not be changed. Changes to the register value can only be made if the watchdog
is deactivated. It is not possible to modify this value while the watchdog is
running.
529
Table 147: Register Address 0x1006
Register address 0x1006 (4102dez)
Value While watchdog is running, WD_RUNNING
Access Read
Standard 0x0000
Description Current watchdog status.
at 0x0000: Watchdog not active
at 0x0001: Watchdog active
at 0x0002: Watchdog exhausted.
Pos : 122.34 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/Zugriff auf R egisterwerte - Watc hdog (Beis piel Z eitübersc hreitung) @ 4\mod_1235634365875_21.doc x @ 27793 @ @ 1
530
The length of each register is 1 word; i.e., with each access only one word can be
written or read. Following are two examples of how to set the value for a time
overrun:
2. Use the function code 5 to write 0x0010 (=2(5-1)) in the coding mask
(register 0x1001).
Function code 5 (writing a digital output bit) continuously triggers the watchdog
to restart the watchdog timer again and again within the specified time. If time
between requests exceeds 1 second, a watchdog timeout error occurs.
3. To stop the watchdog, write the value 0xAA55 or 0x55AA into 0x1008
(Simply Stop Watchdog register, WD_AC_STOP_SIMPLE).
1. Write 0x1770 (= 10*60*1000 ms / 100 ms) in the register for time overrun
(0x1000).
(Register 0x1000 works with a multiple of 100 ms;
10 min = 600,000 ms; 600,000 ms / 100 ms = 6000dec = 1770hex)
Values following each other must differ in size. Writing of a value not equal to
zero starts the watchdog. Watchdog faults are reset and writing process data is
possible again.
4. To stop the watchdog, write the value 0xAA55 or 0x55AA into 0x1008
(Simply Stop Watchdog register, WD_AC_STOP_SIMPLE).
Pos : 122.35 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/Zugriff auf R egisterwerte - Watc hdog-Register (750- 881) 0x100B @ 8\mod_1278930433227_21.doc x @ 59640 @ @ 1
531
Table 153: Register Address 0x100B
Register address 0x100B (4107dez)
Value Save watchdog parameter
Access Write
Standard 0x0000
Description With writing of '0x55AA' or '0xAA55' in register 0x100B the registers 0x1000,
0x1001, 0x1002 are set on remanent.
532
Pos : 122.37 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/Zugriff auf R egisterwerte - Di agnoser egister 0x1020, 0x1021 @ 3\mod_1235461657984_21.doc x @ 27628 @ 4 @ 1
533
Pos : 122.39 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/Zugriff auf R egisterwerte - Konfigur ati onsr egister 0x1022 bis 0x1025 @ 3\mod_1235461775390_21.doc x @ 27632 @ 4 @ 1
Pos : 122.40 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/Zugriff auf R egisterwerte - Konfigur ati onsr egister 0x1028 ( x41) @ 4\mod_1235635808625_21.doc x @ 27808 @ @ 1
Pos : 122.41 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/Zugriff auf R egisterwerte - Konfigur ati onsr egister 0x1029 ( x41) @ 4\mod_1235635910031_21.doc x @ 27811 @ @ 1
534
Table 161: Register Address 0x1029
Register address 0x1029 (4137dec) with 9 words
Value MODBUS TCP statistics
Access Read/write
Description 1 word SlaveDeviceFailure internal bus error, fieldbus error by
activated watchdog
1 word BadProtocol error in the MODBUS TCP header
1 word BadLength Wrong telegram length
1 word BadFunction Invalid function code
1 word BadAddress Invalid register address
1 word BadData Invalid value
1 word TooManyRegisters Number of the registers which can be
worked on is too large, Read/Write 125/100
1 word TooManyBits Number of the coils which can be worked
on is too large, Read/Write 2000/800
1 word ModTcpMessageCounter Number of received MODBUS/TCP
requests
With writing 0xAA55 or 0x55AA in the register will reset this data area.
Pos : 122.42 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/Zugriff auf R egisterwerte - Konfigur ati onsr egister 0x102A @ 4\mod_1235634788484_21.doc x @ 27796 @ @ 1
Pos : 122.43 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/Zugriff auf R egisterwerte - Konfigur ati onsr egister 0x102B (881) @ 8\mod_1280233152940_21.doc x @ 61365 @ @ 1
Pos : 122.44 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/Zugriff auf R egisterwerte - Konfigur ati onsr egister 0x1030, 0x1031 (Z eitbasis 100ms) @ 6\mod_1254385997423_21.doc x @ 42340 @ @ 1
535
Pos : 122.45 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/Zugriff auf R egisterwerte - Konfigur ati onsr egister 0x1035, 0x1036 (881) @ 8\mod_1280225698346_21.doc x @ 61362 @ @ 1
Pos : 122.46 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/Zugriff auf R egisterwerte - Konfigur ati onsr egister 0x1037 ( 352, 881) @ 8\mod_1280225513951_21.doc x @ 61359 @ @ 1
Pos : 122.47 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/Zugriff auf R egisterwerte - Konfigur ati onsr egister 0x1050 @ 4\mod_1235634956296_21.doc x @ 27802 @ @ 1
Pos : 122.48 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/Zugriff auf R egisterwerte - Konfigur ati onsr egister 0x2030 @ 3\mod_1235461168031_21.doc x @ 27622 @ @ 1
536
Table 170: Register Address 0x2030
Register address 0x2030 (8240dec) with a word count of up to 65
Value Description of the connected I/O modules
Access Read module 0...64
Description Length 1...65 words
These 65 registers identify the controller and the first 64 modules present in a
node. Each module is represented in a word. Because order numbers cannot be
read out of digital modules, a code is displayed for them, as defined below:
Bit position 0 Input module
Bit position 1 Output module
Bit position 2…7 Not used
Bit position 8…14 Module size in bits
Bit position 15 Designation digital module
Examples:
4 Channel Digital Input Module = 0x8401
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Code 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Hex 8 4 0 1
2 Channel Digital Output Module = 0x8202
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Code 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
Hex 8 2 0 2
Pos : 122.49 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/Zugriff auf R egisterwerte - Konfigur ati onsr egister 0x2031, 0x2032, 0x2033 @ 4\mod_1235636342812_21.doc x @ 27818 @ @ 1
537
Table 173: Register Address 0x2033
Register address 0x2033 (8243dec) with a word count of up to 65
Value Description of the connected I/O modules
Access Read modules 193 ... 255
Description Length 1…63 words
These 63 registers identify the 4th block of I/O modules present (modules 193 to
255). Each module is represented in a word. Because order numbers cannot be
read out of digital modules, a code is displayed for them, as defined below:
Bit position 0 Input module
Bit position 1 Output module
Bit position 2…7 Not used
Bit position 8…14 Module size in bits
Bit position 15 Designation digital module
Pos : 122.50 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/Zugriff auf R egisterwerte - Konfigur ati onsr egister 0x2040 @ 4\mod_1235636434734_21.doc x @ 27821 @ @ 1
Pos : 122.51 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/Zugriff auf R egisterwerte - Konfigur ati onsr egister 0x2041, 0x2042, 0x2043 ( ohne F W-Version) @ 8\mod_1278930636091_21.doc x @ 59643 @ @ 1
538
Pos : 122.53 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/Zugriff auf R egisterwerte - Fir mwar e-Infor mati onsr egister 0x2010 bis 0x2014 @ 3\mod_1235461969843_21.doc x @ 27636 @ 4 @ 1
Pos : 122.54 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/Zugriff auf R egisterwerte - Fir mwar e-Infor mati onsr egister 0x2020 bis 0x2023 @ 4\mod_1235646917328_21.doc x @ 27848 @ @ 1
539
Table 184: Register Address 0x2021
Register address 0x2021 (8225dec) with a word count of up to 8
Value Description, INFO_DESCRIPTION
Access Read
Description Time of the firmware version, 8 words
540
Pos : 122.56 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/Zugriff auf R egisterwerte - Konstantenr egister 0x2000 bis 0x2008 @ 3\mod_1235462025437_21.doc x @ 27639 @ 4 @ 1
541
Table 193: Register Address 0x2006
Register address 0x2006 (8198dec)
Value Maximum negative number, GP_MAX_NEG
Access Read
Description Constant in order to control arithmetic
Pos : 122.57 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/Zugriff auf R egisterwerte - Konstantenr egister 0x3000 bis 0x5F FF (Contr oller, x41) @ 3\mod_1235461429796_21.doc x @ 27625 @ @ 1
Pos : 123 /Dokumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
542
Pos : 124.1 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/EtherNetIP/EtherN etIP - Allgemei n @ 3\mod_1233669829343_21.doc x @ 27044 @ 23333344 @ 1
EtherNet/IP is based on the TCP/IP protocol family and consequently uses the
bottom 4 layers of the OSI layer model in unaltered form so that all standard
Ethernet communication modules such as PC interface cards, cables, connectors,
hubs and switches can also be used with EtherNet/IP.
Positioned above the transport layer is the encapsulation protocol, which enables
use of the Control & Information Protocol (CIP) on TCP/IP and UDP/IP.
In this way, ControlNet, DeviceNet and EtherNet/IP have the same application
protocol and can therefore jointly use device profiles and object libraries. These
objects enable plug-and-play interoperability between complex devices of
different manufacturers.
543
12.3.2 Protocol overview in the OSI model
In order to clarify the interrelationships between DeviceNet, ControlNet and
EtherNet/IP, the following diagram presents the associated ISO/OSI reference
model.
6
Data Management Services Safety Services and
Presentation
Explicit and I/O Messages Messages
Layer
5
Session Connection Management, Routing
Layer
4
Transport TCP/UDP
Layer ControlNet
DeviceNet
2
Ethernet CompoNet ControlNet CAN
Data Link
CSMA/CD Time Slot CTDMA CSMA/NBA
Layer
1
Physical Ethernet CompoNet ControlNet DeviceNet
Layer
544
12.3.3 Characteristics of the EtherNet/IP Protocol Software
The EtherNet/IP product classes are divided into 4 levels with each level
containing a particular functionality. Each higher level in turn possesses at least
the functionality of a lower level. The fieldbus coupler supports levels 1 and 2 of
the EtherNet/IP product classes, which immediately build on each other.
545
12.3.5 Object Model
12.3.5.1 General
Object:
An object is an abstract representation of individual, related components within a
device. It is determined by its data or attributes, its outwardly applied functions or
services, and by its defined behavior.
Class:
A class describes a series of objects which all represent the same type of system
components. A class is the generalization of an object. All objects in a class are
identical as regards form and behavior, but can comprise differing attribute
values.
Instance:
An instance describes a specific and physical occurrence of an object. The terms
“object,” “instance” and “object instance” all refer to a specific instance. Different
instances of a class have the same services, the same behavior and the same
variables (attributes). However, you can have different variable values.
For example, Finland is an instance of the “Land” object class.
Variable:
The variables (attributes) describe an externally visible characteristic or the
function of an object. Typical attributes include configuration or status
information.
For example, the ASCII name of an object or the repetition frequency of a
periodic object is output.
Service:
A service is a function supported by an object and/or an object class. CIP defines
a group of common services that are applied to the attributes. These services
execute specified actions.
Example: Reading variables.
Behavior:
The behavior specifies how an object functions. The functions result from various
occurrences, which are determined by the object, e.g. receiving service requests,
recording internal errors or the sequence of timers.
546
12.3.5.2 Class Overview
CIP classes are included in the CIP specification of ODVA. They describe the
properties (Volume 1, “Common Industrial Protocol”) of Ethernet and CAN
independent of their physical interface. The physical interface is described in a
separate specification. For Ethernet/IP, this is Volume 2 (“Ethernet/IP Adaptation
of CIP”), which describes the adaption of Ethernet /IP to CIP.
For this purpose, WAGO uses classes 01hex, 02hex, 04hex, 05hex, 06hex and F4hex,
which are described in Volume 1 (“Common Industrial Protocol”).
Classes F5hex and F6hex are supported from Volume 2 (“Ethernet/IP Adaptation of
CIP”).
WAGO-specific classes listed in the overview table below are also available.
All CIP Common classes listed and the WAGO-specific classes listed below that
are described in detail in the following individual sections after a brief explanation
of the table headings in the object descriptions.
547
74 hex Analog Output Point Extended 3
80 hex Module Configuration
81 hex
Pos : 124.2 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/EtherNetIP/Allgemei n - Variabl es (nur C ontroll er) @ 3\mod_1233728715593_21.doc x @ 27050 @ @ 1
Module Configuration Extended 1
A0 hex Input fieldbus variable USINT
A1 hex Input fieldbus variable USINT Extended 1
A2 hex Input fieldbus variable USINT Extended 2
A3 hex Output fieldbus variable USINT
A4 hex Output fieldbus variable USINT Extended 1
A5 hex Output fieldbus variable USINT Extended 2
A6 hex Input fieldbus variable UINT
A7 hex Input fieldbus variable UINT Extended 1
A8 hex Output fieldbus variable UINT
A9 hex Output fieldbus variable UINT Extended 1
AA hex Input fieldbus variable UDINT
AB hex Input fieldbus variable UDINT Offset UINT
AC hex Output fieldbus variable UDINT
AD hex Output fieldbus variable UDINT Offset UINT
Pos : 124.3 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/EtherNetIP/Erläuter ung zur Obj ektbesc hr., Klassen Identity, Messag e R outer @ 3\mod_1233730204656_21.doc x @ 27053 @ 444 @ 1
548
12.3.5.3 Explanation of the Table Headings in the Object Descriptions
549
Instance 1
Common Services
550
12.3.5.5 Message Router (02 hex)
The “Message Router Object” provides connection points (in the form of classes
or instances), which can use a client for addressing services (reading, writing).
These messages can be transmitted both when connected and when unconnected
from the client to the fieldbus coupler.
Instance 1
551
Common Services
Pos : 124.4 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/EtherNetIP/Assembl y ( 04hex), s tatisc he Ass embl y Instanz (C ontr oller) @ 7\mod_1265639174189_21.doc x @ 49994 @ 4 @ 1
Using the "Assembly" classe, even several diverse objects can be combined.
These could be, for example, input and output data, status and control information
or diagnostic information. WAGO uses the manufacturer-specific instances in
order to provide these objects for you in various arrangements. This gives you an
efficient way to exchange process data. The following is a description of the
individual static Assembly instances with their contents and arrangements.
This assembly instance contains analog and digital output data. Any fieldbus input
variables that may be defined are attached behind this.
552
Table 209: Static assembly instances – Instance 101 (65 hex)
Attribute ID Access Name Data type Description Default value
3 Get/Set Data ARRAY of BYTE Only analog and digital -
output data, as well as
possible fieldbus input
variables, are contained in the
process image.
4 Get Data UNIT Number of Bytes in the -
Size process data image
This assembly instance contains digital output data and fieldbus input variables
only.
This assembly instance contains analog output data and fieldbus input variables
only.
This assembly instance contains analog and digital input data, status (= value from
class 100, instance 1, attribute 5) and fieldbus output variables.
553
Instance 105 (69 hex)
This assembly instance contains only digital input data, status (= value from class
100, instance 1, attribute 5) and fieldbus output variables.
This assembly instance contains only analog input data, status (= value from class
100, instance 1, attribute 5) and fieldbus output variables.
This assembly instance contains analog and digital input data and fieldbus output
variables.
554
Instance 108 (6C hex)
This assembly instance contains only digital input data and fieldbus output
variables.
This assembly instance contains only analog input data and fieldbus output
variables.
Pos : 124.5 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/EtherNetIP/Instanz 110, 111 (750-880, -881) (nur Contr oller) @ 7\mod_1265640421196_21.doc x @ 50033 @ @ 1
Pos : 124.6 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/EtherNetIP/Instanz 198, 199, C ommon ser vic e @ 3\mod_1233753006078_21.doc x @ 27064 @ @ 1
555
Instance 198 (C6 hex) “Input Only”
This instance can only be used in the “consumed path” (from the point of view of
the slave device).
Common Service
Pos : 124.7 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/EtherNetIP/C ommon Ser vic es ( ohne Diag nose) @ 8\mod_1276170797909_21.doc x @ 57633 @ @ 1
The software inspects the writing of attribute 3 of assembly instances 101, 102
and 103. If the limit value has been exceeded, it is identified and, if necessary,
corrected. However, a write request is not rejected. This means that if less data is
received than expected, only this data is written. If more data is received than
expected, the received data at the upper limit is deleted. In the case of explicit
messages, however, a defined CIP is generated even though the data has been
written.
Pos : 124.8 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/EtherNetIP/C onnection Objec t (05hex), Connec tion M anager Objec t (06hex) @ 8\mod_1276182355206_21.doc x @ 57650 @ 44 @ 1
Because the connections are established and terminated via the connection
manager, the class and instance attributes of this class are not visible.
The “Connection Manager Object” provides the internal resources that are
required for the input and output data and explicit messages. In addition, the
administration of this resource is an assignment of the “Connection Manager
Object”.
For each connection (input and output data or explicit), another instance of the
556
connection class is created. The connection parameters are extracted from the
“Forward Open” service, which is responsible for establishing a connection.
• Forward_Open
• Unconnected_Send
• Forward_Close
The “Port Class Object” specifies the existing CIP ports on the fieldbus
coupler/coupler. There is one instance for each CIP port.
Instance 1
557
Common Services
558
12.3.5.10 TCP/IP Interface (F5 hex)
The “TCP/IP Interface Object” provides for the configuration of the TCP/IP
network interface of a fieldbus coupler/controller. Examples of configurable
objects include the IP address, the network mask and the gateway address of the
fieldbus coupler/controller.
Each device must support exactly one instance of the TCP/IP interface object for
each TCP/IP-compatible communications interface. A request for access to the
first instance of the TCP/IP interface object must always refer to the instance
connected with the interface, which is used to submit the request.
559
Instance 1
Common Services
The “Ethernet Link Object” contains link-specific counter and status information
for an Ethernet 802.3 communications interface. Each device must support exactly
one instance of the Ethernet Link Object for each Ethernet IEEE 802.3
communications interface on the module. An Ethernet link object instance for an
internal interface can also be used for the devices, e.g. an internal port with an
integrated switch.
560
Instance 0 (Class Attributes)
Pos : 124.10 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/EtherNetIP/Ethernet Li nk (3 Instanzen, 3 Ports) @ 3\mod_1233817490375_21.doc x @ 27173 @ @ 1
561
Instance 1
562
Table 228: Ethernet link (F6 hex) – Instance 1
Attribute ID Access Name Data type Description Default value
9 Get/ Admin Status USINT Admin status: 1 (0x01)
Set Value 0: Reserved
Value 1: Interface
active
Value 2: Interface
deactivated. Is this the
only CIP interface, a
request for
deactivation will be
receipted with error
code 0x09
Value 3…256:
Reserved
10 Get Interface Label SHORT_ Name of the interface “Port 1”
STRING
563
Instance 2 – Port 2
564
Table 229: Ethernet link (F6 hex) – Instance 2
Attribute ID Access Name Data type Description Default value
9 Get/ Admin Status USINT Admin status: 1 (0x01)
Set Value 0: Reserved
Value 1: Interface
active
Value 2: Interface
deactivated. Is this the
only CIP interface, a
request for
deactivation will be
receipted with error
code 0x09
Value 3…256:
Reserved
10 Get Interface Label SHORT_ Name of the interface “Port 2”
STRING
565
Instance 3 – Internal Port 3
Common Services
Pos : 124.11 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/EtherNetIP/CouplerContr oller C onfiguration - Attri bute bis ID 46 @ 3\mod_1233827515062_21.doc x @ 27176 @ 4 @ 1
The fieldbus coupler configuration class allows reading and configuration of some
important fieldbus/controller process parameters. The following listings explain in
details all supported instances and attributes.
566
Instance 0 (Class Attributes)
Instance 1
567
Attribute ID Access NV Name Data type Description Default
value
47 (0x2F) Get V Bk_Diag_Value UINT Contains the diagnostic byte 0
Note: This attribute has to be
read out before attribute 6
(DNS_i_Trmnldia), because
during the reading of attribute
6 the diagnostic byte contains
the data of the next diagnostic
100 (0x64) Set NV Bk_FbInp_Var UINT Determines the number of 0
_Cnt bytes for the PFC input
fieldbus variables, which are
added to the assembly object.
This number is added to the
consuming path. assembly
instances (101...103)
101 (0x65) Set NV Bk_FbOut_Var UINT Determines the number of 0
_Cnt bytes for the PFC output
fieldbus variables, which are
added to the assembly object.
This number is added to the
producing path. assembly
instances (104...109)
102 (0x66) Set NV Bk_FbInp_Plc UINT Determines the number of 4
Only_Var_Cnt bytes for the PFC input
fieldbus variables, which are
received via assembly
instance 111.
103 (0x67) Set NV Bk_FbInp_Start UINT Determines starting from 0
Plc_Var_Cnt which position the PFC input
fieldbus variables for the
assembly instance 111 to be
received.
104 (0x68) Set NV Bk_FbOut_Plc UINT Determines the number of 4
Only_Var_Cnt bytes for the PFC output
fieldbus variables, which are
received via assembly
instance 110.
105 (0x69) Set NV Bk_FbOut_Star UINT Determines starting from 0
t Plc_Var_Cnt which position the PFC
output fieldbus variables for
the assembly instance 110 to
Pos : 124.13 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/EtherNetIP/CouplerContr oller C onfiguration - Attri butID 120, 121, C ommon ser vic e @ 3\mod_1233831576390_21.doc x @ 27222 @ @ 1
be received.
568
120 (0x78) Set NV Bk_Header UINT Indicates whether the 0x0000
CfgOT RUN/IDLE header is used
originator target direction
0: is used
1: is not used
121(0x79) Set NV Bk_Header UINT Indicates whether the 0x0001
CfgTO RUN/IDLE header is used
originator target direction
0: is used
1: is not used
Common Service
Pos : 124.14 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/EtherNetIP/Discrete Input, Discrete Output, Analog Input, Anal og Output, Modul e C onfiguration Poi nt @ 3\mod_1233832337062_21.doc x @ 27225 @ 444444444444444444 @ 1
This class allows the reading of data of a particular digital input point.
Instance 0 (Class-Attributes)
Common Services
The extension of the “Discrete Input Point” class enables the reading of data from
a fieldbus node that contains over 255 digital input points (DIPs). The instance
569
scope of the “Discrete Input Point Extended 1” class covers DIPs from 256 to 510
in the fieldbus node.
Common Services
Table 240: Discrete Input Point Extended 1 (69 hex) – Common service
Service Service available Service-name Description
code Class Instance
0E hex Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single Supplies contents of the appropriate
attribute
The extension of the “Discrete Input Point” class enables the reading of data from
a fieldbus node that contains over 510 digital input points (DIPs). The instance
scope of the “Discrete Input Point Extended 2” class covers DIPs from 511 to 765
in the fieldbus node.
570
Common Services
The extension of the “Discrete Input Point” class enables the reading of data from
a fieldbus node that contains over 765 digital input points (DIPs). The instance
scope of the “Discrete Input Point Extended 3” class covers DIPs from 766 to
1020 in the fieldbus node.
Instance 0 (Class-Attributes)
Table 245: Discrete Input Point Extended 3 (71 hex) – Instance 766...1020
Attribute Access Name Data type Description Default value
ID
1 Get DipObj_Value BYTE Digital input
-
(only Bit 0 is valid)
Common Services
Table 246: Discrete Input Point Extended 3 (71 hex) – Common service
Service Service available Service-Name Description
code Class Instance
0E hex Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single Supplies contents of the appropriate
attribute
This class enables data exchange for a particular digital output point.
571
Instance 1 ... 255 (Digital output value 1 up to 255)
Common Services
The extension of the “Discrete Output Point” class enables the exchange of data
from a fieldbus node that contains over 255 digital output points (DOPs). The
instance scope of the “Discrete Output Point Extended 1” class covers DOPs from
256 to 510 in the fieldbus node.
Table 251: Discrete Output Point Extended 1 (6A hex) – Instance 256...510
Attribute Access Name Data type Description Default
ID value
1 Get DopObj_Value BYTE Digital Output -
(only Bit 0 valid)
Common Services
Table 252: Discrete Output Point Extended 1 (6A hex) – Common service
Service Service available Service-Name Description
code Class Instance
0E hex Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single Supplies contents of the appropriate
attribute
10 hex No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Modifies an attribute value
572
12.3.5.19 Discrete Output Point Extended 2 (6E hex)
The extension of the “Discrete Output Point” class enables the exchange of data
from a fieldbus node that contains over 510 digital output points (DOPs). This
instance cope of the “Discrete Output Point Extended 1” class covers the DOPs
from 511 to 765 in the fieldbus node.
Table 254: Discrete Output Point Extended 2 (6E hex) – Instance 511...765
Attribute Access Name Data type Description Default
ID value
1 Get DopObj_Value BYTE Digital Output -
(only Bit 0 valid)
Common Services
Table 255: Discrete Output Point Extended 2 (6E hex) – Common service
Service Service available Service-Name Description
code Class Instance
0E hex Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single Supplies contents of the appropriate
attribute
10 hex No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Modifies an attribute value
The extension of the “Discrete Output Point” class enables the exchange of data
from a fieldbus node that contains over 765 digital output points (DOPs). The
instance scope of the “Discrete Output Point Extended 2” class covers DOPs from
766 to 1020 in the fieldbus node.
573
Instance 766 ... 1020 (Digital Output value 766 up to 1020)
Table 257: Discrete Output Point Extended 3 (72 hex) – Instance 766...1020
Attribute Access Name Data type Description Default
ID value
1 Get DopObj_Value BYTE Digital Output -
(only Bit 0 valid)
Common Services
Table 258: Discrete Output Point Extended 2 (6E hex) – Common service
Service Service available Service name Description
code Class Instance
0E hex Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single Supplies contents of the appropriate
attribute
10 hex No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Modifies an attribute value
This class enables the reading of data of a particular analog input point (AIP). An
analog input point is part of an analog input module.
Table 260: Analog Input Point (67 hex) – Instance 1 ... 255
Attribute Access Name Data type Description Default
ID value
1 Get AipObj_Value ARRAY Analog Input -
of BYTE
2 Get AipObj_Value_ USINT Length of the output data -
Length AopObj_Value (in byte)
Common Services
574
12.3.5.22 Analog Input Point Extended 1 (6B hex)
The extension of the “Analog Input Point” class enables the reading of data from a
fieldbus node that contains over 255 analog outputs (AIPs). The instance scope of
the “Analog Input Point Extended 1” class covers AIPs from 256 to 510 in the
fieldbus node.
Table 263: Analog Input Point Extended 1 (6B hex) – Instance 256 ... 510
Attribute Access Name Data type Description Default
ID value
1 Get AipObj_Value ARRAY Analog Input -
of BYTE
2 Get AipObj_Value_ USINT Length of the output data -
Length AopObj_Value (in byte)
Common Services
Table 264: Analog Input Point Extended 1 (6B hex) – Common service
Service Service available Service name Description
code Class Instance
0E hex Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single Supplies contents of the appropriate
attribute
The extension of the “Analog Input Point” class enables the reading of data from a
fieldbus node that contains over 510 analog outputs (AIPs). The instance scope of
the “Analog Input Point Extended 2” class covers AIPs from 511 to 765 in the
fieldbus node.
575
Instance 511 ... 765 (Analog Input 511 up to 765)
Table 266: Analog Input Point Extended 2 (6F hex) – Instance 511 ... 765
Attribute Access Name Data type Description Default
ID value
1 Get AipObj_Value ARRAY Analog Input -
of BYTE
2 Get AipObj_Value_ USINT Length of the output data -
Length AopObj_Value (in byte)
Common Services
Table 267: Analog Input Point Extended 2 (6F hex) – Common service
Service Service available Service name Description
code Class Instance
0E hex Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single Supplies contents of the appropriate
attribute
The extension of the “Analog Input Point” class enables the reading of data from a
fieldbus node that contains over 765 analog outputs (AIPs). The instance scope of
the “Analog Input Point Extended 3” class covers AIPs from 766 to 1020 in the
fieldbus node.
Table 269: Analog Input Point Extended 3 (73 hex) – Instance 766 ... 1020
Attribute Access Name Data type Description Default
ID value
1 Get AipObj_Value ARRAY Analog Input -
of BYTE
2 Get AipObj_Value_ USINT Length of the output data -
Length AopObj_Value (in byte)
576
Common Services
Table 270: Analog Input Point Extended 3 (73 hex) – Common service
Service Service available Service name Description
code Class Instance
0E hex Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single Supplies contents of the appropriate
attribute
This class enables the reading of data of a particular analog output point (AOP).
An analog output point is part of an analog output module.
Common Services
577
12.3.5.26 Analog Output Point Extended 1 (6C hex)
The extension of the “Analog Output Point” class enables the exchange of data
from a fieldbus node that contains over 255 analog output points (AOPs). The
instance scope of the “Discrete Output Point Extended 1” class covers AOPs from
256 to 510 in the fieldbus node.
Table 275: Analog Output Point Extended 1 (6C hex) – Instance 256...510
Attribute Access Name Data type Description Default
ID value
1 Get AopObj_Value ARRAY Analog Output -
of BYTE
2 Get AopObj_Value USINT Length of the output data -
_Length AopObj_Value (in byte)
Common Services
Table 276: Analog Output Point Extended 1 (6C hex) – Common service
Service Service available Service name Description
code Class Instance
0E hex Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single Supplies contents of the appropriate
attribute
10 hex No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Modifies an attribute value
The extension of the “Analog Output Point” class enables the exchange of data
from a fieldbus node that contains over 510 analog output points (AOPs). The
instance scope of the “Discrete Output Point Extended 2” class covers AOPs from
511 to 765 in the fieldbus node.
578
Instance 511 ... 765 (Analog output value 511 up to 765)
Table 278: Analog Output Point Extended 2 (70 hex) – Instance 511...765
Attribute Access Name Data type Description Default
ID value
1 Get AopObj_Value ARRAY Analog Output -
of BYTE
2 Get AopObj_Value USINT Length of the output data -
_Length AopObj_Value (in byte)
Common Services
Table 279: Analog Output Point Extended 2 (70 hex) – Common service
Service Service available Service name Description
code Class Instance
0E hex Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single Supplies contents of the appropriate
attribute
10 hex No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Modifies an attribute value
The extension of the “Analog Output Point” class enables the exchange of data
from a fieldbus node that contains over 765 analog output points (AOPs). The
instance scope of the “Discrete Output Point Extended 3” class covers AOPs from
766 to 1020 in the fieldbus node.
Table 281: Analog Output Point Extended 3 (74 hex) – Instance 766...1020
Attribute Access Name Data type Description Default
ID value
1 Get AopObj_Value ARRAY Analog Output -
of BYTE
2 Get AopObj_Value USINT Length of the output data -
_Length AopObj_Value (in byte)
579
Common Services
Table 282: Analog Output Point Extended 3 (74 hex) – Common service
Service Service available Service name Description
code Class Instance
0E hex Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single Supplies contents of the appropriate
attribute
10 hex No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Modifies an attribute value
Common Services
580
12.3.5.30 Module Configuration Extended (81 hex)
The same as “Module Configuration (80 hex)” but with a description of module
255.
Common Services
581
Pos : 124.16 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odule) /Fel dbus kommuni kati on/EtherNetIP/Input output fi eldbus variable ( extended) USINT, U INT, UD INT, A0 hex bis AD hex ( nur C ontroll er) @ 3\mod_1233838959000_21.doc x @ 27252 @ 44444444444444 @ 1
The class enables the reading of data from a particular PLC input variable.
For WAGO-I/O-PRO or CODESYS, that means the PLC addresses for output
variables %QB2552...%QB2806.
Table 290: Input fieldbus variable USINT (A0 hex) – Instance 1...255
Attribute ID Access Name Data type Description Default value
1 Set Fb_In_Var USINT Fieldbus input variable of the PLC 0
Common Services
Table 291: Input fieldbus variable USINT (A0 hex) – Common service
Service code Service available Service name Description
Class Instance
0E hex Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Sing Supplies contents of the appropriate attribute
le
10 hex No Yes Set_Attribute_Sing Modifies an attribute value
le
582
12.3.5.32 Input Fieldbus Variable USINT Extended 1 (A1 hex)
The extension of the "Input Fieldbus Variable USINT" class enables the reading
of PLC input variable data. The instance scope of the "Input Fieldbus Variable
USINT Extended 1" class covers the PLC input variable data from 256 to 510.
For WAGO-I/O-PRO or CODESYS, that means the PLC addresses for input
variables %IB2807...%IB3061.
Table 292: Input Fieldbus Variable USINT Extended 1 (A1 hex) – Class
Attribute Access Name Data type Description Default
ID value
1 Get Revision UINT Revision of this object 1 (0x0001)
2 Get Max Instance UINT Max. number of instances 255
(0x00FF)
Table 293: Input fieldbus variable USINT Extended 1 (A1 hex) – Instance 256...510
Attribute Access Name Data type Description Default
ID value
1 Set Fb_In_Var USINT Fieldbus-Input variable of the SPS 0
Common Services
Table 294: Input fieldbus variable USINT Extended 1 (A1 hex) – Common service
Servicecode Service available Service-Name Description
Class Instance
0E hex Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single Supplies contents of the appropriate
attribute
10 hex No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Modifies an attribute value.
583
12.3.5.33 Input Fieldbus Variable USINT Extended 2 (A2 hex)
The extension of the "Input Fieldbus Variable USINT" class enables the reading
of PLC input variable data. The instance scope of the "Input Fieldbus Variable
USINT Extended 1" class covers the PLC input variable data from 256 to 510.
For WAGO-I/O-PRO or CODESYS, that means the PLC addresses for input
variables %IB2807...%IB3061.
Table 295: Input Fieldbus Variable USINT Extended 2 (A2 hex) – Class
Attribute Access Name Data type Description Default
ID value
1 Get Revision UINT Revision of this object 1 (0x0001)
2 Get Max Instance UINT Max. number of instances 2 (0x0002)
Table 296: Input Fieldbus Variable USINT Extended 2 (A2 hex) – Instance 511...512
Attribute Access Name Data type Description Default
ID value
1 Set Fb_In_Var USINT Fieldbus-Input variable of the SPS 0
Common Services
Table 297: Input fieldbus variable USINT Extended 2 (A2 hex) – Common service
Servicecode Service available Service-Name Description
Class Instance
0E hex Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single Supplies contents of the appropriate
attribute
10 hex No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Modifies an attribute value
584
12.3.5.34 Output Fieldbus Variable USINT (A3 hex)
The class enables the exchange of data from a particular PLC output variable.
For WAGO-I/O-PRO or CODESYS, that means the PLC addresses for output
variables %QB2552...%QB2806.
Table 299: Output fieldbus variable USINT (A3 hex) – Instance 1...255
Attribute ID Access Name Data type Description Default value
1 Get Fb_Out_Var USINT Fieldbus Output variable of the 0
PLC
Common Services
Table 300: Output fieldbus variable USINT (A3 hex) – Common service
Service code Service available Service name Description
Class Instance
0E hex Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single Supplies contents of the appropriate attribute
585
12.3.5.35 Output Fieldbus Variable USINT Extended 1 (A4 hex)
The extension of the "Output Fieldbus Variable USINT" class enables the
exchange of PLC output variable data. The instance scope of the "Output Fieldbus
Variable USINT Extended 1" class covers the PLC output variable data from 256
to 510.
For WAGO-I/O-PRO or CODESYS, that means the PLC addresses for output
variables %QB2807...%QB3061.
Table 301: Output Fieldbus variable USINT Extended 1 (A4 hex) – Class
Attribute Access Name Data type Description Default value
ID
1 Get Revision UINT Revision of this object 1 (0x0001)
2 Get Max Instance UINT Max. number of instances 255 (0x00FF)
Table 302: Output Fieldbus Variable USINT Extended 1 (A4 hex) – Instance 256...510
Attribute Access Name Data type Description Default value
ID
1 Get Fb_Out_Var USINT Fieldbus output variable of SPS 0
Common Services
Table 303: Output Fieldbus Variable USINT Extended 1 (A4 hex) – Common service
Servicecode Service available Service-Name Description
Class Instance
0E hex Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single Supplies contents of the appropriate
attribute
586
12.3.5.36 Output Fieldbus Variable USINT Extended 2 (A5 hex)
The extension of the "Output Fieldbus Variable USINT" class enables the
exchange of PLC output variable data. The instance scope of the "Output Fieldbus
Variable USINT Extended 2" class covers the PLC output variable data from 511
to 512.
For WAGO-I/O-PRO or CODESYS, that means the PLC addresses for output
variables %QB3062...%QB3063.
Table 304: Output Fieldbus Variable USINT Extended 2 (A5 hex) – Class
Attribute Access Name Data type Description Default
ID value
1 Get Revision UINT Revision of this object 1 (0x0001)
2 Get Max Instance UINT Max. number of instances 2 (0x0002)
Table 305: Output Fieldbus Variable USINT Extended 2 (A5 hex) – Instance 511...512
Attribute Access Name Data type Description Default
ID value
1 Get Fb_Out_Var USINT Fieldbus-Output variable of SPS 0
Common Services
Table 306: Output Fieldbus Variable USINT Extended 2 (A5 hex) – Common service
Servicecode Service available Service-Name Description
Class Instance
0E hex Ja Ja Get_Attribute_Single Supplies contents of the appropriate
attribute
587
12.3.5.37 Input Fieldbus Variable UINT (A6 hex)
This class allows the reading of data from a particular PLC input variable.
For WAGO-I/O-PRO or CODESYS, that means the PLC addresses for input
variables %IW1276...%IW1530.
Table 308: Input fieldbus variable UINT (A6 hex) – Instance 1...255
Attribute ID Access Name Data type Description Default value
1 Set Fb_In_Var UINT Fieldbus Input variable of the PLC 0
Common Services
Table 309: Input fieldbus variable UINT (A6 hex) – Common service
Service code Service available Service name Description
Class Instance
0E hex Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single Supplies contents of the appropriate attribute
10 hex No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Modifies an attribute value
588
12.3.5.38 Input Fieldbus Variable UINT Extended 1 (A7 hex)
The extension of the "Input Fieldbus Variable UINT" class enables the reading of
PLC input variable data. The instance scope of the "Input Fieldbus Variable UINT
Extended 1" class covers the PLC input variable data from the PLC input variable
256.
For WAGO-I/O-PRO or CODESYS, that means the PLC addresses for input
variable %IW1531.
Table 310: Input Fieldbus Variable UINT Extended 1 (A7 hex) – Class
Attribute ID Access Name Data type Description Default
value
1 Get Revision UINT Revision of this object 1 (0x0001)
2 Get Max Instance UINT Max. number of instances 1 (0x0001)
Table 311: Input Fieldbus Variable UINT Extended 1 (A7 hex) – Instance 256
Attribute ID Access Name Data type Description Default
value
1 Set Fb_In_Var UINT Fieldbus Input variable of the PLC 0
Common Services
Table 312: Input Fieldbus Variable UINT Extended 1 (A7 hex) – Common service
Service Service available Service Name Description
code Class Instance
0E hex Ja Ja Get_Attribute_Single Supplies contents of the appropriate
attribute
10 hex Nein Ja Set_Attribute_Single Modifies an attribute value
589
12.3.5.39 Output Fieldbus Variable UINT (A8 hex)
The class enables the exchange of data from a particular PLC output variable. For
WAGO-I/O-PRO or CODESYS, that means the PLC addresses for output
variables %QW1276...%QW1530.
Table 314: Output fieldbus variable UINT (A8 hex) – Instance 1...255
Attribute ID Access Name Data type Description Default value
1 Get Fb_Out_Var UINT Fieldbus output variable of 0
the PLC
Common Services
Table 315: Output fieldbus variable UINT (A8 hex) – Common service
Service code Service available Service name Description
Class Instance
0E hex Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single Supplies contents of the appropriate attribute
590
12.3.5.40 Output Fieldbus Variable UINT Extended 1 (A9 hex)
The extension of the "Output Fieldbus Variable UINT" class enables the exchange
of PLC output variable data. The instance scope of the "Output Fieldbus Variable
UINT Extended 1" class covers the PLC output variable data from PLC output
variables 256.
For WAGO-I/O-PRO or CODESYS, that means the PLC addresses for output
variable %QW1531.
Table 316: Output Fieldbus Variable UINT Extended 1 (A9 hex) – Class
Attribute Access Name Data type Description Default
ID value
1 Get Revision UINT Revision of this object 1 (0x0001)
2 Get Max Instance UINT Max. number of instances 1 (0x0001)
Table 317: Output Fieldbus Variable UINT Extended 1 (A9 hex) – Instance 256
Attribute Access Name Data type Description Default
ID value
1 Get Fb_Out_Var UINT Fieldbus output variable of the SPS 0
Common Services
Table 318: Output Fieldbus Variable UINT Extended 1 (A9 hex) – Common service
Servicecode Service available Service-Name Description
Class Instance
0E hex Ja Ja Get_Attribute_Single Supplies contents of the appropriate
attribute
591
12.3.5.41 Input Fieldbus Variable UDINT (AA hex)
This class allows the reading of data from a particular PLC input variable.
For WAGO-I/O-PRO or CODESYS, that means the PLC addresses for input
variables %ID638 ... %ID765.
Table 320: Input fieldbus variable UDINT (AA hex) – Instance 1...128
Attribute ID Access Name Data type Description Default
value
1 Set Fb_In_Var UDINT Fieldbus input variable of the PLC 0
Common Services
Table 321: Input fieldbus variable UDINT (AA hex) – Common service
Service code Service available Service name Description
Class Instance
0E hex Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single Supplies contents of the appropriate attribute
10 hex No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Modifies an attribute value
592
12.3.5.42 Input Fieldbus Variable UDINT Offset (AB hex)
This class allows the reading of data from a particular PLC input variable.
With an offset of 2 bytes to the addresses of the "Input Fieldbus Variable UDINT
(AA hex)" class, that means for WAGO-I/O-PRO or CODESYS the PLC
addresses for the input variables %ID638 ... %ID765.
Table 322: Input Fieldbus Variable UDINT Offset (AB hex) – Class
Attribute Access Name Data type Description Default
ID value
1 Get Revision UINT Revision of this object 1 (0x0001)
2 Get Max Instance UINT Max. number of instances 128 (0x080)
Table 323: Input Fieldbus Variable UDINT Offset (AB hex) – Instance 1...128
Attribute Access Name Data type Description Default
ID value
1 Set Fb_In_Var UDINT Fieldbus-Input variable of the SPS 0
Common Services
Table 324: Input Fieldbus Variable UDINT Offset (AB hex) – Common service
Servicecode Service available Service-Name Description
Class Instance
0E hex Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single Supplies contents of the appropriate
attribute
10 hex No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Modifies an attribute value
593
12.3.5.43 Output Fieldbus Variable UDINT (AC hex)
The class enables the exchange of data from a particular PLC output variable. For
WAGO-I/O-PRO or CODESYS, that means the PLC addresses for output
variables %QD638...%QD765.
Table 326: Input fieldbus variable UDINT (AA hex) – Instance 1...128
Attribute ID Access Name Data type Description Default
value
1 Set Fb_Out_Var UDINT Fieldbus output variable of the PLC 0
Common Services
Table 327: Input fieldbus variable UDINT (AA hex) – Common service
Service code Service available Service name Description
Class Instance
0E hex Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single Supplies contents of the appropriate attribute
594
12.3.5.44 Output Fieldbus Variable UDINT Offset (AD hex)
The class enables the exchange of data from a particular PLC output variable.
With an offset of 2 bytes to the addresses of the "Output Fieldbus Variable
UDINT (AC hex)" class, that means for WAGO-I/O-PRO or CODESYS the PLC
addresses for %QD638 ... %QD765.
Table 328: Output Fieldbus Variable UDINT Offset (AD hex) – Class
Attribute Access Name Data type Description Default value
ID
1 Get Revision UINT Revision of this object 1 (0x0001)
2 Get Max Instance UINT Max. number of instances 128 (0x0080)
Table 329: Output Fieldbus Variable UDINT Offset (AD hex) – Instance 1...128
Attribute Access Name Data type Description Default
ID value
1 Set Fb_Out_Var UDINT Fieldbus output variable of the SPS 0
Common Services
Table 330: Output Fieldbus Variable UDINT Offset (AD hex) – Common service
Servicecode Service available Service-Name Description
Casse Instance
0E hex Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single Supplies contents of the appropriate
attribute
Pos : 125 /Dokumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
595
Pos : 126 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Gerätebeschr eibung/Ei nleitung/Bus klemmen - Ü bersc hrift 1, Ü bersic ht - Übersc hrift 2, und allgemeine Einl eitung @ 4\mod_1237537660059_21.doc x @ 28770 @ 12 @ 1
13 I/O Modules
13.1 Overview
For modular applications with the WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750/753, different types
of I/O modules are available
• Specialty Modules
• System Modules
For detailed information on the I/O modules and the module variations, refer to
the manuals for the I/O modules.
You will find these manuals on the WAGO web pages under www.wago.com.
Pos : 127 /Dokumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
596
Pos : 128.1 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Pr ozessabbild M appi ng/ETH ERNET - EtherNet/IP - M ODBU S/TC P/PA ETH ERN ET - MOD BU S/TC P Ei nlei tung Pr oz ess datenaufbau (750- 342, -830, -842, - 849, FBC /PFC) @ 5\mod_1253542489968_21.doc x @ 41903 @ 2 @ 1
MODBUS/TCP process image uses a word structure (with word alignment). The
internal mapping method for data greater than one byte conforms to the Intel
format.
The following section describes the process image for various WAGO-I/O-
SYSTEM 750 and 753 I/O modules with MODBUS/TCP.
The structure of the process data mapping is identical for the PFC process image
of the programmable fieldbus controller.
Pos : 128.3 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
597
Pos : 128.4 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Pr ozessabbild M appi ng/ETH ERNET - EtherNet/IP - M ODBU S/TC P/PA ETH ERN ET- Digital e Kl emmen M ODBU S/TC P ( 750-342, - 352, -830, -842, - 849) @ 5\mod_1253542361394_21.doc x @ 41900 @ 3444444443444444444 @ 1
Some digital modules have an additional diagnostic bit per channel in the Input
Process Image. The diagnostic bit is used for detecting faults that occur (e.g., wire
breaks and/or short circuits).
When analog input modules are also present in the node, the digital data is always
appended after the analog data in the Input Process Image, grouped into bytes.
750-435
750-400, -401, -405, -406, -410, -411, -412, -427, -438, (and all variations),
753-400, -401, -405, -406, -410, -411, -412, -427
598
13.2.1.4 2 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics and Output Process
Data
750-418,
753-418
The digital input module supplies a diagnostic and acknowledge bit for each input
channel. If a fault condition occurs, the diagnostic bit is set. After the fault
condition is cleared, an acknowledge bit must be set to re-activate the input. The
diagnostic data and input data bit is mapped in the Input Process Image, while the
acknowledge bit is in the Output Process Image.
Table 334: 2 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics and Output Process Data
Input Process Image
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Diagnostic Diagnostic Data bit Data bit
bit S 2 bit S 1 DI 2 DI 1
Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1
750-402, -403, -408, -409, -414, -415, -422, -423, -428, -432, -433, -1420, -1421,
-1422, -1423
753-402, -403, -408, -409, -415, -422, -423, -428, -432, -433, -440
599
13.2.1.7 8 Channel Digital Input Module PTC with Diagnostics and Output
Process Data
750-1425
The digital input module PTC provides via one logical channel 2 byte for the
input and output process image.
The signal state of PTC inputs DI1 … DI8 is transmitted to the fieldbus
coupler/controller via input data byte D0.
The fault conditions are transmitted via input data byte D1.
The channels 1 … 8 are switched on or off via the output data byte D1. The output
data byte D0 is reserved and always has the value “0“.
Table 337: 8 Channel Digital Input Module PTC with Diagnostics and Output Process Data
Input Process Image
Input Byte D0 Input Byte D1
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Wire Wire Wire Wire Wire Wire Wire Wire
break/ break/ break/ break/ break/ break/ break/ break/
Signal Signal Signal Signal Signal Signal Signal Signal
short short short short short short short short
status status status status status status status status
circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit
DI 8 DI 7 DI 6 DI 5 DI 4 DI 3 DI 2 DI 1
DB/KS DB/KS DB/KS DB/KS DB/KS DB/KS DB/KS DB/KS
Chan- Chan- Chan- Chan- Chan- Chan- Chan- Chan-
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
nel 8 nel 7 nel 6 nel 5 nel 4 nel 3 nel 2 nel 1
Chan- Chan- Chan- Chan- Chan- Chan- Chan- Chan-
nel 8 nel 7 nel 6 nel 5 nel 4 nel 3 nel 2 nel 1
600
13.2.2 Digital Output Modules
Digital output modules use one bit of data per channel to control the output of the
corresponding channel. These bits are mapped into the Output Process Image.
Some digital modules have an additional diagnostic bit per channel in the Input
Process Image. The diagnostic bit is used for detecting faults that occur (e.g., wire
breaks and/or short circuits). For modules with diagnostic bit is set, also the data
bits have to be evaluated.
When analog output modules are also present in the node, the digital image data is
always appended after the analog data in the Output Process Image, grouped into
bytes.
750-523
The digital output modules deliver 1 bit via a process value Bit in the output
process image, which is illustrated in the input process image. This status image
shows "manual mode".
Table 339: 1 Channel Digital Output Module with Input Process Data
Input Process Image
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Status bit
not used “Manual
Operation“
750-501, -502, -509, -512, -513, -514, -517, -535, (and all variations),
753-501, -502, -509, -512, -513, -514, -517
601
13.2.2.3 2 Channel Digital Input Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process
Data
The digital output modules have a diagnostic bit for each output channel. When an
output fault condition occurs (i.e., overload, short circuit, or broken wire), a
diagnostic bit is set. The diagnostic data is mapped into the Input Process Image,
while the output control bits are in the Output Process Image.
Table 341: 2 Channel Digital Input Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process Data
Input Process Image
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Diagnostic Diagnostic
bit S 2 bit S 1
Channel 2 Channel 1
750-506,
753-506
The digital output module has 2-bits of diagnostic information for each output
channel. The 2-bit diagnostic information can then be decoded to determine the
exact fault condition of the module (i.e., overload, a short circuit, or a broken
wire). The 4-bits of diagnostic data are mapped into the Input Process Image,
while the output control bits are in the Output Process Image.
Table 342: 2 Channel Digital Input Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process Data 75x-506
Input Process Image
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic
bit S 3 bit S 2 bit S 1 bit S 0
Channel 2 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 1
Diagnostic bits S1/S0, S3/S2: = ‘00’ standard mode
Diagnostic bits S1/S0, S3/S2: = ‘01’ no connected load/short circuit against +24 V
Diagnostic bits S1/S0, S3/S2: = ‘10’ Short circuit to ground/overload
602
13.2.2.4 4 Channel Digital Output Modules
750-532
The digital output modules have a diagnostic bit for each output channel. When an
output fault condition occurs (i.e., overload, short circuit, or broken wire), a
diagnostic bit is set. The diagnostic data is mapped into the Input Process Image,
while the output control bits are in the Output Process Image.
Table 344: 4 Channel Digital Output Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process Data
Input Process Image
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic
bit bit bit bit
S4 S3 S2 S1
Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 1
Diagnostic bit S = ‘0’ no Error
Diagnostic bit S = ‘1’ overload, short circuit, or broken wire
603
13.2.2.7 8 Channel Digital Output Modules with Diagnostics and Input
Process Data
750-537
The digital output modules have a diagnostic bit for each output channel. When an
output fault condition occurs (i.e., overload, short circuit, or broken wire), a
diagnostic bit is set. The diagnostic data is mapped into the Input Process Image,
while the output control bits are in the Output Process Image.
Table 346: 8 Channel Digital Output Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process Data
Input Process Image
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic
bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit
S8 S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1
Channel 8 Channel 7 Channel 6 Channel 5 Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 1
Diagnostic bit S = ‘0’ no Error
Diagnostic bit S = ‘1’ overload, short circuit, or broken wire
604
13.2.2.9 8 Channel Digital Input/Output Modules
750-1502, -1506
Pos : 128.5 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
605
Pos : 128.6 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Pr ozessabbild M appi ng/ETH ERNET - EtherNet/IP - M ODBU S/TC P/PA ETH ERN ET - AIs-Ei nlei tung MOD BUS/TCP (INTEL, mit word- alignment) @ 7\mod_1272352811572_21.doc x @ 55815 @ 3 @ 1
However, the coupler/controller with MODBUS/TCP does not have access to the
8 control/status bits.
Therefore, the coupler/controller with MODBUS/TCP can only access the 16 bits
of analog data per channel, which are grouped as words and mapped in Intel
format in the Input Process Image.
Pos : 128.7 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Pr ozessabbild M appi ng/Sofern i n dem Knoten auc h Digital eingangs kl emmen ges tec kt, zu AIs @ 8\mod_1279112061364_21.doc x @ 59903 @ @ 1
When digital input modules are also present in the node, the analog input data is
always mapped into the Input Process Image in front of the digital data.
Pos : 128.8 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Pr ozessabbild M appi ng/Informati on - Informati onen z um Steuer-/Status byteaufbau @ 4\mod_1238055708743_21.doc x @ 29070 @ @ 1
Pos : 128.9 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Pr ozessabbild M appi ng/ETH ERNET - EtherNet/IP - M ODBU S/TC P/PA ETH ERN ET - AIs (Intel, mi t word-alignment) @ 7\mod_1272352054685_21.doc x @ 55790 @ 4444 @ 1
750-452, -454, -456, -461, -462, -465, -466, -467, -469, -472, -474, -475, 476, -
477, -478, -479, -480, -481, -483, -485, -492, (and all variations),
753-452, -454, -456, -461, -465, -466, -467, -469, -472, -474, -475, 476, -477,
478, -479, -483, -492, (and all variations)
606
13.2.3.3 4 Channel Analog Input Modules
750-450, -453, -455, -457, -459, -460, -468, (and all variations),
753-453, -455, -457, -459
607
13.2.3.4 3-Phase Power Measurement Module
750-493
The above Analog Input Modules have a total of 9 bytes of user data in both the
Input and Output Process Image (6 bytes of data and 3 bytes of control/status).
The following tables illustrate the Input and Output Process Image, which has a
total of 6 words mapped into each image.
Word alignment is applied.
608
Pos : 128.11 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Proz ess abbil d M apping/ETHER NET - EtherNet/IP - MOD BU S/TC P/PA ETH ERNET - MOD BUS/TCP zusätzlich 8-Kanal AIs @ 15\mod_1370947457096_21.doc x @ 122444 @ 4 @ 1
750-451
609
Pos : 128.13 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Proz ess abbil d M apping/ETHER NET - EtherNet/IP - MOD BU S/TC P/PA ETH ERNET - AOs-Ei nleitung MOD BUS/TCP ( Intel, mit word- alignment) @ 7\mod_1272352587776_21.doc x @ 55809 @ 3 @ 1
When digital output modules are also present in the node, the analog output data
is always mapped into the Output Process Image in front of the digital data.
Pos : 128.15 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Proz ess abbil d M apping/Infor mation - Infor mationen zum Steuer-/Status byteaufbau @ 4\mod_1238055708743_21.doc x @ 29070 @ @ 1
Pos : 128.16 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Proz ess abbil d M apping/ETHER NET - EtherNet/IP - MOD BU S/TC P/PA ETH ERNET - AOs (INT EL, mit wor d-alignment) @ 7\mod_1272352309632_21.doc x @ 55793 @ 44 @ 1
750-550, -552, -554, -556, -560, -562, 563, -585, (and all variations),
753-550, -552, -554, -556
Pos : 128.17 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Proz ess abbil d M apping/ETHER NET - EtherNet/IP - MOD BU S/TC P/PA ETH ERNET - MOD BUS/PA ETHERN ET - M ODBU S/TC P z us ätzlic h 8-Kanal AOs @ 18\mod_1392123336482_21.doc x @ 145028 @ 4 @ 1
610
13.2.4.3 8 Channel Analog Output Modules
611
Pos : 128.19 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Proz ess abbil d M apping/ETHER NET - EtherNet/IP - MOD BU S/TC P/PA ETH ERNET - Sonder klemmen (Intel , mit word- alignment) bis KNX- Bus klemme-für 32-Bit' er @ 7\mod_1272352385583_21.doc x @ 55796 @ 344444444444444444 @ 1
The control/status byte is required for the bidirectional data exchange of the
module with the higher-ranking control system. The control byte is transmitted
from the control system to the module and the status byte from the module to the
control system.
This allows, for example, setting of a counter with the control byte or displaying
of overshooting or undershooting of the range with the status byte.
The control/status byte always is in the process image in the Low byte.
The above Counter Modules have a total of 5 bytes of user data in both the Input
and Output Process Image (4 bytes of counter data and 1 byte of control/status).
The counter value is supplied as 32 bits. The following tables illustrate the Input
and Output Process Image, which has a total of 3 words mapped into each image.
Word alignment is applied.
Table 357: Counter Modules 750-404, (and all variations except of /000-005),
753-404, (and variation /000-003)
Input Process Image
Byte Destination
Offset Description
High Byte Low Byte
0 - S Status byte
1 D1 D0
Counter value
2 D3 D2
612
750-404/000-005
The above Counter Modules have a total of 5 bytes of user data in both the Input
and Output Process Image (4 bytes of counter data and 1 byte of control/ status).
The two counter values are supplied as 16 bits. The following tables illustrate the
Input and Output Process Image, which has a total of 3 words mapped into each
image. Word alignment is applied.
750-638,
753-638
The above Counter Modules have a total of 6 bytes of user data in both the Input
and Output Process Image (4 bytes of counter data and 2 bytes of control/status).
The two counter values are supplied as 16 bits. The following tables illustrate the
Input and Output Process Image, which has a total of 4 words mapped into each
image. Word alignment is applied.
613
13.2.5.2 Pulse Width Modules
The above Pulse Width modules have a total of 6 bytes of user data in both the
Input and Output Process Image (4 bytes of channel data and 2 bytes of control/
status). The two channel values are supplied as 16 bits. Each channel has its own
control/status byte. The following table illustrates the Input and Output Process
Image, which has a total of 4 words mapped into each image. Word alignment is
applied.
750-650, (and the variations /000-002, -004, -006, -009, -010, -011, -012, -013),
750-651, (and the variations /000-001, -002, -003),
750-653, (and the variations /000-002, -007),
753-650, -653
The above Serial Interface Modules with alternative data format have a total of 4
bytes of user data in both the Input and Output Process Image (3 bytes of serial
data and 1 byte of control/status). The following table illustrates the Input and
Output Process Image, which have a total of 2 words mapped into each image.
Word alignment is applied.
614
13.2.5.4 Serial Interface Modules with Standard Data Format
The above Serial Interface Modules with Standard Data Format have a total of 6
bytes of user data in both the Input and Output Process Image (5 bytes of serial
data and 1 byte of control/status). The following table illustrates the Input and
Output Process Image, which have a total of 3 words mapped into each image.
Word alignment is applied.
The Data Exchange modules have a total of 4 bytes of user data in both the Input
and Output Process Image. The following tables illustrate the Input and Output
Process Image, which has a total of 2 words mapped into each image.
Word alignment is applied.
615
The above SSI Transmitter Interface modules have a total of 4 bytes of user data
in the Input Process Image, which has 2 words mapped into the image.
Word alignment is applied.
The above Incremental Encoder Interface modules have 5 bytes of input data and
3 bytes of output data. The following tables illustrate the Input and Output Process
Image, which have 4 words into each image. Word alignment is applied.
750-634
The above Incremental Encoder Interface module has 5 bytes of input data (6
bytes in cycle duration measurement mode) and 3 bytes of output data. The
following tables illustrate the Input and Output Process Image, which has 4 words
mapped into each image. Word alignment is applied.
616
Table 366: Incremental Encoder Interface Modules 750-634
Input Process Image
Byte Destination
Offset Description
High Byte Low Byte
0 - S not used Status byte
1 D1 D0 Counter word
2 - (D2) *) not used (Periodic time)
3 D4 D3 Latch word
*) If cycle duration measurement mode is enabled in the control byte, the cycle duration is
given as a 24-bit value that is stored in D2 together with D3/D4.
Output Process Image
Byte Destination
Offset Description
High Byte Low Byte
0 - C not used Control byte
1 D1 D0 Counter setting word
2 - -
not used
3 - -
750-637
The above Incremental Encoder Interface Module has a total of 6 bytes of user
data in both the Input and Output Process Image (4 bytes of encoder data and 2
bytes of control/status). The following table illustrates the Input and Output
Process Image, which have 4 words mapped into each image. Word alignment is
applied.
617
750-635,
753-635
The above Digital Pulse Interface module has a total of 4 bytes of user data in
both the Input and Output Process Image (3 bytes of module data and 1 byte of
control/status). The following table illustrates the Input and Output Process
Image, which have 2 words mapped into each image. Word alignment is applied.
750-636
The DC-Drive Controller maps 6 bytes into both the input and output process
image. The data sent and received are stored in up to 4 input and output bytes
(D0 ... D3). Two control bytes (C0, C1) and two status bytes (S0/S1) are used to
control the I/O module and the drive.
In addition to the position data in the input process image (D0 … D3), it is
possible to display extended status information (S2 … S5). Then the three control
bytes (C1 … C3) and status bytes (S1 … S3) are used to control the data flow.
Bit 3 of control byte C1 (C1.3) is used to switch between the process data and the
extended status bytes in the input process image (Extended Info_ON). Bit 3 of
status byte S1 (S1.3) is used to acknowledge the switching process.
618
Output Process Image
Byte Destination
Offset Description
High Byte Low Byte
0 C1 C0 Control byte C1 Control byte C0
Setpoint position Setpoint position
1 D1 D0
(LSB)
Setpoint position Setpoint position
2 D3 D2
(MSB)
750-670
Output byte D0 and input byte D0 are reserved and have no function assigned.
One I/O module control and status byte (C0, S0) and 3 application control and
status bytes (C1 ... C3, S1 ... S3) provide the control of the data flow.
Switching between the two process images is conducted through bit 5 in the
control byte (C0 (C0.5). Activation of the mailbox is acknowledged by bit 5 of the
status byte S0 (S0.5).
619
Output Process Image
Byte Destination
Offset Description
High Byte Low Byte
0 reserved C0 reserved Control byte C0
1 D1 D0
2 D3 D2 Process data*) / Mailbox**)
3 D5 D4
Process data*) /
4 C3 D6 Control byte C3
reserved**)
5 C1 C2 Control byte C1 Control byte C2
*) Cyclic process image (Mailbox disabled)
**) Mailbox process image (Mailbox activated)
750-640
The RTC Module has a total of 6 bytes of user data in both the Input and Output
Process Image (4 bytes of module data and 1 byte of control/status and 1 byte ID
for command). The following table illustrates the Input and Output Process
Image, which have 3 words mapped into each image. Word alignment is applied.
750-641
The DALI/DSI Master module has a total of 6 bytes of user data in both the Input
and Output Process Image (5 bytes of module data and 1 byte of control/status).
The following tables illustrate the Input and Output Process Image, which have 3
words mapped into each image. Word alignment is applied.
620
Output Process Image
Byte Destination
Offset Description
High Byte Low Byte
DALI command,
0 D0 C Control byte
DSI dimming value
1 D2 D1 Parameter 2 DALI Address
2 D4 D3 Command extension Parameter 1
753-647
The DALI Multi-Master module occupies a total of 24 bytes in the input and
output range of the process image.
The DALI Multi-Master module can be operated in "Easy" mode (default) and
"Full" mode. "Easy" mode is used to transmit simply binary signals for lighting
control. Configuration or programming via DALI master module is unnecessary
in "Easy" mode.
Changes to individual bits of the process image are converted directly into DALI
commands for a pre-configured DALI network. 22 bytes of the 24-byte process
image can be used directly for switching of electronic ballasts (ECG), groups or
scenes in "Easy" mode. Switching commands are transmitted via DALI and group
addresses, where each DALI and each group address is represented by a 2-bit pair.
The structure of the process data is described in detail in the following tables.
621
Table 373: Overview of Input Process Image in the "Easy" Mode
Input process image
Byte designation
Offset Note
High byte Low byte
res. Status, activate broadcast
Bit 0: 1-/2-button mode
0 - S
Bit 2: Broadcast status ON/OFF
Bit 1,3-7: -
1 DA4…DA7 DA0…DA3 Bitpaar für DALI-Adresse DA0:
2 DA12…DA15 DA8…DA11 Bit 1: Bit set = ON
3 DA20…DA23 DA16…DA19 Bit not set = OFF
4 DA28…DA31 DA24…DA27 Bit 2: Bit set = Error
5 DA36…DA39 DA32…DA35 Bit not set = No error
6 DA44…DA47 DA40…DA43 Bit pairs DA1 … DA63 similar to DA0.
7 DA52…DA55 DA48…DA51
8 DA60…DA63 DA56…DA59
Bit pair for DALI group address GA0:
9 GA4…GA7 GA0…GA3 Bit 1: Bit set = ON
Bit not set = OFF
Bit 2: Bit set = Error
10 GA12…GA15 GA8…GA11 Bit not set = No error
Bit pairs GA1 … GA15 similar to GA0.
11 - - Not in use
DA = DALI address
GA = Group address
Table 374: Overview of the Output Process Image in the "Easy" Mode“
Output process image
Byte designation
Offset Note
High byte Low byte
res. Broadcast ON/OFF and activate:
Bit 0: Broadcast ON
Bit 1: Broadcast OFF
0 - S
Bit 2: Broadcast ON/OFF/dimming
Bit 3: Broadcast short ON/OFF
Bits 4 … 7: reserved
1 DA4…DA7 DA0…DA3 Bit pair for DALI address DA0:
2 DA12…DA15 DA8…DA11 Bit 1: short: DA switch ON
3 DA20…DA23 DA16…DA19 long: dimming, brighter
4 DA28…DA31 DA24…DA27 Bit 2: short: DA switch OFF
5 DA36…DA39 DA32…DA35 long: dimming, darker
6 DA44…DA47 DA40…DA43 Bit pairs DA1 … DA63 similar to DA0.
7 DA52…DA55 DA48…DA51
8 DA60…DA63 DA56…DA59
Bitpaar für DALI-Gruppenadresse GA0:
9 GA4…GA7 GA0…GA3 Bit 1: short: GA switch ON
long: dimming, brighter
Bit 2: short: GA switch OFF
10 GA12…GA15 GA8…GA11 long: dimming, darker
Bit pairs GA1 … GA15 similar to GA0.
11 Bit 8…15 Bit 0…7 Switch scene 0…15
DA = DALI address
GA = Group address
622
13.2.5.13 LON® FTT Module
753-648
The process image of the LON® FTT module consists of a control/status byte and
23 bytes of bidirectional communication data that is processed by the
WAGO-I/O-PRO function block "LON_01.lib". This function block is essential
for the function of the LON® FTT module and provides a user interface on the
control side.
750-642
The EnOcean radio receiver has a total of 4 bytes of user data in both the Input
and Output Process Image (3 bytes of module data and 1 byte of control/status).
The following tables illustrate the Input and Output Process Image, which have 2
words mapped into each image. Word alignment is applied.
750-643
The MP Bus Master Module has a total of 8 bytes of user data in both the Input
and Output Process Image (6 bytes of module data and 2 bytes of control/status).
The following table illustrates the Input and Output Process Image, which have 4
words mapped into each image. Word alignment is applied.
623
Table 376: MP Bus Master Module 750-643
Input and Output Process Image
Byte Destination
Offset Description
High Byte Low Byte
extended
Control/status
0 C1/S1 C0/S0 Control/
byte
Status byte
1 D1 D0
2 D3 D2 Data bytes
3 D5 D4
750-644
The size of the process image for the Bluetooth® module can be adjusted to 12, 24
or 48 bytes.
It consists of a control byte (input) or status byte (output); an empty byte; an
overlay able mailbox with a size of 6, 12 or 18 bytes (mode 2); and the Bluetooth®
process data with a size of 4 to 46 bytes.
Thus, each Bluetooth® module uses between 12 and 48 bytes in the process image.
The sizes of the input and output process images are always the same.
The first byte contains the control/status byte; the second contains an empty byte.
Process data attach to this directly when the mailbox is hidden. When the mailbox
is visible, the first 6, 12 or 18 bytes of process data are overlaid by the mailbox
data, depending on their size. Bytes in the area behind the optionally visible
mailbox contain basic process data. The internal structure of the Bluetooth®
process data can be found in the documentation for the Bluetooth® 750-644 RF
Transceiver.
The mailbox and the process image sizes are set with the startup tool WAGO-I/O-
CHECK.
624
13.2.5.17 Vibration Velocity/Bearing Condition Monitoring VIB I/O
750-645
Pos : 128.20 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Proz ess abbil d M apping/ETHER NET - EtherNet/IP - MOD BU S/TC P/PA ETH ERNET - MOD BUS/TCP Teil 1 KNX/EIB/TP1-Kl emme 753- 646 (nur für 750-830, -842, - 849) @ 5\mod_1253540550198_21.doc x @ 41890 @ 4 @ 1
625
13.2.5.18 KNX/EIB/TP1 Module
753-646
The KNX/TP1 module appears in router and device mode with a total of 24-byte
user data within the input and output area of the process image, 20 data bytes and
2 control/status bytes. Even though the additional bytes S1 or C1 are transferred
as data bytes, they are used as extended status and control bytes. The opcode is
used for the read/write command of data and the triggering of specific functions
of the KNX/EIB/TP1 module. Word-alignment is used to assign 12 words in the
process image. Access to the process image is not possible in router mode.
Telegrams can only be tunneled.
In device mode, access to the KNX data can only be performed via special
function blocks of the IEC application. Configuration using the ETS engineering
tool software is required for KNX.
626
Pos : 128.21 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Proz ess abbil d M apping/ETHER NET - EtherNet/IP - MOD BU S/TC P/PA ETH ERNET - MOD BUS/TCP Teil 2 ASI- und Systemklemmen (750-342, -830, - 842, -849) @ 5\mod_1246540791017_21.doc x @ 36540 @ 434 @ 1
750-655
The length of the process image of the AS-interface master module can be set to
fixed sizes of 12, 20, 24, 32, 40 or 48 bytes.
It consists of a control or status byte, a mailbox with a size of 0, 6, 10, 12 or 18
bytes and the AS-interface process data, which can range from 0 to 32 bytes.
The first Input and output word, which is assigned to an AS-interface master
module, contains the status / control byte and one empty byte.
Subsequently the mailbox data are mapped, when the mailbox is permanently
superimposed (Mode 1).
In the operating mode with suppressible mailbox (Mode 2), the mailbox and the
cyclical process data are mapped next.
The following words contain the remaining process dat.
The mailbox and the process image sizes are set with the startup tool WAGO-I/O-
CHECK.
627
13.2.6 System Modules
750-610, -611
The modules provide 2 bits of diagnostics in the Input Process Image for
monitoring of the internal power supply.
750-622
The Binary Space Modules behave alternatively like 2 channel digital input
modules or output modules and seize depending upon the selected settings 1, 2, 3
or 4 bits per channel. According to this, 2, 4, 6 or 8 bits are occupied then either in
the process input or the process output image.
Table 382: Binary Space Module 750-622 (with Behavior Like 2 Channel Digital Input)
Input and Output Process Image
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
(Data bit (Data bit (Data bit (Data bit (Data bit (Data bit Data bit Data bit
Pos : 129 /Dokumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
DI 8) DI 7) DI 6) DI 5) DI 4) DI 3) DI 2 DI 1
628
Pos : 130.1 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Pr ozessabbild M appi ng/ETH ERNET - EtherNet/IP - M ODBU S/TC P/PA ETH ERN ET - EtherN et/IP Einl eitung Proz ess datenaufbau ( 750-841, C ontroller) @ 5\mod_1253541573440_21.doc x @ 41896 @ 2 @ 1
In the case of a fieldbus controller with EtherNet/IP, the process image uses a
word structure (with word alignment). The internal mapping method for data
greater than one byte conforms to the Intel format.
The following section describes the process image for various WAGO-I/O-
SYSTEM 750 and 753 I/O modules when using a fieldbus controller with
EtherNet/IP.
For the PFC process image of the programmable fieldbus controller is the
structure of the process data mapping identical.
Pos : 130.2 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Pr ozessabbild M appi ng/ETH ERNET - EtherNet/IP - M ODBU S/TC P/PA ETH ERN ET- Digital e Kl emmen EtherN et/IP (750- 341/841/881) @ 5\mod_1253544395769_21.doc x @ 41919 @ 344444443444444444 @ 1
629
13.3.1 Digital Input Modules
Digital input modules supply one bit of data per channel to specify the signal state
for the corresponding channel. These bits are mapped into the Input Process
Image.
Some digital I/O modules have an additional diagnostic bit per channel in the
input process image. The diagnostic bit detects faults (e.g., wire breakage,
overloads and/or short circuits). For some I/O modules, the data bits also have be
evaluated with the set diagnostic bit.
When analog input modules are also present in the node, the digital data is always
appended after the analog data in the Input Process Image, grouped into bytes.
Each input channel seizes one Instance in the Discrete Input Point Object (Class
0x65).
750-435
750-400, -401, -405, -406, -410, -411, -412, -427, -438, (and all variations),
753-400, -401, -405, -406, -410, -411, -412, -427
630
13.3.1.3 2 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics
13.3.1.4 2 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics and Output Process
Data
750-418,
753-418
The digital input module supplies a diagnostic and acknowledge bit for each input
channel. If a fault condition occurs, the diagnostic bit is set. After the fault
condition is cleared, an acknowledge bit must be set to re-activate the input. The
diagnostic data and input data bit is mapped in the Input Process Image, while the
acknowledge bit is in the Output Process Image.
Table 386: 2 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics and Output Process Data
Input Process Image
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Diagnostic Diagnostic Data bit Data bit
bit S 2 bit S 1 DI 2 DI 1
Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1
The input modules seize 4 Instances in Class (0x65).
631
13.3.1.5 4 Channel Digital Input Modules
750-402, -403, -408, -409, -414, -415, -422, -423, -428, -432, -433, -1420, -1421,
-1422
753-402, -403, -408, -409, -415, -422, -423, -428, -432, -433, -440
632
13.3.2 Digital Output Modules
Digital output modules use one bit of data per channel to control the output of the
corresponding channel. These bits are mapped into the Output Process Image.
Some digital modules have an additional diagnostic bit per channel in the Input
Process Image. The diagnostic bit is used for detecting faults that occur (e.g., wire
breaks and/or short circuits). With some I/O modules, with set diagnostic bit,
additionally the data bits must be evaluated.
When analog output modules are also present in the node, the digital image data is
always appended after the analog data in the Output Process Image, grouped into
bytes.
Each output channel occupies one instance in the Discrete Output Point Object
(Class 0x 66).
750-523
The digital output modules deliver 1 bit via a process value Bit in the output
process image, which is illustrated in the input process image. This status image
shows "manual mode".
Table 390: 1 Channel Digital Output Module with Input Process Data
Input Process Image
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Status bit
not used “Manual
Operation“
633
13.3.2.2 2 Channel Digital Output Modules
750-501, -502, -509, -512, -513, -514, -517, -535, (and all variations),
753-501, -502, -509, -512, -513, -514, -517
13.3.2.3 2 Channel Digital Input Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process
Data
The digital output modules have a diagnostic bit for each output channel. When an
output fault condition occurs (i.e., overload, short circuit, or broken wire), a
diagnostic bit is set. The diagnostic data is mapped into the Input Process Image,
while the output control bits are in the Output Process Image.
Table 392: 2 Channel Digital Input Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process Data
Input Process Image
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Diagnostic Diagnostic
bit S 2 bit S 1
Channel 2 Channel 1
750-506,
753-506
The digital output module has 2-bits of diagnostic information for each output
channel. The 2-bit diagnostic information can then be decoded to determine the
exact fault condition of the module (i.e., overload, a short circuit, or a broken
wire). The 4-bits of diagnostic data are mapped into the Input Process Image,
while the output control bits are in the Output Process Image.
634
Table 393: 2 Channel Digital Input Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process Data 75x-506
Input Process Image
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic
bit S 3 bit S 2 bit S 1 bit S 0
Channel 2 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 1
Diagnostic bits S1/S0, S3/S2: = ‘00’ standard mode
Diagnostic bits S1/S0, S3/S2: = ‘01’ no connected load/short circuit against +24 V
Diagnostic bits S1/S0, S3/S2: = ‘10’ Short circuit to ground/overload
The output modules seize 4 Instances in Class (0x65).
750-532
The digital output modules have a diagnostic bit for each output channel. When an
output fault condition occurs (i.e., overload, short circuit, or broken wire), a
diagnostic bit is set. The diagnostic data is mapped into the Input Process Image,
while the output control bits are in the Output Process Image.
Table 395: 4 Channel Digital Output Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process Data
Input Process Image
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic
bit bit bit bit
S4 S3 S2 S1
Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 1
Diagnostic bit S = ‘0’ no Error
Diagnostic bit S = ‘1’ overload, short circuit, or broken wire
The output modules seize 4 Instances in Class (0x65).
635
Output Process Image
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
controls controls controls controls
DO 4 DO 3 DO 2 DO 1
Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 1
And the output modules seize 4 Instances in Class (0x66).
750-537
The digital output modules have a diagnostic bit for each output channel. When an
output fault condition occurs (i.e., overload, short circuit, or broken wire), a
diagnostic bit is set. The diagnostic data is mapped into the Input Process Image,
while the output control bits are in the Output Process Image.
Table 397: 8 Channel Digital Output Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process Data
Input Process Image
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic
bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit
S8 S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1
Channel 8 Channel 7 Channel 6 Channel 5 Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 1
Diagnostic bit S = ‘0’ no Error
Diagnostic bit S = ‘1’ overload, short circuit, or broken wire
The output modules seize 8 Instances in Class (0x65).
636
13.3.2.8 16 Channel Digital Output Modules
750-1502, -1506
637
Pos : 130.4 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Pr ozessabbild M appi ng/ETH ERNET - EtherNet/IP - M ODBU S/TC P/PA ETH ERN ET - EtherN et/IP ab AIs-Rest ( 750-341/-841) @ 5\mod_1253705986108_21.doc x @ 42060 @ 344444 @ 1
However, the coupler/controller with EtherNet/IP does not have access to the 8
control/status bits.
Therefore, the coupler/controller with MODBUS/TCP can only access the 16 bits
of analog data per channel, which are grouped as words and mapped in Intel
format in the Input Process Image.
When digital input modules are also present in the node, the analog input data is
always mapped into the Input Process Image in front of the digital data.
Each input channel seizes one Instance in the Analog Input Point Object (Class
0x67).
638
13.3.3.2 2 Channel Analog Input Modules
750-452, -454, -456, -461, -462, -465, -466, -467, -469, -472, -474, -475, 476, -
477, -478, -479, -480, -481, -483, -485, -492, (and all variations),
753-452, -454, -456, -461, -465, -466, -467, -469, -472, -474, -475, 476, -477,
478, -479, -483, -492, (and all variations)
750-450
750-493
The above Analog Input Modules have a total of 9 bytes of user data in both the
Input and Output Process Image (6 bytes of data and 3 bytes of control/status).
The following tables illustrate the Input and Output Process Image, which has a
639
total of 6 words mapped into each image.
Word alignment is applied.
750-451
640
channel, which are grouped as words and mapped in Intel format in the Output
Process Image.
When digital output modules are also present in the node, the analog output data
is always mapped into the Output Process Image in front of the digital data.
Each output channel seizes one Instance in the Analog Output Point Object (Class
0x68).
750-550, -552, -554, -556, -560, -562, 563, -585, (and all variations),
753-550, -552, -554, -556
641
13.3.4.3 8 Channel Analog Output Modules
This allows, for example, setting of a counter with the control byte or displaying
of overshooting or undershooting of the range with the status byte.
The control/status byte always lies in the low byte for the fieldbus
coupler/controller with Ethernet/IP.
642
The above Counter Modules have a total of 5 bytes of user data in both the Input
and Output Process Image (4 bytes of counter data and 1 byte of control/status).
The counter value is supplied as 32 bits. The following tables illustrate the Input
and Output Process Image, which has a total of 3 words mapped into each image.
Word alignment is applied.
Table 409: Counter Modules 750-404, (and all variations except of /000-005),
753-404, (and variation /000-003)
Input Process Image
Byte Destination
Instance Description
High Byte Low Byte
- S Status byte
n D1 D0
Counter value
D3 D2
The specialty modules represent 1x6 bytes input data and seize 1 Instance in Class
(0x67).
750-404/000-005
The above Counter Modules have a total of 5 bytes of user data in both the Input
and Output Process Image (4 bytes of counter data and 1 byte of control/ status).
The two counter values are supplied as 16 bits. The following tables illustrate the
Input and Output Process Image, which has a total of 3 words mapped into each
image. Word alignment is applied.
643
750-638,
753-638
The above Counter Modules have a total of 6 bytes of user data in both the Input
and Output Process Image (4 bytes of counter data and 2 bytes of control/status).
The two counter values are supplied as 16 bits. The following tables illustrate the
Input and Output Process Image, which has a total of 4 words mapped into each
image. Word alignment is applied.
The above Pulse Width modules have a total of 6 bytes of user data in both the
Input and Output Process Image (4 bytes of channel data and 2 bytes of control/
status). The two channel values are supplied as 16 bits. Each channel has its own
control/status byte. The following table illustrates the Input and Output Process
Image, which has a total of 4 words mapped into each image. Word alignment is
applied.
644
13.3.5.3 Serial Interface Modules with alternative Data Format
750-650, (and the variations /000-002, -004, -006, -009, -010, -011, -012, -013),
750-651, (and the variations /000-002, -003),
750-653, (and the variations /000-002, -007),
753-650, -653
The above Serial Interface Modules with alternative data format have a total of 4
bytes of user data in both the Input and Output Process Image (3 bytes of serial
data and 1 byte of control/status). The following table illustrates the Input and
Output Process Image, which have a total of 2 words mapped into each image.
Word alignment is applied.
The above Serial Interface Modules with Standard Data Format have a total of 6
bytes of user data in both the Input and Output Process Image (5 bytes of serial
data and 1 byte of control/status). The following table illustrates the Input and
Output Process Image, which have a total of 3 words mapped into each image.
Word alignment is applied.
645
Table 414: Serial Interface Modules with Standard Data Format
Input and Output Process Image
Byte Destination
Instance Description
High Byte Low Byte
Control/status
D0 C/S Data byte
byte
n
D2 D1
Data bytes
D4 D3
The specialty modules represent 1x6 bytes input and output data and seize 1
Instance in Class (0x67) and 1 Instance in Class (0x68).
The Data Exchange modules have a total of 4 bytes of user data in both the Input
and Output Process Image. The following tables illustrate the Input and Output
Process Image, which has a total of 2 words mapped into each image.
Word alignment is applied.
The above SSI Transmitter Interface modules have a total of 4 bytes of user data
in the Input Process Image, which has 2 words mapped into the image.
Word alignment is applied.
646
Table 416: SSI Transmitter Interface Modules
Input Process Image
Byte Destination
Instance Description
High Byte Low Byte
n D1 D0
Data bytes
n+1 D3 D2
The specialty modules represent 2x2 bytes input data and seize 2 Instances in
Class (0x67).
In the input process image, SSI transmitter interface modules with status occupy 5
usable bytes, 4 data bytes, and 1 additional status byte. A total of 3 words are
assigned in the process image via word alignment.
Table 417: SSI Transmitter Interface I/O Modules with an Alternative Data Format
Input Process Image
Byte Destination
Instance Description
High Byte High Byte
- S not used Status byte
n D1 D0
Data bytes
D3 D2
The specialty modules represent 1x6 bytes and seize 1 Instance in Class (0x67).
The above Incremental Encoder Interface modules have 5 bytes of input data and
3 bytes of output data. The following tables illustrate the Input and Output Process
Image, which have 4 words into each image. Word alignment is applied.
647
750-634
The above Incremental Encoder Interface module has 5 bytes of input data (6
bytes in cycle duration measurement mode) and 3 bytes of output data. The
following tables illustrate the Input and Output Process Image, which has 4 words
mapped into each image. Word alignment is applied.
750-637
The above Incremental Encoder Interface Module has a total of 6 bytes of user
data in both the Input and Output Process Image (4 bytes of encoder data and 2
bytes of control/status). The following table illustrates the Input and Output
Process Image, which have 4 words mapped into each image. Word alignment is
applied.
648
750-635,
753-635
The above Digital Pulse Interface module has a total of 4 bytes of user data in
both the Input and Output Process Image (3 bytes of module data and 1 byte of
control/status). The following table illustrates the Input and Output Process
Image, which have 2 words mapped into each image. Word alignment is applied.
750-636
The DC-Drive Controller maps 6 bytes into both the input and output process
image. The data sent and received are stored in up to 4 input and output bytes
(D0 ... D3). Two control bytes (C0, C1) and two status bytes (S0/S1) are used to
control the I/O module and the drive.
In addition to the position data in the input process image (D0 … D3), it is
possible to display extended status information (S2 … S5). Then the three control
bytes (C1 … C3) and status bytes (S1 … S3) are used to control the data flow.
Bit 3 of control byte C1 (C1.3) is used to switch between the process data and the
extended status bytes in the input process image (Extended Info_ON). Bit 3 of
status byte S1 (S1.3) is used to acknowledge the switching process.
649
Output Process Image
Byte Destination
Instance Description
High Byte Low Byte
C1 C0 Control byte C1 Control byte C0
Setpoint position Setpoint position
D1 D0
n (LSB)
Setpoint position Setpoint position
D3 D2
(MSB)
The specialty modules represent 1x6 bytes input and output data and seize 1
Instance in Class (0x67) and 1 Instance in Class (0x68).
13.3.5.9 Steppercontroller
750-670
Output byte D0 and input byte D0 are reserved and have no function assigned.
One I/O module control and status byte (C0, S0) and 3 application control and
status bytes (C1 ... C3, S1 ... S3) provide the control of the data flow.
Switching between the two process images is conducted through bit 5 in the
control byte (C0 (C0.5). Activation of the mailbox is acknowledged by bit 5 of the
status byte S0 (S0.5).
650
Output Process Image
Byte Destination
Instance Description
High Byte Low Byte
reserved C0 reserved Control byte C0
D1 D0
D3 D2 Process data*) / Mailbox**)
n D5 D4
Process data*) /
C3 D6 Control byte C3
reserved**)
C1 C2 Control byte C1 Control byte C2
*) Cyclic process image (Mailbox disabled)
**) Mailbox process image (Mailbox activated)
The specialty modules represent 1x12 bytes input and output data and seize 1
Instance in Class (0x67) and 1 Instance in Class (0x68).
750-640
The RTC Module has a total of 6 bytes of user data in both the Input and Output
Process Image (4 bytes of module data and 1 byte of control/status and 1 byte ID
for command). The following table illustrates the Input and Output Process
Image, which have 3 words mapped into each image. Word alignment is applied.
651
13.3.5.11 DALI/DSI Master Module
750-641
The DALI/DSI Master module has a total of 6 bytes of user data in both the Input
and Output Process Image (5 bytes of module data and 1 byte of control/status).
The following tables illustrate the Input and Output Process Image, which have 3
words mapped into each image. Word alignment is applied.
750-642
The EnOcean radio receiver has a total of 4 bytes of user data in both the Input
and Output Process Image (3 bytes of module data and 1 byte of control/status).
The following tables illustrate the Input and Output Process Image, which have 2
words mapped into each image. Word alignment is applied.
652
13.3.5.13 MP Bus Master Module
750-643
The MP Bus Master Module has a total of 8 bytes of user data in both the Input
and Output Process Image (6 bytes of module data and 2 bytes of control/status).
The following table illustrates the Input and Output Process Image, which have 4
words mapped into each image. Word alignment is applied.
750-644
The size of the process image for the Bluetooth® module can be adjusted to 12, 24
or 48 bytes.
It consists of a control byte (input) or status byte (output); an empty byte; an
overlayable mailbox with a size of 6, 12 or 18 bytes (mode 2); and the Bluetooth®
process data with a size of 4 to 46 bytes.
Thus, each Bluetooth® module uses between 12 and 48 bytes in the process image.
The sizes of the input and output process images are always the same.
The first byte contains the control/status byte; the second contains an empty byte.
Process data attach to this directly when the mailbox is hidden. When the mailbox
is visible, the first 6, 12 or 18 bytes of process data are overlaid by the mailbox
data, depending on their size. Bytes in the area behind the optionally visible
mailbox contain basic process data. The internal structure of the Bluetooth®
process data can be found in the documentation for the Bluetooth® 750-644 RF
Transceiver.
The mailbox and the process image sizes are set with the startup tool WAGO-I/O-
CHECK.
653
Table 428: Bluetooth® RF-Transceiver 750-644
Input and Output Process Image
Byte Destination
Instance Description
High Byte Low Byte
Control/status
- C0/S0 not used
byte
D1 D0
n D3 D2
Mailbox (0, 3, 6 or 9 words) and
D5 D4
Process data (2-23 words)
... ...
D45 D44
The 750-644 constitutes a special module, whose process data (12, 24 or 48 bytes)
occupy on instances in classes 0x67 and 0x68.
750-645
654
13.3.5.16 AS-interface Master Module
750-655
The length of the process image of the AS-interface master module can be set to
fixed sizes of 12, 20, 24, 32, 40 or 48 bytes.
It consists of a control or status byte, a mailbox with a size of 0, 6, 10, 12 or 18
bytes and the AS-interface process data, which can range from 0 to 32 bytes.
The first Input and output word, which is assigned to an AS-interface master
module, contains the status / control byte and one empty byte.
Subsequently the mailbox data are mapped, when the mailbox is permanently
superimposed (Mode 1).
In the operating mode with suppressible mailbox (Mode 2), the mailbox and the
cyclical process data are mapped next.
The following words contain the remaining process dat.
The mailbox and the process image sizes are set with the startup tool WAGO-I/O-
CHECK.
655
Pos : 130.10 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Proz ess abbil d M apping/ETHER NET - EtherNet/IP - MOD BU S/TC P/PA ETH ERNET - Systemkl emmen Ethernet/IP @ 7\mod_1272375855608_21.doc x @ 55821 @ 344 @ 1
750-610, -611
The modules provide 2 bits of diagnostics in the Input Process Image for
monitoring of the internal power supply.
750-622
The Binary Space Modules behave alternatively like 2 channel digital input
modules or output modules and seize depending upon the selected settings 1, 2, 3
or 4 bits per channel. According to this, 2, 4, 6 or 8 bits are occupied then either in
the process input or the process output image.
Table 432: Binary Space Module 750-622 (with behavior like 2 channel digital input)
Input and Output Process Image
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
(Data bit (Data bit (Data bit (Data bit (Data bit (Data bit Data bit Data bit
DI 8) DI 7) DI 6) DI 5) DI 4) DI 3) DI 2 DI 1
The Binary Space Modules seize 2, 4, 6 or 8 Instances in class (0x65) or in Class
(0x66).
Pos : 131 /Dokumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
656
Pos : 132 /Alle Serien (Allgemei ne M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/MOD BUS/Anwendungs beis piel e - T est von MOD BUS-Pr otokoll und F eldbus kn. - Visualisier ung und Steuer ung SCAD A @ 4\mod_1236780299078_21.doc x @ 28200 @ 122 @ 1
14 Application Examples
14.1 Test of MODBUS protocol and fieldbus nodes
You require a MODBUS master to test the function of your fieldbus node. For
this purpose, various manufacturers offer a range of PC applications that you can,
in part, download from the Internet as free of charge demo versions.
Additional Information
A free of charge demo version from ModScan32 and further utilities from Win-
Tech can be found in the Internet under:
http://www.win-tech.com/html/demos.htm
This program allows you to access the data points of your connected ETHERNET
TCP/IP fieldbus node and to proceed with the desired changes.
Additional Information
For a description example relating to the software operation, refer to:
http://www.win-tech.com/html/modscan32.htm
The use of SCADA systems includes the areas of visualization and monitoring,
data access, trend recording, event and alarm processing, process analysis and
targeted intervention in a process (control).
The WAGO ETHERNET fieldbus node provides the required process input and
output values.
657
SCADA software has to provide a MODBUS device driver and support
MODBUS/TCP functions!
When choosing suitable SCADA software, ensure that it provides a MODBUS
device driver and supports the MODBUS/TCP functions in the coupler.
Visualization programs with MODBUS device drivers are available from i.e.
Wonderware, National Instruments, Think&Do or KEPware Inc., some of which
are available on the Internet as demo versions.
At this point, some programs allow the user to give the node an alias name, i.e. to
call the node “Measuring data”. The node can then be addressed with this name.
4. Link the object to the desired data point on the node by entering the
following data:
Depending on the user software the MODBUS addressing of a bus module can be
represented with up to 5 digits.
658
Example of the MODBUS Addressing
The following five digits specify the channel number (beginning with 1) of the
consecutively numbered digital or analog input and/or output channels.
Examples:
Application Example:
Thus, the digital input channel 2 of the above node “Measuring data” can be read
out with the input: “Measuring data. 0 0000 2”.
Exemplary node “Measuring data”
MODBUS protocol
ETHERNET
adapter
Additional Information
Please refer to the respective SCADA product manual for a detailed description of
the particular software operation.
Pos : 133 /Dokumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
659
Pos : 134.1 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine M odul e)/Ei ns atz i n Ex-Bereic hen/Ei nsatz i n explosi onsg efähr deten Ber eic hen - Ü bers chrift 1 @ 3\mod_1224075191281_21.doc x @ 24084 @ 1 @ 1
660
Pos : 134.4 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ei ns atz i n Ex-Bereic hen/Beispi elhafter Aufbau der Kennz eichnung - Ü berschrift 2 @ 3\mod_1224157499140_21.doc x @ 24182 @ 2 @ 1
Figure 90: Side Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According to ATEX and IECEx
Figure 91: Text Detail – Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According to ATEX and
IECEx.
661
Table 434: Description of Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According to ATEX and
IECEx
Printing on Text Description
TÜV 07 ATEX 554086 X Approving authority and certificate numbers
IECEx TUN 09.0001 X
Dust
II Equipment group: All except mining
3D Category 3 (Zone 22)
Ex Explosion protection mark
tc Dc Type of protection and equipment protection
level (EPL):protection by enclosure
IIIC Explosion group of dust
T 135°C Max. surface temperature of the enclosure
(without a dust layer)
Mining
I Equipment group: Mining
M2 Category: High level of protection
Ex Explosion protection mark
d Mb Type of protection and equipment protection
level (EPL): Flameproof enclosure
I Explosion group for electrical equipment for
mines susceptible to firedamp
Gases
II Equipment group: All except mining
3G Category 3 (Zone 2)
Ex Explosion protection mark
nA Gc Type of protection and equipment protection
level (EPL): Non-sparking equipment
nC Gc Type of protection and equipment protection
level (EPL): Sparking apparatus with protected
contacts. A device which is so constructed that
the external atmosphere cannot gain access to the
interior
IIC Explosion group of gas and vapours
T4 Temperature class: Max. surface temperature
135°C
Pos : 134.7 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
662
Pos : 134.8 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ei ns atz i n Ex-Bereic hen/Beispi elbedruc kung der Ex-i- und IEC- Ex-i-zugel ass enen Bus kl emmen gemäß CEN ELEC und IEC_2013 @ 14\mod_1360569320118_21.doc x @ 111298 @ @ 1
Figure 92: Side Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Modules According to ATEX and
IECEx.
Figure 93: Text Detail – Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Modules According to ATEX
and IECEx.
663
Table 435: Description of Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Modules According to ATEX
and IECEx
Inscription Text Description
TÜV 07 ATEX 554086 X Approving authority and certificate numbers
IECEx TUN 09.0001X
664
Table 435: Description of Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Modules According to ATEX
and IECEx
Gases
II Equipment group: All except mining
3(1)G Category 3 (Zone 2) equipment containing a safety
device for a category 1 (Zone 0) equipment
3(2)G Category 3 (Zone 2) equipment containing a safety
device for a category 2 (Zone 1) equipment
Ex Explosion protection mark
nA Gc Type of protection and equipment protection level
(EPL): Non-sparking equipment
[ia Ga] Type of protection and equipment protection level
(EPL): associated apparatus with intrinsic safety
circuits for use in Zone 0
[ia Gb] Type of protection and equipment protection level
(EPL): associated apparatus with intrinsic safety
circuits for use in Zone 1
IIC Explosion group of gas and vapours
T4 Temperature class: Max. surface temperature 135°C
Pos : 134.9 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
665
Pos : 134.10 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Einsatz in Ex- Ber eichen/Kennzeic hnung für Ameri ka gemäß N EC 500 - Ü berschrift 3 @ 3\mod_1224158423187_21.doc x @ 24188 @ 3 @ 1
Figure 94: Side Marking Example for I/O Modules According to NEC 500
Figure 95: Text Detail – Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According to NEC 500
Table 436: Description of Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According to NEC 500
Printing on Text Description
CL I Explosion protection group (condition of use
category)
DIV 2 Area of application
Grp. ABCD Explosion group (gas group)
Op temp code T4 Temperature class
666
Pos : 134.13 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine M odule)/Ei nsatz i n Ex- Bereic hen/Errichtungsbesti mmungen - Übersc hrift 2 @ 3\mod_1232453624234_21.doc x @ 26370 @ 2 @ 1
For the installation and operation of electrical equipment in hazardous areas, the
valid national and international rules and regulations which are applicable at the
installation location must be carefully followed.
Pos : 134.15 /D okumentati on allgemein/Gliederungsel emente/---Seitenwechsel--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
667
Pos : 134.16 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Einsatz in Ex- Ber eichen/Bes ondere Bedingungen für den sicheren Ex-Betrieb g em. ATEX-Z ertifi kat TÜ V 07 AT EX 554086_X_2013_2 @ 15\mod_1368620071975_21.doc x @ 119778 @ 3 @ 1
668
Pos : 134.18 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Einsatz in Ex- Ber eichen/Bes ondere Bedingungen für den sicheren Ex-Betrieb g em. ATEX-Z ertifi kat TÜ V 12 AT EX 106032x_2013_2 @ 15\mod_1368620479454_21.doc x @ 119782 @ 3 @ 1
669
Pos : 134.20 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Einsatz in Ex- Ber eichen/Bes ondere Bedingungen für den sicheren Ex-Betrieb g em. IEC- Ex-Zertifi kat TUN 09.0001 X_2013_2 @ 15\mod_1368620660911_21.doc x @ 119786 @ 3 @ 1
670
Pos : 134.22 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Einsatz in Ex- Ber eichen/Bes ondere Bedingungen für den sicheren Ex-Betrieb g em. IEC- Ex-Zertifi kat TUN 12.0039 X_2013_2 @ 15\mod_1368620821493_21.doc x @ 119790 @ 3 @ 1
671
Pos : 134.24 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Einsatz in Ex- Ber eichen/Errichtungs besti mmungen ANSI ISA 12.12.01_2013_2 @ 15\mod_1368620942842_21.doc x @ 119794 @ 3 @ 1
Pos : 134.28 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Einsatz in Ex- Ber eichen/Infor mation: Z ertifizi erungsnac hweis @ 7\mod_1274279547729_21.doc x @ 56649 @ @ 1
Additional Information
Proof of certification is available on request.
Also take note of the information given on the operating and assembly
instructions.
The manual, containing these special conditions for safe use, must be readily
available to the user.
Pos : 135 /Dokumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
672
Pos : 136 /Alle Serien (Allgemei ne M odul e)/Ü bersc hriften für all e Seri en/Anhang - Zubehör/Anhang - Ü bers chrift 1 @ 4\mod_1239874070437_21.doc x @ 30560 @ 1 @ 1
16 Appendix
Pos : 137.1 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/SNM P (MIB)/MIB-II-Gr uppen - System Gr oup @ 4\mod_1237882031312_21.doc x @ 28900 @ 23 @ 1
Pos : 137.2 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
673
Pos : 137.3 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/SNM P (MIB)/MIB-II-Gr uppen - Interface Group (Allgemein) @ 4\mod_1237887683328_21.doc x @ 28906 @ 3 @ 1
674
Table 438: MIB II – Interface Group
Identifier Entry Access Description
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.15 IfInUnknown- R This entry indicates the number of received
Protos packets sent to an unknown or unsupported
port number.
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.16 ifOutOctets R This entry gives the total number of bytes
sent via interface.
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.17 ifOutUcastPkts R This entry contains the number of outgoing
unicast packets delivered to a higher layer.
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.18 ifOutNUcastPkts R This entry indicates the number of outgoing
broad and multicast packets delivered to a
higher layer.
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.19 ifOutDiscards R This entry indicates the number of packets
that were discarded even though no errors had
been detected.
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.20 ifOutErrors R This entry indicates the number of packets
that could not be transmitted because of
errors.
Pos : 137.5 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
675
Pos : 137.6 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/F eldbus kommuni kati on/SNM P (MIB)/MIB-II-Gr uppen - IP Gr oup - IpRoute T abl e Group - ICM P Gr oup - TCP Group - UD P Gr oup - SNM P Gr oup @ 4\mod_1237813995937_21.doc x @ 28841 @ 333333 @ 1
16.1.3 IP Group
The IP group contains information about IP communication.
676
16.1.4 IpRoute Table Group
The IP route table contains information about the routing table in the
coupler/controller.
677
16.1.5 ICMP Group
Table 441: MIB II – ICMP Group
Identifier Entry Access Description
1.3.6.1.2.1.5.1 icmpInMsgs R Number of received ICMP messages
1.3.6.1.2.1.5.2 icmpInErrors R Number of received ICMP errors containing
ICMP-specific errors
1.3.6.1.2.1.5.3 icmpInDestUnreachs R Number of received ICMP destination
unreachable messages
1.3.6.1.2.1.5.4 icmpInTimeExcds R Number of received ICMP time exceeded
messages
1.3.6.1.2.1.5.5 icmpInParmProbs R Number of received ICMP parameter problem
messages
1.3.6.1.2.1.5.6 icmpInSrcQuenchs R Number of received ICMP source quench
messages
1.3.6.1.2.1.5.7 icmpInRedirects R Number of received ICMP redirect messages
1.3.6.1.2.1.5.8 icmpInEchos R Number of received ICMP echo request
messages (Ping)
1.3.6.1.2.1.5.9 icmpInEchoReps R Number of received ICMP echo reply messages
(Ping)
1.3.6.1.2.1.5.10 icmpInTimestamps R Number of received ICMP timestamp request
messages
1.3.6.1.2.1.5.11 icmpInTimestampReps R Number of received ICMP timestamp reply
messages
1.3.6.1.2.1.5.12 icmpInAddrMasks R Number of received ICMP address mask request
messages
1.3.6.1.2.1.5.13 icmpInAddrMaskReps R Number of received ICMP address mask reply
messages
1.3.6.1.2.1.5.14 icmpOutMsgs R Number of sent ICMP messages
1.3.6.1.2.1.5.15 icmpOutErrors R Number of sent ICMP messages that could not
be sent due to errors
1.3.6.1.2.1.5.16 icmpOutDestUnreachs R Number of sent ICMP destination unreachable
messages
1.3.6.1.2.1.5.17 icmpOutTimeExcds R Number of sent ICMP time exceeded messages
1.3.6.1.2.1.5.18 icmpOutParmProbs R Number of sent ICMP parameter problem
messages
1.3.6.1.2.1.5.19 icmpOutSrcQuenchs R Number of sent ICMP source quench messages
1.3.6.1.2.1.5.20 icmpOutRedirects R Number of sent ICMP redirection messages
1.3.6.1.2.1.5.21 icmpOutEchos R Number of sent ICMP echo request messages
1.3.6.1.2.1.5.22 icmpOutEchoReps R Number of sent ICMP echo reply messages
1.3.6.1.2.1.5.23 icmpOutTimestamps R Number of sent ICMP timestamp request
messages
1.3.6.1.2.1.5.24 icmpOutTimestampReps R Number of sent ICMP timestamp reply messages
1.3.6.1.2.1.5.25 icmpOutAddrMasks R Number of sent ICMP address mask request
messages
1.3.6.1.2.1.5.26 icmpOutAddrMaskReps R Number of sent ICMP address mask reply
messages
678
16.1.6 TCP Group
Table 442: MIB II – TCP Group
Identifier Entry Access Description
1.3.6.1.2.1.6.1 tcpRtoAlgorithm R Retransmission time: 1 = other,
2 = constant, 3 = RSRE, 4 = VANJ
1.3.6.1.2.1.6.2 tcpRtoMin R Minimum value for the retransmission
timer
1.3.6.1.2.1.6.3 tcpRtoMax R Maximum value for the retransmission
timer
1.3.6.1.2.1.6.4 tcpMaxConn R Number of maximum TCP connections
that can exist simultaneously
1.3.6.1.2.1.6.5 tcpActiveOpens R Number of existing active TCP
connections
1.3.6.1.2.1.6.6 tcpPassiveOpens R Number of existing passive TCP
connections
1.3.6.1.2.1.6.7 tcpAttemptFails R Number of failed connection attempts
1.3.6.1.2.1.6.8 tcpEstabResets R Number of connection resets
1.3.6.1.2.1.6.9 tcpCurrEstab R The number of TCP connections for which
the current state is either Established or
Close-Wait
1.3.6.1.2.1.6.10 tcpInSegs R Number of received TCP frames including
the error frames
1.3.6.1.2.1.6.11 tcpOutSegs R Number of correctly sent TCP frames with
data
1.3.6.1.2.1.6.12 tcpRetransSegs R Number of sent TCP frames retransmitted
because of errors
1.3.6.1.2.1.6.13 tcpConnTable - For each existing connection, a table entry
is created
1.3.6.1.2.1.6.13.1 tcpConnEntry - Table entry for connection
1.3.6.1.2.1.6.13.1.1 tcpConnState R This entry indicates the status of the TCP
connection
1.3.6.1.2.1.6.13.1.2 tcpConnLocalAddress R The entry contains the IP address for the
connection. For a server, this entry is
constant 0.0.0.0
1.3.6.1.2.1.6.13.1.3 tcpConnLocalPort R The entry indicates the port number of the
TCP connection.
1.3.6.1.2.1.6.13.1.4 tcpConnRemAddress R The entry contains the remote IP address
of the TCP connection.
1.3.6.1.2.1.6.13.1.5 tcpConnRemPort R The entry contains the remote port of the
TCP connection.
1.3.6.1.2.1.6.14 tcpInErrs R Number of received incorrect TCP frames
1.3.6.1.2.1.6.15 tcpOutRsts R Number of sent TCP frames with set RST
flag
679
16.1.7 UDP Group
Table 443: MIB II – UDP Group
Identifier Entry Access Description
1.3.6.1.2.1.7.1 udpInDatagrams R Number of received UDP frames that could be
passed on to the appropriate applications
1.3.6.1.2.1.7.2 udpNoPorts R Number of received UDP frames that could not
be passed on to the appropriate applications (port
unreachable)
1.3.6.1.2.1.7.3 udpInErrors R Number of received UDP frames that could not
be passed on to the appropriate applications for
other reasons.
1.3.6.1.2.1.7.4 udpOutDatagrams R Number of sent UDP frames
1.3.6.1.2.1.7.5 udpTable - A table entry is created for each application that
received UDP frames
1.3.6.1.2.1.7.5.1 udpEntry - Table entry for an application that received an
UDP frame
1.3.6.1.2.1.7.5.1.1 udpLocalAddress R IP address of the local UDP server
1.3.6.1.2.1.7.5.1.2 udpLocalPort R Port number of the local UDP server
680
16.1.8 SNMP Group
Table 444: MIB II – SNMP Group
Identifier Entry Access Description
1.3.6.1.2.1.11.1 snmpInPkts R Number of received SNMP frames
1.3.6.1.2.1.11.2 snmpOutPkts R Number of sent SNMP frames
1.3.6.1.2.1.11.3 snmpInBadVersions R Number of received SNMP frames with an
invalid version number
1.3.6.1.2.1.11.4 snmpInBadCommunity- R Number of received SNMP frames with an
Names invalid community
1.3.6.1.2.1.11.5 snmpInBadCommunity R Number of received SNMP frames whose
Uses community did not have sufficient authorization
for the actions that it tried to execute
1.3.6.1.2.1.11.6 snmpInASNParseErrs R Number of received SNMP frames with an
incorrect structure
1.3.6.1.2.1.11.8 snmpInTooBigs R Number of received SNMP frames that
acknowledged the result too Big
1.3.6.1.2.1.11.9 snmpInNoSuchNames R Number of received SNMP frames that
acknowledged the result noSuchName
1.3.6.1.2.1.11.10 snmpInBadValues R Number of received SNMP frames that
acknowledged the result bad value
1.3.6.1.2.1.11.11 snmpInReadOnlys R Number of received SNMP frames that
acknowledged the result readOnly
1.3.6.1.2.1.11.12 snmpInGenErrs R Number of received SNMP frames that
acknowledged the result genError
1.3.6.1.2.1.11.13 snmpInTotalReqVars R Number of received SNMP frames with valid
GET or GET-NEXT requests
1.3.6.1.2.1.11.14 snmpInTotalSetVars R Number of received SNMP frames with valid
SET requests
1.3.6.1.2.1.11.15 snmpInGetRequests R Number of GET requests received and processed
1.3.6.1.2.1.11.16 snmpInGetNexts R Number of GET-NEXT requests received and
processed
1.3.6.1.2.1.11.17 snmpInSetRequests R Number of SET requests received and processed
1.3.6.1.2.1.11.18 snmpInGetResponses R Number of received GET responses
1.3.6.1.2.1.11.19 snmpInTraps R Number of received traps
1.3.6.1.2.1.11.20 snmpOutTooBigs R Number of sent SNMP frames that contained the
result too Big
1.3.6.1.2.1.11.21 snmpOutNoSuchNames R Number of sent SNMP frames that contained the
result noSuchName
1.3.6.1.2.1.11.22 snmpOutBadValues R Number of sent SNMP frames that contained the
result bad value
1.3.6.1.2.1.11.24 SnmpOutGenErrs R Number of sent SNMP frames that contained the
result genErrs
1.3.6.1.2.1.11.25 snmpOutGetRequests R Number of GET requests sent
1.3.6.1.2.1.11.26 SnmpOutGetNexts R Number of GET NEXT requests sent
1.3.6.1.2.1.11.27 snmpOutSetRequests R Number of SET requests sent
1.3.6.1.2.1.11.28 snmpOutGetResponses R Number of GET responses sent
1.3.6.1.2.1.11.29 snmpOutTraps R Number of traps sent
1.3.6.1.2.1.11.30 snmpEnableAuthenTraps R/W Authentification failure traps(1 = on, 2 = off )
Pos : 138.1 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Fel dbus kommuni kati on/SNM P (MIB)/WAGO-MIB-Gruppen für 830, 831, 841, 881-Teil 1 @ 4\mod_1237977560828_21.doc x @ 29010 @ 233 @ 1
681
16.2 WAGO MIB Groups
16.2.1 Company Group
The company group contains general information about the company WAGO
Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG.
Pos : 138.2 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Fel dbus kommuni kati on/SNM P (MIB)/WAGO-MIB-Gruppen für 831, 881-Teil 1a @ 7\mod_1275047255348_21.doc x @ 57160 @ @ 1
682
Identifier Entry Access Description
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.7 wioDeviceClass R Device class
10 = controller
20 = coupler
30 = switch
40 = display
50 = sensor
60 = actuator
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.8 wioDeviceGroup R Device group
10 = Serie 750
20 = Serie 758
30 = Serie 767
40 = Serie 762 PERSPECTO
Pos : 138.3 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Fel dbus kommuni kati on/SNM P (MIB)/WAGO-MIB-Gruppen für 830, 831, 841, 881-Teil 2 @ 7\mod_1275048162973_21.doc x @ 57172 @ 3333 @ 1
683
16.2.4 Real-Time Clock Group
The real-time clock group contains information about the system’s real-time
clock.
684
16.2.5 Ethernet Group
The Ethernet group contains the settings for the controller on the Ethernet.
Pos : 138.5 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
685
Pos : 138.6 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Fel dbus kommuni kati on/SNM P (MIB)/WAGO-MIB-Gruppen für 830, 831, 841, 881-Teil 3 @ 7\mod_1275048206942_21.doc x @ 57175 @ 333333333 @ 1
686
16.2.8 Http Group
The Http group contains information and settings for the controller's Web server.
687
16.2.10 Sntp Group
The Sntp group contains information and settings for the controller's Sntp server.
688
Table 455: WAGO MIB – Snmp Group
Identifier Entry Access Description
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.4.2.6 wioSnmp2- R/W Enable/disable first SNMPv1/v2c
ProtocolEnable agent
Default value: { 0 }
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.4.2.7 wioSnmp2- R/W IP address of second SNMP server
ManagerIp Default value: { '00000000'h }
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.4.2.8 wioSnmp2- R/W Community identification string for
Community SNMPv1/v2c
Default value: { "public" }
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.4.2.9 wioSnmp2Trap- R/W Enable/disable SNMPv1 traps to first
V1enable SNMP server
Default value: { 0 }
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.4.2.10 wioSnmp2Trap- R/W Enable/disable SNMPv2c traps to
V2enable first SNMP server
Default value: { 0 }
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.4.3.1 wioSnmp1User- R/W Enable/disable first SNMPv3 user
Enable Default value: { 1 }
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.4.3.2 wioSnmp1- R/W Athentication typ for first SNMPv3
Authentication- user:
Typ 0 = no Authentication
1 = MD5 Authentication
2 = SHA1 Authentication
Default value: { 1 }
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.4.3.3 wioSnmp1- R/W Authentication name for first
Authentication- SNMPv3 user
Name Default value: { "SecurityName" }
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.4.3.4 wioSnmp1- R/W Authentication key for first SNMPv3
Authentication- user
Key Default value: {"AuthenticationKey
"}
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.4.3.5 wioSnmp1- R/W Disable/enable data encryption for
PrivacyEnable first SNMPv3 user::
0 = no Encryption
1 = DES Encryption
Default value: { 1 }
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.4.3.6 wioSnmp1- R/W Privacy key for SNMPv3 for first
PrivacyKey SNMPv3 user
Default value: { "PrivacyKey" }
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.4.3.7 wioSnmp1- R/W Enable/disable notification
Notification- (SNMPv3 traps) with SNMPv3 user
Enable Default value: { 1 }
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.4.3.8 wioSnmp1- R/W Receiver IP address for notification
Notification- (SNMPv3 traps) with SNMPv3 user
ReceiverIP Default value: { 'C0A80101'h }
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.4.3.9 wioSnmp2User- R/W Enable/disable second SNMPv3 user
Enable Default value: { 0 }
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.4.3.10 wioSnmp2- R/W Authentication typ for second
Authentication- SNMPv3 user:
Typ 0 = no authentication
1 = MD5 authentication
2 = SHA1 authentication
Default value: { 1 }
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.4.3.11 wioSnmp2- R/W Authentication name for second
Authentication- SNMPv3 user
Name Default value: { "SecurityName" }
689
Table 455: WAGO MIB – Snmp Group
Identifier Entry Access Description
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.4.3.12 wioSnmp2- R/W Authentication key for second
Authentication- SNMPv3 user
Key Default value:
{"AuthenticationKey"}
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.4.3.13 wioSnmp2- R/W Privacy key for SNMPv3 for second
PrivacyEnable SNMPv3 user
Default value: { 1 }
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.4.3.14 wioSnmp2- R/W Privacy key for SNMPv3 for second
PrivacyKey SNMPv3 user
Default value: { "PrivacyKey" }
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.4.3.15 wioSnmp2- R/W Enable/disable notification
Notification- (SNMPv3 traps) with SNMPv3 user
Enable Default value: { 0 }
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.4.3.16 wioSnmp2- R/W Receiver IP address for notification
Notification- (SNMPv3 traps) with SNMPv3 user
ReceiverIP Default value: { '00000000'h }
690
16.2.13 Snmp User Trap String Group
The Snmp user trap string group contains strings that can be attached to user-
specific traps. These strings can be changed via SNMP or Wago_SNMP.lib in
CODESYS.
691
16.2.15 Modbus Group
The Modbus group contains information and settings about the controller's
modbus server.
Pos : 138.7 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Fel dbus kommuni kati on/SNM P (MIB)/WAGO-MIB-Gruppen für 830, 831, 841, 881-Teil 3a ( wenn EtherNET/IP unterstützt wir d) @ 14\mod_1361364850526_21.doc x @ 112470 @ 3 @ 1
692
Table 460: WAGO MIB – Ethernet IP Group
Identifier Entry Access Description
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.7.1 wioEthernetIpEnable R/W Enable/disable the port of the
Ethernet IP server
0 = port of Ethernet IP server
disable
1 = port of Ethernet IP server
enable
Default value: { 0 }
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.7.2 wioEthernetIpVariables- R/W
InputCount
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.7.3 wioEthernetIpVariables- R/W
OutputCount
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.7.4 wioEthernetIpVariables- R/W
PlcInputCount
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.7.5 wioEthernetIpVariables- R/W
PlcInputOffset
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.7.6 wioEthernetIpVariables- R/W
PlcOutputCount
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.7.7 wioEthernetIpVariables- R/W
PlcOutputOffset
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.7.8 wioEthernetIpRunIdle- R/W
HeaderOrginatorToTarget
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.40.7.9 wioEthernetIpRunIdle- R/W
HeaderTargetToOrginator
Pos : 138.8 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Fel dbus kommuni kati on/SNM P (MIB)/WAGO-MIB-Gruppen für 830, 831, 841, 881-Teil 4 @ 14\mod_1361364916634_21.doc x @ 112473 @ 33 @ 1
693
Table 461: WAGO MIB – Process Image Group
Identifier Entry Access Description
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.50.8.1.3 wioModuleType R Type of module
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.50.8.1.4 wioModuleCount R Count of module
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.50.8.1.5 wioModule- R Module in alternative format
AlternativeFormat
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.50.8.1.6 wioModuleAnalog- R Length of analog output data of module
OutLength (Bit)
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.50.8.1.7 wioModuleAnalog- R Length of analog input data of module
InLength (Bit)
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.50.8.1.8 wioModuleDigital- R Length of digital output data of module
OutLength (Bit)
1.3.6.1.4.1.13576.10.1.50.8.1.9 wioModuleDigital- R Length of digital input data of module
InLength (Bit)
694
Pos : 140 /Dokumentati on allgemei n/Verz eichniss e/Abbildungsverz eichnis - Ü berschrift oG und Verzeic hnis @ 3\mod_1219222916765_21.doc x @ 21080 @ @ 1
List of Figures
Figure 1: Fieldbus Node (Example) ...................................................................... 22
Figure 1: Labeling on the Side of a Component (Example).................................. 23
Figure 1: Example of a Manufacturing Number ................................................... 23
Figure 1: Isolation for Fieldbus Couplers/Controllers (Example)......................... 25
Figure 1: System Supply via Fieldbus Coupler/Controller (left) and via Internal
System Supply Module (right) ..................................................................... 26
Figure 1: System Voltage for Standard Couplers/Controllers and Extended ECO
Couplers ....................................................................................................... 27
Figure 1: Field Supply for Standard Couplers/Controllers and Extended ECO
Couplers ....................................................................................................... 30
Figure 1: Supply Module with Fuse Carrier (Example 750-610) ......................... 32
Figure 2: Removing the Fuse Carrier .................................................................... 33
Figure 3: Opening the Fuse Carrier ....................................................................... 33
Figure 4: Changing the Fuse ................................................................................. 33
Figure 5: Fuse Modules for Automotive Fuses, Series 282 .................................. 34
Figure 6: Fuse Modules for Automotive Fuses, Series 2006 ................................ 34
Figure 7: Fuse Modules with Pivotable Fuse Carrier, Series 281 ......................... 34
Figure 8: Fuse Modules with Pivotable Fuse Carrier, Series 2002 ....................... 34
Figure 1: Power Supply Concept........................................................................... 35
Figure 1: Supply Example for Standard Couplers/Controllers ............................. 36
Figure 1: Carrier Rail Contact (Example) ............................................................. 40
Figure 1: Cable Shield at Ground Potential........................................................... 41
Figure 1: Examples of the WAGO Shield Connecting System............................. 42
Figure 2: Application of the WAGO Shield Connecting System ......................... 42
Figure 1: View ETHERNET Fieldbus controller .................................................. 46
Figure 1: Device Supply ........................................................................................ 48
Figure 1: RJ-45 Connector .................................................................................... 49
Figure 1: Display Elements ................................................................................... 50
Figure 1: Service Interface (Closed and Opened Flap) ......................................... 52
Figure 1: Mode Selector Switch (Closed and Open Damper of the Service Port) 53
Figure 1: Address Selection Switch (for example setting “0“) ............................. 55
Figure 1: Opening the Memory Card Slot, Inserting an SD/SDHC Memory Card
...................................................................................................................... 56
Figure 1: Spacing................................................................................................... 69
Figure 1: Release Tab of Extended ECO Fieldbus Coupler (Example) ................ 72
Figure 1: Insert I/O Module (Example) ................................................................. 73
Figure 2: Snap the I/O Module into Place (Example) ........................................... 73
Figure 1: Removing the I/O Module (Example) ................................................... 74
Figure 1: Data Contacts ......................................................................................... 75
Figure 1: Example for the Arrangement of Power Contacts ................................. 76
Figure 1: Connecting a Conductor to a CAGE CLAMP® ..................................... 77
Figure 1: Run-up of the Controller ........................................................................ 79
Figure 1: Example of Process Image for Input Data ............................................. 82
Figure 2: Example of Process Image for Output Data .......................................... 83
Figure 1: Memory areas and data exchange .......................................................... 87
Figure 1: Example declaration of remanent flags by “var retain” ......................... 89
Figure 1: Data Exchange Between MODBUS Master and I/O Modules .............. 95
695
Figure 1: Data Exchange Between PLC Function (CPU) of the PFC and the I/O
Modules........................................................................................................ 98
Figure 1: Example of Addressing for a Fieldbus Node ....................................... 101
Figure 1: WBM Page “Backup & Restore”......................................................... 106
Figure 1: WBM Page “Backup & Restore”......................................................... 107
Figure 1: WBM Page “Backup & Restore”......................................................... 108
Figure 4: Setting the Storage Location in the Web-based Management System 112
Figure 5: Logging into the PLC Browser ............................................................ 113
Figure 3: Directory structure example................................................................. 116
Figure 1: Address Selection Switch, for Example the Value Setting “50” (21 + 24 +
25) ............................................................................................................... 120
Figure 1: Example for the Function test of a Fieldbus Node .............................. 133
Figure 1: Example of Time Synchronization in ETHERNET Settings............... 138
Figure 1: Example of WBM Clock Configuration .............................................. 139
Figure 1: Logging in for Programming Access ................................................... 141
Figure 1: Logging Into the PLC Browser ............................................................ 142
Figure 1: Dialog window for target system settings............................................ 143
Figure 1: EA-config.xml ..................................................................................... 147
Figure 1: Watchdog Runtime is Less Than the Task Runtime............................ 154
Figure 2: Watchdog Runtime Is Greater Than the Task Call Interval ................ 154
Figure 1: Enabling/Disabling System Events ...................................................... 157
Figure 1: Dialog Window “Communication Parameters” ................................... 161
Figure 1: Logging in for Programming Access ................................................... 162
Figure 1: WBM page “Information” ................................................................... 167
Figure 1: WBM page “Ethernet” ......................................................................... 169
Figure 1: WBM page “TCP/IP” .......................................................................... 172
Figure 1: WBM page “Port” ................................................................................ 174
Figure 1: WBM Page "SNMP" ........................................................................... 177
Figure 1: WBM Page "SNMP V3"...................................................................... 179
Figure 1: WBM Page “Watchdog” ...................................................................... 181
Figure 1: WBM page “Clock” ............................................................................. 184
Figure 1: WBM page “Security” ......................................................................... 186
Figure 1: WBM page “MODBUS” ..................................................................... 188
Figure 1: WBM page "EtherNet/IP".................................................................... 190
Figure 1: WBM page “PLC Info” ....................................................................... 192
Figure 1: WBM page “PLC” ............................................................................... 193
Figure 2: WBM Page “Features”......................................................................... 198
Figure 1: WBM page “I/O Config” ..................................................................... 200
Figure 1: WBM page “Disk Info” ....................................................................... 202
Figure 1: WBM Page “SD Card” ........................................................................ 203
Figure 1: WBM Page “Backup & Restore”......................................................... 205
Figure 1: WBM page “WebVisu” ....................................................................... 209
Figure 1: Display Elements ................................................................................. 210
Figure 1: Node Status – I/O LED Signaling........................................................ 213
Figure 2: Error Message Coding ......................................................................... 213
Figure 1: Function Block for Determining Loss of Fieldbus, Independently of
Protocol ...................................................................................................... 223
Figure 1: Use of the MODBUS Functions .......................................................... 245
Figure 1: Example SCADA Software with MODBUS Driver............................ 398
696
Figure 1: Side Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According to ATEX
and IECEx .................................................................................................. 400
Figure 2: Text Detail – Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According
to ATEX and IECEx. ................................................................................. 400
Figure 1: Side Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Modules According to
ATEX and IECEx. ..................................................................................... 402
Figure 2: Text Detail – Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Modules
According to ATEX and IECEx. ............................................................... 402
Figure 1: Side Marking Example for I/O Modules According to NEC 500 ....... 405
Figure 2: Text Detail – Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According
to NEC 500 ................................................................................................ 405
Pos : 141 /Dokumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
697
Pos : 142 /Dokumentati on allgemei n/Verz eichniss e/T abellenverzeic hnis - Ü bers chrift oG und Verzeic hnis @ 3\mod_1219222958703_21.doc x @ 21084 @ @ 1
List of Tables
Tabelle 1: Variations ............................................................................................. 12
Table 1: Number Notation ..................................................................................... 16
Table 1: Font Conventions .................................................................................... 16
Table 1: Legend for Figure “System Supply via Fieldbus Coupler/Controller (left)
and via Internal System Supply Module (right)” ......................................... 26
Table 1: Alignment ................................................................................................ 27
Table 1: Legend for Figure “Field Supply for Standard Couplers/Controllers and
Extended ECO Couplers” ............................................................................ 30
Table 1: Power Supply Modules ........................................................................... 32
Table 1: Filter Modules for 24 V Supply .............................................................. 35
Table 1: Legend for Figure “Supply Example for Fieldbus Coupler/Controller” . 37
Table 1: WAGO Power Supply Units (Selection)................................................. 38
Table 1: WAGO Ground Wire Terminals ............................................................. 39
Table 1: Legend for Figure “View ETHERNET TCP/IP Fieldbus Controller”.... 47
Table 1: RJ-45 Connector and RJ-45 Connector Configuration ........................... 49
Table 1: Display Elements Fieldbus Status ........................................................... 50
Table 1: Display Elements Node Status ................................................................ 50
Table 1: Display Elements Supply Voltage .......................................................... 50
Table 1: Legend for Figure “Service Interface (Closed and Opened Flap)” ......... 52
Table 1: Legend for Figure „Mode Selector Switch“............................................ 53
Table 1: Mode Selector Switch Positions, Static Positions on PowerOn/Reset .... 54
Table 2: Mode Selector Switch Positions, Dynamic Positions During Ongoing
Operation...................................................................................................... 54
Table 1: Meaning of DIP Switch Positions ........................................................... 55
Table 1: Technical data – Device data .................................................................. 58
Table 2: Technical data – System data .................................................................. 58
Table 3: Technical data – Supply .......................................................................... 59
Table 4: Technical data – Fieldbus MODBUS/TCP ............................................. 59
Table 5: Technical data – Accessories .................................................................. 59
Table 1: Technical Data – Field Wiring ................................................................ 59
Table 1: Technical Data – Power Jumper Contacts .............................................. 59
Table 1: Technical Data – Data Contacts .............................................................. 59
Table 1: Technical Data – Climatic Environmental Conditions ........................... 60
Table 1: Technical Data – Mechanical Strength ................................................... 61
Table 1: WAGO DIN Rail..................................................................................... 69
Table 1: Data Width for I/O Modules ................................................................... 91
Table 1: IEC-61131-3 Address Areas ................................................................... 92
Table 1: Absolute Addressing ............................................................................... 93
Table 1: Addressing Example ............................................................................... 93
Table 1: Allocation of Digital Inputs and Outputs to Process Data Words in
Accordance with the .................................................................................... 95
Table 1: Possible Errors on System Start ............................................................ 105
Table 2: Possible Errors During the Backup Function ........................................ 107
Table 3: Possible Errors During the Restore Function ........................................ 109
Table 1: Possible Errors when Inserting the Memory Card During Ongoing
Operation.................................................................................................... 110
Table 4: Possible Errors when Removing the Memory Card During Ongoing
Operation.................................................................................................... 111
698
Table 5: Possible Errors During SPS Access to the File System of the Memory
Card ............................................................................................................ 114
Table 6: Possible Errors During the FTP Network Access on the File System of
the Memory Card ....................................................................................... 115
Table 7: Saved files in the directory structure ..................................................... 116
Table 1: ETHERNET Libraries for WAGO-I/O-PRO ........................................ 149
Table 1: Task Processing ..................................................................................... 155
Table 1: WBM Page “Information” .................................................................... 168
Table 1: WBM Page “Ethernet” .......................................................................... 170
Table 1: WBM Page “TCP/IP” ........................................................................... 173
Table 1: WBM page “Port” ................................................................................. 174
Table 1: WBM Page “SNMP”............................................................................. 178
Table 1: WBM page "SNMP V3" ....................................................................... 180
Table 1: WBM Page “Watchdog” ....................................................................... 182
Table 1: WBM Page “Clock” .............................................................................. 184
Table 1: WBM Page “Security” .......................................................................... 187
Table 1: WBM Page “Modbus” .......................................................................... 189
Table 1: WBM page “EtherNet/IP“..................................................................... 191
Table 1: WBM Page “PLC Info” ........................................................................ 192
Table 1: WBM Page “PLC” ................................................................................ 194
Table 1: WBM Page “Features” .......................................................................... 198
Table 1: WBM Page “I/O Config” ...................................................................... 201
Table 1: WBM Page “Disk Info” ........................................................................ 202
Table 1: WBM Page “SD Card”.......................................................................... 204
Table 1: WBM Page “Backup & Restore” .......................................................... 206
Table 1: LED Assignment for Diagnostics ......................................................... 210
Table 1: Fieldbus diagnostics – solution in event of error .................................. 211
Table 1: Node Status Diagnostics – Solution in Event of Error .......................... 212
Table 1: Blink Code Table for the I/O LED Signaling, Error Code 1 ................ 215
Table 1: Blink Code Table for the I/O LED Signaling, Error Code 2 ................ 216
Table 2: Blink Code Table for the I/O LED Signaling, Error Code 3 ................ 217
Table 3: Blink Code Table for the I/O LED Signaling, Error Code 4 ................ 218
Table 4: Blink Code Table for the I/O LED Signaling, Error Code 5 ................ 218
Table 1: Blink Code Table for the I/O LED Signaling, Error Code 6 ................ 219
Table 1: Blink Code Table for the I/O LED Signaling, Error Code 7 ................ 219
Table 1: Blink Code Table for the I/O LED Signaling, Error Code 8 … 9 ........ 219
Table 1: Blink Code Table for the I/O LED Signaling, Error Code 10 .............. 220
Table 1: Blink Code Table for the I/O LED Signaling, Error Code 11 .............. 220
Table 1: Blink Code Table for the I/O LED Signaling, Error Code 14 .............. 221
Table 1: Power Supply Status Diagnostics – Solution in Event of Error ............ 222
Table 1: IP Packet................................................................................................ 226
Table 2: Network Class A ................................................................................... 227
Table 3: Network Class B ................................................................................... 227
Table 4: Network Class C ................................................................................... 227
Table 5: Key Data Class A, B and C ................................................................... 228
Table 6: Example: Class B Address with Field for Subnet IDs .......................... 229
Table 7: Subnet Mask for Class A Network........................................................ 229
Table 8: Subnet Mask for Class B Network ........................................................ 229
Table 9: Subnet Mask for Class C Network ........................................................ 229
Table 10: Example for an IP Address from a Class B Network.......................... 229
699
Table 1: BootP Options ....................................................................................... 233
Table 1: Meaning of DHCP Options ................................................................... 236
Table 1: Meaning of the SNTP Parameters ......................................................... 237
Table 1: MIB II Groups ....................................................................................... 239
Table 1: Standard Traps ...................................................................................... 240
Table 1: MODBUS/TCP Header ......................................................................... 242
Table 1: Basic Data Types of MODBUS Protocol.............................................. 243
Table 1: List of the MODBUS Functions in the Fieldbus Controller ................. 243
Table 1: Exception Codes.................................................................................... 246
Table 1: Request of Function Code FC1 ............................................................ 247
Table 2: Response of Function Code FC1........................................................... 247
Table 3: Assignment of Inputs ............................................................................ 247
Table 4: Exception of Function Code FC1 .......................................................... 248
Table 5: Request of Function Code FC2 ............................................................. 249
Table 6: Response of Function Code FC2........................................................... 249
Table 7: Assignment of Inputs ............................................................................ 249
Table 8: Exception of Function Code FC2 .......................................................... 250
Table 9: Request of Function Code FC3 ............................................................. 251
Table 10: Response of Function Code FC3......................................................... 251
Table 11: Exception of Function Code FC3 ........................................................ 251
Table 12: Request of Function Code FC4 ........................................................... 252
Table 13: Response of Function Code FC4......................................................... 252
Table 14: Exception of Function Code FC4 ........................................................ 252
Table 15: Request of Function Code FC5 ........................................................... 253
Table 16: Response of Function Code FC5......................................................... 253
Table 17: Exception of Function Code FC5 ........................................................ 253
Table 18: Request of Function Code FC6 ........................................................... 254
Table 19: Response of Function Code FC6......................................................... 254
Table 20: Exception of Function Code FC6 ........................................................ 254
Table 1: Request of Function code FC11 ............................................................ 255
Table 2: Response of Function Code FC11......................................................... 255
Table 3: Exception of Function Code FC 11 ....................................................... 255
Table 4: Request of Function Code FC15 ........................................................... 256
Table 5: Response of Function Code FC15......................................................... 256
Table 6: Exception of Function Code FC15 ........................................................ 257
Table 7: Request of Function Code FC16 ........................................................... 258
Table 8: Response of Function Code FC16......................................................... 258
Table 9: Exception of Function Code FC16 ........................................................ 258
Table 1: Request of Function Code FC22 ........................................................... 259
Table 2: Response of Function Code FC22......................................................... 259
Table 3: Exception of Function Code FC22 ........................................................ 259
Table 1: Request of Function Code FC23 ........................................................... 260
Table 2: Response of Function Code FC23......................................................... 260
Table 3: Exception of Function Code FC23 ........................................................ 260
Table 1: Register access reading (with FC3, FC4 and FC23) ............................. 262
Table 1: Register access writing (with FC6, FC16, FC22 and FC23)................. 263
Table 1: Bit Access Reading (with FC1 and FC2) .............................................. 264
Table 1: Bit Access Writing (with FC5 and FC15) ............................................. 264
Table 1: MODBUS Registers .............................................................................. 265
Table 1: MODBUS registers (Continuation)....................................................... 266
700
Table 1: Register Address 0x1000 ...................................................................... 267
Table 1: Register Address 0x1001 ...................................................................... 267
Table 2: Register Address 0x1002 ...................................................................... 268
Table 3: Register Address 0x1003 ...................................................................... 268
Table 4: Register Address 0x1004 ...................................................................... 268
Table 5: Register Address 0x1005 ...................................................................... 268
Table 6: Register Address 0x1006 ...................................................................... 269
Table 7: Register Address 0x1007 ...................................................................... 269
Table 8: Register Address 0x1008 ...................................................................... 269
Table 9: Register Address 0x1009 ...................................................................... 269
Table 10: Register Address 0x100A ................................................................... 269
Table 1: Starting Watchdog ................................................................................. 270
Table 1: Register Address 0x100B...................................................................... 271
Table 1: Register Address 0x1020 ...................................................................... 272
Table 2: Register Address 0x1021 ...................................................................... 272
Table 1: Register Address 0x1022 ...................................................................... 273
Table 2: Register Address 0x1023 ...................................................................... 273
Table 3: Register Address 0x1024 ...................................................................... 273
Table 4: Register Address 0x1025 ...................................................................... 273
Table 1: Register Address 0x1028 ...................................................................... 273
Table 1: Register Address 0x1029 ...................................................................... 274
Table 1: Register Address 0x102A ..................................................................... 274
Table 1: Register Address 0x102B...................................................................... 274
Table 1: Register Address 0x1030 ...................................................................... 274
Table 2: Register Address 0x1031 ...................................................................... 274
Table 1: Register Address 0x1035 ...................................................................... 275
Table 2: Register Address 0x1036 ...................................................................... 275
Table 1: Register Address 0x1037 ...................................................................... 275
Table 1: Register Address 0x1050 ...................................................................... 275
Table 1: Register Address 0x2030 ...................................................................... 276
Table 1: Register Address 0x2031 ...................................................................... 276
Table 2: Register Address 0x2032 ...................................................................... 276
Table 3: Register Address 0x2033 ...................................................................... 277
Table 1: Register Address 0x2040 ...................................................................... 277
Table 1: Register Address 0x2041 ...................................................................... 277
Table 2: Register Address 0x2042 ...................................................................... 277
Table 3: Register Address 0x2043 ...................................................................... 277
Table 1: Register Address 0x2010 ...................................................................... 278
Table 2: Register Address 0x2011 ...................................................................... 278
Table 3: Register Address 0x2012 ...................................................................... 278
Table 4: Register Address 0x2013 ...................................................................... 278
Table 5: Register Address 0x2014 ...................................................................... 278
Table 1: Register Address 0x2020 ...................................................................... 278
Table 2: Register Address 0x2021 ...................................................................... 279
Table 3: Register Address 0x2022 ...................................................................... 279
Table 4: Register Address 0x2023 ...................................................................... 279
Table 1: Register Address 0x2000 ...................................................................... 280
Table 2: Register Address 0x2001 ...................................................................... 280
Table 3: Register Address 0x2002 ...................................................................... 280
Table 4: Register Address 0x2003 ...................................................................... 280
701
Table 5: Register Address 0x2004 ...................................................................... 280
Table 6: Register Address 0x2005 ...................................................................... 280
Table 7: Register Address 0x2006 ...................................................................... 281
Table 8: Register Address 0x2007 ...................................................................... 281
Table 9: Register Address 0x2008 ...................................................................... 281
Table 1: Register Addresses 0x3000 to 0x5FFF ................................................. 281
Table 1: ISO/OSI reference model ..................................................................... 283
Table 2: CIP common class ................................................................................. 286
Table 3: WAGO specific classes ......................................................................... 286
Table 1: Explanation of the table headings in the object descriptions ................ 288
Table 2: Identity (01 hex) – Class ......................................................................... 288
Table 3: Identity (01 hex) – Instance 1.................................................................. 289
Table 4: Identity (01 hex) – Common service....................................................... 289
Table 5: Message router (02 hex) – Class ............................................................. 290
Table 6: Message router (02 hex) – Instance 1 ..................................................... 290
Table 7: Message router (02 hex) – Common service .......................................... 291
Table 1: Assembly (04 hex) – Class...................................................................... 291
Table 2: Overview of static Assembly instances................................................. 291
Table 3: Static assembly instances – Instance 101 (65 hex).................................. 292
Table 4: Static assembly instances – Instance 102 (66 hex).................................. 292
Table 5: Static assembly instances – Instance 103 (67 hex).................................. 292
Table 6: Static assembly instances – Instance 104 (68 hex).................................. 292
Table 7: Static assembly instances – Instance 105 (69 hex).................................. 293
Table 8: Static assembly instances – Instance 106 (6A hex) ................................. 293
Table 9: Static assembly instances – Instance 107 (6B hex) ................................. 293
Table 10: Static assembly instances – Instance 108 (6C hex) ............................... 294
Table 11: Static assembly instances – Instance 109 (6C hex) ............................... 294
Table 1: Static assembly instances – Instance 110 (6E hex) ................................. 294
Table 2: Static assembly instances – Instance 111 (6F hex) ................................. 294
Table 1: Static assembly instances – Common service ....................................... 295
Table 1: Port class (F4 hex) – Class ...................................................................... 296
Table 2: Port class (F4 hex) – Instance 1 .............................................................. 296
Table 3: Port class (F4 hex) – Common service ................................................... 297
Table 4: TCP/IP interface (F5hex) – Class ........................................................... 298
Table 5: TCP/IP interface (F5hex) – Instance 1 .................................................... 299
Table 6: TCP/IP interface (F5hex) – Common service ......................................... 299
Table 7: Ethernet link (F5hex) – Class.................................................................. 300
Table 1: Ethernet link (F6 hex) – Instance 1 ......................................................... 301
Table 2: Ethernet link (F6 hex) – Instance 2 ......................................................... 303
Table 3: Ethernet link (F6 hex) – Instance 3 ......................................................... 305
Table 4: Ethernet link (F6 hex) – Common service .............................................. 305
Table 1: Coupler/Controller configuration (64 hex) – Class................................. 306
Table 2: Coupler/Controller configuration (64 hex) – Instance 1 ......................... 306
Table 1: Coupler/Controller configuration (64 hex) – Common service .............. 308
Table 1: Discrete input point (65 hex) – Class ...................................................... 308
Table 2: Discrete input point (65 hex) – Instance 1...255 ..................................... 308
Table 3: Discrete input point (65 hex) – Common service ................................... 308
Table 4: Discrete Input Point Extended 1(69 hex,) – Class ................................ 309
Table 5: Discrete output point (66 hex) – Instance 256...510 ............................... 309
Table 6: Discrete Input Point Extended 1 (69 hex) – Common service ................ 309
702
Table 7: Discrete Input Point Extended 2 (6D hex) – Class ............................... 309
Table 8: Analog input point (67 hex) – Instance 1 ................................................ 309
Table 9: Analog input point (67 hex) – Common service ..................................... 310
Table 10: Discrete Input Point Extended 3 (71 hex) – Class .............................. 310
Table 11: Discrete Input Point Extended 3 (71 hex) – Instance 766...1020 .......... 310
Table 12: Discrete Input Point Extended 3 (71 hex) – Common service .............. 310
Table 13: Discrete Output Point (66 hex) – Class ............................................... 310
Table 14: Discrete Output Point (66 hex) – Instance 1...255 ................................ 311
Table 15: Discrete Output Point (66 hex) – Common service .............................. 311
Table 16: Discrete Output Point Extended 1 (6A hex) – Class ............................. 311
Table 17: Discrete Output Point Extended 1 (6A hex) – Instance 256...510 ........ 311
Table 18: Discrete Output Point Extended 1 (6A hex) – Common service .......... 311
Table 19: Discrete Output Point Extended 2 (6E hex) – Class ............................. 312
Table 20: Discrete Output Point Extended 2 (6E hex) – Instance 511...765 ........ 312
Table 21: Discrete Output Point Extended 2 (6E hex) – Common service.......... 312
Table 22: Discrete Output Point Extended 3 (72 hex) – Class.............................. 312
Table 23: Discrete Output Point Extended 3 (72 hex) – Instance 766...1020 ....... 313
Table 24: Discrete Output Point Extended 2 (6E hex) – Common service.......... 313
Table 25: Analog Input Point (67 hex) – Class ..................................................... 313
Table 26: Analog Input Point (67 hex) – Instance 1 ... 255 .................................. 313
Table 27: Analog Input Point (67 hex) – Common service .................................. 313
Table 28: Analog Input Point Extended 1 (6B hex) – Class ................................. 314
Table 29: Analog Input Point Extended 1 (6B hex) – Instance 256 ... 510 .......... 314
Table 30: Analog Input Point Extended 1 (6B hex) – Common service............... 314
Table 31: Analog Input Point Extended 2 (6F hex) – Class.................................. 314
Table 32: Analog Input Point Extended 2 (6F hex) – Instance 511 ... 765 ........... 315
Table 33: Analog Input Point Extended 2 (6F hex) – Common service ............... 315
Table 34: Analog Input Point Extended 3 (73 hex) – Class .................................. 315
Table 35: Analog Input Point Extended 3 (73 hex) – Instance 766 ... 1020 ......... 315
Table 36: Analog Input Point Extended 3 (73 hex) – Common service ............... 316
Table 37: Analog Output Point (68 hex) – Class .................................................. 316
Table 38: Analog Output Point (68 hex) – Instance 1...255.................................. 316
Table 39: Analog Output Point (68 hex) – Common service ................................ 316
Table 40: Analog Output Point Extended 1 (6C hex) – Class .............................. 317
Table 41: Analog Output Point Extended 1 (6C hex) – Instance 256...510 .......... 317
Table 42: Analog Output Point Extended 1 (6C hex) – Common service ............ 317
Table 43: Analog Output Point Extended 2 (70 hex) – Class ............................... 317
Table 44: Analog Output Point Extended 2 (70 hex) – Instance 511...765 ......... 318
Table 45: Analog Output Point Extended 2 (70 hex) – Common service............. 318
Table 46: Analog Output Point Extended 3 (74 hex) – Class ............................... 318
Table 47: Analog Output Point Extended 3 (74 hex) – Instance 766...1020 ........ 318
Table 48: Analog Output Point Extended 3 (74 hex) – Common service............. 319
Table 49: Module Configuration (80 hex) – Class ................................................ 319
Table 50: Module Configuration (80 hex) – Instance 1...255 ............................... 319
Table 51: Module Configuration (80 hex) – Common service ............................. 319
Table 52: Module Configuration Extended (81 hex) – Class................................ 320
Table 53: Module Configuration Extended (81 hex) – Instance 256 .................... 320
Table 54: Module Configuration Extended (81 hex) – Common service ............. 320
Table 1: Input fieldbus variable USINT (A0 hex) – Class .................................... 321
Table 2: Input fieldbus variable USINT (A0 hex) – Instance 1...255 ................... 321
703
Table 3: Input fieldbus variable USINT (A0 hex) – Common service ................. 321
Table 4: Input Fieldbus Variable USINT Extended 1 (A1 hex) – Class ............... 322
Table 5: Input fieldbus variable USINT Extended 1 (A1 hex) – Instance 256...510
.................................................................................................................... 322
Table 6: Input fieldbus variable USINT Extended 1 (A1 hex) – Common service
.................................................................................................................... 322
Table 7: Input Fieldbus Variable USINT Extended 2 (A2 hex) – Class ............... 323
Table 8: Input Fieldbus Variable USINT Extended 2 (A2 hex) – Instance 511...512
.................................................................................................................... 323
Table 9: Input fieldbus variable USINT Extended 2 (A2 hex) – Common service
.................................................................................................................... 323
Table 10: Output fieldbus variable USINT (A3 hex) – Class ............................... 324
Table 11: Output fieldbus variable USINT (A3 hex) – Instance 1...255 .............. 324
Table 12: Output fieldbus variable USINT (A3 hex) – Common service ............ 324
Table 13: Output Fieldbus variable USINT Extended 1 (A4 hex) – Class ........... 325
Table 14: Output Fieldbus Variable USINT Extended 1 (A4 hex) – Instance
256...510..................................................................................................... 325
Table 15: Output Fieldbus Variable USINT Extended 1 (A4 hex) – Common
service ........................................................................................................ 325
Table 16: Output Fieldbus Variable USINT Extended 2 (A5 hex) – Class .......... 326
Table 17: Output Fieldbus Variable USINT Extended 2 (A5 hex) – Instance
511...512..................................................................................................... 326
Table 18: Output Fieldbus Variable USINT Extended 2 (A5 hex) – Common
service ........................................................................................................ 326
Table 19: Input fieldbus variable UINT (A6 hex) – Class .................................... 327
Table 20: Input fieldbus variable UINT (A6 hex) – Instance 1...255 ................... 327
Table 21: Input fieldbus variable UINT (A6 hex) – Common service ................. 327
Table 22: Input Fieldbus Variable UINT Extended 1 (A7 hex) – Class ............... 328
Table 23: Input Fieldbus Variable UINT Extended 1 (A7 hex) – Instance 256 ... 328
Table 24: Input Fieldbus Variable UINT Extended 1 (A7 hex) – Common service
.................................................................................................................... 328
Table 25: Output fieldbus variable UINT (A8 hex) – Class ................................. 329
Table 26: Output fieldbus variable UINT (A8 hex) – Instance 1...255 ................. 329
Table 27: Output fieldbus variable UINT (A8 hex) – Common service ............... 329
Table 28: Output Fieldbus Variable UINT Extended 1 (A9 hex) – Class ............ 330
Table 29: Output Fieldbus Variable UINT Extended 1 (A9 hex) – Instance 256 . 330
Table 30: Output Fieldbus Variable UINT Extended 1 (A9 hex) – Common service
.................................................................................................................... 330
Table 31: Input fieldbus variable UDINT (AA hex) – Class ................................ 331
Table 32: Input fieldbus variable UDINT (AA hex) – Instance 1...128................ 331
Table 33: Input fieldbus variable UDINT (AA hex) – Common service.............. 331
Table 34: Input Fieldbus Variable UDINT Offset (AB hex) – Class.................... 332
Table 35: Input Fieldbus Variable UDINT Offset (AB hex) – Instance 1...128 ... 332
Table 36: Input Fieldbus Variable UDINT Offset (AB hex) – Common service . 332
Table 37: Input fieldbus variable UDINT (AA hex) – Class ................................ 333
Table 38: Input fieldbus variable UDINT (AA hex) – Instance 1...128................ 333
Table 39: Input fieldbus variable UDINT (AA hex) – Common service.............. 333
Table 40: Output Fieldbus Variable UDINT Offset (AD hex) – Class ................. 334
Table 41: Output Fieldbus Variable UDINT Offset (AD hex) – Instance 1...128 334
704
Table 42: Output Fieldbus Variable UDINT Offset (AD hex) – Common service
.................................................................................................................... 334
Table 1: 1 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics ............................... 337
Table 2: 2 Channel Digital Input Modules .......................................................... 337
Table 3: 2 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics ............................... 337
Table 4: 2 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics and Output Process
Data ............................................................................................................ 338
Table 5: 4 Channel Digital Input Modules .......................................................... 338
Table 6: 8 Channel Digital Input Modules .......................................................... 338
Table 7: 8 Channel Digital Input Module PTC with Diagnostics and Output
Process Data ............................................................................................... 339
Table 7: 16 Channel Digital Input Modules ........................................................ 339
Table 8: 1 Channel Digital Output Module with Input Process Data ................. 340
Table 9: 2 Channel Digital Output Modules ....................................................... 340
Table 10: 2 Channel Digital Input Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process
Data ............................................................................................................ 341
Table 11: 2 Channel Digital Input Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process
Data 75x-506 .............................................................................................. 341
Table 12: 4 Channel Digital Output Modules ..................................................... 342
Table 13: 4 Channel Digital Output Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process
Data ............................................................................................................ 342
Table 14: 8 Channel Digital Output Module ....................................................... 342
Table 15: 8 Channel Digital Output Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process
Data ............................................................................................................ 343
Table 16: 16 Channel Digital Output Modules ................................................... 343
Table 17: 8 Channel Digital Input/Output Modules ............................................ 344
Table 1: 1 Channel Analog Input Modules ......................................................... 345
Table 2: 2 Channel Analog Input Modules ......................................................... 345
Table 3: 4 Channel Analog Input Modules ......................................................... 346
Table 3: 3-Phase Power Measurement Module ................................................... 347
Table 3: 8 Channel Analog Input Modules ......................................................... 348
Table 1: 2 Channel Analog Output Modules....................................................... 349
Table 2: 4 Channel Analog Output Modules....................................................... 349
Table 3: 8 Channel Analog Output Modules....................................................... 350
Table 1: Counter Modules 750-404, (and all variations except of /000-005), 753-
404, (and variation /000-003) .................................................................... 351
Table 2: Counter Modules 750-404/000-005 ...................................................... 352
Table 3: Counter Modules 750-638, 753-638 ..................................................... 352
Table 4: Pulse Width Modules 750-511, /xxx-xxx ............................................. 353
Table 5: Serial Interface Modules with alternative Data Format ........................ 353
Table 6: Serial Interface Modules with Standard Data Format ........................... 354
Table 7: Data Exchange Module ......................................................................... 354
Table 8: SSI Transmitter Interface Modules ....................................................... 355
Table 9: Incremental Encoder Interface Modules 750-631/000-004, --010, -011
.................................................................................................................... 355
Table 10: Incremental Encoder Interface Modules 750-634 ............................... 356
Table 11: Incremental Encoder Interface Modules 750-637 ............................... 356
Table 12: Digital Pulse Interface Modules 750-635 ........................................... 357
Table 13: DC-Drive Controller 750-636 ............................................................. 357
Table 14: Stepper Controller RS 422 / 24 V / 20 mA 750-670 ........................... 358
705
Table 15: RTC Module 750-640 ......................................................................... 359
Table 16: DALI/DSI Master Module 750-641 .................................................... 359
Table 17: Overview of Input Process Image in the "Easy" Mode ....................... 361
Table 18: Overview of the Output Process Image in the "Easy" Mode“ ............ 361
Table 19: EnOcean Radio Receiver 750-642 ...................................................... 362
Table 20: MP Bus Master Module 750-643 ........................................................ 363
Table 21: Bluetooth® RF-Transceiver 750-644................................................... 363
Table 22: Vibration Velocity/Bearing Condition Monitoring VIB I/O 750-645 364
Table 1: KNX/EIB/TP1 Module 753-646 ........................................................... 365
Table 1: AS-interface Master Module 750-655 .................................................. 366
Table 2: System Modules with Diagnostics 750-610, -611 ................................ 367
Table 1: Binary Space Module 750-622 (with Behavior Like 2 Channel Digital
Input) .......................................................................................................... 367
Table 1: 1 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics ............................... 369
Table 2: 2 Channel Digital Input Modules .......................................................... 369
Table 3: 2 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics ............................... 370
Table 4: 2 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics and Output Process
Data ............................................................................................................ 370
Table 5: 4 Channel Digital Input Modules .......................................................... 371
Table 6: 8 Channel Digital Input Modules .......................................................... 371
Table 7: 16 Channel Digital Input Modules ........................................................ 371
Table 8: 1 Channel Digital Output Module with Input Process Data ................. 372
Table 9: 2 Channel Digital Output Modules ....................................................... 373
Table 10: 2 Channel Digital Input Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process
Data ............................................................................................................ 373
Table 11: 2 Channel Digital Input Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process
Data 75x-506 .............................................................................................. 374
Table 12: 4 Channel Digital Output Modules ..................................................... 374
Table 13: 4 Channel Digital Output Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process
Data ............................................................................................................ 374
Table 14: 8 Channel Digital Output Module ....................................................... 375
Table 15: 8 Channel Digital Output Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process
Data ............................................................................................................ 375
Table 16: 16 Channel Digital Output Modules ................................................... 376
Table 17: 8 Channel Digital Input/Output Modules ............................................ 376
Table 1: 1 Channel Analog Input Modules ......................................................... 377
Table 2: 2 Channel Analog Input Modules ......................................................... 378
Table 3: 4 Channel Analog Input Modules ......................................................... 378
Table 3: 4 Channel Analog Input Modules for RTD’s ........................................ 378
Table 3: 3-Phase Power Measurement Module ................................................... 379
Table 3: 8 Channel Analog Input Modules for RTD’s ........................................ 379
Table 4: 2 Channel Analog Output Modules....................................................... 380
Table 5: 4 Channel Analog Output Modules....................................................... 380
Table 3: 8 Channel Analog Output Modules....................................................... 381
Table 6: Counter Modules 750-404, (and all variations except of /000-005), 753-
404, (and variation /000-003) .................................................................... 382
Table 7: Counter Modules 750-404/000-005 ...................................................... 382
Table 8: Counter Modules 750-638, 753-638 ..................................................... 383
Table 9: Pulse Width Modules 750-511, /xxx-xxx ............................................. 383
Table 10: Serial Interface Modules with alternative Data Format ...................... 384
706
Table 11: Serial Interface Modules with Standard Data Format ......................... 385
Table 12: Data Exchange Module ....................................................................... 385
Table 13: SSI Transmitter Interface Modules ..................................................... 386
Table 14: SSI Transmitter Interface I/O Modules with an Alternative Data Format
.................................................................................................................... 386
Table 15: Incremental Encoder Interface Modules 750-631/000-004, -010, -011
.................................................................................................................... 386
Table 16: Incremental Encoder Interface Modules 750-634 ............................... 387
Table 17: Incremental Encoder Interface Modules 750-637 ............................... 387
Table 18: Incremental Encoder Interface Modules 750-635, 750-635 ............... 388
Table 19: DC-Drive Controller 750-636 ............................................................. 388
Table 20: Steppercontroller RS 422 / 24 V / 20 mA 750-670 ............................. 389
Table 21: RTC Module 750-640 ......................................................................... 390
Table 22: DALI/DSI Master module 750-641 .................................................... 391
Table 23: EnOcean Radio Receiver 750-642 ...................................................... 391
Table 24: MP Bus Master Module 750-643 ........................................................ 392
Table 25: Bluetooth® RF-Transceiver 750-644................................................... 393
Table 26: Vibration Velocity/Bearing Condition Monitoring VIB I/O 750-645 393
Table 27: AS-interface Master module 750-655 ................................................. 394
Table 1: System Modules with Diagnostics 750-610, -611 ................................ 395
Table 2: Binary Space Module 750-622 (with behavior like 2 channel digital
input) .......................................................................................................... 395
Table 1: MODBUS Table and Function Codes................................................... 398
Table 1: Description of Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According
to ATEX and IECEx .................................................................................. 401
Table 1: Description of Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Modules
According to ATEX and IECEx ................................................................ 403
Table 1: Description of Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According
to NEC 500 ................................................................................................ 405
Table 1: MIB II – System Group......................................................................... 412
Table 1: MIB II – Interface Group ...................................................................... 413
Table 1: MIB II – IP Group ................................................................................. 415
Table 2: MIB II – IpRoute Table Group ............................................................. 416
Table 3: MIB II – ICMP Group........................................................................... 417
Table 4: MIB II – TCP Group ............................................................................. 418
Table 5: MIB II – UDP Group ............................................................................ 419
Table 6: MIB II – SNMP Group ......................................................................... 420
Table 1: WAGO MIB – Company Group ........................................................... 421
Table 2: WAGO MIB – Product Group .............................................................. 421
Table 1: WAGO MIB – Versions Group ............................................................ 422
Table 2: WAGO MIB – Real Time Clock Group ............................................... 423
Table 3: WAGO MIB – Ethernet Group ............................................................. 424
Table 1: WAGO MIB – Actual Error Group ...................................................... 424
Table 1: WAGO MIB – PLC Project Group ....................................................... 425
Table 2: WAGO MIB – Http Group ................................................................... 426
Table 3: WAGO MIB – Ftp Group ..................................................................... 426
Table 4: WAGO MIB – Sntp Group ................................................................... 427
Table 5: WAGO MIB – Snmp Group ................................................................. 427
Table 6: WAGO MIB – Snmp Trap String Group .............................................. 429
Table 7: WAGO MIB – Snmp User Trap String Group ..................................... 430
707
Table 8: WAGO MIB – Plc Connection Group .................................................. 430
Table 9: WAGO MIB – Modbus Group ............................................................. 431
Table 1: WAGO MIB – Ethernet IP Group ........................................................ 432
Table 1: WAGO MIB – Process Image Group ................................................... 432
Table 2: WAGO MIB – Plc Data Group ............................................................. 433
=== Ende der Liste für T extmar ke Verzeic hnis_hi nten ===
Pos : 144 /Dokumentati on allgemei n/Ei nband/Ei nband Handbuc h - Leers eite für durc h 2 teilbare Seitenz ahl (Standarddruc k) @ 3\mod_1219230851078_0.doc x @ 21123 @ @ 1
708
Pos : 145 /Dokumentati on allgemei n/Ei nband/Ei nband Handbuc h - R üc ks eite 2010 @ 9\mod_1285229376516_21.doc x @ 64944 @ @ 1
Internet: http://www.wago.com
=== Ende der Liste für T extmar ke Ei nband_hinten ===
709
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Pos : 2 /D okumentati on allgemein/Ei nband/Ei nband H andbuch - Fronts eite 2015 - mit Doc Variabl en (Standar d) @ 9\mod_1285229289866_0.doc x @ 64941 @ @ 1
Manual
750-430(/xxx-xxx)
8DI 24V DC, 3.0ms
8-Channel Digital Input Module 24 V DC, 1-conductor
connection; high-side switching
Version 1.3.0
Pos : 3 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine M odul e)/Hinweise z ur Dokumentation/Impres sum für Standardhandbüc her - allg. Angaben, Ansc hriften, Tel efonnummer n und E-Mail-Adres sen @ 3\mod_1219151118203_21.doc x @ 21060 @ @ 1
710
© 2015 by WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG
All rights reserved.
Hansastraße 27
D-32423 Minden
E-Mail: info@wago.com
Web: http://www.wago.com
Technical Support
E-Mail: support@wago.com
Every conceivable measure has been taken to ensure the accuracy and
completeness of this documentation. However, as errors can never be fully
excluded, we always appreciate any information or suggestions for improving the
documentation.
E-Mail: documentation@wago.com
We wish to point out that the software and hardware terms as well as the
trademarks of companies used and/or mentioned in the present manual are
generally protected by trademark or patent.
=== Ende der Liste für T extmar ke Ei nband_vorne ===
711
Pos : 5 /D okumentati on allgemein/Verzeic hnisse/Inhalts verz eichnis - Ü berschrift oG und Verzei chnis @ 3\mod_1219151230875_21.doc x @ 21063 @ @ 1
Table of Contents
1 Notes about this Documentation ................................................................. 5
1.1 Validity of this Documentation ................................................................. 5
1.2 Copyright................................................................................................... 5
1.3 Symbols ..................................................................................................... 6
1.4 Number Notation ....................................................................................... 8
1.5 Font Conventions ...................................................................................... 8
2 Important Notes ........................................................................................... 9
2.1 Legal Bases ............................................................................................... 9
2.1.1 Subject to Changes ............................................................................... 9
2.1.2 Personnel Qualifications ....................................................................... 9
2.1.3 Use of the WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 in Compliance with Underlying
Provisions ............................................................................................. 9
2.1.4 Technical Condition of Specified Devices ......................................... 10
2.2 Safety Advice (Precautions) .................................................................... 11
3 Device Description ..................................................................................... 13
3.1 View ........................................................................................................ 15
3.2 Connectors............................................................................................... 16
3.2.1 Data Contacts/Internal Bus ................................................................. 16
3.2.2 Power Jumper Contacts/Field Supply ................................................ 17
3.2.3 CAGE CLAMP® Connectors ............................................................. 19
3.3 Display Elements .................................................................................... 20
3.4 Schematic Diagram ................................................................................. 21
3.5 Technical Data ........................................................................................ 22
3.5.1 Device ................................................................................................. 22
3.5.2 Supply ................................................................................................. 22
3.5.3 Communication .................................................................................. 22
3.5.4 Inputs .................................................................................................. 22
3.5.5 Connection Type ................................................................................ 22
3.5.6 Climatic Environmental Conditions ................................................... 23
3.6 Approvals ................................................................................................ 24
3.7 Standards and Guidelines ........................................................................ 26
4 Process Image ............................................................................................. 27
5 Mounting..................................................................................................... 28
5.1 Mounting Sequence ................................................................................. 28
5.2 Inserting and Removing Devices ............................................................ 29
5.2.1 Inserting the I/O Module .................................................................... 29
5.2.2 Removing the I/O Module .................................................................. 30
6 Connect Devices ......................................................................................... 31
6.1 Connecting a Conductor to the CAGE CLAMP® ................................... 31
7 Use in Hazardous Environments .............................................................. 32
7.1 Marking Configuration Examples ........................................................... 33
7.1.1 Marking for Europe According to ATEX and IEC-Ex ...................... 33
7.1.2 Marking for America According to NEC 500 .................................... 38
7.2 Installation Regulations ........................................................................... 39
712
7.2.1 Special Conditions for Safe Use (ATEX Certificate TÜV 07 ATEX
554086 X) ........................................................................................... 40
7.2.2 Special Conditions for Safe Use (ATEX Certificate TÜV 12 ATEX
106032 X) ........................................................................................... 41
7.2.3 Special Conditions for Safe Use (IEC-Ex Certificate TUN 09.0001 X)42
7.2.4 Special Conditions for Safe Use (IEC-Ex Certificate IECEx TUN
12.0039 X) .......................................................................................... 43
7.2.5 Special Conditions for Safe Use According to ANSI/ISA 12.12.01 .. 44
List of Figures ...................................................................................................... 45
List of Tables ........................................................................................................ 46
713
Pos : 7 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine M odul e)/Übersc hriften für all e Serien/Hi nweis e zur D okumentati on/Hinweise z u dies er D okumentation - Ü berschrift 1 @ 4\mod_1237987661750_21.doc x @ 29029 @ 1 @ 1
This documentation is only applicable to the I/O module 750-430 (8DI 24V DC,
3.0ms) and the variants listed in the table below.
Pos : 11 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Hi nweis e z ur D okumentati on/Gültigkeits bereic h/Variantenlisten/Variantenliste - 750- xxx - Standar dversion und Vari ante /025-000 (er weiterter T emper aturbereic h) @ 9\mod_1281521920414_21.doc x @ 63093 @ @ 1
Table 1: Variants
Item Number/Variant Designation
750-430 8DI 24V DC, 3.0ms
750-430/025-000 8DI 24V DC, 3.0ms/T
Pos : 12 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Hi nweis e zur D okumentati on/Hinweise/Hinweis: Gültig keit der Angaben für aufg elistete Varianten @ 9\mod_1281520778141_21.doc x @ 63085 @ @ 1
The I/O module 750-430 shall only be installed and operated according to the
instructions in this manual and in the manual for the used fieldbus
coupler/controller.
1.2 Copyright
This Manual, including all figures and illustrations, is copyright-protected. Any
further use of this Manual by third parties that violate pertinent copyright
provisions is prohibited. Reproduction, translation, electronic and phototechnical
filing/archiving (e.g., photocopying) as well as any amendments require the
written consent of WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG, Minden, Germany.
Non-observance will involve the right to assert damage claims.
Pos : 14.2 /Dokumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/---Seitenwechs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
714
Pos : 14.3 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Module)/Ü bers chriften für alle Serien/Hinweis e z ur Dokumentation/Symbol e - Ü bersc hrift 2 @ 13\mod_1351068042408_21.doc x @ 105270 @ 2 @ 1
1.3 Symbols
Pos : 14.4.1 /All e Serien ( Allgemei ne Module)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Sicherheits- und sons tige Hinweis e/Gefahr/Gefahr: _War nung vor Personenschäden allgemei n_ - Erl äuter ung @ 13\mod_1343309450020_21.doc x @ 101029 @ @ 1
Personal Injury!
Indicates a high-risk, imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
Pos : 14.4.2 /All e Serien ( Allgemei ne Module)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Sicherheits- und sons tige Hinweis e/Gefahr/Gefahr: _War nung vor Personenschäden durc h elektrisc hen Strom_ - Erläuterung @ 13\mod_1343309694914_21.doc x @ 101030 @ @ 1
Personal Injury!
Indicates a moderate-risk, potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious injury.
Pos : 14.4.4 /All e Serien ( Allgemei ne Module)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Sicherheits- und sons tige Hinweis e/Vorsic ht/Vorsicht: _War nung vor Pers onensc häden allgemein_ - Erläuterung @ 13\mod_1343310028762_21.doc x @ 101038 @ @ 1
Personal Injury!
Indicates a low-risk, potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may
result in minor or moderate injury.
Pos : 14.4.5 /All e Serien ( Allgemei ne Module)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Sicherheits- und sons tige Hinweis e/Achtung/Achtung: _War nung vor Sac hsc häden allgemein_ - Erläuterung @ 13\mod_1343310134623_21.doc x @ 101041 @ @ 1
Damage to Property!
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in
damage to property.
Pos : 14.4.6 /All e Serien ( Allgemei ne Module)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Sicherheits- und sons tige Hinweis e/Achtung/Achtung: _War nung vor Sac hsc häden durc h elektr ostatis che Aufladung_ - Erläuterung @ 13\mod_1343310227702_21.doc x @ 101044 @ @ 1
Important Note!
Indicates a potential malfunction which, if not avoided, however, will not result in
damage to property.
Pos : 14.4.8 /All e Serien ( Allgemei ne Module)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Sicherheits- und sons tige Hinweis e/Infor mation/Infor mation: _Weiter e Infor mation allgemei n_ - Erl äuter ung @ 13\mod_1343310439814_21.doc x @ 101051 @ @ 1
715
Additional Information:
Refers to additional information which is not an integral part of this
documentation (e.g., the Internet).
Pos : 14.5 /Dokumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/---Seitenwechs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
716
Pos : 14.6 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Module)/Hi nweis e zur D okumentati on/Zahlens ysteme @ 3\mod_1221059454015_21.doc x @ 21711 @ 2 @ 1
Pos : 14.7 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Module)/Hi nweis e zur D okumentati on/Sc hriftkonventi onen @ 3\mod_1221059521437_21.doc x @ 21714 @ 2 @ 1
717
Pos : 16 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Wichtige Erläuterungen/Wichtige Erläuter ungen - Übersc hrift 1 @ 4\mod_1241428899156_21.doc x @ 32170 @ 1 @ 1
2 Important Notes
Pos : 17.1 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Dokumente) ( Allgemei ne Module)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Wic htige Erläuterungen - Einl eitung @ 3\mod_1221059818031_21.doc x @ 21717 @ @ 1
All changes to the coupler or controller should always be carried out by qualified
personnel with sufficient skills in PLC programming.
Pos : 17.5 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Bes timmungsgemäß e Verwendung Bes ti mmungsgemäße Verwendung 750-xxxx - Ü berschrift 3 und Inhal t @ 3\mod_1224064151234_21.doc x @ 24070 @ 3 @ 1
The devices have been developed for use in an environment that meets the IP20
protection class criteria. Protection against finger injury and solid impurities up to
12.5 mm diameter is assured; protection against water damage is not ensured.
Unless otherwise specified, operation of the devices in wet and dusty
environments is prohibited.
718
Appropriate housing (per 94/9/EG) is required when operating the WAGO-I/O-
SYSTEM 750 in hazardous environments. Please note that a prototype test
certificate must be obtained that confirms the correct installation of the system in
a housing or switch cabinet.
Pos : 17.6 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Dokumente) ( Allgemei ne Module)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/T ec hnis cher Z ustand der Geräte - Übersc hrift 3 und Inhalt @ 3\mod_1221060446109_21.doc x @ 21723 @ 3 @ 1
Please send your request for modified and new hardware or software
configurations directly to WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG.
Pos : 17.7 /Dokumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/---Seitenwechs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
719
Pos : 17.8 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Module)/Ü bers chriften für alle Serien/Wichtige Erläuter ungenSic her hei tshi nweis e - Übersc hrift 2 @ 6\mod_1260180299987_21.doc x @ 46724 @ 2 @ 1
For installing and operating purposes of the relevant device to your system the
following safety precautions shall be observed:
Pos : 17.10.1 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/Wichtige Erläuter ungen/Sic herheits hinweise/Gefahr /Gefahr: Nicht an Geräten unter Spannung ar beiten! @ 6\mod_1260180365327_21.doc x @ 46727 @ @ 1
Pos : 17.10.4 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/Wichtige Erläuter ungen/Sic herheits hinweise/Gefahr /Gefahr: Auf normg erec hten Ansc hluss ac hten! @ 6\mod_1260180753479_21.doc x @ 46739 @ @ 1
Pos : 17.11.1 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/Wichtige Erläuter ungen/Sic herheits hinweise/Ac htung/Ac htung: Defekte oder besc hädigte Ger äte aus tausc hen! @ 6\mod_1260180857358_21.doc x @ 46743 @ @ 1
720
Do not use any contact spray!
Do not use any contact spray. The spray may impair contact area functionality in
connection with contamination.
Pos : 17.11.5 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/Wichtige Erläuter ungen/Sic herheits hinweise/Ac htung/Ac htung: Verpol ung ver mei den! @ 6\mod_1260184045744_21.doc x @ 46767 @ @ 1
721
Pos : 19 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Gerätebesc hreibung/Gerätebeschr eibung - Übersc hrift 1 @ 3\mod_1233756084656_21.doc x @ 27096 @ 1 @ 1
3 Device Description
Pos : 20.1 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Ei nlei tung/Anwendung/DI/Anwendung 750- x4xx D I @ 3\mod_1233762736718_21.doc x @ 27108 @ @ 1
The digital input module 750-430 (8DI 24V DC, 3.0ms) receives control signals
from digital field (e.g. of sensors, transmitters, switches or proximity switches).
Pos : 20.2 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Ei nlei tung/I/O-Besc hrei bung/DI/I/O-Besc hrei bung 750-04xx 8 D I 1-Leiter @ 4\mod_1235647033390_21.doc x @ 27844 @ @ 1
The I/O module has 8 input channels, providing a direct connection to 1-wire
sensors.
The sensors are connected to the following CAGE CLAMP® connectors:
DI 1 … DI 8.
Pos : 20.3 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Sicherheits hinweis e/HinweisHi nweis : DI Potential ver vielfältigungs module für Sens or versorgung eins etz en @ 3\mod_1233762069125_21.doc x @ 27105 @ @ 1
Each input channel has a RC noise rejection filter with a time constant of 3.0 ms.
Pos : 20.7 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Ei nlei tung/I/O-Besc hrei bung/DI/I/O-Besc hrei bung 750- x4xx DI HSS / positi vs chaltend ( 24 V) @ 3\mod_1233831724648_21.doc x @ 27231 @ @ 1
The I/O module inputs provide high-side switching. If the 24 V potential for field
power is switched to an input connection, the signal status for the corresponding
input channel is set to “high”.
Pos : 20.8 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Ei nlei tung/LED-Anz eige/LED Zustand Signal @ 3\mod_1233755258578_21.doc x @ 27087 @ @ 1
The I/O module 750-430 (8DI 24V DC, 3.0ms) receives the 24 V voltage supply
for the field level from an upstream I/O module or from the fieldbus
coupler/controller via blade-formed power jumper contacts. It then provides these
potentials to subsequent I/O modules via spring-formed power jumper contacts.
Pos : 20.11 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Wichtig e Erl äuter ung en/Sic her hei ts- und s onstige Hinweise/Ac htung/Ac htung: Maxi maler Str om Leis tungs kontakte 10 A @ 3\mod_1226499143500_21.doc x @ 25029 @ @ 1
722
The field voltage and the system voltage are electrically isolated from each other.
Pos : 20.14 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Gerätebeschr eibung/Ei nleitung/Versorgung/Anordnung unter Ber üc ksic htigung der Leistungs kontakte beliebig @ 3\mod_1233756233468_21.doc x @ 27099 @ @ 1
With consideration of the power jumper contacts, the individual modules can be
arranged in any combination when configuring the fieldbus node. An arrangement
in groups within the group of potentials is not necessary.
Pos : 20.15 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Gerätebeschr eibung/Ei nleitung/Einsatzbereic h/Einsatzbereic h 750- xxxx alle Koppler/C ontroll er ohne Ei nsc hränkung @ 3\mod_1232541691906_21.doc x @ 26522 @ @ 1
The I/O module 750-430 can be used with all fieldbus couplers/controllers of the
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750.
Pos : 21 /D okumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/---Seitenwechs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
723
Pos : 22 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Gerätebesc hreibung/Ansic ht - Ü berschrift 2 @ 4\mod_1240984217343_21.doc x @ 31958 @ 2 @ 1
3.1 View
Pos : 23 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Ansic ht/Digitalei ngangs klemmen/Ansic ht 750- 0430 @ 16\mod_1379488856555_21.doc x @ 131735 @ @ 1
Figure 1: View
Pos : 24 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Ansic ht/Ansic ht C ageCl amp® _Leg ende mit LED s @ 15\mod_1370867188922_21.doc x @ 122225 @ @ 1
724
Pos : 26 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Gerätebesc hreibung/Ansc hlüsse - Übersc hrift 2 @ 4\mod_1240984262656_21.doc x @ 31961 @ 2 @ 1
3.2 Connectors
Pos : 27 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Ansc hl üss e/Datenkontakte/Kl emmenbus - Ü bersc hrift 3 @ 6\mod_1256294684083_21.doc x @ 43660 @ 3 @ 1
725
Pos : 30 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Ansc hl üss e/Leistungs kontakte/F el dvers orgung - Übersc hrift 3 @ 6\mod_1256294692864_21.doc x @ 43664 @ 3 @ 1
The I/O module 750-430 has 2 self-cleaning power jumper contacts that supply
and transmit power for the field side. The contacts on the left side of the I/O
module are designed as blade contacts and those on the right side as spring
contacts.
Pos : 31.3 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Ansc hl üsse/Leistungs kontakte 2 LK (Mess er/Leis tungs kontakte 2 LK (Messer /Feder) - Abbil dung, einfac he Breite - Standard @ 15\mod_1367500700037_21.doc x @ 118396 @ @ 1
Pos : 31.5 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Sicherheits- und sonstig e Hinweis e/Achtung/Achtung: M axi mal er Strom Leistungs kontakte 10 A @ 3\mod_1226499143500_21.doc x @ 25029 @ @ 1
726
Use supply modules for ground (earth)!
The I/O module has no power jumper contacts for receiving and transmitting the
earth potential. Use a supply module when an earth potential is needed for the
subsequent I/O modules.
Pos : 32 /D okumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/---Seitenwechs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
727
Pos : 33 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Ansc hl üss e/CAGE CLAMP- Anschl üss e - Ü berschrift 3 @ 6\mod_1256296337770_21.doc x @ 43674 @ 3 @ 1
728
Pos : 36 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Gerätebesc hreibung/Anz eigeel emente - Übersc hrift 2 @ 4\mod_1240984390875_21.doc x @ 31964 @ 2 @ 1
729
Pos : 39 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Gerätebesc hreibung/Sc hematisches Sc haltbil d - Ü bersc hrift 2 @ 4\mod_1240984441312_21.doc x @ 31967 @ 2 @ 1
730
Pos : 42 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Gerätebesc hreibung/Technisc he Daten - Ü berschrift 2 @ 3\mod_1232967587687_21.doc x @ 26924 @ 2 @ 1
3.5.1 Device
Table 8: Technical Data – Device
Width 12 mm
Height (from upper edge of 35 DIN rail) 64 mm
Depth 100 mm
Weight Approx. 49 g
3.5.2 Supply
Table 9: Technical Data – Supply
Current consumption (internal) 17 mA
Voltage via power jumper contacts 24 VDC (−25 % … +30 %)
Isolation (peak value) 500 V system/field
3.5.3 Communication
Table 10: Technical Data – Communication
Internal bit width (terminal bus) 8 bits in
3.5.4 Inputs
Table 11: Technical Data – Inputs
No. of inputs 8
Signal voltage (0) −3 VDC … + 5 VDC
Signal voltage (1) 15 VDC … 30 VDC
Input filter 3.0 ms
Input current (typ.) 2.8 mA
Pos : 44.1 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Module)/Ü bers chriften für alle Serien/Gerätebesc hreibung/Ansc hlus stechni k - Ü berschrift 3 @ 17\mod_1380123271324_21.doc x @ 132788 @ 3 @ 1
731
Pos : 45 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/T echnisc he Daten/Kli matische U mg ebungs bedi ngungen/Technisc he Daten Klimat. U mgebungs bed. mi t erw. T emp. -20...+60°C /-40...+85°C für /025 @ 5\mod_1247658089120_21.doc x @ 37606 @ 3 @ 1
732
Pos : 47 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Gerätebesc hreibung/Zul ass ungen - Übersc hrift 2 @ 3\mod_1224055364109_21.doc x @ 24030 @ 2 @ 1
3.6 Approvals
Pos : 48 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Z ulass ungen/Allgemei n/Z ulass ungen Bus kl emme 750- xxxx Allgemein, Standardversi on und all e Vari anten - Einl eitung @ 3\mod_1233911570312_21.doc x @ 27390 @ @ 1
The following approvals have been granted to the basic version and all variants of
750-430 I/O modules:
Pos : 49.1 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Dokumente) ( Allgemei ne Module)/Z ulassungen/Standardz ulassungen/C E (Konformi täts kennz eichnung) @ 3\mod_1224494777421_21.doc x @ 24276 @ @ 1
Conformity Marking
Pos : 49.2 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Dokumente) ( Allgemei ne Module)/Z ulassungen/Standardz ulassungen/cU Lus (U L508) @ 3\mod_1224055013140_0.doc x @ 24020 @ @ 1
CULUS UL508
Pos : 49.3 /Dokumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/------Leerz eile------ @ 3\mod_1224662755687_0.doc x @ 24460 @ @ 1
Pos : 50 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Z ulassungen/Standardz ulassungenKC - Kor ea C ertific ate - D I @ 20\mod_1406291677193_21.doc x @ 160334 @ @ 1
The following Ex approvals have been granted to the basic version and all
variants of 750-430 I/O modules:
Pos : 52.1 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Module)/Z ulassungen/Ex-Zul ass ungen/TÜV AT EX/TÜ V 07 AT EX 554086 X: I M 2 Ex d I M b II 3 G Ex nA IIC T 4 Gc II 3 D Ex tc IIIC T135°C Dc @ 14\mod_1361949753233_0.doc x @ 113015 @ @ 1
Pos : 53 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Z ulass ungen/Ex/Z ulas sungen Bus kl emme 750- xxxx Ex, nur Standardversion - Einl eitung @ 9\mod_1281526321376_21.doc x @ 63104 @ @ 1
The following Ex approvals have been granted to the basic version of 750-430 I/O
modules:
Pos : 54 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Z ulassungen/Ex-Z ulass ungen/Sonstige/Br asilian Ex TU EV 12.1297 X Ex nA IIC T 4 Gc @ 16\mod_1379922057421_0.doc x @ 132410 @ @ 1
Pos : 56 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Z ulass ungen/Infor mation: Weitere Infor mationen zu Zul ass ungen 750- xxxx @ 3\mod_1227190967156_21.doc x @ 25221 @ @ 1
733
The following ship approvals have been granted to the variations 750-430 listed
below:
Pos : 58 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Z ulass ungen/Schiff/Z ulas sungen Bus klemme 750-0400/-430 Sc hiff, T abellarisc he Ü bersic ht @ 16\mod_1379574156154_0.doc x @ 132010 @ @ 1
750-430 x x x x x x x x x x
750-430
x x
/025-000
Pos : 59.1 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Dokumente) ( Allgemei ne Module)/Z ulassungen/Sc hiffsz ul ass ungen/ABS ( Americ an Bureau of Shi ppi ng) @ 3\mod_1224055151062_0.doc x @ 24023 @ @ 1
BV (Bureau Veritas)
Pos : 59.4 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Dokumente) ( Allgemei ne Module)/Z ulassungen/Sc hiffsz ul ass ungen/DN V (D et N ors ke Veritas) Cl ass B @ 3\mod_1224492540562_0.doc x @ 24224 @ @ 1
734
Pos : 61 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Gerätebesc hreibung/Nor men und Ric htlini en - Übersc hrift 2 @ 4\mod_1242804031875_21.doc x @ 33646 @ 2 @ 1
735
Pos : 68 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/__ noc h nic ht ei ns ortierte Ü berschriften müss en noc h eins orti ert werden __/Proz ess abbil d - Ü bersc hrift 1 @ 4\mod_1240983067828_21.doc x @ 31942 @ 1 @ 1
4 Process Image
Pos : 69 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Proz ess abbild Kl emmenbus /Digitalei ngangs klemmen/Pr oz ess abbild 750- x4xx 08 D I @ 4\mod_1236259340906_21.doc x @ 28020 @ @ 1
736
Pos : 71 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Monti eren/M ontier en - Übersc hrift 1 @ 3\mod_1225446744750_21.doc x @ 24900 @ 1 @ 1
5 Mounting
Pos : 72.1 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/M ontieren/D emontieren/M ontagerei henfolge @ 3\mod_1231770210031_21.doc x @ 25992 @ 2 @ 1
The reliable positioning and connection is made using a tongue and groove
system. Due to the automatic locking, the individual devices are securely seated
on the rail after installation.
Starting with the fieldbus coupler/controller, the I/O modules are mounted
adjacent to each other according to the project design. Errors in the design of the
node in terms of the potential groups (connection via the power contacts) are
recognized, as the I/O modules with power contacts (blade contacts) cannot be
linked to I/O modules with fewer power contacts.
Pos : 72.2 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Sicherheits- und sonstig e Hinweis e/Vorsic ht/Vorsicht: Verl etz ungsgefahr durc h s charfkantige M ess er kontakte! @ 6\mod_1256193279401_21.doc x @ 43414 @ @ 1
737
Pos : 72.6 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/M ontieren/D emontieren/Geräte einfüg en und entfer nen - Ü berschrift 2 @ 3\mod_1231768483250_21.doc x @ 25950 @ 2 @ 1
738
Pos : 72.10 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Monti eren/D emonti eren/Bus kl emme entfer nen @ 4\mod_1239169375203_21.doc x @ 30334 @ 3 @ 1
739
Pos : 74 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Ansc hließ en/Ger äte ansc hließen - Ü bers chrift 1 @ 3\mod_1234172889468_21.doc x @ 27460 @ 1 @ 1
6 Connect Devices
Pos : 75 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ans chli eßen/Leiter an C AGE C LAM P ans chli eßen ( allgemei n) - Übersc hrift 2 und Text @ 3\mod_1225448660171_21.doc x @ 24928 @ 2 @ 1
If more than one conductor must be routed to one connection, these must be
connected in an up-circuit wiring assembly, for example using WAGO feed-
through terminals.
Exception:
If it is unavoidable to jointly connect 2 conductors, then you must use a ferrule to
join the wires together. The following ferrules can be used:
Length: 8 mm
Nominal cross section max.: 1 mm2 for 2 conductors with 0.5 mm2 each
WAGO product: 216-103 or products with comparable properties
1. For opening the CAGE CLAMP® insert the actuating tool into the opening
above the connection.
3. For closing the CAGE CLAMP® simply remove the tool. The conductor is
now clamped firmly in place.
740
Pos : 77.1 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Module)/Eins atz in Ex- Ber eichen/Eins atz in explosionsgefährdeten Bereic hen - Übersc hrift 1 @ 3\mod_1224075191281_21.doc x @ 24084 @ 1 @ 1
741
Pos : 77.4 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Eins atz in Ex- Ber eichen/Beis piel hafter Aufbau der Kennz eic hnung - Übersc hrift 2 @ 3\mod_1224157499140_21.doc x @ 24182 @ 2 @ 1
Figure 11: Side Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According to ATEX and IECEx
Figure 12: Text Detail – Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According to ATEX and
IECEx.
742
Table 17: Description of Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According to ATEX and
IECEx
Printing on Text Description
TÜV 07 ATEX 554086 X Approving authority and certificate numbers
IECEx TUN 09.0001 X
Dust
II Equipment group: All except mining
3D Category 3 (Zone 22)
Ex Explosion protection mark
tc Dc Type of protection and equipment protection
level (EPL):protection by enclosure
IIIC Explosion group of dust
T 135°C Max. surface temperature of the enclosure
(without a dust layer)
Mining
I Equipment group: Mining
M2 Category: High level of protection
Ex Explosion protection mark
d Mb Type of protection and equipment protection
level (EPL): Flameproof enclosure
I Explosion group for electrical equipment for
mines susceptible to firedamp
Gases
II Equipment group: All except mining
3G Category 3 (Zone 2)
Ex Explosion protection mark
nA Gc Type of protection and equipment protection
level (EPL): Non-sparking equipment
nC Gc Type of protection and equipment protection
level (EPL): Sparking apparatus with protected
contacts. A device which is so constructed that
the external atmosphere cannot gain access to the
interior
IIC Explosion group of gas and vapours
T4 Temperature class: Max. surface temperature
135°C
Pos : 77.7 /Dokumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/---Seitenwechs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
743
Pos : 77.8 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Eins atz in Ex- Ber eichen/Beis piel bedruc kung der Ex-i- und IEC-Ex-i-zug elas senen Bus klemmen gemäß C ENELEC und IEC _2013 @ 14\mod_1360569320118_21.doc x @ 111298 @ @ 1
Figure 13: Side Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Modules According to ATEX and
IECEx.
Figure 14: Text Detail – Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Modules According to ATEX
and IECEx.
744
Table 18: Description of Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Modules According to ATEX and
IECEx
Inscription Text Description
TÜV 07 ATEX 554086 X Approving authority and certificate numbers
IECEx TUN 09.0001X
745
Table 18: Description of Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Modules According to ATEX and
IECEx
Gases
II Equipment group: All except mining
3(1)G Category 3 (Zone 2) equipment containing a safety
device for a category 1 (Zone 0) equipment
3(2)G Category 3 (Zone 2) equipment containing a safety
device for a category 2 (Zone 1) equipment
Ex Explosion protection mark
nA Gc Type of protection and equipment protection level
(EPL): Non-sparking equipment
[ia Ga] Type of protection and equipment protection level
(EPL): associated apparatus with intrinsic safety
circuits for use in Zone 0
[ia Gb] Type of protection and equipment protection level
(EPL): associated apparatus with intrinsic safety
circuits for use in Zone 1
IIC Explosion group of gas and vapours
T4 Temperature class: Max. surface temperature 135°C
Pos : 77.9 /Dokumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/---Seitenwechs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
746
Pos : 77.10 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ei ns atz i n Ex-Bereic hen/Kennz eichnung für Ameri ka gemäß N EC 500 - Übersc hrift 3 @ 3\mod_1224158423187_21.doc x @ 24188 @ 3 @ 1
Figure 15: Side Marking Example for I/O Modules According to NEC 500
Figure 16: Text Detail – Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According to NEC 500
Table 19: Description of Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According to NEC 500
Printing on Text Description
CL I Explosion protection group (condition of use
category)
DIV 2 Area of application
Grp. ABCD Explosion group (gas group)
Op temp code T4 Temperature class
Pos : 77.12 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
747
Pos : 77.13 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine M odul e)/Ei ns atz i n Ex-Bereic hen/Errichtungsbes timmungen - Ü bersc hrift 2 @ 3\mod_1232453624234_21.doc x @ 26370 @ 2 @ 1
For the installation and operation of electrical equipment in hazardous areas, the
valid national and international rules and regulations which are applicable at the
installation location must be carefully followed.
Pos : 77.15 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
748
Pos : 77.16 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ei ns atz i n Ex-Bereic hen/Besonder e Beding ung en für den sic her en Ex- Betrieb gem. AT EX-Z ertifi kat TÜV 07 ATEX 554086_X_2013_2 @ 15\mod_1368620071975_21.doc x @ 119778 @ 3 @ 1
749
Pos : 77.18 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ei ns atz i n Ex-Bereic hen/Besonder e Beding ung en für den sic her en Ex- Betrieb gem. AT EX-Z ertifi kat TÜV 12 ATEX 106032x_2013_2 @ 15\mod_1368620479454_21.doc x @ 119782 @ 3 @ 1
750
Pos : 77.20 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ei ns atz i n Ex-Bereic hen/Besonder e Beding ung en für den sic her en Ex- Betrieb gem. IEC-Ex-Z ertifi kat TUN 09.0001 X_2013_2 @ 15\mod_1368620660911_21.doc x @ 119786 @ 3 @ 1
751
Pos : 77.22 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ei ns atz i n Ex-Bereic hen/Besonder e Beding ung en für den sic her en Ex- Betrieb gem. IEC-Ex-Z ertifi kat TUN 12.0039 X_2013_2 @ 15\mod_1368620821493_21.doc x @ 119790 @ 3 @ 1
752
Pos : 77.24 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ei ns atz i n Ex-Bereic hen/Errichtungsbesti mmung en AN SI ISA 12.12.01_2013_2 @ 15\mod_1368620942842_21.doc x @ 119794 @ 3 @ 1
Pos : 77.26 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/------Leerz eile------ @ 3\mod_1224662755687_0.doc x @ 24460 @ @ 1
Pos : 77.27 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/------Leerz eile------ @ 3\mod_1224662755687_0.doc x @ 24460 @ @ 1
Pos : 77.28 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ei ns atz i n Ex-Bereic hen/Infor mati on: Zer tifizier ungs nachweis @ 7\mod_1274279547729_21.doc x @ 56649 @ @ 1
Additional Information
Proof of certification is available on request.
Also take note of the information given on the operating and assembly
instructions.
The manual, containing these special conditions for safe use, must be readily
available to the user.
=== Ende der Liste für T extmar ke Inhalt_mitte ===
753
Pos : 79 /D okumentation allgemei n/Verz eic hniss e/Abbil dungs verz eic hnis - Übersc hrift oG und Verz eichnis @ 3\mod_1219222916765_21.doc x @ 21080 @ @ 1
List of Figures
Figure 1: View ....................................................................................................... 15
Figure 2: Data Contacts ......................................................................................... 16
Figure 3: Power Jumper Contacts ......................................................................... 17
Figure 4: CAGE CLAMP® Connectors................................................................. 19
Figure 5: Display Elements ................................................................................... 20
Figure 6: Schematic diagram ................................................................................. 21
Figure 7: Insert I/O Module (Example) ................................................................. 29
Figure 8: Snap the I/O Module into Place (Example) ........................................... 29
Figure 9: Removing the I/O Module (Example) ................................................... 30
Figure 10: Connecting a Conductor to a CAGE CLAMP® ................................... 31
Figure 11: Side Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According to
ATEX and IECEx ........................................................................................ 33
Figure 12: Text Detail – Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According
to ATEX and IECEx. ................................................................................... 33
Figure 13: Side Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Modules According to
ATEX and IECEx. ....................................................................................... 35
Figure 14: Text Detail – Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Modules
According to ATEX and IECEx. ................................................................. 35
Figure 15: Side Marking Example for I/O Modules According to NEC 500 ....... 38
Figure 16: Text Detail – Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According
to NEC 500 .................................................................................................. 38
754
Pos : 81 /D okumentation allgemei n/Verz eic hniss e/Tabell enverz eichnis - Übersc hrift oG und Verz eichnis @ 3\mod_1219222958703_21.doc x @ 21084 @ @ 1
List of Tables
Table 1: Variants ..................................................................................................... 5
Table 2: Number Notation ....................................................................................... 8
Table 3: Font Conventions ...................................................................................... 8
Table 4: Legend for Figure “View” ...................................................................... 15
Table 5: Legend for Figure “Power Jumper Contacts” ......................................... 17
Table 6: Legend for Figure “CAGE CLAMP® Connectors” ................................ 19
Table 7: Legend for Figure “Display Elements” ................................................... 20
Table 8: Technical Data – Device ......................................................................... 22
Table 9: Technical Data – Supply ......................................................................... 22
Table 10: Technical Data – Communication ......................................................... 22
Table 11: Technical Data – Inputs ........................................................................ 22
Table 12: Technical Data – Field Wiring .............................................................. 22
Table 13: Technical Data – Power Jumper Contacts ............................................ 22
Table 14: Technical Data – Data Contacts ............................................................ 22
Table 15: Technical Data – Climatic Environmental Conditions ......................... 23
Table 16: Input Bits ............................................................................................... 27
Table 17: Description of Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According
to ATEX and IECEx .................................................................................... 34
Table 18: Description of Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Modules
According to ATEX and IECEx .................................................................. 36
Table 19: Description of Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According
to NEC 500 .................................................................................................. 38
=== Ende der Liste für T extmar ke Verzeic hnis_hi nten ===
755
Pos : 83 /D okumentation allgemei n/Einband/Einband H andbuc h - Leers eite für durc h 2 teilbar e Seitenzahl (Standar ddr uc k) @ 3\mod_1219230851078_0.doc x @ 21123 @ @ 1
756
Pos : 84 /D okumentation allgemei n/Einband/Einband H andbuc h - R üc kseite 2015 @ 9\mod_1285229376516_21.doc x @ 64944 @ @ 1
757
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Pos : 2 /D okumentati on allgemein/Ei nband/Ei nband H andbuch - Fronts eite 2015 - mit Doc Variabl en (Standar d) @ 9\mod_1285229289866_0.doc x @ 64941 @ @ 1
Manual
750-494(/xxx-xxx)
3-Phase Power Measurement Module
Version 1.1.0
Pos : 3 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine M odul e)/Hinweise z ur Dokumentation/Impres sum für Standardhandbüc her - allg. Angaben, Ansc hriften, Tel efonnummer n und E-Mail-Adres sen @ 3\mod_1219151118203_21.doc x @ 21060 @ @ 1
758
© 2015 by WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG
All rights reserved.
Hansastraße 27
D-32423 Minden
E-Mail: info@wago.com
Web: http://www.wago.com
Technical Support
E-Mail: support@wago.com
Every conceivable measure has been taken to ensure the accuracy and
completeness of this documentation. However, as errors can never be fully
excluded, we always appreciate any information or suggestions for improving the
documentation.
E-Mail: documentation@wago.com
We wish to point out that the software and hardware terms as well as the
trademarks of companies used and/or mentioned in the present manual are
generally protected by trademark or patent.
=== Ende der Liste für T extmar ke Ei nband_vorne ===
759
Pos : 5 /D okumentati on allgemein/Verzeic hnisse/Inhalts verz eichnis - Ü berschrift oG und Verzei chnis @ 3\mod_1219151230875_21.doc x @ 21063 @ @ 1
Table of Contents
1 Notes about this Documentation ................................................................. 6
1.1 Validity of this Documentation ................................................................. 6
1.2 Revision History........................................................................................ 6
1.3 Copyright................................................................................................... 7
1.4 Symbols ..................................................................................................... 8
1.5 Number Notation ..................................................................................... 10
1.6 Font Conventions .................................................................................... 10
2 Important Notes ......................................................................................... 11
2.1 Legal Bases ............................................................................................. 11
2.1.1 Subject to Changes ............................................................................. 11
2.1.2 Personnel Qualifications ..................................................................... 11
2.1.3 Use of the WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 in Compliance with Underlying
Provisions ........................................................................................... 11
2.1.4 Technical Condition of Specified Devices ......................................... 12
2.2 Safety Advice (Precautions) .................................................................... 13
3 Device Description ..................................................................................... 15
3.1 View ........................................................................................................ 16
3.2 Connectors............................................................................................... 17
3.2.1 Data Contacts/Internal Bus ................................................................. 17
3.2.2 Power Jumper Contacts/Field Supply ................................................ 17
3.2.3 CAGE CLAMP® Connectors ............................................................. 18
3.3 Display Elements .................................................................................... 19
3.4 Operating Elements ................................................................................. 19
3.5 Schematic Diagram ................................................................................. 20
3.6 Technical Data ........................................................................................ 22
3.6.1 Dimensions and Weight ..................................................................... 22
3.6.2 Voltage Supply ................................................................................... 22
3.6.3 Measuring Inputs ................................................................................ 22
3.6.4 Measured Values ................................................................................ 23
3.6.5 Internal Bus Communication .............................................................. 24
3.6.6 Connection Type ................................................................................ 24
3.6.7 Climatic Environmental Conditions ................................................... 25
3.7 Approvals ................................................................................................ 26
3.8 Standards and Guidelines ........................................................................ 27
4 Function Description ................................................................................. 28
4.1 Measuring Principle ................................................................................ 28
4.2 Measured Values ..................................................................................... 28
4.3 Description of Measured Values ............................................................. 30
4.4 Measuring Errors and Accuracy.............................................................. 37
5 Process Image ............................................................................................. 39
5.1 Overview of Process Data ....................................................................... 39
5.2 Output Data ............................................................................................. 40
5.2.1 Definition of Control Words .............................................................. 40
5.2.2 Definition of Output Data Words ....................................................... 41
5.3 Input Data ................................................................................................ 42
760
5.3.1 Definition of Status Words ................................................................. 42
5.3.2 Definition of Input Data Words .......................................................... 45
5.4 Process Image Descriptions .................................................................... 48
5.4.1 Building-up the Measured Values ...................................................... 53
5.5 Collections of Measured Values ............................................................. 54
5.5.1 Collection 007 – DC Measured Values .............................................. 54
5.5.2 Collection 009 – AC Measured Values .............................................. 54
5.5.3 Collection 020 – Harmonics Analysis L1 .......................................... 59
5.5.4 Collection 021 – Harmonics Analysis L2 .......................................... 60
5.5.5 Collection 022 – Harmonics Analysis L3 .......................................... 61
5.6 Examples of Calculating the Measured Values from the process values 62
6 Mounting..................................................................................................... 66
6.1 Mounting Sequence ................................................................................. 66
6.2 Inserting and Removing Devices ............................................................ 67
6.2.1 Inserting the I/O Module .................................................................... 67
6.2.2 Removing the I/O Module .................................................................. 68
7 Connect Devices ......................................................................................... 69
7.1 Connecting a Conductor to the CAGE CLAMP® ................................... 69
7.2 Voltage Measurement ............................................................................. 70
7.3 Current Measurement .............................................................................. 71
7.3.1 Current Measurement on a Motor ...................................................... 71
7.3.2 Current Transformers ......................................................................... 72
7.3.2.1 Accuracy ........................................................................................ 72
7.3.2.2 Types of Current ............................................................................ 72
7.3.2.3 Overcurrent Limiting Factor FS .................................................... 72
7.3.2.4 Protection against Shock Hazard Voltages .................................... 73
7.3.3 Additional Measuring Instruments in the Current Path ...................... 74
7.4 Power Measurement ................................................................................ 75
7.4.1 Power Measurement on a Machine .................................................... 75
7.4.2 Power Measurement on Two Motors Regulated by Frequency
Converters........................................................................................... 75
8 Commissioning ........................................................................................... 78
8.1 Configuration with WAGO-I/O-CHECK ............................................... 79
8.1.1 “Application“ Tab .............................................................................. 82
8.1.2 "Phase L1”, “Phase L2”, “Phase L3” Tabs ........................................ 83
8.1.3 “I/O Module“ Tab............................................................................... 84
8.1.4 “Energy“ Tab ...................................................................................... 86
8.1.5 "Factory Settings" Tab ....................................................................... 87
8.2 Displaying the Measured Values via WAGO-I/O-CHECK .................... 88
9 Diagnostics .................................................................................................. 98
10 Appendix ..................................................................................................... 99
10.1 Examples of CSV Data Files................................................................... 99
10.1.1 Snapshot ............................................................................................. 99
10.1.2 CSV Data File „Measurement Recording“....................................... 103
10.2 Factory Settings ..................................................................................... 104
10.3 Register Assignment ............................................................................. 106
10.4 Parameter Assignment .......................................................................... 112
761
11 Use in Hazardous Environments ............................................................ 118
11.1 Marking Configuration Examples ......................................................... 119
11.1.1 Marking for Europe According to ATEX and IEC-Ex .................... 119
11.1.2 Marking for America According to NEC 500 .................................. 124
11.2 Installation Regulations ......................................................................... 125
11.2.1 Special Conditions for Safe Use (ATEX Certificate TÜV 07 ATEX
554086 X) ......................................................................................... 126
11.2.2 Special Conditions for Safe Use (ATEX Certificate TÜV 12 ATEX
106032 X) ......................................................................................... 127
11.2.3 Special Conditions for Safe Use (IEC-Ex Certificate TUN 09.0001 X)128
11.2.4 Special Conditions for Safe Use (IEC-Ex Certificate IECEx TUN
12.0039 X) ........................................................................................ 129
11.2.5 Special Conditions for Safe Use According to ANSI/ISA 12.12.01 130
List of Figures .................................................................................................... 131
List of Tables ...................................................................................................... 132
762
Pos : 7 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine M odul e)/Übersc hriften für all e Serien/Hi nweis e zur D okumentati on/Hinweise z u dies er D okumentation - Ü berschrift 1 @ 4\mod_1237987661750_21.doc x @ 29029 @ 1 @ 1
This documentation is only applicable to the I/O module 750-494 (3-Phase Power
Measurement Module) and the variants listed in the table below.
Pos : 11 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Hi nweis e z ur D okumentati on/Gültigkeits bereic h/Variantenlisten/Variantenliste - 750- 494 - Standardversionen 1A+5A und er w.T emp. /025- @ 15\mod_1366726767706_21.doc x @ 117720 @ @ 1
Table 1: Variants
Item Number Description
750-494 3-Phase Power Measurement Module 1 A
750-494/000-001 3-Phase Power Measurement Module 5 A
750-494/025-000 3-Phase Power Measurement Module 1 A,
Operating temperature -20 °C … +60 °C
750-494/025-001 3-Phase Power Measurement Module 5A,
Operating temperature -20 °C … +60 °C
Pos : 12 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Hi nweis e zur D okumentati on/Hinweise/Hinweis: Gültig keit der Angaben für aufg elistete Varianten @ 9\mod_1281520778141_21.doc x @ 63085 @ @ 1
The I/O module 750-494 shall only be installed and operated according to the
instructions in this manual and in the manual for the used fieldbus
coupler/controller.
763
Table 2: Revision History
Document Device Version
Version Hardware Software Description of Change
1.0.0 01 02 First issue
1.0.1 01 02 In section „Commissioning“ >
„Displaying the Measured Values via
WAGO-I/O-CHECK“ the figure
„Measured values, harmonics chart“ was
changed.
1.1.0 01 02 Change of approvals
Pos : 16.1 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Module)/Hi nweis e zur D okumentati on/Urhebersc hutz ausführlich @ 4\mod_1235565145234_21.doc x @ 27691 @ 2 @ 1
1.3 Copyright
This Manual, including all figures and illustrations, is copyright-protected. Any
further use of this Manual by third parties that violate pertinent copyright
provisions is prohibited. Reproduction, translation, electronic and phototechnical
filing/archiving (e.g., photocopying) as well as any amendments require the
written consent of WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG, Minden, Germany.
Non-observance will involve the right to assert damage claims.
Pos : 16.2 /Dokumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/---Seitenwechs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
764
Pos : 16.3 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Module)/Ü bers chriften für alle Serien/Hinweis e z ur Dokumentation/Symbol e - Ü bersc hrift 2 @ 13\mod_1351068042408_21.doc x @ 105270 @ 2 @ 1
1.4 Symbols
Pos : 16.4.1 /All e Serien ( Allgemei ne Module)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Sicherheits- und sons tige Hinweis e/Gefahr/Gefahr: _War nung vor Personenschäden allgemei n_ - Erl äuter ung @ 13\mod_1343309450020_21.doc x @ 101029 @ @ 1
Personal Injury!
Indicates a high-risk, imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
Pos : 16.4.2 /All e Serien ( Allgemei ne Module)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Sicherheits- und sons tige Hinweis e/Gefahr/Gefahr: _War nung vor Personenschäden durc h elektrisc hen Strom_ - Erläuterung @ 13\mod_1343309694914_21.doc x @ 101030 @ @ 1
Personal Injury!
Indicates a moderate-risk, potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious injury.
Pos : 16.4.4 /All e Serien ( Allgemei ne Module)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Sicherheits- und sons tige Hinweis e/Vorsic ht/Vorsicht: _War nung vor Pers onensc häden allgemein_ - Erläuterung @ 13\mod_1343310028762_21.doc x @ 101038 @ @ 1
Personal Injury!
Indicates a low-risk, potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may
result in minor or moderate injury.
Pos : 16.4.5 /All e Serien ( Allgemei ne Module)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Sicherheits- und sons tige Hinweis e/Achtung/Achtung: _War nung vor Sac hsc häden allgemein_ - Erläuterung @ 13\mod_1343310134623_21.doc x @ 101041 @ @ 1
Damage to Property!
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in
damage to property.
Pos : 16.4.6 /All e Serien ( Allgemei ne Module)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Sicherheits- und sons tige Hinweis e/Achtung/Achtung: _War nung vor Sac hsc häden durc h elektr ostatis che Aufladung_ - Erläuterung @ 13\mod_1343310227702_21.doc x @ 101044 @ @ 1
Important Note!
Indicates a potential malfunction which, if not avoided, however, will not result in
damage to property.
Pos : 16.4.8 /All e Serien ( Allgemei ne Module)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Sicherheits- und sons tige Hinweis e/Infor mation/Infor mation: _Weiter e Infor mation allgemei n_ - Erl äuter ung @ 13\mod_1343310439814_21.doc x @ 101051 @ @ 1
765
Additional Information:
Refers to additional information which is not an integral part of this
documentation (e.g., the Internet).
Pos : 16.5 /Dokumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/---Seitenwechs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
766
Pos : 16.6 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Module)/Hi nweis e zur D okumentati on/Zahlens ysteme @ 3\mod_1221059454015_21.doc x @ 21711 @ 2 @ 1
Pos : 16.7 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Module)/Hi nweis e zur D okumentati on/Sc hriftkonventi onen @ 3\mod_1221059521437_21.doc x @ 21714 @ 2 @ 1
767
Pos : 18 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Wichtige Erläuterungen/Wichtige Erläuter ungen - Übersc hrift 1 @ 4\mod_1241428899156_21.doc x @ 32170 @ 1 @ 1
2 Important Notes
Pos : 19.1 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Dokumente) ( Allgemei ne Module)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Wic htige Erläuterungen - Einl eitung @ 3\mod_1221059818031_21.doc x @ 21717 @ @ 1
All changes to the coupler or controller should always be carried out by qualified
personnel with sufficient skills in PLC programming.
Pos : 19.5 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Bes timmungsgemäß e Verwendung Bes ti mmungsgemäße Verwendung 750-xxxx - Ü berschrift 3 und Inhal t @ 3\mod_1224064151234_21.doc x @ 24070 @ 3 @ 1
The devices have been developed for use in an environment that meets the IP20
protection class criteria. Protection against finger injury and solid impurities up to
12.5 mm diameter is assured; protection against water damage is not ensured.
Unless otherwise specified, operation of the devices in wet and dusty
environments is prohibited.
768
Appropriate housing (per 94/9/EG) is required when operating the WAGO-I/O-
SYSTEM 750 in hazardous environments. Please note that a prototype test
certificate must be obtained that confirms the correct installation of the system in
a housing or switch cabinet.
Pos : 19.6 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Dokumente) ( Allgemei ne Module)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/T ec hnis cher Z ustand der Geräte - Übersc hrift 3 und Inhalt @ 3\mod_1221060446109_21.doc x @ 21723 @ 3 @ 1
Please send your request for modified and new hardware or software
configurations directly to WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG.
Pos : 19.7 /Dokumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/---Seitenwechs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
769
Pos : 19.8 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Module)/Ü bers chriften für alle Serien/Wichtige Erläuter ungen/Sic herheits hinweise - Übersc hrift 2 @ 6\mod_1260180299987_21.doc x @ 46724 @ 2 @ 1
For installing and operating purposes of the relevant device to your system the
following safety precautions shall be observed:
Pos : 19.10 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Wichtig e Erl äuter ung en/Sic her hei ts- und s onstige Hinweise/Gefahr/Gefahr: Berührungssc hutz vorsehen 750-0493/0494/Gefahr: Ber ühr ungss chutz vors ehen 750- 0493/0494/0495 @ 15\mod_1366120208015_21.doc x @ 117160 @ @ 1
Pos : 19.11.1 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/Wichtige Erläuter ungen/Sic herheits hinweise/Gefahr /Gefahr: Nicht an Geräten unter Spannung ar beiten! @ 6\mod_1260180365327_21.doc x @ 46727 @ @ 1
Pos : 19.11.4 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/Wichtige Erläuter ungen/Sic herheits hinweise/Gefahr /Gefahr: Auf normg erec hten Ansc hluss ac hten! @ 6\mod_1260180753479_21.doc x @ 46739 @ @ 1
Pos : 19.12 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Wichtig e Erl äuter ung en/Sic her hei ts- und s onstige Hinweise/Ac htung/Ac htung: Kein dauer hafter Ei ngangsstrom über 1A bz w.5A 750-0493/0494/Achtung: Kein Eing angss trom über 1A bz w.5A, 750-0493/0494/0495 @ 15\mod_1366120670473_21.doc x @ 117163 @ @ 1
Pos : 19.13.1 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/Wichtige Erläuter ungen/Sic herheits hinweise/Ac htung/Ac htung: Defekte oder besc hädigte Ger äte aus tausc hen! @ 6\mod_1260180857358_21.doc x @ 46743 @ @ 1
770
Protect the components against materials having seeping and insulating
properties!
The components are not resistant to materials having seeping and insulating
properties such as: aerosols, silicones and triglycerides (found in some hand
creams). If you cannot exclude that such materials will appear in the component
environment, then install the components in an enclosure being resistant to the
above-mentioned materials. Clean tools and materials are imperative for handling
devices/modules.
Pos : 19.13.3 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine D okumente) (Allgemeine M odul e)/Wichtige Erläuter ungen/Sic herheits hinweise/Ac htung/Ac htung: Rei nigung nur mit zul ässigen M aterialien! @ 6\mod_1260181203293_21.doc x @ 46751 @ @ 1
771
Pos : 21 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Gerätebesc hreibung/Gerätebeschr eibung - Übersc hrift 1 @ 3\mod_1233756084656_21.doc x @ 27096 @ 1 @ 1
3 Device Description
Pos : 22 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Ei nlei tung/Analogei ngangs klemmen/Gerätebeschr eibung - Ei nleitung 750- 0494 @ 14\mod_1362587768786_21.doc x @ 113861 @ @ 1
The 3-phase power measurement module (also called I/O Module) measures the
electrical data in a 3-phase supply network.
The 3 phase voltages are measured via connection to L1, L2, L3 and N. The
currents are fed to IL1, IL2, IL3 and IN via current transformers. Based on these
input signals the I/O module calculates numerous values like voltages, currents,
powers (active, reactive and apparent), energies, power factors, phase shift angles
and frequencies. Furthermore, an analysis of harmonic waves is carried out up to
the 41st harmonic. The measured values are available in the process image.
Therefore, no high computing power is required from the higher-level controller.
The calculated values indicate whether the load is inductive or capacitive and
whether it consumes or generates energy. For this purpose a 4-quadrant display is
incorporated in WAGO-I/O-CHECK.
The I/O module provides a great number of measured values for a comprehensive
supply network analysis via the fieldbus. By means of the measured values the
operator can regulate the supply to a drive or machine in the best possible way
and protect the installation from damage/failure.
772
Pos : 24 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Gerätebesc hreibung/Ansic ht - Ü berschrift 2 @ 4\mod_1240984217343_21.doc x @ 31958 @ 2 @ 1
3.1 View
Pos : 25 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Ansic ht/Anal ogei ngangskl emmen/Ansicht 750-0494 @ 14\mod_1362654088687_21.doc x @ 113964 @ @ 1
Figure 1: View
Pos : 26 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Ansic ht/Ansic ht C ageCl amp® _Leg ende mit LED s_ohne Leis tungs kontakte @ 16\mod_1371816091053_21.doc x @ 124052 @ @ 1
773
Pos : 28 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Gerätebesc hreibung/Ansc hlüsse - Übersc hrift 2 @ 4\mod_1240984262656_21.doc x @ 31961 @ 2 @ 1
3.2 Connectors
Pos : 29 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Ansc hl üss e/Datenkontakte/Kl emmenbus - Ü bersc hrift 3 @ 6\mod_1256294684083_21.doc x @ 43660 @ 3 @ 1
774
Pos : 34 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Ansc hl üss e/CAGE CLAMP- Anschl üss e - Ü berschrift 3 @ 6\mod_1256296337770_21.doc x @ 43674 @ 3 @ 1
network and the loads are clamped here. See also section “Connect Devices“.
775
Pos : 37 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Gerätebesc hreibung/Anz eigeel emente - Übersc hrift 2 @ 4\mod_1240984390875_21.doc x @ 31964 @ 2 @ 1
Pos : 39 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Gerätebesc hreibung/Bedienel emente - Ü berschrift 2 @ 4\mod_1239191655456_21.doc x @ 30439 @ 2 @ 1
776
Pos : 42 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Gerätebesc hreibung/Sc hematisches Sc haltbil d - Ü bersc hrift 2 @ 4\mod_1240984441312_21.doc x @ 31967 @ 2 @ 1
777
N and IN are shorted!
The connections N and IN are firmly shorted and form the internal reference for
all electrical measurements.
778
Pos : 45 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Gerätebesc hreibung/Technisc he Daten - Ü berschrift 2 @ 3\mod_1232967587687_21.doc x @ 26924 @ 2 @ 1
779
3.6.4 Measured Values
Table 11: Technical Data ‒ Measured Values
Measuring procedure Calculation of true RMS for voltages
and currents, sample rate 8 kHz
synchronous on all 6 measuring inputs,
24 bits resolution
Update cycle of process data
- RMS voltage Lx - N 40 ms
- Min./max. RMS voltage Lx - N 50 ms
- RMS voltage Lx - Ly 340 ms
- Arithmetic mean value voltage Lx - N To be set, 5 ... 900 s
- Peak value voltage Lx - N 200 ms
- RMS current Lx 40 ms
- Min./max. RMS current Lx 50 ms
- Arithmetic mean value current Lx To be set, 5 ... 900 s
- Peak value current Lx 200 ms
- Active power Lx 40 ms
- Min./max. active power Lx 50 ms
- Reactive power Lx 340 ms
- Apparent power Lx 40 ms
- All energy values 400 ms
- Supply network frequency Lx 280 ms
- Min./max. supply network 280 ms
frequency Lx
- Phase angle phi Lx 340 ms
- Power factor cos phi Lx 340 ms
- Power factor PF Lx 280 ms
- Power factor LF Lx 280 ms
- Harmonics analysis
-- Current 260 ms
-- Voltage 260 ms
-- HD/THD current 260 ms
-- HD/THD voltage 260 ms
- DC voltage Lx - N 40 ms
- DC current Lx 40 ms
- Power (DC current) Lx 40 ms
Measuring errors
- AC voltage <= 0.3 % of full-scale value
(<= 0.5 % for 750-494/025-xxx)
- AC current <= 0.5 % of full-scale value
- AC active power <= 0.5 %
- Phase angle +/- 0.3°
- Frequency +/- 0.01 Hz
- Harmonics measured values <= 1%
780
- DC voltage <= 1 % of full-scale value
- DC current <= 1 % of full-scale value
- Power (DC current) <= 1 %
Calculated values Phase-to-phase voltages, powers,
energies, power factors, network
frequencies, harmonics analysis up to
the 41st harmonic
Pos : 46.2 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Module)/Ü bers chriften für alle Serien/Gerätebesc hreibung/Ansc hlus stechni k - Ü berschrift 3 @ 17\mod_1380123271324_21.doc x @ 132788 @ 3 @ 1
781
3.6.7 Climatic Environmental Conditions
Table 15: Technical Data – Climatic Environmental Conditions
Operating temperature range 0 °C … 55 °C
Operating temperature range for −20 °C … +60 °C
components with extended
temperature range (750-xxx/025-xxx)
Storage temperature range −25 °C … +85 °C
Storage temperature range for −40 °C … +85 °C
components with extended
temperature range (750-xxx/025-xxx)
Relative humidity Max. 5 % … 95 % without condensation
Resistance to harmful substances Acc. to IEC 60068-2-42 and
IEC 60068-2-43
Maximum pollutant concentration at SO2 ≤ 25 ppm
relative humidity < 75 % H2S ≤ 10 ppm
Special conditions Ensure that additional measures for
components are taken, which are used in
an environment involving:
– dust, caustic vapors or gases
– ionizing radiation
782
Pos : 48 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Gerätebesc hreibung/Zul ass ungen - Übersc hrift 2 @ 3\mod_1224055364109_21.doc x @ 24030 @ 2 @ 1
3.7 Approvals
Pos : 49 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Z ulass ungen/Allgemei n/Z ulass ungen Bus kl emme 750- xxxx Allgemein, Standardversi on und all e Vari anten - Einl eitung @ 3\mod_1233911570312_21.doc x @ 27390 @ @ 1
The following approvals have been granted to the basic version and all variants of
750-494 I/O modules:
Pos : 50 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Z ulassungen/Standardz ulassungen/C E (Konformi täts kennz eichnung) @ 3\mod_1224494777421_21.doc x @ 24276 @ @ 1
Conformity Marking
Pos : 51 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Z ulassungen/Standardz ulassungen/cU Lus (U L508) @ 3\mod_1224055013140_0.doc x @ 24020 @ @ 1
CULUS UL508
Pos : 52 /D okumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/------Leerz eile------ @ 3\mod_1224662755687_0.doc x @ 24460 @ @ 1
Pos : 53 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Z ulass ungen/Ex/Z ulas sungen Bus kl emme 750- xxxx Ex, nur Standardversion - Einl eitung @ 9\mod_1281526321376_21.doc x @ 63104 @ @ 1
The following Ex approvals have been granted to the basic version of 750-494 I/O
modules:
Pos : 54.1 /All e Seri en ( Allgemei ne Module)/Z ulassungen/Ex-Zul ass ungen/TÜV AT EX/TÜ V 07 AT EX 554086 X: I M 2 Ex d I M b II 3 G Ex nA IIC T 4 Gc II 3 D Ex tc IIIC T135°C Dc @ 14\mod_1361949753233_0.doc x @ 113015 @ @ 1
Pos : 55 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ger ätebesc hrei bung/Z ulass ungen/Ex/Z ulas sungen Bus kl emme 750- xxxx Ex, nur Vari ante /025-000 - Ei nlei tung @ 15\mod_1369653414923_21.doc x @ 120540 @ @ 1
783
Pos : 59 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Gerätebesc hreibung/Nor men und Ric htlini en - Übersc hrift 2 @ 4\mod_1242804031875_21.doc x @ 33646 @ 2 @ 1
The basic version and all variants of 750-494 I/O modules meet the following
standards and guidelines:
Pos : 61 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/N or men und Ric htli nien/Ex(i)-NormenExpl osionsfähige Atmosphäre EN 60079- 0 @ 14\mod_1360841627885_21.doc x @ 111880 @ @ 1
784
Pos : 67 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/F unktions bes chr eibung/F unkti ons besc hrei bung - Ü bersc hrift 1 @ 4\mod_1239025975389_21.doc x @ 30003 @ 1 @ 1
4 Function Description
Pos : 68 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/F unktions beschr eibung/Funkti onsbesc hrei bung 750-0494 @ 14\mod_1363085168365_21.doc x @ 114260 @ 2222 @ 1
785
• Active energy acquisition total
• Active energy delivery total
• Reactive energy Lx
• Reactive energy inductive Lx
• Reactive energy capacitive Lx
• Reactive energy total
• Reactive energy inductive total
• Reactive energy capacitive total
• Apparent energy Lx
786
• Power factor LF Lx (all harmonics)
Harmonics!
In general, the first harmonic means the fundamental wave and the second
harmonic means the wave with double frequency etc.!
Voltage: • DC voltage Lx – N
Current: • DC current Lx
The I/O module measures the true RMS of the voltages and currents applied to
the measurement inputs per period. See figure below.
787
N-1 N-1
∑i ∑u
2 2
I eff = 1
N k U eff = 1
N k
k =0 k =0
The current and voltage RMS values are calculated for each period in the I/O
module. The RMS values can be exported with every second period (2 T) with the
specified measuring accuracy via the process image. In a 50Hz-network this
corresponds to an update rate of 40 ms.
The arithmetic mean value for phase current and voltage is generated on the basis
of the RMS values. You can set the time period during which the mean value is to
be generated using WAGO-I/O-CHECK, or parameters 34, 35, 36. The RMS
minimum and maximum values for current and voltage are also determined over a
configurable time period (WAGO-I/O-CHECK or parameters 37, 38, 39).
Peak current and voltage values can also be recorded, but for only one selectable
phase. The specified observation interval for this can be set using the number of
half-waves (WAGO-I/O-CHECK or registers 43, 44, 45).
788
Calculating Power
Individual, synchronous sampling values for current and voltage are used for
calculating active power (P). Phase shifts between the currents and voltages are
taken into account for power calculation. Positive values occur when the power is
"consumed" by a load, i.e., current has a phase shift of -90° … +90° compared to
voltage (operation under load, Quadrant I and IV). Negative values are yielded
when the power is "fed in" by a generator, i.e., the current has phase shifting of
90° … 270° relative to voltage (generator operation, Quadrant II and III).
Active power minimum and maximum values are determined over a configurable
time period (WAGO-I/O-CHECK or parameters 37, 38, 39).
In real supply networks, not all electrical loads are purely ohmic. Phase shifting
occurs between current and voltage. However, this does not affect the method for
determining the RMS values for current voltage previously described. The I/O
module calculates both the reactive power (Q) and the apparent power (S) for
each phase.
Calculating Energy
Time-based integration of power yields the level of energy for each phase. The
I/O module provides the values for active, reactive and apparent energy. Values
for the individual phases and an overall value are provided both for active and
reactive energy. A distinction can also be drawn between acquisition/delivery of
active energy and inductive/capacitive reactive energy (see figure below).
789
Figure 7: Allocation of Active and Reactive Energy in the 4 Quadrants
All of the energy meter values are saved in the I/O module. These operate
internally with the resolutions mWh / mVARh / mVAh and are reset when 1
billion kWh (kVARh, kVAh) is reached.
The representation of the energy values can be scaled using a defined factor in the
process image (PI). This factor can be set by the user with WAGO-I/O-CHECK or
register 35 and can be changed at any time. The two examples below illustrate the
information required for this:
Example 1:
- 750-494, meter: Active energy acquisition L1 (UInt32 in the PI)
- Scaling (WAGO-I/O-CHECK, Register 35): 0 (1 mWh)
- Maximum meter value in the PI: 4 294 967 295 mWh = ~4 295 kWh
A counter overflow can occur for the counter shown in the PI even though the
internal meter has not yet reached the overflow threshold. This is signaled in the
PI by the flag "Overflow process value x". The user must select scaling of the
measured value in accordance with the application being used.
Example 2:
- 750-494/000-001, meter: Reactive energy, total (Int32 in the PI)
- Scaling (WAGO-I/O-CHECK, Register 35): 6 (5 kVARh)
- Maximum meter value in the PI: +10 737 418 235 kVARh (2s complement)
790
An overflow of the internal meter can occur here, as it can only count to a
maximum of 1 billion kVARh. The meter shown in the PI can, however,
continue to count substantially higher on account of the scaling that has been
set.
The values for the energy meters can be set via WAGO-I/O-CHECK. More
information on this is given in the section "Commissioning".
The I/O module also allows you to set thresholds for energy measurement, i.e.,
energy is not metered until these set starting values are reached. This threshold
can be defined for each type of energy using WAGO-I/O-CHECK or parameters
40, 41, 42.
You can also define the storing cycle using WAGO-I/O-CHECK or Register 46 in
which the energy meter values are saved internally. The valid range for this is 60
… 255 s. With a storing cycle time of 60 s the lifetime of the internal meters is
around 19 years. Each second added to this time increases the lifetime by about
0.3 years.
The phase frequencies are calculated using zero crossing detection of the sampled
signals for each phase. The minimum and maximum frequencies are determined
over a configurable time period (WAGO-I/O-CHECK or parameters 37, 38, 39).
Harmonics Analysis
The I/O module calculates the frequency spectrum for the periodic input signals
and analyzes the fundamental component and the next 40 harmonics for each
phase. This analysis can be conducted on one of the three phases (L1 or L2 or L3).
The I/O module always yields the RMS values for current and voltage of the
fundamental component for the selected phase. The I/O module also provides the
total harmonic distortion (THD) for current and voltage.
From the 40 harmonics, three can be selected and analyzed at the same time. The
RMS value for current and voltage is calculated for each selected harmonic, along
with the harmonic distortion (HD). The harmonics can be freely selected, e.g., 4 –
12 – 19 or 2 – 35 – 40.
The power factor cos phi is the cosine of the phase angle between voltage and
current for the specific phase. Calculation of the power factor only takes into
account the phase shifting of the fundamental components of voltage and current.
The sign used in front of "cos phi" indicates the following:
791
• positive (plus) sign: Acquisition of active power from the supply
network
• negative (minus) sign: Delivery of active power into the supply network
The power factor PF is the quotient of the active power (P) and apparent power
(S) and takes the entire spectrum into account, i.e., the fundamental component
and the harmonics.
PF = P / S
• negative (minus) sign: Delivery of active power into the supply network
The power factor LF is the quotient from the amount for active power (P) and
apparent power (S), multiplied by the sign for reactive power (Q) and takes the
entire spectrum into account, i.e., the fundamental component and the harmonics:
LF = sign Q · |P| / S
792
The 4-quadrant display is also shown in WAGO- I/O-CHECK for the measured
value views "Overview", "Phase Lx" and "Power" in the dialog "3-phase power
measurement".
Phase Angle
The phase angle between voltage and current is calculated for each phase using
time-synchronous sampling. The phase angle is indicated in degrees.
The zero crossings of the voltage characteristics for the 3 phases are monitored by
rotary field detection. The direction of rotation of a motor or machine can only be
determined when the phase sequence L1-L2-L3 at the I/O module has been
connected the same as at the motor and when this corresponds to the provisions of
VDE 0530-8 or DIN EN 60034-8 with regard to "Terminal designations and
direction of rotation" (L1 at U-Motor, L2 at V-Motor, L3 at W-Motor).
Phase sequence L1-L2-L3 signals clockwise rotation, whereas a reversed phase
sequence will signal counter-clockwise rotation. Caution: It is not possible to
detect double reversing.
793
Limits
The I/O module also offers limit monitoring. Limits for undervoltage, overvoltage
and overcurrent can be set for each phase (WAGO-I/O-CHECK or Register 36-38,
parameters 23-31). Signaling is carried out in the process image (PI).
The measuring accuracy of the I/O module falls when an RMS voltage falls below
45 V. This state is called ZC limit and is displayed via the "D" LED (SAG LED).
The following conditions can also degrade the measuring accuracy of the I/O
module:
1. If only one or two phases of the three-phase supply network are connected,
higher measuring errors can occur in the voltage measurement (+0.1%).
2. In AC networks only:
If all phases fall below the ZC limit, accurate measurement of phase angle,
794
frequency and current are no longer possible. The measuring accuracy of all
current-depending variables (current, power, energy) falls off by 0.4%.
3. Near the ZC limit, the accuracy of the phase angle measurement decreases
to a value of ± 1.5 °.
For DC measurements, the error is <= 1% of the full-scale value for current,
voltage and power.
795
Pos : 70 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/__ noc h nic ht ei ns ortierte Ü berschriften müss en noc h eins orti ert werden __Pr oz ess abbild - Übersc hrift 1 @ 4\mod_1240983067828_21.doc x @ 31942 @ 1 @ 1
5 Process Image
Pos : 71 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Proz ess abbild Kl emmenbus /Analogei ngangs klemmen/Pr ozessabbild 750- 0494 @ 14\mod_1362749555043_21.doc x @ 114070 @ 2233233232333332 @ 1
The I/O module provides, on 1 logical channel, 24 bytes input and 24 bytes output
process data to a fieldbus coupler/controller. These consist of 8 control/status
bytes and 16 data bytes.
Notice that the process data image depends on the used fieldbus coupler/
controller!
Mapping the process data into the process image is specific for the fieldbus
coupler/controller used. You will find both this information and the specific
configuration of the relevant control/status bytes in the manual of the
coupler/controller, section "Fieldbus Specific Configuration of Process Data"
which describes the process image.
796
5.2 Output Data
The output data is transmitted to the I/O module by the fieldbus
coupler/controller. This data consists of 4 control words and 8 data words.
797
Expanded control word 2 – Byte 4
(Bit 7) (Bit 6) (Bit 5) (Bit 4) (Bit 3) (Bit 2) (Bit 1) (Bit 0)
MET_ID_1
MET_ID_1 ID for selection of the measured value from the collection
COL_ID, which is delivered with process value 1 of the
input data.
798
5.3 Input Data
The input data are transmitted to the fieldbus coupler/controller by the I/O
module. This data consists of 4 status words and 8 data words (process values
1 … 4).
799
OVER_2 Range limiting for process value 2:
0 = Ok
1 = The measured value shown in process value 2
is situated outside the defined value range.
OVER_3 Range limiting for process value 3:
0 = Ok
1 = The measured value shown in process value 3
is situated outside the defined value range.
OVER_4 Range limiting for process value 4:
0 = Ok
1 = The measured value shown in process value 4
is situated outside the defined value range.
STAT_SEL Confirmation for the status query requested in the output data
– Status active for:
0 = Status Phase L1
1 = Status Phase L2
2 = Status Phase L3
3 = Status I/O module
800
No significance
STAT3 STAT_SEL = Status Lx = L1 / L2 / L3:
- Clipping of voltage signal at Lx:
0 = OK
1 = The voltage signal is outside the measurable
range of the I/O module and has been
limited (clipped).
STAT_SEL = Status I/O module:
No significance
STAT2 STAT_SEL = Status Lx = L1 / L2 / L3:
- Clipping of current signal at Lx:
0 = OK
1 = The current signal is outside the measurable
range of the I/O module and has been
limited (clipped).
STAT_SEL = Status I/O module:
No significance
STAT1 STAT_SEL = Status Lx = L1 / L2 / L3:
- SagLevel Voltage Lx:
0 = OK
1 = Elevated measuring error due to inadequate
input voltage at Lx
STAT_SEL = Status I/O module:
No significance
801
Expanded status word 2 – Byte 5
(Bit 7) (Bit 6) (Bit 5) (Bit 4) (Bit 3) (Bit 2) (Bit 1) (Bit 0)
MET_ID_2_SEL
MET_ID_2_SEL ID of the measured value from the collection COL_ID_SEL
which is in process value 2 of the input data.
802
Process value 1 – Byte 11
(Bit 7) (Bit 6) (Bit 5) (Bit 4) (Bit 3) (Bit 2) (Bit 1) (Bit 0)
PROC1[31:24]
PROC1[31:24] => See Process value 1 – Byte 8
803
Process value 3 – Byte 17
(Bit 7) (Bit 6) (Bit 5) (Bit 4) (Bit 3) (Bit 2) (Bit 1) (Bit 0)
PROC3[15:8]
PROC3[15:8] => See Process value 3 – Byte 16
804
5.4 Process Image Descriptions
The I/O module provides a large number of measured values for a three-phase
supply network. These measured values are organized into collections which can
be selected by specifying the COL_ID. The following collections are available:
805
The I/O module measured values are made available in the process image as a
function of the selected collection (COL_ID) and of the measured values selected
in the collection.
The collection is selected in the I/O module output data and the various measured
values selected from the collection using the corresponding MET_IDs. These
measured values are then made available in the input data. After this, four other
MET_IDs can be selected, and so on.
Example 1:
806
Example 2:
The status query was also set in the examples given here. In example 1, the status
query is made for phase L1. No bit is set in the status word (Byte 0) and no error
message is present.
In example 2, the status query is made for phase L3. The status word (Byte 0) is at
0x44, an error has occurred at phase L3 (ERROR, ERR_L3). Byte 2 is at 0x40,
i.e., overvoltage at Phase L3, the set threshold has been exceeded.
807
Collections for harmonics analysis (020, 021, 022)
The type of measured value is selected in the harmonics analysis collections using
the corresponding MET_ID_1. The following types of measured data are
available:
MET_ID_2, MET_ID_3 and MET_ID_4 are then used to select the harmonic
(MET_ID_x = 1 ... 40) or fundamental component (MET_ID_x = 100) for the
measured values defined by MET_ID_1 are to be made available in the process
image input data. This means that 3 measured values are provided with the input
data.
Example 1:
808
17 --- Ueff – 1st harmonic L1 [15:8]
18 --- Ueff – 1st harmonic L1 [23:16]
19 --- Ueff – 1st harmonic L1 [31:24]
20 --- Ueff – 2nd harmonic L1 [7:0]
21 --- Ueff – 2nd harmonic L1 [15:8]
22 --- Ueff – 2nd harmonic L1 [23:16]
23 --- Ueff – 2nd harmonic L1 [31:24]
Example 2:
809
The status query was also set in the examples given here. In example 1, the status
query is made for the I/O module. The status word (Byte 0) is at 0x48, an error
occurred at the I/O module (ERROR, ERR_BK). Byte 2 is at 0x40, i.e., the rotary
field is not correct, counter-clockwise.
In example 2, the status query is made for phase L1. The status word (Byte 0) is at
0x41, an error has occurred at phase L1 (ERROR, ERR_L1). Byte 2 is at 0x08,
i.e., the voltage signal at phase L1 is outside the valid range for the I/O module
and has been clipped. In addition, byte 1 is at 0x80. This means that the measured
values of the collection are not yet stable. The transient reaction period (build-up)
must end, then the measured values are stable.
810
5.5 Collections of Measured Values
5.5.1 Collection 007 – DC Measured Values
Table 17: Measured Values of Collection 007 in the Process Image (PI)
Data Scaling Factor PI Update
MET_ID Measured Value Type 1A- 5A- Rate PI
PI Variants Variants [ms]
Current
001 DC current L1 UInt32 0.0001A 0.0005A 40
002 DC current L2 UInt32 0.0001A 0.0005A 40
003 DC current L3 UInt32 0.0001A 0.0005A 40
Voltage
004 DC voltage L1 - N UInt32 0.01V 0.01V 40
005 DC voltage L2 - N UInt32 0.01V 0.01V 40
006 DC voltage L3 - N UInt32 0.01V 0.01V 40
Power
007 Power (DC current) L1 UInt32 0.01W 0.05W 40
008 Power (DC current) L2 UInt32 0.01W 0.05W 40
009 Power (DC current) L3 UInt32 0.01W 0.05W 40
811
Table 18: Measured Values of Collection 009 in the Process Image (PI)
Data Scaling Factor PI Update
MET_ID Measured Value Type 1A- 5A- Rate PI
PI Variants Variants [ms]
Voltage
004 RMS voltage L1 - N UInt32 0.01V 0.01V 40
005 RMS voltage L2 - N UInt32 0.01V 0.01V 40
006 RMS voltage L3 - N UInt32 0.01V 0.01V 40
043 Max. RMS voltage L1 - N UInt32 0.01V 0.01V 50
044 Max. RMS voltage L2 - N UInt32 0.01V 0.01V 50
045 Max. RMS voltage L3 - N UInt32 0.01V 0.01V 50
046 Min. RMS voltage L1 - N UInt32 0.01V 0.01V 50
047 Min. RMS voltage L2 - N UInt32 0.01V 0.01V 50
048 Min. RMS voltage L3 - N UInt32 0.01V 0.01V 50
031 RMS voltage L1 - L2 UInt32 0.01V 0.01V 340
032 RMS voltage L1 - L3 UInt32 0.01V 0.01V 340
033 RMS voltage L2 - L3 UInt32 0.01V 0.01V 340
Arithmetic mean value adjustable
049 UInt32 0.01V 0.01V
voltage L1 - N 5 ... 900s
Arithmetic mean value adjustable
050 UInt32 0.01V 0.01V
voltage L2 - N 5 ... 900s
Arithmetic mean value adjustable
051 UInt32 0.01V 0.01V
voltage L3 - N 5 ... 900s
091 Peak value voltage L1 - N UInt32 0.01V 0.01V 200
092 Peak value voltage L2 - N UInt32 0.01V 0.01V 200
093 Peak value voltage L3 - N UInt32 0.01V 0.01V 200
Current
001 RMS current L1 UInt32 0.0001A 0.0005A 40
002 RMS current L2 UInt32 0.0001A 0.0005A 40
003 RMS current L3 UInt32 0.0001A 0.0005A 40
034 Max. RMS current L1 UInt32 0.0001A 0.0005A 50
035 Max. RMS current L2 UInt32 0.0001A 0.0005A 50
036 Max. RMS current L3 UInt32 0.0001A 0.0005A 50
037 Min. RMS current L1 UInt32 0.0001A 0.0005A 50
038 Min. RMS current L2 UInt32 0.0001A 0.0005A 50
039 Min. RMS current L3 UInt32 0.0001A 0.0005A 50
Arithmetic mean value adjustable
040 UInt32 0.0001A 0.0005A
current L1 5 ... 900s
Arithmetic mean value adjustable
041 UInt32 0.0001A 0.0005A
current L2 5 ... 900s
Arithmetic mean value adjustable
042 UInt32 0.0001A 0.0005A
current L3 5 ... 900s
094 Peak value current L1 UInt32 0.0001A 0.0005A 200
095 Peak value current L2 UInt32 0.0001A 0.0005A 200
096 Peak value current L3 UInt32 0.0001A 0.0005A 200
812
Power
007 Active power L1 Int32 0.01W 0.05W 40
008 Active power L2 Int32 0.01W 0.05W 40
009 Active power L3 Int32 0.01W 0.05W 40
052 Max. active power L1 Int32 0.01W 0.05W 50
053 Max. active power L2 Int32 0.01W 0.05W 50
054 Max. active power L3 Int32 0.01W 0.05W 50
055 Min. active power L1 Int32 0.01W 0.05W 50
056 Min. active power L2 Int32 0.01W 0.05W 50
057 Min. active power L3 Int32 0.01W 0.05W 50
010 Reactive power L1 Int32 0.01VAR 0.05VAR 340
011 Reactive power L2 Int32 0.01VAR 0.05VAR 340
012 Reactive power L3 Int32 0.01VAR 0.05VAR 340
013 Apparent power L1 UInt32 0.01VA 0.05VA 40
014 Apparent power L2 UInt32 0.01VA 0.05VA 40
015 Apparent power L3 UInt32 0.01VA 0.05VA 40
Energy
Setup with WAGO-I/O-
064 Active energy L1 Int32 CHECK 400
or in Register 35
Setup with WAGO-I/O-
065 Active energy L2 Int32 CHECK 400
or in Register 35
Setup with WAGO-I/O-
066 Active energy L3 Int32 CHECK 400
or in Register 35
Setup with WAGO-I/O-
067 Active energy acquisition L1 UInt32 CHECK 400
or in Register 35
Setup with WAGO-I/O-
068 Active energy acquisition L2 UInt32 CHECK 400
or in Register 35
Setup with WAGO-I/O-
069 Active energy acquisition L3 UInt32 CHECK 400
or in Register 35
Setup with WAGO-I/O-
070 Active energy delivery L1 UInt32 CHECK 400
or in Register 35
Setup with WAGO-I/O-
071 Active energy delivery L2 UInt32 CHECK 400
or in Register 35
Setup with WAGO-I/O-
072 Active energy delivery L3 UInt32 CHECK 400
or in Register 35
Setup with WAGO-I/O-
073 Active energy total Int32 CHECK 400
or in Register 35
Setup with WAGO-I/O-
074 Active energy acquisition total UInt32 CHECK 400
or in Register 35
075 Active energy delivery total UInt32 Setup with WAGO-I/O- 400
813
CHECK
or in Register 35
Setup with WAGO-I/O-
076 Reactive energy L1 Int32 CHECK 400
or in Register 35
Setup with WAGO-I/O-
077 Reactive energy L2 Int32 CHECK 400
or in Register 35
Setup with WAGO-I/O-
078 Reactive energy L3 Int32 CHECK 400
or in Register 35
Setup with WAGO-I/O-
079 Reactive energy inductive L1 UInt32 CHECK 400
or in Register 35
Setup with WAGO-I/O-
080 Reactive energy inductive L2 UInt32 CHECK 400
or in Register 35
Setup with WAGO-I/O-
081 Reactive energy inductive L3 UInt32 CHECK 400
or in Register 35
Setup with WAGO-I/O-
082 Reactive energy capacitive L1 UInt32 CHECK 400
or in Register 35
Setup with WAGO-I/O-
083 Reactive energy capacitive L2 UInt32 CHECK 400
or in Register 35
Setup with WAGO-I/O-
084 Reactive energy capacitive L3 UInt32 CHECK 400
or in Register 35
Setup with WAGO-I/O-
085 Reactive energy total Int32 CHECK 400
or in Register 35
Setup with WAGO-I/O-
086 Reactive energy inductive total UInt32 CHECK 400
or in Register 35
Setup with WAGO-I/O-
Reactive energy capacitive
087 UInt32 CHECK 400
total
or in Register 35
Setup with WAGO-I/O-
088 Apparent energy L1 UInt32 CHECK 400
or in Register 35
Setup with WAGO-I/O-
089 Apparent energy L2 UInt32 CHECK 400
or in Register 35
Setup with WAGO-I/O-
090 Apparent energy L3 UInt32 CHECK 400
or in Register 35
814
Frequency
016 Supply network frequency L1 UInt32 0.001Hz 0.001Hz 280
017 Supply network frequency L2 UInt32 0.001Hz 0.001Hz 280
018 Supply network frequency L3 UInt32 0.001Hz 0.001Hz 280
Max. supply network frequency
058 UInt32 0.001Hz 0.001Hz 280
L1
Max. supply network frequency
059 UInt32 0.001Hz 0.001Hz 280
L2
Max. supply network frequency
060 UInt32 0.001Hz 0.001Hz 280
L3
Min. supply network frequency
061 UInt32 0.001Hz 0.001Hz 280
L1
Min. supply network frequency
062 UInt32 0.001Hz 0.001Hz 280
L2
Min. supply network frequency
063 UInt32 0.001Hz 0.001Hz 280
L3
Phase angle
019 Phase angle phi L1 UInt32 0.01 ° 340
020 Phase angle phi L2 UInt32 0.01 ° 340
021 Phase angle phi L3 UInt32 0.01 ° 340
Power factor
022 cos phi L1 Int32 0.01 0.01 340
023 cos phi L2 Int32 0.01 0.01 340
024 cos phi L3 Int32 0.01 0.01 340
025 Power factor PF L1 Int32 0.01 0.01 280
026 Power factor PF L2 Int32 0.01 0.01 280
027 Power factor PF L3 Int32 0.01 0.01 280
028 Power factor LF L1 Int32 0.01 0.01 280
029 Power factor LF L2 Int32 0.01 0.01 280
030 Power factor LF L3 Int32 0.01 0.01 280
815
5.5.3 Collection 020 – Harmonics Analysis L1
Table 19: Measured Values of Collection 020 in the Process Image (PI)
Selection of measured value type:
Data Scaling Factor PI Update
MET_ID_1 Measured Value Type 1A- 5A- Rate PI
PI Variants Variants [ms]
RMS current
001 Current L1 UInt32 0.0001A 0.0005A 260
RMS voltage
002 Voltage L1 UInt32 0.01V 0.01V 260
Distortion current
003 Current L1 UInt32 0.01% 0.01% 260
Distortion voltage
004 Voltage L1 UInt32 0.01% 0.01% 260
Selection of 3 harmonics:
Data Scaling factor PI Update
MET_ID_2,
Measured Value type 1A- 5A- Rate PI
_3 and _4
PI Variants Variants [ms]
1st harmonic
1st harmonic (fundamental
100 -depends on selected measured value 260
component) L1
2nd to 41st harmonic
1 … 40 2nd … 41st harmonic L1 -depends on selected measured value 260
816
5.5.4 Collection 021 – Harmonics Analysis L2
Table 20: Measured Values of Collection 020 in the Process Image (PI)
Selection of measured value type:
Data Scaling Factor PI Update
MET_ID_1 Measured Value Type 1A- 5A- Rate PI
PI Variants Variants [ms]
RMS current
001 Current L2 UInt32 0.0001A 0.0005A 260
RMS voltage
002 Voltage L2 UInt32 0.01V 0.01V 260
Distortion current
003 Current L2 UInt32 0.01% 0.01% 260
Distortion voltage
004 Voltage L2 UInt32 0.01% 0.01% 260
Selection of 3 harmonics:
Data Scaling factor PI Update
MET_ID_2,
Measured Value type 1A- 5A- Rate PI
_3 and _4
PI Variants Variants [ms]
1st harmonic
1st harmonic (fundamental
100 -depends on selected measured value 260
component) L2
2nd to 41st harmonic
1 … 40 2nd … 41st harmonic L2 -depends on selected measured value 260
817
5.5.5 Collection 022 – Harmonics Analysis L3
Table 21: Measured Values of Collection 020 in the Process Image (PI)
Selection of measured value type:
Data Scaling Factor PI Update
MET_ID_1 Measured Value Type 1A- 5A- Rate PI
PI Variants Variants [ms]
RMS current
001 Current L3 UInt32 0.0001A 0.0005A 260
RMS voltage
002 Voltage L3 UInt32 0.01V 0.01V 260
Distortion current
003 Current L3 UInt32 0.01% 0.01% 260
Distortion voltage
004 Voltage L3 UInt32 0.01% 0.01% 260
Selection of 3 harmonics:
Data Scaling factor PI Update
MET_ID_2,
Measured Value type 1A- 5A- Rate PI
_3 and _4
PI Variants Variants [ms]
1st harmonic
1st harmonic (fundamental
100 -depends on selected measured value 260
component) L3
2nd to 41st harmonic
1 … 40 2nd … 41st harmonic L3 -depends on selected measured value 260
818
5.6 Examples of Calculating the Measured Values from
the process values
The format of the measured values with sign (Int16) is the two's complement.
Generally, use the following equation to calculate the measured values from the
process values:
Measured value = Process value x Scaling factor PI
819
Current
When calculating current-dependent values, the current transformer ratio
(CTR) must be taken into account when using a current transformer.
Current transformers
Current transformers are available on the market in different designs. On the
primary side, currents of 20 A, 25 A, 30 A, 35 A, 40 A, 45 A, 50 A, 75 A, 100 A
… 5000 A are supported, on the secondary side 1 A or 5 A.
For example, transformation ratios of 45:1 A or 200:5 A are possible. Thus, the
corresponding current transformer ratios (CTR) are 1:45 and 1:40.
The I/O module allows you to set user scaling using WAGO-I/O-CHECK or via
Register 32, bits 12, 13 and 14. If the bit is set to 0, user scaling is disabled and
the transformation ratio of the current is 1:1. If a bit is set to 1, user scaling is
enabled and the transformation ratio is already taken into account in the I/O
module.
Operating current transformers the user scaling should always be on and the
CTR set in the I/O module. Thus a calculation by the higher control system is not
necessary. As the process values are 32 bits long in the PI even big measured
values can be processed.
Therefore, the following setting options and calculations for the measured values
result in the process image for the current-dependent variables:
820
A. User Scaling OFF, Measurement without Current Transformer
821
Active Power 1A-varints 5A-variants
Register 32, 1 1
bits 12 … 14
Register 39 … 41 0x002D (45) 0x0028 (40)
(D-CTR)
Process value 0x000049B5 (18869) 0x0001C3F8 (115704)
Scaling factor PI 0.01W 0.05W
Equation Measured value = Process value x Scaling factor PI
Measured value 188.69 W 5785.20 W
822
Pos : 73 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Monti eren/M ontier en - Übersc hrift 1 @ 3\mod_1225446744750_21.doc x @ 24900 @ 1 @ 1
6 Mounting
Pos : 74.1 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/M ontieren/D emontieren/M ontagerei henfolge @ 3\mod_1231770210031_21.doc x @ 25992 @ 2 @ 1
The reliable positioning and connection is made using a tongue and groove
system. Due to the automatic locking, the individual devices are securely seated
on the rail after installation.
Starting with the fieldbus coupler/controller, the I/O modules are mounted
adjacent to each other according to the project design. Errors in the design of the
node in terms of the potential groups (connection via the power contacts) are
recognized, as the I/O modules with power contacts (blade contacts) cannot be
linked to I/O modules with fewer power contacts.
Pos : 74.2 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Wic htige Erläuterungen/Sicherheits- und sonstig e Hinweis e/Vorsic ht/Vorsicht: Verl etz ungsgefahr durc h s charfkantige M ess er kontakte! @ 6\mod_1256193279401_21.doc x @ 43414 @ @ 1
823
Pos : 74.6 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/M ontieren/D emontieren/Geräte einfüg en und entfer nen - Ü berschrift 2 @ 3\mod_1231768483250_21.doc x @ 25950 @ 2 @ 1
824
Pos : 74.10 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Monti eren/D emonti eren/Bus kl emme entfer nen @ 4\mod_1239169375203_21.doc x @ 30334 @ 3 @ 1
825
Pos : 76 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Ansc hließ en/Ger äte ansc hließen - Ü bers chrift 1 @ 3\mod_1234172889468_21.doc x @ 27460 @ 1 @ 1
7 Connect Devices
Pos : 77 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ans chli eßen/Leiter an C AGE C LAM P ans chli eßen ( allgemei n) - Übersc hrift 2 und Text @ 3\mod_1225448660171_21.doc x @ 24928 @ 2 @ 1
If more than one conductor must be routed to one connection, these must be
connected in an up-circuit wiring assembly, for example using WAGO feed-
through terminals.
Exception:
If it is unavoidable to jointly connect 2 conductors, then you must use a ferrule to
join the wires together. The following ferrules can be used:
Length: 8 mm
Nominal cross section max.: 1 mm2 for 2 conductors with 0.5 mm2 each
WAGO product: 216-103 or products with comparable properties
1. For opening the CAGE CLAMP® insert the actuating tool into the opening
above the connection.
3. For closing the CAGE CLAMP® simply remove the tool. The conductor is
now clamped firmly in place.
826
Pos : 79 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/__ noc h nic ht ei ns ortierte Ü berschriften müss en noc h eins orti ert werden __Spannungs mess ung - Ü berschrift 2 @ 13\mod_1346248367139_21.doc x @ 102097 @ 2 @ 1
In order to measure the 3 phase voltages of a supply network, connect its 4 wires
with the CAGE CLAMPS® L1, L2, L3 and N.
827
Pos : 82 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/__ noc h nic ht ei ns ortierte Ü berschriften müss en noc h eins orti ert werden __Strommess ung - Ü berschrift 2 @ 13\mod_1346248472189_21.doc x @ 102101 @ 2 @ 1
828
7.3.2 Current Transformers
For measuring currents greater than 1 A resp. 5 A you have to use external current
transformers.
Normally, the selection of the current transformers is not a critical factor. The
internal resistance in the current path of the 3-phase power measurement module
is so low that it can be neglected when considering the overall resistance of the
current loop.
The transformers must provide a rated secondary current of 1 A resp. 5 A. The
rated primary current Ipn shall be equal or higher than the currents to be measured.
The normal, permissible overload level of 1.2 x Ipn presents no problem for the
3-phase power measurement module, but can, however, lead to minor
measurement inaccuracies.
7.3.2.1 Accuracy
Please note that the overall accuracy of the measuring setup consisting of the
3-phase power measurement module and the current transformers essentially
depends on the transformers’ accuracy category.
The 3-phase power measurement module can measure any types of current up to a
frequency of 3.3 kHz. As currents are frequently generated by power inverters and
can contain frequencies lower than 50 Hz or even a DC portion, an electronic
transformer should be used for these applications.
The overcurrent limiting factor (FS) for current transformers indicates at which
multiple of its rated primary current saturation occurs which protects the
829
connected measuring instruments. FS shall be max. 10 for the 1 A module resp.
max. 5 for the 5 A module.
830
7.3.3 Additional Measuring Instruments in the Current Path
Please note that adding measuring instruments (such as ammeters) in the current
path can substantially increase the total apparent power.
In addition, the CAGE CLAMP® IN of the I/O module must form a star point
(neutral) for the three secondary windings. See figure above. Therefore, additional
measuring instruments must be potential-free and wired accordingly.
831
Pos : 85 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/__ noc h nic ht ei ns ortierte Ü berschriften müss en noc h eins orti ert werden __Leistungs mess ung - Übersc hrift 2 @ 13\mod_1346327054898_21.doc x @ 102149 @ 2 @ 1
832
Figure 17: Power Measurement on Two Motors Regulated by Frequency Converters
As the high-frequency portions only have a minor effect on the motors, distortion
caused by the 3-phase transformer during transmission of the harmonic waves
generated by the frequency converter will have virtually no effect on practical
measurement.
Distribution of the power is mapped very well, thanks to the use of one I/O
module for each motor. This also allows to detect elevated current consumptions
by every single motor at an early stage.
833
Measurement of DC voltage/current (such as holding current for synchronous
motors) is not possible with this configuration. Practical results will be yielded for
frequencies greater than 5 Hz, depending on the 3-phase transformer and current
transformers that are used.
Pos : 87 /D okumentation allgemei n/Glieder ungs elemente/---Seitenwechs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
834
Pos : 88 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Inbetri ebnehmen - Konfigurier en - Parametri eren - Bedienen/In Betri eb nehmen - Ü bersc hrift 1 @ 4\mod_1240901452750_21.doc x @ 31570 @ 1 @ 1
8 Commissioning
Pos : 89 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betrieb nehmen/Parametrier en mit WAGO- I/O-CH ECK/Parametrier en mit WAGO-I/O-CH ECK 750-0494 @ 15\mod_1367496874664_21.doc x @ 118340 @ 233333 @ 1
The I/O module latched in the bus node and wired for the measurement can be put
into operation using the WAGO-I/O-CHECK software for Windows. For that, the
fieldbus coupler/controller of the node is connected, for example, to the USB port
of a PC using the WAGO USB communication cable.
• Application settings
WAGO-I/O-CHECK
You can obtain the WAGO-I/O-CHECK software on a CD under Item No. 759-
302. This CD contains all the application program files and a description.
The description is also available in the Internet at http://www.wago.com under
Documentation > WAGO Software > WAGO-I/O-CHECK.
To display the bus node on the PC, use the USB communication cable to connect
coupler/controller and PC and launch WAGO-I/O-CHECK.
835
8.1 Configuration with WAGO-I/O-CHECK
Right-click on the image of the I/O module and select the [Settings] menu item.
Figure 18: WAGO-I/O-CHECK User Interface, Bus Node With I/O Module 750-494
836
Figure 19: „3-Phase Power Measurement“ Dialog
The buttons for the individual measured value views appear in the menu (2).
The status bar (3) displays the connection icon and IP address of the fieldbus
coupler/controller or the name of the COM port. Per phase possible error
messages are shown. These are:
• No Zero (no zero crossing)
• VoltClip (voltage override - clipping)
• CurClip (current override - clipping)
• VoltSag (high measuring error - undervoltage)
Click [Settings] to open the "Settings" dialog in which you can configure the
application and I/O module.
837
Figure 20: „Settings“ Dialog
The main menu (1) with the Application, Phase L1, Phase L2, Phase L3, I/O
Module, Energy and Factory Settings tabs are on the left side. These are explained
in more detail in the following sections.
At the window’s bottom you can find the command bar (2) with 4 buttons.
Use [Import] to load the settings from your hard drive that you may have already
saved when setting up another I/O module. You can change these settings if
necessary and then [Save] them to the I/O module.
Use [Export] to save the current settings to your computer to simplify future
configurations.
[Save] writes any changed settings to registers, i.e. the configuration of the I/O
module and the application settings are changed. The "Settings" dialog closes.
To not save and discard the changed settings, click [Close]. The "Settings" dialog
closes.
838
8.1.1 “Application“ Tab
Make application settings in the "Application" tab. These settings are not stored in
the I/O module, but on the connected PC.
You specify again the decimal multiples for displaying the measuring units for the
various measured variables or keep them:
10-3=milli or 100=1 or 103=kilo.
In addition, you specify the storage path for the measured value records. See
"Measurement Recording" in the following section "Displaying the Measured
Values via WAGO-I/O-CHECK".
839
8.1.2 "Phase L1”, “Phase L2”, “Phase L3” Tabs
Use the "Phase L1", "Phase L2", "Phase L3" tabs to configure user scaling, min.-
/max. values and general parameters. These settings are saved to the I/O module.
In the event that you use current transformers to measure high currents, specify in
user scaling whether you want to take into account the current transformer ratio
CTR when calculating the measured values in the respective phase or not. If yes,
specify the divisor of the current transformer ratio D-CTR, e.g. "50 ". Register 32
and 39 … 41 are written. For details, see section „Process Image“.
840
For „Min.-/Max. values“ specify the thresholds for undervoltage, overvoltage and
overcurrent. Under- resp. overshooting one of these values results in setting an
error bit in the status byte of the process image and activating a red error LED.
Also, define whether the min.-/max. values of current, voltage, power and
frequency are automatically reset after a specific time or not. If yes, set the reset
interval.
Further, two general settings can be done: the time intervals for the calculation of
the arithmetic mean values (in s) and detecting the peak values (in half-waves).
For „General“ choose the frequency of the supply grid and the phase for the peak
value measurement (only one phase). You can enable DC measurement and
watchdog. The watchdog deactivates the green status LED A if no process data is
received within 200 ms.
For "Min.-/Max. values" you can reset specific min.-/max. values by selecting
them and clicking [Delete]. This action is executed immediately.
For „Energy“ select the scaling factor from the list. The energy values are then
shown accordingly.
Set the interval for cyclically saving the energy values.
At last, you can enter threshold values for measuring active, reactive and apparent
energy. This way creepage currents are ignored. The energy measurement is
interrupted as soon as these thresholds are undershot. The parameters 40, 41 and
42 „NOLOAD“ are written.
841
Figure 23: „I/O Module“ Tab
842
8.1.4 “Energy“ Tab
After entering a password, you can set or reset the energy values per phase on the
"Energy" tab. The initial password is: wago. Please change this password on first
use by clicking [Change password]. Should you have forgotten the password
deinstall and install again the application “3-Pase Power Measurement”. This way
the initial password is valid again.
The I/O module registers the energy consumption and saves the values cyclically.
With [Save] and [Delete] you can save the values at any time regardless the cycle
or reset them to 0.
You can further set a specific value by choosing the energy from the list, entering
a value in milliwatt hours and [Save] it. The energy measurement starts at this set
value.
These actions are carried out immediately and cannot be undone. Therefore, the
[Save] button is disabled at the bottom of the window.
843
8.1.5 "Factory Settings" Tab
After entering a password (see "Energy" tab above), you can reset all parameters
of the I/O module to their factory settings on the "Factory Settings" tab.
Use I/O Module Settings [Restore] to reset the I/O module settings only.
Calibration data remains unchanged.
Use Calibration Data [Restore] to reset the calibration data only. The I/O module
settings remain unchanged.
Use Total [Restore] to reset all I/O module settings and calibration data.
These actions are carried out immediately and cannot be undone. Therefore, the
[Save] button is disabled at the bottom of the window.
844
Pos : 91 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/__ noc h nic ht ei ns ortierte Ü berschriften müss en noc h eins orti ert werden __Anz eigen der M ess werte mit WAGO-I/O-CHEC K - Ü bersc hrift 2 @ 13\mod_1355494395030_21.doc x @ 107680 @ 2 @ 1
The measured values are displayed in the "3-phase power measurement" dialog in
several views, to be found in menu (2) on the left side:
• Overview
• Phase Lx Measurements
• Currents/Voltages
• Power
• Energies
• DC Measurements
• Harmonics
• Measurement Recording
845
The Overview view displays the measured values of all three phases
continuously. These are:
• A sum view (Phase L1-L3) with active, reactive and apparent power, power
factor PF, active, reactive and apparent energy.
• Current, voltage Lx-N, active, reactive and apparent power, cos phi, Power
factor PF and frequency per phase. Overcurrent, under and overvoltage are
identified as a red square, if not present as a green one.
846
Selecting Phase L1 (resp. L2 or L3) Measurements, the measured values of the
respective phase are displayed in detailed including min., max., average and peak
values. Note: Peak values are only displayed if this phase was selected for peak
value measurement. See section "Configuration with WAGO-I/O-CHECK" > "I/O
module" Tab. Overcurrent, under and overvoltage are identified as a red square, if
not present as a green one.
• Current
• Voltage Lx-N
• Phase-to-phase voltage
• Active power
• Reactive power
• Apparent power
• 4-quadrant display
• Active energy
• Reactive energy
• Apparent energy
847
Currents/Voltages displays all currents, voltages, phase angles and frequencies,
including min., max., average and peak values.
Note: Peak values are only displayed for the phase which was selected for peak
value measurement. See section "Configuration with WAGO-I/O-CHECK" > "I/O
module" Tab.
Overcurrent, under and overvoltage are identified as a red square, if not present as
a green one.
• Current
• Voltage Lx-N
• Phase-to-phase voltage
• Phase angle
• Frequency
848
If you select Power, you see active, reactive and apparent power of all 3 phases
with min. and max. values, the power factors and the 4-quadrant displays.
• Active power
• Reactive power
• Apparent power
• 4-quadrant displays
849
If you select Energies, you see the active energies with supply and delivery,
reactive energies with capacitive and inductive component and the apparent
energies that have been consumed/generated since the beginning of the
measurement.
• Active energy
• Reactive energy
• Apparent energy
850
Selecting DC Measurements, you can see the measured DC components of the
measuring signals, i.e. current, voltage and power.
Select DC mode on the "I/O Module" tab. The AC variables are then not
measured or displayed.
Note: DC measurements are only possible in the cannels L1-IL1 und L2-IL2.
• Current
• Voltage
• Power
851
If you select Harmonics you get a chart or a table regarding the 40 harmonics of
the phases. The tab „Harmonics analysis“ opens.
Here you select chart or table view, the phase to be analyzed and the measured
value (voltage or current).
852
The Table View shows the following values of 1st harmonic (fundamental wave)
and another 3 selectable harmonics of the selected phase:
• Current
• Voltage
As long as the selection of harmonics is not changed the measured values are
updated every 260 ms.
853
On the Measurement Recording view, 3 measured variables are represented in
chronological sequence. You can select the measured variables you want to see in
the 3 drop-down lists.
You can then enter the duration by start and end time or the number of samples. In
both cases, the measurement interval, i.e. sample rate, can also be selected from
250 to 300,000 ms.
Clicking the arrow, the [Start] button generates a drop-down list in which you can
select "No Export". By doing this, no export CSV file is generated.
If you click [Start] as usual, a "Save" window opens in which you can specify the
storage location for the CSV file. After you have specified the storage location the
measurement starts. Use [Stop] to stop the measurement prematurely. For
examples of CSV files, see section "Appendix".
Use the mouse wheel to zoom in and out within the three graphic waveforms.
Hold down the left mouse button to move the displayed range.
Click again to follow the current waveform.
854
Pos : 94 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Diag nos e/Di agnos e - Ü bersc hrift 1 @ 4\mod_1240831069471_21.doc x @ 31372 @ 1 @ 1
9 Diagnostics
Pos : 95 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Di agnose/Bus kl emmen/Di agnose 750-0494, - 0495 @ 13\mod_1348662372924_21.doc x @ 103550 @ @ 1
855
Pos : 97 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Ü berschriften für alle Serien/Anhang - Z ubehör Anhang - Ü bers chrift 1 @ 4\mod_1239874070437_21.doc x @ 30560 @ 1 @ 1
10 Appendix
Pos : 98 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Anhang/Beis piel e für C SV-D ateien 750- 494 @ 15\mod_1365497815779_21.doc x @ 116814 @ 233 @ 1
I/O-Check-
WAGO 3 Phase Power
Kontakttechnik Measurement 0750-0494
7/30/2013 12:14:01 PM GmbH & Co. KG (1.3.3.366) /0000-0000
Measurements
Total Active Power 195.36 W
Total Reactive Energy -44.55 var
Total Apparent Power 320.06 VA
Power Factor PF Total 0.520999026
Total Active Energy 1090 Wh
Reactive Energy Total -30 varh
Apparent Energy Total 510 VAh
Current (eff.) L1 0.4287 A
Current (eff.) L2 0.497 A
Current (eff.) L3 0.5002 A
Voltage (eff.) L1-N 231.84 V
Voltage (eff.) L2-N 231.81 V
Voltage (eff.) L3-N 231.79 V
Active Power L1 44.56 W
Active Power L2 72.02 W
Active Power L3 78.78 W
Reactive Power L1 -14.86 var
Reactive Power L2 -2.93 var
Reactive Power L3 -26.76 var
Apparent Power L1 94.31 VA
Apparent Power L2 113.44 VA
Apparent Power L3 112.31 VA
Frequency L1 50.019 Hz
Frequency L2 50.019 Hz
Frequency L3 50.009 Hz
cos phi L1 0.98
cos phi L2 0.99
cos phi L3 0.97
Power Factor PF L1 0.47
856
Power Factor PF L2 0.6
Power Factor PF L3 0.67
Quadrant L1 4
Quadrant L2 4
Quadrant L3 4
Average Value Current (eff.) L1 0.4213 A
Average Value Current (eff.) L2 0.4912 A
Average Value Current (eff.) L3 0.4937 A
Minimum Current (eff.) L1 0.4111 A
Minimum Current (eff.) L2 0.4775 A
Minimum Current (eff.) L3 0.4839 A
Maximum Current (eff.) L1 0.4287 A
Maximum Current (eff.) L2 0.5138 A
Maximum Current (eff.) L3 0.5071 A
Peak Value Current L1 1.3594 A
Average Value Voltage (eff.) L1-N 231.74 V
Average Value Voltage (eff.) L2-N 231.71 V
Average Value Voltage (eff.) L3-N 231.69 V
Minimum Voltage (eff.) L1-N 231.81 V
Minimum Voltage (eff.) L2-N 231.78 V
Minimum Voltage (eff.) L3-N 231.77 V
Maximum Voltage (eff.) L1-N 231.93 V
Maximum Voltage (eff.) L2-N 231.92 V
Maximum Voltage (eff.) L3-N 231.91 V
Peak Value Voltage L1-N 325.46 V
External Conductor Voltage L1-L2 0.29 V
External Conductor Voltage L3-L1 0.27 V
External Conductor Voltage L2-L3 0.29 V
Minimum Active Power L1 43.89 W
Minimum Active Power L2 67.75 W
Minimum Active Power L3 73.6 W
Maximum Active Power L1 47.94 W
Maximum Active Power L2 74.27 W
Maximum Active Power L3 80.58 W
Power Factor LF L1 -0.47
Power Factor LF L2 0.6
Power Factor LF L3 -0.67
Active Energy L1 590 Wh
Active Energy L2 430 Wh
Active Energy L3 70 Wh
Active Energy Supply L1 590 Wh
Active Energy Supply L2 430 Wh
Active Energy Supply L3 70 Wh
Active Energy Delivery L1 0 Wh
Active Energy Delivery L2 0 Wh
857
Active Energy Delivery L3 0 Wh
Reactive Energy L1 0 varh
Reactive Energy L2 -30 varh
Reactive Energy L3 0 varh
Reactive Energy Capacitive L1 0 varh
Reactive Energy Capacitive L2 30 varh
Reactive Energy Capacitive L3 0 varh
Reactive Energy Inductive L1 0 varh
Reactive Energy Inductive L2 0 varh
Reactive Energy Inductive L3 0 varh
Apparent Energy L1 210 VAh
Apparent Energy L2 200 VAh
Apparent Energy L3 100 VAh
Phase Angle U-I L1 350.99 °
Phase Angle U-I L2 358.52 °
Phase Angle U-I L3 346.21 °
Maximum Frequency L1 50.019 Hz
Maximum Frequency L2 50.019 Hz
Maximum Frequency L3 50.009 Hz
Minimum Frequency L1 50.009 Hz
Minimum Frequency L2 50.009 Hz
Minimum Frequency L3 50.009 Hz
Total Active Energy Supply 1090 Wh
Total Active Energy Delivery 0 Wh
Reactive Energy Inductive Total 0 varh
Reactive Energy Capacitive Total 30 varh
Errors / Warnings
Parameter Phase L1
Overvoltage threshold value 240 V
Overcurrent threshold value 1000 A
Interval observation : arithm. mean
calculation 60 s
Interval observation : peak value
measurement 10 Half-Wave(s)
Heed transformer ratio True
Automatic reset of the min./max.
values True
Transformer ratio 500
Undervoltage threshold 10 V
Interval - reset: min./max. values 3000 ms
Parameter Phase L2
Overvoltage threshold value 240 V
858
Overcurrent threshold value 1000 A
Interval observation : arithm. mean
calculation 60 s
Interval observation : peak value
measurement 10 Half-Wave(s)
Heed transformer ratio True
Automatic reset of the min./max.
values True
Transformer ratio 500
Undervoltage threshold 10 V
Interval - reset: min./max. values 5000 ms
Parameter Phase L3
Overvoltage threshold value 240 V
Overcurrent threshold value 1000 A
Interval observation : arithm. mean
calculation 60 s
Interval observation : peak value
measurement 10 Half-Wave(s)
Heed transformer ratio True
Automatic reset of the min./max.
values True
Transformer ratio 500
Undervoltage threshold 10 V
Interval - reset: min./max. values 5000 ms
859
10.1.2 CSV Data File „Measurement Recording“
The following table shows an example CSV data file generated in the view
„Measurement Recording“ with [Start]. In this example the variable „Voltage
(eff.) L1-N“ was selected shown as measuring series with 20 values.
I/O-Check- 0750-
WAGO 3 Phase Power 0494
Kontakttechnik Measurement /0000- Voltage
04.07.2013 06:48:13 GmbH & Co. KG (1.3.3.366) 0000 (eff.) L1-N V
04.07.2013 06:48:14 233.11
04.07.2013 06:48:15 233.12
04.07.2013 06:48:15 233.08
04.07.2013 06:48:16 233.14
04.07.2013 06:48:16 233.11
04.07.2013 06:48:17 233.14
04.07.2013 06:48:17 233.06
04.07.2013 06:48:18 233.1
04.07.2013 06:48:18 233.14
04.07.2013 06:48:19 233.1
04.07.2013 06:48:19 233.2
04.07.2013 06:48:20 233.19
04.07.2013 06:48:20 233.22
04.07.2013 06:48:21 233.19
04.07.2013 06:48:21 233.15
04.07.2013 06:48:22 233.06
04.07.2013 06:48:22 233.06
04.07.2013 06:48:23 233.04
04.07.2013 06:48:23 233.11
04.07.2013 06:48:24 233.12
860
Pos : 100 /Alle Serien (Allgemei ne M odul e)/Ü bersc hriften für all e Seri en/Anhang - Zubehör Wer ks einstellungen - Übersc hrift 2 @ 15\mod_1366373603819_21.doc x @ 117430 @ 2 @ 1
861
P28, P29 0x02FAF080 ≙ 5 000 A
P30, P31 0x02FAF080 ≙ 5 000 A
P34 0x0004 ≙ 60 s
P35 0x0004 ≙ 60 s
P36 0x0004 ≙ 60 s
P37 0x000A ≙ 2 s
P38 0x000A ≙ 2 s
P39 0x000A ≙ 2 s
P40 0x0000 ≙ 0
P41 0x0000 ≙ 0
P42 0x0000 ≙ 0
Pos : 102 /Dokumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
862
Pos : 103 /Serie 750 (WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/In Betri eb nehmen/Par ametrieren über R egister kommuni kati on/Registerbeleg ung und Parameterbel. 750-494 @ 15\mod_1364991593084_21.doc x @ 116384 @ 22 @ 1
863
Table 25: Register 5
Register 5 – Command interface response
Function Data type Access Factory setting
Command Interface Response UINT [R] 0x0000
High byte
Sequence number (Session ID)
Low byte
Response
Request A mirror image of the request command is created when the command is successfully
applied.
0xF0 Command is valid, but cannot be executed.
0xFD The session ID received by the master does not correspond to the last confirmed
session ID + 1.
0xFE The command received by the master is not implemented in the slave.
0xFF General internal error
864
1: Automatic deleting of minimum and maximum current, voltage and power values is
activated.
Bit 11: -Reserved-
Bit 12: User-defined scaling (current transformer ratio) phase L1
0: User-defined scaling is deactivated, the transformation ratio is 1:1 (factory setting).
1: User-defined scaling is active, the transformation ratio is 1: (divisor for the current
transformer ratio).
Bit 13: User-defined scaling (current transformer ratio) phase L2
0: User-defined scaling is deactivated, the transformation ratio is 1:1 (factory setting).
1: User-defined scaling is active, the transformation ratio is 1: (divisor for the current
transformer ratio).
Bit 14: User-defined scaling (current transformer ratio) phase L3
0: User-defined scaling is deactivated, the transformation ratio is 1:1 (factory setting).
1: User-defined scaling is active, the transformation ratio is 1: (divisor for the current
transformer ratio).
Bit 15: -Reserved-
865
Table 30: Register 38
Register 38 – Undervoltage threshold phase L3
Function Data type Access Factory setting
Undervoltage threshold phase L3,
UINT R/W 0 x 0000, 0 V
Resolution: 0.1 V
0: Checking of undervoltage threshold is deactivated.
≥1: Value for undervoltage threshold.
866
Table 34: Register 43
Register 43 – Observation interval, peak value measurement phase L1
Function Data type Access Factory setting
Observation interval, peak value measurement, UINT R/W 0 x 000 A
phase L1
0 … 5: -not permitted-
6 … 254: Number of half waves for measuring peak values.
≥255: -not permitted-
867
Table 38: Register 47
Register 47 – Error register for the parameter channel
Function Data type Access Factory setting
Error register for the parameter channel UINT [R] 0x0000
0: Calibration procedure, no error
1: Calibration procedure, division by zero
2: Calibration procedure "Gain" > 2
3: Calibration procedure, commande sequence not followed
4: Calibration procedure, calibration step not implemented
5: Calibration procedure, the "period" register in the microcontroller has never been
read.
≥6: -not permitted-
868
Table 44: Register 53
Register 53 – Container 6
Function Data type Access Factory setting
Container 6, UINT R/W 0x0000
for energy preset and calibration
869
Table 50: Parameter 13
Parameter 13 – Undervoltage threshold phase L2
Function Data type Access Factory setting
-Corresponds to register 37. (See section above.)
870
Table 58: Parameter 22
Parameter 22 – Storing interval for energy values
Function Data type Access Factory setting
-Corresponds to register 46. (See section above.)
871
Table 64: Parameter 30 and 31
Parameter 30 und 31 – Overcurrent threshold phase L3
Function Data type Access Factory setting
Overcurrent threshold phase L3, UINT R/W 0x02FAF080
Resolution: 0.1 mA (5 000 A)
0: Overcurrent is not checked.
≥1: Overcurrent threshold (value)
872
Table 67: Parameter 36
Parameter 36 – Calculation interval arithmetic mean values phase L3
Function Data type Access Factory setting
Calculation interval arithmetic mean values
UINT R/W 0x0004
phase L3
0: 5s
1: 10 s
2: 15 s
3: 30 s
4: 60 s
5: 300 s
6: 480 s
7: 600 s
8: 900 s
≥9: -reserved-
873
Table 71: Parameter 40
Parameter 40 – Factor NOLOAD-threshold active energy
Function Data type Access Factory setting
Factor NOLOAD-threshold active energy UINT R/W 0x0000 (disabled)
0: The NOLOAD-threshold is disabled.
1 … 19: -reserved-
20 … 24000: Factor of the NOLOAD-threshold for calculating
PTHRESHOLD = (1 / factor) x PNOMINAL
PNOMINAL = 277V x 1A = 277W for the 1A-variants resp.
277V x 5A = 1385W for the 5A-variants
≥24001: -reserved-
874
Pos : 104.1 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine M odul e)/Ei ns atz i n Ex-Bereic hen/Ei nsatz i n explosi onsg efähr deten Ber eic hen - Ü bers chrift 1 @ 3\mod_1224075191281_21.doc x @ 24084 @ 1 @ 1
875
Pos : 104.4 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ei ns atz i n Ex-Bereic hen/Beispi elhafter Aufbau der Kennz eichnung - Ü berschrift 2 @ 3\mod_1224157499140_21.doc x @ 24182 @ 2 @ 1
Figure 35: Side Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According to ATEX and IECEx
Figure 36: Text Detail – Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According to ATEX and
IECEx.
876
Table 74: Description of Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According to ATEX and
IECEx
Printing on Text Description
TÜV 07 ATEX 554086 X Approving authority and certificate numbers
IECEx TUN 09.0001 X
Dust
II Equipment group: All except mining
3D Category 3 (Zone 22)
Ex Explosion protection mark
tc Dc Type of protection and equipment protection
level (EPL):protection by enclosure
IIIC Explosion group of dust
T 135°C Max. surface temperature of the enclosure
(without a dust layer)
Mining
I Equipment group: Mining
M2 Category: High level of protection
Ex Explosion protection mark
d Mb Type of protection and equipment protection
level (EPL): Flameproof enclosure
I Explosion group for electrical equipment for
mines susceptible to firedamp
Gases
II Equipment group: All except mining
3G Category 3 (Zone 2)
Ex Explosion protection mark
nA Gc Type of protection and equipment protection
level (EPL): Non-sparking equipment
nC Gc Type of protection and equipment protection
level (EPL): Sparking apparatus with protected
contacts. A device which is so constructed that
the external atmosphere cannot gain access to the
interior
IIC Explosion group of gas and vapours
T4 Temperature class: Max. surface temperature
135°C
Pos : 104.7 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
877
Pos : 104.8 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Ei ns atz i n Ex-Bereic hen/Beispi elbedruc kung der Ex-i- und IEC- Ex-i-zugel ass enen Bus kl emmen gemäß CEN ELEC und IEC_2013 @ 14\mod_1360569320118_21.doc x @ 111298 @ @ 1
Figure 37: Side Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Modules According to ATEX and
IECEx.
Figure 38: Text Detail – Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Modules According to ATEX
and IECEx.
878
Table 75: Description of Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Modules According to ATEX and
IECEx
Inscription Text Description
TÜV 07 ATEX 554086 X Approving authority and certificate numbers
IECEx TUN 09.0001X
879
Table 75: Description of Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Modules According to ATEX and
IECEx
Gases
II Equipment group: All except mining
3(1)G Category 3 (Zone 2) equipment containing a safety
device for a category 1 (Zone 0) equipment
3(2)G Category 3 (Zone 2) equipment containing a safety
device for a category 2 (Zone 1) equipment
Ex Explosion protection mark
nA Gc Type of protection and equipment protection level
(EPL): Non-sparking equipment
[ia Ga] Type of protection and equipment protection level
(EPL): associated apparatus with intrinsic safety
circuits for use in Zone 0
[ia Gb] Type of protection and equipment protection level
(EPL): associated apparatus with intrinsic safety
circuits for use in Zone 1
IIC Explosion group of gas and vapours
T4 Temperature class: Max. surface temperature 135°C
Pos : 104.9 /D okumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
880
Pos : 104.10 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Einsatz in Ex- Ber eichen/Kennzeic hnung für Ameri ka gemäß N EC 500 - Ü berschrift 3 @ 3\mod_1224158423187_21.doc x @ 24188 @ 3 @ 1
Figure 39: Side Marking Example for I/O Modules According to NEC 500
Figure 40: Text Detail – Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According to NEC 500
Table 76: Description of Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According to NEC 500
Printing on Text Description
CL I Explosion protection group (condition of use
category)
DIV 2 Area of application
Grp. ABCD Explosion group (gas group)
Op temp code T4 Temperature class
881
Pos : 104.13 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine M odule)/Ei nsatz i n Ex- Bereic hen/Errichtungsbesti mmungen - Übersc hrift 2 @ 3\mod_1232453624234_21.doc x @ 26370 @ 2 @ 1
For the installation and operation of electrical equipment in hazardous areas, the
valid national and international rules and regulations which are applicable at the
installation location must be carefully followed.
Pos : 104.15 /D okumentati on allgemein/Gliederungsel emente/---Seitenwechsel--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
882
Pos : 104.16 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Einsatz in Ex- Ber eichen/Bes ondere Bedingungen für den sicheren Ex-Betrieb g em. ATEX-Z ertifi kat TÜ V 07 AT EX 554086_X_2013_2 @ 15\mod_1368620071975_21.doc x @ 119778 @ 3 @ 1
883
Pos : 104.18 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Einsatz in Ex- Ber eichen/Bes ondere Bedingungen für den sicheren Ex-Betrieb g em. ATEX-Z ertifi kat TÜ V 12 AT EX 106032x_2013_2 @ 15\mod_1368620479454_21.doc x @ 119782 @ 3 @ 1
884
Pos : 104.20 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Einsatz in Ex- Ber eichen/Bes ondere Bedingungen für den sicheren Ex-Betrieb g em. IEC- Ex-Zertifi kat TUN 09.0001 X_2013_2 @ 15\mod_1368620660911_21.doc x @ 119786 @ 3 @ 1
885
Pos : 104.22 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Einsatz in Ex- Ber eichen/Bes ondere Bedingungen für den sicheren Ex-Betrieb g em. IEC- Ex-Zertifi kat TUN 12.0039 X_2013_2 @ 15\mod_1368620821493_21.doc x @ 119790 @ 3 @ 1
886
Pos : 104.24 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Einsatz in Ex- Ber eichen/Errichtungs besti mmungen ANSI ISA 12.12.01_2013_2 @ 15\mod_1368620942842_21.doc x @ 119794 @ 3 @ 1
Pos : 104.28 /Seri e 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM)/Einsatz in Ex- Ber eichen/Infor mation: Z ertifizi erungsnac hweis @ 7\mod_1274279547729_21.doc x @ 56649 @ @ 1
Additional Information
Proof of certification is available on request.
Also take note of the information given on the operating and assembly
instructions.
The manual, containing these special conditions for safe use, must be readily
available to the user.
=== Ende der Liste für T extmar ke Inhalt_mitte ===
887
Pos : 106 /Dokumentati on allgemei n/Verz eichniss e/Abbildungsverz eichnis - Ü berschrift oG und Verzeic hnis @ 3\mod_1219222916765_21.doc x @ 21080 @ @ 1
List of Figures
Figure 1: View ....................................................................................................... 16
Figure 2: Data Contacts ......................................................................................... 17
Figure 3: CAGE CLAMP® Connectors................................................................. 18
Figure 4: Display Elements ................................................................................... 19
Figure 5: Schematic Diagram ................................................................................ 20
Figure 6: RMS Value Calculation (Example, Not to Scale) ................................. 31
Figure 7: Allocation of Active and Reactive Energy in the 4 Quadrants .............. 33
Figure 8: 4-Quadrant Display for Active and Reactive Power ............................. 35
Figure 9: Input Overdrive (Clipping) .................................................................... 38
Figure 10: Insert I/O Module (Example) ............................................................... 67
Figure 11: Snap the I/O Module into Place (Example) ......................................... 67
Figure 12: Removing the I/O Module (Example) ................................................. 68
Figure 13: Connecting a Conductor to a CAGE CLAMP® ................................... 69
Figure 14: Voltage Measurement .......................................................................... 70
Figure 15: Current Measurement on a Motor ........................................................ 71
Figure 16: Power Measurement on a Machine ...................................................... 75
Figure 17: Power Measurement on Two Motors Regulated by Frequency
Converters .................................................................................................... 76
Figure 18: WAGO-I/O-CHECK User Interface, Bus Node With I/O Module 750-
494................................................................................................................ 79
Figure 19: „3-Phase Power Measurement“ Dialog ............................................... 80
Figure 20: „Settings“ Dialog ................................................................................. 81
Figure 21: „Application“ Tab ................................................................................ 82
Figure 22: „Phase L1“ Tab .................................................................................... 83
Figure 23: „I/O Module“ Tab ................................................................................ 85
Figure 24: “Energy” Tab ....................................................................................... 86
Figure 25: “Factory Settings” Tab......................................................................... 87
Figure 26: Measured Values, Overview ................................................................ 89
Figure 27: Measured Values, Phases ..................................................................... 90
Figure 28: Measured Values, Currents and Voltages ............................................ 91
Figure 29: Measured Values, Power ..................................................................... 92
Figure 30: Measured Values, Energies.................................................................. 93
Figure 31: Measured Values, DC .......................................................................... 94
Figure 32: Measured Values, Harmonics Chart .................................................... 95
Figure 33: Measured Values, Harmonics Table .................................................... 96
Figure 34: Measured Values, Recording ............................................................... 97
Figure 35: Side Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According to
ATEX and IECEx ...................................................................................... 119
Figure 36: Text Detail – Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According
to ATEX and IECEx. ................................................................................. 119
Figure 37: Side Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Modules According to
ATEX and IECEx. ..................................................................................... 121
Figure 38: Text Detail – Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Modules
According to ATEX and IECEx. ............................................................... 121
Figure 39: Side Marking Example for I/O Modules According to NEC 500 ..... 124
Figure 40: Text Detail – Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According
to NEC 500 ................................................................................................ 124
888
Pos : 107 /Dokumentati on allgemei n/Gli ederungsel emente/---Seitenwec hs el--- @ 3\mod_1221108045078_0.doc x @ 21810 @ @ 1
Pos : 108 /Dokumentati on allgemei n/Verz eichniss e/T abellenverzeic hnis - Ü bers chrift oG und Verzeic hnis @ 3\mod_1219222958703_21.doc x @ 21084 @ @ 1
List of Tables
Table 1: Variants ..................................................................................................... 6
Table 2: Revision History........................................................................................ 7
Table 3: Number Notation ..................................................................................... 10
Table 4: Font Conventions .................................................................................... 10
Table 5: Legend for Figure “View” ...................................................................... 16
Table 6: Legend for Figure “CAGE CLAMP® Connectors” ................................ 18
Table 7: Legend for Figure “Display Elements” ................................................... 19
Table 8: Technical Data ‒ Dimensions and Weight .............................................. 22
Table 9: Technical Data ‒ Voltage Supply ........................................................... 22
Table 10: Technical Data ‒ Measuring Inputs ...................................................... 22
Table 11: Technical Data ‒ Measured Values ....................................................... 23
Table 12: Technical Data ‒ Internal Bus Communication .................................... 24
Table 13: Technical Data – Data Contacts ............................................................ 24
Table 14: Technical Data – Field Wiring .............................................................. 24
Table 15: Technical Data – Climatic Environmental Conditions ......................... 25
Table 16: AC Measuring Errors ............................................................................ 37
Table 17: Measured Values of Collection 007 in the Process Image (PI) ............ 54
Table 18: Measured Values of Collection 009 in the Process Image (PI) ............ 55
Table 19: Measured Values of Collection 020 in the Process Image (PI) ............ 59
Table 20: Measured Values of Collection 020 in the Process Image (PI) ............ 60
Table 21: Measured Values of Collection 020 in the Process Image (PI) ............ 61
Table 22: Diagnostics ............................................................................................ 98
Table 23: Factory Settings ................................................................................... 104
Table 24: Register 4 ............................................................................................ 106
Table 25: Register 5 ............................................................................................ 107
Table 26: Register 32 .......................................................................................... 107
Table 27: Register 35 .......................................................................................... 108
Table 28: Register 36 .......................................................................................... 108
Table 29: Register 37 .......................................................................................... 108
Table 30: Register 38 .......................................................................................... 109
Table 31: Register 39 .......................................................................................... 109
Table 32: Register 40 .......................................................................................... 109
Table 33: Register 41 .......................................................................................... 109
Table 34: Register 43 .......................................................................................... 110
Table 35: Register 44 .......................................................................................... 110
Table 36: Register 45 .......................................................................................... 110
Table 37: Register 46 .......................................................................................... 110
Table 38: Register 47 .......................................................................................... 111
Table 39: Register 48 .......................................................................................... 111
Table 40: Register 49 .......................................................................................... 111
Table 41: Register 50 .......................................................................................... 111
Table 42: Register 51 .......................................................................................... 111
Table 43: Register 52 .......................................................................................... 111
Table 44: Register 53 .......................................................................................... 112
Table 45: Register 54 .......................................................................................... 112
Table 46: Register 55 .......................................................................................... 112
Table 47: Parameter 10........................................................................................ 112
889
Table 48: Parameter 11........................................................................................ 112
Table 49: Parameter 12........................................................................................ 112
Table 50: Parameter 13........................................................................................ 113
Table 51: Parameter 14........................................................................................ 113
Table 52: Parameter 15........................................................................................ 113
Table 53: Parameter 16........................................................................................ 113
Table 54: Parameter 17........................................................................................ 113
Table 55: Parameter 19........................................................................................ 113
Table 56: Parameter 20........................................................................................ 113
Table 57: Parameter 21........................................................................................ 113
Table 58: Parameter 22........................................................................................ 114
Table 59: Parameter 23........................................................................................ 114
Table 60: Parameter 24........................................................................................ 114
Table 61: Parameter 25........................................................................................ 114
Table 62: Parameter 26 and 27 ............................................................................ 114
Table 63: Parameter 28 and 29 ............................................................................ 114
Table 64: Parameter 30 and 31 ............................................................................ 115
Table 65: Parameter 34........................................................................................ 115
Table 66: Parameter 35........................................................................................ 115
Table 67: Parameter 36........................................................................................ 116
Table 68: Parameter 37........................................................................................ 116
Table 69: Parameter 38........................................................................................ 116
Table 70: Parameter 39........................................................................................ 116
Table 71: Parameter 40........................................................................................ 117
Table 72: Parameter 41........................................................................................ 117
Table 73: Parameter 42........................................................................................ 117
Table 74: Description of Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According
to ATEX and IECEx .................................................................................. 120
Table 75: Description of Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Modules
According to ATEX and IECEx ................................................................ 122
Table 76: Description of Marking Example for Approved I/O Modules According
to NEC 500 ................................................................................................ 124
=== Ende der Liste für T extmar ke Verzeic hnis_hi nten ===
890
Pos : 110 /Dokumentati on allgemei n/Ei nband/Ei nband Handbuc h - Leers eite für durc h 2 teilbare Seitenz ahl (Standarddruc k) @ 3\mod_1219230851078_0.doc x @ 21123 @ @ 1
Pos : 111 /Dokumentati on allgemei n/Ei nband/Ei nband Handbuc h - R üc ks eite 2015 @ 9\mod_1285229376516_21.doc x @ 64944 @ @ 1
891
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
Pos : 2 /D okumentati on allgemein/Ei nband/Ei nband H andbuch - Fronts eite 2015 - mit Doc Variabl en (Standar d) @ 9\mod_1285229289866_0.doc x @ 64941 @ @ 1
Manual
750-600(/xxx-xxx)
End Module
Internal Bus Termination
Version 1.3.0
Pos : 3 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine M odul e)/Hinweise z ur Dokumentation/Impres sum für Standardhandbüc her - allg. Angaben, Ansc hriften, Tel efonnummer n und E-Mail-Adres sen @ 3\mod_1219151118203_21.doc x @ 21060 @ @ 1
892
© 2015 by WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG
All rights reserved.
Hansastraße 27
D-32423 Minden
E-Mail: info@wago.com
Web: http://www.wago.com
Technical Support
E-Mail: support@wago.com
Every conceivable measure has been taken to ensure the accuracy and
completeness of this documentation. However, as errors can never be fully
excluded, we always appreciate any information or suggestions for improving the
documentation.
E-Mail: documentation@wago.com
We wish to point out that the software and hardware terms as well as the
trademarks of companies used and/or mentioned in the present manual are
generally protected by trademark or patent.
=== Ende der Liste für T extmar ke Ei nband_vorne ===
893
Pos : 5 /D okumentati on allgemein/Verzeic hnisse/Inhalts verz eichnis - Ü berschrift oG und Verzei chnis @ 3\mod_1219151230875_21.doc x @ 21063 @ @ 1
Table of Contents
1 Notes about this Documentation ................................................................. 5
1.1 Validity of this Documentation ................................................................. 5
1.2 Copyright................................................................................................... 5
1.3 Symbols ..................................................................................................... 6
1.4 Number Notation ....................................................................................... 8
1.5 Font Conventions ...................................................................................... 8
2 Important Notes ........................................................................................... 9
2.1 Legal Bases ............................................................................................... 9
2.1.1 Subject to Changes ............................................................................... 9
2.1.2 Personnel Qualifications ....................................................................... 9
2.1.3 Use of the WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 in Compliance with Underlying
Provisions ............................................................................................. 9
2.1.4 Technical Condition of Specified Devices ......................................... 10
2.2 Safety Advice (Precautions) .................................................................... 11
3 Device Description ..................................................................................... 13
3.1 View ........................................................................................................ 13
3.2 Connectors............................................................................................... 14
3.2.1 Data Contacts/Internal Bus ................................................................. 14
3.2.2 Power Jumper Contacts/Field Supply ................................................ 14
3.2.3 CAGE CLAMP® Connectors ............................................................. 14
3.3 Display Elements .................................................................................... 15
3.4 Operating Elements ................................................................................. 15
3.5 Technical Data ........................................................................................ 16
3.5.1 Device ................................................................................................. 16
3.5.2 Connection Type ................................................................................ 16
3.5.3 Climatic Environmental Conditions ................................................... 16
3.6 Approvals ................................................................................................ 17
3.7 Standards and Guidelines ........................................................................ 19
4 Mounting..................................................................................................... 20
4.1 Mounting Sequence ................................................................................. 20
4.2 Inserting and Removing Devices ............................................................ 21
4.2.1 Inserting the I/O Module .................................................................... 21
4.2.2 Removing the I/O Module .................................................................. 22
5 Use in Hazardous Environments .............................................................. 23
5.1 Marking Configuration Examples ........................................................... 24
5.1.1 Marking for Europe According to ATEX and IEC-Ex ...................... 24
5.1.2 Marking for America According to NEC 500 .................................... 29
5.2 Installation Regulations ........................................................................... 30
5.2.1 Special Conditions for Safe Use (ATEX Certificate TÜV 07 ATEX
554086 X) ........................................................................................... 31
5.2.2 Special Conditions for Safe Use (ATEX Certificate TÜV 12 ATEX
106032 X) ........................................................................................... 32
5.2.3 Special Conditions for Safe Use (IEC-Ex Certificate TUN 09.0001 X)33
5.2.4 Special Conditions for Safe Use (IEC-Ex Certificate IECEx TUN
12.0039 X) .......................................................................................... 34
894
5.2.5 Special Conditions for Safe Use According to ANSI/ISA 12.12.01 .. 35
List of Figures ...................................................................................................... 36
List of Tables ........................................................................................................ 37
895
Pos : 7 /Alle Serien (Allgemeine M odul e)/Übersc hriften für all e Serien/Hi nweis e zur D okumentati on/Hinweise z u dies er D okumentation - Ü berschrift 1 @ 4\mod_1237987661750_21.doc x @ 29029 @ 1 @ 1
This documentation is only applicable to the I/O module 750-600 (End Module)
and the variants listed in the table below.
Pos : 11 /Serie 750 ( WAGO-I/O-SYST EM)/Hi nweis e z ur D okumentati on/Gültigkeits bereic h/Variantenlisten/Variantenliste - 750- xxx - Standar dversion und Vari ante /025-000 (er weiterter T emper aturbereic h) @ 9\mod_1281521920414_21.doc x @ 63093 @ @ 1
Table 1: Variants
Item Number/Variant Designation
750-600 End Module
750-600/025-000 End Module/T
Pos : 12 /All e Seri en (Allgemei ne Module)/Hi nweis e zur D okumentati on/Hinweise/Hinweis: Gültig keit der Angaben für aufg elistete Varianten @ 9\mod_1281520778141_21.doc x @ 63085 @ @ 1
The I/O module 750-600 shall only be installed and operated according to the
instructions in this manual and in the manual for the used fieldbus
coupler/controller.
1.2 Copyright
This Manual, including all figures and illustrations, is copyright-protected. Any
further use of this Manual by third parties that violate pertinent copyright